JP2022010213A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide games easy for a player to understand.

SOLUTION: If a notification by notification means to be performed on the basis of a start of power supply by power supply means capable of supplying power to a game machine is finished, a prescribed presentation is to be performed by presentation performance means. Further, sound corresponding to sound data reproduced by reproduction means on the basis of a start of power supply is to be outputted by sound output means. As a reproduction start position of the sound data to be reproduced by the reproduction means, a reproduction start position corresponding to a notification mode by the notification means is set by reproduction start position setting means. In this way, it is possible to provide games easy for a player to understand.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-005505

However, it has been required to make the game situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is easy for a player to understand.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is determined based on a power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine and the start of supply of the power by the power supply means. The notification means capable of executing the notification of the above, the effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the power supply means to start the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing predetermined audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position of the voice data reproduced by the means, a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the reproduction start position setting means reproduces the reproduction position at the end of the voice data in accordance with the end timing of the notification. It sets the start position.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 has the execution condition of the predetermined effect based on the start of supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The reproduction means includes an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition is satisfied, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. be.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a predetermined notification can be executed based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. Based on the notification means, the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the start of power supply by the power supply means. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing a predetermined audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting an audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and is reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position of the voice data, a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided.

This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the reproduction start position setting means reproduces the reproduction position at the end of the audio data in accordance with the end timing of the notification. The reproduction start position is set so as to be performed.

This has the effect that the voice can be output more preferably.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the voice can be output more preferably.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the predetermined power supply means is started to supply the power. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the effect is satisfied, and the reproduction means is based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. It reproduces data.

This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is sectional drawing of the window part movable unit in XX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member showing the meshing state of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a top view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base member. It is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. (A) to (c) are sectional views of a light guide member, a plate-shaped displacement member, and a hollow member in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of the 2nd operation unit. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotational displacement of a large receiving part schematically. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the LXXII-LXXII line of FIG. 58. (A) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the 2nd operation unit of 5th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in line XCVIII-XCVIII of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a specific winning opening unit and a driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a sectional view of the distribution unit in the line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a sectional view of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in the 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit in the eighth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back surface base and the displacement member in tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in the eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit in the CXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144 (a). FIG. 143 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 143. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 144. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 151 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 151 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 154 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 155, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 155. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 143 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 143. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 196 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 196 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 202 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 202 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 199, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 203 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. Is. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 211 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 213 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 214 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 215 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 215 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 215 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 231 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 232 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a binding movable member and a harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and a harness. It is a schematic diagram of the back surface schematically shown, and (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 233 (c). (A) and (b) are the top schematic views of the front frame, the inner frame, the binding movable member and the harness which schematically show the binding movable member and the harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 249 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 252 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 261 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 261 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 261 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 261 (a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of the above. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 264 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 283 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 284 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 290. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in eleventh embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 340 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 340 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 340 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 343 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 343 (a), and FIG. 343 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing four reserved balls set during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode in which the character J0 appeared from the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (b) is further reserved from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when the number of balls increased and exceeded the recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram in which character J0 in the display area C indicates an optimum number of reserved balls according to a state. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing a change to a reserved ball during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode when the character J2 is displayed in the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C is changed when an over prize is won. It is a figure which showed. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which a player is allowed to store up to 6 reserved balls during reach, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the number of reserved balls is stored up to 6 and the symbol arrangement is changed. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a lucky display of a previous jackpot hold, and (b) shows a display mode when a player presses a button after the number of reserved balls has been accumulated up to six. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect during long opening, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of the long opening prize. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary hit in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal use which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table for time saving which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the winning command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold effect mode selection table in the first control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A mode holding lid range selection table in the 1st control example, (d) is the notice B mode holding lid range in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the holding lid range selection table during reach effect in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows the lucky hold command table in the 1st control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the reserved character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal balloon selection table in the first control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice B balloon selection table in the first control example. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a balloon table during reach effect in the first control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect lottery table during reach in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky display determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding hold effect setting process during reach executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding lid setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold character setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term winning determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term prize management process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold hold effect management process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing the holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding character display processing. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special symbol variation and the continuous production in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the 2nd control example. (A) is a display mode showing a display screen during continuous production in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing a display screen during special production in the second control example. This is a display mode showing a background change during continuous production in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving middle processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect return process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect return process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen of the first rotation after the power is turned on in the fourth control example. .. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the volume table in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial volume setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of turning on the power in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a retry operation in a tilting device. It is a timing chart when the touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection B table in the fifth control example. , (C) are schematic views schematically showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry process during touch input executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting device control process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during operation effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect backtracking operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a variation of the jackpot A in the reserved ball and showing the display mode during the variation of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the reserved ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 483 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one was digested and became a jackpot A. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which one more reserved ball is digested from the state of FIG. 483 (b) during super time, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the reserved ball is shown in FIG. 484 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one more digested from the state of) and became a big hit by this fluctuation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during probabilistic change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a jackpot is started, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of an effect of the first jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram showing that the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 487 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of notifying a player that a probability change was given. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends and the probability variation mode is entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol switching process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning ball processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a sixth control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is the flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the game state setting process to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 6th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when the long opening is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a display mode in the case of the long opening effect in the seventh control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the long opening effect regulation in the 7th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening-related processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the display screen and the flow of BGM at the time of power-off in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the power is turned on, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return variation after the initial setting is completed. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing during the special figure change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change of the third symbol, and (b) is the next figure after the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of a variable screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the fluctuation state of the 3rd symbol in the 8th control example, the validity period of a touch sensor, and the operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed, and (b) shows an example of a display mode of the first variation after the eight hold effects are executed. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a new prize is awarded after the eight-piece hold effect is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed and a new prize is awarded. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st variation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end of 8 hold productions. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during a touch effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the vibe pattern data in the eighth control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an eight-held lottery table in the eighth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 8th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the 8 production scenario selection table in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold number control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the left-right button input process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode identification process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed 8 display setting processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background notice selection table in the 9th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the sea mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the mountain mode. be. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a background change process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the crack effect in 9th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the cracking effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the cracking effect. be. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the cracking effect, and (b) is the display mode when the button is not operated during the first period of the cracking effect. It is a figure which showed an example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the cracking effect selection table in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the cracking effect end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the tenth control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation effect pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the eleventh control example, and (b) is the operation effect pattern 2 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the eleventh control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot medium effect screen in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the PUSH effect screen during the jackpot in the eleventh control example. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the success of the PUSH effect in the jackpot in the eleventh control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending effect in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the success of the ending effect in the eleventh control example. .. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special prize middle operation effect selection table in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic view of the contents of the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario C table in the eleventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the ending scenario table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the processing during the ending executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 11th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is the last effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is no last effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. 12 is a timing chart showing a bonus operation, a liquid crystal display, and a flow of pseudo voice when the bonus control device is driven during the round effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final round process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the twelfth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. (A) and (b) are the display contents of the BGM and the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example when the power is cut off while the special figure is changing and the special figure change is restarted when the power is turned on. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the silhouette notice selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when three identical numbers are vertically aligned in the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the background mode was promoted by. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the mode promotion effect selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the hit table which constitutes the mode promotion effect selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the out-of-order table constituting the mode promotion effect selection table in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the defined contents of the round number display data table in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode promotion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing content acquisition process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 14th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 4
With reference to 4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply "pachinko machine").
An embodiment when applied to 10) will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Front view to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in (see) or changing the effect content of the super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 3 with built-in light emitting means such as LEDs on the periphery of the window 14c
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, a front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1).
(See) In the upper left portion, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball lending is performed according to the operation. Will be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through. The gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62, similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged, which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61, 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not the winning opening 140 has been won. specifically,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 14
The time for opening the wing member 945 (electric accessory) associated with 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the wing member 945 is in the open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the wing member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the wing member is hit once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the 945 is opened more than during normal times. also,
During the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least one of the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit. May be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 and the number of times for opening the wing member 945 for each hit are not performed, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol. May be changed so as to be higher than normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 (starting winning).
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is used only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened).

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the feather member 945 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the ball to the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened for each hit. If the player is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. Wing member 945 against
The opening time and the number of opening times may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is done in (see Fig. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first.
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same, but the balls are paid out to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a prize paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

A wing member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. The wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), And the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a feather member as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the wing member attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.
A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to pass the ball through the second winning opening 14.
Since the wing member 945 attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the wing member, and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140. It will be advantageous to the person.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, the first winning opening 6
When the jackpot lottery conducted due to winning in 4 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot,
After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each substrate.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and it is possible to remove the sealing sticker in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 205
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display device 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as the axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving a wing member is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
It is connected to 11, but not to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
The display of 1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motor, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, a power failure (power failure) (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 on the determination that the power is cut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are NMI.
The interrupt process (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 6
3. First winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, pair of left and right window movable units 150, and balls discharged from the game area can flow down. The ball flow unit 290 and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of plywood on which veneer plates are overlapped, and the base plate is prevented from allowing the player to see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. It is formed so as to be shieldable at 60.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 is drilled for passing electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67, in addition to a through hole drilled so that the variable display device unit 80 can be disposed at a substantially central position. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through holes 60a to be provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b recessed so as to be concavely fitted to the front end portion of the operating unit 300. The lower left and right sides are provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light transmission holes 60c formed in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position where the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side can pass through, and from the viewpoint of light emission effect, the effect of the game board 13 is improved. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, a flow bottom component member 91 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is 91.
, 92 are arranged, and the outer side portion 94 of the flow bottom component members 91 and 92 thereof is the light passage hole 60c.
91, 92 of the flow bottom constituent members are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in the manner of lining.

The left and right flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 have a covering plate FB on the front side of the right flow bottom constituent member 92.
Since it is configured in a substantially symmetrical shape except that is disposed of, the flow bottom component member 91 on the left side
Will be described in detail, and the description of the flow bottom component member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the flow bottom component member 91, a plate-shaped portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60 is formed in a strip-shaped portion having a width equivalent to that of the inner rail 61. Is partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, the outer portion 94 which is the outer portion (front view outer portion) of the game area partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, and the game partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93. It includes an inner portion 95 which is an inner portion (inner portion in front view) of the region.

As described above, the outer portion 94 is outside the gaming area, and is therefore configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consider the influence on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

Further, as a result of designing the outer portion 94 thinly, even if the wall thickness of the inner portion 95 becomes thin, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95, so that the rigidity of the base plate 60 is increased. It is possible to suppress the displacement (deformation in the thickness direction) of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction by utilizing the above. Further, by designing the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to have a thin wall thickness, it is possible to sufficiently secure the front-rear width of the game area.

In this way, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the function required for the inner portion 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. , It can be easily made visible to the player through the outer portion 94.

In the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the back surface side through the wall thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) as in the present embodiment and arranging the light emitting means on the back surface side thereof, the base plate 60 is composed of a wooden plate member while the base plate 60 is formed. The brightness visually recognizable through the can be easily changed.

For example, when forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized so as to be continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions in a front view, it is arranged on an illuminated substrate 777 arranged on the back side of the outer portion 94. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 with a plurality of types and changing the brightness of the outer portion 94, the appearance of the same decorative pattern can be changed with a plurality of types.

Further, for example, a decorative member that changes a visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

The mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode is not limited at all. For example, a member typified by an illumination plate may be used, which is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle at which light is applied. Further, for example, a member designed to change the visually recognized pattern by changing the emission color may be used on the premise that the pattern is drawn in a plurality of colors and a plurality of colors of the emitted light are prepared. ..

The inner portion 95 is arranged inside the gaming area as described above. The inner part 95 is displaced (
If it is deformed), it may affect the ball flowing down the game area, but in the present embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95 (light). (Because the transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side with respect to the band-shaped part 93 when viewed from the front)
The rigidity of the base plate 60 can be used to prevent displacement (deformation) of the inner portion 95.
This makes it possible to stabilize the flow of the sphere.

A general winning opening 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95, the general winning opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow bottom component member 91 is arranged on the front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed by fixing it from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window portion movable unit 150 is arranged at the left and right upper corners of the center frame 86. Are arranged.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 7, the lower part of the game board 13 is not shown, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and shown in a front perspective.

The window movable unit 150 is rotatable and displaceable, and is disposed of a displacement member 151 that is visible to the player in the window portion inside the center frame 86 and a displacement member 151 on the back surface side of the displacement member 151. It is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force for driving 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape in the anteroposterior direction, and is arranged at both tip portions of a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end portion configured near a bent portion and the bifurcated portion 152, and the back surface side is opened. It is provided with a tip portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) and an overhanging portion 154 protruding in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip portion 153 is fastened to an effect portion 153a formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side and arranged so that the player can see it, and to the open portion side of the effect portion 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped portion 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped portion and has a shape in which the opposite side of the effect portion 153a is narrower than that of the effect portion 153a side.

The effect portion 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner surface thereof, and can diffuse the light emitted from the back surface side to the inside of the open portion, so that the light actually emitted is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated with light, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a visually as if the entire effect unit 153a is shining (pale).

The overhanging portion 154 is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a projecting from the center frame 86 side in a displaceable range in both directions in the rotational direction. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable at an angle (an angle of less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the overhanging portion 154.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 arranged at a position where it can contact the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal having one end (front end) connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to each other. (In this embodiment, brass) transmission shaft rod portion 162 and its transmission shaft rod portion 162
Driven member 163 connected to the other end (rear end) of the above non-rotatably, and transmission shaft rod portion 162.
A known E-ring 164 that is fitted to both ends of the illumination from the radial direction, a support case 170 that is configured so that the transmission shaft rod portion 162 can be pivotally supported, and the entire support case 170 is arranged inside the support case 170. It is provided with an illuminated substrate 180 to be mounted.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a columnar member having a perfect circular outer shape in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the middle abdomen, and is cut from a predetermined radial direction at the tips on both sides to form a plane on both sides. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. The both end portions are fitted with the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, whereby the contact member 161 and the transmission shaft rod portion 16 are fitted.
2 and the driven member 163 are connected so as to be relatively non-rotatable (integrally).

The contact member 161 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 161a through which an insertion hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. ,
The arm portion 161 extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a U-shaped front view.
With c.

The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 163a through which the inserted hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. , The arm portion 1 extending straight toward the outside of the base end portion 161a and having a substantially flat plate shape.
It is equipped with 63c.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB1 is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engaging with the elastic claw 163d.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-back slide of the metal plate member MB1 are arranged at both ends of the arm portion 163c in the radial direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. It is formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pushed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is placed on the back side wall of the rail portion. By hitting, the slide is restricted, and at that position, the elastic claw 163d is released from being pushed down by the metal plate member MB1 (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is made of metal. Engage so as to restrict the withdrawal of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied up with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 includes a rear member 170B, a middle member 170M having a support hole 174 arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B and into which a transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a middle member 17 thereof.
It is provided with a front member 170F which is arranged on the front side of 0M and has a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) plate-shaped members are laminated and fastened to the front and back. ing.

The illuminated substrate 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape in front view according to the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect. The light emitting means 181 is provided with a connector 182 arranged as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 bored in the illuminated substrate 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 is a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 and a weak light emitting means arranged outside the light transmitting hole 177 (arranged facing the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F) in a front view. It is provided with 181b.

The through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction of inclination. This will result in
It is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is formed in a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is tilted (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding column portion 172 is not tilted (the front-back direction), so that it is compared with the case of assembling in the same direction. Assembling defects (not assembled or loosened) are likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined. The margin of the through hole 183 along the inclined direction can be made large, and the assembling of the through hole 183 to the projecting columnar portion 172 can be facilitated.

The illuminated substrate 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M.
The illuminated substrate 180 is in a posture in which the front surface of the plate faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward on the front side). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window portion movable unit 150 in the X-ray line of FIG. For ease of understanding, the rear member 170B is not shown, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is shown by an imaginary line. The XX rays are arranged so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding columnar portion 172. In the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

The aspect of the wall-shaped portion on the front side of the middle member 170M differs between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. That is, the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces the horizontal direction), and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD is an inclined wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces downward on the front side). It is configured as.

In contrast to the wall-shaped portions having different normals, the illuminated substrate 180 has a lower side wall-shaped portion 170 on the back surface of the plate.
It is supported so as to be in a posture along the MD (a posture in which the normal is inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting columnar portions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion. 172 and left and right outside (
Left side) Wiring through hole 173 drilled in the front-rear direction in an arrangement surrounding the connector 182 at the corner.
And prepare.

The projecting frame portion 171 abuts on the front and rear of the outer frame portion of the front member 170F, whereby the illuminated substrate 180
Seal around the area. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 becomes the front member 170F and the middle member 17.
It is possible to prevent the light from being visually recognized from between 0M and prevent light leakage from the same position.

The projecting columnar portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 183 of the illuminated substrate 180. The back surface of the illuminated substrate 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the projecting column portion 172 disposed in the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the projecting column portion 172 disposed in the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined posture can be stably supported, and a gap can be secured between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the illuminated substrate 180.

The protruding tip of the seat portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protrusion length becomes shorter toward the lower side) according to the posture of the illuminated substrate 180. .. As a result, not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be imparted to the projecting cylindrical portion 172.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illuminated board 180. Since the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the illuminated substrate 180 via the electrical wiring, the illuminated substrate 180 can be maintained without being fastened and fixed.
The posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stably supported.

The front member 170F is formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-transmitting resin material so that the back side surface is substantially parallel to the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light transmission holes 177 and a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the back surface side.
And the L-shaped support portion 1 having an L-shaped view in the left-right direction connecting the back surface of the plate and the frame portion forming the outer circumference.
It is equipped with 79.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 in front view. As a result, the mode of being visually recognized from the front side of the front member 170F changes between the light emitting means 181 arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181.
That is, the inside of the light transmission hole 177 can be visually recognized as if it emits stronger light than the other parts.

A plurality of the projecting column portions 178 are formed with substantially the same projecting length. As a result, the illumination substrate 180 in the inclined posture is surface-supported at a plurality of positions while making the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination substrate 180 uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination substrate 180. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode, the illuminated substrate 18
It is possible to improve the sense of stability of support of 0.

That is, since the illuminated substrate 180 is in an inclined posture in which the front surface of the plate faces downward on the front side, it is preferable to support it from the front side in order to maintain that posture, but a large-area support portion is provided at one place. When the illuminated substrate 180 is supported, the area in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged tends to be limited. When the area of the support portion is reduced by giving priority to the distributable area of the light emitting means 181, the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 collapses and the front member 170F.
The distance between the main body plate portion and the illuminated substrate 180 is likely to vary depending on the arrangement range of the illuminated substrate 180, and there is a possibility that unevenness in the light emitting mode is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter projecting columnar portions 178 having the same projecting height are provided.
Since the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 can be supported at a plurality of points at the same time, a projecting cylinder that supports the illuminated substrate 180 at a plurality of small gaps generated between adjacent light emitting means 181s. A plurality of portions 178 can be arranged. As a result, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 is arranged to face the upper surface and the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 arranged to face the front surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 180 supports and prevents the illuminated substrate 180 from tilting forward due to its own weight.

Further, the rear portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 arranged to face the upper surface of the illuminated substrate 180 and the illuminated substrate 1
By arranging the 80 with a gap, it is possible to loosely support the illuminated substrate 180 and minimize the vertical displacement of the illuminated substrate 180.

The support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is the lower wall surface portion 170M of the middle member 170M.
It is also formed on the front side of the D (formed at two positions on the left and right), and is arranged to face the lower surface and the back surface of the illuminated substrate 180, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, in the present embodiment, the L-shaped support portions arranged above and below the illuminated substrate 180 are configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is stably supported by being sandwiched and supported by the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illuminated substrate 180 are fastened and fixed to form a single rigid body, the illuminated substrate 180 may vibrate under the influence of the vibration generated in the middle member 170M. , It is a measure in consideration of it.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if the middle member 170M or the front member 170F vibrates, it is said. It is possible to independently maintain the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the intermediate member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the intermediate member 170M, but in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 has an upper side wall shape. It is arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the illuminated substrate 180 with a gap generated on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 180 via the small-diameter projecting column 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the projecting column 172. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the illuminated substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being directly transmitted from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as the vibration source to the illuminated substrate 180.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 formed in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and an electromagnetic solenoid S.
It includes a lower regulating portion 175 disposed below the OL1 and an upper regulating portion 176 disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the magnetic force (electromagnetic force). The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and displaced ascending. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1
The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 rotate as a result of the displacement between the ascending position where the electromagnetic force rises as a result and the descending position where the electromagnetic force disappears and is arranged as a result of the descending due to its own weight. Displace. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

11 (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11 (b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. 12 (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12 (b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

In addition, in FIGS. 11A and 11B, a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state in the descending position) is shown in FIG. In (a) and 12 (b), a state (a state in the ascending position) in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by the electromagnetic force generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) and 12 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the rear member 170B
11 (b) and FIG. 12 (b) show the outer shape of the displacement member 151 and the shape of the open portion on the back surface side by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 12A, the driven member 163 abuts on the cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower restricting portion 175 at the descending position, and the descending displacement is restricted to ascend. At the position, the cushion portion 17 attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating portion 176.
It abuts on 6a and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The materials of the cushion portions 175a and 176a are not limited in any way. For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane and epoxy resin may be used, and rubbery materials may be used. In addition, the cushion portion 175a,
The material of 176a may be the same or different.

Here, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with respect to the transmission shaft rod portion 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load generated by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. Can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulatory unit 175
It is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (the position substantially at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulation unit 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, and therefore the upper regulation member 176.
There is little advantage in relating the arrangement of to the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the driven member 163 is arranged so as to face the rotational tip of the driven member 163.
The load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the above is reduced.

That is, when a moment of the same magnitude of force is generated, the position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is long) is transmitted via the driven member 163. Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width dimension (diametrical width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion). It is shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and stably generate the load transmission at the rotating tip.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) due to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 rebounds after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulation portion 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface to be loaded can be increased, and the cover can be covered. The pressure generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the weight of the drive member 163 (
Stress) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the driven member 163 while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a via the driven member 163 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions.

Below the upper restricting portion 176, a protruding portion 176b is formed so as to project in a curved shape on the back surface side of the middle member 170M. The projecting portion 176b is arranged so as to face the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the driven member 163 is suppressed in contact with the driven member 163 in a small area. Guide the rotation of.

As shown in FIGS. 11B and 12B, the tip portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 in front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect unit 153a makes it possible for the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a to visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale). While the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, the change in the light emitting mode of the effect unit 153a can be suppressed even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced.

In other words, the light visually recognized through the effect unit 153a can be visually recognized by the player as if it is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect unit 153a, so that the LED or the like can be seen inside the effect unit 153a. The light emitting means of the above is arranged, and it is possible to make an illusion as if the displacement is synchronized with the displacement of the effect unit 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illuminated substrate 180 is arranged while adopting the illuminated substrate 180 having a fixed arrangement. It can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a also arranged on the illumination substrate 180 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, by adopting multiple illuminated boards, the first board is fixedly arranged and the second board is displaceable, the light emission effect that tends to be realized can be achieved by fixing the arrangement and using a single electric circuit board. It can be realized by using a decorative substrate. As a result, the number of illuminated boards can be reduced while achieving the same effect.

It will be described back to FIG. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a back case 310 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

The rear case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit 300 is arranged in the internal space of the rear case 310 with the first operation unit 400 in which the movable device is displaceably arranged in a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. The left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above and the like and the second operation unit 700 arranged under the opening 311a are accommodated respectively, and this is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is arranged at a position above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is arranged at a position below the opening 311a on the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, respectively. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are mounted on the rear case 310.

The rear case 310 is along the back of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall 312 (eg,).
It is extended as a flat plate (arranged in parallel) and includes a support plate portion 313 that surface-supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with the fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b (circular or oval in the present embodiment) may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape). Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is also rectangular.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310, and the formation of the support plate portion 313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood on which veneer plates are overlapped as in the present embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. Is invisible, so that the entire back surface side of the area where an opening can be formed (concave from the side surface) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is effective as an effect area for arranging the movable members so as to be visible.

On the other hand, in the place where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in the front view. The area that can be disposed of will be narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the fact that many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can see the ball fired in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed in a place other than the range where the fired ball can be visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and passes through the return ball preventing member 68 in the gaming area. Introduced in, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In the ball game, the place that is considered to attract the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61). ) Is usually low in attention.

Therefore, as a range that the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left parts based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right parts based on the upward convex arc. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and the game board 13 is made of a veneer plate that is difficult to transmit light in the first place, and the outer edge member 73 from the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized via the block-shaped member 74 or the block-shaped member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged in the places where the attention is low or invisible. In fact, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portion 313 is formed near the corner portion of the rear case 310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62. Will be done.

In other words, by selecting the place where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the place where the visibility is low (low production ability) in the first place, the operation unit 300
Further, while achieving the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board 13, it is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player paying attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, the range in which the ball does not flow down is the lower left and upper left. It can be easily arranged in the portion and the upper right portion.

The substantially lower half portion of the outer wall portion 312 on the right side is provided with a notch portion 312a that is notched (notched is formed) toward the back surface side. The cutout portion 312a is cut out below the band-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in the front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a gap is provided between the cutout portion 312a and the game board 13. Form.

By forming the notch portion 312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the cutout portion 312a can function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring interferes with other components as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Further, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space having a configuration required for the variable winning device 65. The configuration required for the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which a sphere flows, a substrate that accompanies a light emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a sphere, and other structures. Is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion 312a, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light having a blurred outline.
In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). Therefore, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 from depending on the shape of the rear case 310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the light emission effect.

Further, as compared with the case where the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as the LED is arranged so as to be exposed to the outside of the operation unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, the electric wiring is operated through the notch portion 312a. A configuration such as this embodiment in which the unit 300 is exposed to the outside can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electric wiring so that it can be taken out of the operation unit 300 without turning it to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED.

The length of formation of the notch portion 312a (length in the vertical direction) is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion 312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the fastening and fixing with the game board 13 is omitted in the right side portion of the rear case 310, the rigidity of the operating unit 300 is relied on when considering the rigidity in the right side portion of the game board 13. Can't.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. Hereinafter, the metal plate-shaped member 75 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75.
FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, for ease of understanding, the game board 13 is shown as a single unit, and the illustration of other members arranged on the game board 13 is omitted.

The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, has an arc wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper portion and has an arc shape on the inner side surface, and is extended downward from the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape. A vertical wall portion 73b and an inclined wall portion 73c formed having an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left are provided. In this way, by forming the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 can be compared with the case where the outer edge member 73 is formed of a plurality of members that are vertically divided. The man-hours for assembling to the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape toward the back surface along the right surface portion.
And, at the joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed in a U-shape in the vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion, and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, a columnar shape is formed toward the back side. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion 73b3 to be projecting, and a fastening portion 73b4 attached to the columnar projecting portion 73b3 so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the fastening portion 73b4.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, the metal plate-like member 75 has the plate-like protrusion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 as compared with the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being generated in any one place.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction, while being bent to the left at the main body plate portion 75a formed without creases in the longitudinal direction and the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and formed through the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through hole 75d and an insertion hole 75e in which a fastening screw is inserted into a plate portion provided on the plate portion on which the through hole 75d is formed and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the long direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b which is easily curved in the long direction.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size capable of inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 through the seam penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a columnar protrusion is provided. Part 73b3
Is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip portion thereof engages with the game board 13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the game board 13 will be described.

The game board 13 accepts a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed so as to be able to accept the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and a cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. It is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 13f, which are formed in a recess as a possible recess.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b.
Reference numeral 3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. This makes it possible to reduce the number of positionings.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b by itself, and the vertical wall portion 73b does not need to be sufficiently rigid. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Further, since the deformation of the game board 13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 The shape can be maintained.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 13. A first operating unit 400 is arranged on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 of the operating unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to the position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the display of the third symbol display device 81. It is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. Hereinafter, the details of the first operation unit 400 will be described.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. FIG. 16 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 17 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operating unit 400 is retracted to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81. 3 The overhanging state of overhanging (descending) toward the symbol display device 81 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the rear case 310 is not symmetrically formed. In particular, regarding the upper side wall (ceiling surface), the shape of the tank 130 of the payout unit 93 (
(See FIG. 3), the right side of the front view is lower than the left side of the front view. That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, the upper side wall of the rear case 310 is arranged at a position where the right side is lower than the left side in order to secure the arrangement area. It is installed (arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

As described above, inside the rear case 310, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is a margin in the ceiling height). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring are used. An auxiliary device that does not directly affect the appearance of the production such as SP1 (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) is arranged on the left side.

As a result, a dent (gap portion) caused by the asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310
The drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be arranged by effectively utilizing the above, and the lower edge of the first operating unit 400 can be moved to the upper side as much as possible while having a symmetrical shape. It is possible to easily secure a large vertical dimension of the viewing area.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the shapes of the pinnate member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400, the first operating unit 40 is matched to the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310.
The shape of the side to be arranged facing the upper wall of the rear case 310 in the retracted state of 0 is designed. That is,
The wing-shaped member 460 on the left side is designed to project toward the upper wall side of the rear case 310 as compared with the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side.

The pinnate member 460 is configured to be united by changing the state of the first operation unit 400 from the retracted state to the overhanging state and to be visually recognized integrally, and is designed to have a symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In the present embodiment, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the asymmetrical portion of the pinnate member 460 (the upper side that abuts when united) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21.
Is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. 18 and 20 show the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 show the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates and moves via a plurality of gears interposed between the drive motor MT1, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 made of metal that is arranged at substantially the center position on the left and right and is vertically expandable and contractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 arranged on the left and right opposite sides of the arm member 414. Ru.

The elevating plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and rotates symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. A plurality of displaced pinnate members 460 are displaced.

Therefore, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement mode in which raising and lowering and rotation are combined with the driving of the drive motor MT1. As a result, the constituent members can be displaced in a plurality of directions even though the single drive motor MT1 is used, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the auxiliary arm member 4
The upper end position portion of the arcuate gear portion 444b of 44 is configured to project upward from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430. In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is overhanging.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 to the overhanging state, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state. The arcuate gear portion 444b, which overhangs upward (see FIG. 27),
It is displaced downward with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430, and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the elevating plate 430 at the position shielded by the base plate 60 in terms of arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 is allowed to protrude.
By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so as to hide the overhang on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until it is displaced to a position not shielded by the base plate 60, the elevating plate 43 is always present.
It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 as compared with the case where the auxiliary arm member 444 is hidden on the back side of 0.

For example, since the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 can be arranged on the lower side, the elevating plate 430 can be arranged.
It is possible to easily avoid interference between the upper edge portion and the outer wall portion 312 on the upper part of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16).

Further, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, the third symbol display device 81
While avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped part (the part having the gear teeth formed along the straight line) is maintained overhanging on the side, the overhanging length of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is increased. It can be secured sufficiently.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the elevating plate 430 is displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430. The relative displacement member 442 can be displaced vertically, but in this case, it is necessary to always dispose the fixed rack gear-shaped portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which most of the elevating plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 as in the elevating plate 430 of the present embodiment is diverted, the fixed rack gear-shaped portion is used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401. It was necessary to project from the third symbol display device 81 side to form.

Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by a fixed rack gear-like portion, which causes a problem that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates, and the rack gear on the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400. For the purpose of concealing the shaped portion, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the degree of freedom in designing the evacuation plate 430 is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is adopted instead of the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, it is placed on the back side thereof according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430.
Auxiliary arm member 444 can be arranged (to hide). Therefore, while avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped portion is maintained overhanging on the third symbol display device 81 side, the overhang length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is sufficient. Can be secured.

22 (a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, FIG. 22.
(B) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 showing the meshing state of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a), 23, 24 and 25, the first operation unit 400 is
The bottom wall portion 3 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 16) is formed from a resin material into a long plate shape on the left and right.
A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate portion 401 fastened and fixed to 11 and a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate portion 401, and an arm member 41 of the transmission unit 410.
A back arrangement plate 420 composed of a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged on the same plane including a connecting plate portion 421 connected to the tip of 4, and a back arrangement plate 420 arranged on the front side of the back arrangement plate 420. 4
It is provided with an elevating plate 430 to which 20 is fastened and fixed, and a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
..

In addition, the first operation unit 400 is a plate-shaped support plate portion 4 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430.
50 and a pair of left and right pinnate members 460 that are rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450 and rotationally displaced by the load given by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. Auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the pinnate member 460 (FIG. 2).
2 (a), FIG. 22 (b) and FIG. 24).

The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft strut portion 402 that pivotally supports the transmission gear 412, a terminal support portion 403 that is arranged at the lower right portion thereof and supports the terminal gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 arranged in the center of the left and right and fixed on the back side so that the front side can be displaced vertically, and a long opening on the right side of the metal rail 405. A long hole portion 406, a lid portion 407 that is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and covers a region where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the back surface side, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting a state. To prepare for.

The terminal support portion 403 includes a shaft strut portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft strut portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b projecting along a circle centered on the shaft strut portion 403a, and an annular protrusion thereof. It is provided with a stopper portion 403c which is projected on the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion portion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the region where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaches the back side of the long hole portion 406 is a long hole. It is guided to the front side through the part 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid portion 407 and the back surface side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 overhangs to the back surface side, and during the assembly work, between the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 13) of the rear case 310 and the main body plate portion 401. There is a risk of being pinched by. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid portion 407, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. Can be done.

As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the rear case 310 without confirming the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 402. The terminal gear 413 that is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and the arm support portion 404 that can change its posture as the terminal gear 413 rotates.
The arm member 414 is pivotally supported by the arm member 414.

The end gear 413 has a gap between the annular protrusion 413a projecting toward the back surface in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. The stoppered portion 413b, which is projected in a fan shape in the same manner as the stopper portion 403c, and the shaft strut portion 40.
A cylindrical overhanging portion 413c that projects cylindrically to the front side at an eccentric position away from 3a, and a detected portion that extends in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from the flange-shaped flange portion formed on the front side of the gear portion. 41
It is equipped with 3d.

The annular protrusion 413a is arranged so that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b.
The annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the stoppered portion 413b and the annular protrusion 403b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail for guiding the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stoppered portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stoppered portion 413b is the stopper portion 4 in the rotation direction thereof.
Interferes with 03c. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is the stopper portion 4.
It will be limited by the dimensions in the circumferential direction of 03c and the stoppered portion 413b. That is, the end gear 413 is rotationally displaced at a rotational angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is 36).
The stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 41 are bisected at an angle obtained by subtracting the angle from 0 degree.
The shapes of 3b may be designed respectively. As a result, it is possible to prevent one of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, so that the useful life of the first operating unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to a resin terminal gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip portion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected unit 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. When the detected unit 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the voice lamp control device 1
The MPU 221 of 13 can determine that the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, and an annular portion 414a.
A plate-shaped portion 414b extending radially from the front side portion of the annular portion 414a and a plate-shaped portion 414b extending in parallel with respect to the plate-shaped portion 414b and arranged toward the back surface side. An intermediate plate portion 414c connected to the portion and a long hole portion 414d bored in the intermediate plate portion 414c in a long hole shape.
And the tip plate portion 414e which is arranged by translating to the back surface side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and the tip plate portion 414e thereof from the extended tip to the front side. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 414f that overhangs in a columnar shape.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate portion 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f, and the connecting plate portion 421 of the rear arrangement plate 420 cannot be removed from the cylinder. It is connected and supported by the overhanging portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operation unit 400. In FIG. 26, the first operation unit 4
The second intermediate position of 00 is shown, and the coil spring SP is shown for ease of understanding.
1. The fixed pulley to which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1 and the base plate to which the drive motor MT1 is fastened and fixed are not shown.

According to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, the arm member 414
By forming the shape in a bent shape in the front-rear direction, it is possible to functionally avoid interference with other members. This will be described below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged on the front side of the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the limitation of the front-rear position of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (the portion opposite to the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Then, the front-back position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c disposed on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1 is arranged on the back surface side as compared with the plate-shaped portion 414b. As a result, the front-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 on the root side of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. It is possible to prevent the load transmission efficiency from being lowered due to the deformation of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c.

Further, since it is due to the relationship with the terminal gear 413 at the front-rear position of the intermediate plate portion 414c, a portion not related to the terminal gear 413 (the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404 with reference to the terminal gear 413)).
In the place on the opposite side of)), the front-back position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e disposed on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the terminal gear 413 is arranged on the back surface side as compared with the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the front-rear dimensions of constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set for the purpose of avoiding interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by forming the arm member 414 in a stepwise bending manner, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from being locally (one point) concentrated (the stress concentration can be relaxed), and the arm member can be relaxed. The durability of 414 can be improved.

Further, by forming the minimum necessary gap in order to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a gap gathered on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other members that secure the gap. Therefore, it is possible to crawl the electric wiring (electrical wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) by using the gap, or to dispose of an additional effect member (illumination board or the like).

Further, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 arranged so as to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is unintentionally sandwiched or rotated by the pinnate member 460. It is configured to be able to prevent being bitten into the gear tooth portion of the gear 441 or the relative displacement member 442. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 first passes through the elongated hole portion 406 from the main body plate portion 401 side to the auxiliary arm member 44.
You will be guided to 4. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is passed through the extension portion 444c by being inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448.

Inside the extension portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. After that, the electrical wiring DH1 is connected to the base end side portion 44.
It is guided from 4a to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, passes through an L-shaped region partitioned by a frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, and reaches the through hole 427.

The frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 is provided with an abbreviated portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over substantially half a circumference centering on the insertion hole 425a. Electrical wiring DH by omitting part 425b
An angle at which 1 is guided to the front side of the block plate 428 can be provided at 180 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is bent in the vicinity of the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated.

The electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front-rear direction by passing the through hole 427 to the front side, and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430. It is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of the 450 with a binding band or the like, and is connected to a connector arranged on the illuminated substrate of the light emitting effect device LA1.

As described above, the electric wiring DH1 is a constituent member (auxiliary arm member 444) in most of the path thereof.
And because it is arranged inside the rear arrangement plate 420), the electric wiring DH1 is compared with the case where the electric wiring is exposed (exposed) in most of the path as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to reduce the possibility of colliding with other movable members and receiving a load.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that is slidably displaced are separated. That is, it is limited to the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by the slide displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or bending in the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the deformation of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442
By breaking the relationship with the displacement speed of, it is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electric wiring DH1.

It will be described back to FIG. 22A, FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25. The rear arrangement plate 420 is provided on the elevating plate 430, which is arranged on the right side of the plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 which is connected to the columnar overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 and is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, and the connecting plate portion 421. The accommodating plate portion 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and the accommodating plate portion 4 thereof.
It is provided with an L-shaped plate-shaped closing plate 428 that is fastened and fixed to 25 and partially closes the back side portion of the accommodating plate portion 425.

The connecting plate portion 421 is formed in the main body plate portion in a long hole shape long in the left-right direction, and the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f.
A support box portion 423 formed in a box shape in which the front side and the upper side are opened below the insertion length hole 422 is provided.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion length hole 422, the rigidity of the accommodating plate portion 425 can be reinforced by using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box portion 42
Reference numeral 3 is arranged so as to face the support wall portion 426 on the left and right sides, and when the support wall portion 426 is largely bent to the left and deforms and comes into contact with the support box portion 423, the deformation is caused by the rigidity of the support box portion 423. It can be suppressed.

The accommodating plate portion 425 has a support wall portion 426 projecting to the front side in a straight plate shape along the vertical direction at the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a penetration formed on the front side of the closing plate 428. It is provided with a hole 427.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter through which a connector arranged at the end of the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts on the frame portion projecting in a frame shape on the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425 so as to partition the area between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. It is composed. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is configured to be arranged only inside the frame portion of the accommodating plate portion 425 (front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (on the left side of the frame portion).

A deformed hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that the temporary fixing portion 425c, which is a portion protruding in a U shape on the back surface side at the position on the through hole 427 side of the omitted portion 425b, can be visually recognized from the rear view. To.

The deformed hole 428a is composed of a horizontally long shape portion having a left-right width slightly longer than the width of the temporary fixing portion 425c and a vertically long shape portion provided intersecting the horizontally long shape portion in order to secure an area through which a binding band can pass. It is formed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion of the binding band. Electrical wiring D with a cable tie
By temporarily fixing the H1, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. in this case,
By tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 side can be brought closer to the closing plate 428 side. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the circular plate portion and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As a result, the electrical wiring DH1 becomes the accommodating plate portion 42.
Since it is possible to avoid rubbing against the edge portion of 5, the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the block plate 428.

As a result, the temporary fixing position of the electric wiring DH1 is the position between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, that is, the position where the electric wiring DH1 is fixed with respect to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 (that is, the electric wiring). Electrical wiring DH from the light emitting effect device LA1 to which one end of DH1 is connected
Temporarily connect the electric wiring DH1 at the part that overlaps with the path to the base end side portion 444a of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first part to displace the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the elevating plate 430 when traveling along the path of 1. While fastening, the binding band can be replaced without removing the closing plate 428. Therefore, the service life of the electric wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintainability of the binding band related to the electric wiring DH1 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 crawls on the front side of the closing plate 428 along the shape of the closing plate 428. Since the closing plate 428 has an L-shaped rear view, the electric wiring DH1
Is curved along a first plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction on the front side of the closing plate 428, while is along a second plane (a plane orthogonal to the first plane) orthogonal to the left-right direction near the through hole 427. It will be curved. As a result, the holding force for holding the electric wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 has a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing of the rear arrangement plate 420, and a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of parts related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440.
A tubular portion 433 formed so that the electrical wiring DH1 can be inserted, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a main body plate portion to avoid interference between the members. It is provided with a plurality of coping portions 435 formed in the above and a decorative portion 436 having a substantially symmetrical pattern on the front surface of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 is arranged at least at the lower end portion of the elevating plate 430 and is a relative displacement member 442 (
It is provided with a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a that support the vertical displacement of the slide rack). Although the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, a female screw shape is formed from the tip portion thereof, and a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the accommodating plate portion 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed in. Ru. That is, it is also used as a portion related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420 and a portion related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440.

The tubular portion 433 extends to the back surface side through a gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and the rear end side end thereof abuts on the front surface of the accommodating plate portion 425. The inside of the tubular portion 433 is continuously connected. Electrical wiring DH through this continuously connected part
1 is inserted back and forth.

As the coping unit 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, the raised fastening portions arranged side by side in the vertical direction), the main body plate portion is used. Notch portion 435a cut out upward from the lower edge and auxiliary arm member 444
An example is a recessed portion 435b which is recessed in a wall portion formed in a wall shape so as to protect the upper side of the axis of the arcuate gear portion 444b and is formed so as to avoid interference with the arcuate gear portion 444b. ..

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back surface side of the pinnate member 460, and is configured so that a series of patterns can be visually recognized in cooperation with the pinnate member 460 as the pinnate member 460 is displaced. It will be described later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotary gears 441 that mesh with each other and their rotary gears 4.
A relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the 41s and is displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of elongated holes 443 formed in the relative displacement member 442 in a long hole shape, and the other and teeth of the rotary gear 441. An auxiliary arm member 444 having matching rotary gear teeth and an end side plate 448 fastened and fixed to the rotational tip portion of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back surface side are provided.

A gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted through the elongated hole 443. The longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the elongated hole 44
By arranging the third in the elongated direction substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the relative displacement member 442.

In addition, since the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced as compared with the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be combined with each other. The frictional resistance generated between them can be reduced.

The auxiliary arm member 444 has a ring-shaped base end side portion 444a pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432 and an arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the base end side portion 444a. Extension portion 4 extending in the radial direction of the ring shape from the gear portion 444b and the proximal end side portion 444a.
44c and a portion formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape arranged at the extension tip portion of the extension portion 444c so that the opening portion inside the cylinder is continuously connected to the opening portion of the extension portion 444c. It is provided with a cylindrical member 444d to be formed.

The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a through which a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a is inserted in a state of being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. The accommodation plate 425 regulates the movement to the back side. That is, the base end side portion 444a is the elevating plate 430.
And, it is pivotally supported so as not to fall off in a manner facing the accommodating plate portion 425 from the front and back.

The extension portion 444c is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and is extended from one side in the lateral direction to the other side in the rear side portion, and the short end of the electric wiring DH1 with the other side. It is provided with a retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the directional dimension (width dimension). The retaining portion 444c1 has a role of preventing the electric wiring DH1 disposed inside the extending portion 444c from coming off after the electric wiring DH1 is passed between the extending portion 444c and the other side in the lateral direction. have.

The mode of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, extension part 4
The gap between 44c and the retaining portion 444c1 is the lateral dimension (width dimension) of the electrical wiring DH1.
May be configured shorter than. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electric wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electric wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the vertical displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be minimized. It will be described later with reference to 30.

The tubular member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the lateral dimension of the elongated hole portion 406, and is inserted through the elongated hole portion 406 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the elongated hole portion 406. It enables the sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along the above.

The end side plate 448 is provided with a through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.
The electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a has a cylindrical portion 4 inserted through the elongated hole portion 406.
It passes through the inside of the 44d, passes through the inside of the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the proximal end side portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate portion 425. Then, it is guided to the front side through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433.

Since the electrical wiring DH1 is passed through in this way, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is the electrical wiring DH1.
It is formed larger than the outer shape of the connector connected to the end of the. In other words, through hole 448
a is formed in a size that allows the connector to be inserted.

The through hole 448a is formed not only in the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also in a deformed shape including an eccentric region outside the diameter, and in particular, a large opening is formed on the extending portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electric wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extension portion 444c, so that the electric wiring DH1 is largely arranged with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes. It is possible to avoid changing (ramping).

In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the extension portion 444c side in the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. With this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right side, so that the lateral displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced to the left and right when the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the orientation of the through hole 448a is changed to cause the end side plate 448 to be displaced in the left-right direction. It can function to be mitigated. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 is shortened. As well as being able to, the end side plate 44
The load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from 8 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, the elevating plate 4
Similar to the relative displacement of 30 and the relative displacement member 442, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced.

The support plate portion 450 is formed in a disk shape, and a light emitting substrate is arranged on the back side.
Reference numeral 1 is a plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the front side, and is internally fitted into a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which fastening screws inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed, and a cylindrical portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. , Lifting plate 43
A pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which a fastening screw to be inserted through 0 is screwed, a through hole 453 formed in a pair of left and right under the fastening shaft support combined portion 452, and a light emitting effect device LA1.
A support portion 454 for hooking and supporting the upper projecting piece LA1b of the above is provided.

The light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions LA1a into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the support plate portion 450 is screwed in at the lower portion, and a pair of protrusions projecting at the upper portion so as to be inserted into the support portion 454. It is equipped with LA1b. In this way, while supporting the lower part of the light emitting effect device LA1 by fastening and fixing,
By supporting the upper part by engagement, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from being cast on the upper back side of the illuminated board while ensuring sufficient support strength.

The front surface of the light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are visually recognized without being hidden (FIG. 34). reference).

In the present embodiment, the shape of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is a shape imitating a shellfish (for example, a scallop), and the shape of the light emitting effect device LA1 arranged between them is like a pearl. It is formed from a visible frontal circular shape. That is, by integrally visualizing the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470, it is possible to construct an appearance reminiscent of a series of concepts of "pearls arranged inside an open shell". ..

The pinnate member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and is centered on a tubular portion 461 rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452 and the tubular portion 461 thereof. An arcuate gear 462 formed in an arcuate shape and meshed with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extension portion 463 thereof. Formed portion 464L formed on the extended end side and configured to be able to reflect light strongly by applying a plating to the front portion of the plate.
, 464R, a downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the arc gear 462 along an arc having a smaller diameter than the arc gear 462, and a flange portion formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arc gear 462. It is provided with a 466 and a columnar overhanging portion 467 in which the flange portion 466 extends in a columnar shape from the extending end portion extending in the external direction toward the back surface side.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed in an arc having the same diameter that meshes with each other at an intermediate position between the pair of tubular portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) pinnate members 460 that rotate due to the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extension portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is concavely formed only on the right side. Recessed part 4
Reference numeral 63a is a shaped portion for facilitating interference with the electrical wiring guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 and are configured as a series of substantially semicircular (substantially semi-elliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17), while the first.
In the retracted state of the operating unit 400, the operation unit 400 is arranged separately on the left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, the left forming portion 464L is formed so as to project in the rotational direction as compared with the right forming portion 464R in the shape of the upper side that abuts at the time of coalescence. By being done, it is formed large. In other words, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is arranged closer to the right side (FIG. 17).
reference).

The shape of the upper end portion of the pinnate members 464L and 464R, which are arranged so as to face each other, is
It depends on the distance from the tubular portion 461. That is, the side close to the tubular portion 461 (the side close to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) is the pinnate member 464L, 464R so that the pinnate members 464L, 464R can overlap each other in front view when they are closest to each other. Interference unit 4 arranged offset in the direction of the rotation axis
It has a shape provided with 64a.

In the present embodiment, the side close to the tubular portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. When the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other due to the above-mentioned interference portion 464a, the pinnate member 464L,
Since it is possible to prevent the contact surface S1 of the 464R from having a cut, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized by the player without discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the tubular portion 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the pinnate member 464L
, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L
The shape is such that the contact surface is arranged at a position that matches in the rotation axis direction of R.

By providing the portion where the load generated by the contact of the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of stopping is provided in the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the force moment is the longest, the pinnate member 46 due to the contact.
The load generated in 4L and 464R can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the pinnate members 464L and 464R according to the distance from the tubular portion 461, the player feels uncomfortable with a series of decorative patterns formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. The load that can be generated on the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of the closest approach of the pinnate members 464L and 464R can be minimized.

The flange portion 466 is used for both suppressing the positional deviation of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and partitioning the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with the fixed transmission plate 490 and being caught, resulting in excessive resistance.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted through the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and the ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted through the overhanging tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed at the overhanging tip portion, and a fastening screw having an umbrella portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is screwed in while being inserted into the collar C1. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 so as not to fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-shaped members that are rotatably supported, and has a supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed tubular shape and a through hole 453 that is inserted through the supported portion 471 and cannot rotate. A metal insertion metal rod 472 fitted to the metal rod 472 and a gear portion 473 having gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472 which is non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472.
And prepare.

A female screw is formed in the radial direction on the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472, and the supported portion 471 is formed.
At the corresponding position of, a through hole is formed through which the screwed portion of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw can be inserted. By inserting the insertion metal rod 472 into the supported portion 471 and then screwing the fastening screw into the female screw through the through hole, it is possible to prevent the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported portion 471.

The gear portion 473 has a through hole 4 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453.
It is rotatably supported around 53. The gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (
(See FIG. 22B), so that the pinnate member 460 rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle.

The fixed transmission plate 490 is provided at a plate-shaped portion to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 formed as a long hole curved in the plate-shaped portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-shaped portion. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a metal rod-shaped member that is non-rotatably supported and projects to the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 has a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction and a vertical portion 49.
It is provided with a bending change portion 491b formed by being bent in the left-right direction from 1a. By partitioning the elongated hole portion 491 in this way, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 that accompanies it are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The connection and fixing of the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 is performed by the above-mentioned insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 47.
It is the same as the connection mode with 1. This makes it possible to prevent the metal rod 492 from falling off from the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28, 2
9 and FIG. 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( The first operation unit 4 in which the elevating plate 430 is lowered from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical displacement dimension (see FIG. 16).
In FIG. 29, the first intermediate state of 00 is the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 in which the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 faces the left-right direction, and in FIG. 30, the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 is. , Each illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the detected portion 413d enters the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1 to determine the posture of the terminal gear 413. In the present embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, overhanging state) are only the displacement amount preset from the retracted state. It is a state after displacement and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member). The radial direction of rotation of 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413, so that the arm member 414 is in a state where the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off.
Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is arranged outside the arc MXS circumscribing the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 from interfering with each other during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the elongated hole portion 406 so as to be slidable,
It is not non-resistive, but the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes operating resistance. That is, due to the action of this operating resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

As shown in FIG. 28, the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward due to the rotational displacement of the arm member 414, and the rotation of the rotary gear 441 that meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly.
The relative displacement member 442 is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of.

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the pinnate member 460 has the same posture as the posture in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing at which the pinnate member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In this embodiment, the elevating plate 430 descends by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) until the pinnate member 460 starts rotating, so that the pinnate member 460 rotates. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a defect that collides with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when it is displaced.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the pinnate member 460 is rotationally displaced after descending by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed so that the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 does not shift in height from side to side. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the pinnate member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can be realized by diverting the operation conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. As a result, the cost required for the design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 4 hidden behind the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state.
As shown in FIG. 28, 14 is displaced so as to project above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pinnate member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the pinnate member 460 is not only as an effect means for allowing the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the surface side to execute the effect of enlivening the game, but also the arm member 414 for drive transmission is used as the elevating plate 430. It also functions as a joint concealment shield.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the wing-shaped member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the driving force transmission function is arranged is compared with the forming portion 464R of the wing-shaped member 460 on the opposite side. Since the shape is large, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

Similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, due to the configuration, the arm member 4 is in the second intermediate state.
While 14 projects above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 overhangs the upper side of the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to overhang the upper side of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when the forming portion 464R having a shape smaller than that of the forming portion 464L (the amount of protrusion of the elevating plate 430 to the upper side at the same point is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L) is used, there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. The 444 can be hidden from the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 is in a posture in which the elongated direction faces the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the elevating plate 430 tends to be large.
On the contrary, when the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the elevating plate 430 at the same timing, the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the tubular portion 44 is tilted.
By arranging 4d (see FIG. 25) at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be changed. The elevating plate 4 is loaded with the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction while suppressing the displacement resistance.
It is possible to prevent the 30 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is defined as a guideline position only, and the terminal gear 41 is used.
The design of 3 and the arm member 414 is performed by dynamically examining whether or not interference occurs when the termination gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the termination gear 413 rotates with the position where the stoppered portion 413b of the termination gear 413 comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as the end point. For control, the stoppered portion 413b is the stopper portion 40.
Drive motor M so that the termination gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where it comes into contact with 3c.
I am trying to drive T1. As a result, the stoppered portion 413b and the stopper portion 40
It is possible to structurally prevent the termination gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the 3c.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction (arm) of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414. The radial direction of rotation of the member 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413, so that the arm member 414 is in a state where the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off.
Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, not only the displacement in the gravity direction but also the upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the overhanging state to the retracted state side can be prevented.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing up and being displaced after reaching the overhanging state, so that the elevating plate 430 on the downstream side as a transmission path of the driving force can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, pinnate member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the pinnate member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the elongated hole portion 406 so as to be slidable,
It is not non-resistive, but the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes operating resistance. That is, due to the action of this operating resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 are on one side (left and right).
Although the configuration occurs only on the left side), it is possible to prevent the posture of the elevating plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405.

Here, as described above, as long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 is minimized. Explain what you can do.

When the path of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting effect device LA1 side, the auxiliary arm member 444
The path is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches, and the path becomes variable for the first time with the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is fixed while the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is displaced by expansion and contraction. can.

At the position where it comes out from the through hole 448a to the back side, the end side plate 44 is connected to the electric wiring DH1.
The left-right displacement is caused by the left-right displacement of 8. In this way, the electrical wiring DH1
Since the displacement that can cause expansion and contraction is limited to the displacement of the end side plate 448,
In the present embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured, and the required extra length is calculated.
After adding the extra length to the electric wiring DH1 in the path from the fixed position of the electric wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electric wiring DH1 loosened), the electric wiring DH1 is fixed to the main body plate portion 401. ing.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448, and in addition, the displacement amount that causes the elevating plate 430 can be limited. It can be suppressed to less than half of the amount of vertical displacement.

Further, as described above, due to the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448, the end side plate 448
Since the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced as compared with the displacement width of the electric wiring D,
The extra length of H1 can be shortened.

31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, and FIG. 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400. Figure 3
1 to 34 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 31, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 is in a retracted state. The first intermediate state, in FIG. 33, is the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400.
In FIG. 34, the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge portion of the pinnate member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly downwardly displaced, the posture of the pinnate member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrically shaped movable member.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the pinnate member 460 does not change as compared with the retracted state shown in FIG. 31, while the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are the same as the elevating plate 430 descends. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward with a displacement amount exceeding the downward displacement amount.

Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the single elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced with respect to the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430, but also the elevating plate. Since it is possible to visually recognize how the decorative portion 493, which is displaced by a vertical displacement amount different from the vertical displacement amount of 430, is vertically displaced, the effect of effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative portion 493 increases as compared with the first intermediate state, and in addition, the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 changes posture.

FIG. 34 illustrates a state in which the pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other at facing positions. Pinnate member 46
0 is visually recognized as if it is a single substantially semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members, and the contact surface S1 is formed by a metal rail 405. It is formed at a position shifted to the right from the arranged center position on the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is configured to be extra on the forming portion 464R side as compared with the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R, so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is displaced from the left and right center. It is configured in.

Since the upper edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged at positions shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the forming portions 46.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 4L and 464R are configured in a left-right asymmetrical shape. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the left-right asymmetry of the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Further, since the contact surface S1 is displaced from the metal rail 405 in front view, even if the pinnate member 460 bounces off due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is generated again, the rail member is formed from the gap. It is possible to prevent the 405 from being visually recognized, and it is possible to visually recognize the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401.

As a result, the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visually recognized from the gap. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is arranged at a position deviated from the left and right center positions generally assumed by the player as a break between the pair of movable members that abut and separate from each other on the left and right sides. That is, the contact surface S1 that does not create a gap at a position (left-right center position) that the player visually recognizes while anticipating that a gap will occur, and that may generate a gap at a position deviated from that location. By arranging them, even if a gap is generated, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the pinnate member 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operation unit 400, the outer shape portion of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the feather-shaped member 460, and the player can see the whole picture. The structure is difficult to grasp.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 arranged under the pinnate member 460 is visible, and the outer shape thereof is the pinnate member 460. It is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of the above.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (in the present embodiment, the shape of a "shell") that the pair of pinnate members 460 make visible in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge portion. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining a pair of pinnate members 460.
It can be made visible to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement process until a series of decorative shapes are formed by the displacement of the pinnate member 460 is not one step. That is, as the first displacement process, there is a process in which the pair of pinnate members 460 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes are displaced and coalesced in a manner close to each other to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as a process of the second displacement, the pinnate member 460 and the decorative portion 436 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes overlap each other in the front-rear view in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and overhang. As the state approaches, the process of forming a series of decorative shapes by displacing the pinnate member 460 in the direction in which the overlapping allowance becomes smaller (the direction in which the pinnate member 460 separates from the decorative portion 436) can be mentioned.

By these different processes, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 itself can be made into a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, but the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the pinnate member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, the pinnate member 460 that is individually displaced
It is possible to form a series of decorative shapes that are united in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, while suppressing the shape of the first operating unit 400 to be small.

35, 36, 37 and 38 show a support plate portion 450, a pinnate member 460, and an auxiliary member 4.
It is a rear view of 70 and a fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 35, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 36, the first operating unit 400 is shown. 37 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 38 shows the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c dispersedly arranged along an arc shape are formed on the back surface side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks to the back surface side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the through hole LA1
Since the pinnate member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back surface side of c, the light leaked from the through hole LA1c can be reflected to the front side by the forming portions 464L and 464R of the pinnate member 460.

The rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Pinnate member 4
Since the rotational displacement of 60 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in particular detail.

From the retracted state shown in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 36, the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction).
Since the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the pinnate member 460 from being rotationally displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

In this embodiment, an individual member for urging the pinnate member 460 to the retracted state side is not prepared, but the center of gravity is arranged on the left and right outside the rotation axis due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R. It is maintained in a retracted posture due to its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, when the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the bending changing portion 491b, a load in the left-right direction is generated on the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and the pinnate member 460 starts rotational displacement. Explaining from the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is the fixed transmission plate 4
It is transmitted from 90 to the pinnate member 460 on the left side via the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and then to the pinnate member 460 on the right side. That is, compared to the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side, the wing-shaped member 46 on the left side
0 is on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path.

In the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the pinnate member 460 on the left side, which is considered to be the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier than the forming portion 464R) as compared with the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be sequentially arranged so as to be lighter toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path. As a result, good transmission of the driving force can be achieved, and it is possible to prevent each component member from rebounding and being displaced after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the tubular portion 433 as the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in the weight of the forming portions 464L and 464R. More specifically, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact between the facing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R. Errors and
Due to aged deformation of the elongated hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460, the forming portion 46
It is possible that the positions of 4L and 464R after displacement may change slightly.

In this case, the change in the position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the extending portion 463 of the pinnate member 460 is arranged below the cylindrical portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, the recessed portion 463a is provided so that the overlap between the cylindrical portion 433 and the extended portion 463 is reduced. As a result, even if a displacement that is unintentionally pushed down occurs in the forming portion 464L, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 and the forming portion 464L interfere with each other can be reduced.

Further, since it is assumed that the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced, the tubular portion 4 is viewed from the rear.
It can be designed at a position where 33 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other (see FIG. 38).
This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

In the present embodiment, the forming range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower portion of the tubular portion 433 can be particularly opened. As a result, it is possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electric wiring DH1 that tends to hang down due to its own weight and the extension portion 463 inside the tubular portion 433.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from getting too close to the forming portion 464 side, whereby the recessed portion 463a is placed on the back side of the auxiliary member 470 in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400. The recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially concealed by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, in any state from the retracted state to the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470. Therefore, the extending portion 463 and the forming portions 464L, 464R of the pair of left and right pinnate members 460 can be easily visually recognized symmetrically, so that the symmetrically displaced members are configured asymmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

The transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward from the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. Along with the transmission of the driving force, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is hung on the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 461. However, assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is It is configured so that it does not displace at a constant velocity (it is configured so that the angular velocity changes).

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the tubular portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the bending change portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). In this case, the downward displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 increases the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, it is possible to construct a powerful effect of displacing and coalescing at a high speed as compared with a configuration in which a pair of pinnate members 460 decelerate during displacement.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the pinnate member 460 immediately before the pair of pinnate members 460 are closely united. There is a possibility that the pair of pinnate members 460 will rebound greatly due to the impact of the impact, and there is a risk that the effect of the present embodiment of combining the pair of pinnate members 460 to visually recognize a series of decorative patterns will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curvature changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the pinnate member 460 (the pinnate member 460 on the left side) provided with the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). It is formed as an elongated hole extending in the direction of ascending inclination. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) at the place where the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is arranged.
Corresponds to the amount of upward displacement (hereinafter, also referred to as "upward correction amount") of the bending change portion 491b with respect to the elongated hole parallel to.

When the curvature changing portion 491b is configured as an elongated hole extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the rotation axis side as in the present embodiment, the columnar overhanging portion 467 is displaced downward (a pair of pinnate members 4).
The closer to the state in which 60 is united), the larger the above-mentioned upward correction amount. Therefore, the degree (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 changes downward.

Therefore, the speed increase can be moderately suppressed as compared with the configuration exemplified in the brake structure that maintains the same friction state. The actual displacement speed of the pinnate member 460 will be described later.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 400. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 39 (a). b)
In FIG. 39 (c), the rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39 (c), the rotation amount (angle change) of the pinnate member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, the terminal gear 41
While 3 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not result in constant speed rotation, and the elevating plate 4
The vertical displacement of 30 is not a constant velocity displacement either.

That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant velocity rotation) and the control mode of the elevating plate 430 (non-constant velocity displacement), and the elevating plate 43 in the driving force transmission path.
The displacement mode on the downstream side of 0 is affected by this displacement. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed, it is difficult to displace the constituent members arranged on the downstream side in the transmission path at a constant speed.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is still large. Since it depends on the elevating displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, it does not become a constant velocity displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined in the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the elevating displacement (vertical displacement) of the elevating plate 430. The configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same manner as the conversion to.

That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 into the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 accompanying the vertical displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, FIG. 39 (a)).
The conversion formula for converting the numerical value on the horizontal axis into the numerical value on the vertical axis) is to be converted from the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By applying in reverse, the displacement of the displacement mode can be partially offset, and the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement mode of the rotary gear 441 can be approximated.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 is such that the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is 90 degrees, 1
On the other hand, the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is such that the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is from 30 degrees to 17 degrees, while the deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 begins to occur from around 40 degrees (see FIG. 39 (a)).
The deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed over the vicinity of 0 degrees (see FIG. 39 (b)).

As a result, for example, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed by rotating the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 at a constant speed (see FIG. 39B), so that the relative displacement member 442 can be rotated at a constant speed. Can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed.

As a result, the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the first operation unit 40 can be visually recognized by the player.
It is possible to easily set the speed of the drive motor MT1 by back calculation from the displacement mode to be executed to 0.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence on the tip end side of the transmission path by the configuration in which the advantageous effect occurs only on the drive device side in the transmission path of the driving force. here,
With reference to the elevating plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side will be described as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side thereof will be described as the tip end side of the transmission path.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the extended state of the first operating unit 400.
It is preferable from the viewpoint of quickly starting and stopping the arm member 414, but on the tip side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state becomes extremely small, so that the displacement There was a problem in that it tended to be slow.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 is set before the arm member 414 reaches the displacement end. It can be dealt with by changing the speed to or controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the deceleration of the arm member 414 occurs (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, there is a problem that the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for the displacement on the tip side of the transmission path becomes small and the width of the displacement mode is narrowed. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode on the tip end side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, so that synchronization is performed immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operating unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 (and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 arranged on the downstream side thereof) arranged on the tip end side of the transmission path while making the maximum use of the rotation angle of the arm member 414). It is possible to prevent the displacement of the.

What is visible to the player is the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. FIG. 39 (
As shown in c), the rotational angular velocities of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the end gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed tend to increase (constant speed or higher) until immediately before the stop, and are described above immediately before the stop. The speed is reduced according to the shape of the bending change portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491.

As a result, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be increased or decreased as compared with the case where the displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430. Therefore, a powerful displacement can be realized and the effect of production can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while the rotational angular velocities tend to increase (the pinnate members 460 are united with each other), the pinnate member 460 is provided with a section for decelerating immediately before the pinnate member 460. It is possible to suppress the bouncing displacement after coalescence.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 that is displaced on the downstream side thereof, and the fixed transmission plate 490. , The displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be different.

In particular, the displacement mode once changed can be changed to the original return side while heading downstream along the transmission path of the driving force. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are displaced in synchronization, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

Although the case of displacement from the retracted state to the extended state has been described as a control mode of the drive motor MT1, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to invert at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reverse-controlled so that the first operation unit 400 reciprocates (repeatedly reciprocates) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending, the elevating plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state before the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, so that the player can visually recognize the evacuation plate 430. The displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be limited to the vertical displacement, and the rotational displacement can be eliminated.

Even if the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are displaced relative to the elevating plate 430 in the vertical direction, so that the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, the operating unit 3
The state in which the game board 13 is removed from 00 and placed on the front side is shown in the figure, and the operation unit 30 is shown.
0 and the upper part of the game board 13 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 40, a transparent cover member 79 is arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and is formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin.
The outer shape of 0 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the configuration below it is visually illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The upper surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operating unit 700 are visibly arranged in the light guide member 714. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60.

41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a light guide member 714 in which a plurality (8 in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and an illumination member arranged on the left and right. It includes a substrate 777.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide the irradiation light emitted from below, and the irradiation light is transmitted from the upper end portion. The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED configured to be able to irradiate the front side with light. In this way, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714, and can emit light to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777.

43 and 44 are an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is shown in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is shown in a directional view looking up from below. Further, in FIG. 45, the projecting holding portion 724 is shown in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, the second operating unit 700 is a rear case 31.
A base member 701 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of 0 (see FIG. 40) and a base member 70 thereof.
A cover member 720 that is covered from above 1 and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is sandwiched between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 and can be rotationally displaced (rotatably displaced at a rotational angle of about 6 degrees).
A plate-shaped displacement member 730 pivotally supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and a plurality of hollow members (eight in the present embodiment) configured to be at least vertically displaceable, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. 740 and a plurality of variable decorative members 75 (three in this embodiment) that are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side of the hollow member 740 and can be displaced at least vertically.
A pair of 0 and each of which are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701 have a configuration substantially axisymmetric with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and can apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It includes a drive unit 760 and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40).

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member having a shape that covers the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any of the constituent members of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back surface side, the light guide member 714
A part of the light emitted directly above from the upper end of the can be refracted toward the back side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so that even when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light is guided. Optical member 71
It is possible to make it easy to notice the change in the lighting state of 4 (including the change in light and darkness, the vibration of light, and the displacement of the hollow member 740).

In addition, in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, and FIG. 45, the illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 7
01 faces a plate-shaped member 702 formed so as to have sufficient strength, an illuminated substrate 705 that is fastened and fixed facing the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 702, and the upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705. A partition member 708 that is arranged and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702, a thin film cover member 712 that is a member that covers the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from a resin, and a thin film cover member 712 thereof. A plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 714 placed in contact with the light guide member 714, and a plate-shaped member covered from above the light guide member 714, the light guide member 7.
A displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the ascent and horizontal displacement of the 14 is provided.

The plate-shaped member 702 is formed in pairs on the left and right side portions of the plate-shaped member 702 and the engaging portion 702a formed so as to be engaged with the hook-shaped portion 721c of the cover member 720. A receiving recess 702b that is recessed so that the 731 can be pivotally supported, a regulating protrusion 702c that is projected upward from the front side edge and is formed so that the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be regulated, and a fastening screw can be screwed in. And a plurality of columnar projecting portions 703a formed in the above, and a plurality of columnar projecting portions 703b formed in a columnar shape extending upward beyond the fastening portion 703a so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the projecting tip portion. , A plurality of through holes 704 bored in the vertical direction are provided.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing the fastening screws to be inserted into the illuminated substrate 705, and are formed at three locations, the center on the left and right and the left and right ends, and particularly the fastening portions 703a on the left and right ends.
Is provided with a protruding pin for positioning.

By arranging the illuminated board 705 so that the projected pin is inserted into the through hole formed in the illuminated board 705 corresponding to the protruding pin for positioning, the fastening screw is inserted into the illuminated board 705. Since the through hole to be drilled and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected to each other, the illuminated substrate 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702 by inserting a fastening screw through the through hole.

The columnar projecting portion 703b includes a displacement regulating member 716, a thin film cover member 712, and a partition member 70.
It is a portion into which the fastening screw to be inserted in the order of 8 is screwed, and the base end side is formed to be inclined in a trapezoidal shape. This makes it easier to place the Illuminations substrate 705 in an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 is formed with a size capable of passing a connector (not shown) arranged on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 705 and electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illuminated substrate 705, and does not project above the illuminated substrate 705. This will result in
The entire upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705 can be utilized as a disposable area of the light emitting means 706 such as an LED.

The illuminated substrate 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs and the like, and a base member 701.
In the assembled state (see FIG. 43), a columnar projecting portion 703b and an open portion 707 that is openly formed so as to have a slight gap are provided.

A plurality of light emitting means 706 are arranged along a straight line facing the left-right direction (8 in this embodiment).
The individual light emitting means 706a and a plurality of whole light emitting means 706b arranged at different positions from the individual light emitting means 706a are provided.

The open portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b, and the columnar projecting portion 7 is formed.
The protruding end position of 03b is above the position where the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illuminated substrate 705 is downwardly displaced to the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the open portion 707 advances along the columnar projecting portion 703b.

In the present embodiment, since the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a top view circular shape and a front viewing table shape that narrows toward the upper side, the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed. The sides are tilted with respect to the vertical direction. When the illuminated substrate 705 is displaced downward, if it is largely displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the position arranged in the assembled state, it is along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b. Since the misalignment of the illuminated board 705 can be corrected.
The illumination substrate 705 can be easily arranged at a desired position.

The partition member 708 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of translucent holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a.
A plurality of through holes 710a formed with an inner diameter capable of inserting the tip portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed in. A plurality of receiving portions 710 that are recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to accept the projecting pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at a position displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the fastening portion 710b.
With c.

The translucent hole 709 is formed in a front and rear long crystal-shaped (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) cross section, and the long direction thereof faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. That is, the more the translucent hole 709 near the center, the smaller the deviation between the long direction and the front-back direction (in the present embodiment).
(Matched), the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the length direction is toward the front and the direction toward the center of the left and right.

That is, the long direction of the translucent hole 709 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a colorless and transparent resin member in the form of a thin film having low rigidity, is formed so that the central portion is raised, the lower surface side is open, and the thin film cover member 712 is bored up and down at the left and right ends of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through holes 712a, a plurality of middle through holes 712b bored up and down inside the outer through holes 712a in the left-right direction, and vertically displaced with respect to the middle through holes 712b. It is provided with a plurality of small through holes 712c to be drilled.

The large through hole 712a is formed to have a diameter longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 in an annular shape surrounding the periphery of the insertion hole 716a. Since the projecting portion 716e projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 projects with a projecting length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, a load (fastening) at the time of assembling to the edge portion of the large through hole 712a is provided. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of load).

One of the middle through holes 712b is arranged at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b at the center position on the front side, and the other is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through hole 712c is arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b arranged at the position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and is projected from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 and is a partition member. The protrusion pin 716b received by the receiving portion 710c of the 708 is formed to have a size that allows it to be inserted.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, and the displacement regulating member 7 is placed on the partition member 708.
When each member is fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws into various places after the 16 is placed, the protruding pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the partition member 716 has a small through hole 712c and a receiving portion 71.
Since it is inserted through 0c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 can be easily (simultaneously) aligned with the partition member 708 before the fastening screw is screwed in, and then the fastening screw is screwed. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the work to be entered.

The light guide member 714 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and is formed into a bottomed cylinder shape having a bottom at the top, and the outer shape of the top view is formed into a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a main body portion 714a, an overhanging edge portion 714b projecting from the lower edge thereof to the left and right and forward, and an inclined surface portion 714c that is inclined downward toward the front side at the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body portion 714a is textured, a single individual light emitting means 7 is formed.
When the light emitted from 06a, traveling inside the light guide member 714 and reaching the upper end portion is visually recognized by the player, the light can be visually recognized as if it is emitted by a surface instead of point emission.

On the other hand, in the main body portion 714a, a smooth surface is formed without embossing on a portion (intermediate portion or the like) other than the upper outer surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body portion 714a, and the light is totally reflected by the smooth surface of the main body portion 714a. Since it is possible to easily move the light toward the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a, it is possible to reduce the energy loss of light at the intermediate position of the main body portion 714a.

The long direction of the upper surface of the main body 714a of each light guide member 714 follows the setting of the long direction of the translucent hole 709 described above. That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide member 714 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front and the left and right center. It is said to be in the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the light guide member 714 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end portion in the long direction in the top view of the light guide member 714 (
The portion close to the player as the portion that irradiates the player side with light) can be directed toward the player side (front side, left and right center) as compared with the center position in the elongated direction. That is, the light guide member 71
It is possible to make the player feel that the light radiated from 4 to the player side is gathered toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed with a constant vertical thickness and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c frontally receives light incident from below the light guide member 714. It functions to emit light toward the side, but details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is provided from a plurality of insertion holes 716a through which fastening screws can be inserted and projecting from the lower surface. The inner shape of the lower edge portion of the plurality of projecting pins 716b, the plurality of receiving cylinder portions 716c formed in a tubular shape vertically penetrating at the positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and the receiving cylinder portion 716c is expanded. It is provided with a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are recessed in a stepped manner so as to allow the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714 to be received.

The inner shape of the receiving cylinder portion 716c is substantially the same as the inner shape of the translucent hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 716d is the light guide member 7.
Since it is the same as the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b of 14, the second operation unit 70
In the assembled state of 0 (see FIG. 40), the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 71.
The overhanging edge portion 714b can be stably supported on the surface so as to sandwich the overhanging edge portion 714b with the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed overhanging on the left and right and the front side, and the formation on the back side is omitted. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 is also recessed on the left and right and the front side, and the recessing on the back surface side is omitted. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction.

That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is to be assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b is misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is provided on the recessed portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the overhanging edge portion 714b projects from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. The gap corresponding to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is the thin film cover member 712.
By causing it between the displacement regulating member 716 and making it difficult to fasten and fix it, the assembly worker (or the automatic machine for assembly) is made aware that the light guide member 714 is oriented upside down. Can be done.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 71
The overhanging edge portion 714b is sandwiched between the light guide member 714 and the light guide member 714 in the vertical direction, whereby the position and posture of the light guide member 714 are stably fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the illuminated substrate 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b, placed at the fastening position, and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702. Next, the illuminated board 7
Above 05, each component is arranged in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-shaped member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar projecting portion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712 are positioned.
By passing the protrusion pin 716b through c, the displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Further, by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716. In this way, since the constituent members are relatively positioned before the fastening screw is screwed in, the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

Finally, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 716a, and the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projecting portion 703b are inserted.
Each component can be fastened and fixed by screwing into. According to the present embodiment, after each component arranged above the illuminated substrate 705 is placed at an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, thereby simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the process of screwing the fastening screw (use of an automatic machine for screw turning).

In the present embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be pulled out at the stage where the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protrusion 703b, but the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the fastening portion 710b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is mounted on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially identified with the configuration in which the light guide member 714 is mounted on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714. By supporting the light guide member 714, it is possible to stabilize the support of the light guide member 714.

In addition, since the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, it is possible to prevent light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708. Can be planned.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The cover member 720 is a member formed of a colored (blue in the present embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is disposed on the peripheral edge of the lower surface with respect to the base member 701. Multiple joints 72 used for bonding
1 and a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a pair of left and right on the front side of the rear through hole 722. A plurality of front through holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) as one set of through holes, and downward from the rear left and right outer portions and the front left and right inner portions of the rear through holes 722. It is provided with a plurality of projecting holding portions 724 to be projecting.

The joint portion 721 has a plurality of insertion holes 721a through which the fastening screw can be inserted from above.
A plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws inserted from below are inserted into the base member 701, and a plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the left and right outer back surfaces and engaged with the base member 701. Be prepared.

The upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are different between the four locations closer to the center and the four locations closer to the left and right. In this embodiment, the one closer to the center is formed higher. This is the cover member 7
It is with the design of the upper surface shape of 20. That is, in order to give a three-dimensional effect to the upper surface shape of the cover member 720, the upper and lower positions of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722 are formed so that the portion near the center is raised and visible. Has been adjusted.

The protrusion length of the protrusion holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722. That is, the protrusion holding portion 724 arranged closer to the center has a longer protrusion length, so that the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 is adjusted equally on the left and right. In addition, both the protrusion holding portion 724 on the front side and the protrusion holding portion 724 on the back side are
Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 in the vertical direction, even if the posture of the hollow member 740 is lost, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is a plate-shaped displacement member 7.
It is possible to prevent the portion 30 from falling off from the small receiving portion 735.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower positions of the lower end of the protrusion 724 on the back side are arranged lower than the upper and lower positions of the lower end of the protrusion 724 on the front side. As a result, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the projecting pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the backward tilted posture. As a result, it is possible to easily show the shape and pattern on the front side of the tubular main body portion 741 of the hollow member 740 to the player who sees the hollow member 740 when looking down from the front side.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of shafted support portions 731 that are coaxially projected from both left and right ends in a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are bored in the vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and a shafted support portion 731. A pair of loaded parts 733 that are extended in a plate shape to the front side and receive a push-up load from below, and
A plurality of light guide insertion holes 734 that are vertically bored with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted, and a pair of light guide insertion holes 734 that are arranged diagonally to form a top view ring. It is provided with a plurality of small receiving portions 735 projecting from the top view, and a plurality of large receiving portions 736 arranged at the center position of the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 and projecting in the shape of a top view ring.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The loaded portion 733 is arranged on the front side of the rotation shaft passing through the center of the shaft-mounted support portion 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to each of the left and right, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the mode of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, or the load at short time intervals. Is given, or whether a continuous load is given, etc.), and the rotational displacement is performed around the shafted branch 731 in a different manner, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front and rear, and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. ..

That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front and the left and right center. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends.
In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the hollow member 740, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and guides light. The relationship of the insertion hole 734 with respect to the long direction (the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side), the assembled state of the second operation unit 700. The posture of the hollow member 740 in (see FIG. 40) can be changed.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the hollow member 740 is closer to the center, and the longer direction is closer to the front left and right toward the center as it is closer to the left and right ends. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the elongated direction of the hollow member 740 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a circular cross section, and the front small receiving portion 735a is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. It is provided with a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in the shape of a bottomed cylinder.

In the present embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the projecting columnar portion 7 of the hollow member 740
The diameter of the cross section of 43 is designed to be 3 [mm], and the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is 4.8 [.
The diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap size generated in the opposite direction between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 is such that the gap size between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 is larger than that of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion. Part 7
It is smaller than the clearance dimension with 43.

This makes it possible to order the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported by allowing rattling. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a can be more likely to occur than the rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b.

In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily displaced in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. , Hollow member 7 due to rotational displacement of plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later.
The direction of displacement of 40 can be adjusted so as to spread outward to the left and right toward the back surface side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the variable decorative member 750.
Compared to the large receiving portion 736 arranged on the center line CL1, the large receiving portion 736 arranged on both the left and right sides has a longer distance from the rotation axis passing through the center of the shafted branch 731, and is in the vertical position. Is formed differently, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the left side and four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the right side are formed in a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 will be described in detail, and the hollow member 740 arranged on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714 so that the light leaking from the front, back, left and right of the light guide member 714 is not visible (difficult) to the player. Light guide member 71 that makes it easy to see the light
A cylinder that is configured to attract the player's line of sight to the upper tip of 4, and has an outer frame designed in a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately turtle shell shape) in the front and back, and is open vertically. A cylindrical main body portion 741 formed in a shape, a flat plate extending portion 742 extending in a flat plate shape in the front-back and left-right directions from the lower edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741, and a plate lower surface of the flat plate extending portion 742. It is provided with a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 projecting downward from the column.

The outer shape of the tubular main body 741 in the upper view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720, while the outer shape of the flat plate extending portion 742 in the upper view is the cover member. It is formed so as to be larger than the top view inside shape of the rear through hole 722 of the 720. That is, the second
In the assembled state of the operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is restricted from being pulled out upward of the cover member 720 while being vertically displaceable while being inserted through the rear through hole 722. ..

The upper edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741 is lowered toward the front side. As a result, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. on the other hand,
Most of the light directed upward on the back surface side is blocked by the cylindrical main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be satisfactorily delivered to the eyes of the player, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from being deteriorated due to this.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion where the ascending displacement is restricted by the projecting holding portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the projecting holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting columnar portion 743 on the back surface side, and regulates the ascending displacement of the hollow member 740. In this way, the hollow member 74 is formed by forming the protruding holding portion 724 and the protruding columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions.
Even when 0 changes its posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 is the small receiving portion 7 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from coming out of the 35, the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The projecting columnar portion 743 has a projecting tip formed in a hemispherical shape and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (See FIG. 40), it is accepted by the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of projecting columnar portions 743 and the tubular main body portion 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetric. This makes it possible to change the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 when assembled upside down. , It is possible to prevent erroneous installation. It should be noted that the hollow members 740 are arranged four each on the left and right.
Is formed from a symmetrical shape, so that it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 assembled on the left side from the left-right center position from being assembled on the right side (it is possible to prevent erroneous attachment).

Here, the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the center of the rotation axis facing the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the projecting columnar portion 743 is mainly due to the vertical displacement allowed by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49 (a), 49 (b) and 49 (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. Figure 49 (
In a), the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown, in FIG. 49 (b), the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown, and in FIG. 49 (c), the plate-shaped displacement member is shown. The upper end posture of the member 730 is illustrated. The horizontal posture corresponds to the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 2.1 degrees around the reference O1 from the lower terminal posture, and the upper terminal posture is
From the horizontal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates about 4 degrees around the reference O1 (rising displacement).
Corresponds to the posture.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture (lower end posture (initial posture)). ), The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, the rear small receiving portion 735b is recessed deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, so that the support position of the front small receiving portion 735a in the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( Support position (bottom) and rear small receiving portion 735b (bottom)
The vertical deviation of the bottom) is suppressed.

As a result, the hollow member 74 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture).
It is possible to prevent the posture of 0 from becoming a forward leaning posture. Further, the hollow member 740 is configured so that the surfaces of the support positions (bottoms) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even when is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 is set closer to the front (initial position) before the operation of the drive unit 760. Can be maintained stably.

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 both in the front and rear. ..
Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be randomly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the process of displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 abuts on the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed to the back side. Be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with respect to the upper end posture (near the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is centered on the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. Is easy to rotate and displace. That is, it is configured so that the displacement mode that tends to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 that is the reference of the small vibration.

A light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the tubular main body portion 741, and a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 are supported by being received by the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, first, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced according to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced about the reference O1 which is a straight line (straight line facing the left-right direction) connecting the shaft-mounted support portions 731, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (the reference O1 direction (straight line)).
It does not displace in the left-right direction), but displaces on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1. Along with this, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also promoted to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is not only displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1 but also displaced in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) due to the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination. Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. The displacement or posture change of the 740 in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (center side) 7
The change in the degree of inclination of 35 and the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the side far from the center line CL1 (left and right outside)
It is different from the change in the degree of inclination of 35. In the present embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of left and right small receiving portions 735 having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. Is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). As a result, the amount of change in posture of the hollow member 740 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a certain manner is determined by the center line C.
It can be changed depending on whether it is near or far from L1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress the resistance of the hollow member 740 at the time of displacement, the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714
The arrangement of the small receiving portion 735, the shape of the hollow member 740, and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed in relation to the size of the gap between the outer surface and the outer surface of the light receiving portion 735.

Here, the design gap is different between the long direction of the light guide member 714 in the top view and the direction orthogonal to the long direction. That is, the gap in the long direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the long direction.

Therefore, as the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the long direction becomes larger (the one arranged on the left and right outer sides), the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 become larger. The gap in the front-rear direction between them will be narrowed.

Therefore, when the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-rear direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides are pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or large. It may be easily loaded and damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of shielding the portion other than the tip portion of the light guide member 714 by the hollow member 740 and gathering the line of sight of the player at the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 arranged on the left and right center side. It is configured as follows.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are located on the left and right center sides. It is arranged so that the distance between the front side small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the arranged small receiving portion 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the amount of front-rear displacement of the hollow member 740 that is pushed forward and displaced rearward is arranged on the left and right center sides. It can be geometrically defined so that the members arranged on the left and right outer sides are slightly smaller than the members arranged on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is formed substantially evenly in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel in the horizontal direction. Even if it moves, it is provided so as not to fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740.

Therefore, in a state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced, the displacement is suppressed to less than the clearance dimension between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

Since the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the center of the small receiving portion 735 and the hollow It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while being aligned with the center of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the member 740.

At least in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743, the small receiving portion 735
Since the arrangement of the projecting columnar portion 743 is changed with respect to the above, the hollow member 740 may be displaced in the left-right direction or the posture may be changed due to this change.

A mode for pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large).
), The front side portion of the inner side surface starts to come into contact with the front side surface of the projecting columnar portion 743, and is pushed toward the back surface side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, the front portion of the inner surface of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743.
A gap is maintained between the front part and the front part of the. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction about the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. It is configured to be able to cope with the change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 in the top view due to the displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the back surface side, and the rear small receiving portion receives a rattling that allows rotational displacement around the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the projecting columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide with each other during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated with the 714 can be kept small, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from being cracked or chipped.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The variable decorative member 750 is a cover member 72.
A bifurcated support member 751 supported between 0 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the bifurcated support member 7
It is provided with a decorative member 756 which is fastened and fixed to 51 and is arranged on the upper side of the cover member 720.

The bifurcated support member 751 has a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting downward from the lower surface of the central portion of the plate-shaped body portion formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and both left and right end portions of the plate-shaped body portion. A pair of tubular protrusions 753 (different lengths) that are projected upward from the center, and a plate-shaped extension that extends from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. It is equipped with 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The tubular protrusion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 has a front through hole 723.
The front through hole 723 allows the bifurcated support member 751 to be vertically displaced, while the large receiving portion 736 is rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of the shafted support portion 731.
Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, the tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. can.

The plate-shaped extending portion 754 acts to arrange the position of the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the back surface side of the center of the columnar projecting portion 752. That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stable under its own weight can be set as the backward leaning posture. As a result, the contact position between the columnar projecting portion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since it can be moved toward the front side, the displacement amount of the variable decorative member 750 near the start time of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be increased.

The decorative member 756 is a pair of projecting leg portions 75 projecting downward corresponding to the tubular projecting portion 753.
A female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg 757. The projecting leg portion 757 is inserted inside the tubular projecting portion 753.

The plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the tubular projecting portion 753. By inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the projecting leg 757, the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 75 are inserted.
7 is fastened and fixed.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is attached to the cover member 720. That is, the tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the tubular projecting portion 753 to project. The fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg portion 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed in this order on the base member 701, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. The cover member 72
When assembling 0 to the base member 701, the hook-shaped portion 721c is engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back surface side of the plate-shaped member 702, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above to cover the cover member. After fastening and fixing the 720 and the base member 701, turn it upside down and fasten the fastening portion 721.
Screw the fastening screw into b.

As a result, a plurality of members are non-fixedly arranged between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and the fastening screws are screwed into a plurality of places from the lower surface, but each component member is in the middle of assembly. Can be prevented from falling off from between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is arranged below the base member 701, and the fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix the drive unit 760. In the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the traveling direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, so that the second operating unit 700 is attached to the rear case 310. It is difficult to remove the fastening screw in the housed state. Therefore, when the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently taken out from the rear case 310.

Further, on the back side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 is formed in which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screw is inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operating unit 700. Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at the stage, it is possible to make the operator aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. This makes it possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being forgotten to be assembled.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, a drive unit 760 arranged on the right side of the front view is shown. The drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, but the components are symmetrical, so the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail.
The description of the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 is a load member 7 configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The shaft rod portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761 and the shaft rod portion 762, and the shaft rod portion 762 thereof are fixed and as a whole. Is a case-shaped support case 763, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 arranged inside the support case 763, and a front lid member 770 arranged on the front side of the support case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763. And the illuminated substrate 777, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770.
And have.

The load member 761 is formed of a resin material, and extends outward from the base end portion 761a in which a through hole through which the shaft rod portion 762 is inserted is formed and the base end portion 761a, and is abbreviated. A rod-shaped extension portion 761b that is bent and formed in a U-shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c that is formed in a rod shape that bends upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b to the front side, and a rod-shaped extension portion. Setting part 761b
An arc centered on the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d protruding from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction and the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Opposing curved portion 761e formed in a shape and arranged to face the curved projecting portion 774 of the front lid member 770.
And prepare.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB2 is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.
In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b by engaging with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB2 are arranged on both sides of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b in the longitudinal direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (Only the back side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB2 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. This regulates the slide, and at that position, the metal plate member MB2
The push-down of the elastic claw is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw engages so as to restrict the retracting of the metal plate member MB2 to the back surface side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.
It may be tied up with a binding band, or it may be stuck with an adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 has a projecting frame portion 771 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protrusions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion 771. From the back of the plate, the cylindrical portion 772, the wiring through recess 773 recessed so that the electric wiring connected to the illuminated board 777 at the lower edge portion or the connector connected to the end of the electric wiring can be passed through. Shaft rod part 76
It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 projecting in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on 2.

The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to face the periphery of the illuminated substrate 777, and is a portion that prevents the illuminated substrate 777 from being loaded from the vertical and horizontal directions.

The projecting columnar portion 772 includes a front-view gourd-shaped seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 779 of the illuminated substrate 777. By assembling, the back surface of the illuminated substrate 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided in the seat portion, and the illuminated substrate 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion.

The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect, and a plurality of through holes 77 formed in the illuminated substrate 777 for assembly.
9 and.

The through holes 779 are formed at a plurality of places (two places in the present embodiment) as a pair of circular through holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the projecting columnar portion 772.

In this embodiment, the illuminated substrate 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is,
This corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777, which are arranged close to each other on the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, are configured like a single rigid body. Therefore, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2
The vibration generated by the excitation of the light emitting means 778 can easily vibrate the illuminated substrate 777, and the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be configured to vibrate the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778. ..

In this embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is arranged between the load member 761 displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, it is possible to prevent excessive transmission of vibration.

The width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the light emitting means 77
The setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from 8 is to be vibrated or not to be vibrated. In the former case, the width dimension may be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 has a lower regulating portion 764 disposed below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and an upper regulating portion 765 disposed on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
And a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 310 is screwed.

The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51 (a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and is displaced ascending.

That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the ascending position arranged as a result of rising by the electromagnetic force and the descending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and descending by its own weight. , The plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives the load from the load member 761 is the shafted support portion 7.
It is displaced in the direction of rotation about 31. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, FIG. 51
In (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 77 except for the curved protrusion 774.
The illustration of No. 7 is omitted, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 7
The state in which the 61 is arranged in the descending position by its own weight is illustrated. In FIG. 51 (b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 76.
The state in which 1 is arranged in the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the load member 761 abuts on the lower regulating portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are arranged with reference to the shaft rod portion 762 (the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are arranged with reference to the shaft rod portion 762.
The distance from the shaft rod portion 762) is configured to be different, but the effect caused by this will be described.

First, the load applied to the lower regulation unit 764 via the load member 761 is mainly the load member 7.
Since the load is generated by the own weight of 61, the load member 761 can be stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the position of the center of gravity is substantially the center position of the member, but the load member 76
In No. 1, the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend bifurcatedly from the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, so that the center of gravity is on the extension tip side of the substantially center position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. Will be placed in.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower regulation portion 764 is arranged on the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b as a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761. ..

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The benefits associated with location are small. In the present embodiment, the upper regulation portion 765 is arranged to face the rotational tip of the load member 761 to reduce the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is higher at a position away from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper restricting member 765 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the load member 761, so that in the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Overhanging to the outer diameter side of the circle centered on the shaft rod portion 762, and the overhanging portion 761d
Is configured to come into contact with the upper restricting member 765. As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and stably generate the load transmission on the rotation tip side.

In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 but is configured to pull it up by an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core arranged in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured to pull up the load member 761 by attracting the metal plate member MB2.

According to this configuration, as compared with the configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by the member that moves by the electromagnetic force, the load member 761 is overloaded (locally) even when the load member 761 is displaced by the load applied to the load member 761. Since the load is unlikely to occur, it is possible to easily prevent the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being damaged. Thereby, even if the load member 761 is configured to receive a fluctuating load as in the present embodiment, the useful life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the load member 761, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (predetermined on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state of receiving an attraction force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (rising position). While making contact at multiple points on a flat surface), a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (the part containing the coil), and the above-mentioned surface contact surface is provided. The upper regulating portion 765 and the overhanging portion 761d are configured to be in contact with each other on a surface parallel to the surface.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is applied to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 to prevent the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being overloaded. It can be dispersed and received at the lower edge portion or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid a large load locally.

At the ascending position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. It is configured to be provided, and the load from the load member 761 is applied to the upper regulating unit 7.
It may be configured to receive only 65. In this case, since the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be cut off, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
The durability of L2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load tends to concentrate on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken).
Even in this case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one point. can.

Further, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 abuts on the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points, so that a detection sensor is separately configured so that this abutment can be detected. Therefore, the breakage (breakage) of the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) due to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 rebounds after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the upper regulation unit 765 is considered only for the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765.
The arrangement and posture of the shaft can be designed (a straight line passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 76).
The angle with the straight line along the width direction of 5 can be designed to be small).

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulation portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulation portion 764 and the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the lower regulation portion 764 has a lower regulation portion 764. The direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed as compared with the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line (force decomposition). As a result, it is possible to suppress the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764.

Moreover, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a long width dimension (width along the radial direction), a wide area of the surface to be loaded can be secured, and the load due to the weight of the load member 761 can be used. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulation portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulation unit 764 and the upper regulation unit 765 via the load member 761 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions.
Bounce can be suppressed.

The materials of the upper regulation unit 765 and the lower regulation unit 764 are not limited in any way.
For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane and epoxy resin may be used, and rubbery materials may be used. In addition, the upper regulation part 765
And the material of the lower regulation part 764 may be made of the same material or may be different.

For example, when the upper regulating unit 765 is provided with a function of suppressing the positional displacement in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 can receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the raised position. As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent frictional resistance as well as damping property may be adopted.

In this case, the load member 7 is applied by the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761.
It is possible to easily prevent the 61 from being displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction) only in a state where the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposed curved portion 761e is displaced on the back surface side of the curved projecting portion 774. Since both the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side and the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the facing curved portion 76
Since the 1e and the curved projecting portion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, the resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposed curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above the portion. In the present embodiment, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is arranged in this secured space.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the facing curved portion 761e, but unlike the facing curved portion 761e that is formed to be curved, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is extended straight in front view. That is, the load member 761
Is formed in a rod shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in a state where the is arranged in the ascending position.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the load member 761 from bending and deforming to the left and right due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even with the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stably pushed up. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the support mode will be described later.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is formed in a rod shape that extends straight in the vertical direction in the front view, but is in the middle position (axis) so that the upper end portion is arranged on the front side rather than the lower end portion in the side view. Bending (bending at an obtuse angle) is formed at the left position of the rod portion 762).

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 below the vicinity of the shaft rod portion 762 can be moved toward the back surface side, and the arrangement area of the member arranged on the front surface side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illuminated substrate 777 can be moved to the back side, by separating the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illuminated substrate 777, the light emitting means 778 irradiates the bottom surface of the flow. The light visually recognized through the members 91 and 92 can be easily recognized as a wide light. In other words, instead of the point emission that is visually recognized by the size of the outer shape of the LED, the surface emission that the light reaches in a circle around the optical axis and shines in a plane can be easily recognized.

Further, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed by bending back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, an overload is locally caused when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if it occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the flexibility of the load member 761 different in the front-rear and left-right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. The effect of being able to do it can be achieved.

The load member 761 has an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761 in a state of being arranged in the ascending position. Is supported more stably.

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the base end portion 761a to the overhanging portion 761d are still stably supported by the load. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, the load member 761 may be damaged by rubbing against other members.
It is possible to prevent an extra driving force for driving the load member 761 from being required.

<Action of the second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700,
Since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right, the displacement of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly. Is also configured differently. In the following, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be described.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 52,
A state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the lowered position is shown. In FIG. 53, only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 is arranged in the lowered position, and the load of the right drive unit 760 is placed. The state in which the member 761 is upwardly displaced from the descending position to the ascending position is shown, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the ascending position.

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state (non-excited state) in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not in contact with each other.
The posture of is the lower end posture (initial posture) maintained by the contact with the base member 701.

The state shown in FIG. 53 is the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side) (
(See FIG. 50) corresponds to a state in which the current is controlled to flow (one-sided excitation state).
In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pushed up by the load member 761 on the right side, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in an intermediate posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal posture in the intermediate posture.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In the present embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in the shape of a small-diameter rod and is formed to be bent in the front-rear direction, and is easily bent in the lateral direction (front-back direction). It is formed with strength (rigidity) that allows it to bend and deform due to its own weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied in the direction including the front-rear direction component at the contact position with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured so as to be easily deformed by bending, and the load can be released by this bending deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to the state in which the load member 761 is bent and deformed.

The plate-shaped displacement member 7 in the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below.
The difference in posture in the rising direction of 30 can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, the difference in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be designed. The elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be the same on the left and right, or may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the shape of the load member 761 of the left and right drive units 760 is symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (FIG. 50) is in the state opposite to that shown in FIG. 53. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown in FIG. 5 even if a current is passed through (see) and no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on the right side.
It is equivalent to the posture shown in 3. Therefore, in the following, the state shown in FIG. 53 is referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and the description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of its own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced to half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the load member 761 on the left side being arranged in the raised position as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load member due to the load applied via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is used. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. be.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so that the load member is divided into two. The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the bending deformation of the 761 is small (a state in which the bending deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55A, when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the load member 761 on one side. Focus on. Since the deflection deformation generated in the load member 761 is increased by this load, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed by the amount of the deflection deformation even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. A state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulation protrusion 702c (initial posture, FIG. 5).
In 5 (a) (illustrated by an imaginary line), the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The normal extending from the normal line abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the extending direction of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, the bending deformation generated in the load member 761 can be suppressed to a small extent. .. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the midway posture (see FIG. 55A), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the lower side in the front direction on the lower side in the front direction from the reference O1. It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending to.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)) where the amount of bending deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed toward the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The applied load comprises a frontal component and a downward component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the front, the load including the frontal component and the downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). The percentage of being done gradually increases)
..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the easiness of bending and deformation of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes with the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. That is, the posture in which the load starts to be applied from the load member 761 to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)).
), A rear load is generated in the direction in which the load member 761 is less likely to bend and deform, and from a horizontal posture, a load in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to bend and deform than in the direction of the rear load (downward load and , Load on the front side) occurs.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761 and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c) and the load are applied. Depending on the design of the portion 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to bend (the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted.
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 when the drive unit 760 is driven can be designed to be different.

In the present embodiment, since the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is formed to extend upward while projecting to the front side, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be bent and deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is flexed and deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of its own weight transmitted through the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be started to be used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 from the stage before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture.

In this way, the load is configured so that the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761. Even if the member 761 is over-displaced or under-displaced, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
The fluctuation that occurs in the posture of 0 can be reduced.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 directly affect the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are precisely designed so as not to be displaced, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage of the member and in the assembling stage, so that the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 is flexed and deformed, even if there is a slight difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 or the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761, it is designed to be offset by the flexure deformation of the load member 761. By setting the position, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stabilized. Therefore, the accuracy of the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage required for stabilizing the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed low, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

This is not limited to the load member 761 alone, but the same can be said for the displacement of the left and right load members 761 combined. That is, when the load member 761 of the left and right drive units 760 is configured to have a symmetrical shape as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the upper end portion of the load member 761 in the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761.

As a result, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized in the middle posture regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven in the one-sided excitation state.

Further, the load member 761 is applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733.
The direction of bending that occurs in can be limited to the front side. In this direction, the rod-shaped extension portion 761
With respect to b, it coincides with the direction of the positional deviation in the front-rear direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.
As a result, the load that causes the load member 761 to bend and deform can be configured to face the direction away from the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the influence of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 on the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Can be made smaller. In other words, load member 761
It is possible to suppress the influence on the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.

That is, rubbing or deformation that occurs in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion portion 774 and the opposed curved portion 761e, etc.). Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the mode of bending deformation of the load member 761, so that the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the premise that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. Can be easy.

In addition, the direction of bending generated in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (the same portion can be prevented from bending toward the front side or bending toward the back side depending on the situation. ) Therefore, the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of bending of the load member 761 can be related one-to-one, and the load member 761 can be compared with the case where it can bend both in the front and rear directions.
Durability can be improved.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the ascending position. (See FIG. 51 (b)).

Therefore, as described above, the load member 761 is affected by the bending deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.
The displacement of the load member 761 in the front-rear direction due to the load applied to the load member 761 can be suppressed by the friction generated between the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765.

Therefore, even when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in the excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the excited state). Control mode of repeatedly switching between the non-excited state) and the load member 761 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole.

This is because the load member 761 is not only the shaft rod portion 762 but also the shaft rod portion 7 as in the present embodiment.
It can be satisfactorily realized by the configuration supported by 62 and the upper regulation unit 765. More specifically, it is not a mode in which the load member 761 is placed between the descending position and the ascending position and receives a load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but a plate-shaped displacement with the load member 761 fixed in the ascending position. It is satisfactorily feasible because it is in a mode of receiving a load from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the shaft rod portion 762, which is the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, with respect to the longitudinal component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
Although it will resist including the side part, if the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or misaligned in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, it will be between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. There may be a gap in the space.

When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance at which the electromagnetic force is effectively generated, the electromagnetic force suddenly weakens, and it becomes difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the ascending position. As a countermeasure, increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, or increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, or increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 762 and the load member 7.
Countermeasures can be taken by increasing the resistance with 61, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavy and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 becomes larger, and in the latter case, the load member 761
It is not preferable because the driving force for rotating the solenoid solenoid SOL2 is excessively required and the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably placed not only at the shaft rod portion 762 but also at the left and right ends of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b as compared with the case of supporting on one of the left and right sides, the frictional resistance generated between the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the upper regulating portion 765 causes the axial displacement of the load member 761. It can be suppressed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extending portion 761b due to the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from being twisted and deformed.

It will be described back to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state (excitation state) in which a current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the load members 761 on both the left and right sides are loaded with the load portions 73 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
When 3 is pushed up, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction, and is in the upper terminal posture. In this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture.
Is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the midway posture (about 6.1 degrees from the lower end posture and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. By doing so, the deflection generated in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In addition, in FIG. 54, for convenience, the deflection of the left and right load members 761 is shown as being so small that it cannot be discriminated. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the shape of the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in the present embodiment, by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed in a plurality of ways (at least three ways). You can switch with.

In order to switch the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. 54, the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is maintained while the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is maintained. Since the SOL2 may be excited, the posture can be easily switched smoothly.

56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b) are schematics showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a figure. In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b), the upper timing chart shows the continuity state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on the left side, and the middle timing chart shows the electromagnetic solenoid on the right side. The conduction state of SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In addition, due to the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing of conducting electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs), but in FIGS. 56 and 57, for the purpose of facilitating understanding. For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown to be displaced at the same time as the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56A is the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53.
It is the same as the mode in which the states shown in are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56B is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is shown in FIG.
It is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53.
It is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 is alternately switched and the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched are repeated.

As described above, the patterns of switching the states described above in FIGS. 52 to 54 are not one, but are generated in a plurality of patterns by different combinations of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since the pattern of switching the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 occurs in a plurality of ways, the hollow member 740 that rides on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (FIG. 43).
The displacement pattern of (see) can be configured in a plurality of ways, and the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), FIG. 57 (a) and FIG. 57 (b), for convenience,
The short-term conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown as constant, but this is only an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set separately, or may be configured to be gradually lengthened or gradually shortened, and can be arbitrarily set.

Further, by shortening the conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 for a short time, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
While the posture change of 30 can be generated instantaneously (pulse-like), the posture change can be maintained with a sufficient length by lengthening the conduction length. Furthermore, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
By shortening the conduction interval of L2, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operation unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape in a top view. In the following, the portion on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the portion on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 59, 60, 61 and 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 60, a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 61, a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 62, a plate-shaped displacement member is shown. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of shafted support portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is shown as a reference O1 as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Reference O1 is shown in the following drawings with the same meaning. In FIGS. 59 to 62, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right at the center in the left and right direction is shown.

The variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 59, 60 and 61, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 61 and 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
It is displaced (backward) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of 0, and load transmission in the front-rear direction occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The displacement of is a combination of the first stage mainly occurring in the vertical direction (the stage where the posture change from the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is small, see FIGS. 59, 60, 61) and the vertical direction and the front-back direction. It is composed of a second stage (a stage in which the posture change from the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is large, see FIGS. 61 and 62) that occurs in the direction of the above. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state, the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) can be changed by switching the drive mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The displacement mode of can be switched by a plurality of variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are not in a relationship of sandwiching the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of a load is suppressed and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. Can be done.

63, 64, 65 and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. 63, 64, 65 and 66 show the displacement of the second operating unit 700 in chronological order, and FIG. 63 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 73.
The state in which 0 is the lower end posture (initial posture) is illustrated, and in FIG. 64, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.
Is shown in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and FIG. 66 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an upper end position. Will be done. In FIGS. 63 to 66, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 on the right side at the center in the left-right direction is shown.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are arranged at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and away from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction as compared with the large receiving portions 736a in the center of the left and right.

In the following, the variable decorative member 75 (on both the left and right sides) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The displacement of 0 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 63, 64 and 65, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 65 and 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
Although it is displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar protrusion 752 of 0 (although it is retracted).
The load transmission in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of the relationship of pushing further.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed of the load in the vertical direction, and when comparing only the vertical components of the displacement, the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the horizontal direction is used. The displacement amount of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of.

In this way, the variable decorative member 7 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
While the displacement of 50 is configured so that its direction is different for each step, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction mainly occurs in the vertical direction. As a result, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
Depending on the degree of change in posture of 30, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be different.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely secured, as shown in FIG. 66, the bifurcated support that occurred when paying attention to the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front through hole 723 disappears, and the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 constitutes the front through hole 723 at the same front-rear position. It has a dimensional relationship that cuts into the tubular part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 abuts on the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front side through hole 723 and is translated to the back side is shown. It is illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Given. As a result, the holding force of the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Therefore, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. for that reason,
The appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 after the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to the upper end posture can be changed.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is configured to allow a slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are. By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right.

As described above, the vertical displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 due to the posture change is larger in the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides than in the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides tend to attract the attention of the player,
When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper end posture, it is possible to easily attract the attention of the player to the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right.

Therefore, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper terminal posture or the posture changes repeatedly so as not to be held (stopped) in the upper terminal posture. It is possible to easily attract the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper terminal posture, the player is placed on the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. It is possible to easily gather the line of sight of.

As a result, among the plurality of light guide members 714, the specific light guide member 7 that the player wants to pay particular attention to is
When there is 14, the drive unit 760 is controlled to be driven by the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 in such a manner that the player's line of sight can be easily gathered (light emission mode of the light guide member 714 and the drive unit). By controlling in relation to the driving mode of the 760), the line of sight of the player can be focused on the specific light guide member 714.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, the directional view of the reference O1 is shown, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper terminal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is arranged above the front side of the reference O1, the displacement in the front-rear direction is larger than the displacement in the vertical direction at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged directly in front of the reference O1 (because they are arranged on the horizontal line), a slight angle (about 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced (about 4 degrees).
In, the vertical displacement is larger than the longitudinal displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced to the center of the reference O1 to make the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a different from the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b. Can be done. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be different between the member arranged in the center of the left and right and the member arranged on the left and right outside.

68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 68, 69, 70 and 71, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). Is illustrated, and in FIG. 69, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
The state in which 30 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 70, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 71, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture is shown. Illustrated.

In FIGS. 68 to 71, a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction is shown. As described above, the front small receiving portion 735a is up to the intermediate posture (see FIG. 70) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The front portion of the inner surface of the hollow member 740 does not come into contact with the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743, and the displacement of the hollow member 740 is mainly a vertical displacement.

On the other hand, between the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the upper terminal posture, the front small receiving portion 735a
The front part of the inner side surface of the above and the front side part of the projecting columnar portion 743 come into contact with each other, and after the contact, the hollow member 740
Is pushed toward the back surface side with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this way, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
It is possible to provide a time difference between the start timing of the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of 0 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the action of changing the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture), the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side is the width LH1a, whereas the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the upper side. The width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side in the terminal posture is the width LH.
It changes to 1b (LH1a> LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back surface side) is maintained by the width LH2. Therefore, it is possible to change the balance between the amount of light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light radiated to the back surface side as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is directed toward the player as compared with the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). Since the light is weakened, the light guide member 714 can be easily seen (easily seen), and the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger in the same comparison. Therefore, the light guide member 7
The light radiated from 14 can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the line of sight is directed to the light guide member 714.
Can be drawn to.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705 as described above, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in the present embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705, and the dimension of the gap is the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illuminated substrate 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed to the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but when the other light emitting member 714 (one individual light emitting means 706a is focused on, the true light thereof is true. It is configured to prevent heading toward the light guide member 714) other than the light guide member 714 arranged above. That is, since the proximal end side of the light guide members 714 is separated by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and heading toward another light guide member 714 (FIG. 72). See enlarged view).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a from reaching the other light guide member 714.

Therefore, when the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different from each other, the light reaches the other light guide member 714 and the appearance of the other light guide member 714 is changed. It is possible to avoid affecting it. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or being visually recognized through the light guide member 714 in a state where the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a is mixed. ..

When the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illuminated substrate 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the whole light emitting means 706b and visually recognized by the player. Can be done.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is displaced in a different manner by differently driving the drive units 760 (see FIGS. 56 and 57) arranged at the lower left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. do.

For example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as the first displacement mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reciprocally displaced between the lower end posture and the intermediate posture by repeatedly operating one drive unit 760. Can be made to. Further, as a second displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and then the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to move the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the intermediate posture and the upper terminal posture. Can be reciprocally displaced with.

Further, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower terminal posture (initial posture), the plate-shaped displacement is performed by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state as the first stopping mode. The member 730 can be stopped in the middle posture. Further, as a second stop mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and then the other drive unit 760 is maintained.
By maintaining the excited state, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped in the upper terminal posture.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one drive unit 760 is excited, without providing a structural difference between the left and right drive units 760. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the bending generated in the load member 761 (see FIG. 55 (a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Instead, it can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 7 on the side that maintains the excited state.
By alternately switching 60 and the drive unit 760 on the side that repeatedly operates according to the number of operations, or by switching each period, the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 is adjusted (adjusted). be able to. As a result, the left and right drive units 760
As a result, the useful life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time because the replacement time can be adjusted.

It should be noted that the degree of bending generated in the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the bending does not depend on the magnitude of the bending. That is, a configuration that can make a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the drive units 760 and driving and controlling both of them is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly arranged at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 from the player's point of view through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is arbitrarily set, and for example, the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a, and the driving unit 760. It may be controlled so as to correspond with the control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination substrate 705.

For example, as an association with the control mode of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning opening 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation is turned on. It may be controlled so that a plurality of game balls enter the second winning opening 140, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side is turned on according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. ..

In this case, by confirming the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls. Then, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-mentioned first displacement mode, while being more advantageous to the player than entering the first winning opening 64. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 140, which is often the case, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-mentioned second displacement mode, and the game is played due to the difference in the displacement mode of the second operation unit 700. It is possible to easily make the player know whether the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be driven and controlled in relation to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is the upper limit value, the winning ball is obtained, but the player cannot obtain the opportunity of fluctuation. If the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed. Because it can be done, it can attract the attention of the player. Therefore, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value), the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value) for the player. ) Can be easily noticed.

In addition, the entry of the game ball, the control mode of the drive unit 760, and the light emitting means 70 of the illuminated substrate 705.
As another example of associating with the control mode of the lighting state of 6, it may be associated with the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, for example, the number of balls expected to be entered when the specific winning opening 65a is opened may be associated with the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (maximum count number per jackpot round). It may be associated with the fact that a game ball having a larger number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over-winning).

As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and that a game ball having an unexpected number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a. It can be grasped by the player.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the suction force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described, but the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the suction force acts in the left-right direction. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the energization is released and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 has a contact member 2190 that is coaxially supported with the auxiliary device 160 and is arranged so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and an urging spring SP21 that urges the contact member 2190. And prepare.

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163 so that the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight in a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. (See FIG. 73 (b)).

The abutting member 2190 is a cushion portion 175a disposed so as to be in contact with the driven member 163.
And a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction of pushing the rotating member 2191 back to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 side.

The displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by an electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and via the state shown in FIG. 73B, the rotating member 2191 opposes the urging force of the urging spring SP21. Is rotationally displaced. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced by itself until the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) as a boundary.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73B, the driven member 163 can be oscillated and displaced by a fluctuating urging force. This makes it possible to increase the variation in displacement of the driven member 163.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant speed. It is provided with a transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism by a rack and pinion (not shown)) for transmitting a driving force so as to be. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 74 to 77, the state in which the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward is illustrated in chronological order.

FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 3400. In FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 78 (a). b
), The rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78 (c), the displacement amount of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis.

In the first operation unit 3400, an L-shaped elongated hole portion 3406 (a shape in which rectangles whose long sides are orthogonal to each other are integrated) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed with an opening having a size such that the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the tubular portion 444d is arranged at the upper end position of the long opening in the vertical direction of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the long opening is displaced downward in the vertical direction by the displacement up to FIG. 75. do. That is, since the left-right position of the tubular portion 444d does not change in the displacement from FIG. 74 to FIG. 75, the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. And can be configured.

By configuring a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 is cut off. However, this role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to the present embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 is improved). be able to).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 while maintaining the effect that the operation start timings of the elevating plate 430 and the pinnate member 460 can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, the transmission means 3410 facilitates the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 by a constant velocity linear motion (see FIG. 78 (a)). In this case, the synchronization described above in the first embodiment is performed. If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is diverted as it is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

More specifically, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of change in angle with respect to the amount of displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a becomes smaller).

Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 cannot be displaced at a substantially constant velocity with respect to the elevating plate 430. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, meshed with the upper right rotary gear 441, and connected to the relative displacement member 442. An armed rotary gear 3441 with an extension is provided. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, it is not the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with (proportional) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a, but the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a. By converting the amount of change in angle with respect to the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm into the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion, the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion. , The difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (offset).

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be brought closer to the displacement mode of the lift plate 430.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 passes through the rotation axis of the rotation gear 3441 with an arm.
It may be configured to be guided by the relative displacement member 442. That is, the path of the electric wiring DH1
Auxiliary arm member 444, elevating plate 430, rotary gear with arm 3441 and relative displacement member 4
By forming continuously in the order of 42, the electrical wiring D due to the displacement of the first operating unit 3400
It is possible to avoid a large fluctuation in the path length of H1.

In this case, since the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative portion 493, it is easy to dispose an illuminated substrate in the decorative portion 493 and execute a light emitting effect by a light emitting means such as an LED. Can be done.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operating unit 700 is not arranged has been described, but the second operating unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. It is equipped with a detection device 4780 for the purpose of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operating unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are not shown except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, in FIG. 79 (a), no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4
The state in which the 761 is arranged in the descending position by its own weight is illustrated. In FIG. 79 (b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4
The state in which 761 is arranged in the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the load member 4761 abuts on the lower restricting portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and in the ascending position, the upper restricting portion 765.
It comes into contact with and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, except that the overhanging portion 761d is changed to the thick overhanging portion 4761f and the thin overhanging portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that protrudes from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b with a wall thickness (front-back width) equivalent to that of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the process of arranging the load member 4676 in the ascending position, it abuts on the upper regulation portion 765 and corresponds to the portion where the load is received and stopped.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is a thick-walled overhanging portion 476 from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f.
It is a plate-shaped portion thinner than 1f (shorter front-rear width) and overhangs along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is configured to come into contact with the upper restricting portion 765 in the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the ascending position, as compared with the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. Since it is thin, it is preferentially damaged as compared with the thick overhanging portion 4761f due to the accumulation of fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are It does not have to be formed flush with each other, it is sufficient if at least the upper surface is flush with each other, and the position of the lower surface can be arbitrarily set. For example, by shortening the vertical width of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g as compared with the vertical width of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, the electromagnetic solenoid SO until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged.
By reducing the number of repeated excitations of L2, the period until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged can be adjusted.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 so that a thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g can be inserted and removed in the detection groove.
And prepare.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g blocks the detection light at the lowered position of the load member 4761 (see FIG. 79 (a)), and the load member 476.
At the ascending position of 1, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is arranged upward so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79 (b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be described. Normally, the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, so that it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This confirmation is MPU22
By making it perform in 1 (see FIG. 4) and issuing an alarm when it is determined that the malfunction is occurring or displaying an error on the display device, the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700 is caused to the player or the hall clerk. It can be made easier to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged (broken) and dropped, the thin-walled overhanging portion 47
Since 61 g and the load member 4761 do not operate in synchronization with each other, the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other, an alarm is generated in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error is displayed on the display device to overhang the wall. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the hall clerk to notice that the portion 4761 g is damaged (broken).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used by both the position detecting means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and the damage detecting means for detecting the breakage (breakage) of the load member 4761. ..

According to the present embodiment, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f may come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 to stop the load member 4761 at the raised position. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and put it in a maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, which gives the player an unexpected disadvantage. It can be avoided.

In this way, among the parts that come into contact with the upper regulation portion 765, a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) is provided, and the breakage (break) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, whereby the thick overhanging portion 476 is provided.
The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to the extent that 1f is damaged (broken).

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, the case of bending and deforming in relation to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c has been described, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment gives a load to the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c. It is provided with a deflection adjusting device 5780 for adjusting the bending deformation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

80 (a) and 80 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. The deflection adjusting device 5780 is a box-shaped foundation member 5781 having a built-in metal coil and an iron rod supported by the foundation member 5781 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to project above the foundation member 5781. It is provided with an adjusting member 5782 to be formed.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-sided excitation state, the load member 761 is less flexed and deformed by driving the deflection adjusting device 5780 (deflection deformation is about half). The state changes to). In other words, in the first embodiment, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper terminal posture by putting the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 in an excited state (both). ing.

That is, with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 in a one-sided excitation state (see FIG. 80 (a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjusting device 5780 moves around the adjusting member 5782. By energizing the metal coil to form an electromagnet and driving the adjusting member 5782 upward in the situation where it is arranged to be wound, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the bending of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is applied. It can be applied to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c (FIG. 80 (b).
)reference).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is driven in cooperation with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side and the adjusting device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side. The displacement member 730 can be maintained in the lower terminal posture (initial posture), the intermediate posture, and the upper terminal posture.

As a result, the arrangement of the drive means can be solidified as compared with the case where the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 need to be arranged in pairs on the left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be fixed, the area required as the route for passing the wiring can be set in various places (for example,).
It can be avoided to disperse to the left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 shows
It is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 82, the illustration of the winning opening unit 930 and the unit other than the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later in the front view, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side to the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper in FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface (front side of the paper in FIG. 83 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has a through hole 6 having an outer shape of the base plate 60 in the front view.
It is formed larger than 0a. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. This will result in
The game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 penetrates from a space other than the passage path (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a) of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later. It is possible to suppress the passage through the hole 60a.

The specific winning opening unit 950 is partially inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening unit 95 through the specific winning opening 65a.
It is possible to throw the ball inside 0. A detailed explanation of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 on the front unit via the displacement member 966. Be concatenated. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 8
7 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a front unit 940.
It is a rear view of. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b),
The outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945 that are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. Hole 60a
You can see the inside of.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by a notch on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87). b) The specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, and the specific winning opening 65.
It mainly includes a second winning opening 140 formed through above a, and a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at an edge opposite to the first out opening 71.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 has a back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) as a base plate 60.
It is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is provided.
Since the diameter is reduced from the front side to the back side, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a projecting from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a columnar shape is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. Thereby, the back surface base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back surface base 941, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The rear base 941 is formed so that the outer shape of the lower end in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the bottom portion of the notch (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () The game ball that did not flow into any of them is passed through the first out port 71 to the game board 1.
The ball can be thrown to the back side of No. 3 (the opposite side of the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87 (b))).

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, is moved to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.
You can throw the ball to the front side of the page).

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a) and is formed in a cup shape) and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back surface side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. It is provided with a guide portion 941 g1 that is erected so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and the game ball flowing down in the flowing region collides with the first receiving portion 941g, and the first receiving portion 941g.
Can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the interest of the player may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the back base 941. As a result, the base plate 60
It can be made to collide with a game nail (not shown) arranged in the game ball again, and can easily change the flow direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the first throwing unit 942 g is
The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), and the protruding tip side is at the edge of the inflow port 982d of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later. Be abutted. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving section 941g to the first throwing section 942g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first notched portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first notched portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is notched to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, is moved to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87) via the second winning opening 140.
(B) The ball can be thrown to (the front side of the paper)).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper)) at the edge thereof.
), And a second throwing portion 942c projecting to the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface thereof abuts on the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by being bent into a substantially L-shape in the back view at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140. The dimension of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the front base 94, which will be described later,
It is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of 3 from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the facing portions in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 9 is set inward.
43a is arranged. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is notched and formed on the other side of the protruding tip portion in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b))). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) from the gaming area side of the rear base 941 to the opposite side to the gaming area. The first shaft hole 941d which is recessed in two places in a circular shape, and the two first openings 941e which are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941. A protrusion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. And formed with.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. also,
The first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangle shape in the front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b is a wall that guides the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b is formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and is extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. As a result, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 is formed on the first guide wall 9
The displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated by abutting on the bent portion of 42b.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening in the facing direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) of the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 via the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the longitudinal direction. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later. As a result, the specified winning opening unit 950 is inside the standing unit 942f.
Can be easily positioned and arranged.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, the rod member 952 becomes the plate member 951.
When the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h to prevent the rod member 952 from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87).
b) Provided with a second guide wall 942d projecting upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the displacement member 966 described later (see FIG. 90).
Is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 9
A predetermined gap can be formed between 66 and the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, the displacement member 9
When the 66 is displaced, the frictional (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The rear base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of both ends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) of the specific winning opening 65a. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed into a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge portion of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 has a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above.
It is formed mainly with and.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view, and the back base 94 is inside in the front view.
The second winning opening 140 of 1 is arranged. Further, the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (U-shaped open side).
Is provided with a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back surface base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the rear base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the facing surfaces of the pair of feather members 945 described later. can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c includes a throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and a throwing guide portion 943d.
First recess 94 recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper surface)
It is provided with 3ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

The throwing guide portion 943d is formed in pairs on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the pair of feather members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, respectively, and the rear base 941 and the front base 94 are formed.
When combined with 3, the end faces are brought into contact with each other. As a result, a pair of feather members 945
The game ball that has flowed into the opposite space can be thrown between the opposite sides of the throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the upper end surface 943a1 in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is a rear base 94.
In a state where 1 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), they are arranged inside the recess 941j, and the tip is on the back side of the back base 941 (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper surface).
It is projected to.

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. Can be thrown to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, and the second shaft hole 943 thereof.
The other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite to the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back surface base 941 interposed therebetween in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back surface base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (rear surface) on the back surface base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted through the insertion hole 945c, so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate the wing member 945. It can be arranged between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the tip thereof is the first opening 941e of the rear base 941.
The size is set so as to project to the back surface side (opposite side of the game area) of the back surface base 941 in which the displacement member 966 is arranged. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a detailed description of the displacement member 966 will be given. FIG. 90 (a)
) Is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90 (b)) at a substantially central position in front view. 2nd opening 9
In the 66c, the shape of the inner edge in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 is displaced by the displacement member 96.
It is possible to suppress the collision with the inner edge of 6.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), and the longitudinal direction and the like. A bulging portion 9 that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90 (b)) to the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).
It is equipped with 66b.

The protrusion 966a is a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction.
And the contact portion 96 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is provided with 6a1.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 has a sliding groove 966a2.
The width dimension is set larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, the protrusion 945b abuts on both inner surfaces facing each other in the width direction of the sliding groove 966a2, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the wing member 945 from being restricted.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge toward the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. as a result,
The resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is
It is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. note that,
A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))) is provided.

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a bulging portion 965 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
This is the surface with which e1 abuts. The displacement member 966 has a bulging portion 965 on one side contacted portion 966b2.
The wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the abutting and sliding displacement of e1.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a bulging portion 965 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
The side surface opposite to e1 is the surface that abuts. The displacement member 966 is slidably displaced by abutting the side surface on the opposite side to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3, thereby causing the wing member 94.
5 can be displaced to the closed state (see FIG. 91).

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In FIGS. 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed in parallel with the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. The surface 945b1, the third surface 945b3 which is connected to the first surface 945b1 and is located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b.
It mainly has a second surface 945b2 connected to 3.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side), and has a lower inner surface 966a4 that abuts on the protrusion 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in an open state, and a lower inner surface 966 thereof.
The upper inner surface 966a3 that faces a4 and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in a closed state, and the lateral inner surface 96 of the displacement member 966 from the outside (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) to the lower side.
It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 that inclines inward in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966 toward the 6a4 side.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is a displacement member 966.
Is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91) to be in the closed state, and the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91) to be in the open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member.
It is arranged inside 66a2.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b has a sliding groove 96.
It is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of 6a2 (outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at predetermined intervals are formed on the upper and lower sides, and the projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism is a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 into which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement member 966
Since the displacement of is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. Displacement member 966 when operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (other side in the direction of gravity)
As the weight of the above is added, the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to start driving the wing member 945 in the stopped state and smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed.
The protrusion 945b is located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. As a result, the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2
The displacement component of can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the stopped state (
The driving of the wing member 945 in the closed state) can be started, and the initial operation at the time of opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (self-weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity due to the contact of
Horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, the feather member 94 when it is in the closed state.
It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of 5. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is displaced from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 becomes a protrusion 945.
The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the first surface 945b1 of b. As a result, the wing member 945
Can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. Figure 9
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a box-shaped first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion arranged so as to face each other. 9
A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between 63, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 9 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.
It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to 64.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 and a back base 941 side (FIG. 85) from the covering portion 962a. A guide portion 962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d projecting to the outside of the facing wall surface in the facing direction.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view.
As a result, before fastening the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963, the engaged portion 962c
Since the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 96.
The workability of fastening with 3 can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is a second accommodating portion 9 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled.
It is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of 63, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (FIG. 93).
(A) A through hole 962da penetrating toward (lower side) is provided.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and the fastening hole 96 is formed.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than 3b1. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 96
3 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the covering portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f on the opposite side of the covering portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e is located on the back base 941 side (from each of the facing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a).
(See FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is formed into a substantially L-shaped side view that bends to the other side (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in the direction of gravity. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the distal end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in the front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in the front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the direction of gravity (FIG. 93 (a) vertical direction) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (see FIG. 91).
L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 9 is located between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941.
The 66 can be arranged and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facings of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) to the opposite side to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. In addition, the protrusion 962 g
The inner dimension L7 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is set to be slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. Further, the protrusion 962 g is set so that the dimension in the direction of gravity is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the upright portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is arranged on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the facing portions of the projecting portions 962 g, and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b are inserted. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape covering the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view.
Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the first accommodating portion 962 side from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of portions of both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e in the plurality of portions. An engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in a wall portion on one side (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) extending in the lateral direction.

The projecting portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape.
A fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962 is provided. This will result in
A screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in the space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the first
The solenoid 610 disposed between the accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be lengthened. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
It is recessed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body portion 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft portion 961b that is inserted inside the main body portion 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 961a, and a shaft portion 96 thereof.
It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at an end opposite to the main body portion 961a of 1b, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape.
The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annulus 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is displaced from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964.
The connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 is a base portion 96 formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.
It is formed to include 4a and an upright portion 964b that bends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the direction of gravity to the back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85).

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. It includes a first recessed portion 964c to be formed, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the first recessed portion 96
The annulus 961c can be inserted into 4c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. Yes, it is formed in a substantially U-shape with the lower side open in the rear view, and the first recessed portion 964c.
It is formed by opening from the side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, the connecting member 9
When 64 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 96 on the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e
The transmission member 965 is displaced by the contact with 5d. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed so as to be bent in a side view, and the shaft portion 961 of the solenoid 610 is formed.
It is formed of a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of b and a rotating portion 965b that is connected to the tip portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b is located at the end on the 964 side in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 (in the lateral direction).
FIG. 93 (b) vertical direction) A rotary shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides and a rotary shaft 965c thereof.
It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the gravitational direction in the radial direction of the above.

As described above, the rotary shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in the top view. Further, in the protruding portion 965d, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (main body portion 96).
In the state before power is applied (supplied) to 1a, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610
The width dimension in the displacement direction is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotary shaft 965c, the shaft portion 961
It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 965 from being restricted due to the contact between the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of b and the insertion hole 964e.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is arranged so as to be inserted into the inside of the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. Figure 96
(A) and FIG. 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. In addition, FIG. 9
In 6 (a) and FIG. 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96A, electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In the non-existing state, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is extruded in a direction away from the main body portion 961a, the transmission member 965
The surface of the protrusion 965d on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the inner surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) with the rotation shaft 965c as the axis. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In this state, the shaft portion 961b becomes the main body portion 961a due to the magnetic force generated in the main body portion 961a.
The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) to the solenoid 610 and the connecting member 964
The inner surface of the insertion hole 964e on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) to the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the solenoid 610 side. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 96B) about the rotation shaft 965c. In addition, the transmission member 96
The displacement of the tip portion 965a of the fifth portion 965a to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 abutting on the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to the first accommodation portion 962 or the second accommodation portion 963.
Can be brought into contact with either one. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when the player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. By that amount, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotary shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotary portion 965b, and is extended from the rotary shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The protruding portion 965d is provided, and the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in a substantially shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set to the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance of the rotating portion 965b, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 9 can be set.
The distance from 66 becomes large, and the whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension up to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b have the rotating shaft 96.
By being formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial view of 5c, it is possible to suppress the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 while ensuring the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. As a result, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized. That is, the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (the throwing unit 97 described later).
0) and the transmission member 965 in the space between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950.
Can be efficiently arranged to reduce the size as a whole.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are the XCVII of FIG. 97.
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in line I-XCVIII. In addition, FIG. 98 (a)
Then, the state before the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated, and in FIG. 98 (b), the solenoid 61 is shown.
The state after the operation of 0 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is the connecting hole 966b of the displacement member 966.
It is inserted in 1.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIG.
As shown in 8 (a) and FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is in the direction of gravity. It is slid and displaced to the other side.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is opened.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the transmission member 96 is caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above.
The tip portion 965a of 5 is displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the connecting hole 966b between the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the displacement member 966.
The displacement member 966 is slid and displaced to one side in the direction of gravity by abutting against the other side contacted portion 966b3 of 1.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is closed.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to an illegal act by the player. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 is opened and the second winning opening 1 is opened.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from easily flowing into the 40.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, a pair of feather members 94
The change in posture of the displacement member between 5 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. Where the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed when acted, the displacement member 96
When 6 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places, the displacement between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Changes in the posture of the member 966 are unacceptable, and resistance is generated when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered.
On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two points and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other-side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). ((
It is set to be less than 3 times (see a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, the insertion portion 965
When the width dimension D1 of e is set large, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 are likely to come into contact with each other when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Where the posture change of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the posture change of the displacement member 966 is regulated by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. Can be suppressed. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101.
99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. It is provided with a plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is made of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 has a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b cylindrically recessed on both outer sides of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c protruding from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d protruding from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and has a shape slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to project to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is tilted toward the game area side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed in the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 described later inside the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, the plate member 951 has a shaft hole 951.
When it is rotationally displaced around b, a part of it protrudes toward the flow-down region, so that the main body portion 951
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down to a from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting into an annular shape on the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A projecting portion 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, and a protrusion 9 projecting from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951.
It is formed with 53h and two inflow ports 953j formed through the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a.

The main body portion 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. Formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of feather members 945 described above on the outer side in the facing direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the plate member 9 is formed.
When the 51 is in the open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body portion 953a on the lower side in the gravity direction, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back surface side (passage member 955 side) to the front surface side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the opening 9
The game ball thrown from 53a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 is placed on the upright wall 953b and the engaging portion 953.
It can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated from the proximal end side by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, the detection device SE1 is engaged with the engagement portion 953f and is arranged on the main body portion 953a.
Can be suppressed from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in the state of a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is
It is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and can pass a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the facing portions thereof is formed to be shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. This will result in
The plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is the shaft hole 95 of the plate member 951.
It is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of 1b. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 95 from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951.
By inserting into the 3d1 and the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the recess 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, the front unit 9
By combining the 40 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting projection 942j of the front unit 940.
Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the insertion hole 953g formed through the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the projecting portion 953g.
1 is arranged coaxially, and the projecting portion 953 g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other.
As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is a plate member 95 of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engaging portion 951d.
It is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction of No. 1 (FIG. 99 (a) left-right direction). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entrance is formed to a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is poured into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, so that there is a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inflow port 953j is formed in pairs (at two places) at predetermined intervals, the inflow port 9 is formed even when the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged.
The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball up to 53j can be shortened. Therefore, that much
The time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened so that the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is the inflow port 953.
It is arranged at the connecting portion between j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. This will result in
The game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore,
It is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball by the plate member 951 until the opening 953a1 is closed, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the position where the inflow of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be brought closer. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in the front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in the front view of the ball entry member 953 described above. Further, the passage member 955 is a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and is located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b that is formed through the third opening 955b, a pair of third openings 955c that are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. The drive unit 9 is located between the rolling portion 955d to be installed and the pair of recessed portions 955a.
It is formed with a second recessed portion 955f recessed from the 57 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 9 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later.
It is a space in which 58 is arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that projects in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2 is arranged so that the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the gravity direction, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c.
Further, the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c, and the detection hole S is provided.
E1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e becomes the detection device SE2.
Is engaged with the detection board SE1b side of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, the rolling portion 955d is a plate member 95 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined.
The end on the 1st side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 is specified as the winning opening unit 950.
The ball can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99 (c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

In the second recessed portion 955f, an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side are formed. Insertion hole 95
Reference numeral 5h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and is a second accommodating portion 96 of the drive unit 960.
It is formed at a position facing the elongated hole 963f formed in 3. As a result, the drive unit 9
The 60 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed to include a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c that is disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a has a main body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped and the main body portion 957a thereof.
A shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and an annular portion 957a3 arranged at an end portion of the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the main body portion 957a1.
A coil spring SP2 disposed between the annulus portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1 is provided.

The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 by the magnetism is the main body portion 957a.
It can be inserted by pulling it inside 1.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 957a1.

The annulus portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annulus portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annulus portion 957a3 becomes the main body portion 957a.
It can be urged in the direction away from 1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. In addition, the case member 957b
Is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2 and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw.
Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the main body 957
Wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99 (b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion thereof. A second position located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2.
A recessed portion 957c2 and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in a cross-sectional view. In addition, the first recessed portion 95
The groove width of 7c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. This will result in
An annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by being bent into a substantially L-shape in the side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a abuts on the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from the end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a abuts on the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore,
When the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up.
As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (a) and FIG. 103 (a), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.
In FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the open state of the plate member 951 is shown. also,
The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the main body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
In the state where the application (supply) of electric power to a1 is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is in a state of protruding toward the plate member 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)) due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annulus portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is the plate member 9.
It is pushed out to the 51 side. As a result, the shaft hole 958 is formed in the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958.
The force is transmitted in the direction of rotation around b in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)).

When the tip 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip 958c and the recess 951d
1 is in contact with the plate member 951, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is rotated in a direction approaching the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), the main body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
When electric power is applied (supplied) to a1, the shaft portion 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a)
Similarly, the connecting member 957c arranged in 3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)) is transmitted to the transmission member 965.

When the tip 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip 958c and the recess 951
In contact with d1, the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 becomes the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953.
It is rotated in a direction away from the opening side of. As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is shown in FIG. 104 (b).
Is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). In addition, in FIG. 104 (a), the state in which the plate member 951 was removed is illustrated, and FIG. 1
In 04 (b), the state in which the plate member 951 is attached is illustrated. Further, FIG. 104 (a).
) And FIG. 104 (b) show the closed state of the plate member 951.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body portion 953a, the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (FIG. 1).
04 (a) Left-right direction) Inclined surface 954 that inclines to the outside in the direction of gravity from the intermediate position
a, a recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protrusion 954c projecting at a connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a passage member 955. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in a row on the side surface.

The inclined surface 954a has a game ball flowing into the space between the pair of inflow ports 953j facing each other, and the inflow port 953j.
It is a rolling surface of a game ball that is rolled to the side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. As a result, the game ball flowing in between the opposite sides of the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j to the inflow port.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (lower side in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a and receives the gaming ball, and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, the plate member 951
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (FIG. 104 (b).
) It is extended in a straight line in the vertical direction). As a result, the rolling surface 953a2 is changed to the rolling surface 953.
A game ball that rolls in the longitudinal direction of a2 (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the received game ball can be guided (flowed) to the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b has a width dimension L9 (FIG. 104) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
(B)) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in a state where the game balls are aligned. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, the plate member 9
It is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the 51, and to suppress the over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955).
It is formed with a downward slope toward. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the inflow direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955).
A second guide surface 954d1 is provided on the side.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and the rolling surface 95.
It is disposed between the longitudinal end of 3a2 and the passage member 955. As a result, the opening 953a
The game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of 1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and is projected toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the inclined surface 95
The rolling speed of the game ball that rolls 4a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a to the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is the side edge portion 954c3 on the concave portion 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the gaming ball on the inclined surface 954a of the gaming ball (the outward direction in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2). Formed at an angle to the side. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is set to the recess 954.
It can be decelerated before b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is increased, and the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Then, the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b and the second inclined surface 9
It is possible to suppress rolling up to 54e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, as described above, since the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction, when the plate member 951 is in an open state, it is formed. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (on the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Further, the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 is introduced to the plate member 95.
Since it can be brought into contact with 1, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball, the front of the recess 954b (
Immediately before), the rolling of the game ball can be decelerated to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 provides an opening 95.
It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of another game ball before closing 3a1.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downward inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 has an opening 953a1.
The game ball can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the jumping out from the.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed.
Since the risk of jumping out from a1 is low, the opening 953a is brought into contact with the guide surface 954c1.
By guiding to the first side, the second inclined surface 954e passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a.
It is possible to suppress the rolling up to, and to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed and decelerated reliably by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is extended in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the upright wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d has a protruding portion 95.
The second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface facing the 4c is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and the rolling surface 95 of the second side edge portion 954d2.
It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of 3a2. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 is placed on the second side edge portion 954d of the erection wall 954d.
It can be brought into contact with 2 to surely decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. as a result,
The plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line in the inclined direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d, and the rolling of the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball is pushed into the projecting portion 9
It can be brought into contact with 54c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c has a distance dimension L33 from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip (FIG. 10).
4 (a)) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the vertical wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time.
As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) shows the specific winning opening unit 95.
0 is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a specific winning opening unit 95.
0 is a side view of 0 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) shows the CVI of FIG. 105 (a).
FIG. 106 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960 in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). Is.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the solenoid 9 that operates the plate member 951 is shown.
A part of the wiring HS1 connected to the wiring HS1 connected to the 57a and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 610 operating the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) is shown in the illustrated state. In addition, FIG. 106 (
In b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown in the illustrated state.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the wing member 945 of the winning opening unit 930 (FIG. 83 (FIG. 83).
The drive unit 960 for driving a)) is a specific winning opening unit 95 when viewed from the front.
It is formed at a position where 0 and a part thereof overlap. From this, the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 9)
A space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the game area of 45).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. And the plate member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and the plate member 95.
A gaming machine provided with a second driving means for driving 1 is known. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means have a pair of wing members 945 and a pair of wing members, respectively.
Since it is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 and the plate member 951, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 is
Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 (see FIG. 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space for a pair of feather members 945
It can be secured on the back side of (the second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit to be visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is normally (retracted) and is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60.
It is placed near the central opening where it is difficult for the player to see it and it is easy for the player to see it by projecting it inside the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 when it is movable (overhanging). By disposing the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 to be horizontally overlapped with the specific winning opening unit 950 located far from the central opening.
It is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, normal (evacuation)
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the movable body of the motion unit at the time. As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of feather members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, the two displacement members (plate member 951 and pair of wing members 94).
In the game board 13 provided with 5), since the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and drive unit 960) are arranged on the back surface of the side having a large projected area (plate member 951 side) in the front view, the respective drive means are provided. Can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and a space can be formed on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945).

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the drive unit 96 for driving the pair of feather members 945.
The drive unit 957 that drives 0 and the plate member 951 is in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 10).
5 (a) Left and right direction) are arranged side by side. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) by the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of feather members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the rear base. Since it is connected to 941, the front base 943 and the back base 94
At the same time as the action of fastening and fixing 1, the drive unit 960 is held by the front base 943 (
Can be arranged). As a result, the front unit 94 is attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13).
It is possible to prevent the drive unit 960 from being forgotten to be attached when the 0 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached.

Solenoid 957a of drive unit 957 and solenoid 610 of drive unit 960
Is set at substantially the same position at the end of the specified winning opening unit 950 on the opposite side (rear side) to the plate member 951 side, and is connected to the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 to be connected are connected from the end portion on the opposite side (rear surface side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950. This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, game board 1
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) of No. 3, and the wiring HS1 and HS
It is possible to prevent 2 from interfering with other devices or accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 and the plate member 95 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945.
The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives 1 has a shaft portion 961b and a shaft portion 957.
The a2 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction is the same, and the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 9 are arranged.
Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the opposite sides of the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of 57a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 95
It is possible to easily combine the wiring HS2 of 7.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity. As a result, a partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged.
The shape of can be simplified.

That is, the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a of the drive unit 957.
When the side surfaces of 1 are formed to have different sizes, or when both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are arranged at different positions in the gravity direction, the drive is driven. Since both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the gravity direction, it becomes necessary to form a partition member according to the step, and the shape of the partition member becomes complicated. Become.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can be formed into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the tip thereof (insertion portion 96).
5e) is provided with a displacement member 966 that slides and displaces with the rotation of the transmission member 965 to open and close the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the second winning opening 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950, so that the second winning opening unit is correspondingly second. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106A and 106B, the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the detection board SE of the detection device SE1 is used.
Since the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the 1b, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such a fraudulent act.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to find the illegality. There was a risk of being played.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953,
The ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951, and it is difficult for the clerk to detect the fraudulent use of the ball entry member 953.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the plate member 951 is closed so that the drive unit 960 can be the plate member 9.
Since it is shielded by the 51 and the location where the fraud has been added becomes invisible, it is particularly effective to be able to detect the fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same diversion (off-the-shelf product) as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls, the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices of the detection device SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity cannot be notified to the clerk.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a route from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (disconnection) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easy. Alternatively, it is recognized that it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3.
It can be easy to deter cheating.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed to the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. By setting the fastening position of the above, the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented by the screw, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is a ring projection 953 of the ball entry member 953.
It is wrapped around c and placed. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened, and the drive unit 96 is opened from the open side of the ball entry member 953.
When fraudulently added to 0, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10
Since the detection failure can be recognized by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can easily notify the clerk of the error to detect the fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, wiring HS
When 3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction, so that the detection device SE1 and A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion with the wiring HS. Detection device SE1
Since the connecting portion between the wiring HS3 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other has the detection device SE.
The wiring HS3 of No. 1 is formed at a position biased toward the end opposite to the discharge side. Therefore, since the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annulus projection 953c), the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened to open the specific winning opening 65.
When fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from a, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the throwing unit 970 is on the player side (game area side).
It is formed by including a distribution unit 980 having a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a passage unit 990 arranged on the side opposite to the game area of the distribution unit 980.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 of the above-mentioned winning opening unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, the game ball can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980.
The insertion holes 991a to the second insertion holes 991d are provided, and a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be received from the opening. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b).
) Is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 11
2 (a) is a distribution unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a).
112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 has a rear base 985 and a rear base 985.
The front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985 and the front base 98.
The distribution unit 983, which is rotatably arranged between 1 and the back base, and the back base 98.
A distribution portion 983 and a cover member 987 arranged at a corresponding position are mainly provided on the back surface side of the 5.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
A base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body, a plurality of openings (openings 985b to 985 g) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, and recesses in the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction. The recess 985h to be formed and the accommodating portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.
And a projecting portion 986e are mainly provided.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. Formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the dimension of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the opening 985
The b and the opening 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a position substantially at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109 (b)), and the position in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 109 (b)) is substantially the same as the openings 985b and 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is the opening 985b and the opening 9.
Similar to 85c, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 of the space opened on the front base 981 side and the front base 981.
It is mainly provided with a discharge passage 985e3,985f3 in a space that opens on the opposite side to the side, and an intermediate passage 985e2,985f2 that extends in the direction of gravity and communicates the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. To.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed which is recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and the detection device SE is viewed from the rear.
It is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of 3. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.
It is set parallel to the extension direction of the detection hole SE1a and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the intermediate passage 985e2.
, 985f2 is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the space. As a result, the game ball is placed in the intermediate passage 9
When the 85e2,985f2 flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the gravity direction, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 have inflow passages 985e1,985f1 and discharge passages 98.
It is formed in series with the space of 5e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985e2,985f
2 is formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, the intermediate passage 985e2,985
It is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of f2 in the direction of gravity. As a result, the back base 985
Can be suppressed from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed to a size that allows the game ball to pass through. also,
The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 have the third insertion holes 991c and the fourth passage unit 990 of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined.
It is connected to the insertion hole 991d. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). also,
Similar to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is the magnetic material 98.
It is set larger than the axial dimension of 8b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings.
Even when the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be very small due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings can be elastically deformed to dispose of the magnetic body 988b.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987 described later is inserted, and the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985 by screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the screw. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 98 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of 1d and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981 g is a base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) of the thrown ball unit 970 in the assembled state.
It is a hole through which a screw (not shown) to be fastened to is inserted, and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular annular shape, and the bulging portion 982 described later is described.
Is formed as a pair in the lateral direction with a pair of hands sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with the open portion of the semicircle facing substantially the center side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that the inner edge shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the first guide wall 981f and the second
The wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981 can be inserted.
f and the second guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981.
It is formed in the center of d. The second insertion hole 981e has a front base 981 and a back base 985.
Is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in the assembled state, and the front base 9 is formed.
The front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened by inserting a screw from the 81 side and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. also,
The through hole 981c is formed to include a side wall portion 981b that is erected along the edge portion on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)). Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 1 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60.
It is formed at a position overlapping with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the 40.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the vertical tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back surface base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c of the through hole 981c.
When the game ball is thrown to 1, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. The rolling surface 9 of the through hole 981c from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a.
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to 81c1 will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside the swelling portion 982, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. It is formed by including a throwing passage TR0, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at the inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. In addition, the inflow port 982d is
In a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the inner edge portion is formed at a position overlapping with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting on the opposite side to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and is the first when the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60. Recessed part 942g
The second protrusion 982d1 is in contact with the inner edge of 1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1.
The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side of the gravity direction of the throwing portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, the first ball throwing unit 94 is passed through the first winning opening 64.
When the game ball thrown into 2 g flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 9)
82) and the first throwing portion 942 g can be prevented from being pinched.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

The erection wall 982a has a distance L36 in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982.
(See FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the game ball can pass are formed between the opposites.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is thrown to either side. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back surface base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the shaft member 988a is attached to the bearing portion 982c.
By inserting it into, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, one end side of the shaft member 988a is a bearing portion 985 of the rear base 985.
Since it is inserted into j, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j, and the other end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact with the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage T
The R1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d is flowed in, and the game ball that has flowed in is used as the back base 98.
It is possible to flow into the opening 985e of 5.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d is flowed in, and the game ball that has flowed in is used as the back base 98.
It is possible to flow into the opening 985e of 5.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, the recess 982 g
Inside, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
Is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, so that the distribution unit 980
Can be miniaturized.

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is the first
The game ball flowing down the passage or the second passage is formed so as to be acceptable, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is inclined and extended toward the back surface base 985 toward one side in the gravity direction. In addition, the inclined portion 98
2b has an opening 98 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined.
It is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from 5b. As a result, the first passage TR1 and the second passage
By bringing the game ball flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the inclined portion 982b, the flowing game ball is opened 985b to 985.
It can be easily guided to the f side and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 have a recess 982h and a recess 982.
It is connected to j and the inclined portion 982b, and the standing tip surface is on the back base 985 side (FIG. 109).
(B) It is tilted downward toward (the front side of the paper). As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to be guided to the openings 985e and the openings 985f. It can be easily flowed into the openings 985e and 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portions 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided to the rear base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Furthermore, the inclined portion 982
Since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 pass through the front unit 940.
It becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball flowing down. Further, the opening 985e and the opening 98
When the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 is erected on the front side of 5f, the guide portion 982h1,
Due to the thickness of 982j1, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the opening 985
The game ball (the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) sent to e and the opening 985f can be easily visually recognized even in a state through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while being guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. A through hole 983c to be formed, an abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a contact portion 983d.
The wall portion 98 formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back base 985 side.
It is formed mainly with 3e.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back surface base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988
By inserting a into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the front base 981 and the back base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is performed in the first passage TR1 or the second passage T.
It is regulated by either one or the other of R2. Further, the intermediate plate 983b has a distribution unit 98.
By rotating 3 around the through hole 983c, the state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 is switched to the state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to the other of the second passage TR2.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the working portion 983a is connected to the contact portion 983d at the intermediate plate 98.
It is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of 3b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball thrown to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is the action unit 9
It is assumed that a load is applied to the 83a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and the through hole 98 is connected.
It is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of 3c. The wall portion 983e has a through hole 983c.
It is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the above-mentioned, and the thickness dimension is set smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Therefore, in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, the game ball thrown into the inside of the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d becomes the concave portion 9.
By being caught inside the 85h, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being obstructed.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side at the radial outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet, and the magnetic body 9 disposed on the back surface base 985.
It is arranged in a state of repelling 88b. As a result, in the distribution portion 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985 to rotate around the through hole 983c as an axis, and the extending direction of the working portion 983a is one or the other. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic material 9 to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1.
It is possible to prevent 88c from coming out of the accommodating portion 983e1. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 is a magnetic material 9.
It can be magnetized on 88b and the magnetic material 988c to prevent it from staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the recess 9 of the back base 985 is formed.
It is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of 85h. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above inside, and is set to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, as described above, with the magnetic material 988b housed inside the housing part 986b, the housing part 9 is stored in the first recess 987a.
By accommodating the tip of the 86b, it is possible to prevent the magnetic material 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b from coming out of the accommodating portion 986b.

The second recess 987b is a through hole 9 for fastening and fixing to the back base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess.
It is equipped with 87b1. Further, in the second recess 987b, the inner shape of the recessed portion is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 9
The 87 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (Fig. 113)
b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the through hole 9 is formed.
The intermediate plate 983b on the outer side in the radial direction from 83c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As mentioned above, the working part 983a
Since the connection position with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b, the load of the game ball is first. It can act on the acting portion 983a on the passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the magnetic material 9
The repulsive direction of 88c is the second passage TR2 through the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c.
The state of acting on the side is switched to the state of acting on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 utilizes the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c.
The through hole 983c can be rotationally displaced about the axis. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, it is possible to maintain the rotated state of the distribution unit 983. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the tilting direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball and a third passage member 993 that is arranged in the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992.
And a detection device SE4 disposed between the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the side of the second passage member 992 with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a first insertion hole 9 thereof.
The second insertion hole 991b formed through the 91a on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction. Insertion hole 991d and a plurality of through holes 9 formed in a circular shape around the outer side in front view.
It is formed mainly with 91f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where 85 g and the internal space are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, in the second insertion hole 991b, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 85b are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be used as the distribution unit 9.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized operation from the outside in a state where the 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to suppress a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (left direction in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 85b are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be used as the distribution unit 9.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized operation from the outside in a state where the 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. 922
The sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly formed.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is a first insertion hole 9 of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 91a are connected. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

On the outer peripheral surface of the erection wall 992a, an engaging portion 992d projecting in the horizontal direction and a first passage member 9
It is formed with a projecting wall 992e projecting horizontally from the end on the 91 side. Engagement part 99
The 2d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and the tip of the 2d bends toward the third passage member 993. The engaging portion 992d is a detection device SE4, which will be described later, while facing the erection wall 992a.
And the wiring of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 is inserted. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE can be locked.
3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the vertical wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is a first passage member 99 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
The through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of No. 1 and the fastening hole 9 is formed.
It is located coaxially with 91g1. As a result, the through hole 992e from the second passage member 992 side.
The first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into 1 and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the second insertion hole 991 of the first passage member 991
The game ball passing through b can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extension direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning in which the detection device SE4 is arranged, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is thrown to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 is provided with an annular protrusion 992f projecting to the third passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular projection 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. Fastening hole 992
f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where 85 g and the internal space are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, in the second insertion hole 991b, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in front view. The third passage member 993
The seventh insertion hole 993a formed through the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, the guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and the second passage member 992 side from the other edge in the gravity direction. The erection wall 993e erected on the floor, the engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and the second passage member 99.
It is mainly provided with a recess 993c recessed in the side surface on the two side.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the guide wall 993b
Is that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (
The second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the side opposite to the 992 side. As a result, the 7th
The game ball thrown into the insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)).
The third passage member 993 can be arranged close to the erection wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the vertical wall 993e, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the first wall portion 992c2 facing each other is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the sixth insertion hole 9
The game ball passing through the 92c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from fraudulently, the inside thereof is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c that positions the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravity direction on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball cannot be inserted.
Since 2 is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted is detected in the detection hole SE1a.
Can be easily inserted into.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. Bent part 993d
1 is a second passage member 992 and a third passage member 993 in a combined state.
The distance dimension between the passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is a through hole 993 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof.
It is provided with c1. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side to enter the fastening hole 9.
By screwing it into 92f1, the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 is formed.
And since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the second winning opening 140, the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) can be replaced and another unit can be arranged. It is possible to use another game form without affecting the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. FIG. 118 (a) is shown in FIG.
17 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line, FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is made of a colored translucent resin material. Also, the front base 19
The outer shape of the 81 is formed to be substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the distribution unit 980 is arranged and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is arranged are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification, and the color schemes of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is the base plate 981 of the distribution unit 980.
It is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a. Therefore, from the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 198
When the specification is changed to 0, the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980,
It is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that only one game ball can pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be sent to the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The rear base 1985 has the outer shape of the distribution unit 980 in front view as the rear base 98.
An opening 98 that is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of 5 and communicates with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982.
It is formed with 5d and an opening 985g communicating with the internal space of the through hole 981c.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the base plate 1
Since the outer shape of the 981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, the distribution unit 980 can be easily replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specification change).

Here, a game including a ball entry unit formed with a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the entry unit with another entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the gaming board. can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the gaming board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d and the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are arranged in the first passage T.
Since the passage unit 990 connected to the R1 and the second passage TR2 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is provided. It is not necessary to secure it in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the game board 1
The space in front of 3 can be effectively used.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, the distribution unit 98
In order to make the 0 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be formed from a light transmissive material, for example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate, or the base plate 60 may be formed. Attach the seal to. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the distribution unit 980 is passed through the front unit 940.
Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the inside (passage) of the exchange unit 1980 can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front surface is formed. Through the unit 940, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980.
That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, in the distribution unit 980, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
A detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the ball is arranged. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the exchange unit 1.
When changing to 980, since the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the exchange unit 1980, the second winning opening 1 is located at the same position as the distribution unit 980.
A side wall portion 981b for throwing a game ball flowing in from 40 is formed. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the exchange unit 1980 is replaced with the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 93).
When arranging in 0), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the exchange unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same, so that the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a.
By positioning, even the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is misaligned (stepped) at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980.
Since the target portion can be positioned where the purpose is to suppress the occurrence of, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. can. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d are the second protrusion 982d formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g.
1 is placed. Further, the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b are the second throwing portion 942c.
981b of protrusions formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in
1 is placed.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 98 of the distribution unit 980.
The 1b is arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which communicates with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine having two passages and a second member arranged on the back side of the gaming board is known. The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if a misalignment (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, a positioning hole for positioning each of these members is provided on the game board. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 9 are used.
When the 60 is arranged, a pair of second guide walls 942d of the front unit 940 are inserted between the facing portions of the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And prepare. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is a pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940.
It is located on the outside in the opposite direction of. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. The position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to prevent a positional shift (step) from occurring in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (Connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) is referred to the guide portion 962b (arm portion 9).
Since the direct positioning can be performed by 62e), the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, the front unit 940
Since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

As described above, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide unit 962b has a second ball throwing unit 942.
Since it is arranged (formed so that it can be held) on the front unit 940 provided with c, it is not necessary to separately attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the front and back of the game board 13, respectively. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can also be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the front unit 9 is arranged.
The projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the front unit 9 is attached to the base plate 60.
After attaching the 40 and the drive unit 960, it is not necessary to separately engage the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engageable with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged with the arm portion 962e. By mounting the drive unit 960 on the back surface of the base plate 60 after mounting the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the mounting operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and the arm portion 962e is in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined.
The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 of the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is a protrusion 94 of the pair of feather members 945.
The displacement member 966 into which the 5b is inserted is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 in the opening direction. Therefore, the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member 966 is formed by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960.
The opening of 66a2 can be blocked from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are shown in FIG.
FIG. 119 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). be. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member through which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 have the base plate 6 as described above.
It is fastened and fixed on both sides of 0. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is formed as a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, there is a gap K1 in the space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion. The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. Recess 8966 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122))
It is provided with a6 and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941.
When the displacement member 8966 is arranged on the front unit 940, the second winning opening 1 is inside the displacement member 8966.
40 is arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side of FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 122) and the other end side of the longitudinal direction (FIG. 12).
2 It is formed with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the lower side) to the back side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 122).

The protrusion 966a is a sliding groove 8966 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction.
A2 and the contact portion 966 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is provided with a1.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and is extended in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 is located on the other side in the gravity direction (gravity) on the lateral side in the lateral direction. It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction thereof is.
It is parallel to the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 94 is formed inside the recess 8966a6.
At least a part of 5b can be accommodated, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 8966a6 to regulate the displacement of the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the wing member 945
The protrusion 945b can be extracted from the inside of the recess 8966a6. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be restricted that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with the protrusion 945b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965e has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b) are shown in FIG. 96.
Corresponds to (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engagement state during the displacement to is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 according to the eighth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and the tip portion 996 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
Rotating portion 96 connected to 5a and its tip portion 9965a and extended to the connecting member 964 side.
Formed from 5b.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a includes an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the tip thereof and a rotary shaft 96.
It is formed with an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with 5c to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion portion 9965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, is arranged so as to be inserted through the inside of the connecting hole 966b1, and the end portion of the tip is the connecting hole. It is projected from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e has a connecting hole 9
Formed with an engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from 66b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion 965e1 protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. Will be done.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position so as to separate a slight gap from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the displacement member 9
When 66 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with each other to regulate the displacement of the transmission member 9965.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the connecting hole 966b1
One side contacted portion 966b2 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotary shaft 965c. Therefore, due to the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c, the contact surface 9965e4 is displaced by the displacement member 966.
Can be brought into contact with the front surface of. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is rotated before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965 is used.
It is possible to prevent e from coming into contact with the displacement member 966. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9
The rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted by abutting against the 965e4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment has the insertion portion 9965e and the insertion portion 99 thereof.
With the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of 65e and the wing member 945 closed, the displacement member 966 is displaced and the insertion portion 99 is inserted into the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966.
When one side of 65e is brought into contact, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 96
6 can be engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965
Described the case where the tip is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the ninth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is the connecting hole 109.
Engage with 66b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124 (a) and 124 (b) show the drive unit 10960 according to the ninth embodiment.
And is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 10966. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, in FIG. 124 (a), the wing member 9
The closed state of 45 is shown, and in FIG. 124 (b), the open state of the wing member 945 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and the tip portion 10 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
It is formed of 965a and a rotating portion that is connected to the tip portion 10965a and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a has a tip portion 10965a.
Insertion portion 109 inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later at the tip thereof.
It is formed to include 65e and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion portion 10965e has a connecting hole 10966 whose outer shape is a displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front.
It is formed smaller than the inner edge shape of b, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion bulging from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. Formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 is provided with a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in the state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in front view. Second
The opening 966c is arranged in a state where the shape of the inner edge in the front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction.
A bulging portion 966b that bulges from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and a recess 10966d that is recessed on the opposite surface of the bulging portion 966b are mainly provided.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and is provided with the contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. Contacted surface 109
The 66d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and the contact surface 10965e of the transmission member 10965e is formed.
It is arranged so as to face each other with a slight gap between them. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is a contacted surface 1096 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.
It is formed radially inward from 6d1.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4
Is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 10965 from being restricted.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 1096
5 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 1 of the transmission member 10965
Since the contacted surface 10966d1 of 0965e4 and the displacement member 10966 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotating shaft 965c, the contact surface 10965e4 is covered. It is displaced while maintaining a state of being separated from the contact surface 10966d1 with a slight gap. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, from the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side contacted portion 966.
Since the distance dimension between the facing surfaces up to b2 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, by rotating the transmission member 10965, the recess 1096 of the displacement member 10966 is formed.
The insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the 6d can be extended to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3 to slide and displace the displacement member 10966. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when the pair of feather members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the transmission member 1
The tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of 0965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1 to displace the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , The engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the engaging portion 10
The contact surface 10965e4 of the 965e3 is in contact with the contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contacted portion is provided. One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e is engaged with the other side contacted portion 966b3 in the gravity direction (bulging portion). When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the transmission member 10965 is in contact with the 965e1), the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without rotating. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, the wing member 94
It is possible to prevent 5 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engagement portion 10966e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 94.
5 can be opened.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, the displacement member 1196 according to the tenth embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the rolling portion 9 arranged between the facing portions of the second throwing portion 942c.
The tip position of 43a is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b has a first tooth surface 1194 of a gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof.
2b1 is formed. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 is set between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is a first gear GY1 pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966 described later.
Are toothed. As a result, the displacement member 11966 is displaced by sliding, so that the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the displacement member 11966.
It is formed by including a second member 11968 which is displaceably arranged in the first member 11967 and a first gear GY1 which is pivotally supported by the first member 11967 and meshed with the second member 11968. Tooth.

In the first member 11967, a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 is on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c.
In addition, a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966, and a second
It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction with the opening 966c interposed therebetween.

The support portion 11966d is projected from the first member 11967 side, and the tip thereof is the first gear G.
It is inserted into the shaft hole of Y1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be supported on the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected from the first member 11967 side, and its tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968
Can be arranged in the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and a second member thereof. 2 Sliding groove 11968b formed through the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) in a long hole shape in the plate thickness direction, and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on the end face extending to the plate.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are each meshed with the first gear GY1. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid and displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is rotated from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 119.
It is transmitted to 68, and the second member 11968 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is formed from the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the facing portions of the second throwing section 942c is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing section 942c. As a result, the end and blade of the rolling surface flowing in from the second winning opening 140 and 1196
With 8c, foreign matter inserted inside the second winning opening 140 can be cut.

According to the displacement member 1966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11 of the displacement member 11966
By displacing the 967 upward by the transmission member 965, the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement amount of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount double the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, it is possible to allow the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), cutting an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 1) in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and the ball is passed through the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball.
With the game ball reaching (see 14), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. 1966 (second member 11968) is slide-displaced, and the blade portion 11968c is the rolling portion 9.
When crossing the passage of 43a and the second throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 11968c and pressed against the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c. At the same time, when the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, a thread is inserted between the blade portion 11968c and the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c. Can be disconnected. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, the displacement member 1296 according to the eleventh embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where the protrusion tip surface abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Displacement.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, there are displacement members 129.
A first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting to the 66 side are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are the first gear GY described later, respectively.
It is inserted through the shafts of the 1st and 2nd gears GY2, and the 1st gear GY1 and the 2nd gear GY2 can be pivotally supported.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposite direction on one end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the gravity direction. The distance dimension between the facing portions of the pair of contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a second member 12966 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the rear base 94
It is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of No. 1, and its tooth surface is meshed with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small diameter gear GY2a on the small diameter side and a large diameter gear GY2b on the large diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to accommodate the large diameter gear GY.
The tooth surface of 2b is meshed with the second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 12966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 12967 has a second opening 12
On the other side of the 966c in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 and an annular ring on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching the second opening 12966c. The sliding protrusion 12966e projecting from the surface and the third gear tooth surface on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is formed with a tooth surface of 12966f.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, in the second opening 12966c,
A second blade portion 12966c2 is provided on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the pair of wing members 945 is provided. 2nd blade part 12966 in the open state
c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip thereof is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12968. As a result, the second member 12868
Can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. This will result in
The first gear GY1 can be rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965. Also, as mentioned above, the first
The small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the gear GY1 and thereby the second gear GY2.
The gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a plate-like body having a substantially H-shape in front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is located on the outer side of the pair of extending portions in the facing direction along the second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface and the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). The sliding groove 12968b is formed through the elongated hole in the plate thickness direction, and the blade portion 6683 is provided on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 has the first member 129 due to the transmission member 965.
67 is rotated by being slidably displaced. Therefore, the second member 12868 is the first.
It can be displaced with the displacement of the member 12967.

The slide displacement direction of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 is set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12968 is set via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.
It is set large.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 1
2968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling passages of the game balls of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c and rub each other's edges. The second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to be moved to the first member 12967 and the second.
Since the member 12966 (displacement member 12966) is provided, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and at the same time, the ball is passed through the rolling passages of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is removed from the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 66.
It can be sandwiched between 83 and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12868 has a blade portion 6683 in a state where the wing member 945 is open.
Is arranged on the other side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is open, the first member 12967
The second blade portion 12966c2 of the above is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of feather members 945 is open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 make a second member.
Since it is possible to block the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the winning opening 140, the second member 12868
The displacement distance of can be made smaller than that of the second member 11968 in the tenth embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 is closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 has been described. The transmission of the drive from the solenoid member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, FIG. 1
29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for ease of understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the main body 9
The pair of wing members 945 is closed when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the 61a, and the pair of wing members 945 is opened when the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. It is considered to be in a state.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the solenoid 61.
It is arranged in a state where the axis of the shaft portion 961b of 0 is oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 has a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and a wing member 94 from the end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side.
It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j which is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of 5.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 1
The erecting dimension of the 3965j is set to a length exceeding the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945.
It is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, the engaging portion 13965j has a support portion 13965j having a substantially C-shaped side view at the erection tip thereof.
1 is projected. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between facing each other inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the pair of engaging portions 13965j are opposed to each other (FIG. 1).
The width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in (29 (a) left-right direction) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1
Can be arranged.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid and displaced in the gravitational direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid and displaced in the gravitational direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced along with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are the plate member 9.
Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the 51, a space can be formed on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957.
By consolidating the arrangement space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members and devices on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140). , The space can be used effectively.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the displacement member 1496 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the displacement Connecting hole 966b of member 14966
A case where the inner edge shape of 1 is formed sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) show the winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment.
It is a rear view of. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a cross-sectional view of CXXX of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the line Ib-CXXXIb.

In FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a), the outer shape of the pair of feather members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 94 of the pair of wing members 945 are shown.
The open state of the pair of feather members 945 when 5b is cut is shown. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the displacement member 1 in the thirteenth embodiment.
The 4966 is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view, and has a second opening 9 at a substantially central position in front view.
66c is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 is provided on one end side in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) (FIG. 130 (a)).
A protruding portion 966a protruding from the upper side (upper side) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (a)) and a rear side (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) from the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)). ) Is provided with a bulging portion 14966b.

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (rear surface base 941 side) and is formed.
A horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. Connecting hole 149
The 66b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

In the connecting hole 14966b1, the shape of the inner edge in the front view is set to be substantially square, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be substantially square.
One side contacted portion 966b of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)))
2 and the other side contacted portion 96 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a)))
6b3 and the like.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a width dimension L4 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e from the separation distance L40 between the facing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2).
The dimension obtained by subtracting 1 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 (L40-L41). )> (L42-Diameter of the game ball). As a result, the displacement member 1496
When 6 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), it is the second at the edge of the displacement member 14966.
It is possible to block the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the winning opening 140.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusion 9 of the pair of wing members 945.
The case where 45b is cut will be described. As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e and the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the other side covering is formed. Insertion portion 965e into the contact portion 966b3
As shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), a pair of feather members 94 are brought into contact with each other.
When the protrusion 945b of No. 5 is cut, the displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the gap between the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L4).
Since 0-L41)> (L42-diameter of the game ball), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 due to the free fall of the displacement member 14966 is blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966. Can be done.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the pair of feather members 945 is the sliding groove 966 of the displacement member 14966.
In the state of non-communication with a2 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), a part of the displacement member 14966 is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 14966. can.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the drive unit 15 according to the 14th embodiment.
960 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment.
132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the 14th embodiment is
The first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged so as to face each other,
A solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 15962.
It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 that is pivotally supported by the accommodating portion 963 and is connected to the connecting member 964.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 132 (a)) and a back base 9 from the covering portion 962a.
It is provided with a guide portion 15962b projecting to the 41 side (see FIG. 85).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodation unit 962 and the second accommodation unit 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and the first accommodation unit 962 and the second accommodation unit 963. The solenoid 610, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the transmission member 9 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964.
It is formed mainly with 65.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 and a back base 941 side (FIG. 85) from the covering portion 962a. A guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The guide portion 15962b is connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and the wall portion 962f formed in the front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. The side opposite to the lining part 962a from 962f (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125))
), A second arm portion 15962j located on the other side of the pair of arm portions 15962e in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f, and a second arm portion sandwiching the wall portion 962f. 159
It is mainly provided with a third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of 62j.

The arm portion 15962e has a back base 941 from each of the facing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a.
It is formed into a substantially L-shaped side view that projects to the side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in the direction of gravity. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of facing portions is set smaller than the width dimension between the facing portions of the pair of arm portions 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second arm part 15962
In j, the distance dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 facing each other in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are set.
Is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b in the combined state.

Further, in the pair of second arm portions 15962j, the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portion 981b. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the side wall portion 981b
It can be positioned by arranging the second arm portion 15962j inside the.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the second arm portion 1 is attached to the third arm portion 15962h.
A projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back base 941 side end of the 5962j is formed.

The projecting portion 15962h1 is a rear base 941 (FIG. 85) from the end of the second arm portion 15962j.
(See) The protrusion distance to the side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and the second recessed portion 94 is formed.
It is placed inside 2c1.

Therefore, the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b is
Since the game balls are formed at different positions in the passing direction, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side can be different. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Will be. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is the notch 1698 of the side wall 16981b.
It is arranged inside 1b2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.
The description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 13
4 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has a winning opening unit having an upright tip surface in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. 93
It is formed in a size that abuts on the tip of the second throwing portion 16942c of 0.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b is a recessed portion 16981 recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface.
It is provided with b2. The recess 16981b2 is formed at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface 981c1 in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. It should be noted that the rolling surface 981 of the through hole 981c from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a.
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to c1 will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the side wall portion 16
The inner surface of 981b on the erection base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, the recess 1698
It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing up on the concave tip surface of 1b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is thrown to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, the rolling surface 98 of the distribution unit 980 from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930.
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow) to 1c1.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the rolling surface 9
Since the upstream end of 81c1 is formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side are different. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

Further, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 is located downstream in the rolling direction of the game ball.
16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second throwing portion 942c and the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a are brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. Can be done. That is, the upstream end of the side surface of the second throwing portion 942c is the rolling portion 94.
When the game ball is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of 3a, the second ball throwing portion 942c is formed until the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. The protrusion 16942c2 can guide the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively weak rigidity and may be broken.
According to the embodiment, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, even if the protrusion 16942c2 is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b are formed on the game ball. It is possible to maintain a state in which the positions are different in the passing direction, and it is possible to make the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by these steps on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly.
Can be made to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the recessed portion 1698 is formed on the protrusion 16942c2.
By abutting the side surfaces of 1b2, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the distribution unit 980 with respect to the rolling portion 943a in the upward direction in the gravity direction. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to restrict the position of the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from being displaced above the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a in the direction of gravity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the end portions of the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in the side view. However, in the 16th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment. In addition, FIG. 13
4 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment is the tip surface 1798 of the erecting tip thereof.
1b3 is formed with a downward inclination from the proximal end side toward the distal end side. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed by ascending and tilting along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 has the tip surface 1 of the projecting tip surface thereof.
The 7942c3 is formed by ascending and tilting along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a.
Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (Sixth embodiment), the side wall portion 1798
A game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of 1b can be slid along an inclination to prevent it from being bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be made gradual, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137, the displacement member 1896 according to the 17th embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 135 (a). CX
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the XXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136
(B) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) shows CXXXVIIb-C of FIG. 137 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the XXXVIIb line.

It should be noted that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. In addition, FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a).
Only the pair of feather members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a rear base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the 17th embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and is a non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the direction of gravity and a non-transmission portion 1 thereof.
Transmission unit 18 that bends and extends from the lower end of 8966a6 in the direction of gravity to the center side in the left-right direction.
It is equipped with 966a7.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 is closed, the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 is moved to the rolling portion 94.
It is possible to regulate the inflow from 3a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the lower side on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is,
When the pair of feather members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the 17th embodiment, the rotation range on the tip portion 965a side is set larger when the solenoid 961 is driven, as compared with the 1st embodiment. That is,
The displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896
The g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the opening of the second winning opening 140 can be arranged inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b is slid inside the transmission portion 18966a7 after the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6. In this case, the non-transmission unit 18966
Since the extension direction of the above and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the protrusion 945b
Slides the inside of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without changing the position with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is the second winning opening 140.
The side surface on the front side is in contact with the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, so that the side surface is displaced downward in the gravity direction. Between the blade portion 18966 g and the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, as the movement is performed.
It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 is closed. The edge of the passage (rolling portion 943a and second throwing portion 942)
Since the blade portion (18966 g) that rubs against the end portion of c) is provided, it is possible to cut the urging object illegally inserted into the passage through which the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and the game ball is passed through the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the 17th embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slidably displaced and the blade portion 18966 g crosses the passages of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 189 is in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball.
When 18966 g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with 66 g and pressed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, 1
A thread can be cut between 8966 g and the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the displacement member 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140.
The through hole 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the player has a pair of feather members 9
When the 45 is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 has a coil spring SP1 (FIG. 9) on the solenoid 961.
4), the tip portion 18965a side is urged in a direction of being displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 is forcibly released by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotation axis direction (the driven member 163 is displaced). It may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the direction intersecting the plane to be driven).
In this case, a frictional force is generated with the driven member 163, and the frictional force causes the driven member 1 to be driven.
63 can be decelerated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulation unit 175 or the upper regulation unit 176 is driven by the driven member 163.
It is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and is arranged to face the driven member 163 in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated, and the driven member 163 at other timings. It may be configured to retract outside the displacement locus of. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driven member 163 may be arranged at an overlapping position in the displacement direction view, or the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis side of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating portion 175. Is also good.

Further, not only when the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating shaft of the driven member 163, one of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 is on the left side and the other. May be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 exerts an electromagnetic force in the direction of pulling up the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force that pushes it up. Further, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting means 181 is composed of the LED has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a miniature bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-damping resin member may be filled in the region between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the placement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180.

On the contrary, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 may be closed, and the filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect of oscillating the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 in accordance with the vibration of the illuminated substrate 180. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a punching metal may have a plurality of through holes.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is formed in the shape of a thin plate has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in the front view, it is possible to prevent the plate portion of the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized while exposing the light emitting means 181 in the front view. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or may be transmitted by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in the vertical direction with respect to the horizontal direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole portion 406 is a long hole long in the horizontal direction has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends at an angle with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of pinnate members 460 abut against each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide a slight gap from the design stage. As a result, the fatigue accumulated due to the contact with the feather-shaped member 460 can be eliminated as compared with the case where the feather-shaped members 460 come into contact with each other. Therefore, the feather-shaped member 4
The durability of 60 can be increased. It should be noted that the pattern formed on the back surface side of the gap or the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player through this gap.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by adjusting the gear ratio by making the size of the arcuate gear 462 of the pinnate member 460 different on the left and right, the pair of pinnate member 460
The displacement amount and the displacement speed may be different. As a result, a pair of pinnate members 460
Even when the shapes of the sides that come into contact with each other are symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be displaced from the left-right center position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate member 460 at the time of contact is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, most of the parts may be symmetrical, but may be partially different. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, the pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the shapes of the pinnate member 460 are symmetrical, it is possible to make the player think that the pinnate member 460 constitutes a symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 in contact with each other are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pair of pinnate members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction and come into contact with each other. In this case, the wing-shaped member 460 on the left side can be formed in a larger area than the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side in comparison with the shape of the back case 310.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pinnate member 460 and an invariant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape in a front view. As a result, the pinnate member 4
Since the shape completed by only 60 and the shape completed by other predetermined members and the pinnate member 460 can be visually recognized by the player, the effect of the pinnate member 460 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 reminds us of the concept of "shellfish and pearls" has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into the wall, and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured to have a shape representing the momentum of a bullet. In this case, the shape of the pinnate member 460 is diverted, and it can be realized by forming the light emitting effect member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 with different members having different shapes or decorations. That is, it is possible to newly configure another operation unit by diverting a part of the members, so that the development cost can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slidably displaced in the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 444 of the auxiliary arm member 444.
The elevating plate 430 may be configured so as to be axially supported by fixing the arrangement of d, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable in an arc orbit centered on this axis.

Further, when the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, the elevating plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the displacement in the left-right direction of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing an urging means or an electromagnetic solenoid for urging the relative displacement member 442 on the arcuate gear portion 444b side in the left-right direction, the tooth engagement between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

The arcuate gear portion 444b may not be made of a highly rigid resin material, but may be made of a flexible resin material used for a gear belt or the like. In this case, the deformation of the material can absorb the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the window portion defined in the central portion of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 is configured to have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape inside the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the pinnate member 460. As a result, the game board 13 can be provided with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmission hole 60c has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, since the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow bottom component 91 can be brought close to each other, the outer portion 94 is formed to be thin so that the outer portion 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform an effect of making (wavy).

In other words, the portion displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 to be visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 but also outside the window portion. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the recessed portion of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the lower left and right sides of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of the game ball, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed of a resin material having less bending (high rigidity resin material) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed of a rubber resin material. In this case, due to the elastic deformation of the partition member 708, the partition member 708 can be brought into close contact with the illuminated substrate 705 and the thin film cover member 712, and light leakage can be prevented.

In the first embodiment, the position where the left and right load members 761 come into contact with the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance between the reference O1 are the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the left and right, the load member 7
The position where the 61 abuts on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be different from the reference O1.
The arrangement of the load member 761 with respect to the reference O1 may be different on the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the load member 761 may be displaced to the front side so that the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 come into contact with each other. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the arrangement of the load member 761 can be returned to the back surface side by the load applied from the front lid member 770.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the flexibility of the load member 761 is changed by a method such as changing the density (locally), changing the thickness, or changing the material of the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. As a result, the left and right drive units 76
When 0 is set to the one-sided excitation state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped can be changed depending on which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven. That is, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
It is possible to increase the posture in which 30 can be stopped.

Even if the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical configuration on the left and right, the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is asymmetrical (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side). The same effect can be achieved by providing an extra wall thickness on the lower bottom side).

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be vertically displaced while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. Thereby, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state in which the load member 761 is easily bent (posture) and a state in which the load member 761 is hard to bend (posture).

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d can be assembled to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c in an assembling manner such as fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, and sandwiching, so that the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be assembled. And may be composed separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c can be diverted and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced. In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are plate-shaped displacement members 7.
Although the case where the position is displaced in the rotation axis direction of 30 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a can be orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The change in the spacing between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be changed by the hollow member 740.
It can be used to change the holding force of the hollow member 740 instead of changing the posture of the hollow member 740.

That is, the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed by increasing the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It can be used to sandwich from. Therefore, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, the clearance of the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be configured to be the same as the clearance of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear projecting columnar portions 743 also increases, the posture of the hollow member 740 is higher than that in the case where the side having a large clearance is allowed to rotate with the side having a small clearance as an axis. It is possible to easily suppress the change.

In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portion 735 supporting the pair of projecting columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 is separately arranged before and after the reference O1 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove in a direction inclined with respect to the slide direction. In this case, by providing the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b on the opposite sides to the slide direction, the protruding columnar portion 743 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are provided with the slide displacement. The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pivotally supported and displaced by the left-right direction axis has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a mode in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can rotate even in the front-rear direction axis (for example, a support mode with a ball joint).

Further, on the upper side of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (
A long plate configured in the left-right direction) may be supported so as to ride as a separate body. in this case,
Depending on the drive mode of the drive unit 760, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation of the left-right axis and rotation of the front-rear axis.

Further, the shaft support portion may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is long in the vertical direction so as to allow the vertical displacement of the shaft-mounted support portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
Not only the rotational movement of 0, but also the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right axial support portions 731 with respect to the other (corresponding to the rotational displacement around the axis in the front-rear direction).
Therefore, the displacement modes of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 due to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the core material extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes with the displacement of the load member 761. (It may be configured so that the core material comes off). In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes depending on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent along with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, the case where one of the portions for decelerating the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driven member 16
Both of the portions that decelerate 3 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the decelerating portions (lower regulation unit 175 and upper regulation unit 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, the case where the urging spring SP21 does not directly hit the driven member 163 but applies an urging force via the contact member 2190 between them has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the urging spring SP 21 may be configured to come into direct contact with the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the urging spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a plurality of contact points between the urging spring SP21 (s) and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points may be located on the rotation shaft side and the rotation tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment, by extending the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 in the displacement direction of the elevating plate 430, a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the elevating plate 430 is configured. The case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the section is cut off has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a section in which a sliding portion (an angle region where the gear teeth do not mesh) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441 so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. May be configured to block the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotary gear 3441 with an arm is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed all around, but a partially overhanging portion is formed so as to be able to function as a cam, and the overhanging portion gives a load to the relative displacement member 442. This may be configured to displace the relative displacement member 442. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhanging portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured for detecting the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g which is a part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick overhanging portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjusting member 5782 projects upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjusting member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening is formed inside the wall of the load member 761, and the adjusting member 578 is formed in the opening.
2 may enter and function as a core. In this case, the flexibility of the load member 761 can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjusting member 5782.

In the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the load member 761 has an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
The case of being driven by is described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the load member 761 may be configured by a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to the instantaneous drive mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape as a rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is curved, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to form an inner wall and a protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 94
When the gap between the protrusion and the 5b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the amount of the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966, whereby the sliding groove 966a during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 is performed.
The gap between the inner wall of 2 and the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extended length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lightening amount due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 and improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966.

In the sixth embodiment, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other.
The case where the screw screwed into the ball is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is formed so as to project in an annular shape has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (direction away from the axis of the annular projection 953c in the radial direction).

In the sixth embodiment, the game area (front) of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980.
The case where the side is visually recognized by the player has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
A sticker on which information consisting of characters or figures is displayed may be attached to the game area (front) side of the distribution unit 980.

In this case, the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR of the distribution unit 980
Since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of 2, even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized through the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the display is marked (). As a reference position), the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player. The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is replaced with the first member 11967 and the second member 11.
Although the case where the blade portion 11968c is formed from the two members of 968 and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967, the present invention is not limited to this. The displacement member 11966 is formed from one member, and the one member (displacement member 1196) is formed.
The amount of displacement by the transmission member 965 of 6) may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. for example,
When the pair of wing members 945 is closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. Drive unit 960 (solenoid 6) for cutting illegal objects (threads)
It can be performed by using the electromagnetic force of 10). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using the electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961 of the drive unit 960
The coil spring SP1 is arranged between the coil spring SP1 and c in a compressed state, and power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so that the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body 961a (the shaft 961b is the main body). Although the case of being drawn into the inside of the part 961a) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using the electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. for example,
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are other pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 181 and an eighteenth embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 138 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, FIG. 139 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 140 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 138, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 138) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 139) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 138) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 138), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 138) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 139) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball lending is performed according to the operation. Will be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back side of (see 138). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 138) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 139.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 139) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 139) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 139) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is released is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the time for opening the electric accessory 640a and the number of times for the electric accessory 640a to be opened at one time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used.
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 141), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 has an electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variation display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”).
Is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 141), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 141), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls are paid out to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a prize paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is the second winning opening 6
It will be easy to win a prize in 40.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640. , It is advantageous for the player.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 148) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 140, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each substrate.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and it is possible to remove the sealing sticker in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 141) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 205
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display device 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as the axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
It is connected to 11, but not to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
The display of 1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 140). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, a power failure (power failure) (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 on the determination that the power is cut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are NMI.
The interrupt process (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 142 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 142, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 138).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 144).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

143 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 143 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 143 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 144 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144 (a).

In FIGS. 143 and 144, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 143 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 144 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 144, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 145 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow VIII directional view of FIG. 143, and FIG. 146 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow IX directional view of FIG. 144. In addition, in FIGS. 145 and 146, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 146, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 149) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of lightness and darkness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 144) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 147, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used for tilting. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 149 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 150 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 149) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 154 (b)), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. The voice coil motor 352, which is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and the vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, the left side detection sensor 353L, which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and the right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 149 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the center of the left and right visible.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of the drive device 340
The 44R is arranged in such a manner that it is arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and it is possible to detect that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by the 3Rs.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. 151 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 151 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 151 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 152 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 153 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the tilting device 310 has a mode in which a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings and a lid on the upper opening of the case main body 311 are covered. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 152), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311h and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and a protective lens member 311i formed of a light transmissive material, and a bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j that is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20 on a surface.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 154 (b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 159) to the push-in end (FIG. 159). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 160).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 151 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 151 (c)), the player can use it. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 166), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 153, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b having the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 143).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 143), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical due to its positional relationship. While staying inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 144), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. 154 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 154 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 154 (a), and FIG. 155 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the force to separate from each other between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is a motor accommodating portion 3 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above by being bent rearward on the left and right sides.
A shaft support hole 341b that is bored at the same position of the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a and the plate portion that is arranged to face each other and supports the disk cam 344, and a shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. The shaft portion 341c is projected in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, the extension portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and the motor. Lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the accommodating portion 341a
Mainly includes e and an LED device 341f arranged at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and is a portion that refracts light (a portion).
A part that refracts light) is provided. This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341f both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 has a motor accommodating portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor accommodating portion 341a.
A fixing member 342a to be fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in a perfect circle shape at one end, and is bored in a rectangular shape at a shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by a connecting pin 344d of a disk cam 344 and at the other end. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 152) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 155) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343a is a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2 are provided, and the right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
The 43c is formed to have a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
The movable clutch 343c is provided with a clutch portion 343b2 in which irregularities along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
It is provided with 43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the transmission gear 343b and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. ..

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It consists of a mountain-shaped convex and concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 155) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually a transmission gear 3 due to the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arranged at a position close to 43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along 43a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. 157. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R have a substantially mirrored shape, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

157 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 155, and FIG. 157 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 155. be. Note that FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 155.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is a member at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 155), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 156), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 155). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 155) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c protrudes outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and the angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3 (angle in the present embodiment). θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 159). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

158 (a) and 158 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. Note that FIG. 158 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 172).

As shown in FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346a formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155). From the convex pin 346b having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 157) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b is bored along along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be able to guide (the convex pin 346b is bored with a size including the movement locus inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 155). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 158 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 158 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 158 (b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161, an operation example in which the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

159 to 161 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 159 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 160 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 159. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 160 to the first state is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 159 to 161 show an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit.

As shown in FIG. 159, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 159, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 148).

As shown in FIG. 160, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 160). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 159 and the state shown in FIG. 160 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 155), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 161, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 160 in the extension direction, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. This will result in
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 167. 162 to 167 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a).

Note that FIG. 162 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 163 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the posture has changed is shown, and FIG. 164 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 163 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown, FIG. 166 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 165 to the terminal position, and FIG. 167 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 165, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 164 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 166, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 162, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 163, from the state shown in FIG. 162 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 163). When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 163). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 34 of the engaging rib 344c.
Since the disc cam 344 is maintained until it faces the 6d, the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 163).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 162 and 163, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 164, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 6). Return to the state shown in 162). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 164), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG. 163.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311i increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 165, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 165) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 165), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 165) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 165).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Fig. 162). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 165, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 165, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 165, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 165 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 166) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 165. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 166, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 161), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 167, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, it is determined whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing when the tilting device 310 is pushed.
Only the player who pushed the tilting device 310 into operation can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means.
As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 167, from the state shown in FIG. 166, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346 (FIG. 166 counterclockwise). By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 166, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 166), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 166 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 162. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 166) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 171, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation). The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

168 to 171 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). In FIG. 168, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 167, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 168). In FIG. 169, the state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 168 is shown, and in FIG. 170, the state shown in FIG. 169 is shown. A state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates is shown, and FIG. 171 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 170. Further, in FIG. 170, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 169 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 171 an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 168, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 169, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 168 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 167, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 170, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 169), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 170. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 170, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 170) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 170).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 170 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 165 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 170, are tilted by the rotary claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 169, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 170, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 170, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 171) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 170 (see FIG. 171), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174, an operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state after the push-in operation by the player without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

172 to 174 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 172 illustrates a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. 171. In FIG. 173, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) more than the state shown in FIG. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 172) is shown, and in FIG. 174, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. 173 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 172 to 174, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 171) from the state shown in FIG. Contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 172.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. 172 to disengage the engagement rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotary claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 172, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 172). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 173, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 173. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is possible to perform a vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. 173. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 174, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 151) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 173 to the state shown in FIG. 174. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 172 to 174, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 173. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 175 and 176, measures for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. 176 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 175. In addition, in FIG. 175, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 176, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 175. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, whereby the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are used. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, for example, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are out of phase. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
By detecting that the state has been reached, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 has reached the first initial state, so that the control of the drive motor 352 is restarted with that state as the initial position (of the drive motor 342). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a realigned state. It can be performed.

As a result, the drive motor 342 is used when the tilting device 310 is operated to produce an effect.
It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 176, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

177, 178, 179 and 180 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 177 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175, and FIG. 178 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 177. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, in FIG. 179, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175 is shown, and in FIG. 180, the disk cam is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 179. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 177. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 179.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 179 to the state shown in FIG. 180, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotary claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operation from FIG. 175 to the first state shown in FIGS. 177 and 179 both appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movement after the first state is reached. Will be different in either FIG. 178 or FIG. 180.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 175 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 175) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). In addition, in FIG. 181, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 181) from the first initial state (see FIG. 162) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 181) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 181, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 181) as the posture of the release member 346 changes. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 181. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the nineteenth embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

182 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the 19th embodiment, FIG. 182 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 182 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

183 (a) and FIG. 183 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 183 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 183 (b) shows the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 185).

As shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 184) has a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 184). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 184). , Mainly prepared. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those of the eighteenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. The hook-shaped portion 2348b is projected in a hook shape toward (left side of FIG. 182), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 184 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface). Mainly a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is replaced with the rail portion 2.
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the eighteenth embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 183), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
As the 6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d becomes the functional elongated hole 23.
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, and the like.
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotated on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184) in a state of being arranged at the terminal position (183 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length composed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 183, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also slows down.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

184 to 186 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 184 shows a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 185 shows the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 184. Is shown in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 184) and the engaging portion 346d of the disengagement member 2346 is pushed up. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 184, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will never be done.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 185). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 185) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the eighteenth embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the movement mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be used. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 by ensuring a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. 185. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be noticed. Can be improved.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the twentieth embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 187, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311 gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311 gL in the 18th embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and opposite to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the 18th embodiment.

188 (a) and 188 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 188 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 188 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. Left side detection sensor 324L is OFF and right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

189 (a) and 189 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 189 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 189 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 189 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the push end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L. , The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly strikes the tilting device 3310, the ascending motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous striking operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the 21st embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 190, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection groove (slit) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 191) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

19 (a) and 191 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300 showing the pushing-down operation of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 191 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 191 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e has passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each detection is performed. Sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 191 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 191 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the push-in end, and decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which the voice coil motor 352 is switched between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the timing interval described above is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled by driving.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against the force, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the push-in end can be applied. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled by pushing the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 to the side close to the tilting device 4310 in advance.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is being pushed out during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the voice coil motor 352.

192 (a) and 192 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is projected and convex while the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 192 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 192 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to produce a vibration effect.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 205.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

FIG. 193 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the 22nd embodiment, and FIG. 194 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the eighteenth embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the 18th embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibrating device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 195 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 195, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly equipped with 5430.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft overhangs.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 that are convexly provided on the left, right, left, and right sides in the radial direction, and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 that is projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintenance part 5423 in which the fixing part 5411a is embedded
And a convex leg portion 5424 which is convexly provided in a pair of columns upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth configured at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the left and right sides is larger than the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 because the posture maintaining portion 5423 is arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is convex in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in the contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310
The resolution of the degree of deformation of 20 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 is adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and the first accommodating portion 5431 thereof, and the weight member 5 is provided.
The second accommodating portion 5432 in which 412 is accommodated, and the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the 432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is the flexible member 54 until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom.
When the 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load release state), the depth is set so that the convex leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. To.

196 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 196 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 196 (a). In FIG. 196 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 196 (a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region are pushed into the player by three degrees from the first state. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left and right (tilting to the left and right on the paper surface in FIG. 196 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 196 (b).

As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 and facilitate the translation of the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 196 (b)).

197 (a) and 197 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 on the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 196 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 197 (a) illustrates the assembly load release state, and FIG. 197 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 196 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembled load release state, and when the assembled load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are formed. As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 194) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 194), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 175). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is uniformly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 197 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

198 (a) and 198 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a).

FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 198 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side of the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof becomes the second accommodating portion 543.
Contact (rub) with 2. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 198 (b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force to push back in the direction).

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward is separately the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By configuring it with a combination of generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force that pushes back the tilting device 310.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 196 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the lightness of the tilting device 310 operation and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be satisfactorily achieved. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 194), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) is different due to the difference in the detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located above the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 198 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 198 (a)), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10, for example, other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. Through, vibration can be transmitted to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (a pulsed pushing operation), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the preparation for vibration generation is ready, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the eighteenth embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the 18th embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 199, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 200A is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 200B is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the eighteenth embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 from the disk portion at the center position thereof.
A support cylinder portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape to the side where b is arranged, and an axially symmetric elongated hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance along the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. From the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion and the axial end of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1, extending toward the disk portion side along the axial direction. It mainly comprises a pair of holding arm portions A1 to be formed.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged so as to sandwich the elongated hole recess C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 199). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated recess C1 is formed with a concave cross section having a width slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1 (
It is configured to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction).

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
It is possible to prevent the 343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The pinching arm portion A1 is formed from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm.
It is provided with an engaging convex portion A1a that is convex toward the arm portion on the other side. Engagement convex part A1a
Engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 201). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 202). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 200B) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 202 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 200B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 202 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for the e-ring to touch the surface and slide it) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the 18th embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fitting groove 5343a3 from a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 and the groove for fitting the e-ring and the disk cam 534 by the e-ring.
When the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of 4 and the disc cam 5344 are fitted until the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3 is reached, the engagement convex of the holding arm portion A1. Mainly includes an engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 199), and then the e-ring is fitted. In addition to preventing the misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent the misalignment of the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two is expanded. After that, when the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 elastically recovers, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 202 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203.

202 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 199, and FIG. 202 (b) is the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 202 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 202 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 202 (a). 203 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV in FIG. 199, and FIG. 203 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 203 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 203 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player gives an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 202.

As shown in FIGS. 202 and 203, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. The resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large because of the contact with the cylinder member 5343a.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 199)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of small resistance, as shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 202A.

204 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. 204 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 204 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 204 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 204 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is enlarged and shown. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 204 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 204 (a), when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 204 (a) due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 199) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other on a surface contact basis. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is dammed by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (direction of arrow CCW, see FIG. 205), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disk cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In this embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

FIG. 205 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 205 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 205 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) from the second state and tilted down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disk cam 5344R is also applicable to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (b) and 205 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the eighteenth embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the occurrence of overload is detected, the right disk cam 3 is in a state where no overload has occurred.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate the 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 203B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 203A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 202 (b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 203 (b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the 23rd embodiment has the disk cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207.

FIG. 206 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 207 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the 18th embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is composed of a mirrored shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the eighteenth embodiment, and the second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the eighteenth embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a disk member 6344L1 thereof. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the eighteenth embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the eighteenth embodiment and having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. The lid plate portion 6344h is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion and is arranged radially outward in the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side is the annular rib 63.
It abuts on 44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disk member 634 is formed on the surface.
Compared with the case of contacting with 4L1, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations, the disk member 63 is composed of three times the number of rotations of the disk member 63.
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set in a mode in which the 44L1 makes one rotation).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a.
A second that is fixed to a and its auxiliary pillar member 6348a and is meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary pillar member 6348.
It mainly includes a deceleration transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear tooth 6344i of the 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 208 to 210, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

208, 209, and 210 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 208 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 173, and FIG. 209 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 208 (correctly). A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) as well as a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of the rotation after the rotation exceeding one rotation. Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 210 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 209, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 208 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 171).

In the operation device 300 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 171).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 209, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 210). As described above, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 208 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 209. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

Thereby, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the gaming machine in such a manner that the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is attracted. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 210) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 171) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is reached. It is possible to relate the magnitude of the displacement and the magnitude of the displacement amount that the player pushes the tilting device 310 into, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 222.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the plate cam 344 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described.

211 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the 24th embodiment, FIG. 211 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 212 (a) is FIG. 211. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXBa line, and FIG. 212 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 211 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L is composed of a mirrored symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 199) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7434R2 and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center.
Detection hole 344eR in the portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape.
The engaging ribs 344c are partially omitted (first overhanging portions 344c1 and first).
It is a member having a shape (the space between it and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
The 410, the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled in the radial direction between them, and a side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 to the outside in the radial direction. It mainly includes a fixed protrusion 7440 that is convexly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from an intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
From the first elongated hole 7431 which is a long rectangular elongated hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the displaced position and the bottom end portion of the disk member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. The second elongated hole 74, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
It mainly includes a return portion 7433 that is formed so as to project to the 32 side.

The width direction (short side) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
It is made smaller than the dimension in the lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 212 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 213. 213 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 213 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 213 (c) is an arrow LXXVIc direction view of FIG. 213 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. Mainly includes a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and forming a star-shaped through hole in the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and the outer diameter dimension is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. This makes it possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 212 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to operate in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 212 (a)) in the assembled state. be able to.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

214 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 214 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 214 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 211 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 214B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 214 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion to be inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state.
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction facing the elastic force, its extending tip is configured to have an extending length extending inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the widthwise dimension of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 212 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 215. 215 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 215 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 215 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 215 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 215 (c), and FIG. 215 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 215 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 215 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 215 (a), FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 215 (c) and FIG. 215 (d), a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 215 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 215 (b), 215 (d) and 215 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly mistakes.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the positions of the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 215 (d). Moving.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 215 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 215 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 215 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 215 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 215 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned process, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction will be described. 216 (a), 216 (b), 217 (a), 217 (b) and 218 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In addition, in FIG. 216 (a), FIG. 216 (b), FIG. 217 (a), FIG. 217 (b) and FIG. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the 18th embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the eighteenth embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion of FIG. 217 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is slanted in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 216 (a), 216 (b), 217 (a), 217 (b), and 218, the disk cam 744 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 216 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 216 (a) illustrates a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and FIG. 216 (b) shows FIG. 216 (a). ), The right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, and in FIG. 217 (a), the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2 is shown. In (b), the state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 217 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 218, the right disk cam is shown from the state shown in FIG. 217 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 216 (a), FIG. 216 (b), FIG. 217 (a) and FIG. (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a), in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to come into contact with each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the angle between the releasing member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. It is arranged (see FIG. 217 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From the 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, so that the rotation of the disk cam 7344 is based on the rotation. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 217 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 217 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 217 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally divided recess 7522 originally arranged to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 218, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIGS. 216 (a) to 218, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 219, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 219 (a), 219 (b), 220 (a) and 220 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In FIG. 219, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

In FIGS. 219 (a) to 220 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 219 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 219 (a) shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other, and FIG. 219 (b) shows the engagement member 7344R3 upward to the release member 7346. FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 219 (b). In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 219 (a) to 220 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clock 219 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 and then separates from the engaging member 7344R3. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 219 and 220), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the eighteenth embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 216, 217, and 218), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the eighteenth embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 221) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 221 and 222 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In FIG. 221, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 144 (b) (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown, and in FIG. 222, the ring member 7344R2 changes from the state shown in FIG. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one, and in FIGS. 221 and 222, the second overhanging portion 344c3 hits the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 221, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 222, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state where it sinks below the 2 state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is tilted from the first state.
The position at which 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending motion can be changed. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 316.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 223) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings prior to FIG. 223.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. 223 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 224 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 225 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 226 is a front perspective view. FIG. 227 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 227 is a pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 227, the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board 13 is omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It can rotate forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) when viewed from the front, and the right side is rotated. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 224, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 223, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 223, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the metal plate with holes) with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 263) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (the diameter of the upper columnar in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically). Is externally fitted to the support pin 19a (which has a small shape) and is pivotally supported.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 223). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back surface side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 226, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparently formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 223, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting means that lights up during the payout of prize balls.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 223, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area of the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of places, or may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 226, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 229).

In the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port portion 143 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 226, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received by the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 229), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed like this.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the lighting unit 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board is disposed to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is connected, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 240), and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 240), electricity is supplied to the illuminated portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 226). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal board of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotation tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
It has a positional relationship facing the device on the upper side of 0 (see FIG. 263) in the front-rear direction, and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member having an open front side formed of a resin material is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring has a structure. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is abutted against the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame portion 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c gently curves in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 233) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14)
It is formed of a resin material between the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the main body frame 14a and the vertically long plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 which is a part of the main body frame 14. A reverse cup-shaped reverse cup portion 178, which is a portion of the plastic and opens downward, is arranged.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion that illegally expands the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and enters the game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat causes the reverse cup portion 178.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and passed through the reverse cup portion 178.
Will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact with each other (close to each other). Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (
Since it travels in the left-right direction), it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits fraudulent activity through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is supposed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window portion 14c).
You can make the cheating person naturally (without suspicion that the piano wire is not inserted properly) to insert the piano wire deeper (until you can see the tip of the piano wire from the front side through). .. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 226, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 227, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is equipped with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 226) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 227, a substrate 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 227, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrated in the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 226) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 227, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) that urges the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are the main controller 1.
While the connector CN3 is used for transmission with 10 as it is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission target is different, so the intention is to prevent malfunction in advance by separating the board. by.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 229 is a window portion of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, it is the front side of the upper plate 17 on the front side of the main body frame 14c, and diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The cover cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width similar to the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and the main body bending portion 371 having a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to form a front view V. The hanging portion 372 formed in a character shape, the curved portion 371 of the main body, and the hanging portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by 72 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. The left side plane support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body, the right side plane support portion 375 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right side plane support portion 375 from the back side. A support groove 376, which is a groove to be recessed and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The curved portion 371 of the main body has a curved front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge portion, and is an upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 223). The back left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the back left edge portion 371a are connected to each other and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. The back middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are connected to each other on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body and supports the operation handle 51, and is a right corner cover 38 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14.
It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap between 0 and the shape (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is located on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, in the recessed portion 1.
A screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the 5a is formed, so that the recessed portion 15a is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the lower frame member 320 is placed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 169). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light upward, and 2 LEDs (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light downward. , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 159), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 169), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 169) to the first state (see FIG. 159), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat surface support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031.

The right-side plane support portion 375 abuts vertically with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 comes into contact with the lower surface of 0 and is displaced downward, the illuminated portion 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, so that the upper panel unit 400 can be supported. The force required to support the illumination can be widely dispersed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that accepts the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the illuminated portion 8032 is assumed to have entered the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right side plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illuminated portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fixed to the main body frame 14a or a plate so as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side by fastening and fixing the main body frame 14a to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like). It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of the synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire having a heated tip, a piano wire, or the like is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 and melted), the front frame It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145,
The illustrated wire is the passage forming unit 1 even when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.
It is possible to prevent the entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is opened. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear becomes thinner (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 223). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 226 and 228, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left-right long plate member. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a screw are formed above and below the through hole 156, and a screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 is inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than a through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is a connecting portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
It is arranged so as to match 48 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a connecting insertion hole 1 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
It is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction with the protruding portion 148a having a columnar inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and projecting to the back side. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 148b, which is formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation unit back member 1 can be easily inserted.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle and the lower edge. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back surface side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 226), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be surface-contacted with the wall portion 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 227) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), and details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back surface member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the plate thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 227) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is further arranged on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. can.

As a path for a foreign substance such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 233) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 240) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 194).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick at the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 150) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separably independent configuration, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 150, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), passing through the inside of the operation device 300 and downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 150 and 154 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 154 (b) and 155), liquid such as drinking water is transferred to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered with the bottom plate portion 321, drinking water or the like may be applied. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 150 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. In FIG. 230 or FIG. 233, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 is shown as in FIG. 228.

FIG. 230A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 230B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 230 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) and are extended to the left from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 229) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 223) is once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads toward the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 233).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back surface side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230 (a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230 (a)). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. A plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181c and the fixed portion 181c.
(See FIG. 233 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened, which is a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. Mainly equipped with 181e.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
The attitude toward d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d and the harness HN1 to HN3.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding downward, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. The region (plate member 14d and intermediate stop 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape curved along the arranged circle.
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region (region sandwiched between 1c and 1c).

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181.
In e, the outer peripheral surface thereof is fitted inside the portion on the proximal end side of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is pivotally supported (see FIG. 233).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the flat surface OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1. It becomes the same as the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept not intended for elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portions 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. The binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 in the fixed state (see FIG. 230 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 230 (b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1 thereof.
It mainly includes a small opening 184b, which is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with 84a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 233).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When you want to lock the binding arm part 183 to the locking part 184, you can easily adjust the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm part 183 by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted and fixed through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 231 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 231 (a). 232 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 232 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 232 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

In addition, in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range) is illustrated, and FIGS. 232 (a) and 232 (b.) In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 231 and the state shown in FIG. 232). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

233 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 233 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 233 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 233 (a) and 233 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 233 (c) and 233 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 233, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the binding movable member 180 is changed to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180.
It can be made to follow the shape of 2. As a result, FIGS. 233 (b) and 233.
As shown in (d), the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by 3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 233 (b)). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

234 (a) and 234 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 234 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 234 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 223) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also has a rotation center point P57 as a center with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 234 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 234 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 233 (FIG. 233). b), also see FIG. 233 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 233 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed ( (Fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side) can be improved (see FIGS. 233 (b) and 234 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 228). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire is advanced toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 229) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (the early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 139) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to launch a ball to a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal benefit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 226) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 226) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity will be performed without leaving the seat, so that the pachinko / pachislot machine store can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 235 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 235, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 235, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. Each of the S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 is provided with the extension direction facing (switching) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223). Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, the balls are removed from the Senryobako box. A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) due to being required to be replenished or the like can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions whose extension directions can be bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged on the downstream side of the first bending region NEa1 and on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 236 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 236, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 236, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 236, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, a route that advances to the upstream side of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 236 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 236, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs in a downward posture, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 139). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to obtain an illegal payout ball and prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

It will be described back to FIG. 235. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the sphere flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the respective bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 140 is positioned as a surface position with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the above is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a ball stays in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged so as to be displaced back and forth in the upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being pinched and engaged between the upper and lower walls.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 146 to be on the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 237 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 238 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 237 and 238 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long to the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 255) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

This makes it possible to connect and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to each other by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, while eliminating the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 223).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 226) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 238), and is a recessed portion 462,482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 259) are provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 238) of the upper frame member 410. It is a part for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 241 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIG. 241, the main body frame 14a
The state in which the right panel unit 500 to be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole bored in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown. And the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223).

242 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 244 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
245 and 246 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 245, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 246, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 242 to 246, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate unit 50 thereof.
Mainly provided with vertically long plate-shaped support plate portions 510 to be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) in which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed.

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side by a screw.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) by a screw inserted through the 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. In (see FIG. 223), the fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the board member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) (see FIG. 252 (b)), the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the left-right direction. Can be suppressed from collapsing. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface at substantially the surface position with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic circuit board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 244).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 244 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It is incident on the 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in a fastening ready state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is displaced up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, the protrusion 566
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L, with respect to the support plate portion 510,
By moving the 500R up and down by the amount of the misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and the fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the left heavy plate unit 500L comprises an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223) and is opaque to light, and the inner cover member 520 thereof. It includes an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
And the outer lens member 550 formed of a light-transmitting white resin material that comes into contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and has front end portions facing each other in the front-rear direction, and the outer lens member thereof. Arranged on the right side of 550, it is made of a resin material that does not transmit light and is a light guide member 54.
Mainly includes 0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 247 and 248 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L, 500R. In addition, FIG. 247 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 248 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end of the main body plate portion 521, and the upper fastening portion 52 is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5.
A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are formed longer than the short fastening portion 525 and are inner. The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530, and the inner cover member 520 is used.
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing to the main body plate portion 521 are screwed in, and a plurality of back fastening portions into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed in from the back surface side while projecting to the right side of the main body plate portion 521. 527
And mainly prepare.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wave shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To prepare for.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged so as to be inclined to the left toward the back surface side, and the opening portion 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals above and below, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 251). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is provided with a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. It is provided with a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 229) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations above and below, and the inner lens member 530 is in the assembled state.
Functions as a window for visually recognizing. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 251).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 247). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The surface of 0 (left side) corresponds to the portion overhanging to the left (see FIG. 248). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is designed to be concave and curved to the right between the above-mentioned boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is a main body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front side end portion 531a of 31 has a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. A support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 246) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c is provided.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back surface side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can abut with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back surface side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, it is possible to align the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending to the right from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c.
A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect 2a and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b and are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left as it goes toward the back side, so that the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is at the tip in top view). (Triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right through the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The lens. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 242 and 244), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, LED 512a).
) Is a processed part for changing the light from) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notched concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to guide the light guide member 5.
It is emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in the brightness distribution.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the LED 512a side end of the light guide member 540 is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly displaced toward the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed from side to side. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. About the degree of wavy,
There is no particular limitation, but the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm on the curved surface.
The following is preferable. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after thermal bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can be given a three-dimensional degree of freedom. ..

The details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 251), but the inner cover member 520
Is located to the left at the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, and is located to the right at the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It has a wave shape.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (female type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C.
It is made by pressing the base material against a mold having a male mold). More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and the main body plate portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a fastening portion 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the 41 and into which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
At positions other than the above, it does not have a portion that penetrates in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is positioned substantially on the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, projecting to the right and passing through the outer cover member. A visible overhanging portion 554, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion being projected from the back side of the main body plate portion 551. It mainly comprises a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear ends follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is convex to the front side at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the opposite side, to the front side,
Innumerable bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 252 (a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed up and down. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be a band-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged in the outer lens member 550, but not in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) as much as possible (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

In the main body plate portion 551, the surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 251 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and
It is possible to prevent the position of the light guide member 540 from being displaced, and it is possible to accurately inject light from the LED 512a into the light guide member 540.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper portion to be fastened 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561.
A lower side to be fastened having a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and into which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. Long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561.
It is a receiving surface that can accept 26, and is formed by a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a convex portion from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side. It mainly comprises a plurality of protrusions 566 to be formed.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is a covering cover 3
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of 70 (see FIG. 229) are formed as a groove to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 223), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. However, it is possible to stably support the upper panel unit 400 by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is internally fitted (
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

With reference to FIGS. 249 and 250, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be described. 249 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 249 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 249 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 250 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250 (a).

Note that FIGS. 249 (a) and 249 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 250 (a) and 250 (b) show the convex portion. Part 55
The state in which 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the convex portions 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 from the front side surface) to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, whereby light is blocked by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. When a load is applied to the optical member 540, the light guide member 540
Can reduce the range in which there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L is combined with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Since it functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right heavy plate unit 500R in the front-rear direction, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 has the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
Where 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are each assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures can be considered for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.
This is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it can be assembled and disassembled in two steps, so the operator who performs maintenance etc. can use which procedure to use the right panel unit 50 depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and it is possible to shorten the working time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are required to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Convex portions 551b, 551c and support holes 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the mating with. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid from each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223), and the right panel unit is united. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening a screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws must be removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 241) to the left. By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 251, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 251 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 251 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (c),
The illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 242) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 251 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1).
> R2) Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be generated can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower end openings 524 can be increased, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 251 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the openings 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 to be arranged facing each other with the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, radius of curvature R).
In the portion 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while in a location where the degree of light focusing is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emission mode of each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 251 (b) are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 251 (c), the region K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in the area KE, LED 512
The light emitted from a in the front-rear direction is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 251 (c)).
(See), the process proceeds in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is the inner cover member 520.
Since it is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small even if the action of condensing light is reduced.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 is formed to have a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5 are turned off.
By turning on 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without a gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhanging portion 554 (FIG. 243).
The light emission mode of (see) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 243) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, although it is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
By preparing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 242) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting a high degree of jackpot expectation for that effect, the position of the player's eyes can be set. , The right panel unit 500 can be moved to a side away from the game board 13 from the front side end portion. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes get tired can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 243). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

252 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 252 (b) is FIG. 252.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion (LED 512) on the front side of the light guide member 540.
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the lateral width dimension is reduced with the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 248) is compared with the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 248).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes long, the taper is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions of the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 in the portion facing the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of 0, the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is set to the support hole 53.
The amount of light that can be visually recognized in the portion near 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be alleviated. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) over the top and bottom.

FIG. 253 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 253, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 253, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an arrow of an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 253, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540.
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
Since 0 is curved and formed as shown in FIG. 252 (b), it is refracted toward the player side instead of right beside it (see the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 252 (b). Imagination in FIG. 252 (b). The line arrow is
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 237 and FIG. 238. The upper panel unit 400 is the upper side plate member 14.
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and are arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
It is a unit fitted to and supported from the lower side, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front frame 14.

FIG. 254 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 255 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 254 and 255, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 237), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 thereof. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 254 and 255, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and is L.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the contained LED
Directing with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the tubular shape. A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LEDs are arranged on the electronic board, and the LEDs are arranged on the electronic board.
The electronic board is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave portion on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 256 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 257 is an upper frame member 41.
It is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the upper frame member 410 is
A lower edge plate member formed from a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. The 420, the right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, is fitted into the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes an illumination unit 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the tubular portion 405 of the lighting unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. A support through hole 413 that is formed through a slightly larger inner shape,
It mainly includes an opening 414 formed through the upper part of the right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed with substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted through the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). As a result, the wiring overhanging through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. On the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), the LED 14 is located at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The e2 is arranged so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back surface side on the lower right corner lower surface, and a concave portion from the back surface side on the left corner lower end surface. A supported groove 418 to be supported, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and a second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in a position closer to the top and bottom. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily perform positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 242 and 243) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state thereof (see FIG. 223). ), The load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 223), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given from the above can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. It is provided with an enlarged rib 419a to be formed.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a portion sandwiched between and (see FIG. 262 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged rib 419a, ribs having the same shape are arranged at three positions around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
It is formed at a position corresponding to 2,482 (see FIG. 259), and is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end portion, and has a cross section L.
A plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 formed in a character shape and a plurality of portions arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left and right center positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and penetrating in the vertical direction. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a through hole having a small diameter.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 260).
It is an opening through which the vibration wave (voice) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through the upper frame member 410 at a position corresponding to the opening 414 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the lens member 440 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 258 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 259 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIG. 258 and FIG. 259, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. It is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e at the lower end portion. The speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R, 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
Since it is composed of 0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4 will be described.
The description of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted. It is formed with an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side and the outer shape of the front side assembly 460.
Rear assembly 48 that forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).
Mainly equipped with 0.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and at the same time, emits a production sound in connection with the game, and one end thereof is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 239), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 239), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received from the cage. You can play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a main body 46 that is long left and right and is formed in a cup shape with the back side open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the outside of the vertical width, and the main body 461.
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. A through hole 466 that is passed through in a circular shape, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and are inserted into the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to fasten and fix the screwed screws, a connecting hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) are inserted, and a main body on the tip side. A front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the portion 461T is mainly provided.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 Mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the center side in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 258) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between the base end side main body portion 461B and the rear end side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds almost the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H is provided with an inwardly non-returned edge portion (an edge portion in which a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 463
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.
Through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480, which is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 239) of 4e.
And through the through hole 463a, it is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 257) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened enough to tighten the screw. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a by sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e (fastening and fixing to the hard material by sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 258 and 259, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front-rear direction, and is bent a plurality of times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
It is a rib forming (see FIG. 260). This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being created on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear side assembly 480 is a main body portion 48 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open front side.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 toward the outside of the vertical width, and the main body 481.
From the wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, the light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side and a fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460.
A plurality of through holes 488 formed through as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front side to back side at positions corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Mainly includes a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape fitted inside the back side wall portion 461H of
It is equipped with 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 261 (c)), the speaker connection line 45
Even if 3 is displaced from the wiring passage recess 464 and is about to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 483
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.
It is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 239) of 4e, and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46.
It passes through the through hole 463a of 0 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 238).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width that is internally fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464.
By passing 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is created between the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. It can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing through.

The light passage through hole 485 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 237). ), The light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 260) that bends by turning. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H.
It is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of. That is, the back end of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents a gap from being created on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back surface side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is loaded by the compressive force.
67 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction and close the gap between them (FIG. 261 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the back surface is overlapped. It can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front concave portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424. It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 260 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 260 (b) is a rear assembly 48.
It is a front view of 0. In FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded so that the surfaces facing each other face the front side of the paper is shown. That is, by folding FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper surface, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 237), the base end side main body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side. Ribs 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 is formed at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back surface side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
Where the vibration wave generated from the above travels linearly, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 260 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is on the left side (arrow) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion closest to the left and right direction). , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When the 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the oscillating wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the oscillating wave Ws is secured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of a standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 462, 463b has the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 461 on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction of (arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the recessed portion 462 and 463b.

As shown in FIG. 260 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 which are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from 84 and are arranged at a plurality of places (5 places in this embodiment) alternately up and down toward the left side.
It is equipped with 87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is assembled on the front side 4
Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of 60 is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and is arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 482, 483b has the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed on the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b above the recessed portion 482 arranged on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recess 48
In addition to the effect produced at the time of assembly, 2,483b also has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (speaker) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257). As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, a recessed portion 47.
Since the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is directly contacted with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed by 1,491. It is possible to play back and output with high sound quality without making a basket.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. This will result in
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect.
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 228), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of the 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 237) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223) is discharged downward). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

For tuning the sound of vibration wave Ws (voice), set the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rear assembly 48 of the front assembly 460 are
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path for avoiding each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of 0. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the 7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extending length in the vertical direction.

In this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front assembly 460 are provided.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of 67d, 467e and rear assembly 480
In addition to the above-mentioned purposes, d and 487e are arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 436 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 262 (a)), and each rib portion 46 is pressed.
The 7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433, 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 433 and 48
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of 3, and the rib portions 467c and 4 are fixed when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed.
By bringing 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
It is possible to prevent the deformation of 0. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d can reinforce the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portion 462,482 is a portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 239 and 262) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The recessed portion 462,482 of 0 rides on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied to the upper end portion from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and it is possible to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is the front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the points where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent the profit of the fraudulent act.

261 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 261 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 261 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 261 (a), and FIG. 261 (d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 261 (a).
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the Vd direction view. In addition, FIG. 261 (a)
) And FIG. 261 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 261 (c). ..

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 261 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 261 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. , The outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 261 (b)).
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side, and the inner side surface 461H.
The shape is such that it fits with i in the assembled state. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 261 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c is elastically deformed by receiving a compressive load from the rib portion 467c. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are designed so that the rib portions that abut against each other have a dimensional relationship in which a compression load is generated.

As shown in FIG. 261 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body portion 46
Compared with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 261 (d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is secured to a large extent in a manner that bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 262 (a) shows the front assembly 46 in the CXXVa-CXXXVa line of FIG. 261 (a).
0, rear side assembly 480, upper frame member 410, main body frame 14a and upper side plate member 14e. FIG. 262 (b) is a front side assembly 460 in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, A portion that sandwiches the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460
And, it is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the rear side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the back surface side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) is a recessed portion 462.
It is arranged inside the 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the other side speaker assembly 450R,
The conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in the 450L is avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being distorted.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 262 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e, and is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, a portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add thickness to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the member has a high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like fall under this category. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4.
It may be on the side or front of 50.

For example, when arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 has the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 260A) and the connecting hole 469 thereof.
A screw inserted into a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction having the same shape as the above, and a through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame member 41
In addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a, 0 is the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1).
A screw inserted from the back surface side into (see 00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 262 (b)) to fasten and fix the screw. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same thing as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be seen.
It can also be said that the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the main body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

263 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 264 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 264 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. In addition, FIG. 264
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 263, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated back and forth for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, a front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape in which the central portion is open is formed. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 is jointly with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a.
A tapered shape is formed that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 and 266.

265 (a) and 265 (b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXXV of FIG. 264 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the inner frame 12 in line IIIa, and FIG. 266 (a) and FIG. Is. Note that FIGS. 265 and 266 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 265 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 265 (b) and FIG. 266 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 266 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 265 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the game board 13 is used.
The left end portion of the above is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 265 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support portion 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other.
Can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a).
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 about the contact position between the back side edge of 1 and the front surface of the game board 13. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is provided in the assembled state (see FIG. 227). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 265 (a) to FIG. 265 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
It is possible to improve workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rearward inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 265 (b), as shown in FIG. 266 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are the game board 13.
Since it is configured to evacuate from the approach path of the game board 13, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the rear claw member 640 after rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to the fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. FIG. 266 (a)
) And FIG. 266 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not abut on the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (the game board 13 is on the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum.
The force required to apply a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 263). Therefore, for example, the game board. When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 271 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted to the vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 266 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 140) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 263 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, the description of one board support device 600 will be described and the description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

267 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 267 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 268 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 268 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, FIG. 267
(A) and FIG. 267 (b) show a fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), the game board 1 by the board surface support device 600 is shown.
The release state in which the fixing of 3 is released is shown in the figure. As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 269 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 270 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a rotary front claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, and rotation thereof. The regulated front claw member 630, which is rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 which is arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the rotating front claw member 620. Rotating rear claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 which is inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620.
Mainly equipped with 40.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , The plate portion 6 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
An arc recess 614 recessed in 11a from below and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is formed by a rod-shaped regulation rod 615 that is inserted and fixed in 1a, and a screw that extends from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 264 (b)). Mainly includes a pair of fixing plates 616 to be fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form the support hole 612.
Is fixed to. The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of the main body plate portion 621 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 thereof. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portions 621a that are arranged facing each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper corner portion on the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621.
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 that are formed through in a straight line on the back side portion of a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the regulated front claw member 63 is simultaneously inserted.
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of 0, and the third shaft member P63 is the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotating claw member 640.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1 and an upper edge of the plate portion 621a are connected. The connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, and the back side extending plate 621c extending from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b so as to be inclined downward by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b. Part 621a
The hanging back plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of 2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side, and the hanging back plate portion 621d from the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d. It mainly includes a front side extension plate 621e that is extended so as to be inclined toward the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 271A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb becomes the main body plate portion 611.
Begins to come into contact with.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 226) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined toward the front side. It mainly includes an inclined extending plate 633 that is extended and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a board surface support device 600.
Is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 263), whereby the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 is restricted.

The rotating rear claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. It is formed.

271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a) and 272 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 271 (a), FIG. 271 (b), FIG. 272 (a) and FIG. 272 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIGS. 271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a) and 272.
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunction cover member 171 arranged close to the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, in FIG. 271 (a), the release state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 272 (b).
The fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in the figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 272 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulated front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
The posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is restricted by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a), and 272 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the regulated front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and is a second shaft member P.
While abutting with the resistance portion 634a intersecting the circle centered on 62 (FIGS. 271A to 13).
In (up to 5 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615.
When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is canceled and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 272 (a) to 272.
See (b)).

The angle range in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates (FIGS. 271 (a) to 272 (a).
), Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end of the regulated front claw member 630, is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 at the time becomes the posture change toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the regulated front claw member against the downward load. The posture change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is applied.
Can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extending plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
Rubbing friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state of FIG. 271 (b).
It is possible to prevent 3 from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, when a load is applied to the game board 13.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the reaction.

Here, in the case of a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 is arranged. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it will happen.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), in the state immediately before the rotary front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front claw disposed on the front frame 14 Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
The situation that the front frame 14 does not close is solved until the front frame 14 is installed stably, and in this case, the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to be in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640, and the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. Game board 13 in this state
When moving (tilting) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the torsion spring NBb given to the rotating front claw member 620 via the rotating rear claw member 640 Is given as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13 reacts to the load.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the above from moving (tilting) to the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 272 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 272 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 272 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resisting portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases by that amount.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 272 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 272 (b).
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 has the limiting rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a).
A curved surface is formed in which the radius of the second shaft member P62 is gradually increased from the portion in contact with the second shaft member P62 toward the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 272 (b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunction cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), and the rotation front claw member 620 rotates to cause the second shaft member P62.
Is displaced, the non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 272. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 272 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the regulation front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 272 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 271 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is used.
To rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 6 in the rotation direction).
Since it is not in contact with 15), the regulated front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force.
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 271 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and 271 (a), the game board 1 is in the released state.
The upper end surface of 3 abuts on the lower surface of the back surface extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 64.
The operation of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (b), the rotary front claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 is compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630.
The amount of displacement of 20 and the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 272 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13).
During the transition to 4 (a)), the rotating rear claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle between the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that.

Therefore, compared to the displacement amount of the rotation front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the rotation rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at the position supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of 13. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 273 to 276, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 273 to 276 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. In addition, in FIGS. 273 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 273, the released state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 274, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 275, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 276, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 273 to FIG. 276, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, FIGS. 273 and 1
The opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIG. 37 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 275 and 276.

As shown in FIG. 273, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 273), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
It is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 is removed, but it is restricted to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 274, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 274), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 275, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 275 clockwise direction) and the direction of rotation of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 275)
As described above, it is difficult to use a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive due to the opposite direction (counterclockwise direction) (see FIG. 271 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 275, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 275). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 276, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 276), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulation rod 615. Direction (clockwise in FIG. 275) and rotation direction of regulated front claw member 630 (FIG. 13)
8 Counterclockwise direction) is not the opposite direction, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 272 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 276, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159, and the board surface support device 600 is pushed.
Can be fixed, so that it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 277 and 278 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 285. FIG. 279 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 279 (b).
Is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 280 (a) and 280 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 280 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 280 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 280 (b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state that partially covers the front surface of the 710 (see FIG. 279 (a)) and an open state that opens the front surface of the base member 710 (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23).
a) Ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported with (see).
And mainly prepare.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. A mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 is a locking portion 7 in which a pair of receiving portions 712 through which a rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner portion and a hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction can be locked.
13 and the convex portion 714 projected on the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 are arranged to face each other in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. Mainly provided with a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launching unit 112a occurs, repair (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the foundation member 711 and a cover member 721.
Switching between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permissible state that allows the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to flow down to the launch rail 730. The device 740 is mainly provided.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 280 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722.
8 (see FIG. 281) is arranged in a positional relationship between a ball passing opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a size that allows passage and a slightly upward protrusion from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passing opening 724. A shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports the metal member 725 for cutting and the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 and are mainly provided.

The switching device 740 is a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 7
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generation solenoid 741. The metal plate 743, the guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward toward the distance from the ball passing opening 724, and the guide inclined portion 744 above the base of the guide inclined portion 744. The metal ball P8 is extended by an interval that can accommodate it, and the extended end is the shaft rod portion 72.
It mainly includes a regulated overhanging portion 745 that overhangs the sphere passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 281), and is a flow plate portion 724 that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the radial direction of rotation.
a and a rib portion 724b which is arranged facing above the flow plate portion 724a and is extended downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extending tip surface is inclined downward as the extending tip surface toward the back surface side.
Left inner side surface 724 that is connected to the left end of the flow plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
c and are mainly provided. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 281) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)), the sphere P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the line. Therefore, the ball P8
Flows away from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
While the 25 is arranged so as to project inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from colliding with the cutting metal member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 arranged at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. Through hole 731a, which is formed as a long hole along the direction and allows the fastening screw to pass through.
And, like the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the elongated hole direction of the through hole 731a), and the width is slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and the bulging portion 716a bulges. It is provided with a regulation groove 731b formed at a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be emitted, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 223) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and has a mounting plate portion 73.
It is attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into the attachment holes 732 formed in plurality (two in this embodiment) in 0b and 730c.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is a sphere P8 (FIG. 283 (b).
)) It is configured to guide the ball P8 upward by contacting each of the two front and rear points on the peripheral surface.

FIGS. 281 (a) to 281 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. It should be noted that FIGS. 281 (a) to 281.
In (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 281 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats to the upper part of the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not abut on the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back surface side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 281 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 281 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 281 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 223), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. be.

FIG. 282 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with a sharp tip formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b thereof, and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extended from
Mainly equipped with 5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Then, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the sphere P
The treatment of the thread Y8 when the thread Y8 is fixed to the 8 and allowed to enter will be described.

283 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 283 (b) is FIG. 1
46 (a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb, FIG. 284 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 284 (b) is FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 285 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the metal member for cutting 725 in the state of FIG. 285. FIG.
12a, is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. In addition, FIG. 283 and FIG. 14
In 7, some components of the ball launching unit 112a are omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 283 (a) and 283 (b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730.
No. 8 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 283 (a)), and a current is passed through the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs. , A firing force is applied to the sphere P8, and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 284 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by using the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 283 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow plate portion 724a and passes through the launch rail 730.
When the thread Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 projects above the flow-down plate portion 724a. It will enter the lower side of the portion 725c, and will enter the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 285). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 235), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 316. 286 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 287 and 288 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 286 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86 in comparison with the game board 13 shown in FIG. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 287 to 289 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (operation including at least one of the operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921 via 24, and a drive motor 92 that generates a drive force that drives the drive side arm member 910.
1 and a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a sliding operation in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 290 shows the petal operating device 80.
0 is a front view, FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 290. In FIG. 291, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 289, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to the position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central main body of the support base material 801 and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 293), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 8 is located at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, disposed to the right of its opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a free fitting device 880 described later is 88.
Donut-shaped recessed portion 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 289) is formed.

Central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 289) to which the central motor 804 is fixed.
Below, the oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side (see FIG. 293).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion constituting the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion constituting the region below the upper end region.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly long in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later.
It is possible to reduce the operating space when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P as described later, respectively, and the second gear 830G and the third gear 810 are arranged so as to overlap each other.
Since it is interlocked (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It is arranged to the right via the two gears 830G and the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 289) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from being widened, via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIG. 292 and FIG. 293, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is formed as a member of the above, and is provided with a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back surface side.

FIG. 294 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 294 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (FIG. 15).
4).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petals 802, and the peripheral edges also have irregular irregularities in the front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are molded into substantially the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is such that the specific color (red) becomes darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, near the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. There is.

The petal 802 is located on the rear side 80 than the rear side 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 294 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 294 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the anterior side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is superimposed on the posterior side of the anterior portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear position, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are displaced at the gathering position (see FIGS. 311 and 312).
Since b can be overlapped in the front-rear position, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 316) becomes remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 292).

As shown in FIGS. 292, 293 and 294, the flat plate member 803 has the above five petals 8
It is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to 02 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and the outer peripheral edge portion thereof has a shape extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (near the inner circumference).
A pair of screw-in portions 803S, which extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have a screw hole inside, are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side wall of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 294 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screwing portion 802S of the above is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803.
The 02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

295 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 296 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 295 and 296, FIGS. 292 and 293 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, a slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having five similar shaped portions having a continuous front shape in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 296, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 293) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 293. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The positioning boss 81 is integrally formed with the screwed portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension, and from the tip edge of the portion where the screwed portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations.
3a is postponed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwed portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 81 is directed outward from the center of the circular opening 811, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811.
Reference numeral 4 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the center slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits of the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof are formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape that coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and both side slits 81
It is possible to prevent the flat plate on which 5 is formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 295, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815.
Since each set of the members extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are brought closer to each other inward. , It is arranged and formed more densely, and this also causes the slit member 81.
The outer shape of 0 is made compact.

In other words, if 5 sets of central slits 814 and double-sided slits 815 are circular openings 811
When arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than when arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller by that amount.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 294, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip portion is formed into a semicircular shape in front view. The central portion where the thickness is larger than the effect portion at the position between the extension portion and the extension portion, the screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, and the front surface from the center of the slide member 820. It is provided with a guide pin 822 that is convexly provided on the side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 so as to protrude toward the back side. ..

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with each other. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 810 have
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 has a flat plate member 8 with a slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
It is fixed to the rear side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide and move in a posture facing a constant outward direction without turning around 22.

FIG. 297 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG. 298.
(A) and FIG. 298 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 298 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In addition, FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 298, FIGS. 292 and 293 are referred to as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 297 and 298, the rotary plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 297, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall having a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side.

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends forward.
It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to be closed in a loop shape elongated in the front view along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to fall off.

The guide rail 832 is tangent to the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.
It extends in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction approximately intermediate between the tangent and the normal of the pivot opening 831, and then arcs further toward the front-view clockwise than in this intermediate direction. While bending, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 312 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the side end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends from the surroundings to the outside in a spiral shape.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 298, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 291, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 311 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

Further on the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 298 (a), the second gear 830G
The third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and the pivot opening 81 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are located at positions corresponding to the three screwing portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 293) at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. Each of the positioning holes 810c is bored.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is arranged so as to overlap the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
On the other hand, positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 293) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b to the screwing portion 813S (FIG. 1).
It is fixed by screwing into (see 56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the central axis rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 299 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and is shown in FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 having internal screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen 856, and the front screw hole 857 to the lumen 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the lumen portion 856, it extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, extends further to the rear from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and inwardly. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, the rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, the LED substrate 861 is located on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

On the LED board 861, a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861.
By screwing into the front screwing portion 857 of 51, the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 299, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are one central location and a large number of locations that are arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed toward the rear.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a columnar shape, and a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed in the center. A pair of screwing portions 869 are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 sandwiched between them.
The screwed portion 869 that has passed through the above is abutted from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screwed portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855, whereby the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 8 is provided at four locations corresponding to the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
The 83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a position intermediate in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axial. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 286) and the decorative member 884 thereof are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is abutted from the back side and fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is provided in the central portion so as to be large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As shown in FIG. 298 (a), a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G.
It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8.
It rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via 08.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 88 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be overlapped with the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. Positioning is performed by inserting the 883a (see FIG. 300) into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw-in portion 883S (FIG. 16).
It is fixed by screwing into 3).

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back surface side in an arc shape centered on a rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d has a donut-shaped recess 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 291).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C housed in 1D (see FIG. 289) and capable of detecting a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, the arc plate 88 for detection is used regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating.
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7).
2 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their respective rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

Supporting base material 801 supports the rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852.
The rear screw-in portion 853, which is inserted and positioned in the positioning notch (not shown) in (see FIG. 289) and also protrudes rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base material 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and fixing it with screws.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out to the rear through the lumen portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801.
The posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8 is fitted to the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so as to fit outward.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed at eight points along the circumferential direction, and the screwed portion 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, thereby linearly contacting the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

FIG. 301 shows the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 95.
0 is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 302 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by being applied with a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 301, FIGS. 287 to 15
Refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 225) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed so as to be accommodating from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the support elongated hole 1140 drilled as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly prepared for.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910.
Near the outer periphery of the front end, a pair of upper and lower holes on the same surface as the screwed portion 1111, which is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right so that a screw can be screwed in, and the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111 are on the front side. It is provided with a positioning boss 1112 that extends to.

As shown in FIG. 301, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar column on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the main body member of the shaku to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914 and a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission slot 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121 and the second accommodating portion 11 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
A third accommodating portion 112 in which the arm gear 924 is arranged opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween and is fitted with the drive side arm member 910.
3 and are mainly prepared.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 287, not shown in FIG. 302) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line.
Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front, and is arranged from the vicinity of the outer circumference. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 301, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is provided in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 with the collar fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 303 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 304 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) so as to be slidable to the left and right on the side substrate 1000S, and is supported by a plurality of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 by the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 303, the side base material 1000S has a cylindrical portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support pillar portion 1150, and has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is arranged at a position corresponding to the support pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S, which is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and the right corner portion in the front view, is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Convex portion 1005S convex on the front side along the arc shape at the same center as
And mainly prepare.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S.
It is arranged in the gap between the long hole 931 to be supported and is configured as a part that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a screw for preventing slipping from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state. Slide.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S is formed at a convex height that does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but can abut if the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and pivotally supported by sandwiching a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column portion 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. Part 942 and
Mainly prepared.

The shafted strut portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 289). Shaft support hole 1003 with the shaft support column 941 sandwiching the collar
A disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the lid member 945 while being inserted into S, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a to cause the lid member 94.
5 serves as a retaining role. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 306), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the slide plate 930 from coming off. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc recess 1004S and causes resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 302. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921.
The collar that guides the detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 protruding in the out-of-diameter direction from the arm gear 924 and the coil spring SP8 that generates the urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatable. The shaft support 1163 to be supported, the cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
It mainly includes a wiring stopper 1165 hidden in 00C from the front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 at a slight distance from the second effecting member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use.
Even if the part that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be regulated by the screwing portion 1006S.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base materials 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction, thereby fastening and fixing the substrate cover. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 and 00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. It is a front view of 1100, FIG. 306, FIG. 1
71 and FIG. 310 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

In addition, in FIGS. 305 and 306, the state in which the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range is shown, and in FIGS. 307 and 308, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 301). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 309 and 310, the drive side arm member 910 is shown.
Is illustrated on the lower end side of the moving range.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 310, in a state where the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the moving range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. 306). 288) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, at the time of starting the drive motor 921, the inner fitting convex portion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle range), the resistance at the time of starting the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 307 and 308, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 307 and 308, in the range of FIGS. 309 and 310, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 moves as if the petal operation device 8 were used.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 311 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 311 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 311 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 311 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

FIG. 312 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 312 (b) is a petal operating device 8
00 is a rear view, FIG. 312 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 312 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 313 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 313 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 313 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 313 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotary plate 830.

FIG. 314 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 314 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 314 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 314 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 315 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 315 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 315 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 315 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotary plate 830.

316 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 316 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 316 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 316 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the petal operating device 800 descends due to the ascending / descending operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 starts from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 311 and 312 to FIGS. 313 and 314.
After the expanding position shown in FIG. 315, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully opened position shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, and further, the rotational operation (second operation) is performed at the fully opened position, and then the assembly is performed. It is configured to be able to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

At the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 311 (d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 of (see FIG. 294) is the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
Located at the inner end of 4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the five petals 802 are most concentrated toward the central decorative member 868 in the center. In the position, it is in a gathered state that constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (gathering position) as described above, the first in the central motor 804
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 312 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 312 (d)) is interlocked with the gear 804G, so that the rotating plate 83 is interlocked with the gear 804G.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831, it can be easily wrapped around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8 is initially first used.
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 313 and 314).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 294) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 311 (d).
Since it is regulated by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is linearly guided and moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves to the central slit 8 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expansion operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 314. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

Further, at this time, as described above, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the central end to the front clockwise side along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

The more the guide rail 832 tilts clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. In addition, the guide rail 832
Is curved in an arc toward the front clockwise direction from the direction D15, so that the slide pin 823 is curved.
Both the decrease in load and the decrease in moving speed are more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, problems such as deviation are prevented and the reliability of power transmission is ensured, while the central slit 8 is used.
14 is used to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823, which is a configuration in which the roles are divided.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the slide pin 823 has a central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in 4, is reached (see FIG. 315 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 expand radially to the fully open position and become fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 311 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. 3). See 315 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is thereafter.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member The 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction of the front view indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 315 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expansion operation, the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 315 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotary plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous immediately. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 315 (b). Therefore, the decorative member 8 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After finishing the above rotation operation, the central motor 804 sets the first gear 804G to the opposite direction.
When rotated in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 316 (b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, and only the rotating plate 830 is first rotated in FIG. 316 (b). As shown by the arrow A15 in b), it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view, whereby the gathering operation in the direction opposite to the expansion operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are transferred from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the center. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, returns to the gathering state, and completes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without stopping, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. It operates again, and the first gear 804 is further operated by the central motor 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 316 (b), the petals 802
However, as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 311 (b), it rotates in the front-view clockwise direction in a gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the aggregated state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 311 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, the decorative member 8 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above,
It can be stopped and paused before the transition, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 290), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotational operation.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. In the 25th embodiment, a case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the 26th embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320.

317 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the 26th embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 319 and 320 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in such a manner that the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) to the back surface side, and is upward generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 285. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the 25th embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 319, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8.
Thread Y9 in a state where 8 is weakly launched and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the sphere P9 fixed to the other end of the sphere is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that the sphere P9 is vigorously moved. Even if it is embossed, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 can be won. It can be repeatedly passed through 63 (see FIG. 139) and the like, and an illegal profit can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 317). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. The thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can abut on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145 to increase the resistance to an upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of discovering the fraud, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of trousers, etc.). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 223).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the lower plate 5 is formed from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the lower plate 50 (FIG. 138) while stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the thread Y8. (See) flows down to the right and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball pulling lever 52. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate Passage 9
The ball discharged from the 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes.
You can point the ball toward. That is, since the right-sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component toward the right (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side has a ball guide opening 5.
The left portion of 3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is the remaining region (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. It occupies a region (about 1/3 of the width dimension), and a riding control step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary thereof.

As shown in FIG. 317, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a has a right end portion (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a lower plate passage portion 91 on the front door side.
The 42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the riding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding control step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323. In the 25th embodiment, a case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the 27th embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323.

321 to 323 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the 27th embodiment. FIG. 321 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 322 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 323 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 321 to 323, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c is provided. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 317). The radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 321 and 322, and is omitted in FIG. 323.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 317)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
Since the ball flowing down the 45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 from being cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is the passage portion 14.
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is replaced with the thin plate blade portion 1.
It becomes easy to insert into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a part that constitutes the forked blade part with 10153, and is the first thin plate blade part 10153.
It is extended to the left in a manner that slightly rises and slopes from the right end of the front side edge of the. As a result, there is an acute-angled recess 1015 with a sharp recess between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.
5 is formed.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the 26th embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side edge. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 is inserted into the acute-angled concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 is inserted.
Can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraudulent activity. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is the rolling plate portion 10145d.
It is configured to abut on the lower surface of the foul ball passage and withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, the thread Y8 or the ball P8 is loaded in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y is retained.
By prolonging the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraudulent activity.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 327. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) whose firing intensity is weak and does not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment has the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving entrance 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 324 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment, and FIG. 325 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the outer rail 2062 is arranged from the resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the 25th embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed. Foul ball passage 2
The 062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 326 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 326, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 326, FIG. 325 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back surface side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically projected from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is surface-contacted with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed on the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4.
A long screw B11 is formed in a through hole previously drilled in the base member 68b1 as a mounting hole in a state where the b1 is in contact, and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 by matching the position with the through hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in that state, so that the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that abuts on the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 326) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20 is provided.
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increasing portion 206
The straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, the diameter of the sphere). It intersects with the tip member 2062a at the lower side by about 1/3).

With this configuration, when launching a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 20
62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the blocking plate 2062b4 and the side surface 2062d1.
A notch 206 that is smaller than the diameter of the sphere and has a width that allows the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back surface to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is on the front side of the side surface 2062d1.
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (FIG. 327 (FIG. 327).
a) See). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act performed through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball to the front side (see FIG. 319), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front surface, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back surface side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion overhanging downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is O when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.
It is arranged so that N-OFF can be switched.

327 (a) and 327 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 327 (a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
The state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of 2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 190 (b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the gate member 68a.
The state in which the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the foul ball passage 2062c is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. also,
In FIG. 327 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 327 (b), the button-type switch SW11 is shown. It is shown that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 327 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. Since it returns to the state shown in 327 (a), the foul ball passage 20 is next.
This is because the state shown in FIG. 327 (a) can be restored by the timing when the ball is guided to 62c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 328 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 328, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is to be advanced while being excluded. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 328 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is dismissed by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 327 (a), it is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1
By controlling so as to sound an alarm when 1 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 327 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 327 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging the above, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced at an early stage. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement, and saves the trouble of forgetting the storage location, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be disposed).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. , The cheating person does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it is replaced, the deterrence of fraudulent activity can still be maintained by not knowing the degree of damage.

Next, the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the 29th embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 329 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the 29th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 329, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the 25th embodiment. The flange portion 2887 is provided with a regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip to the back surface side. The play-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the play-fitting device 880 in the 25th embodiment, and is provided with the same loose-fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 and 331.

330 (a) and 330 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, FIG. 19
4 (a) and FIG. 331 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in FIG. 330 and FIG. 331, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is shown in chronological order, and FIGS. 330 (a) and 331 (a), 330 (b) and 331 (b).
) Shows the state of the simultaneous points.

Further, in FIGS. 331 (a) and 331 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 330, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the regulating portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 332 and 333).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 331 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that is inclined so as to move away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed at an angle. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 330 (a) and 330 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 292) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) shown in FIG. 331 (a). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 331 (b), the central slit 814
And it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
At 02, a posture change occurs to the extent possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this way, the regulating unit 28
While the load from 88 is parried, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 331 (a), the slide member 2820 has only the narrow slide rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 331 (b), the slide member 2820 has a slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and an inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since each of the 3Ts is abutted (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 331 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 The sliding member 28 due to the increased movement resistance to the movement in the longitudinal direction.
Slide pin 823 without waiting for 20 to reach the end of slits 814,815
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) (movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and tilted posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 330 (b).
Start rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 332 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 332, FIG. 330 (
The state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 332, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 332, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293).
Since it exceeds the braking force (see FIG. 293), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the position during expansion.

333 (a), 333 (b) and 334 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 333 (a), FIG. 333 (b) and FIG. 334, the appearance of the petals 802 moving from the position during expansion to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 333 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 332, and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 333 (b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to the normal postures.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 293) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and therefore the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts on the regulating portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided. Therefore, it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petals 802 to the fully open position and rotate the petals 802 at the fully open position.

Further, as for the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802 may be arranged at a position where they do not abut on the petals 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position, or even if they abut on the petals 802 which rotate at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it can pass through the regulating part 2888, and by setting it in a position where the load can be dissipated, it is possible to prevent the regulating part 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802
When it expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern, and the difference in perspective causes the petals 802 to expand to the maximum and rotate. It is possible to make a difference between performing and rotating operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulating portion 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulating portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 may come into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture, which may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning to be conveyed to the player depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change their posture changes. Therefore, even if the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 335 and 336. In the 29th embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described, but the petal operating device in another example of the 29th embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

335 (a), 335 (b), 336 (a) and 336 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 335 and 336, an operation example of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a) is shown in chronological order. also,
In FIGS. 335 (a), 335 (b), 336 (a) and 336 (b), the rotary plate 83 is shown.
The arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of 0 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as the 29th embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 335 and 336, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 335 (a) (see FIG. 335 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 on the side receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 differs from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is located on the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Of the central recessed portion 3814a recessed in a manner of widening the width of the wall and the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the slits 815 on both sides arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814, the clockwise side of the front view. In the radial direction of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in the wall portion of the double-sided slit 815 in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction, and the double-sided slit 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view. Slits 81 on both sides in the wall part on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall parts extending along
Mainly includes a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b which is recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of 5.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
3 is arranged to face the slide rib 803a.

The fovea centralis 3814a is a slide member 2820 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the above (FIG. 19).
8 (a) Lower side) is continuously formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is a flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
From the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03, the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (
It is continuously formed in FIG. 335 (a) lower side).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the rotary plate 830
When the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 start to rotate clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction (the direction in which the slide rib 803a at the right end enters the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side) (FIG. See 335 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the front view of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 336 (a) and 336 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.
)reference).

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28 are described above.
Contact between the guide pin 822 and the fovea centralis 3814a and the screwing portion 280 during the rotation of 03.
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. The slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side abuts on the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side
Moves to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front with respect to the concave base end of the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 331).
(A). Therefore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the 29th embodiment.

In other words, in the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 331 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates around the slit member 3810). Rotational motion) is present (see FIGS. 332, 333 (a) and 333 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 335 (FIG. 335). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 336 (b)). That is, the rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 335 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 335 (a)), and then the gathering position. Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 334) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 340. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the thirtieth embodiment is the bending of the lower frame member 8320. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

337, 338, 339 (a) and 339 (b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 according to the thirtieth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 337 and FIG. 339 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, in FIG. 338, the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown, and in FIG. 339 (b), the tilting device 310 is the first state. The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the difference between the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment and the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained yet. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are formed along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as drinking water described above downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between 0 and 0.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, There is a high possibility that foreign matter will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151 (b)) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. It should be noted that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides
However, even when the gap V13 is designed so that a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin) is not inserted, the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, to the right) is the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding up the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the
It becomes 3 and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151 (b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to shift (deform) the position, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 339 (a) and 339 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 339 (a)) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300.
When it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign substance has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-shaped foreign substance. It had to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

340 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340 (b) is FIG. 20.
3 (a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb, FIG. 2;
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 340 (d) is a view of FIG. 340 (a).
) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIId-CCIIId line.
340 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 340 (a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 195). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center position on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the upper surface of the extending portion 311h is tilted (left and right in the vertical view of the second state). An inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310, and an inclining D82 that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 338), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, it is possible to easily secure the strength of the lower frame member 8320 as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object in a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. It is considered to be larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that allows light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 which are connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially blocked, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. Member 832
It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will remain at 0. In addition, this effect is the first through hole 832.
The same applies not only to the case of visual recognition through the second through hole 8326b and the case of visual recognition through the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 and is removed from the bottom plate portion 32.
It is configured as a through hole that can be discharged in the direction along the surface of 1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that allows the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) to be discharged. The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the leading edge of the bottom plate portion 321. You can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 229). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 228) of the curved portion 371 of the main body is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 226). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 340 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to promptly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 does not operate normally and the pachinko machine 10 stops operating, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 341. In the 25th embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the 31st embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

341 (a) and 341 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 31st embodiment of the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. Note that FIG. 341 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 341 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 341 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 341 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 341 (a) and 341 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment is provided with a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the
The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the 52 from above and below at two locations in the front-rear direction and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and faces the front-rear displacement member 2652. 2655 urging members such as coil springs that add urging force toward
To prepare for.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 341 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position shown in FIG. 341 (b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 341 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 341 (a)) and by being pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 341 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is a front-rear displacement member 26 from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position.
It is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the 52 is arranged at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is a vertical displacement member 2651 at a position in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
Is set to the lower position, and the inclination angle and the forming range are set so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is set to the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction thereof. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the rear claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the 25th embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the 25th embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force that becomes, the degree of freedom of choice of the worker and
Workability can be improved.

Next, the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 342. In the 25th embodiment, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by a heated piano wire, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegal intrusion into the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the 32nd embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

342 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the 32nd embodiment, and FIGS. 342 (b) and 342 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 342 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 342 (b) and 342 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with the back surface side and the lower surface side open, and the reverse cup portion 2
It is provided with a main body box portion 2281 stacked above the main body box portion 2281 and a back cover member 2482 attached from the back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281, and the main body box portion 228.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2482.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner portion to form an inverted cup portion 217.
The extension portion 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of No. 8, the narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner portion, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowing portion 2284. It is housed in a protruding portion 2285 that is projected upward from the main body and a recess that is recessed from the back side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. The first conduction portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and the main body box portion 228
1 is housed in a recess recessed from the back side in the right wall portion of 1, one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and the first conduction. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that allows contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 that generates an urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284, is supported by the protruding portion 2285, and is arranged below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion overhanging the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 141). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other and conduct (see FIG. 342 (b)) (FIG. 342 (FIG. 342). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 257), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 342 (a) to 342 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the 25th embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extending portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has a property of maintaining the deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a pre-memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 342 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conduction portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2482 in a vertically long shape in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tension state and then returns to a low temperature state, the operator pushes down the extension portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce it (see FIG. 342 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343. In the 25th embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the curved shape of the light guide member 540 causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

343 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 343 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 343 (c) is a schematic downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 343 (d) is a guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543 d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 343 (a). FIG. 343 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 343 (e) schematically represents an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 343 (a), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 343 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the 25th embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side and the region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side with respect to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between c, the region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 343 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the 25th embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), according to the above-described configuration, the light is advanced toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and the light is advanced toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and can have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the right panel unit 250.
It is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect while suppressing the left-right width of 0.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. can.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the eighteenth embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end point and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower push-in end, the convex leg portion If the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the flexible member 5420 is operated at a predetermined speed or higher. It is possible to increase the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player.
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) by the designated pressing method, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the accommodating member 5430 while the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the accommodation member 5430. In this case, the vibration can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, while the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Since it is possible to recognize (difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, there are cases where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 cannot be in contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5
It is desired to generate both a case where the 412 and the accommodating member 5430 are continuously in contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is fixed in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path bend back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear side assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front side assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H abuts more than that. In the range of length, there may be a configuration in which a step is provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, a range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the 25th embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip side main body portion 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the 25th embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in a left-right direction view. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. By making it difficult to perform cheating by invading the tip of the game into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating, it is possible to suppress the cheating. Here, examples of the suppression of fraudulent activities include suppression of fraudulent activities themselves and suppression of obtaining profits from fraudulent activities (successful fraudulent activities).

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the play fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the play fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the 25th embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
Whether or not 00 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the lower board support device 600, the operation unit back member 155 arranged opposite to the lower board support device 600, and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it can be restricted that the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not abut on the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600 (.
It may be configured to be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, so that the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of damage can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that overhangs the inside of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost openings 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side on one side and on the other side. Consider switching between the case where it is placed on the front side and the case where it is placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged facing the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness becomes higher, the amount of light becomes larger, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (low brightness, low light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal display or moving accessory)
It is possible to change the light emission mode of.

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display have a beam shape (
It is possible to emit light in a wide range in the direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal display while irradiating the light (in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display.

In the 26th embodiment and the 27th embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is placed at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss incurred by the gaming machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the 29th embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T may be formed.
A recessed portion may be formed so that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance by causing the inclined surface 2803T to enter the recessed portion.

In the 33rd embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction in which the light is inclined upward in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. This makes it possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCV, which are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530.
The downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and the upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of tilting upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in the direction of the player, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. for example,
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are other pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 344 to 424. It should be noted that the first control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Is omitted.

FIG. 344 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 344, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, general ball entry port 63, second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, distribution device 700, etc. It is attached to the back surface side of FIG. 138). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the distribution device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed by the distribution device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 345).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 138) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 344.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 355) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion of FIG. 344) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 344) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 344) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is configured to be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening. When a prize is won in 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot (big hit A, C), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (big hit B), or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R time saving 100 times jackpot (big hit A), 16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot (big hit B1), 16R probability variation even symbol jackpot (big hit B2), and 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) are prepared. ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "16R time reduction 100 times jackpot" (big hit A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered symbols. After the round jackpot game, it is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state and is in a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). "16R probability variation odd jackpot" (big hit B1) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same odd symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R probability variation even symbol jackpot" (big hit B2) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same even symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variation jackpot" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a combination of specific symbols (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot. It is a probabilistic jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed). In the case of the jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. Further, the "electric support state" in the "high probability state" means a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the electric support (during the electric support game state) and the time reduction during the probability change, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It will be changed and a longer time will be set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time of each hit. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general entry openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r, and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 355), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 344)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display to be made. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change.

It should be noted that the second method during the probabilistic change or the time reduction can be performed by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit to increase the hit probability during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the ball entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board 13 can pass through the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a sphere can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) through the opening 710a with respect to this distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Be done. When the ball wins (balls) in the first ball slot 64, the first ball slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball slot switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 375), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. This second entry port 640 does not allow the game ball to enter (it is difficult) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric accessory 640a, which is normally formed in the shape of a blade, is upright. ) The electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern when it hits a normal symbol, which will be described later. The game ball is guided to the 2 entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the 2nd entry port 640.

In addition, 5 balls are paid out as prize balls in each of the 1st entrance 64 and the right 2nd entrance 640r, and 2 balls are awarded in the 2nd entrance 640. It is also one of the winning openings paid out as a ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the right number. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 2 entry ports 640r is configured to be different, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal period, so that the variation of the second symbol is short. The symbol "○" is easily displayed on the display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640 than in the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically moves into the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r.

On the other hand, during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, in addition to the ball entering the opening 710a being distributed to the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640r, the second entry ball is entered. The big hit lottery that accompanies entering the ball into the mouth 640 is also easy to be executed. Therefore, since there are more chances of big hit lottery than during normal times, it is advantageous for the player as compared with normal times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is for the player depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the electric support during the probability change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). , You can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first entry slot 64, the second entry slot 640, and the right second entry slot 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variation). After the lapse of time), the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The occurrence of a jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the distribution device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 138).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the distribution device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, a setting switch 291, RTC292, a firing sensor 293, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. There is.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 375). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 345, the distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. The through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down. It is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by the base member of the distribution device 700.

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a thereof. A through hole (not shown) that is located on both sides in the left-right direction and is formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) that is located below the through-hole and is formed through in the front-rear direction. Formed mainly in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a distribution member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and a distribution member 762. It is mainly provided with a throwing port formed above the.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annular shape with three protrusions 762a projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof. It is formed with a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annulus of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and is in the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the sphere passes (distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third throwing path KR3”) in which a ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 described above is rolled and thrown, and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed by inclining downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 is rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the intermediate member so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 is rolled to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r of the intervening member arranged in front of the distribution member 760. Can be thrown to. More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second entry port 640r.

The interposition member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, the first ball opening 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. It is mainly provided with a right second entry port 640r penetrating in the front-rear direction and these first entry openings 64.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are each formed on the front side of the left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above to the through hole of the winning member 730 through the first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r. Can form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the sorting member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is inside the first entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first entry port 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entry port 64.

On the other hand, when the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entry port 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entry port 640r.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the opening 710a is alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the game ball is evenly distributed to the first entry port 64. It is possible to uniformly generate a reserved ball by inserting a game ball into the right second entry port 640r. As a result, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes an upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as a reserved ball can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to change at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to change at the same time. With such a configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B1", one of the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is doublet and stopped and displayed. Variable display is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit B2", variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, the chance eyes composed of the combination of "341" are displayed. It should be noted that this combination of chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 354, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the hold symbol on which the change is executed is moved and displayed when the hold ball held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). be. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed with a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol change is in progress. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation is executed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, the right second entry opening 640r, and the second entry opening 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and the preview effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a notice effect image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number or more is set.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are visually displayed, so a total of 9 main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, in the small area Ds1, the executing pedestal symbol m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the executing special symbol is moved and displayed is displayed, and FIG. 347 ( When the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. Of the reserved symbols (circular symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the round symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area is displayed. A round symbol having a diameter larger than that of the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed by moving the reserved symbol displayed side by side to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved symbol was displayed. Will be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as a symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change, the selected variation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the running symbol are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected fluctuation pattern from the running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of. The pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol within the period of change. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation and the reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a scroll manner with the same symbol). It is executed at the timing or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the variable order is the earliest reserved sequence is displayed is an area. It is displayed on the left end. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, the second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is the second, the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is the third, and the reserved order. The 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is the 5th, and the 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is the 6th. m6, the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is the 7th, and the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is the 8th are in a state where the reserved symbols are not displayed. Is also displayed.

When the predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols are not displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggestion symbol P is configured with a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed on the upper part of the 6th reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the holding order is 7 on the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the second is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the holding order is the eighth is displayed at the upper part of the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol. It is composed of the symbols of.

As shown in FIG. 346 (b), when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P straddles the area from the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 pieces are set for the second special symbol. Further, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is set by adding the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, a character display pedestal C1 indicating that the area is for displaying the advance notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the advance notice character is not displayed, the player can confirm the area in which the character is displayed in advance, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 347 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed in the main area Dm (when the special symbol is variablely displayed), the first entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640, if the number of holdings corresponding to the special symbols that have entered is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the holding order. The pending symbol is displayed in. FIG. 347 (a) shows the display of the reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 347 (a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (b), when the number of holdings is 4, the variable lid symbol in which the 5th holding of the holding number suggestion symbol P is displayed is hidden and variably displayed. .. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed near the variable lid symbol, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (b), when the number of reserved balls is 4, not only the variable lid symbol in the display area of the 5th reserved balls is hidden, but also the girl's character display area C is covered with the variable lid symbol. It is configured to display a character symbol.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, up to the maximum number of reserved balls for the player. The remaining number of can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 7, the character "1 more" is displayed in the comment display, and when 1 more reserved ball is stored, the maximum number of reserved balls is stored. It is suggested that the eight reserved balls are in the memorized state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and with the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit, the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, right. By entering the ball into any of the second entry ports 640r (the entry opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the hold upper limit), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not held and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the poor game ball is alternately placed in the first ball entry port 64 (first ball slot 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. It is divided into 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the 2nd special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be alternately and evenly stored. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined) is seven. The game can be continued as if the ball were to enter.

Further, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is reached, the character "MAX" indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit is displayed, and the player even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Can suppress the problem that the reserved ball overflows due to the continuous firing of the game ball.

In FIG. 348 (a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the hold ball is determined by the look-ahead process (Z320: see FIG. 386) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. Information with the selected variation pattern type is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpot or missed super reach, the player The display mode of the holding ball is changed (for example, the white holding symbol is changed to red) and displayed as an effect to give the expectation to the big hit, and the fifth variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is also not. Display as it is without displaying it. Further, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, the character "as is" is displayed, and an effect suggesting that the number of reserved items is not increased any more is executed. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 348 (b), the character "OVER" is displayed in a balloon from the girl in the character display area C, so that the character does not overflow. Anyway, you will be notified as if it overflowed. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the fourth reserved ball will be displayed in a variable manner, and even though the reserved ball with a high expectation for a big hit is stored, the holding ball ( It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily firing and consuming the game ball).

As shown in FIG. 349 (a), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th reserved ball is stored. Variable lid of the number of pending symbols P The 5th and 6th symbols P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed, and the pending period is set. Due to the short length, the notification suggesting that the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in a specially variable manner is executed. Here, normally, when there are four holding balls, the fifth holding ball of the variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is hidden, but within 5 seconds, 0 holding balls are hidden. By increasing the number to 4, it is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols are displayed as hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect to be executed depending on the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can determine that a predetermined number or more of the reserved balls are generated in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is configured to be different from the usual one, but the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is not changed and the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, for example) is not changed. The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol may be changed).

Next, a variable display example of the variable lid symbol P in the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 349 (b). In the time-saving gaming state (high probability of winning / failing judgment of normal symbol), unlike the normal gaming state (low probability of winning / failing judgment of normal symbol), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 349 (b). As shown in, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable lid symbols P are hidden. Then, the character of the girl is displayed, and a character that informs the player to memorize the sixth reserved ball, such as "Put up to 6", is displayed by a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric support) 640a can be easily set to the open state. It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, during the time-saving game, the overflow of the reserved ball is likely to occur. Therefore, unlike the normal game, the variable lid symbol P is hidden a lot during the time-saving game, which is the upper limit value of the reserved ball 8. By encouraging the player to play so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of balls, it is possible to play the game so as to suppress the situation where the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit and overflow is likely to occur. can. In the time-saving game state, when the reserved ball becomes the 5th, the 7th (m7) variable lid symbol P is hidden, and when the reserved ball becomes the 7th, the 8th (m8) variable lid symbol is hidden. P is hidden.

In this control example, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden when the 5th holding ball is reached during the time saving game, but the limitation is limited to 7 holding balls up to 6 holding balls. The eyes and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the 4th reserved ball is stored, the 6th and 7th variable lid symbols are hidden by the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the number of reserved balls to the 6th. It may be configured so that the character "Put up to 6" suggesting is displayed. In this way, by notifying the player in advance whether it is a type of big hit game (probability change hit or normal hit) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player is motivated to save reserved balls. Can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 350A to 350B, it is configured to be variable depending on the look-ahead result (information indicated by the winning command) of the reserved ball in which the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is stored. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 351 (a), a girl character that is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls is four is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 350 (b), four characters are displayed. An example is shown in which a special girl character different from the normal time is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the reserved ball of the eye is memorized. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery to determine the type of girl different from the normal time, and when the look-ahead result is a big hit or a missed super reach, the winning probability is set high. .. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, with reference to FIGS. 351 (a) to 351 (b), a display mode when the number of reserved pieces reaches the maximum value and then an over prize is won will be described. FIG. 351 (a) shows "MAX" indicating that when the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C has the reserved number as the upper limit value by a balloon comment. Character is displayed. After that, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the characters "Overflow" are displayed to indicate that the overflow has occurred. In this way, in the case of overflow, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of overflow by notifying the player that the overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow, but when the purpose is to increase the profit of the game store side, the displayed character is displayed by generating overflow. Depending on the type of game and the content of the comment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner, the pre-reading result of the stored reserved ball (win / fail judgment result, etc.), and the current game state (normal game state or probability change game state). ) May be configured to notify the type. With this configuration, the player can enjoy various effects by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while being enjoyed.

With reference to FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), a display mode when the hold effect during reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 352 (a), when the variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) that is the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 399) is executed, and the lottery is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 352, the display mode of the reach hold effect is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the hold effect during reach is executed, the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and "save up to 6" by a balloon comment, regardless of the number of balls on hold. A character suggesting the player to accumulate 6 reserved balls during the reach fluctuation is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 352 (b), when up to 6 reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type advantageous to the player. It is variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball and playing the game even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the side of the game store.

In this control example, an example is shown in which the reach symbol is changed when the number of reserved balls becomes a specified number (6), but the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even symbol is used. In some cases, instead of changing the reach pattern to an odd number, the main display area Dm is displayed to swim from right to left, and the expectation of a big hit is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to notify and display a notice such as "Congratulations" to suggest a result of a pass / fail judgment.

The display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 (a) and 353 (b). When a specific fluctuation (the fluctuation that won the advance notice lottery to execute the lucky hold effect) is executed When the previous big hit, the number of reserved balls when the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation is stored is stored. , The mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 353 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of reserved balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 353 (b), when up to 6 hold balls are stored during the lucky hold effect, the characters "well done" are displayed, and the main display area Dm is displayed by pressing the frame button 22. A character (notice display mode) indicating that a probability change jackpot is given in the changing special symbol "probability change confirmation" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, this effect is configured to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit, but the jackpot is not limited to that, and even if the hit is off, the jackpot if the jackpot is hit, depending on the judgment value of the acquired jackpot type. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and a jackpot may be expected.

In the lucky hold effect, when the hold balls stored in the variable lid symbol P (hold 5 to 8) are hit, the number of hold balls is stored, and when the next big hit change is executed, the lucky hold effect is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a hold number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of how many holdings were stored when the previous jackpot occurred, and the number of holdings can be saved as much as possible to make a lucky hold. It is possible to make the game play so that the production can be easily executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 353 (a), the reserved symbols are numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (number of reserved symbols at the time of winning: FIG. The number indicated by i shown in 353) is added and displayed. This number of pending symbols at the time of winning is moved (variable) by sliding to the reserved symbol display area where the order of change is one younger when the reserved symbol is digested (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol has started). Even if it is displayed, it will be displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of holdings at the time of winning in the fluctuation.

In the case of a big hit, the number of holdings at the time of winning the big hit game executed in the production during the big hit game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) is displayed by numbers or symbols to notify the player. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (b), a hit game in which a long-time hit (the electric accessory 640a is open for a longer period than the normal hit time), which is one of the hit types of the normal symbol. ), The display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 354 (a), when a player wins a long-time hit of a normal symbol and a long-time hit game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that the long-time hit game is being executed, and the player does not fire the game ball during the long-time hit game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball misses the opportunity to enter the ball mouth 640r. In addition, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r during this long-time hit game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is black, which is different from the normal time. It is displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the reserved ball stored during the game for a long time and the reserved ball stored during the other period.

As shown in FIG. 354 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the game for a long time is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start. , The treasure chest symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "Great chance when the treasure chest opens !!" are displayed, and the treasure chest opens while the third symbol is changing. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol of is highly expected to be a big hit.

With this configuration, when a normal symbol is hit for a long time, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and the special effect is executed even during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By executing a hit for a long time, the production of the game can be greatly changed, and a fresh game can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 344, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variablely displays whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation is completed. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64 and the right 2nd ball entry port 640r. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the distribution device 700, game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762. A first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640r, the first entry opening switch and the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is the first. 1 It is indicated by LED37a of the symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry slot 64 and the right second entry slot 640r are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the ball is entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls is not limited to the same, and the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first entry port 64, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640r as three prize balls, and when a ball enters the right second entry opening 640r, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640r as four prize balls. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entry port 64.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds in the case of the jackpot A) set for the type of the jackpot game to be executed. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 138).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 356, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 392). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing the holding ball of the first special symbol, and a holding ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided for each, and a common special symbol holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the right second ball entry port 640r.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), reaches the maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 392).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 358 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 358 (a))? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of order. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as "big hit A", "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C", and "big hit A" and "big hit A" are set by the special hit type counter C2. One of "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "3/958".

On the other hand, there are 27 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers is 27 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "27/958".

In this embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first, which are referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, which is referred to corresponding to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the lottery result in the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 359 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 75" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "76 to 79" were "big hit B2" and "80 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 359 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 87" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "88 to 91" were "big hit B2" and "92 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (60%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress problems in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time off, long-time off, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 392) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 357b) that stores the random value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 358 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used for the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is low. , The time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, respectively, is set. Although it will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and the variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 361. FIG. 360 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. The value with CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern is set for the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is performed. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of any of "60", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is performed. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the winning / failing determination result.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4, the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 5 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When the reach loss A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and is super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern with a small number of reserved balls (when the number is 1 to 4) and a long fluctuation time is easily selected. By inserting a game ball into the 1 entry slot 64 or the right 2nd entry slot 640r, a reserved ball is likely to occur, and a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped occurs (lottery game is not performed). It is configured so that the problem that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach and super reach is set low, so that the normal reach and super reach are changed when there are many reserved balls, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is made to the player. Can be expected to be a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern is set for the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 361, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is performed. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). When it is any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation occurs. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to have a big hit as a result of the winning / failing determination.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 2, and the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value out of normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for the number of reserved balls of 3 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When out of reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (variation period) in the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. There is. As a result, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the out-of-order short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbol can be changed a lot in a short time. , The period until it is determined to be a big hit (the period between big hits) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be measured.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability change period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with the open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of a long hit, and the variation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358 (c), if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 6 in the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is hit normally. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 7 to 8, it is determined that the normal symbol is a long-time hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the normal symbol has a high probability, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long-time hit, so that it is normal. The hit is virtually the same as the long-time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability change period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port can be given. It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640r. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entry port 640r is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640r Since the opening period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640r is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 380). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 392).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 355, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 356, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 357 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358) and the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 358 (b)) described above. In addition to the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 359 (a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

FIG. 362 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the winning command table 202e, the determination result such as the fluctuation pattern in which the stored reserved ball is selected at the start of fluctuation is determined in the look-ahead process (Z320: FIG. 386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the determination is made. It is a table for determining the winning command corresponding to the result. As shown in FIG. 362, when the lottery result in the look-ahead is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the fluctuation pattern type and the winning / failing determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. If the lottery result is out of order, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e as the variation pattern types are all out of the deviation length A, the deviation short A, and the deviation short B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 357 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, opening number counter 203g, long-time opening flag 203i, time saving medium counter 203j, and variable execution. It has a flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a jackpot medium flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a reserved ball storage area 203a. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift processing is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see Z305 in FIG. 385). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z206 in FIG. 244).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z207 in FIG. 381 and Z306 in FIG. 385). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the right second entry slot 640r, and is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in other configurations. Therefore, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. See Z504 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 387).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. FIG. 389 Z503: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric accessory 64c. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the player is hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: FIG. 387), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game per long time is executed, the variation of the next normal symbol is started. If) is set to off.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the fluctuation is started according to the order in which the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (the order in which the ball is reserved and stored). Here, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process (Z204: FIG. 382) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. Based on the order data of the hold storage stored in the change order storage area 203p described later, it is determined whether the change stored next is the hold data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 382).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The probability variation flag 203m is set when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110 (Z1104: FIG. 393). Z1111: No) is set to on. Further, in the processing of Z220 in the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is in the jackpot game. The jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the end timing of the jackpot game is reached.

The variable order storage area 203p is an area in which when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r and is stored as a hold ball, the hold order is stored. In this control example, the fluctuations of the special symbols are configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. Further, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r, the fluctuations are started in the order in which they are reserved and stored. As a result, even when the special symbol changes, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 363 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, Hold lid color change selection table 222f, Lucky hold command table 222g, Background mode selection table 222h, Hold character selection table 222i, Hold character change table 222j, Blowout selection table 222k, Reaching production lottery table 222m, Reach start time The calculation table 222n and the lucky hold lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold change selection table 222b determines whether or not to display the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the change content. It is a selection table for acquiring the pending change value.

FIG. 364 (a) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222b. In the hold change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is distributed according to the type of the received winning command, and the hold symbol of the sub-display area Ds is changed with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 348 (a)) and a pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described in the hold effect mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved symbol shall not be changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined and the pending change value gets 0. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved symbol is variable from the white circle symbol (normal reserved symbol display mode) to the blue circle symbol (change A). It is decided to make it, and the pending change value gets 1.

When the winning command type is out of the normal reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined and the pending change value is acquired. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. In the case of any of "101 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed in the green circle symbol, and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is out of super reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 30", no change is determined and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "31 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 20", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 10", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "101 to 189", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2. In the case of any of "190 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed as the red circle symbol, and the pending change value is acquired by 3.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so it is reserved and stored not only from the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner but also from the displayed reserved symbol. It is possible to predict the result of the pass / fail judgment corresponding to the pending symbol. Further, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the reach display mode will be obtained when the change B is variably displayed, the hold storage should be performed even in the state before the special symbol changes. For example, the player can be expected to start the fluctuation, and even if the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via different execution effects even for the same hold change, and the player can be surprised with the effect. It is possible to attract.

The hold effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the hold change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 364 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 403). Specifically, when the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the normal mode, when all the reserved symbols being displayed have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the distance between the reserved symbols and the variable lid symbol P display range is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 347 (b)).

When the hold change value is any of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The notice A mode is a hold (state) in which any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the hold symbol being displayed, and is held when the number of hold balls is 4 or more. This is a hold effect mode in which the symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range (see FIG. 348 (a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 348 (a) is not a display mode showing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of the hold effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 348 (a) is different. In the notice A mode, when a holding ball is generated after the holding symbol whose color is variable and the holding symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 348 (a)). By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from, the variable lid symbol P with the letter 5 will be hidden), and a comment indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot for the reserved symbol with a variable color. The display is performed by a balloon. In this way, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, the game is performed so as to generate the reserved ball. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation of.

When the hold change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where there is a change in the reserved symbol being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, one of the changes (change A) is made to the reserved symbol being displayed as in the notice A mode. , Change B, Change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the reserved symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range. (See FIG. 348 (a)), or the mode in which the reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 348 (b)).

With this configuration, not only the color of the reserved symbol can be changed, but also the display range of the variable lid symbol P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls. It is possible to expand the enjoyment of playing and attract players. In addition, unlike the advance notice A mode, it is a hold effect that causes the player to play a game so as not to generate a hold ball any more, and the player is interrupted with the game (the operation of launching the game ball), and the color is variable. Expectations can be raised by concentrating on the start of fluctuations (dynamic display) of special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The holding lid range selection table 222d has a plurality of data tables for acquiring the holding lid range value necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

Here, the special production performed during the normal mode will be described. As special effects, the normal mode has a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during reach, and a lucky hold effect.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the time when the number of reserved balls is stored and becomes 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the distance between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is set to be one holding ball (the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. 349 (a). The number of the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed so that the space between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol P is two, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production that the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls is 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time elapses 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 404). ), The execution is started (see FIG. 349 (a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q elapses 5 seconds, 0 is set in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 407), and the execution is terminated. Is.

The on-reach hold effect is an effect of setting a notice display mode for urging the player to play a game so that the number of holds can be accumulated up to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 352 (a)) during the reach fluctuation. .. When the variation type is reach, the reach start time is calculated by drawing a lottery based on the reach effect lottery table 222m, which will be described later, and when the execution is possible. The value of the hold effect start timer 223r set by the table 222n based on the variation type becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 399) (see FIG. 352 (a)). It is a production that ends at the end of the fluctuation.

The lucky hold effect is to store the number of holds when the hold ball (hold symbol) is stored (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) is obtained, the hold ball that became the big hit is stored. A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 353 (a)) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time of entering the ball entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to the mark symbol. It is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that encourages the player to play a game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 353 (b), by pressing the frame button 22, the current gaming state (probability changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming is achieved. An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls when a big hit is obtained in the winning / failing judgment result of the start winning in the past. When the lucky hold storage value 223p, which is stored when is 5 or more, is stored, and whether or not the execution is possible is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described later, and the execution becomes possible. , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 398) to start the execution (see FIG. 353 (a)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation starts.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no hold change, the hold effect related to the hold symbol can be determined by the time interval of the start prize, the number of hold balls during the reach fluctuation, and the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the past start prize. Depending on the contents of the memory, various effects can be provided and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the holding lid range selection table 222d. The holding lid range selection table 222d includes a normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222d4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 365 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls. Further, in the case of the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability gaming state (big hit probability is low probability and non-time saving). (Game state)) to acquire the hold lid range value (see Z2354 in FIG. 400) and when the lucky hold effect is in progress (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3), the hold cover range value is acquired (FIG. 400). (See Z2346) in some cases.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 365 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2. In the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice B mode.

FIG. 365 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3, the hold cover range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls and the value (range) of the hold notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired when the value of the holding notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the hold notice counter is "1 to 4", the hold cover range value is 4 and the value of the hold notice counter is "5". In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the hold notice counter value is "6", the hold cover range value is 2 and the hold notice counter value is "7". 1 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the value of the holding notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 366 (a)) is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 366 (a) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d4 at the time of short-term winning. In the short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222d4, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The holding lid range selection table 222d5 during reach effect is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in the case of hold effect during reach effect. FIG. 366 (b) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect. In the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 8", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired.

In the time saving hold lid range selection table 222d6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time reduction state (the value of the time reduction medium counter is other than 0). ) Is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value.

FIG. 366 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6. In the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

With this configuration, the display range of the variable lid symbol P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the winning / failing judgment at the start winning and the hold effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a directing effect that enhances participation.

The holding lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 from the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222d. A table used to select commands for.

FIG. 367 (a) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid command selection table 222e. The holding lid command selection table 222e sets a holding lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the holding lid range value (range) acquired by the holding lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the holding lid range value is "0", BF00 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 351 (a)). When the holding lid range value is "1", BF01 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 1 (only the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is "2", BF02 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area from holding 7 to 8 (see FIG. 349 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "3", BF03 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area from holding 6 to 8 (see FIG. 350 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "4", BF04 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 4 (the area from holding 5 to 8 (see FIG. 348 (a))).

The hold lid command is set in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the start winning, and is executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of variation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting a display holding lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 400) based on the holding lid range value every time the number of holding balls changes.

The holding lid color change selection table 222f has an instruction number (in the example shown in FIG. 348 (a), when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the holding number shown in FIG. 348 (a) is executed. It is a data table for discriminating the holding lid symbol P corresponding to the area where the holding symbol is displayed when the holding ball occurs more than 4). The holding lid symbol P determined by the holding lid color change selection table 222f is usually (normally, it is a black frame and the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the holding display area is displayed inside. It is displayed in a variable manner with a specific color (internal color is transparent green) different from the display mode (display mode). In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the hold notice counter 223 g for recognizing the display position of the hold symbol whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of hold balls. This is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the holding lid symbol P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 367 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid color change selection table 222f. In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the color change range is specified for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223 g and the value (range) of the number of hold balls. A hold lid command for changing the display range of the variable lid symbol P from the normal white display mode to green (see (b) in FIG. 348) is set according to the change range (see Z2348 in FIG. 400). do.

Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223g is any of "0 to 4", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the hold lid command is issued. Not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF11 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF12 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF13 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of hold balls is "5", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF21 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF22 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is "6", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF31 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, it is possible to further increase the attention of the player by changing the display mode in a region different from the reserved symbol, which is changed by the determination of the winning / failing determination result (pre-reading determination) in the previous winning. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is increased depending on whether or not the launch is stopped, so that it is possible to widely enjoy the mode of the reserved symbol and the later fluctuation notice effect.

The lucky hold command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of hold balls to be held.

FIG. 368 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, the area of the target number of reserved balls is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223p when the lucky hold effect is being performed, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 398). See Z2306).

Specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223p is 5, the hold cover command FB50 is determined, and the area 5 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 6, the hold cover command FB51 is determined, and the area 6 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 353 (a)). When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 7, the hold cover command FB52 is determined, and the area 7 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 8, the hold cover command FB53 is determined, and the area 8 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls for which the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit in the previous start winning, the interest of the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. On the other hand, it is possible to encourage them to win a prize, and it is possible to realize a production that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 369 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected with respect to the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, the background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. ..

The hold character selection table 222i sets the content (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting (deciding).

FIG. 369 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The hold character selection table 222i has a hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The contents of (see Z2363 in FIG. 401) are set. As for the reserved characters, J0 is a girl with short hair (see FIG. 347 (b)), J1 is a girl with hair tied (see FIG. 350 (a)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 350 (b)). ), J3 is prepared with an image that can be easily identified by the player, such as a blonde girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 347 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 350 (a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 350 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 150". If either is the case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the reserved characters with high expectations according to the difference between the reserved effects mode and the background that have changed from the start prize, the display mode of the reserved effects with high expectations can be obtained without damaging the atmosphere of the background effects. It will be possible. In addition, the player can recognize the notice with a high degree of expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbol and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of big hits, the number of times the super reach is executed, and the symbol or character with the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game production are acquired. The history information such as the number of points obtained by the above may be stored, and the selected character may be changed in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the selected character can be changed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided and the character selected may be variable depending on the date and time information or the like. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed according to the passage of time since the pachinko machine 10 was introduced, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

The hold character change table 222j displays the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 as the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on.

FIG. 370 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The reserved character selection table 222i has a background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, a reserved effect mode stored in the reserved effect mode storage area 223 m, the current reserved character in the display mode, and a value of the effect counter 223h. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit and the over prize is obtained (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 401). .. Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. It is a mode that does not (variable).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is ". If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 351 (b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 80". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and the current hold character is "J0". When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 50". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means to confirm the winning / failing result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and it is possible to raise the interest in the game. can. In addition, as the reserved character to be changed, a character with a higher expectation after the change is set than before the change, and when the reserved effect mode is other than the normal mode, the change ratio of the reserved character is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the hold effect mode, the player can have a means to know the result of the pass / fail judgment through a means of intentionally generating an over prize, and it is possible to provide a playability that enhances the operation. Will be.

In the balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 348 (a)) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

FIG. 371 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. The balloon selection table 222k includes a normal balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, a reach production blowing balloon selection table 222k5, and a lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. A balloon selection table 222k7 for shortening the working hours is provided. Further, the balloon content to be set is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 347 (b)), and the game state is the normal state. , It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 371 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 347 (b)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In that case, YES is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 351 (a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 348 (a)).

FIG. 371 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A balloon selection table 222k2, the balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3", the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the hit / fail determination result is In the case of a hit, the content of the balloon is throbbing, and in the case of a miss, the content of the balloon is throbbing. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be acquired, and if it is not, the expected balloon is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is extremely hot! Is acquired, and if it is off, what happens to the contents of the balloon! Is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h to display the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as a production to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 348 (b)).

FIG. 371 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222k3, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the blowout is acquired as it is (see FIG. 348 (a)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 348 (b)) is acquired as the content of the blowout, and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In that case, STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 5", the content of the blowout is OVER. When the value of the hold effect counter is "6", the STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the value of the hold effect counter is "0 to 6". In any of the cases, OVER is acquired for the blowout content, STOP is determined for the blowout content when the value of the hold effect counter is "7", and the value of the number of hold balls is "8". The MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the winning when a change of the reserved symbol with high expectation occurs by the contents of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls can be increased by continuing to launch more than the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the judgment as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the occurrence of unnecessary launches, and enable the game to be played efficiently. Further, even when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the balloon content may be changed so that the launch can be continued.

The balloon selection table 222k4 at the time of short-term winning is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon at the time of short-term winning (see FIG. 349 (a)).

FIG. 372 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, the balloon content is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! When (see Fig. 349 (a)) is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the content of the balloon is super fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! !! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the balloon content is fast! !! !! Is obtained.

With this configuration, the interval between starting prizes is short, and the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the reach effect (see FIG. 352 (a)).

FIG. 372 (b) schematically shows the contents of the balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect. In the reach effect during balloon selection table 222k5, the balloon contents are acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the hold effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the hold effect counter is "0", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the contents of the balloons are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 352 (a)) is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is OK, and "7-8". In any case, OVER is acquired for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the hold effect counter 223h is "other than 0", the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4". , Save up to 6 balloon contents! Is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is well done (see FIG. 352 (b)), and "7" is acquired. In any case of "~ 8", OVER is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the reserved character during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach effect during the hold effect, the balloon is generated. You can change it and play the game without getting bored.

The lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon during the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)).

FIG. 373 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6, when the winning / failing judgment result of winning in the past becomes a big hit, the value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the number of lucky hold balls (see Z2444 of Z268). The contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value of, the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "5", the hold change value is "0 to 3" when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4". In any case, the target of the balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is acquired as OK. When the hold change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the number of reserved balls is acquired. When the value of is any of "6 to 8", and when the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 5", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , Aiming at 6 as the content of the blowout (see FIG. 353 (a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the change value of the hold is "0", the content of the blowout is OK. If it is acquired and the pending change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is determined for the content of the balloon, and if the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired although it was done well. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "7 to 8", and when the value of the reserved change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the blowout.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 6", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The aim of the blowout content is 7 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", when the hold change value is "0", the blowout content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the hold change value is "3", the content of the blowout is well acquired but the value of the number of hold balls is "8". In the case of "," if the pending change value is any one of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the blowout.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 7", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3", , The aim of the balloon content is 8 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", when the hold change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired although it is well done.

In this way, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result is a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 holds, the display mode of the lucky hold can be updated without getting bored. You can continue the game.

In the time-saving balloon selection table 222k6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving medium counter is other than 0). It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 373 (b) schematically shows a time-saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the time saving balloon selection table 222k7, the balloon content is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any one of "0 to 5", the balloon content is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 349 (b)) and the reserved balls are acquired, and the number of reserved balls is "6 to 7". In any of the cases, the contents of the balloon are OK.

With this configuration, the optimum number of reserved balls can be notified in a short time, and the player can grasp the transition status of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If the situation of the optimum number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the player is in a standby state, which is inefficient in time, and the over-winning that starts and wins when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is exceeded can be avoided. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

The reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the hold display effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 374 (a) schematically shows the contents of the effect lottery table 222m during reach. In the reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (See Z2324 in FIG. 399) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the reach is in progress. The hold effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", the hold effect during reach can be displayed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "4 to 5" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the hold effect during reach is not displayed and "141 to 199". In the case of ", it is possible to display the hold effect during reach. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "6 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the hold effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the hold effect during reach when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

The reach start time calculation table 222n is a reach in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode (display mode in which the symbols in the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the hold effect during reach in the time (period) which becomes the display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, the hold effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the reach hold effect (see FIG. 352 (a)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed and the variation type.

FIG. 374 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n is set by the hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the reach hold effect acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed (FIG. 399). See Z2326).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms. When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the variation type is super. When the reach jackpot D is set, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 ms, and the variation type is out of normal reach A. In that case, 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer, 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer when the variation type is out of normal reach B, and when the variation type is out of normal reach C, the hold effect is determined. The start timer is determined to be 10000 ms.

The lucky hold lottery table 222p acquires whether or not the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 374 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222p. In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 398).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 99", the lucky hold effect is executed. Is not performed, and if it is any of "100 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "3 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the lucky hold effect is not executed and " If it is any of "190 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "5 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the lucky hold effect is not executed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of performing the lucky hold effect when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Winning information storage area 223f, hold notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW valid time counter 223k, hold effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky hold storage value 223p, short-term winning At least a timer 223q, a hold effect start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the special symbol variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball count command is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 396). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 of FIG. 397), and the variation start flag 223d is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display on the display device 81 is set (see Z2502 in FIG. 406). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 3960), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z2506 in Figure 406). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area- Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing of starting the winning, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (so-called look-ahead effect).

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The hold notice counter 223g changes the number of holds (the display position of the hold symbol whose hold color has changed due to the digestion of the hold ball) when the hold color of the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Even if it changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color is variable. The hold notice counter 223g has a value of 0 on the hold notice counter 223g in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when the winning command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In a certain case (Z2403: YES), when the hold change value acquired from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No), there is a change in the hold symbol (see FIG. 348 (a)). ), The reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403). For example, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the start is 4, the hold notice counter 223g is set to 4. The set hold notice counter 223g was decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuated in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, 1 is added in the range of 0 to 198 and the update is repeated. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a hold change selection table 222b, a hold character selection table 222i (hold character), a hold character change table 222j (hold character), and reach. There is an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not the hold effect during reach can be executed) and a lucky hold lottery table 222p (whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Further, when making these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to prevent the update cycle of the effect counter 223h from synchronizing with other counters and timer values, and the selection result is a part. I try not to be biased toward the selection result.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for storing numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (Z2801), and when it is determined to be in the standby state (Z2801: Yes). When it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, when the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting the effective time (valid period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 performed during the change of the special symbol or the like. The SW effective time counter 223k has a fluctuation pattern accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 when the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). When set (Z2803: Yes), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. When the set SW effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and when the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW is set. When the value of the effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), if the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is reset (0 is set), and the notice display command for display is used. Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The hold effect mode storage area 223 m contains information for discriminating a plurality of hold notice modes prepared according to the hold change when executing the notice effect regarding the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

In the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, the hold notice counter 223 g is 0 in the prize command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when the prize command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is set (Z2404) according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired for the change type of the winning command of the received special symbol. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3". If so, the notice B mode is set.

The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223 m is the value of the hold notice counter 223 g, which is decremented by 1 each time the change of the special symbol starts in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 397) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. When becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223 m (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the hold effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)). Yes, the special effect is executed according to the change in the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

In the short-term winning effect, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 is counted. When the value of is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts execution. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) in the short-term winning management process (Z2111). , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the reach hold effect, the change type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. In the case of (Z2321: Yes), when the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes) and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222m is used. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect start timer 223r is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). When the hold effect start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the reach effect hold effect management process (Z2112) after a lapse of time, a notice display command for performing the reach effect hold effect is set (Z2706). By doing so, the hold effect during reach starts execution. While the reach hold effect is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (Z2707: Yes), and the reach hold effect ends.

The lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2301: Yes) when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), and the lucky hold storage value. Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is accepted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts execution. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation when the effect is started. The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky hold storage value 223p is the time when the winning ball corresponding to the holding ball determined to be the jackpot is determined when the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command output at the start winning timing is determined to be a jackpot (look-ahead determination). It is a storage area in which the value of the number of reserved balls of is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223p is a case where the lottery result of the winning is a big hit in the lucky holding storage process (Z2408) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the start winning (Z2442: Yes). ), If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the hold effect mode is the lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 398) based on the lucky hold storage value 223p, and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 353 (a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 1 or more to 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as the timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), it is short-term until it becomes 0. The winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)), the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning effect with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes, and the player It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after winning 4 pieces. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)), which is an effect related to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach fluctuation of the special symbol.

The hold effect start timer 223r is in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the variation type of the special symbol is the reach variation. In a certain case (Z2231: Yes), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222m. When it is possible to enable or reject the execution effect acquired from (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222n.

When the timer value is set in the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 until the on-reach hold effect is started to be executed in the reach hold effect management process (Z2112). If the hold effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No) in Z2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effect is performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ), The notice display command for performing the reach hold effect is set (Z2706), so that the reach hold effect starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is effective. The sensor effective time counter 223s gives notice when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When the effect display is set (Z2282: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), during which the touch sensor detection becomes valid. Further, when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. It is reset (Z2809) to (Z2828: Yes).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223t has a touch sensor 290 when the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 addition (Z2826) is performed, and when the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 396) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 375.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 141). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 411).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 376). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the change period of the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at the time of power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 375, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 346) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entry. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 377. FIG. 377 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 377). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 378). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 378).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 378, in the example of FIG. 378). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 380) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 380, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 376 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 411) (see Z3005 in FIG. 411). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 422 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 413 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 413 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 413 (b) see Z3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 420 to 421 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 422 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 422 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 379), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 379) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (Z3303 in FIG. 420). (See), the pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 421 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 379) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 379. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 379, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 413 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 420). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 423). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 423). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 424).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 of FIG. 424).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 380 to 393. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299, respectively in this embodiment). , 99, 239), clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (Z104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 381 to 393.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process (Z106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 388 and 389. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 290, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (Z104). This special symbol variation processing (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the big hit middle flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big hit is in progress. As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (Z203) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved balls in the special symbol N1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is acquired (Z203). .. After acquiring the value of each counter, the variation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 382, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined by the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z206). Z207). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the processing of Z208, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 383. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined in the processing of Z205 that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (second special). It is determined whether or not the variation is executed in the symbol) (Z210). If it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as that for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set a number command (Z212). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the processing of Z213, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 384.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 383 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 384. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A special design lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the first special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A, a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C. If it is a jackpot of the second special symbol, it will be a jackpot A according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z218). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (Z218: Yes), the big hit start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), the stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability gaming state is set, the electric support gaming state (short-time gaming state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support gaming state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j. If is 1 or more (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (Z223), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

In the variation execution determination process, first, by setting the variation execution flag 203k to off (“0” as a value), initialization is performed (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the variable order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246), and the special figure 2 shows. If the variable execution is (Z246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is on. This probability variation flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the Z253 process. In the processing of Z253, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358 (a)). Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the processing of Z254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random number values of "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these hits. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

In the processing of Z255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z253 or Z254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (Z255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot), and it is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 359 (b)).

In this Z256 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z258). In the processing of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z275 process or the Z259 process is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, which is first acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change period (high probability gaming state) (Z272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic change period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process shifts to Z273 processing. In the processing of Z273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. In some cases, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (Z272: No), the processing of Z274 is executed. In the processing of Z274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match, the special symbol is set. It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a big hit of the special symbol (Z275), and if it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot) and it is in the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (see FIG. 359 (c)).

In this Z276 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of Z275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z278). In the processing of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 385) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of reserved balls N1 for variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: No), the over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (Z305). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the processing of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the hold area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the hold area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set at the lowest position of the variable order storage area 203p (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 386.

Next, with respect to Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes of Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball opening 64 won the right second ball opening 640r or the second ball opening 640. Since the same process is executed only by changing the process to the above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are also stored as reserved balls. It is acquired and stored in the empty hold area of the corresponding special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter similar to the first special symbol are also applied to the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entry port 640r or the second entry opening 640. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hit probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the look-ahead processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the look-ahead process (Z320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 386 as described above, but to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r and the second entry opening 640. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, the process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 386, a look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this pass / fail determination, the same processing as the Z255 processing in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384) is executed. .. It should be noted that this hit / fail judgment is the hit / fail judgment (discrimination) at the start of fluctuation (Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383), Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384)). It corresponds to the pre-judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the process). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (discrimination) from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. (Z353). Next, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect (Z352: No), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire the type (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. It is possible to recognize the result of the hit / fail judgment and the type of hit in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color for notifying the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball in advance, based on the winning command. It is possible to execute an effect (such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball). Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the normal symbol variation processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing this ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M). (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the processing of Z407, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol change start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 388, but the normal symbol (second symbol) is determined to be correct or not, and the fluctuation period (variable time or time) of the ordinary symbol is based on the result of the determination. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation (movement pattern of the game per normal figure) of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type is performed. Run.

In the processing of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 388 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or the processing of Z431 in FIG. 388, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stop display (lighting display). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 of FIG. 388, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, and then the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) is executed, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process, the Z431 process, or the Z435 process of FIG. 388. In this control example, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed even when it is a long-time hit or a normal hit, but it is not limited to this, and the symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit and displayed (for example). , If it is a long-time hit, it may be configured as "◎", and if it is a normal hit, it may be configured as "○").

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of the Z412, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 392) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of Z430 or the process of Z434 of FIG. 388 are completed. Since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: see FIG. 388) described later, the hit type of the normal symbol is set in Z413. It is configured to set the open / close control corresponding to. On the other hand, in the processing of Z412, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the processing of Z413 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 388) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380). It is a process to execute.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z421). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z421: Yes), the process proceeds to Z424. In the processing of Z421, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probable nor time-saving (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 358 (c)).

In the processing of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239". , It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 358 (c)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the normal symbol (Z425), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (Z425: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (Z426). The hit type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal hit type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2, and the acquired value of the ordinary hit type counter is used. If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time hit, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal hit.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (Z427). In this Z427 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, it shifts to the processing of Z430.

When it is determined in the processing of Z426 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (Z426: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z432). Then, if it is a probability change or a time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of a special symbol (Z433). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434 processing. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of Z433, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the processing of Z430, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the processing of Z432, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (Z432: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the processing of Z434, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (Z435). In this Z435 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to Z436 processing.

In the processing of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (Z436), and if the probability change is in progress (Z436: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not probable (Z436: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are set to the same operation as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probable change state and the time saving state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are different. It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through gate passing process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passage process (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), determines whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and if the sphere has passed, a random number that normally hits. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z503). : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4 area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z505), and this process ends. In the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 345) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 392, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: No). Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and if there is prize detection information, it corresponds to the number of acquired balls for the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 381) and the start winning process (see FIG. 385) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 386) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 387), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the change is caused by the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process or the Z279 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 384). When a pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 384) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 383) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of Z258, the processing of Z258, the processing of Z276 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 384), or the processing of Z278. Stop display (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 388), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 387), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process or the Z431 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 388). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process is shifted to Z1001 and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, in the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as that of the Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 390 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state changes of the games performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (Z901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 392), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (big hit) is executed. Opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 393), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The Z219 process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 381) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set (Z1101: Yes). Z1115), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (Z1102). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the processing of Z1102, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z1102: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the processing of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1110, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the processing of Z1111, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability variation flag 203m is set to on (Z1113), and then the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to off (Z1114). End the process.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 394 to 410, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of Z2118 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 395). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 395), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z2118. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of the Z2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to the Z2008 process.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of Z2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to the Z2208 process.

If the power off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is in the middle of executing the power off process of Z1318. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 395). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the Z2118 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (Z2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of Z2008 via the processing of Z2004 to Z2006 is started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (Z2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). It should be noted that this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203i in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 391) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the Z2012 process that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013). .. Here, the long-time open flag 203i is turned on when it indicates that the received state command is hit for a long time, and the long-time open flag 203i is set when it indicates that it is not a long-time hit. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when the processing of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the processing of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the Z2101 process this time was executed (Z2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z2101: No), the process of Z2113 to Z2112 is not performed and the process proceeds to Z2113. In the process of Z2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) of Z2102 to Z2112, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Z2113, the variation display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process shifts to the Z2105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 407, but a specific effect (notice effect) is achieved by measuring the period during which a predetermined number of reserved balls are generated and within the predetermined period. ) Is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the process of the reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the reach hold effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408, but a predetermined number of hold balls are held during the period when the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode. A process of setting a specific effect (notice effect) for notifying the player that the game is to be accumulated is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, the command determination processing is executed (Z2113). The details of this command determination process (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When the variation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. The details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When a stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of Z2203 (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 403, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, the winning / failing determination result, the variation type, etc. The pre-determination for determining is executed, and the setting process for executing each hold effect determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (Z2208: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (Z2661), and this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 397, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one of the processes in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), will be described. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), a variation pattern (effect mode) of a detailed special symbol, a notice display mode, a hold notice display mode, and the like are set based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 397), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, a display notice display command is set in the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223 g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display notice display command is a command for instructing to display various notice effects (for example, a comment notice suggesting a hit / miss determination result, a mini character notice, etc.) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

When the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), even when the effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the look-ahead determination result is performed, the value of the reserved ball is determined by the value of the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball whose color of the hold ball is changed is started, it is hidden because the change is stopped, and the hold change value. Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started.

Here, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed in the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a prize in the past and setting a mark symbol (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the reserved balls is performed. Run.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 398), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: No), this process ends. In the process of Z2302, when it is determined that the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0, it means that the number of hold balls at the time of winning the special symbol determined to be a big hit is not stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect can be produced is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 374 (c)). Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and determining whether to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls. Is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) is feasible (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), the display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 368) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed due to the previous fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. To finish. If it is determined in the processing of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2308: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the variation and ends when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special symbol is changed once, but the effect is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in the period in which the change is executed a plurality of times. You may. The number of changes in the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined and ended when the change in the number of times is executed, or a lottery to decide whether to end the each variable lucky hold effect. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, when all the reserved balls are exhausted, or when the demo display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), when a change of a special symbol to be a reach display mode is executed, a game is performed so as to store a hold ball in the reach display mode. Executes the process for executing the effect (one of the special hold effects).

Here, with reference to FIG. 399, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the pending effect setting process (Z2228) during reach.

In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not normal (Z2322: No), this process is terminated as it is. When the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2232: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2223). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2233: No), this process ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special hold effect is being executed. Therefore, the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent the hold effects from being duplicated. .. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), it is executed by the effect lottery table 222m during reach (see FIG. 374 (a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h. Acquires the propriety of the production (Z2324). Here, in the reach effect lottery table 222m, a determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

It is determined whether the hold effect during reach (execution effect) can be executed by the process of Z2324 (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not feasible (Z2325: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 374 (b)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and this process is terminated.

In this way, according to the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the reach display mode is determined, and no other special hold effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing the reach hold effect is executed, and the timing for starting the execution of the reach hold effect is set by winning the lottery, so that the special symbol in the reach display mode changes. When it is started, the hold effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the current number of hold balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball during reach, and the game store side. Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 397. After executing the hold effect setting process (Z2228) during reach, the hold lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this holding lid setting process (Z2229), a process necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing this holding lid setting process (Z2229).

In the holding lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 400), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), it is held at the time of short-term winning in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365 (a)) provided in ROM 222. The holding lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366 (a)) (Z2342). The display holding lid command is set based on the value of the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2342 (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. As described above, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366 (a)), the display mode of the variable lid symbol P different from the normal time (normally held). It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule for displaying a symbol and a rule for displaying one reserved symbol at intervals is displayed with a rule for displaying two reserved symbols.

As a result, when the period required for storing 1 to 4 reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable lid symbol P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time, so that the variable lid symbol is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for the reserved ball to be stored is a short period. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so that the reserved ball is memorized earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, the fun of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2343: Yes), the hold lid range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 365) in the hold lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365) during the reach effect. (See FIG. 366 (b)) to acquire the holding lid range value (Z2344). Based on the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2344, the holding lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach hold cover range selection table 222d5, the reach indicating that it is the timing to execute the reach hold hold effect. By receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the display hold lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the hold effect during reach is determined, the mode in which the display of the variable lid symbol P is changed is set, and the display mode is set according to the execution timing of the hold effect during reach. Since the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in, it can be determined that the variable lid symbol P has executed a special hold effect different from the normal time.

On the other hand, in the treatment of Z2343, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. When the value of the special effect status is determined to be 3 in the processing of Z2345 (Z2345: Yes), the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 365) in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365). Based on (see 365 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2344). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 353 (a) to 353) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable lid symbol P is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. A display mode in which one reserved symbol is vacated from the last reserved symbol is set).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 348 (a) to 348 (b), when the number of reserved balls is four or more and the color of the reserved symbol is variable, it is suggested to the player not to let the reserved balls enter any more. Determine if the hold effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display showing the color change of the variable lid symbol P based on the hold lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 367 (b)) provided in the ROM 222. Set the hold lid command for (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 348 (b), the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable color, and the notice B for notifying the player that the game is to be performed so as to restrict the further increase of the reserved balls. When the game of the mode (the number of reserved balls is 4 or more) is being performed and more reserved balls are stored, the variable lid symbol at the position where the variable lid symbol P and the displayed reserved symbol overlap is performed. A setting is executed in which the display color of P is variably displayed in a color different from the normal color (for example, green or the like). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game so as not to memorize the reserved ball.

After executing the processing of Z2348, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2349) based on the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365 (d)), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed. End the process. According to the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365 (d)), if there is a holding effect in the normal mode as in the case where there are four holding balls as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the holding ball 5 The variable lid symbol P corresponding to the position of the item is hidden, but it can be configured to be displayed by a special rule such that it is in the display state. As a result, in the notice B mode in which the hold effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of hold balls, the variable lid symbol P is used to make the player think that the four hold balls are the upper limit. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved ball is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid symbol P.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved symbol is changed or set, and the variable lid symbol P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved symbol. It is determined whether or not the hold effect to be displayed without an interval is being executed.

When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the hold lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 365 (c)) (see FIG. 365 (c)). Z2351). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed to end this processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (Z2352). Here, the determination as to whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In addition to the fluctuation type (out of reach, hit) data, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 includes whether the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state (high). It is also output with data indicating whether it is a gaming state with probability electric support) or a normal gaming state (game state without low probability electric support).

When it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (a state in which the time reduction gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is set) (Z2352: Yes), it is based on the time reduction holding lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 366 (c)). And the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. It should be noted that, unlike the normal game state, the variable lid symbol P is the 7th and 8th reserved balls in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 6 during the time reduction (the state where the electric support is present). Is displayed only at the position where is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved symbol is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to be hidden. As a result, the variable lid symbol P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal gaming state during the time reduction with the electric support in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and in a state where a large number of reserved balls are frequently generated. , The load of the display control of the variable lid symbol P is suppressed from increasing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z2352: No), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect of the normal mode is in progress, the normal hold lid range selection table 222d1 (FIG. Based on 365 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold lid setting process (Z2229), the hold character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 401, the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 397) executed by the MPU221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the hold character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one reserved ball is digested by newly starting the fluctuation, the first ball entry port 64, which is the starting port, is used. , The number of reserved balls was 3 by entering either the right second entry port 640r or the second entry opening 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter). From the state (the total of the values with 223b is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the total of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing to a state.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set hold effect mode are set. And the effect counter 223h, the reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 369 (b)), the display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined and set by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode. .. As a result, the characters displayed depending on the background type and the hold effect mode can be different, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of the character to be determined may be varied depending on the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach or the like). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is preliminarily judged as a hit while it is on hold or a special symbol that is changing depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the reserved ball being held is stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set when it is displayed in super reach depending on the character type, that character is displayed, and super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is executed. You can expect that early.

Further, also in this control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the fluctuation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high expectation of a big hit by the look-ahead judgment or the advance hit / fail judgment result big hit. Since it is easy, by displaying the character of J2 and the character of J3, it is possible to expect the player to execute the super reach type and to expect the hit / fail determination result to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from 3 to 4, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved characters is set (Z2365), and this process is terminated. In this way, since the character is set to be hidden when the number of reserved balls becomes less than 4, it is possible to inform the player of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the processing of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not the over-winning has occurred is executed by determining whether or not the over-winning information command output when the start winning is exceeded from the main control device 110 and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is received. To. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the character is changed by the hold character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. Select the reserved character, set the display character command (Z2267), and end this process. If it is determined that the over-winning has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 370), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the character of J3, which is easy to be set when the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or the expectation of the big hit is high in the fluctuation pattern type, is selected while the notice A mode or the notice B mode is decided. Is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. If the character of J2 is selected, or if the character of J0 or J1 that is difficult to select is selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, the character of J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set to a high degree of expectation that a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the hold effect by generating an over prize. It is configured to be able to. Changing this character is a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed to end this process. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

Next, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the balloon is selected at the time of short-term winning in the balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 371 (a)) provided in the ROM 222. The contents of the balloon are acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 372 (a)) (Z2382). A display balloon command is set (Z2394) based on the balloon content acquired after executing the processing of Z2382, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the reach effect during balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 372 (b)) (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the balloon contents are acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 373 (a)) (Z2386), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). When it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 371 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 371 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving medium (time saving gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time reduction is set (Z2391), the balloon content is acquired based on the time reduction balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 373 (b)) (Z2392), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Execute and end this process.

When it is determined in the processing of Z2391 that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon contents are acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 371 (b)) (Z2393). The above-mentioned Z2394 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the comment of the corresponding content is controlled to be selected for each hold effect mode, the comment content corresponding to the hold effect mode can be displayed to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, a winning command receiving process (Z2209), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command receiving process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, the pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 364 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2402). ..

Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 364 (b)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the processing of Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the current hold ball value (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b) is added to the hold notice counter 223g. (Total value of) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, the short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404, but if it is the timing to execute the short-term prize hold effect, it is determined (the condition to execute is satisfied). (If so) The process of setting the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is executed. Next, the lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405, but if it is the execution timing, it is determined whether it is the timing (whether the condition is satisfied) to execute the lucky hold effect. Set the execution of the lucky hold effect. Next, the above-mentioned hold lid setting process (Z2409), hold character setting process (Z2410), and balloon setting process (Z2411) are executed to end this process. Since the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 400, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 402, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (during the time reduction) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. As described above, when the period required for the four reserved balls to be established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term prize holding effect is set is set.

Next, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the winning is acquired from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). If it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current value of the number of reserved balls is 4 or less (Z2443: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the variation display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (Z2114). This variation display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the Z2505 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z2505 processing.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring the period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute the short-term winning holding effect is executed is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1, (Z2604: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1, (Z2604: No), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In that case (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this way, when the short-term prize holding effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4. Not limited to that, the special effect status should be set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is completed (the timing when the hold balls enter up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). It may be configured in.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the reach hold effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the pending effect start processing (Z2112) during reach. In this reach hold effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the reach hold effect and setting the display mode of the reach hold effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2, (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is subtracted by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2, (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command indicating that the hold effect during reach is executed is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 0 in the processing of Z2702 (Z2702: Yes), the timing at which the variable time (variable period) of the special symbol being changed ends (the variable period has elapsed). (Z2707). When it is determined that it is the variation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this process is terminated. As described above, in the hold effect during reach, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the change time of the special symbol, which is the reach variation mode, elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 409), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2801: No). Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW effective time counter 223k (Z2802). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (Z2805). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the process of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 410.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect). (Z2809). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2811). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813) which is a process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z1307: FIG. 409) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in an effective period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2282). When it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is added by 1 and updated (Z2826), and the notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is provided. Set the display command (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to the initial value 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 409. In the processing of Z2801, when it is not in standby mode (Z2801: No), or in the processing of Z2802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: No), the SW valid time counter 223k. It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). When the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2810). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. Since the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 410, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2808 that the advance notice is not being produced (Z2808: No), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 410 is skipped. Is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2811). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2812) based on the set fluctuation pattern, and the sensor input process (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this process. If the fluctuation pattern is not set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: No), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, there are some fluctuation patterns in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and some in which the effect using the frame button 22 is not set. If not, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223k. Will be done.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 411 to 424, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 411, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of the Z3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 412, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Z3101. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of Z3102, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 411. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (Z3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 422 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 376 is drawn. The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command for display is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, the interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Z3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413 (a). FIG. 413 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413 (b). FIG. 413 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 379) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 413 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 414.

In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 420 to 421.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (Z3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simple display setting process (Z3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), which are determined by the task process (Z3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 424.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 376) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed to process the Z3304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 414 to 419, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414), as shown in FIG. 414, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Z3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern is determined. The command process is executed (Z3405), and the process returns to the Z3401 process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (a). FIG. 415 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 415 (a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by Z3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a display variable type command (Z3406: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401 processing.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (b). FIG. 415 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 415 (b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable effect to be performed is finally set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the process of Z3401 in FIG. 414.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 416 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And the setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 416 (a). FIG. 416 (a) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 416 (a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured by the timekeeping counter. It is set to 233h (Z3704) and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 416 (b), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 416 (b) (Z3411). FIG. 416 (b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode of the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the rear image change flag to turn on the rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the set rear image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the received rear image command may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display switching command in the processing of Z3410 (Z3410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold cover command for display (Z3412: Yes), the hold cover command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the holding lid command processing (Z3413) will be described with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this hold lid command process (Z3413).

In the holding lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the holding lid of the display effect corresponding to the received display holding lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other holding lids on (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z3904). ), The pointer 233f is initialized to 0, and (Z3905) returns to the command determination process.

When the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display hold lid command in the processing of Z3412 (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold character command for display (Z3412: Yes), the hold character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the reserved character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 417 (b). FIG. 417 (b) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command process (Z3415).

In the hold character command process (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other reserved characters to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4004). ), Initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination process.

When a hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display pending character command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), the balloon command process is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 418), first, the display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for blowout set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the balloon of is set to off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the blowout set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4104). , The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and there is an error command. If (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 419), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Z4201 process, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the Z4202 process is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 is set to turn on the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands in the processing. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the processing of Z3401.

In the Z3401 processing that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes). ), The processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the Z3416 process that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 376 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 415 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 420 to 421, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 420, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 421 (a). FIG. 421 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the Z4401 process, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 420. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, the pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 421 (b). FIG. 421 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Z4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (Z4503: No). Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 421. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed by the Z4306 processing together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (Z4309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the Z4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (Z4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (FIG. 376) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 422 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 422 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 423.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 422 (b). FIG. 422 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Z4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4702 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4703 process. Further, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4703.

In the processing of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the Z4703 process (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 420 to 421 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device is set. An image at normal time is displayed in 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 422 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, a normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the display setting process (Z3303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Further, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4805. In the Z4805 process, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

In this Z4806 process, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4806 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that this normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process. Further, as a result of the Z4805 process, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Z4808), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the Z3603 process is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the Z4809 process. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The discrimination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of Z4809, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: No), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the Z4902 process (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 is not used to manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above control example, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above control example, a case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above control example, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and the MPU 231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited to this. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously held while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above control example, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, by turning on the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 421 (a)). In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main control device 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. Upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 114 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player acts illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed as one unit of the time when the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In the above control example, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command for display in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation effect can be, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above control example, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above control example, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a lottery for a special symbol jackpot is started when a ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, but this is not always the case. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above control example, the hold ball number command is mainly used every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entry port 64, a right second ball entry port 640r, and a second ball entry port 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means), and the game ball is a starting port. By entering one of the balls, a winning lottery (judgment) is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (determination result) is a win (specific determination result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types of the jackpot game are set, and the benefits given to the player are set to be different depending on the type. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the hit type in which a high-probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after the jackpot game, and the player's profit is smaller than the time-saving gaming state (first special gaming state) after the jackpot game. The second special game state) is set, and the hit type and the like are set.

The hit / fail determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After the variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the judgment result by stopping and displaying in a display mode for showing the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result). .. When a game ball enters the starting opening during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entry. Up to 4 reserved balls can be entered into the first entrance 64 (lottery of the first special symbol), and up to four balls can be entered into the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special). Up to 4 balls are stored as upper limit values for the lottery of symbols).

When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. For the reserved ball, the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special symbol before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variablely displayed. Pre-discrimination is performed in which (variation pattern type) is pre-determined. When the pre-discrimination result is a specific discrimination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special hold effects, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, the hold ball is generated further, or the overflow prize is generated so that the starting port is filled with more than the maximum number of hold balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the ball, the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed, and the like is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can be made to win more game balls at the starting port, and the profit of the game store can be increased. In addition, by inserting the game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment, the type of variation, etc. can be determined from the content of the comment. It can be granted and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as one of the special hold effects, a hold effect (notice B mode) is set, which is executed so that the game is performed so that the hold balls are not generated from the state where the color of the hold balls is changed. In this hold effect, the variable lid symbol P is displayed in the display area where the hold symbol is displayed, and the position of the hold symbol displayed when the variable lid symbol P is won next to the hold symbol whose color is variable. Is displayed on the screen to notify the player that the game is to be played so that the reserved ball does not occur. In addition, the comment display also displays content suggesting that the number of reserved balls will not be increased.

Further, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and up to eight reserved symbols in total are the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). The area where the reserved symbol is displayed is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and even if the reserved symbol is not displayed in the area where the reserved symbol is displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed, 4 variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved symbols are displayed even in normal times, and each variable lid is displayed. On the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable lid symbol P in this way, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved symbol is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Further, when the reserved ball is generated and the reserved symbol is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is also changed. In the hold effect which is the normal mode in the normal mode, the variable lid symbol P changes to hide the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth hold symbol is displayed when the number of hold balls is three. Then, similarly, the 6th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so as to be hidden, that is, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so that two reserved symbols are vacant for the reserved symbols for three or more reserved balls. The closure. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

Further, it is configured to execute a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P is changed depending on the period in which the holding ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variable type displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold effect is being executed by the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P. Further, the special hold effect is set depending on the hold / fail judgment result of the prior judgment, the variation type, the pass / fail judgment result of the special symbol displayed in the variation, and the variation type being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is fired on the left side or the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, and the second ball entry port 640 (electric combination). (The object 640a is in the open state) is configured to enter the ball in the same manner, but the route is not limited to this, and the route that makes it easy to enter the second entry port 640, the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640r. The arrangement of the nails and the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery using only the second special symbol, or to play a game so that the game ball does not enter the second entrance 640. Further, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 461. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be alternately changed, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. It differs from the first control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change their order depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 425. FIG. 425 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, a first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the distribution device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710a, the distribution device 700 causes the first ball entry. Although the ball is configured to be distributed to the mouth 64 and the second ball entry port 640, in this second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are used as they are. It differs in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 426 to 430, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the changed point and the content of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 428. In the first control example, the special symbol in which the variation start is executed is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the second control example, the variation is given priority over the second special symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to be executed.

FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 428 (a), when the special symbol variation continues to be executed in the first special symbol, the effect display is continuously produced as shown in FIG. 428 (b). To execute. The continuous effect is a set period for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on the winning prize during the continuous effect.

FIG. 428 (a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 428 (a), in the second control example, the running pedestal symbol m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81, and is small. In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and the reserved symbol are displayed. In addition, characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing a story-like effect on the characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 427 and 429.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 428 (c) and 428 (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 426 (c), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, the first special symbol is used as shown in FIG. 426 (d). The continuous production period of is interrupted, and during the suspension period, a special production with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 428 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol is changed during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), the reserved ball is variably displayed in red. Further, the shellfish K1, the shellfish K2, and the shellfish K3 are displayed in the display area Dm, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is being executed. When displayed as, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 (c) and 426 (d). In the second control example, even if the variation is being executed with the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entry port 640, the variation is preferentially executed with the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 426 (c), if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2 while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is executed as shown in FIG. 426 (d). The continuous effect during the variation execution of is interrupted, and the special effect is executed during the variation execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shellfish are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a story-like effect is executed. With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special production period from the continuous production period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous effect of the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special effect of the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special effect period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are waiting to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2, which is the special effect period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, depending on the special effect period. The suspended continuous production period is resumed.

The relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 427. FIGS. 427 (a) to 427 (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during the special symbol change and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous production period. In the second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 429 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 429, the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol is set to the mountain mode as the background mode from the sea mode, which was the period of continuous production. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. .. In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous production is being executed in the sea mode !!", and the player is in the continuous production period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Further, in the display area Dma, "The background is changed by pressing the button PUSH" is displayed, and the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 430. In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 430 (a). FIG. 430 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (FIG. 428 (a)). In the prize information related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 437), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes in FIG. 437), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off. When it is (Z5004: No in FIG. 437), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 437) and used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 233).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time correspond to each other. Whether or not to execute continuous production is specified. Specifically, the larger the number of currently reserved balls, the easier it is to execute continuous production, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is the lottery result indicating a big hit, the lottery result is out of order. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is easier to be executed than in the case of indicating.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to execute a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol changes to be executed), and when the continuous effect is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with a high expectation for the big hit, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438), the special symbol 1 reserved ball When the value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 438) and it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes in FIG. 438), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous effect again. Even in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 438).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the continuous effect even for the game ball newly won during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of executing the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period during which the continuous effect is executed longer than the maximum number of reserved symbols (4), it is possible for the player to know which reserved symbol the continuous effect is executed for. It can be difficult to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is defined in the above-mentioned contents, but other contents may be specified. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for measuring the current time, and the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed according to the time measuring content of the time measuring means. It may be specified in.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), the continuous effect may be executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even if the same continuous effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the timing (time) when the continuous effect is executed, so that the player can play the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress getting bored with. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, the guidance notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the remaining period (or the elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is advisable to provide a period notification means for notifying. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to perform the continuous production.

Further, a means for discriminating the operation content to the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the launch status (or the ball entry status) of the game ball are provided, and these discriminating means are provided. It may be specified that the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the determination result of the above, or the above-mentioned plurality of contents may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Further, in this control example, the stop command process (see FIG. 438) is performed by using the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the prize information related process (see FIG. 437). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect, but when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 437) and the stop command process (see FIG. 438). The selection table referred to in may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) is a big hit of the special symbol when the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the prize information related process (see FIG. 437). It is advisable to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous production is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the big hit, and the more the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 430 (b). FIG. 430 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac, the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae are used for the first control example described above. The difference is that the effect count counter 223af, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, the setting prohibition release flag 223ah, the time saving counter 223ai, the fluctuation number counter 223j, the operation invalidation flag 223ak, and the state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The effect counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of counter means for effect. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various advance notice effects, and the like. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Random number value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate at least with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can be updated to a different random number value for each of the production counters and perform a determination. Is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters possessed by the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as the effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not the continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various advance notice effect types. It is used when executing various determinations to be performed, and is updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 435) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In (every 1 ms), the update process is executed so that the values are different.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the values of the effect counters, since a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process. Even in this case, the same counter value is referred to, and the selected effect is suppressed from being biased. However, for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to select. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the update values of the effect counter, the value of the last 1st digit, the value of the last 2nd digit, and the last 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the 1st digit by the value of the 2nd digit. It is advisable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information-related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 437) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), the stop command processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 437). In (see FIG. 438), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110: Yes in FIG. 438), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 437), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 440) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 442) is executed in Z5204 of 441), it is set to off (see Z5401 in FIG. 442).

That is, does this continuous effect flag 223ab execute continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64? Is determined, and the fact that the determination result is to execute the continuous effect is retained until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol 1.

In this control example, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437), it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 437). ), It is configured to execute the continuous effect when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to start the continuous effect in the current variable display, and the continuous effect is based on the lottery result. May be configured to determine the variable display to start with. With this configuration, the timing when a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous production is started are different (the game ball enters the first entrance 64). After that, the continuous effect can be started with a variable display that does not execute the continuous effect), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

Further, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing at which the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. It can be easily grasped by the player. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous effect, the game ball can be enthusiastically entered into the first entry port 64 while the special symbol is changing (during the change display execution), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. ..

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display during execution is determined, and the condition in which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device). Only when the variable display displayed in 81 is in a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added and displayed to the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to continuous production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous production is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 441) is executed, and the continuous effect command for display is set. If so (Z5406 in FIG. 442), it is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 442).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 443), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 438). When it is determined that the continuous effect does not continue (Z5106: No in FIG. 438 or Z5110: No), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 438).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, an event in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, continuous production is performed based on the winning information regarding the first special symbol (special diagram 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed in the normal state (a state that is not a probable change state or a time-saving state). It is configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the game is played at the second entrance 640a. It is configured so that the playability (type of special symbol change to be executed) is different between the probable change state and the time saving state where the ball is easy to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) even when the game state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit. The electric accessory 640a, which is attached to the second entry port 640a and regulates the entry of the game ball into the second entry port 640a, opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to perform a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, a game ball enters the second entrance 640a while performing continuous production using a plurality of prize information related to the first special symbol. In some cases, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed even though the continuous production executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem that the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, giving the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, if the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the first special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. It is configured to restart the continuous effect that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad indicates that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. When it is determined (Z5505: Yes in FIG. 443), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 443). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a “standby” display for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third symbol display device 81 (interruption display mode of FIG. 428 (b)). Set a display interruption command to execute (see ma) (Z5508 in FIG. 443). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 441). ).

With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the fluctuation (lottery) has priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, the continuous production is interrupted when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, and the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). Since the continuous production that had been interrupted can be resumed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 2) is completed, the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not related to the change status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to execute continuous production in correspondence with.

In addition, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the change of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) during the continuous production execution, it means that the continuous production is interrupted for the player. Because it is configured to notify the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable if the continuous production is suddenly ended, and to play the game while expecting that the continuous production will be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, and the background of the display screen is set to "sea background". This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect when the background is changed from "" to another background ("mountain background", "river background").

As described above with reference to FIG. 224 (a), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change (standby state). When the player operates the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation), the background of the display screen becomes "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 429), and "river background (see FIG. 429). It is configured to switch in the order of "river mode)".

Then, as the variation effect corresponding to the set background, the variation effect dedicated to each background and the variation effect common to a plurality of backgrounds are executed. With this configuration, the player can make different production modes of the variation effect for showing the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the fluctuation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode is being executed in the state where the sea mode is set. In addition, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if the player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous effect and the background of the display screen is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data related to the continuous effect is deleted. Even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even when the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is produced. The execution data of is configured to be temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae, and after the background of the display screen is switched to other than "sea mode" during the execution of continuous effect, the background of the display screen is set to "sea" again. When the mode is switched to, the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous production disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442) (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 442), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". In some cases (Z5405: No in FIG. 442), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 442).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" in the effect return process (see FIG. 445) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 444), it is stored (Z2871: Yes in FIG. 445). Information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 445). After that, when the continuous effect is completed, the information (display data indicating the effect mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period (special figure variation number) during which the continuous effect is executed. When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information related process (see FIG. 437) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), the effect count counter 223af has a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the received prize command. The value of is set (Z5010 in FIG. 437). Then, when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes in FIG. 441), the continuous effect is set. The continuous effect setting process for this is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 442). With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 437), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. It is possible to execute the continuous effect using the period from the variation display executed in the set state until the variation display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuous effect is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect, for example, the continuous effect. The continuous effect may be started by changing the effect mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON. ) May be executed continuously when the number of fluctuations is two. Further, when the display mode of the new variation display is set (when the variation display setting process 2 is executed) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. The execution discriminating means may be provided, and the continuous effect may be executed when the execution discriminating means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous production is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected production.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to be turned on during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5011 in FIG. 437) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect (processes of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 437) in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 437) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by starting a new continuous production while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous production. Then, when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438), it is set to off. (Z5103 in FIG. 438).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous effect is performed in addition to the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, the timing when the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 437) is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON at the timing when the stop command is received at the time of termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 438) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 438), it is also set to ON when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 438).

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time saving state is set when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. The time reduction counter 223ai is set with a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the set number of time reductions when a state command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time reduction state is received from the main control device 110. , In the stop command processing (see FIG. 438), every time the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439) executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 438) is executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see Z5151 in FIG. 439).

Then, in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), the change occurs. 5 is set in the value of the count counter 223aj.

The fluctuation count counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the fluctuation count of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the special effect (see FIG. 428 (b)) is executed. ing. This is because the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is intended to be given as a privilege. However, when the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the holding thereof is obtained. The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (hold of special figure 2) may be executed in the normal state after the end of the time reduction. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect becomes frequent after the time reduction ends, and there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special effect.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within the predetermined period after the end of the time reduction. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. If it is determined that, the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which special effects frequently occur after the end of the time reduction.

In this control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction is 5 times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the holding ball of the special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state. Although it is surely prevented from being performed, a condition other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as a condition that the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value smaller than the upper limit (4) (for example, 3) may be set as a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the time reduction, a special effect will be executed, so the player willingly give the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 to the player. It can be saved and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, a condition using the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state is completed. A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the above may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached. It is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game performed by the next player.

In addition, a game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second entry port 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. If it is determined that the ball has been hit, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as a variation display for the ball.

This fluctuation number counter 223aj is special for restricting (prohibiting) the execution of special effects when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439) (Z5152: Yes in FIG. 439). A value indicating the number of fluctuations of the symbol (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 439), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 443), when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is referred to and it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502: No in FIG. 449). , The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 449).

The operation invalid flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen, and is set to on during the period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is executed. It is configured so that there is no such thing. With this configuration, the player mistakenly operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from switching while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443) (Z5504 in FIG. 443), and the first special symbol is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 441). When setting the variation effect of (Special FIG. 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441), it is set to off (Z5302 in FIG. 441). Then, while this operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 240) (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 444) is performed. It will be skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 436), when it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256: Yes in FIG. 436), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 436). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In No. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the state command for indicating the current gaming state is output from the main control device 110, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the gaming state can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by the main controller in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 431 to 434. In the second control example, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 381) is special for the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 431), and the special symbol 1 variation start processing (FIG. 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start processing (FIG. 384) are special. The point that the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 432), the start winning process (FIG. 385) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 433), and the look-ahead process (FIG. 386) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 434). The main difference.

The special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 431. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 432) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 432), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined to be 1 or more (Z3311: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the processing of Z265, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z331 that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z3311: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). When it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the processing of Z339, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340). The special symbol change start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 432. On the other hand, in the processing of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 432, the special symbol change start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: FIG. 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (214: FIG. 384) in the first control example. It is different to perform the processing of. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 433. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) in the second control example, the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed for the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 385) in the first control example, and the Z320 The difference is that the processes are collectively executed by the Z360 process. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 434, a look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is a process in the start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. Each value of the counter CS1 is acquired (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results specified in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning information including the hit judgment result information showing the acquired hit judgment result, the hit type information showing the hit type judgment result, the stop type information showing the stop type judgment result, and the variation type information for showing the fluctuation type judgment result. Set a command (Z367) and end this process.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 435 to 445, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, is performed for the frame button input monitoring / effect for the first control example. The main point is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152) and the variation display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the process 2 (Z2151). It's a difference.

The command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and the present process is terminated. do. Since the processes of Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z2206 (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related process (Z2255) is executed to end this process. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 437.

When it is determined in the process of Z2253 that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). When it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the state information indicating the game state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), the stop command has been received. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. The details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 437, the winning information-related processing (Z2255), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

The prize information-related process (Z2255) first stores the received information of the prize information command in the corresponding prize information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read out (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). When the continuous effect is not executed (Z5007: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set. It is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 438, a stop command process (Z2259), which is a process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that the time saving is in progress (Z5101: Yes), the time saving middle processing (Z5115) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of the time saving medium processing (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 439. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a. Is read out (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5105 that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a being 2 or more is obtained. Reading from the storage area 223f is executed (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: No), the continuous production flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is available (Z5107: Yes), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read out (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the above-mentioned Z5116 process is executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the big hit prize is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this process is performed. finish.

With reference to FIG. 439, a time saving medium processing (Z5115), which is one of the processing in the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving and medium processing (Z5115).

In the time saving middle processing (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is larger than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 440, the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (FIG. 435) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different from the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that the processes of Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired by the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. The details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is subtracted by 1 (Z5208). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 in the processing of Z5207 (Z5207: No), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 441, an effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If the variation is in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223af is larger than 0 (Z5305). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 442.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), the variation pattern of the mode without continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301 when it is determined that the change this time is not the change in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 443.

With reference to FIG. 442, a continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the final mode of continuous effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect count counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a continuous display command for displaying the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the effect count counter 223af is subtracted by 1 (Z5407). ), Set the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac to ON (Z5408), and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is waiting is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the above-mentioned processes of Z5407 to Z5408 are executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 443, a special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). When it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). When it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and the display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is being shortened in the processing of Z5501 (Z5501: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 in the processing of Z5502 (Z5502: No). The effect mode of the normal effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is off in the processing of Z5555 (Z5505: No), or when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: No). Yes), the above-mentioned processes of Z5507 to Z5508 are skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 444, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151). The second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803 to Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 445, the effect return process (Z2852), which is one of the processes in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be explained. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return process (Z2852).

In the effect return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 444. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed and the present process is terminated.

<Third control example>
Next, the above-mentioned third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 446 to 449. In the third control example described above, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the change of the special figure 2 is performed. A configuration was used in which the continuous effect that had been interrupted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol after the end of was resumed. As a result, the continuous production can be executed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the continuous production can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the change in Special Figure 2), so whether or not the continuous effect is restarted. Since it is not possible to make the player excited, it has been required to further enhance the effect of the production. On the other hand, in the third control example, the interruption is based on the game content (the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the continuous effect inside, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production executed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the third control example, the continuous effect is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous effect is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 (the number of times the special effect is executed) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous production to the resumption is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player does not have a useless expectation for the big hit. In order to make it so, it is configured so that it is difficult to restart the continuous production.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 446. FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification. The third control example differs in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 449) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is set. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 449), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 448) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 447) (Z5602 in FIG. 448). In the processing of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: Yes in FIG. 448), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 448). Z5603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 448), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous production is interrupted. If so, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 448), and if it is determined that there is no winning information (Z5605: Yes in FIG. 448). , The value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 448), and the above-mentioned processing of Z5603 is executed.

That is, in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 448), when the interrupted continuous effect is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the continuous effect interruption is a predetermined number (3 times) or more. , Judgment as to whether or not to restart the continuous production is executed based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, and if the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is restarted. However, since it only disappoints the player, the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous effect is not restarted. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given a useless expectation for the big hit. In addition to being able to suppress this, it is possible to have expectations for the jackpot when the continuous production is resumed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 447 to 449, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 440), is partially changed from the second control example. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 447, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variation display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 447) in the third control example does not execute the Z5310 process for the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441) in the second control example, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is changed and the continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read out (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined to be larger than 3, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the prize information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223f is read out. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the read prize information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: No), the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, if it is determined that there is a winning prize (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 449, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 449) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then the special effect 2 fluctuation counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 to 461. The fourth control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the player has an adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 450, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume are provided. They differ and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is composed of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. Further, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC292 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power supply 353, for example, a button type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply electric power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC292. The input / output port is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls registers to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored or an operation can be performed on the stored data. The register is provided with at least a timekeeping register and a time information storage area.

The timekeeping register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timekeeping information measured in this timekeeping register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC292) is obtained with respect to the turn-on time storage area of the RAM 223. ) Is stored or the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area is stored. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the time information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by RTC292) is stored in the input time storage area. ..

As a result, the clerk in the hall turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time from the power on that each pachinko machine 10 grasps. Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling an error), the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 451 and X, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 451 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 451 (b) is a schematic diagram showing no game. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and in X (a), a special symbol change is executed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram showing the customer waiting screen in the state where the pachinko machine is not, and X (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the first special symbol change after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. be.

As shown in FIG. 451 (a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment "Please wait for a while" notifying the period until is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and the volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. 1 ”is displayed, and a shaded area corresponding to the set value“ 1 ”is displayed on the gauge. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451 (b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. To. The volume switching display S3 has a "switching" display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a indicating that the volume is lowered when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a right volume button 23b when the volume button 23b is pressed. It is formed from the volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. While the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the pachinko machine 10 is illegally acted (for example, the control content of the main control device 110 is illegally operated to aim for a big hit), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned on. Some turn it off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent activities, there are measures taken so that a loud noise is emitted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 temporarily emit a loud sound as a method for enhancing the effect of production, and in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating, a loud volume emitted when the power is turned on. There was a problem that the clerk of the amusement park missed the question. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change. Is configured to output a small sound. With this configuration, in a gaming machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game, it is possible to create a state of discomfort compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting an unnecessarily quiet sound. It can be easily found by the clerk of the amusement park.

Further, in this control example, since the player is configured so that the volume cannot be adjusted from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change, it is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player who has performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X (a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 451 (b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. It is composed. In this way, although the volume is internally output lower than the volume setting value "1", it is illegal by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the act from being aware that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine 10 for which fraud countermeasures have been taken by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed while the special symbol is fluctuating in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value "1" is output). , The volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 453 to 455. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 453. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. The control examples described above are different in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) are provided, and are the same except for the provision.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 454 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is significantly different from the ROM of each of the above-mentioned control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table in which the set value of the volume that can be set by operating the volume button 23 is specified. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 455, in the volume table 222ca, in addition to the set values (set values "1" to "4") that can be set by operating the volume button 23, predetermined conditions after the power is turned on are satisfied. The set value (set value "A") to be set when the table is set is specified, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) in the first rotation is completed after the power is turned on. When the set value "A" is set, a sound having a volume of 15db (decibel) is output. Further, when the volume button 23 is operated and the set value "1" is set, a sound having a loudness of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 db (decibel) is output. When the sound is output and the setting value "3" is set, a sound with a size of 85db (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound with a size of 95db (decibel) is output. Sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on, but the initial value of the volume is set according to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to be turned on only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and if the flag is set to on, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Or it may be configured to determine the time when the power is turned on and set a different set value as the initial value based on the determination result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 454 (b). In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cc, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 457) of the start-up process 4 (see FIG. 456). The installed value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 457). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 458) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 459).

The volume operation invalid flag 223cc is a flag for indicating a period for invalidating the volume change (setting value change) based on the operation of the volume button 23, and the volume change (setting value) based on the volume button 23 operation. Is set to on during the period when (change) is invalid. When it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 253) that the time counting time of the RTC is during business hours (for example, from 10 am to 10 pm), the volume operation invalid flag 223 cb is determined (Z6002 in FIG. 457:). Yes), it is set to on (Z6005 in FIG. 457) and referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) (Z6107 in FIG. 459). If it is determined by the processing of Z6107 that it is set to ON (see Z6107 in FIG. 459), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 451 (a)) is not displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 451 (b)). ) Is set for displaying only (Z6110 in FIG. 459). Then, it is set to off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 461) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 460) (Z5122 in FIG. 461). That is, when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on, it is set to off.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is a thing. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is accidentally pressed during the game.

If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation while the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is made. It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared at a volume higher than the volume or the maximum volume set for operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clear and aiming at a hit random value.

Further, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until one fluctuation at the time of turning on the power is completed. Operation When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a volume lower than the set minimum volume, the voice such as BGM and the sound effect (directing voice) are output, and the volume is set in the third symbol display device 81. May be configured to display a display indicating that the volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With this configuration, when the game starts when the game store opens after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (volume setting on the previous day), resulting in a loud volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by the output in. Furthermore, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, it is possible to make the player aware that the volume is low while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that, regardless of when the power is turned on, by switching to the demo screen, the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum and the volume setting screen may be displayed. Further, after the game is started (the change of the special symbol starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume lower than the minimum volume is continued during the period when the special symbol is changed. The display color (volume symbol and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation)) can be changed depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-reading result), which is stored on hold. It may be configured to notify the degree of expectation of a hit. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game at a quiet volume and raise the volume at the timing when the expectation is high, until the fluctuation with high expectation or the holding memory is performed.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 456 to Z324, the control process in which the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example is executed will be described. In this fourth control example, the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, the volume setting process (Z2171), and the sound editing / output process (Z2109) are added to the main process for the first control example. The main difference is that the processing is added and the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

With reference to FIG. 456, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 456) in the fourth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 412) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 457, the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read out (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the present is during business hours (Z6002). When it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON. (Z6005), this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 458, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 4. The main process (FIG. 458) in the fourth control example differs from the main process (FIG. 395) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 459, a volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 458) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). When it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying the volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, a voice setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and the adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, when the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), the display volume command for indicating the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 460, the stop command process 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 4 (Z2259). The stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command process (FIG. 438) in the second control example in that a volume-related process (Z5120) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 461, a volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation invalid flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z5122), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed and the present processing is terminated.

<About the 5th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 462 to 482. In the fifth control example, the control process relating to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 142) will be described. Only the differences will be described with respect to the first control example, and the description thereof will be omitted for the same configuration.

In the fifth control example, mainly when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, error processing during the initial operation and initial operation of the tilting device 310, and control processing and error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during a normal game. The processing will be described.

With reference to FIGS. 462 (a) and 462 (b), a display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In FIG. 462 (a), in the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110), the tilt operation timer 223db described later by the tilt device 310 is 0 ( An abnormality notification display mode (error) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when it is not detected at the origin position even when the initial operation period elapses when the initial operation is completed and the origin position is reached). It is a figure which showed display).

As shown in FIG. 462 (a), based on the fact that the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed. The text "Button return error A, please call the staff" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the employees of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. .. In this control example, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends during the initial operation, an error display as shown in FIG. 462 (a) is configured. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, a normal game in which the player may not be able to perform the normal operation predetermined by the production or the like by hindering the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding the operation of the tilting device 310 by hand or the like. Even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, no error is displayed immediately, and the tilting device 310 is operated four times for each of three fluctuations of a predetermined specific condition (for example, a special symbol). When an abnormality is detected continuously until the abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), the error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. Regardless, it is configured to suppress problems that hinder it.

It should be noted that the error display at the time of initial operation is a mechanical (including a control abnormality) abnormality by displaying an identifiable display as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. 462 (a). It is configured so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 462 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in the production of the game during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the origin sensor does not detect the movement (movement) to the origin position even during the period when the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not immediately displayed and an internal abnormality occurs. The status indicates the state in which The text "Button return error B Please call the staff" is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81, and an error display is executed to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. Will be done.

Here, by displaying a character called "button return error B" different from that at the time of the initial operation, it is configured so that it can be easily identified as an abnormality during the normal game. As described above, in this control example, the error display is displayed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured to suppress frequently executed problems. Further, when an error display is executed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a gaming method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error operation of the tilting device 310 at an early stage by confirming the game method by the hall employee or the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 465, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 463 shows a period (origin) during which the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position when the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is executed as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol). It is a timing chart in the example in which the origin sensor does not detect even if the return is completed).

When the fluctuation display of the normal reach deviation A (variation time (variation period) 30,000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later is obtained. If it is collated with any of the above and matches the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 470 (a)), which will be described later, is determined. In the tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 470 (a)), the tilting device 310 is raised to the highest position (see FIG. 169), and then the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 170 as a tilting motion. After the operation of repeating the ascending position (see FIG. 169) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, the operation of descending to the position shown in FIG. 159, which is the origin position, is executed (set).

When the normal reach deviation A is executed, the third symbol is the reach display mode (the third symbol of the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (T1). It will be temporarily stopped (stopped). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, it will be described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. When the detection is detected by the detection sensor 324, the operation validity period (T5) for determining that the detection is valid is set.

As shown in FIGS. 463 and 470 (a), the drive motor 342 is 210 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 159) 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is started (T1). By step rotation, the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 470 (a)). ). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and is in the unlocked position. It is moved to (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 470) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengagement position to the locking disengagement position, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise). By being rotated, the rotary claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is subjected to the torsion spring 315. Raised by the force of. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 50 degrees counterclockwise and moves downward 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 169). It is moved to the rotated fanning descent position (see FIG. 170) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 470 (a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 170) by 50 steps, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated 50 degrees in the clockwise direction, and the tilting device 320 is again tilted. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 470 (a))).

Then, again, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest rising position to the lowering position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 470 (a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position from the lowering position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the ascending position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 470 (a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 477) is executed, and the driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 471 (a)) described later. When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 169), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the tilting device 320 is driven in the direction of descending to the origin position. Is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 463, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to be lowered by the player at the highest position. In such a case, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b is idled so that the drive motor 342 is being driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured so as not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 471 (a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310, which is an internal (abnormal state that is not a state of notifying to the outside) described later.

In this way, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position due to being held by the player or the like, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be driven by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. It can be idled to prevent damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343b, and the like. Further, by configuring so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that the origin return operation has an abnormality, it is configured so that it can be internally identified as an abnormal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 463) is executed, the origin sensor is executed even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 ms) has elapsed. The control executed after the tilting motion status is set to "4" without turning on will be described. In FIG. 464, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure) are executed. It is a timing chart when it is done.

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", as shown in FIG. 464, a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every 3 fluctuations of the special symbol. Will be done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by the retry operation four times in a row (retry operation for every three fluctuations is four times) while maintaining "4" as the tilt operation status value until the origin sensor is detected. , The error display shown in FIG. 462 (b) is executed.

As a result, the effect of raising the tilting device 310 is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player plays a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation to perform the origin position. Even if an error occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol change is executed a specified number of times (3 times) without immediately notifying the error as in the case of the initial operation error. If it is determined that the game has not been able to move to the origin position continuously, an error message will be displayed, and the error message will be displayed frequently due to mischief by the player. It is possible to suppress problems that make you busy.

Next, referring to FIG. 465, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing of the change will be described. FIG. 465 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 to be executed when the effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advance notice effect that the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. The operation is executed, and the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven at the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 has detected the on, and the origin detection operation is executed. FIG. 465 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status is maintained at "4". .. As a result, the retry operation is continuously executed every three fluctuations, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be executed.

The player usually operates the firing handle with his right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When the player is playing the game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is possible that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand, so that the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on. By operating the tilting device 310 to detect the origin, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is configured to be executed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. It may be configured to execute the origin detection operation so that the origin detection operation is performed in a state where the player's holding is released more reliably. Further, the touch sensor 290 is not limited to the frame button 290, and the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform a warning effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). , A mobile phone or the like may be used to perform an effect of reading a three-dimensional code or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Of course, it may be a production that notifies the user to use both hands by voice.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 466 to 471. FIG. 466 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example, respectively. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 222, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is in the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is driven so as to be released from being locked so as to prevent the tilting device 310 from ascending at the lower limit position. When the locking is released, the vibration force in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 of the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, is assisted and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. ..

On the other hand, in the state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward and moved to the origin position by rotating in the opposite direction to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotary claw member 347 (see FIG. 159), and the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 150, and is composed of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 159 is the lower limit position. In the state regulated by, the left side detection sensor 324L detects the left side detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right side detection sensor 324R does not detect the right side detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Therefore, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left side detection sensor 324L and the left side detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilting device 310 can be determined to have been operated by the player at the lower limit position.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position but also when it is restricted at the lower limit position. It can be used for various productions. For example, if the tilting device 310 is set to have a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the tilting device 310 can determine the expectation of the hit / fail judgment result. Can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and by driving the voice coil motor 352, it repeatedly vibrates from the back side direction to the front side side of the tilting device 310, causing the tilting device 310 to vibrate. , The purpose is to perform an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when the tilting device 310 is touched. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the urging force of the spring against the gravity, but the rising force weakens due to the own weight of the tilting device 310, but by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises. , The rising force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the rising force is weakened by its own weight.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 467. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 467 (a). FIG. 467 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the operation effect selection table 222da, the tilting operation scenario table db, the origin detection operation A table 222dcc, the origin detection operation B table 222dd, and the tilting initial operation table 222de are added. are doing.

The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 469 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a determination value of the effect counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability is set according to the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting motion scenario is set for the judgment value for executing the operation effect. In the tilting motion scenario, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 with the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Operation valid start time (operation valid), which is a timer value for determining the start time (start period) in which the operation of the tilt device 310 becomes effective and the timer value of the tilt operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of. The start period) and the operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid, are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are played. The setting of the valid period (T5) for effectively determining the operation when the person presses the button is executed.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach out of A", the operation is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is executed from the effect selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is set. The tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1, which will be described later, is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is set. ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach out of A", the operation effect is determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and executing the operation effect. If it is executed from the selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting device will be described later as an operation scenario. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is 41500 ms. Is set, and 45900 ms is set for the operation valid end time (T4). In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are set in advance according to the variation type of the special symbol, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting operation scenario table 222db sets the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario type and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da. The data table for this is set.

FIG. 469 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilting operation scenario table 222db is provided with a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the motion content in the tilting motion scenario A is defined, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit by normal reach A, and the tilting device 310 is movable. Operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 470 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered.

In the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 480). ), The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (210 steps in the backward rotation direction during 2100 ms) (Movable to) is executed, and the cam removal operation (the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhanging portion 344c3 is the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167). (That is, the operation of moving the second overhanging portion 344c3 to the upper part of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167) without operating the rotary claw member 347)), and the cam is removed. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped for 3000 ms) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer set to "3" (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second overhanging portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward). The disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the operation data with the operation pointer "4" (stopped for 500 ms) is executed, the ascending wait is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (50 steps are movable in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms). ) Is executed to be the position shown in FIG. 170, the operation data whose motion pointer is “6” (movable in the backflip direction in 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed, and the fanning motion to be the position shown in FIG. 169 is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "7" (moving 50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) is executed and the position is again shown in FIG. 170, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (50 steps during 500 ms) is executed. (Movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed, and the position is returned to the position shown in FIG. Is stopped) is executed, the stop is performed at the position shown in FIG. 169, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

As described above, in the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the tilting device 320 is moved from the state where the tilting device 320 is in the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is in the highest position. After executing the fanning operation, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 463, when the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is considered to be effective. After being determined, a specific advance notice effect (for example, an effect of notifying the expected degree of hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also display a sound effect according to the advance notice effect. And the lamp lighting mode are lit. When the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player after the tilting device 320 starts ascending and before 3.5 seconds of the operation valid period (T5) elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. When the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotary claw member 347 and held at the origin position by moving to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is executed, the origin is detected. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

When the transmission gear 343b is held by the player at the raised position of the tilting device 320 and the transmission gear 343b idles, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is ON and the position is the initial position, and the position of the disk cam 344 is determined. Is executed to return to the origin position.

The tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario B are defined, and the operation data when the tilting device 310 is movable when the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 470 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered.

In the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 480). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "11" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) (Movable to) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (during 200 ms) is executed. The operation data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "4" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed. The operation data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed for 200 ms, the operation pointer is "6" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction for 200 ms), and the operation pointer is "7". Operation data (20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and operation data with an operation pointer of "8" (20 steps can be moved in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and this operation is executed. The operation data in which the operation pointer is "9" (120 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction for 1200 ms) is executed by using the repeated operation of the pointers "3" to "8" three times as a fanning operation, and the position in FIG. 38. The operation data is executed with the operation pointer set to "10" (stopped for 2000 ms), the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion during the reach effect, prompting the player to operate the tilting device 310, and changing the fanning motion according to the variation type while the operation effect is being executed. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different places, interest in operation is generated, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this control example, the types of tilting motion scenarios are set according to the types of fluctuation patterns, but the tilting motion scenarios A and B are not limited to this, and the hit / fail judgment results are hit and miss, respectively. May be configured to change and set the selection rate according to the result of the hit / miss judgment by dividing and setting the judgment value of the effect counter 223h. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is higher when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit than in the case of a miss is executed, so that the player can make a hit / fail judgment result. Can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type is set so as to move the tilting motion to the origin position without raising the motion to the highest position after the fanning motion is performed at the start of the motion. May be good. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set so that it can be easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is created. By setting it so that it is easy to select, it is possible to raise expectations for a big hit by making a fanning action.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation A table 222db3, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Or, when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilt operation timer 223db and 3 is set in the tilt operation status 223da based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3. By performing (Z2959), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation process (FIG. 481, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The origin return operation is performed until there is (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222db4, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). , Or when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959). The operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), The origin return operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing origin detection when the origin is not detected even though the origin detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. There is.

FIG. 471 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry operation table 222dc, the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", as in the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above. It is performed until the origin is detected (Z2899: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, and 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976) and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223dc is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983), and when the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), retries are made based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the operation time (900 ms) is set to the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986), and the value after subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set. Set to 3 (Z2988). Then, when the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. It is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2899: Yes). As shown in FIG. 464, the above operation is set once every three times of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and if the origin detection is not performed, the above operation is performed up to four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 471 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilt initial operation table 222dd. In the tilting initial operation table 222dd, the operation pointer becomes "2" in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", and the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes), as in the operation of the tilting operation scenario table described above. Or until there is origin detection (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms) is based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. ) Is set to the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062) to start the operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example. In this second control example, the tilting operation status 223da, the tilting operation timer 223db, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc, the detection check counter 223dd, the tilting operation flag 223de, and the pressing notice are valid for the first control example described above. It differs from the timer 223df in that it is added.

The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, and is in the initial operation state.

The tilting operation status 223da is determined by the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161), according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da. .. Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is a state during the operation effect during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the return operation after the scenario operation.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation for detecting the origin. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the execution in this process is terminated when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", but the above-mentioned initial operation and return operation are performed. It is an error state when the origin cannot be detected, but if the error state occurs, there is no change in the tilting operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 478), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the special symbol change is started (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting motion is in the state of the operation effect during the variable motion of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479), 0 is set when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes) and the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation becomes a standby state, and when the origin detection of the detection sensor 324 is not performed (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation effect processing (Z2909: FIG. 480), when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2957: No). In Z2961: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in the standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 481), when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilting operation is in a standby state, and this processing. To finish.

When the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation. Will be.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2899: Yes) after the special symbol change starts (Z2981: No), 0 is set in the tilt operation status 223da (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in the standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (5). Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation timer 223db is set to an initial operating time (Z2061) when the power is turned on, and is repeatedly updated by adding one each time the main process (FIG. 473) is executed.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is "0", the operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the value of the tilting operation status is "2", the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin when the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc during the retry operation execution.

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 executes the retry operation performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is tilted when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination process is performed. conduct. First, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983), and when the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the fluctuation is to perform a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2896) after the setting (Z2985) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). , The detection variation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation of the tilting device 310 after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

When the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is executed, the tilting operation flag 223de is moved to the origin position by being pressed by the player during the operation valid period, and the rotating claw member. It is a flag indicating that it has been locked by 347. The tilt operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the operation valid period by the process of Z2956 of the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it will be set to on. On the other hand, after the tilt operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and the tilt operation status is set to off after the origin return operation is executed (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 is pressed as a switch for directing when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, is held by the rotary claw member 347 at the origin position). It is a timer for determining the valid period for validly discriminating the detection of the switch 324. This pressing notice valid timer 223df is based on the start timing of the valid period when the notice effect of using the tilting device 320 as a switch for the effect is determined as the advance effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Data corresponding to the specified validity period is stored. When the data corresponding to the valid period is set in the press warning valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 474), the cam removal operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 will be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal being executed, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the press advance notice valid timer 223df is decremented by 1 by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 474) and updated.

<Control processing by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 472 to 345. In the fifth control example, a start-up process (FIG. 472) and a part of the main process (FIG. 473) are added to the first control example, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 409) was changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 410) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475), and retry processing during touch input (Z2860). : FIG. 476), tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), operation effect setting process (FIG. 478), tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. The difference is that the process (Z2911: FIG. 481) and the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482) are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 472, the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 394) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example, after the Z2012 process or the Z2013 process is executed, the tilt initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 471 (d)) provided in the ROM 222 is displayed. Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (FIG. 473) described later is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation can be executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in a state of being moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the fact that the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on, so that the drive motor 342 Control can be performed stably.

With reference to FIG. 473, the main process (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the main process (FIG. 473) in the fifth control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161) with respect to the main process (FIG. 395) in the first control example. ) Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 474, regarding the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), first, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing (setting the pressing notice) of the special symbol for which the execution of the pressing notice is determined. (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing notice is decided. When it is determined that the pressing notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is in the valid period (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is being executed, and whether the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in progress (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether or not the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). When it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display pressing notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, when the pressing notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the processing of Z2884, when it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player (Z2884: No). , Other processing is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2890 processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, when it is determined that the press advance notice is not in the valid period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether the press advance notice is the start timing of the start timing of executing the press advance notice (Z2882: No) (Z2882: No). Z2886). The start timing of the pressing notice is determined by a start timer (not shown) is set at the start of the change of the special symbol and the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value "0").

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press advance notice valid timer 223df is set, and the cam removal operation is 2100 ms. The backflip operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 is not pushed up, so that the player can expect the ascending effect to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2886: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the press advance notice valid period timer 223df is 0. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the press advance notice valid period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is reset, and the 1500 ms backflip operation is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2888, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of the sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 475. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 477.

The sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 475. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in the fifth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed for the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410) in the first control example, and the retry is performed during touch input. The difference is that processing (Z2860) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 476, the retry process during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry process (Z2860) during touch input.

In the retry process during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 476), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), the detection sensor is determined to detect the origin (Z2863). If the detection sensor determines that the origin is not detected (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the backflip direction by one step (Z2864), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process is terminated.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 in the processing of Z2901 (Z2901: No), the processing of Z2902 is skipped and the processing of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed, so that the player can perform the origin return operation. To make it easier to return the tilting device 320 to the origin by performing a retry operation to return to the origin at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290). Can be done.

Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time effect start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. If it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 479. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilting initial operation table 222de is read out (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2931 when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the case of an abnormality at the time of returning to the origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, it is possible to detect the defect of the tilting device 320 at an early stage by displaying an error (abnormal processing) immediately unlike during the game. can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect in progress process (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 480, an operation effect in-process process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process (Z2909).

In the operation effect processing (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read out (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this process ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951 when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 (Z2957: Yes). Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2957, when it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-mentioned processes of Z2958 to Z2960 are executed, and this process is terminated. If the detection sensor is determined to be at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971 when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read out (Z2974), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set in the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), 4 is set in the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2912), this processing is terminated as it is.

A retry operation process (Z2913), which is a process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 482. FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). When it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection variation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2896). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is the origin position (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2899: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read out (Z2991), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position in the processing of Z2899 (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this processing is terminated.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately performs the unlocking operation. This causes a problem that the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be raised. As such a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 470 (a)), which is the unlocking operation. Is configured to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 168 and not to be fanned, so that the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324, or the tilting device 320 is placed on the upper surface of the tilting device 320. Place a touch sensor to determine if the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off. Then, it may be configured to execute the unlocking operation at the timing when it is turned off. Further, when the tilting device 320 is pressed or it is determined that the player is touching the tilting device 320, the player should take his / her hand off the tilting device 320 (remove the obstruction of the ascending operation by the player) by means of display notification, voice, or the like. It may be configured to notify the user.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 483 to 507. In the first control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of winning / failing is set to a low probability (the electric support is given up to 100 times) is executed after the jackpot game, it is displayed as an even-numbered doublet. It was notified that the jackpot A is a jackpot A, but in the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored in the reserved ball, the jackpot to be executed first is executed first. The stop symbol of A and the effect during the jackpot are shown as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect is as if the high probability game state (probability change game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Further, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which the probability variation game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion effects for notifying the above are set, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed thereafter depends on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is promotion). It differs from the first control example in that the type of effect is switched and set. The same points as in the first control example will be omitted in detail.

With reference to FIG. 483, an example of a stop display mode of the special symbol of the hit / fail determination result which is the jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 483 (a), the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third is This is an example showing the case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. In this case, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is changed, it is normally displayed as even-numbered doublets, but when the change starts, the odd-numbered doublets are stopped and displayed. It is displayed by switching to. That is, the same stop symbol as when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 483 (b), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, such as "Super jackpot !! Expect the next one !!", and the probability change game state is set. Notification as if it is a big hit is executed. As a result, in reality, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored even when the jackpot A is executed, so that the effect as if the jackpot B1 is executed is executed even when the jackpot A is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, and to improve the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 484 (a), an effect mode in which the change of the special symbol in the time-saving game state (game state with low probability electric support) after the big hit game in the example shown in FIG. 483 is executed will be described. FIG. 484 (a) shows the third state in which the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball to be the jackpot A is stored (reserved symbol h2). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 484 (a), the character "during super time" is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the game is in the probabilistic game state even though the game is in the time-saving game state. Is displayed, and the character "Big hit expectation is UP" is displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the hit / fail determination probability is not actually set high and the expectation is high is displayed. As a result, it is configured to suppress a defect that significantly impairs the trust of the player by giving the player a false notification different from the actual one. In this way, the notification that substantially approximates the probabilistic gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 484 (b) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 reserved in FIG. 484 (a). The reserved symbol h2 is a hit / fail determination result of the jackpot A, and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot (any of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball, so that it is a normal time. In the same manner as in the above, the stop display is made in the even-numbered doublet, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is executed is executed.

FIG. 485 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving game state set after the jackpot game of the jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 484 (b) is executed is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. As a display mode indicating the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 485 (a), the time saving until the character "chance (100 times)" is displayed and the change of the special symbol is changed 100 times and stopped. It is notified that the game is being set. In addition, each time the change of the special symbol ends once, the number (number of times) is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

FIG. 485 (b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. The characters "during super time (during probability change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that the probability change game state is set, and the player is notified that the game state is the probability change game state.

In this embodiment, only a part of the display mode is different between the case where the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball which is the big hit is stored and the case where the probabilistic gaming state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same characters (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. In addition, the game state is set to be notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the time-saving game state is set with the probabilistic game state and the reserved ball that becomes a big hit stored. , It may be configured to display in an approximate color (for example, a red background color (probability changing game state), a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state where a holding ball to be a big hit is stored)). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 487, the promotion effect performed during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 486 (a) is an example of a display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big hit !! Start !!" are displayed until the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the player is notified that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 486 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. Over-winning promotion production is a condition for ending one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65a in one round, but based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. Based on the fact that the game ball has further won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the period until the opening / closing door 65b is changed to the closed state, the promotion effect in which the information regarding the jackpot type is notified is executed.

In the over-win promotion production, the characters "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game ball is put in the specific winning opening 65a (corresponding to the attacker). There is a display suggesting that the symbol is displayed (given to the player). Furthermore, by displaying the characters "Treasure chest chance when 11 keys are accumulated !!", the promotion effect (over prize promotion effect) indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" is executed when 11 keys are accumulated. Is notified to the player. Since one key is configured to be displayed for each winning in the specific winning opening 65a, one over-winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "Treasure chest chance !!" will be executed. Here, when the treasure box is vacant and the treasure is displayed in the "treasure box chance !!", the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored. It is notified that it is a jackpot A (promoted) in the state of being. If the treasure is not displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot A, the effect of notifying that the player has been promoted is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored during the big hit game, the display mode (the effect that the treasure is displayed in the treasure box) for notifying the promotion is configured to be displayed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. In FIG. 487 (a), when the promotion effect is selected during the round, when the specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, the “promotion chance !! By displaying the comment "!!", the promotion effect during the round is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (notified) that the information regarding the jackpot game type is notified. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 487 (b), the jackpot in a state where the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored is stored. If it is A, the display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right direction to the left direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high probability game state of "probability change GET !!" is set after the big hit game. Will be done. In addition, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored, the character "probability change GET !!" is displayed as a notification as if the player is set in the probability change game state. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 487 (a) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the 16th round of jackpot rounds is completed (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have elapsed) are satisfied)). This is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

On the other hand, FIG. 488 (b) is an example of a display mode in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game ends (the 16th round of jackpot rounds ends (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have passed))). Later, during the period when the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY !! Super chance time !!" are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the left to the right. A special display mode (a different production mode from the normal time) in which a school of fish (fish school) swims is displayed, and a time-saving game state is stored in a probabilistic game state after a big hit game or a reserved ball that becomes a big hit described above. A display mode suggesting that is set is displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 489 to 490.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (a). The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (b). FIG. 489 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to notify that the player has been promoted as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a during the round. It is a lottery table for. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm indicating that the execution of jackpot A is suggested to the player as if jackpot B2 was executed is on. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", the promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) is executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 490. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, the hit changing flag 223 dh, the stop symbol replacement flag 223 dh, the big prize counter 223 di, the promoted flag 223 dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223 dt, and the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm are set with respect to the first control example. It differs in that it has been added. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first control example will be omitted.

The hit-changing flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored. If the change display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit by the winning command is newly stored when the hit fluctuation flag 223 deg is on, the odd-numbered symbols are doublet. The process of switching to a symbol is executed. As a result, even if the special symbol is changed to be the jackpot A, the player can be made to think that it is the jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins the replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd number of doublet symbols. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, it is switched and set to the odd-numbered doublet at the start of the change of the special symbol.

The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big hit game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that the promoted effect (the effect of displaying the treasure from the treasure box) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

The promotion effect type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which when a jackpot game is executed, the type of promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined type data of the promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo-probability flag 223 dm stops the stop symbol of the special symbol in odd-numbered doublets when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored. It is a flag indicating that the lottery has been lost in the replacement lottery that is controlled to be displayed. The promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or the effect as if the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation game state (see FIG. 484 (a)) is executed.

<Control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 491, the control process by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 393) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491). Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 491. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 393) in the first control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entering (Z1120: Yes), a ball entering command is set (Z1121), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z1120 that there is no ball entering (Z1120: No), this processing is terminated as it is. By this entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the round, and can also determine the over winning.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 491 to 503. In the sixth control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396) is the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 397) is the variation pattern reception for the first control example. Process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 403), winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495), variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) : FIG. 502), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 409) was changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503), and the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494). Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 496), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 496), opening processing (Z2282: Fig. 497), big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: Fig. 499), round processing (Z2286: Fig. 500), the difference is that the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 492. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example adds the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 to the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example, and changes the processes of Z2240 and Z2270. Is different.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 492, the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), which is one of the commands in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that the processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the gaming state is configured to be attached to a variation pattern command and issued from the main control device 110. As the gaming state, a low-probability electric support-less gaming state (normal gaming state), a probabilistic variable gaming state (with electric support), and a time-saving gaming state (low-probability electric support-based gaming state) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding gaming state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, the display status command is set (Z2431), and the Z2227 process is executed. .. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 described above is not executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2227 as it is.

With reference to FIG. 494, regarding the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), which is one of the processes in the variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the jackpot A does not fluctuate (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, when it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing is terminated. ..

In this way, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started, the lottery (discrimination) for replacing the stopped symbol is executed, and if it is replaced, the lottery (determination) is executed. If it is determined), the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that the symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the player loses the lottery, whether the game is stopped and displayed evenly, the jackpot game is started, the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or the game is in a probable change game state after the jackpot game. Special notification such as is given.

The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 495. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example differs from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 403) in the first control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 496, a stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 494) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 496), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-changing flag 223 deg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223dg is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2461: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a big hit (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received prize information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2464, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the processing of Z2465 is not executed and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A starts to fluctuate, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is newly added during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). If it is stored in, the stop symbol is replaced (replacement to odd-numbered doublets) if the special symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period. In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without a sense of discomfort.

Even when the high-speed fluctuation period has expired, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

With reference to FIG. 497, a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. ) Will be explained. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 497.

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, an opening process (Z2282: FIG. 1), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 498) will be described. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 498), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the Z2293 process is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to the Z2295 process.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to the big hit (Z2297), the display state command is set (Z2300), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: No), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2298), and the game state is set to the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm. It is set during the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-mentioned Z2300 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the large winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 499, the big prize winning ball processing (Z2280: FIG. 497), which is one of the big hit related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize winning process (Z2284).

In the big prize winning process (Z2284: FIG. 499), first, the value of the big prize counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is added by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion production type is an over prize (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2312: No), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314). When it is determined that the value of the large prize counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di corresponding to the over prize production is set (Z2315). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the promotion lottery table 222df is acquired based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm or the big hit type. Further promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect has been won is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large prize command for display indicating a deviation between the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2283, if it is determined that the ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), the round process (Z2286) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 500, the round process (Z2286), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 500), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is an over prize (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is the ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. The value corresponding to (Z2335) is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or when it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332). : Yes), or if it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated. ..

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: Yes), the ending process (Z2288) is executed and the present process is terminated. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 501. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2289), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 501, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) which is one of the processes in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the Z2372 process that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the above-mentioned Z2376 process is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the processing of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion effect is notified during the jackpot game, and if it is not executed, the ending promotion effect or the promotion effect during the round is executed. The process of switching to is executed.

As a result, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the frequency of entering the specific winning opening 65a is low.

The variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed for the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406) in the first control example, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and the display stop type command is set (Z2513). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), the stop type in which the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the above-mentioned Z2513 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 503, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 for the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 409) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, Z2840 processing is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, another SW process is executed (Z2840), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z2830 process that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 processes are executed, and the sensor input process (Z2813) and other SW processes (Z2840) are executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 507. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414) in the first control example in that the processes of Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 505 (a). FIG. 505 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is replaced with the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3430, when it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 505 (b). FIG. 505 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that there is no display status command in the processing of Z3432 (Z3432: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434: Yes), the jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, the jackpot-related display process (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not the display opening command has been received (Z3461). When it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the grand prize process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the grand prize processing (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 506.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3463, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). When it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (Z3465: Yes), the display data table of the round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3467, when it is determined that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z3471), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 507, a big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 507), which is one of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506), will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize processing (Z3464).

In the big prize processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506), it is determined whether or not the received display big prize command has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the number of winnings indicated by the received command and the display data table corresponding to the winning effect are set (Z3481), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), the display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and the over-winning corresponding to the out-of-order effect is set (Z3483), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: Yes), the over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of winning commands indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10. Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of winnings is larger than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3486, when it is determined that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this processing is terminated as it is.

<7th control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 508 to 516. In the first control example, the winning opening that triggers the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol, and the lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be more favorable to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning slot that triggers (variation) and the distribution device 700 that alternately wins balls, the electric accessory 640a is used when the second special symbol normal symbol is won or missed as a result of winning for a long time. It was opened for a long period of time (2 seconds) so that the ball could easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Then, when the player wins a normal symbol for a long time, the player is made to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 by displaying the effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to play the game enthusiastically (see FIG. 344).

Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be controlled so that the ball is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, and the normal state is in progress. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 428 (b)) is executed to provide a special feeling to the player. Further, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed even when the normal state is set as the game state for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends. Was configured in. As a result, it is executed when a predetermined number (up to 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol held during the time saving state left) and the time saving state is completed. It is configured so that the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the second special symbol change to be performed. As a result, the special feeling of the special production can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the 7th control example, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is won for a long time, the game is played by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It differs from the first control example in that it is configured to execute an effect (long-time open effect) that suggests that a person has won a prize for a long time in a lottery of ordinary symbols.

Further, as a result of the lottery of ordinary symbols, it is different from the first control example in that it is configured so that the effect mode of the long-time open effect is different depending on the timing of winning for a long time. The details of the same points as those of the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 508. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 508, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left side region (left side region) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position where the ball is to be fired when the game (left-handed game) is performed. When the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when performing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80, "turtle" is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guideline for the position where the ball is fired. The character imitating the above is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin). Is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball is aimed at to execute the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Further, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the player is directed to the game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually and easily grasp.

Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region (electric accessory) in which the second winning opening 640 can be won when a left-handed game is performed with respect to the first control example described above. When the 640a is in the opening operation, the regulation nail ZK1 is planted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) is low. On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed, the nails are planted so that the ratio of the ball passing through the opening 710 of the distribution device 700 is low. With this configuration, aiming at the distribution device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640, the first 2 It is possible to provide a player with a right-handed game (second game) in which only a special symbol is changed (lottery).

As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so that the player inevitably plays the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is further performed. Even if it is not possible to acquire the hold of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is also possible to perform a left-handed game and a game of acquiring the reserved ball of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509 (a), in the seventh control example, an effect mode displayed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol when the normal symbol is won for a long time will be described. FIG. 509 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Open soon" as an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. Characters are displayed, and the opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and the guidance display mode Za1 imitating the "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed to the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player, so that it is possible to easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be performed.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is configured to be displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, the currently executed symbol is being executed. Based on the discriminating means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit, etc.) and the discriminating result of the discriminating means, the long opening effect and the third symbol A priority display discriminating means for discriminating which of the variable effects is preferentially displayed, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discriminating result of the priority display discriminating means. It may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to display of an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the above-mentioned example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (priority effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to that, for example, a plurality of different areas of the reduced display area are prepared, and the non-priority effect is determined according to the game result indicated by the effect. It may be configured to change the size of the area for displaying the effect. Further, the effect display on the side determined to be the non-priority effect may be configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, a configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is changed based on the lottery result of the changing special symbol and the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol. In addition to that, for example, a holding ball number determining means for determining whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the determination result of the holding ball number determining means. The display area of the long open effect may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509 (b), an effect mode during a long-time hit game (during long opening) of a normal symbol will be described. FIG. 509 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509 (b), the character "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening target imitates the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation. Aspect Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 509 (a), the guide display mode Za1 imitating the “turtle” indicating the game direction instructed to the player is displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 510 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the long opening effect is restricted among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long opening effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 509 (a), and the normal state (the second). 2 In a state where it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning opening 640 (when winning a long time hit of a normal symbol), a state advantageous to the player (first). It is configured to reliably notify the player of the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery that is more favorable to the player than the special symbol.

In this configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4), the normal symbol Even if the player wins for a long time, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed. In this way, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time and a plurality of balls are won in the second entrance 640, a new reserved ball is acquired. There was a problem that it was not possible to provide the player with a special feeling of long open production.

Therefore, in the 7th control example, even if the predetermined period (the period until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times) after the time saving state ends is won for a long time of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned is described. It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect under the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the long opening effect has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 510, in the state where the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 509 (a) is not executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is generated in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, as the game direction instructed to the player, the guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed. In this way, even if a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the timing is a predetermined period (the special symbol changes 5 times after the time reduction state ends). If it is within the period until it is executed), by preventing the long opening effect from being executed, it is possible to surely suppress the provision of a meaningless long opening effect to the player. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be a period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the game contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long open effect may be regulated.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th control example>
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 511. The seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the long open effect flag 223e1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the 7th control example are the same, the various control processes related to the ball ejection of the pachinko machine 10 in the 7th control example are described in the first control example described above. Is the same as. On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the voice lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as those of the second control example except for the above-mentioned points. Therefore, the same parts as those of the first control example are designated with the same reference numerals for various control processes related to ball ejection, and the description thereof is omitted, and the same parts as the second control example are the same for various control processes related to the effect. The description thereof will be omitted by adding a reference numeral.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj is described in the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but a predetermined value (5) is set when the time saving state ends, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long release effect flag 223e1 is when a long-time hit release command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received and when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 514). , On (see Z2907 in FIG. 514) and off when a long-time hit end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 514).

<Control processing by the main control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 387) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 512). Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 512, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example differs from the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 387) in the first control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. .. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 512, when the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processing of Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example is executed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing in the processing of Z402. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, this long-time open flag 203i is set when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408: FIG. 388) that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: Yes). , A flag set to on (Z428).

In the processing of Z451, if it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z4511: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the long-time open end command is set. (Z452), shift to the processing of Z404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) in the processing of Z451 (Z4511: No), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404 processing. Then, the same processes of Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the winning normal symbol is started to the end of the long-time hit.

In the processing of Z402, if it is determined that the current symbol is currently changing (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then the processing for a long time is performed. Set the middle command (Z453) and end this process. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 392) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the long-time hit command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is long-time hit (long open), and transmits the display command to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509 (b)).

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example>
With reference to FIGS. 513 and 514, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 513) with respect to the second control example, and the long open effect process (Z2272) is performed. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). The command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) in the second control example in that the processes of Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above are executed. When it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether the related command has been received for a long time (Z2271), and it is determined that the command has been received. (Z2208: Yes) executes a long opening effect process described later (Z2272), and ends this process. In this long opening effect processing (Z2272), a process for setting a display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, when it is determined that the related command is not received for a long time (Z2271: No), it is referred to as Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above. The same processes of Z2273 to Z2277 are executed, and this process is terminated. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command (winning in the lottery of the normal symbol for a long time). When the command) shown) is received, it is configured so that an effect for notifying the player to that effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long open effect process (Z2272) executes a process for setting the effect mode of the long open effect when the normal symbol is won for a long time, and is the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Alternatively, the effect mode is set according to the operating state (during fluctuation, during the winning game) of the normal symbol (within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state).

When the long open effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time hit-related command received this time is the long-time hit open command (Z2901). This long-time hit release command is a command set when the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) of the main control device 110 is won for a long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is open for a long time (Z2901: Yes), then the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (Z2903: Yes), the target for executing the long open effect. Since it is not a period, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2904). Since the detailed explanation is given in the second control example described above, the explanation will be briefly described. However, this fluctuation number counter 223aj has a predetermined number (5) when the final fluctuation in which the time reduction state is set is stopped and displayed. ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process is executed. The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a counter referred to for determining.

In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2904: No), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed at least 5 times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the state is set, a long open effect command for display is set because it is a period during which the long open effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the game state (Z2906). , The long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main process (see FIG. 395) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509 (a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed five times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, since it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed long effect command for display is set (Z2905). End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main process (see FIG. 395) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long open effect is being restricted on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 510).

In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit-related command received this time is not a long-time hit open command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether the long-time hit medium command is received (Z2908). .. This long-time hit command is set after setting the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 512) of the main control device 110, and is set during the long-time hit game. This is a command that indicates that there is.

In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command has been received for a long time (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is set. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a long release command for display is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2909, if it is determined that the long open effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (set to off) (Z2909: No), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and the present processing is terminated. ..

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, as in the first control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation start processing is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning. It is configured to determine the operation mode (whether or not it is a long open), and is configured to set a long-time hit open command at that timing. Then, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set, and then the electric motor is used. It is configured to start the operation control of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit medium command. When the value of 223aj is larger than 0, the long-time hit open command is set, and then there is a possibility that the long-time hit middle command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0.

In the seventh control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in such a state, the processing when the long opening command is received is long. When the open effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the long open command for display is not set even if the command is received for a long time. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 510) suddenly becomes the effect of the display mode based on the long open command for display (FIG. 509 (b)). It is possible to prevent the player from switching to (see) and giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 514. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during long-time hit has not been received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether or not the long-time hit end command has been received (Z2911), and the long-time hit end command has been received. (Z2911: Yes), the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to off (Z1912), the long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) is changed to the command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515) will be described with reference to FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) in the sixth control example in that the processes of Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: No), the processing of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined that there is no display long release related command in the processing of Z3441 (Z3441: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), the long open related process (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (FIG. 516, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received long opening effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The time counter is set to 233h (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the 7th control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the game state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time. If you win, it is configured to execute a long open effect during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a is open to the player for a long time, and the game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 can be reliably performed.

Further, in the seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired in the normal state, and the predetermined period after the end of the time reduction is completed. If it is inside, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-mentioned long opening effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege (the privilege of easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be a period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the game contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long open effect may be regulated.

Specifically, for example, in the Z2903 process of the long open effect process (see FIG. 514), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set is provided and continuous. If it is determined that the effect during effect flag 223ac is set to ON, it may be configured to end this process as it is so as not to execute the long open effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without breaking the priority with the effect to be executed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning device 640 win a ball, and when the long opening effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 is performed. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so that the left-handed game is performed in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning opening 64 and the right second winning opening 640 are aimed at by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aimed at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

In this seventh control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of flowing the ball to the distribution device 700 and the second winning opening 640 is different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. However, it is not limited to this, for example, by firing a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a strong left-handed game is performed. Therefore, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly different by slightly changing the operation of the launching device, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, although the seventh control example describes the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, the control of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above is described. Not limited to the content, it may be used for the control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, a type of gaming machine that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. good.

At the end of the game state with electric support (low probability electric support game state (time saving game state) or high probability electric support (probability variation game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are present. On condition that it is memorized for the second special symbol, the effect of hitting the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed), or the effect of urging the game ball to enter the first entry port 64. It may be configured to switch to and execute. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, it is possible to configure the normal symbol to perform a long-time effect, and the player can perform the second special symbol. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the chance of winning a prize in a special symbol.

Further, in this control example, when the game is switched to the normal gaming state, the normal symbol is not produced for a long time or is different from the normal time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). Is configured to switch to a different effect, but not limited to that, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) regardless of the game state, the normal symbol is for a long time. It may be configured not to produce a hit effect or to switch to an effect different from the normal effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player perform an advantageous game according to the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not producing the effect of the normal symbol for a long time or switching to the effect different from the normal time, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example). , The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) may be set. Further, the time information from the RTC may be acquired and set as a condition for switching if the store is about to close at a specific time (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set in combination with the conditions given in this control example.

<8th control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 557. In the eighth control example, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see FIG. 376) and the operation of the frame button 22a are based on the first control example described above. The control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the background mode is changed, and the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (upper limit of 8). The difference is that a detailed explanation is added about the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 517, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example has a plurality of operating means (frame button 22a, left button 22b, right) as operating means that can be operated by the player. Since the button 22c) is provided, the configuration shown as the frame button 22 in the first control example described above is referred to as the frame button 22a, but since the meaning is the same, the frame in the present control example. The detailed description of the button 22a will be omitted. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the various technical ideas described by using the frame button 22 are also applied to the frame button 22a of this control example.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 starts up (see FIG. 391), the voice lamp control device 113 starts up (see FIG. 394), and so on. Is executed and each startup process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 376, a dedicated display screen (power-on screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying, the voice output device 226 is used to perform a notification (notification during the power-on period) to indicate that the power is currently being turned on (each startup process based on the power-on is being executed). It was composed.

In the first control example configured in this way, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbol and then turned on (turned on), the main control device 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol fluctuation is restarted from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but it is output from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 226. Since it is configured to emphasize to the player that the notification sound is being turned on, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is executed before the power is turned off. There was a problem that it made me think that the special symbol fluctuation that had been used was erased.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, when the power is turned off. When the executed special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is restarted after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol fluctuation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating during the power-on period is output. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know that the special map fluctuation that was executed when the power was turned off has been restarted. Further, rather than creating the data of the display image (variable image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processed is smaller, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing immediately after the power is turned on. The details of the audio output control at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

Further, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22a even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing for changing the background mode is changed according to the fluctuation speed of the special symbol (third symbol) at the time when the player operates the frame button 22a to change the background mode. .. More specifically, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display period of the special symbol It is configured so that the fluctuation display speed can be changed, and if the frame button 22a is operated during high-speed fluctuation where the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is fast, the background mode is immediately changed and the fluctuation of the third symbol is changed. If the frame button 22a is operated during a low-speed fluctuation whose speed is slower than the high-speed fluctuation, the background mode is set after the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed (after the special symbol stop display or at the start of the next special symbol fluctuation). It is configured to change.

Generally, the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured to fluctuate at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of fluctuation, and then fluctuate at low speed (second half period). It is configured to execute a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by using the period in which the three symbols are variablely displayed at a low speed. Therefore, by configuring the background mode so that it does not change even if the frame button 22a is operated during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as in the eighth control example, a dedicated effect corresponding to the currently set background mode is produced. While the (suggestion effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol) is being executed, the background mode is changed, and the player cannot see the effect content (effect result) of the suggestion effect. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since it has a fluctuation notification means for notifying the player whether the fluctuation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed fluctuation or a low-speed fluctuation, in order to shift the background mode at this stage. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner at what timing the background mode is switched when the operation of is performed. In this control example, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to be able to be notified to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, whether or not the present is a period in which the background mode can be immediately shifted is determined. It may be configured to notify the player.

Further, the variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is high-speed variation or low-speed variation is during the execution period of the effect (operation effect) using the operation means. It is also configured to execute a notification for the player to know whether or not there is a game. As a result, when the operation valid period, which is the period during which the operation means can be operated, is set, whether the operation valid period is the operation valid period set by executing the operation effect, the background mode is changed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the operation is valid for the operation to be performed. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an unintended display mode.

In the eighth control example, the above-mentioned fluctuation notification means is provided in the operating means (frame button 22a) operated when the player shifts the background mode (provided in the vicinity of the operating means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22a to shift to the background mode, the notification mode of the fluctuation notification means can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number (for example, eight which is the upper limit number), it corresponds to the winning information (reserved symbol) of the specific number stored in the reserve. It is configured to execute a specific period effect (8 hold effect) using the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a period effect that uses a longer period than the effect that is executed corresponding to one special symbol variation display period, so that various effects can be executed. It becomes possible and the effect of production can be enhanced. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to a specific number, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the effect is executed for a specific period.

Here, in the case of being configured to execute the period effect within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored on hold) as in the eighth control example. , As described with reference to FIG. 346 (b) in the first control example described above, the third symbol display is used to notify the player of the number of reserved balls (upper limit number: 8) of the current special symbol. The first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 are formed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the device 81, and the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 is sequentially formed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. If the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol (see FIG. 347 (a)) is used, the reserved symbol corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the period effect execution is displayed in the small area Ds2, so which reserved symbol is used. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the period is the target of the period production, and the player is provided with the production that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the period effect is not executed, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above, and the period When the effect is executed, only the number of reserved balls that are the target of the period effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 as the effect hold symbol. With this configuration, even if new prize information is acquired during the period effect, the effect hold symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 does not increase, so the reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect is given to the player. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed contents of the period effect in the eighth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528.

Further, a display area (light emitting area) different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used so that the player can be notified of the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the current number of reserved balls even while the period effect is being executed.

In addition, the eighth control example is configured so that when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22a, the operated (pressed) frame button 22a vibrates. It is configured so that the amount of vibration can be changed. By configuring the frame button 22a to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22a, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22a, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done. Further, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22a is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that can provide a player with an unexpected effect by vibrating the frame button 22a when the player presses the frame button 22a. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22a is pressed until the player presses the frame button 22a, and the game There is a problem that the frame button 22a cannot be positively operated (pressed) by a person.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, whether or not vibration is applied to the player when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed) before the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), and vibration. It is configured to be able to suggest the vibration level when doing so. With this configuration, the frame button 22a can be operated in a state in which the player is made to predict the vibration mode when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), so that the player can be positively operated. Can be operated (pressed) by the frame button 22a.

Further, since the vibration level of the frame button 22a is variably configured, even if a predetermined level of vibration is applied when the player presses the frame button 22a, the frame button 22a is subsequently operated (pressed). By doing so, it becomes possible to vibrate the frame button 22a at a vibration level equal to or higher than a predetermined level. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22a a plurality of times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the eighth control example, similarly to the first control example described above, a plurality of background modes can be displayed, and when a predetermined transition condition (for example, pressing the frame button 22a) is satisfied. , The background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable. Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (the operation of holding his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is notified.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that changes the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, pressing the frame button 22a). In this case, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the background mode is variable, but the background mode set by the variable background displayed on the display screen (background mode after transition). ) Has a problem that it is difficult to inform the player of which background mode is in an easy-to-understand manner.

In order to solve this problem, for example, a technique of configuring the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to always display the background mode currently set can be considered. In this case, the third symbol display device Since a part of the limited area of the display screen is used only for notifying the background mode, the area used for various effects performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. There was a problem that the effect of the production was reduced. In addition, the background mode is being executed while a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit) is being executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Was displayed, and there was a problem that the effect was reduced.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be notified only for an arbitrary period desired by the player by operating the operating means (touch sensor 2900). 3 It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of various effects executed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is reduced. Further, in the eighth control example, since the current background mode is notified by using a display means (light emitting means) different from that of the third symbol display device 81, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The limited area of the screen can be effectively used for various productions.

Further, in the eighth control example, an effect (operation effect) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be executable, and the touch sensor 2900 plays a role as an operation means for notifying the background mode and an operation. It is configured to play both a role as an operation means for executing the production (participating in the operation production). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is changed according to the situation. Then, for example, even while the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the operation can be performed by executing a special operation (operate the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c). It is configured so that the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the effect. Therefore, even if the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for a plurality of purposes, the player can operate the operation means in an operation mode suitable for the purpose desired by the player.

<About the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 517. FIG. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 517, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example is the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 138). ), The difference is that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above is provided with a frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is shown in FIG. 517. As shown above, a frame button 22a, a left button 22b, and a right button 22c are provided as operating means. The frame button 22a is an operation means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is an operation means used for making it variable or when shifting to a background mode. Since the specific content of the frame button 22a is the same as that of the frame button 22 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the frame button 22a is also configured so that its mode can be changed by driving the tilting device 310 in the same manner as the frame button 22 of the first control example described above, but it is the same as the frame button 22 described above. Since it is a content, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

The left button 22b and the right button 22c are operating means provided on the left side of the frame button 22a, and are mainly used as adjusting means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In the eighth control example, the left button 22b and the right button are displayed during the period in which the third symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is changing at high speed. By operating 22c, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted. Since the detailed contents regarding the volume adjustment are the same as those of the above-mentioned fourth control example (see FIG. 313), the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this control example, by operating the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the operation for the other operating means (touch sensor 2900) can be partially invalidated. It is configured as follows. In this way, among the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation is performed only when a specific condition is satisfied (a state in which the third symbol does not change or a state in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed). By configuring the operation means for executing the control (volume control) based on the above to be used for another purpose when the operation means is operated in a state where a specific condition is not satisfied, one operation means can be used for a plurality of uses. Since it can be used, the number of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 518 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 518, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is held at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the LED 900 is provided, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and the touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device. , Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of a special symbol, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a hold ball number command indicating that the number of hold balls of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 increases, or a decrease. Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the indicated number of reserved balls command, the lighting is controlled according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol after the increase and the decrease.

By providing an area for notifying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this way, the reserved symbol display displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 519). (Refer to (b)) can be reliably notified of the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol even if it is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed description will be omitted, this holding LED 900 uses a full-color LED and is configured to be capable of exhibiting light emission modes of at least three colors, and is a holding ball of FIG. And the holding ball of the special figure 2 are controlled to be lit so as to be distinguishable. As a result, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed based on the result of the pre-determination (look-ahead) executed for the winning information stored on hold, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, an LED is displayed at the corresponding position of the hold LED 900. Is controlled to emit light in a color different from the normal time. Further, the display mode (light emitting mode) of the hold LED 900 is configured to be less conspicuous than the hold symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In the eighth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a position below the third symbol display device 81, which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player, and may be provided, for example, in the lower right area of the game board 13. Further, in the eighth control example, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is configured to be stored up to eight, the holding LED 900 has the same eight LEDs as the upper limit of the holding storage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and four LEDs may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Further, in the eighth control example, the holding LED 900 is always controlled to display the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but other than that, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the displayed reserved symbol is deleted or used for another effect, that is, the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbol only by the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When becomes, the lighting control for the holding LED 900 may be executed.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as a notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variation effect (variation effect of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special figure lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (for example, a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The player can select one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (for example, a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to be capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode capable of notifying the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third symbol using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is grasped. Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in the first half stage of the special figure change (the third symbol is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a light emitting mode for notifying the current background mode. , In the latter half stage of the special figure change (the period from the end of the high-speed change of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are not in the current background mode, but in a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result. It is configured to emit light. Then, even in the latter half of the special figure variation, when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means (frame button 22), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a notification mode for notifying the current background mode. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special figure lottery result), which is useful information for the player. Can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detecting means (operating means) having a predetermined detection range, and indicates that the player's hand has invaded (arranged) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period. When it is detected, it is determined that the operation by the player has been performed. Although the player cannot directly see the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. By displaying the display, the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (easily put his / her hand within the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be capable of discriminating the movement (direction) of a hand that has entered (arranged) within the detection range, and is, for example, a hand. By moving from right to left or from bottom to top, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the hand is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation operation of the player's operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can play the game while being interested in it.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 519. 519 (a) and 519 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example is variablely displayed by the third symbol (in synchronization with the special symbol) with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above. The scroll direction of the decorative symbol is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 346 (a)). ) To 5 (see FIG. 519 (a)) and the difference in the notification mode of the information related to the game. Further, there are some elements that are the same as (similar to) the first control example but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 519 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence Z3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 519 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. If each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped together with the combination of jackpot symbols on the effective line (in this control example, the combination of the same main symbols), the third symbol is stopped. The jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 519 (a), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 519 (b). As shown in FIG. 519 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 519 (b)) to show the situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (Fig. 5). (Refer to the small display area Dm2 of 519 (b)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. The lottery result of the special symbol is shown by indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed by using the display mode indicating It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 519 (b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the area Dm on the upper left side and the upper right side is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined by the effect of the variation effect executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the embodiment.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the first control example, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), the sub-display area Ds Is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in this eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and the executing area Ds1a is contained in the small area Ds1. And the waiting area Ds1b are formed. Since the display content of the executing area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and normally, the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed as in the first control example described above. are doing. On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), the eight reserved symbols stored on hold are stored. It is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using the above (see FIG. 526). While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed (the reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect). It is configured so that a reserved symbol for effect indicating only is displayed.

With this configuration, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period effect, the new reserved symbol will not be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player can be informed of how long the period effect will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 519, a display mode showing the following display contents is also displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area, a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a guide for guiding the player to perform a left-handed game. The display mode of "left-handed" is configured to display, and the display mode of "right-handed" is in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Further, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is configured to be displayed.

<Regarding the production content in the 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 520 to 529, characteristic production contents among the various effects executed in the eighth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 520 and 521, the contents of the effect when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 520 is a timing chart showing the flow of the sound effect when the power is turned off (power cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuation pattern A and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, when a power failure occurs during a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) and then the power is turned on, while the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are started up. (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 521 (a)). When the special symbol change is executed during the return processing period, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the BGM during the special symbol change. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure change is being executed during the return processing period.

To explain in detail, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if the power is cut off. It is configured to execute a power failure process for storing the previous game information (variation pattern for production, BGM information, background mode, remaining fluctuation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off. It is configured to store game information in the storage area only when a power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part (“B” in FIG. 520) that was output when the power failure occurred is stored, and the BGM part (“B”) that was output when the power failure occurred during the recovery processing period after the power was turned on. ) Is configured to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 520, the progress of the BGM that was output at the time of the power failure is memorized, and the flow of playing the BGM from the place where the power is cut off is shown. It may be configured to play from the start position of the BGM part that was output at the time of disconnection. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the storage process in the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Further, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 is completed (initial setting is completed) is the game information (selected variation pattern) related to the special figure variation executed before the power failure. , Residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the startup process is completed (when the command indicating the completion of the initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 521 (a)) to the normal screen. It is possible to shift the display mode to (see FIG. 521 (b)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special map fluctuation that had been executed before the power failure has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 521, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 521 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 521 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial setting is completed. Since the content shown in FIG. 521 (a) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. 376 (b) of the above-mentioned control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the eighth control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the special figure fluctuation is executed while the screen during the initial setting is displayed, the BGM (variable voice) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power interruption (see FIG. 520). ).

Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 520 (b), a variation pattern dedicated to return based on the remaining period of the special map variation during execution is executed. In this control example, the first determination for determining whether the remaining fluctuation time at the completion of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the second determination for determining whether the time is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. It is configured to execute the third determination for determining whether or not.

Here, if it is determined by the first determination that it is less than 2 seconds, the initial variation time is not set until the remaining variation time elapses (until the execution of the special figure variation is completed) without setting the variation pattern dedicated to the return. The setting screen (see FIG. 521 (a)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a short-time variable display that is difficult to identify.

When the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the reach state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol on the effective line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner. The return-only reach effect is executed, in which the variable display is executed from the state). This return-only reach effect is an effect using fluctuation data of a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of the largest hit is set to be the smallest among the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern in the reach state among the normal fluctuation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. With this configuration, when the special figure fluctuation during execution when the power is turned on is a big hit, it is possible to notify the jackpot winning with a fluctuation pattern that is normally difficult to encounter, thus providing added value to the player. be able to. Further, among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized by using the image data that is rarely actually used (the image data showing the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit in the normal reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 522 to 523, the contents of the operation for changing the background mode during the change of the special figure will be described. FIG. 522 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during the change of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 522, in the eighth control example, in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is configured to be variable. Specifically, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, low speed". As a result, the player can be made to play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol stops. In the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is out of order. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (background can be changed) by the player operating the frame button 22a during the variable display of the special symbol. The timing of changing the background is different depending on the timing at which the person operates the frame button 22a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 522, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high, the background is changed. The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 522 (a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, if the background change operation is performed, the background is changed immediately after that. Is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 523 (b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 522 (b), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special map is not high-speed fluctuation (medium-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special map is concerned. The background change is not performed until the end of, and the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 523 (a), the "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the mode is displayed. In the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the display area Dm1a, the characters "background change at the next change" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the background change operation has been performed during the special figure change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), so that the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the timing of performing the background change is different depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) for the background change operation during the special figure change. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, while suppressing the background change during the execution of the production (for example, the reach production) in which the lottery result of this special symbol is likely to be a hit, this time. During the period (high-speed fluctuation period) where it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol, the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various effects (background). be able to.

In the background change flow described with reference to FIG. 522, the next special map change is started when the background change operation is executed other than during the special map change during the high-speed change of the special map. An example of executing the background change at the timing is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop display is performed in a stop display mode (combination of three third symbols) for the third symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. It may be configured to execute the background change at the timing (the timing when the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background is at least until after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured so as to prevent the effect suggesting the result of the special figure lottery from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. It may be configured to delay the execution of the background change until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special map is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special map switches to low speed fluctuation. ..

In addition, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the timing at which the background change is executed is switched based on the result of this special figure lottery. For example, when the special map fluctuation during the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the predetermined timing during the fluctuation period (for example, the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation) is higher than the case where the special chart fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. It is good to configure it so that it is easy to execute the background change. Further, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, the timing for executing the background change may be switched based on the result of the special figure lottery this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and at the same time, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation. ..

In FIG. 522, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, but the variation speed is not limited to this. For example, the effect display process executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure change is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and the effect display process at the time of the background change operation is divided. It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "variation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". It is divided into "notification period", for example, "variation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the fluctuation state "high-speed fluctuation" of the special figure of this 8th control example, and "reach production period" and "development production period". , "Effect result notification period" may be configured to correspond to the fluctuation states "medium speed fluctuation", "low speed fluctuation", and "stop" in the special figure of the eighth control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is changed according to the progress of the effect display instead of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure), the control example and the present control example are used. A similar effect can be achieved.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background change is executed after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure change (the next special figure change of the special figure change that executed the background change operation), and the next and subsequent special figure changes. Based on the lottery result (preliminary determination (pre-reading) result for the winning information stored on hold), the presence / absence of execution of the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be changed. ..

With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. Then, by enthusiastically executing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, the contents of the variable effect (touch effect) for varying the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation speed of the third symbol and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in FIG. 524, in this control example, the third symbol is configured to be variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while varying its fluctuation speed in accordance with the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation. are doing. Then, the touch effect (see FIG. 525 (a)) is configured to be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol.

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the period during which this touch effect is being executed (during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol), the player moves his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900 for a predetermined time. (When intruded), a fluctuation effect (reach effect) in which the third symbol changes at a low speed is executed (see FIG. 525 (b)).

That is, in this control example, the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect so that the fluctuation speed of the third symbol can be forcibly switched to the low speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation, the frame is set so as to be the background mode desired by the player. By operating the button 22a and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the touch effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the touch effect is executed (timing of FIG. 524 (a)), and FIG. 525 (b) is a touch sensor in the touch effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after operating 2900 (the timing of FIG. 524 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 525 (a), in the state where the touch effect is executed, the third symbol is variablely displayed at a high speed on the display screen of the third symbol display device (in the figure, it is represented by an arrow in the left direction). ), In the small area Dm3 on the left side of the fluctuation display area during the high-speed fluctuation (about 1/3 on the left side of the main display area Dm), the touch effect is being executed so as to cover the fluctuation display of the third symbol. The indicated touch display is executed. Specifically, a touch location guidance display mode Dm31 for guiding the location where the player holds his hand and a period display mode Dm32 for indicating the effect period (operation valid period) of the touch effect are displayed. , A "touch" comment urging the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 525, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, each third symbol fluctuates at a speed that is difficult for the player to see, so that a part of the variation display area is covered. Even if the touch display is executed, the effect that is difficult for the player to understand (the effect that the third symbol in the variable display cannot be grasped) is not executed.

Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the effect period of the touch effect indicated by the period display mode Dm32, the touch effect ends as shown in FIG. 525 (b), and the main third symbol display device 81 is used. A reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire display area Dm is executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the player operates the operating means (touch sensor 2900) during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol to forcibly change the fluctuation speed of the third symbol at a low speed. It is configured so that it can be switched to. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect can be executed by the fluctuation, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the frame button 22a and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the desired background mode, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 hold effect) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds, is executed. are doing. This eight-piece hold effect is a dedicated effect using eight hold symbols, and as an effect hold symbol corresponding to each hold symbol, an effect hold symbol in a display mode imitating a treasure box is in the waiting area Ds1b. It is displayed (see FIG. 526 (a)).

Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the eight reserved effects is executed, the first reserved symbol tb0 for the effect is displayed in the executing area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 526 (b). Then, the contents tb10 of the treasure box showing the lottery result of the fluctuation is displayed. The details will be described later, but the content tb10 is configured so that different colors are displayed according to the lottery result of the special drawing.

After that, when new winning information is reserved and stored during the period when the eight holding effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIGS. 527 (a) and 527 (b). In the waiting area Ds1b of the above, the new reserved symbol 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (effect period) during which the eight hold effects are continuously executed is.

Then, when the final special figure change that is the target of the eight hold effects is executed, as shown in FIG. 528, the hold symbol tb7 for effect is displayed in the executing area Ds1a, and the current state Ds1b is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. The pending symbols corresponding to the number of pending storages are displayed. That is, when there are no more reserved symbols that are the targets of the eight reserved effects, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored and stored are displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is confused because the number of reserved balls currently acquired is not known at the end of the eight-held effect.

In this control example, the eight hold effects shown with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528 are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, eight hold effects are in progress for the effect. Even during the period in which the reserved symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, when the player performs a specific operation on the operating means, the pending symbol is not the pending symbol for production in the waiting area Ds1b, but the current one. It may be configured to display a hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is winning information that wins a big hit in the pre-discrimination process executed during the eight-piece holding effect, the eight-piece holding effect is continued until the special figure change corresponding to the winning information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this control example, the lottery result corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed in the period effect (8 hold effect) in which a series of variation effects are executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (reserved symbols). It is configured to set the production mode (contents tb10 of the treasure box) based on Whether or not it is determined in advance (pre-reading) before the special figure lottery based on the reserved symbol is executed, and the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result). You may. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the expectation of winning the jackpot to be set in a plurality of stages, and to set an effect mode in which the expectation of winning the jackpot does not decrease during the period production. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit as the period production progresses, and it is possible to pay attention to the period production until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the display contents during the production using the touch sensor 2900 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 529 (a) is a display screen showing a display example when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol, and is the display screen of FIG. 529 (b). ) Is a display screen showing a display example when a special operation is performed during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 529 (a), when the touch effect is executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol, the main display area is the same as the touch effect described in FIG. 525 (a). A small area Dm3 is formed on about 1/3 on the left side of Dm, and touch display is executed. In the state of FIG. 529 (a), since the third symbol is changing at a low speed (during reach display), the reach display mode is visually recognized by the player only in the display area of the main display area Dm which is not covered by the small area Dm3. The display is reduced in a possible state, and the touch location guidance display mode Dm31 is displayed in a mode indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (displayed with diagonal lines in the figure).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, the comment of "great chance" which is the effect result of the touch effect is displayed. In this control example, the touch effect can be executed during the reach display of the third symbol, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, is the lottery result of the special figure change during execution a big hit? Since it is configured to execute an effect (comment display) that suggests whether or not it is possible, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while expecting that a comment (for example, a big chance) that is likely to be a big hit is displayed. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the operation production.

If the player wants to detect the lottery result of the special symbol as soon as possible, the touch sensor 2900 is positively operated by executing the above-mentioned touch effect, and the touch effect is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. I try to actively display the comment that is the production result, but on the other hand, I want to enjoy the production mode of the variable production of the third symbol (until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested. Even if the touch effect is executed, the player who thinks that he / she does not want to execute other effects should not display the comment suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the comment display area Dm2a without operating the touch sensor 2900. It is conceivable to play a game.

In this case, while the touch effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect), the touch sensor 2900 cannot be operated to grasp the current background mode. There was a problem. Therefore, in the eighth control example, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c (see FIG. 517) arranged on the left side of the frame button 22a, so that the touch effect is being performed. Even if there is, it is configured so that the current background mode can be notified. With this configuration, even if the operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) is duplicated, the player can easily perform only the desired operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 529 (b), when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol (FIG. 5). In the lower frame line of 529 (b), the display mode imitating the left button 22b and the right button 22c is filled in), and the comment "Attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. As a result, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at this stage, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the current background mode is notified instead of displaying the effect result of the touch effect. can. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in that state, the background mode currently set among the mode lamps 1910 for notifying the background mode is used instead of the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation during execution. The corresponding mode lamp 1910a is lit and displayed.

In this control example, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the reach display), the touch is performed during the pressing period. It is configured so that the effect result of the touch effect is not displayed even if the sensor 2900 is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the touch effect. It may be configured to forcibly end the touch effect. That is, the operation effect being executed may be canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<About the electrical configuration in the 8th control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 530. FIG. 530 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example, and FIG. 530 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. In the eighth control example, eight holding lottery tables 222fa, a special effect selection table 222fb, and a vibe pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, the next background change flag 223fa is held, and the RAM 223 is held. The difference is that the effect executing flag 223 fb and the hold effect counter 2223 fc are added. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a data table used when performing a lottery (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece hold effect (treasure box effect), and is a hold number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540). The upper limit is the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter). 8 ”(Z2473: Yes in FIG. 540), it is referred to to determine whether or not to execute the eight hold effect (Z2475 in FIG. 540). When the execution of the eight-piece hold effect is determined, the above-mentioned eight-piece hold effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528.

Here, the contents of the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa will be described with reference to FIG. 531 (c). FIG. 531 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 531 (c), the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a prize that shows the lottery result (winning) that is advantageous to the player in the hold of the special figure (in the hold used for the eight-piece hold effect). It is configured to determine whether or not the information is included, and to change the execution probability of the eight hold effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning in the hold of the special figure (when the judgment result in the hold is "hit"), the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 140". It is stipulated that the eight-piece hold effect is executed in the case and the eight-piece hold effect is not executed in the case of "141 to 198". On the other hand, when the determination result in the hold is "only out of place", when the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 90", eight hold effects are executed, and when the value is "91 to 198". It is stipulated not to execute 8 hold effects.

That is, in this control example, the case where the winning information indicating the lottery result (winning) which is advantageous to the player is included in the hold which is the target of the eight hold effect is more than the case where the winning information is not included. It is configured so that the eight-piece hold effect can be easily executed. As a result, by executing the eight-piece hold effect, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot will be won soon, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, whether or not to execute the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds. Although it is configured to perform the lottery, whether or not to execute the continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number (for example, 7), not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. May be configured to perform a lottery. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 hold effect may be varied depending on whether the number of hold balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is 3 or 4 out of the 7 hold.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a big hit (number of prize balls, game state set after the big hit game) given to the player in the big hit game executed when the big hit is won is large. The pre-discrimination result of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is easily executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided and set so that the execution probabilities of the eight hold effects are different. Also, in this case, when there is prize information indicating a big hit winning in the hold of the advantageous special symbol, it is preferable to configure it so that the hold effect of 8 pieces is easier to be executed than other conditions. As a result, the player's expectation for the eight-piece hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 at the time of operating the frame button 22 according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a lottery result (preliminary determination) in the hold. A different vibration amount is set based on the result).

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIG. 531 (a). FIG. 531 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 531 (b) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. It is a figure which showed the content of the vibe pattern data 222fc which has (vibe type).

In the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be changed in three stages. Has been done. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player, the frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to drive the frame button 22 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates unless the frame button 22 is pressed, and the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Further, this control example is configured so that the vibration amount corresponding to a plurality of frame button presses is specified as one vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. As a result, the player can enthusiastically press the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

In the eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets a variation pattern for variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 543), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence or absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) that vibrates the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed. The vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibe type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 531 (a), the special effect selection table 222fb is a case where a hit is included in the hold of the special figure, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79", which is a vibration amount scenario. "Vibrator A" is specified as (vibe type), "vibe B" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "80 to 139", and vibration amount scenario is specified in the range of "140 to 175". "Vibrator C" is defined as (vibe type), and "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "176 to 198".

In addition, in the case where the hit is not included in the hold of the special figure (only the off), and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is set as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). In the range of "50 to 90", "vibe C" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and in the range of "91 to 198", "vibe D" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type). It is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531 (b), the detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be described. As shown in FIG. 531 (b), in this eighth control example, four types of vibration types (vibes A to D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of times of PUSH) is set for each vibration type. ) Corresponds to the amount of vibration specified.

Specifically, "Vibrator A" of the vibe type defines "None (does not vibrate)" for the first PUSH count, "Strong" for the second to fourth times, and "Vibrator B" defines PUSH. "Weak" is specified for the first time, "Medium" for the second time, and "Strong" for the third and fourth times. "Weak", "Medium" for the 3rd time, "Strong" for the 4th time, and "Weak" for the 1st PUSH frequency and "Medium" for the 2nd to 4th times are specified for "Vibrator D". ing.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated is made different according to the set vibe type, and the presence / absence of variable vibration amount is made different according to the number of times of PUSH. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to entertain at what vibration amount the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In this eighth control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibe type is configured to increase (do not decrease) as the number of PUSH increases, but it is not limited to this. , It may be configured so that the vibration amount becomes small. In this case, if the special figure fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation, or if there is winning information indicating a big hit winning in the special figure hold, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 tends to be small in the middle of the special effect. It is good to configure it so that it becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount is reduced.

Further, in the eighth control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of times of PUSH (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set, but the vibration amount is limited to this. The number of PUSHs for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the type of vibration.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the eighth control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times according to the process of the variation display (reach variation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the frame button operation can be performed a specified number of times (4 times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the variable display effect (operation effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed.

In addition, the eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to the special effect. In the display effect dedicated to this special effect, the display mode is stepwise (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the start of the special figure change). An effect that can be stepped up is executed. This effect is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) by pressing the frame button 22.

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 while expecting that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased. Further, even though the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount specified in the set vibration type. It is possible to prevent the special production from ending without causing it to occur.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based not only on the set vibe type but also on the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is increased. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though the display mode is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be described. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined as "frequency (frequency) indicating the number of vibrations per unit time". , "Amplitude indicating the fluctuation width of vibration" and "Indicating the time required for one unit of vibration (period)", the magnitude of the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the amplitude. Therefore, since the vibration width felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, the player can easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In the special effect described above, the frame button 22 may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times. Anything can be used as long as the period from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the start of vibration) can be changed, and each may be used in combination. Further, vibration that vibrates the frame button 22 by providing a plurality of vibration means (motors or the like) capable of applying vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) and performing drive control to the plurality of vibration means. The position of the source may be changed, or the vibration mode felt by the player may be changed by changing the drive start timing of each vibration means. Further, the player may be able to select the variable content of the vibration mode.

Further, in the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the special effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set by the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the special effect is currently being performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

The vibe pattern data 222fc is a data table in which the contents of each of the vibe types (vibes A to D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb are stored. The content thereof will be omitted because it has been described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222fb.

Next, with reference to FIG. 530 (b), the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. .. As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example has the following background change flag 223fa, the hold effect execution flag 223fb, the hold effect counter 2223fc, and the SW special effect counter 223fd added to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Is different.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. If so, it is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background differs depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, there will be a time lag between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (shifted). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is satisfied, the next background change flag 223fa is set to on.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548), the change state of the special figure (speed of change display of the third symbol) at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed. When it is determined that the vehicle is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2964 in FIG. 548: No), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 548). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON in the fluctuation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) executed when the stop command indicating the stop of the special figure fluctuation is received (see Z2242 in FIG. 539). Z2266: Yes in FIG. 539 then determines whether or not the special figure is on hold (Z2267 in FIG. 539), and if it is determined that there is no hold (Z2267: No in FIG. 539), the special figure change is stopped. The background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure is on hold (Z2267: Yes in FIG. 539), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 538).

The hold effect executing flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that eight hold effects (see FIG. 526) are being executed, and is set to be turned on when the eight hold effects are executed. .. Then, when the eight hold effects are completed, the effect is set to off (see Z2534 in FIG. 543). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while the holding effect executing flag 223fb is set to ON, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol). Even if the upper limit number (8) is reached (the value obtained by adding the values of the two hold ball counters 223b), the lottery for executing a new eight hold effect is not executed.

Specifically, when it is determined in the hold ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540) that the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter is 8 (Z2473: Yes in FIG. 540), then the hold effect is produced. It is configured to determine whether the running flag 223fb is set to on, and to execute the processes of Z2474 and Z2475 of FIG. 540 when it is determined that the running flag 223fb is not set to on (off). ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the eight-piece hold effect from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, so that the value of the eight-piece hold effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 hold effect, a new 8 hold effect is executed. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, as a lottery for whether or not to execute a new eight-piece hold effect, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the lottery for whether or not to execute the first eight-piece hold effect. Specifically, the new eight-piece hold effect may be configured to be easier to execute when a jackpot is included in the target hold than the initial eight-piece hold effect. As a result, when the eight-piece hold effect is executed for more than eight special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the big hit can be further increased. In addition, even during the eight-piece hold effect, the game can be enthusiastically played in order to accumulate the hold balls up to the maximum number again.

The hold effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and every time the main process (see FIG. 536) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). In), the update process is executed so that the values are different. The value of the hold effect counter 223fc is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold effect lottery table 222fa as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect process (see Z2841 in FIG. 547). In this case (see Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 547). Here, in this control example, no matter what type of special effect is set, the special effect for four frame button operations is set, so that the value of 4 is set in the SW special effect counter 223fd.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is subtracted by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 547), and corresponds to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction. SW motor data is set to perform the effect (see Z2497 in FIG. 547).

The return state storage area 223fe stores the remaining time information of the return change (special figure change in which the power is cut off during execution) included in the return command received from the main control device 110 when returning from the power failure state. Storage area for. Specifically, in the fluctuation return processing (Z2252 in FIG. 541), it is used in the processing (Z2281 in FIG. 541) for storing the remaining fluctuation time information included in the received return command.

In this control example, the display mode (variation display mode) after the return processing is completed is set based on the residual fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation stored in the return state storage area 223fe after the power is restored. A detailed explanation will be given later, but if the residual fluctuation time after the return processing is completed is longer than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the residual fluctuation time is executed and the predetermined time (2). Seconds) If it is less than or equal to, the return processing screen is configured to be displayed continuously. This makes it possible for the player to easily display the fluctuation of the special figure after the power is restored.

The return fluctuation flag 223ff is a flag for indicating that the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off is fluctuating (return fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to ON when the return fluctuation is in progress. It is a thing. This return-changing flag 223ff is set to on (see Z2284 in FIG. 541) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is set in the change-back processing (see FIG. 541). After the display command corresponding to the return variation is set, it is set to off (Z2296 in FIG. 542).

The remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is a counter for counting the remaining time of the fluctuation of the third symbol. The value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern acquired in the fluctuation display setting processing 8 (see FIG. 543) (Z2511 in FIG. 543), and the counter update processing (see FIG. 552). When it is determined that the value set in is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), 1 is subtracted.

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to ON when the fluctuation is in high-speed fluctuation. This high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg indicates a high-speed fluctuation period in the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 552), and the high-speed fluctuation is set. If no period is indicated, it is set to off (Z2865 in FIG. 552). Further, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined to be on) (FIG. 549). Z2825: Yes), it is also set to off when the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed (Z2833 of Z549). Further, the setting status of the high-speed changing flag 223fh is referred to when determining the timing for shifting the background mode in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) (see Z2964 in FIG. 549).

The special operation flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation on the operation means (left button 22b, right button 22c), and is turned on when the player performs the special operation. Is set to. Specifically, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed in the left and right button input processing (see Z2843 in FIG. 546) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545). (Z2851: Yes in FIG. 546), which is set to on (Z2855 in FIG. 546) when the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off during the fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2853: No in FIG. 546).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 549), and when it is set to ON (Z2831: Yes in FIG. 549), the process related to the touch effect is performed. The mode identification process (Z2868 in FIG. 549) is executed without being executed. In this control example, the special operation flag 223fi is set to be turned on while the player continuously operates (presses) the left button 22b and the right button 22c, and the left button 22b and the right button 22c are set to be turned on. When the operation of is stopped, the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (see Z2857 in FIG. 546). That is, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated with the left button 22b and the right button 22c pressed, the effect mode of the touch effect does not change based on the operation result, and the currently set background mode is used. Notification is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 517, the left button 22b and the right button 22c are arranged at a distance (about 3 cm) so that the player can operate them simultaneously with one hand. Has been done. Therefore, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand while the left button 22b and the right button 22c are operated with one hand. The arrangement relationship of each operating means is not limited to the arrangement relationship of this control example. For example, the left button 22b, the right button 22c, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with one hand at the same time. Alternatively, the left button 22b and the right button 22c may be configured so that they can be operated by one hand operating the operation handle and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated by the other hand. ..

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in this 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, the content specified in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the content specified in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from the first control example described above. Other than that, they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 532 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 532, the work RAM 233 of the eighth control example has eight display setting flags 233fa, eight display effect counters 233fb, a display reserved ball number storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd. It is different from the first control example described above.

The eight-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag for indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the eight-piece hold effect is executed. While the eight display setting flags 233fa are set to ON, the special symbol is displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 521 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the number of reserved balls, the remaining number of reserved symbols (reserved symbols for effect) that are the targets of the eight reserved effects are displayed (see FIG. 528). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the eight hold effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In the eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight reserved effects and the number of reserved symbols for the effect are configured to be displayed in synchronization, but the eight reserved effects are displayed. It suffices to display the number of reserved symbols for effect so that the player can be informed of the execution period of the game in an easy-to-understand manner. The number of reserved symbols for production may be set, or one production reserved symbol may be set for two or more special symbol fluctuations. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight hold effects (how many hold symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner).

The display eight effect counter 233fb is the number of effect hold symbols to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 521 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the eight hold effect. It is a counter for measuring. In this control example, since the number of reserved symbols for effect is changed according to the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight hold effect, eight display effect from the voice lamp control device 113. In the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) executed when a hold command is received, the value of the counter is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 555).

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) executed when the variation pattern command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 554), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter of is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 554). When the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb becomes 0, it means that all the reserved symbols that are the target of the 8 hold effect are used, so the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to end the display of the effect hold symbol. It is set to off (see Z3525 in FIG. 554), and in the hold display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556), the hold symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 528). As a result, when the last special figure change that is the target of the eight-piece hold effect is executed, the hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls of the special figure is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the eight-piece hold effect ends. At that time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives a display reserved ball number command output from the voice lamp control device 113. If so, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and has a different value each time the display control device 114 command determination process (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is executed. The update process is executed so as to be. The value of the display effect counter 233fd is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold lottery table 222fa as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 532, the NAND flash memory 234a of the eighth control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234a of the first control example described above in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 are added. ing.

The eight-piece effect scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the effect result of the eight-piece hold effect, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be the target of the eight hold effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the eight-piece hold effect.

Here, the detailed contents of the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, in the eighth control example, the treasure box displaying the executing area Ds1a is open at the time when the special figure fluctuation is started when the eight hold effects are executed. It is configured to display the suggestion mode for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the suggestion mode is configured to be selected with reference to the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3.

In the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3, the change result (the lottery result of the special figure variation executed this time) is a hit (big hit), and the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4". In that case, that is, when 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the value of the display effect counter 233fd is suggested in the range of "0 to 50". Is defined, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "51 to 90", the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91 to 150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151 to 198". It is stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" in the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", and the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179". Is specified, and "white" is specified in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation result (the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation executed this time) is out of order and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, the treasure box is imitated in the waiting area Ds1b. When 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect are displayed, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range where the value of the display effect counter 233fd is "0 to 39", and the value is set in the range of "40 to 149". The suggestion mode "blue" is defined, and "white" is defined in the range of "150 to 198". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198". It is stipulated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the eight hold effect, the hit suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a hit is provided. When the suggestion mode "Rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure change is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the smaller the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb, that is, the more the 8 hold effect progresses, the easier it is to display various colors as the suggestion mode of the 8 hold effect. It is possible to entertain the production without getting tired of the eight-piece hold production, which is a continuous production performed over the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the eighth control example, when eight hold effects are executed, the effect hold symbol (treasure box) for showing the target special figure change is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and the effect is set. When the special figure change is executed, the treasure box displayed in the executing area Ds1a is open so that a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the change is displayed. Not limited to, for example, when displaying a reserved symbol (treasure box) for effect in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure box is set based on the pre-discrimination result for each reserved symbol. Is also good.

Specifically, it is possible to set multiple treasure chest colors that are easier to select when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot than when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the special map fluctuation executed during the eight-piece hold effect from the stage before the special map variation is executed.

In addition, an effect (look-ahead effect) that changes the mode (color of the treasure box) of the effect reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and an effect that changes the display mode of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the running area Ds1a. When (the variable effect) and (the variable effect) are executed in combination, it is preferable to set a variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect executed earlier. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may also be set in advance. When selecting the variation effect, the variation effect may be selected based on the effect mode of the look-ahead effect set for the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation effect this time. As a result, one reserved symbol (winning information) can be related to the production mode of a plurality of effects (look-ahead effect, the variable effect) executed at different timings, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to perform continuous production without giving.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 8. The start-up process 8 in the eighth control example sets a change return command indicating the remaining time of the special figure change during execution after the Z910 process is executed for the start-up process in the first control example. (Z951) The difference is that processing is added. In this eighth control example, a command indicating the remaining time of the return fluctuation is set. Since the other processes are the same as the start-up processes in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 535 to 552, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, the start-up process (see FIG. 394) is the start-up process 8 (see FIG. 534), and the main process (see FIG. 395) is the main process 8 (see FIG. 536) with respect to the first control example described above. (See), the command determination process (2113 in FIG. 396) is the command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537), the variation pattern reception process (Z2202 in FIG. 397) is the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538), and the variation display setting. Process (Z2114 in FIG. 406) is variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543), hold quantity display update process (Z2106 in FIG. 395) is hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 544), frame button input monitoring. The effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 409) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 545), and the new processes include the fluctuation return process (Z2252 in FIG. , Left and right button input processing (Z2843 in FIG. 546), SW effect processing (Z2841 in FIG. 547), background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 548), mode identification processing (Z296 in FIG. 550), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in FIG. ), The counter update process (Z2176 in FIG. 552) is added, which is the main difference. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 535, the start-up process (see FIG. 535) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 394) of the first control example described above in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 394) when a state command is received is deleted. .. Further, it differs in that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) is changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 535) is executed, the processes of Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example will be described with respect to the difference from the first control example described above. In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, if the special figure change is executed during the period when the initial setting is executed, the BGM of the special figure change is output. It is configured in. That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535), the process of reading the game information at the time of turning off the power is executed, and the game information at the time of turning off the power read by the process is changing in the special figure. If it is determined that there is, a change command for voice is set to output the BGM of the special figure change from the voice output device 226.

Although the details will be described later, in the eighth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the power is supplied from the internal power supply provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the power is supplied. The game information (whether or not there is a change in the special figure, the lottery result of the change, the BGM for change, the remaining change time, etc.) at the time of disconnection is temporarily stored in the display storage area. This makes it possible to read the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535).

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram showing the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth control example.

The main process 8 of the eighth control example replaces the hold quantity display update process (Z2106 of FIG. 395) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above, and the hold quantity update process 8 (FIG. 395). 544 Z2171) is replaced with a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 395), and frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 544) is replaced with a command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 395). The command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537) is replaced with the variation display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 395) by providing the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543), and the short-term winning management process (FIG. 395). Z2111), the hold effect management process during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 394) is deleted, and the lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 536) is added. The other processes are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 536) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of Z2105 is completed, the pending quantity display update processing 8 is next executed (Z2171). The detailed contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 544. After finishing the processing of Z2171, the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 545.

When the processing of Z2172 is completed, the same processing of Z2108 to Z2110 as the main processing (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit 80. The detailed contents of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 551. After finishing the processing of Z2173, the counter update processing (Z2176) is then executed. The detailed contents of the counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

Then, when the processing of Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: No), the command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then the variable display is performed. The setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the first control example described above is executed. The detailed contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537, and the detailed contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 543.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 537. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174). The command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the hold ball count command output from the main control device 110 for the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the first control example described above. The point that the content of the process to be executed in the case is different, the point that the process to be executed when the stop command output from the main control device 110 is received (variable stop process 8) is added, and the output from the display control device 114. There is a difference between the point that the process to be executed when the display rise command is received is added and the point that the process to be executed is added when the variable recovery command is received. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is the eighth. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 537).

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 8 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: Yes), then the variation pattern reception process 8 Is executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538, but at the start of variation with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) of the first control example described above. It differs in that it is configured to execute the process for the background change in.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 537. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs a process of setting a stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a process of executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped. The details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

In the processing of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), then it is determined whether the reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the reserved ball count command has been received. If this is the case (Z2205: Yes), the hold number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hold number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the process of 2205 (Z2205: No), the Z2207 and Z2208 which are the same as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396). The process is executed, then it is determined whether or not the variable return command has been received (Z2251), and if it is determined that the variable return command has been received (Z2251: Yes), the variable return process is executed (Z2252), and this process is performed. To finish. The detailed contents of this fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2251 that the fluctuation return command has not been received (Z2251: No), then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display rise command is set when the display control device 114 finishes the initial setting process after the power is turned on, and the display control device 114 is set by the command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114. Is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command has been received in the processing of Z2244, that is, the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen of (Z2244: Yes), the display rising process is executed (Z2245), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this display rising process (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG. 542.

In this Z2245 process, a process for reading the game information (voice data) stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off and outputting the voice data to the voice output device 226 is executed. As a result, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, the audio output device 226 coincides with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen. It is possible to output the sound based on the sound data stored in the display storage area from.

In this control example, as game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is changing (information during the special figure change) is executed during the special figure change. Information indicating the type of voice (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting voice data in the processing of Z2245, the special figure changing information and BGM type information are read out and used as the read information. Based on this, the rising voice data is set.

In the processing of Z2244, if it is determined that the display rise command has not been received (Z2244: No), the processing corresponding to other commands (including the processing when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , End this process.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described with reference to FIG. 538. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). The variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) deletes the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 397) of the first control example described above, and processes the background change at the start of the variation. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed, the same processes of Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the next process is performed. It is determined whether the background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256). Here, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2257), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed change period during the special figure change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON. Then, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation executed during the previous special figure change. On the other hand, in the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (set to off) (Z2256: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242) will be described with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the variable stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266), and if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure is on hold (Z2266: Yes). Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are read out for determination. If it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is no reservation for the special figure (Z2267: No), the next special figure change will occur even though the condition for executing the background change in the next special figure change is satisfied. Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change when the special figure change is stopped this time, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2268), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (Z2266: No), or when it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is a hold of the special figure (Z2267: Yes). ) Does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special figure), so that the process of Z2268 to Z2270 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2271.

In the processing of Z2271, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2271), that is, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a return fluctuation. When it is determined that the return-changing flag is on (Z2271: Yes), the return-changing flag 223ff is set to off (Z2272), and the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return variation flag 223ff is not on (Z2271: No), since the current variation is not the return variation, the processes of Z2272 and Z2273 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, when the condition for executing the next special figure change is not satisfied while the next background change flag 223fa is on (the special figure is suspended at the timing when the current special figure change is stopped). (If there is no), the background change is executed at the stop timing of the special figure change this time, so the player who wants the background change should be provided with the background mode after switching at an early stage. Can be done.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present control example described above, and for example, the next background change flag 223fa may be kept on until the next special figure variation is executed. In this case, a predetermined valid period (for example, 1 minute) is set as the period until the next special figure change is started, and if the next special figure change is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the following background It is preferable to configure the change flag 223fa to be set to off.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to prevent the background change from being executed immediately afterwards.

Next, the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243) will be described with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243). In this hold number control process (Z2243), a process for managing the number of reserved balls on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the information included in the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and a special figure. The execution process of the effect (8 hold effect) on the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the hold number control process (Z2243), first, the hold ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol hold number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter). (Z2471) is stored in the number counter 223b), and a display hold ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold number counter stored in the process of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is 8 which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2473 that the value of the counter (number of reserved balls in the special figure) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2474), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is used. Based on this, a lottery result is acquired from the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating that the eight hold effect is to be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding eight hold effect is set (Z2477), and the display eight hold effect command is set (Z2478). ), The hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to ON (Z2479), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is set to 8, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that it is a lottery result indicating that the eight holding effect is not executed (Z2476: No), the processing of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped because the eight holding effect is not executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252). This fluctuation return processing (Z2252) executes a processing for updating the remaining time of the return variation based on the return variation command received from the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation return processing (Z2252), first, the residual fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation recovery command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the recovery state storage area 223fe (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is 0, that is, whether or not the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2282). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2282: No), the value corresponding to the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is set (Z2283), and the return changing flag 223ff is set to ON (Z2284). Next, BGM information indicating the reproduction position of the special figure change BGM at the time when the power supply is cut off is read from the backup area of the RAM 223 (Z2285), and the BGM of the special figure change is read from the reproduction position indicated by the read BGM information. Is set to start (Z2286), and this process ends. On the other hand, the residual fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2282. That is, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the return fluctuation (Z2282: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this fluctuation return processing (see FIG. 541), when the fluctuation display is being executed when the power is restored, the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is restarted from the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, when the power is momentarily cut off during the execution of the special figure fluctuation (so-called momentary power failure occurs, etc.), the BGM after the power is restored will change the BGM from the continuation of the BGM when the power is cut off. Can be output. Therefore, even after the power is cut off, the player can easily understand that the lottery status at the time of power cutoff is maintained as it is. Therefore, even if the power supply is momentarily (temporarily) cut off during the special figure change, the special figure change that is being executed may be discarded for the player. Since it is possible to suppress the suspicion that there is no such thing, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

In the eighth control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of power failure is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main control device 110, the variation return command may include at least information on the variation type (variation time) in addition to the information on the residual variation time of the special figure variation being executed. Then, from the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution and the remaining fluctuation time information, the period during which the BGM has been regenerated (the fluctuation time elapsed before the occurrence of the power failure) is calculated, and the total reproduction time of the BGM is calculated. By back-calculating the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off from the difference between the two, the reproduction position of the BGM at the time of returning the power may be specified. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide a backup means in the voice lamp control device 113, so that the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the display rising process (Z2245) will be described with reference to FIG. 542. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display rise processing (Z2245). In this display rise processing (Z2245), when a display rise command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the remaining fluctuation time is dealt with based on the value of the residual fluctuation time counter. Executes the process of setting the display variation pattern command.

In the display rising process (Z2245), first, it is determined whether or not the return-changing flag 223ff is on, that is, whether or not the return-changing flag is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return-changing flag 223ff is not on (Z2291: No), the return-changing flag is not in progress, and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return-changing flag 223ff is on (Z2291: Yes), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2292), and the process proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether or not the residual variation time read by the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponding to the residual variation time is executed by using various display variation patterns possessed by the variation pattern selection table 222a. Set (Z2294), start up and set the set audio data (Z2295). Next, the return-changing flag 223ff is set to off (Z2296), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2293, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not 5 seconds or more (Z2293: No), it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: Yes), the display fluctuation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining fluctuation time, and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (Z2298). Then, the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2297, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 2 seconds or more (Z2297: No), a display command for displaying the returning screen is set until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (Z2299). ), Z2296 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the variation pattern command for displaying the return variation is set according to the remaining variation time, and the voice data is set to notify the player of the result of the return variation without discomfort. can do. In this eighth control example, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set by using the fluctuation pattern table specified even at the time of the return fluctuation. However, the fluctuation pattern table for the return fluctuation is provided, and the fluctuation pattern table is provided at the time of the return fluctuation. The display variation pattern command may be set using the return variation pattern table. With such a configuration, more fluctuation patterns can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described with reference to FIG. 543. FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). The variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) has a control process related to the hold effect (8 hold effects) and a remaining variation time counter 223fg with respect to the variation display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) of the first control example described above. It differs in that it adds the process of setting, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501), and if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not set to ON. (Z2501: No), skip to the process of Z2505 as in the first control example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is larger than 0 (Z2531), and is larger than 0. (Z2531: Yes), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is 0 in the processing of Z2533 (Z2533: Yes), since it is the end timing of the eight hold effects, the hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to off (Z2534). ), The process proceeds to the same Z2502 process as in the first control example described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2531, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2531: No), it means that 8 pieces are not currently in hold effect, so Z2532. -The process of Z2534 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2502.

Further, in the processing of Z2533, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), the eight hold effects are being executed and the end timing of the eight hold effects is not reached. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When the process shifts to the Z2502 process, the same Z2502 to Z2504 processes as the variation display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) are executed, and the value corresponding to the variation time of the acquired variation pattern remains. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223ff (Z2511). Then, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the fluctuation display setting processing of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Further, in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the eighth control example, when the process of Z2511 is completed, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2535), and the process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 544. FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171). In the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the hold LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol is performed.

When the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b) is executed. The hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then the display hold ball count command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b) is executed. Set (Z2632) and end this process.

In this control example, in the process of Z2631, the holding LED 900 is lit in the same manner corresponding to the total value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Although it is configured to be set, the holding LED 900 is not limited to this, and for example, the holding LED 900 can be identified between the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. The lighting may be set so as to light, or the lighting is set so as to light the holding LED 900 according to only the number of holding balls of one of the special figures according to the current gaming state. You may.

Further, in this control example, the holding LED 900 is configured to always execute the lighting setting indicating the special figure holding ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example,). The period during which the eight hold effects are being executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for the effect is movable so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The holding LED 900 is configured to be turned on only during the period when it is difficult to visually recognize the number of reserved balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the variable display is executed using the entire screen. May be.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described with reference to FIG. 545. FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is pressed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed, the processing content that is executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the processing that is executed when the left and right buttons are input is added. Everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing of Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above is executed, and Z2805 is executed. If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of (Z2805: No), the process related to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the processing of Z2843, the processing for the operation of the left button 22b or the right button 22c (hereinafter, left / right button 22) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the Z2805 process (Z2805: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed when the switch that comes into contact with the frame button 22 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned on (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to the initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds of the recovery operation. It is composed.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is turned on continuously for at least 0.15 seconds, so that the on state is set. When the detection is continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short period (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being erroneously determined to have been pressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the contents of the left and right button input processing (Z2843), which is one of the processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172), will be described. FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing the contents of the left / right button input process (Z2843). In this left / right button input process (Z2843), it is determined whether the special symbol has high-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation, and a process of switching the operation mode of the left / right button 22 is executed.

In the left / right button input process (Z2843), first, it is determined whether or not the left button 22b or the right button 22c has been operated (Z2851). When it is determined that the left / right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more, that is, whether the special symbol is being changed (Z2852). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z2852: Yes), it is determined whether or not the high-speed changing flag 223fh is ON (Z2853). When it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on (Z2853: Yes), the volume level according to the operation result of the left and right buttons 22 is set (Z2854), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off in the processing of Z2853 (Z2853: No), the special operation flag 223fi is set to ON (Z2855), and this processing is terminated. By configuring in this way, the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 can be changed according to the fluctuation state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2851 when it is determined that the left and right buttons 22 are not operated (Z2851: No), it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856: Yes), the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (Z2857), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is off in the processing of Z2856 (Z2856: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed by the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. 547. FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), the control process related to the special effect of vibrating the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the background change process of changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22 are described above. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example is executed. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above is designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when the display variation pattern command is set in the Z2504 process of the variation display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 543), the variation pattern including the special effect is set as the SW effect, and the variation pattern is set. In the Z2804 process of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), it is determined whether or not the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the operation to the frame button 22 this time is an operation to the frame button 22 during the special effect, so that the control process for the special effect is performed. (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223fd is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. Is. When it is determined in the processing of Z2942 that the value of the counter is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2943), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is obtained. The special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, regardless of which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four times. Therefore, in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4. To.

Next, a display special effect command corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2942, when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special effect has already been executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 1. Subtraction (Z2948) is performed, and the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is executed in correspondence with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the above-mentioned processing of the special effect will be specifically described when the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected with reference to FIG. 531 (b). First, the first frame button 22 operation is performed in a state where the special effect is included in the current variation pattern, and the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, 4 is set in the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd in the processing of Z2945, and the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set in the processing of Z2447 (FIG. 531 (FIG. 531). b) See).

At the same time, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the button thereof. The pressing suggestion display mode) for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special figure change and the type of the selected special effect. For example, the following frame button. During operation, if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied, a large vibration is applied if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied. It is configured so that the display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is easier to be displayed than when it is not given.

With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery this time is a big hit, it is configured so that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is easier to be displayed than when the lottery result is not a big hit (off). When the next frame button operation is applied with a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated at the current frame button operation, and the special figure lottery result is a big hit, the next frame button operation is the most. It is configured so that the emphasized display mode can be easily displayed.

As a result, the result of the special drawing lottery can be predicted based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration amount generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated at the time of the next frame button operation becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated at the time of the current frame button operation, the player forgets to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set effect can be fully enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button operation is performed for the second time during the special effect, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (3) in the processing of Z2942 (Z2942; Yes), and the SW special effect is produced. The value of the counter 223fd is subtracted by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2, is set in the SW motor data. After that, the same process is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). It is configured in. In this control example, since the variation pattern is configured to correspond to the setting and the special effect can be set as the SW effect, the execution period of the special effect is configured to be within one special figure variation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the special figure fluctuation period). For example, the special effect is set at the start of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and set a special effect based on the determination result. Further, the special effect may be set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special figure. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special drawing lottery during fluctuation, the winning information in the hold, and the set gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 547, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), then the frame button input monitoring of the first control example described above is performed. -The same process as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, Z2811 of the effect process (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the current time is the timing when the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: No) Since the frame button 22 this time is a background change operation for changing the background mode, the background change process is executed (Z2949), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. 548. FIG. 548 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed, and the background change is performed based on the operation timing of the background change operation. The process for changing the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548), first, whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is greater than 0 at the timing when the background change operation is executed, that is, the fluctuation period of the special figure (special symbol). (Z2963), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is a value larger than 0 (Z2963: Yes), then whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (medium speed, low speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: No), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag. 223fa is set to on (Z2965), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2963, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter is not 0 or more (Z2963: No), it is determined that the present is not the fluctuation period of the special figure (for example, the customer waiting period) (Z2963: No). ) Or, in the process of Z2964, when it is determined that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately. Therefore, the background mode is added by 1 to the background mode. It is set in the storage area 223i (Z2966), a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2967), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) of FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. 549. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), the special operation flag 223fi is turned off with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above, and the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the advance notice effect display is not set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is larger than 0. However, in this control example, the touch is performed. The difference is that the sensor valid time counter 223s is used to measure the valid period corresponding to the effect set based on the fluctuation pattern among the periods during which the operation to the sensor 2900 can be effectively discriminated. Therefore, even when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Further, also in the eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided, and a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined is provided as in the first control example described above, but the description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831), and when it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is not on (Z2831: Yes). , The same processing of Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input processing (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831: Yes) in the processing of Z2831 or the warning effect display is not set in the processing of Z2822 (Z2822: No), the mode identification processing is performed. Is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z21968), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 550, a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 in the processing of Z2821, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted (Z2824) to determine whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: Yes), a command is set in which the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is low-speed fluctuation (Z2832), and the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to off (Z2832). Z2833). Next, the touch sensor effective time is reset (Z2829), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 550. FIG. 550 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, first, it is determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2696), and if it is determined to be on (Z2769: Yes), the current background mode is supported. Set the mode display command (Z2970) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated in the processing of the Z2769 (Z2769: No), the processing of the Z2970 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

That is, in the eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player only by operating the touch sensor 2900. With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode in the limited space of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to secure a wide area used for producing a variable display.

In the eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 523 (a)). However, not limited to this, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed at the timing of displaying the current background mode is determined based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, and the display mode of the effect is determined based on the determination result. The display area where is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in the display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting mode of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 518) according to the gaming situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (Z2131), and if it is determined that the special figure is not changing (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is turned on. Set the frame lighting command to light green (Z2135), then set the mode lighting command to light the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d so as to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and perform this process. To finish.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) which is a light emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light in an arbitrary color by lighting the light emitting means. ing. Then, various information is notified to the player depending on the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The red color is specified as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing fluctuations other than high-speed fluctuations. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (variation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, since the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player contacts) to be operated when the background change operation is executed is made to emit light by the frame lamp, the player who intends to execute the background change operation is asked. Since the current special figure change state (variation speed of the third symbol) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure change state when the background change operation is executed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the timing of executing the background change is different according to the fluctuation speed of the third symbol, and which speed is the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the display screen. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to identify the above-mentioned problem, but the above-mentioned problem should be solved by changing the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol). Can be done.

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly emit light on the surface of the frame button 22, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this, and it is in the viewpoint of the player who performs the background changing operation. Any position is sufficient. For example, a frame lamp may be provided in the vicinity of the frame button 22.

Returning to FIG. 551, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2131, if it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), then it is determined whether the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is on (Z2132), and the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is turned on. If it is determined to be (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is turned on in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134 processing, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command for turning on all the mode lamps. Is set, and this process ends.

Next, the counter update process (Z2176), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 536), will be described with reference to FIG. 552. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (Z2176). In this counter update process (Z2176), a process of updating the values of various counters is executed.

In the counter update process (Z2176), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861). When the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is subtracted by 1 (Z2862), and the process proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is not 0 or more, that is, when it is determined to be 0 (Z2861: No), the processing of Z2862 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2863.

In the processing of Z2863, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg read in the processing of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: Yes), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON (Z2864), other counter values are updated (Z2866), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is not the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863: No), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to off (Z2865), and the above is described. The processing of Z2866 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 553 to 557. In the eighth control example, for the first control example described above, the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is replaced with the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), and the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 415) is performed. The variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (b)) instead of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in FIG. 557). (See) is executed, and the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) and the hold display setting process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556) are added. Other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), when the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is looped with a process executed when eight display hold commands are received and this process. The processing to update the value of the display effect counter, the content of the processing to be executed when the variable pattern command for display is received, and the content of the processing to be executed when the reserved ball count command is received. , Is different in that it is changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same Z3401 to Z3404 processes as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) are executed, and the display variation pattern is executed in the Z3404 process. When it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 554.

In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In the eighth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated every time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed once. The command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of the command (display command) received by the display control device 114. Therefore, the timing at which the Z3496 process is executed can always be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3494 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received in the Z3404 process (Z3404: No), the same Z3406 to Z3411 process as the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is executed. , The process proceeds to the above-mentioned Z3496 process. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), then it is determined whether or not the eight display hold command has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that the command has been received. If this is the case (Z3492: Yes), the eight display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process.

This eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data related to the eight-piece hold effect (see FIG. 526), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 555. In the processing of Z3492, if it is determined that the eight display hold command has not been received (Z3492: No), then it is determined whether the hold ball count command has been received (Z3414), and the hold ball count command is executed. If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3414: Yes), the hold display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to the Z3494 process. This hold display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detailed contents thereof are described in FIG. 556. Will be described later with reference to.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414). Is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496 processing.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) differs from the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) in that a control process is added when eight hold effects are executed. The elements other than are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3501 to Z3506 as the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then eight display setting flags 233fa are set. Determine if it is set to on (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the eight hold effects are not being executed (Z3521: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z3521: Yes), the value of the 8 display effect counter 233fb is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the 8 display display after subtraction is produced. The effect mode (contents of the treasure box) is selected using the eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 with reference to the counter (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to off (Z3526). , End this process. Further, in the processing of Z3525, even if the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, the eight hold effect is continued even in the next and subsequent special figure fluctuations (Z3525: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. 555. FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493). When the 8 display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5701), the 8 effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the 8 display setting data table is set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the set data table for displaying the eight effects is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), the time data is set to the timekeeping counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the display 8 effect counter. , End this process.

Next, the contents of the hold display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. 556. FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display process (Z3495). When the hold display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of hold balls is set in the display hold ball number storage area 233fc based on the information included in the hold ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802), and if it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802: Yes), eight are currently on hold. Display 8 Pointers corresponding to the values of the effect counter 233fb are set (Z5803), and this processing is terminated. That is, while the eight hold effects are being executed, the number of display hold symbols (treasure boxes) corresponding to the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the eight display setting flag 233fa is not set to ON (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is set (Z5804). , End this process. That is, while the eight hold effects are not being executed, the hold symbols (circles) corresponding to the number of hold balls of the special figure are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described with reference to FIG. 557. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). In this resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631), the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above is set in that a command (display rising command) for indicating that all the resident target image data has been transferred is set. Is different from. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same Z4701 to Z4705 processes as the above-mentioned resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (b)) are executed, and the Z4705 process is completed. , Set the display rise command (Z4721), and end this process. In this way, a command (display) for indicating that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) in the main processing of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 411) has been completed. By configuring the rise command) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the display control device 114 can normally operate on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the eighth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113, voice output device 226). Therefore, by outputting the display rise command from the display control device 114, it is possible to execute the instruction to display the normal screen after the power is turned on and the instruction to output various voices (BGM) in synchronization.

In the eighth control example, a period (period) in which the period effect is executed for the waiting area Ds1b while the dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored in the hold is executed. It was configured so that the reserved symbol for production showing only the reserved symbol that is the target of the production) is displayed. That is, during the execution of the period effect, even if a new start winning is detected, the new reserved symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the look-ahead result based on the new start prize is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a big hit lottery result, etc.), a hold indicating the start prize corresponding to the specific lottery result. The display range of the reserved symbol for effect may be expanded to the symbol (or the display range may be expanded at a high rate). With this configuration, when the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved ball corresponding to the specific lottery result is included. It is possible to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit. In addition, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a hold corresponding to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a lottery result of a big hit, etc.) in the hold symbol that is the target of the period production. Even if a new start prize is detected while the symbol is included, the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded (or the display range is expanded) to the reserved symbol corresponding to the new start prize. It may be configured (so that the ratio is high). With this configuration, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to have a specific lottery result within the range at the beginning of the period production, so that the variable display corresponding to the specific lottery result can be displayed at any time. It is possible to realize playability that is not known to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this eighth control example, even when the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the special operation (the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c) is executed. Was configured to be treated as an operation for notifying the background mode, not as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation effect, but in addition to this, the operation effect is performed when a special operation is mistaken. It may be configured so as not to be handled (difficult to handle) as an operation of the touch sensor 2900. More specifically, for example, when an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected while either the left button 22b or the right button 22c is pressed during the execution period of the operation effect, the touch sensor 2900 is used. It may be configured not to be treated as an operation (not treated as a touch operation in the touch effect). In this configuration, even if the left button 22b and only the touch sensor 2900 or only the right button 22c and the touch sensor 2900 are mistakenly operated in an attempt to perform a special operation, the player is not willing to do so. 3 It will develop into a reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire main display area Dm of the symbol display device 81 (the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is determined to be an operation for the touch effect). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the execution of the effect mode contrary to the player's intention. Further, the player who has made an erroneous operation with the intention of performing a special operation can easily notice the erroneous operation because the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d does not change. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, even if the player who tries to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for the touch effect mistakenly operates either the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900. It is possible to avoid displaying the background mode according to the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d against the intention of the player. Therefore, the player who accidentally operates the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900 while trying to participate in the touch effect feels uncomfortable due to the display contents contrary to his / her intention. It is possible to prevent it from being forced. Further, since the display mode is not changed by the erroneous operation, the player can easily notice the erroneous operation. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eighth control example, in a special effect involving vibration of the frame button 22a, the mode of vibration (vibe type) generated each time the frame button 22a is pressed is determined by lottery, and a big hit is placed in the hold. The configuration is such that the existence is confirmed (vibe type) and the expectation of a big hit is high, but the vibe type in the special effect may be notified to the player other than the vibration. That is, for example, if the player continuously operates the frame button 22a at short intervals in a special effect, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. There is. In this case, for example, it is misunderstood that the special effect of the mode (vibe A) in which the jackpot is confirmed is executed even though the special effect of the mode (vibe C) that is relatively unlikely to be a big hit is executed. In some cases, it may cause the player to feel distrust. This problem can be solved by providing a means for notifying the type of vibration executed in the special effect, in addition to the mode of vibration transmitted to the finger of the player who has pressed the frame button 22a. More specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship (vibe history) between the number of times the frame button 22a is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the pressing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured. With this configuration, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misidentifies it, it is easy to check the history of the vibration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to identify the type of vibration this time. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand. Further, instead of the history display, for example, the change with time of the vibration intensity may be displayed by a graph. With such a configuration, the transition of the vibration intensity can be easily understood by the player, so that a more easy-to-understand production mode can be realized. The history or graph of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed each time a special effect is executed, and the player's operation interval is equal to or less than a predetermined interval (for example, it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). It may be configured to be executed only in the case of 0.5 second interval or less). Further, for example, even after the specified number of presses (4 times) in the special effect is completed, the vibe pattern is set again from the beginning every time the frame button 22a is pressed (the vibe pattern is repeated every time the frame button 22a is pressed). After the specified number of presses (4 times) is completed, the frame button 22a is maintained in the pressed state (so-called long press) during the long press. It may be configured so that the vibe pattern is repeated. In other words, even after the execution of the vibration mode (vibe type) corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22a is completed, the vibration mode (vibe type) is reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22a. May be configured as possible. With this configuration, the player who could not identify the vibe type can easily reconfirm the vibe type, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. ..

In this eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed in the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed immediately, while the background change operation is performed during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period. , The background mode is changed at the start of the next variable display, but it is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the background mode may be changed immediately when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation display mode in which the high-speed fluctuation is executed again is executed after the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period is once reached (for example, the normal reach occurs and the medium-speed fluctuation occurs. After the period is reached, if it develops into super reach and returns to high-speed fluctuation again, etc.), the background mode is changed immediately according to the background change operation until the high-speed fluctuation period when developing into super reach. It may be configured. With this configuration, whether or not it develops into a super reach effect by confirming whether or not the background mode change is immediately executed by the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period can be determined. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can be known in advance. Therefore, since the player can be made to positively perform the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode is only changed at the start of the next fluctuation display, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode change is not carried over until the start of the next fluctuation display, but a predetermined notification is performed at a predetermined ratio. May be. By configuring in this way, the change of the background mode is carried over to the next change, and it is suppressed that it takes time to change to the background mode in which the game is desired, which causes stress to the player. can do. In this case, the notification content includes, for example, the jackpot expectation in the running fluctuation display, the expectation that develops into super reach, and the expectation that the jackpot (or the fluctuation display corresponding to super reach) is included in the hold. , The degree of expectation for the so-called latent probability change state may be notified. With this configuration, by intentionally performing the background change operation during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to realize a game playability different from the usual one, which improves the player's interest in the game. Can be made to.

In the eighth control example, three types of periods in which the speeds of the fluctuation display of the third symbol are different are provided, but even if the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is synchronized with the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol. good. On the contrary, the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is configured to have at least a high-speed fluctuation period, a medium-speed fluctuation period, and a low-speed fluctuation period, and the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol is the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol. It may be configured to synchronize with the speed.

In this eighth control example, the configuration is such that a specific period effect is executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol being the upper limit (8 pieces), but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily the upper limit of the reserved balls. It is not limited to the number, but can be determined arbitrarily. As the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is reduced, the chances of executing the period effect can be increased, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Further, as the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is increased, the execution period of the period effect tends to be longer, so that the player's interest in the period effect can be further improved. Further, similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to the case where all the reserved balls at the start time of the period effect are digested, and may be arbitrarily set.

<9th control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 to 566. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 451) of the fourth control example described above. The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the control content are different from the above-mentioned eighth control example, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned eighth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing for changing the background mode according to the operation timing (background change is executed). By configuring the timing) to be variable, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to execute the background change operation with peace of mind, and the background change operation can be positively performed.

However, in the technique of the eighth control example described above, the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is only different, and the execution mode is the same, so that the background change operation is executed. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the background advance notice effect suggesting the background mode after the transition is executed between the time when the background change operation is executed and the time when the background change is actually executed. Moreover, it is configured to change the effect mode of the background notice effect according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, the timing during non-change of special figure, the timing during change of special figure). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different production modes depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the performance to be executed at an early stage. ..

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to see the background notice effect.

Further, in the ninth control example, similarly to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure fluctuation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). There is. Here, the conventional pachinko machine has a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is easily executed (for example, a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state of the normal symbol)) and a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is difficult to be executed. (For example, a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol)) can be set, and if a time saving state is set, a normal state is set. It was configured so that a shorter fluctuation time could be easily set as the special figure fluctuation time.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a period in which the special figure change is not executed occurs during the time saving state, a new special figure change is likely to be started immediately, and a period in which the special figure change is not executed in the normal state. When the above occurs, it becomes more difficult to start a new special map change than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the display for waiting for customers during the period (customer waiting period) during which the special figure change is not executed without considering the set gaming state (for example, the name of the gaming machine). If the function (for example, volume control function, light intensity control function) is executed during the customer waiting period, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is unnecessarily switched during the time saving state. There was a problem that it provided a display that was difficult to understand for the player. Further, the process for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is complicatedly executed, and there is a problem that the control load of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Furthermore, during the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute the special figure fluctuation by continuously firing the ball, so for example, the function during the customer waiting period (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function) can be used. Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure change is started by the time the adjustment operation using the function is completed, which causes discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special figure change is stopped and the new special figure change is not executed, the above-mentioned function during the customer waiting period is enabled. Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, the player needs to stop the game for a predetermined period when the player who is playing the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light. In addition to making people feel annoyed, there was a new problem that the operation of the game was reduced.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in the ninth control example, the period from when the special figure change is not executed according to the set gaming state until the function can be executed during the customer waiting period is different. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, during a high probability state (time saving state, probabilistic change state) of a normal symbol in which the special figure change is likely to be executed, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the special figure change is not executed, and then the customer waits. It is possible to execute the function during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol where it is difficult to execute the special figure change, it is possible to execute the function during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure change is not executed. can.

<Regarding the production content of the 9th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 560, among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the background advance notice effect will be described. FIG. 560 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 560 (b) shows a display in a state where the background mode shifts due to the next fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen. Of the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those of the above-mentioned eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed, the advance notice effect suggesting the background mode of the transition destination is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display mode of this notice effect, "mode display", which is a display mode in which the background mode of the transition destination is indicated by a comment immediately before the transition of the background mode, and the transition destination immediately before the transition of the background mode. "Silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is suggested by the silhouette of the character, is configured to be displayable.

Then, when the timing for executing the background change operation is outside the special figure change period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and when the special figure change period is in progress, "mode display" is selected. And "Silhouette display" are configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect (background notice effect) to be executed different according to the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player is made to perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Further, in the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change period, the selection ratio between the "mode display" and the "silhouette display" is different depending on the lottery result of the special figure change. I'm letting you. In addition, if the display mode of the pattern that is different from the background mode suggested by the background notice effect and the background mode that is the actual transition destination is selected, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. (To be higher than the display mode of other background notice effects). Therefore, it is possible to have the player positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by actively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to various background modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

On the display screen shown in FIG. 560 (a), the background mode shifts to the sea mode by the background change operation, and the silhouette K100 imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode is displayed as a background notice effect. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode, so that the player can display the display in the background notice effect. It is configured so that the aspect and the actually shifted background mode can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 560 (b), the comment "background change at the next change" indicating that the background mode is changed at the start of the next special figure change after the background change operation is executed is the comment display area Dm2a. It is displayed in. Then, as a background notice effect, a silhouette K100 imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 560 (b) is a state in which the current state is the "mountain mode" and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) due to the next fluctuation, and the background suggesting the background mode after the shift. The silhouette K100, which suggests a mountain mode, is displayed as a warning effect. In this way, if there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestion display mode of the background notice effect, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won due to the change.

<About the electrical configuration in the 9th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 and 559. FIG. 558 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and FIG. 558 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and FIG. 558 (b) is the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 558 (a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibe pattern data 222fc is deleted and the background notice selection table 222ga is added. However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background notice selection table 222ga is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the background notice effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, the contents of the background notice selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the background notice selection table 222ga.

As shown in FIG. 559, the background notice selection table 222ga shows the hit / fail determination result (the lottery result of the special figure change being executed at the time when the background change operation is executed), the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, and the value after the transition. It is configured so that the background mode and the background notice of different display modes can be selected according to the background mode.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69", and "silhouette A" is "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is specified in the range of "", "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "160 to 169", and "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198". When is in the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69" for "silhouette B", in the range of "70 to 159" for "silhouette A", and in the range of "160 to 169". "Sea mode display" is specified in, and "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", "silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". When the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", and "silhouette A" is set to "120 to". "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "198". Further, when the background change operation is executed during the customer waiting period, and the background mode after the transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after the transition of "sea mode display" is "mountain mode", "mountain mode display" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 198".

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background notice effect will be described. In this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, "silhouette display" that displays the silhouette of the character suggesting the background mode after the transition, and "mode display" that displays the character indicating the background mode after the transition. Is configured to be configurable.

In the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode shown in FIG. 560 (b), and "silhouette B" is shown in FIG. 560 (a). It is a silhouette of a character that imitates a fish that suggests the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed by a still image, but the display mode dynamically changes as long as the display mode suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. The display mode may be used. For example, immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is suggested, and the passage of time or the operation means by the player ( The background mode of the transition destination may be gradually changed to a display mode that is easy to grasp based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, "silhouette display" and "mode display" can be displayed as the display mode of the background notice effect, and the background is in the period when the special figure does not change. When the change operation is executed, only "mode display" is selected, and when the background change operation is executed during the period when the special figure is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. .. As a result, by executing the background change operation during the change of the special figure, a special effect mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a background notice effect, a display mode suggesting a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination can be set, and the display mode is selected only when the hit / fail determination result is correct. It is configured to be done. Therefore, it is possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result advantageous to the player in advance by giving a sense of discomfort between the content of the background notice effect and the actual background mode transition situation, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, an example using two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode) is shown, but the type of background mode may be three or more, and the background mode to be changed by the background change operation can be selected. It may be set randomly. Further, as a result of performing the background change operation, it may be configured to shift to the same background mode as before the shift. With this configuration, the display mode of the background notice effect this time and the background after the transition are based on the suggestion content of the background mode before the transition and the background mode after the transition displayed in the background notice effect. It can provide the fun of predicting whether or not the mode matches.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the period from the execution of the background change operation to the transition to the background mode is different depending on the timing at which the background change operation is executed, as in the eighth control example described above. It is configured as follows. The background notice effect described above is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period in which only the background notice effect is displayed can be changed according to the timing when the background change operation is executed.

In the ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special figure change during execution, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the winning information included in the special drawing reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be changed (changed) during the special figure change in which the background change operation is executed, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the change, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is changed (changed) in the next special figure change of the executed special figure change, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure change. It is good to configure it like this.

Returning to FIG. 558 (b), the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the ninth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223 ga and a delay counter 223 gb are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current customer waiting period is set, and is set to be turned on when the customer waiting period is reached. The customer waiting flag 223ga is executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol). It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) (see Z2734 in FIG. 565). In addition, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) or probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), waiting for customers. In the effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566), the delay counter is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223 gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 566). Then, it is set to off when the special figure fluctuation is started.

In this ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON, and the player is informed that the volume is in an adjustable state. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating a period in which the volume can be adjusted. Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be turned on differs depending on the set gaming state, and the gaming state is the normal state. It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223ga is less likely to be set to ON in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state than in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state.

With this configuration, it is difficult to display the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can. That is, the time saving state and the probable change state are configured so that a shorter special map fluctuation time can be easily set as compared with the normal state, and a period during which the special map fluctuation is not executed may be set temporarily. However, since the time saving state and the probabilistic change state are also gaming states in which a new special figure change is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the period in which the special figure change is not executed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to ON, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be complicatedly switched, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to be turned on unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probable change state. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem can be solved. The predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required to turn on the customer waiting flag 223ga during the time saving state or the probability change state is, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (electric) executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is preferable to set a period longer than the period until the accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second entry port 640). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON only by continuously playing the game during the probable change state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation to the setting of the customer waiting flag 223ga, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to the on in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. This is to delay the timing of the operation.

The delay counter 223 gb is in a probable change state in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) executed when the special figure variation is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set when the time is shortened (Z2733 in FIG. 565). Then, each time the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 566) is executed, the value is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 566), and when the value of the counter becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (FIG. 566). 566 Z2761). As a result, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be on in the probability change state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on in the normal state.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 561 to 566, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. In the ninth control example, for the eighth control example described above, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566) is performed instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main process 9 (see FIG. 561). , The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 and the command determination process 9 (Z2174 in FIG. 562) is executed instead of the command determination process 8. Other than that, It is the same. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 9 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 561. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 9. As shown in FIG. 561, the main process 9 has a customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), a frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182), and a command determination process 9 (see FIG. 536). It differs in that Z2183) is executed, and is otherwise the same.

Regarding the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 (Z2182), the background change process (FIG. 548) is performed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545) of the eighth control example described above. Since the difference is only in that the background change process 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 563) is executed instead of Z2949), only the background change process 9 which is a subroutine of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182) is executed. It will be described with reference to FIG. 563, and the illustration of other control contents (the same control contents as the eighth control example) will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) adds a process for setting the customer waiting flag to off when a variation pattern command is received, in addition to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242 in FIG. 539) is changed to the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 562). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is the eighth. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2661 in FIG. 562).

When the command determination process 9 (Z2174) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 9 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: Yes), the customer waiting flag 223ga is on. Whether or not (Z2253). When it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is on (Z2254: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command is received, and since it is the timing of the end of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to off (Z2254). The value of the delay counter 223 gb is set to 0 (Z2255), the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not on (Z2253: No), the processing of Z2254 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2255 processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), the variable stop process 9 (Z2651) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

Returning to FIG. 562, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a process for executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped, and a customer. The process for setting the waiting effect is performed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

If it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the processing of Z2203 (Z2203: No), the same Z2207 to Z2261 as the command determination processing of the eighth control example described above (Z2174 of FIG. 537) is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541) will be described with reference to FIG. 563. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) is relative to the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that a process for setting the display mode of the background notice effect has been added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes of Z2963 to Z2967 as the above-mentioned background change process (see Z2949 of FIG. 548) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2978). , The effect mode of the background advance notice effect is selected using the background advance notice selection table 222ga based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2979). Then, a display background notice command indicating the effect mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display switching command set in the Z2967 process and the display background notice command set in the Z2980 process are set in the same process. It is output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the display background notice command, and then 0.5 seconds later. It is configured to execute the display using the image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed before the background transition.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 564. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). The fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is the customer waiting setting processing (Z2652) after the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 is completed with respect to the fluctuation stop processing (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) of the eighth control example described above. Is different in that it is executed, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process for setting a customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold exists (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are both 0.

If it is determined that a special figure hold exists in the processing of Z2731 (Z2731: Yes), the next special figure change is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped. Then, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731 when it is determined that the special figure hold does not exist (Z2731: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732). When it is determined that the time is not shortened or the probabilistic state is not (normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2732 that the current state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732: Yes), then a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the delay counter 223gb (Z2733), and this processing is terminated. do. The value of the delay counter 223 gb set here is subtracted in the main process executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. 566. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181). In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) is subtracted, and the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0. The process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on and the volume adjusting process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on are executed.

In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2751: Yes), the volume button is pressed. Among them, it is determined whether the right button (up button) for raising the volume is operated (pressed) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2754). , End this process.

If it is determined in the Z2764 process that the right button is not pressed (Z2764: No), it is determined whether the left button (lower button) that lowers the volume is operated (pressed) among the volume buttons (Z2764: No). Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2757). , End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON in the processing of Z2751 (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2758), if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2758: No), since the special map fluctuation is not currently stopped, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then the value of the delay counter 223gb is subtracted by 1 (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is subtracted. Is 0 (Z2760). When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223 gb after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds have not elapsed since the previous special figure change stopped. If is (Z2760: No), this process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 in the processing of Z2760 (Z2760: Yes), the gaming state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds after the previous special figure change is stopped. Is the elapsed timing, so the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2761), the display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button is pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: Yes), the above-mentioned Z2764 process is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2763, if it is determined that the left or right button is not pressed (Z2763: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<10th control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 578. In the tenth control example, an operation effect (cracking effect) for changing the effect mode based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 is executed for the ninth control example described above, and the third control example. The third symbol (variably displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbol (special symbol)) that is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner according to the stop display mode. The difference is that the effect of shifting (changing) the background mode (background change effect) is executed based on the stop display mode of the decorative pattern), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of the 10th control example>
Here, among the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, unlike each of the above-mentioned control examples, a crack cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbol are executed.

First, the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 569. The cracking effect is an operation in which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22a) a plurality of times within a predetermined effect period to gradually change the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a production. In the tenth control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. With such a configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means in order to execute the effect in various production modes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 567, the flow of the cracking effect in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 567 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of cracking effect. In this control example, the crack 820, which is a variable display mode, is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means during the predetermined effect period, and the operation means within the effect period. A cracking effect is executed in which the number of cracks 820 is variable (increased) based on the operation content (number of operations). The variable display mode can be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) and the number of operations during the above-mentioned effect period.

Specifically, among the fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds, the operation valid period (button effect period) in which the operation to the frame button 22a, which is the operation means, is effectively determined for 15 seconds after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. ) Is set. Then, when the button effect period is reached, the crack effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 568 (a)).

Then, as the button effect period in which the cracking effect is executed, a first period, which is the first half period, and a second period, which is the second half period after the first period, are set, and the first button effect period is set. By operating the frame button 22a during the period, one crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 568 (b)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. With this configuration, the period in which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22a during the first period, the condition that the crack 820 of the second transition is displayed during the second period based on the pressing timing, that is, the crack displayed as a variable display mode. The number of operations to the frame button 22a for varying the number of 820s is configured to be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing to the operation means and the number of operations, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set, even if the second period is set longer, the condition (frame) that the second and subsequent cracks 820 are displayed based on the operation timing. Since the condition that the number of operations is large may be set as the number of operations to the button 22a), operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set causes more cracks 820 to be displayed. There is no direct connection to that.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the operation effect while entertaining the player at which timing during the first period the frame button 22a is to be operated. In the tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracking effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to select a variable pattern of the variable display mode after the second time according to the timing of the frame button operation. Further, in this control example, the fully variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode during the effect period is configured to be selected according to the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Then, when the second period is set, a display screen for urging the player to execute the operation of the frame button 22a a plurality of times is displayed (see FIG. 568 (b)), and the first period ends. When the display condition set at the time (condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is satisfied, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and after the second period elapses (20 from the start of fluctuation). An effect based on the number of cracks 820 displayed after the lapse of seconds) is displayed (see FIG. 569 (a)).

In the cracking effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation that causes the selection of the display condition (variable scenario) for increasing (variable) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode) is executed. , No matter when the frame button operation is executed, one crack 820 (the same variable display mode) is displayed. That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the cracking effect has been executed by the first frame button operation, and based on the first frame button operation. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

This makes it possible to play the game while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, the cracking effect of this control example makes the ratio of selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode different based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the cracking effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22a) (the operation to the operation means is effectively determined) is the first period (5 seconds). And the second period (10 seconds) after the lapse of the first period, and the operation for selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode (the number of cracks 820) during the first period (first time). By executing the frame button operation), the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed during the first period, the cracking effect is terminated at that point (clear the setting of the operation valid period during the second period and switch to an effect other than the operation effect). (See FIG. 567 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22a from being notified of the effect of urging the operation of the frame button 22a for a long time.

Here, the flow of the effect when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 567 (b). ) Elapses, a display screen (see FIG. 568 (a)) prompting the operation to the frame button 22a is displayed, the operation valid period is cleared at the end of the first period, and after the first period ends, the frame button 22a is pressed. A display mode (sorry display) indicating that the button has not been pressed even once is displayed until a predetermined second period (10 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 569 (b)). After that, the effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once is configured to be displayed until the second period (10 seconds) elapses. Not limited to this, for example, a display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a has never been pressed is displayed only for the start 2 seconds of the predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then. , The effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) may be executed. With this configuration, the period during which the disappointment display is displayed can be shortened, and therefore, if the player intentionally does not operate the frame button 22a during the first period, the player feels uncomfortable. Can be difficult to give.

In addition, when the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is executed during the first period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first production period). It is configured. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Next, an example of the display content displayed during the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 568 and 569. FIG. 568 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed immediately after the cracking effect is started, and FIG. 568 (b) shows the frame button 22a during the first period of the cracking effect. This is a display screen showing an example of the display contents displayed when the operation is performed. Further, FIG. 569 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the effect content executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 displayed, and FIG. 569 (b) shows the crack effect effect. This is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22a during the first period.

When the cracking effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), the effect executed this time is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means (frame button 22a)). In order to notify the player that this is the case, on the right side of the main display area Dm, there is a button display mode Dm5a that imitates the frame button 22a, and the remaining period (4) of the first period (5 seconds) of the button effect period. The remaining period display mode Dm5b for notifying the second) is displayed.

Here, the button display mode Dm5a is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the figure) for encouraging the frame button 22a to be pressed (repeatedly hit) a plurality of times instead of being pressed only once. Further, in the remaining period display mode Dm5b, the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the figure) is dynamically displayed with respect to the indicator indicating the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, the comment "Crush the screen by repeatedly pressing the button" is displayed. As a result, by operating the frame button 22a a plurality of times during the current operation effect, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect that destroys the display screen is executed. Further, a small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm so that the progress of the cracking effect (the number of cracks) of this time is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. In addition, in FIG. 568 (a), since the crack cracking effect has just been executed and the frame button 22a has never been operated, the small display area Dm4 is set as the progress status display mode Dm4a. 0 "is displayed.

Then, when the frame button 22a is operated during the first period of the crack cracking effect, one crack 820 is displayed in the main display area Dm and the progress of the small display area Dm4 is displayed as shown in FIG. 568 (b). "1" is displayed as the display mode Dm4a. Further, since the first period ends and the second period is set by operating the frame button 22a during the first period, the remaining period display mode Dm5b for indicating the remaining period of the first period is replaced. Then, the remaining period display mode Dm5c for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed. In addition, a comment of "more repeated hits" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a.

With the display screen of FIG. 568 (b) displayed, when the frame button 22a is operated multiple times (continuous striking operation) and the display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is satisfied, the number corresponding to the display condition is satisfied. The crack 820 is displayed on the display screen. When the number of cracks 820 is 3 at the end of the second period of the button effect period, as shown in FIG. 569 (a), the central portion of the main display area Dm is destroyed and the fish is fished from the back. An effect in which a large number of characters 822 imitating the above appears is executed, and a "fish school reach" indicating the effect mode executed this time is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. In this control example, the progress status display mode Dm4a is displayed in the small display area Dm4 even after the button effect period ends, and the button effect period is displayed with three cracks 820 displayed. A value of "3" indicating that is finished is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand what was the production result of the cracking effect corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time.

As described above, when the second effect is executed, the effect mode of the second effect to be executed after the first effect can be set based on the effect result of the first effect (cracking effect). In addition, when the configuration for displaying the effect result of the first effect is used, for example, the effect result display of the first effect is configured so that the effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect can be displayed. May be. In this case, when the lottery result of the special figure variation is a big hit, it is preferable to display an effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an uncomfortable effect, and it is possible to easily win a big hit when the uncomfortable effect is executed, so that a novel effect can be provided.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period of the crack effect, the small display area Dm4 is displayed at the end of the first period, as shown in FIG. 569 (b). "0" is displayed as the progress display mode Dm4a, the button display mode Dm5a that does not prompt the operation to the frame button 22a is displayed, and the display mode in which the remaining period is 0 is displayed as the remaining period display mode Dm5b. Then, the comment "Sorry, end" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a, and a display screen for notifying the player that the cracking effect has ended at the end of the first period is displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period, even if a player who does not like the operation of the frame button 22a is playing the game, he / she does not feel uncomfortable. The display screen shown in FIG. 569 (b) is displayed at the end of the first period, and the button effect period (operation valid period) is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first period. At the end of one period, the number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. As a result, even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22a, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to be displayed when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times during the first period can be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think whether or not to operate the frame button 22a during the first period in order to experience various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Next, the background change effect is an effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives the stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols). Is configured to determine.

Therefore, the background change symbol type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113, and when the background change symbol type command is received, it is included in the command. It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped symbol information. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special figure is out of order, the player can be interested in which stop mode the outlier is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81. You can enjoy the production performed on the display screen of.

Further, it is the first to determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and to notify the player that the background will be changed based on the determination result that the determination results in changing the background mode. 3 Unlike the conventional pachinko machine that stops and displays the symbol (background change notification symbol is stopped and displayed), it is determined whether to execute the background change according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, the stop mode of the third symbol is configured to trigger the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily control the ease of changing the background or the destination of changing the background based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set gaming state. ..

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special figure lottery is missed, the player By operating the operating means, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably selected. With this configuration, the stopping mode can be changed based on the operation result of the player, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, in this case, it is better to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. For example, the background is changed only when the operating means is operated. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to participate in the production more enthusiastically.

<About the electrical configuration of the 10th control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 570 and 572. FIG. 570 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and FIG. 570 (b) is a schematic view of the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 570 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is used when selecting the effect mode of the cracking effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the cracking effect selection table 222ha is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cracking effect selection table 222ha is used when selecting an effect mode (display condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks), which is one of the operation effects for executing the operation to the operation means (frame button 22a). In the SW effect process 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 577) executed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the data table referred to in the above, it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is a crack effect. (Z7101: Yes in FIG. 577), which is referred to (Z7105 in FIG. 577).

Here, the contents of the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 572. FIG. 572 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the cracking effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 572, on the cracking effect selection table 222ha, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special figure variation in which the cracking effect is executed and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect. Depending on the operation (pressing) timing of the operation (pressing) and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223ha, different production modes of the cracking effect (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) are defined.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is The effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the effect B is specified in the range of "40 to 89", and the effect C is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the specific contents of each effect type defined in the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described. For the effect type A, the number of frame button operations required for the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack is set to "10". In the scenario, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second production type B is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the scenario shown, the production type C requires "10" for the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to occur, and "25" for the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack. This is the scenario set to.

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations according to the effect mode of the crack cracking effect set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is performed to change the crack, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

The crack cracking effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 572 shows only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times. No matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, the effect type in which the second crack is not displayed and the effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also specified. In this way, by defining the production type in which the cracks are difficult to change and the production type in which the cracks are not variable, even if the production type in which the cracks are not variable is set, the frame button operation can be expected until the end. Can be done.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 572. The hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In this case, the effect type A is specified in the range of "0 to 19", the effect B is specified in the range of "20 to 79", and the value of the SW special effect counter ha is specified in the range of "80 to 99". , Direction C is specified.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is "0 to 29". The effect type A is defined in the range, the effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and the effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In, the effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the value of the SW special effect counter ha, the effect B is specified in the range of "5 to 79", and the effect B is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Direction D is specified.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 571. As shown in FIG. 571, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example has a SW effect counter 223ha, a button pressing counter 223hb, and crack information storage for the RAM 223 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the area 223hc is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used for selecting a crack effect, and is repeated by adding 1 in the range of 0 to 198 each time the voice lamp control device 113 main process (see FIG. 573) is executed. Will be updated. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned effect counter 223h, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button pressing counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the tenth control example, the effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button pressing counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected by using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the control content of the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 573 to 577. The same control contents as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 573, the main process 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 10. As shown in FIG. 573, in the main process 10, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 with respect to the main process 8 of the eighth control example described above, and a command. The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the other points are the same.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. The command determination process 10 is different from the above-mentioned command determination process 8 in that a control process for receiving a display background change symbol command is added, and the other steps are the same. The details of this display background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and is a stop mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Information for indicating (combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop) is included.

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2208 as those of the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display background change symbol command has been received (Z7201). When it is determined that the display background change symbol command has been received in the processing of Z7201 (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z7202), and the set background mode is supported. A display switching command for a variation pattern is set (Z7203), and this process ends.

That is, in the tenth control example, the process of changing the background mode is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the stop mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special figure lottery is wrong, which It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stopped mode.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 differs from the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 in that the SW special process executed is changed to the SW effect process 10, and is the same except for the above. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the crack cracking effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracking effect end processing (Z2896). In this cracking effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period has elapsed in the cracking effect, a process for setting a subsequent effect mode is executed.

When the cracking effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed from the start of the cracking effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is determined. It is determined (Z7002), if it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: No), and then it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not elapsed (Z7006: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the button press counter 223hb is larger than 0 (Z7003), and it is not larger than 0. If it is determined (Z7003: No), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), and the values of the SW effective time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb are cleared (set to 0). End the process.

If it is determined in the processing of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223b is larger than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that 15 seconds have passed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is cleared. (Z7008), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 577. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. The SW effect processing 10 is different from the SW effect process described above in that a process related to the cracking effect is added. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that the SW effect is not a crack effect (Z7101: No), the above is described. The same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z7101 that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: Yes), then the information indicating the effect mode of the crack effect in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7101: Yes). It is determined whether the data) is stored (Z7102).

In the processing of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the cracking effect is already stored in the cracking information storage area 223hc, the value of the (Z7102: Yes) button pressing counter 223hb is added by 1. (Z7106), the cracking effect type set in the cracking information storage area 223hc is read (Z7107), and the effecting mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button press counter 223hb (variable number of cracks). Set a display effect command to indicate the fan effect), and end this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the processing of Z7102 (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is acquired, the cracking effect selection table 222ha is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed. Based on the value of the effective time counter and the acquired value of the SW effect counter 223ha, the corresponding crack effect type is determined, set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , End this process.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 578. The control content of the display control device 114 of this control example is different from the control content of the eighth control example described above in that the stop type command process 8 is changed to the stop type command process 10, and the rest is the same. Is. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command process 10 (Z3496). In the stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change symbol command) for outputting information related to the stop symbol set in the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop symbol set in the Z3602 process changes the background. It is determined whether it is a stop symbol indicating (Z8001). If it is determined in the Z8001 process that the symbol is not a stop symbol for executing a background change, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8001 that the stopped symbol indicates a background change, the display background change symbol command is set (Z8002), the stop symbol discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this processing is performed. To finish.

<11th control example>
Next, the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 579 to 592. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a liquid crystal display using the third symbol display device 81 and a bonus effect using a movable accessory (for example, a tilting device 310) for moving the frame button 22. , Was configured to perform a suggestive effect suggestive to the player.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command including information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is used. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the accessory effect based on the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure included.

The liquid crystal display set here is output to the display control device 114 as an effect command for display, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, as for the accessory effect, a drive scenario for driving the movable accessory in a predetermined operation is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the movable accessory (for example, the tilting device 310) is set based on the set drive scenario. ) Is moved, drive control is executed for the drive means (for example, the voice coil motor 352).

In this way, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal effect and data for accessory effect are created, respectively, and a plurality of effect devices (first) are created based on the created data. When performing an effect on the 3 symbol display device 81, a movable accessory), it is possible to execute a more interesting effect by synchronizing the effects executed by each effect device. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, since the voice lamp control device 113 outputs data related to the effect to each effect device (display control device 114 and tilt device 310), the effect content executed by each effect device. There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize.

In particular, in a character effect that moves a movable character that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, such as the tilting device 310, in order to perform a specific character effect, the movable character is used. Since it is necessary to perform a preparatory operation for moving from the initial position to the production start position and an end operation for moving the movable character to the initial position after the character production is completed, one information (variation pattern command) is used. When executing an effect for a plurality of effect devices based on the above, if the effect is executed without considering the position of the movable accessory at the time when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is executed, the liquid crystal display effect and There was a problem that it deviated from the character production.

Therefore, in the eleventh control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is the movable accessory at the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in the eleventh control example, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position at the execution timing of the composite effect, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect is moved to the initial position. When the execution timing of the composite effect arrives in a situation where the compound effect has not returned, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the compound effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Here, in the eleventh control example, the above-mentioned compound effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The details of the production will be described later, but by executing the compound production (last production) during the ending period, the next jackpot will be won immediately after the jackpot game ends (there is a high possibility of winning). Is configured to suggest (notify) to the player.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the accessory effects overlap, one of the accessory effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is composed. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 579, the flow of setting the composite effect in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 579 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display effect and the accessory effect (operation effect) during the jackpot game. Of the flow of effects shown in FIG. 579, the contents of the OP effect displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effect displayed during the normal round game period, and the interval effect displayed during the interval period. Since the contents are the same as those described in the above-mentioned control examples, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 579, in this control example, a plurality of character effects (operation effects) are configured to be executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (any of 1, 8 and 16) of the jackpot game, an operation of opening (raising) the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) attached to the frame button 22a is executed. When the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) attached to the frame button 22a is opened during the first operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 and the ending period of the jackpot game. When the (ascending) operation is executed and the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended), the second operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed.

Here, the first operation effect is a probabilistic promotion effect, which is an effect of giving an effect result for notifying the player whether or not the game state set after the jackpot game is in the probable change state. The operation effect is to notify the player whether or not there is winning information indicating that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot (big hit B1 or jackpot B2 (see FIG. 359)) in the reserved memory of the special symbol. The hold continuous effect, which is an effect to which the effect result of the above is given, is configured to be executed.

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 579 (a), the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round (final round) of the jackpot game. Here, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is the first effect period (about 6 seconds) and the first effect period, which encourages whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is completely opened (raised). The tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended) during the second effect period (about 2 seconds) in which the player can press the frame button 22, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the second effect period. This is formed by a third effect period (about 2 seconds) for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position when the second effect period has elapsed.

On the other hand, the round game during the big hit game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, depending on the winning condition during the round game, as shown in FIG. 579 (a), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is not completed at the end of the 16th round (final round) (tilting device 310). Is not in the initial position). Further, for example, when the end condition of the 16th round (final round) is satisfied, even if it is in the middle stage or if it is configured to forcibly end the first operation effect, it is in a state of being forcibly ended. Since a period for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position is required, the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round).

In this way, when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to be the target of the operation effect is not located at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round) or at the start of the ending period, the ending period Even if the condition for executing the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is the second operation effect, is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is used without executing the operation effect using the tilting device 310. It is configured to execute the last effect only by the display effect.

As a result, the operation effect corresponding to the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) has not been completely completed (the movable accessory (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation effect is not located at the initial position). Therefore, even if the execution timing of the hold continuous effect (last effect) is reached, the last effect can be executed using only the display effect, so that the player can experience the hold continuous effect.

Further, in this control example, an effect that the second operation effect executed later can be an effect result in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given is executed than the first operation effect executed first. It is configured to be. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, a second operation effect that can be more advantageous to the player than the first operation effect is executed depending on the execution status of the first operation effect to be executed first. It is also possible to suppress the problem that the effect is lost or the effect is reduced because the operation effect and the display effect in the second operation effect are misaligned.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the execution conditions of each effect are set so that the hold continuous effect is more difficult to execute than the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring as in the present control example, it is possible to suppress the problem that the execution of the difficult-to-execute effect is hindered by the easy-to-execute effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 579 (b), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the probability change promotion effect is executed using a predetermined period from the first round. After that, since the 16 rounds (final round) can be completed with the tilting device 310 positioned at the initial position, the hold continuous effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be performed by the movable accessory (last effect). The second operation effect using the tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in synchronization with each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game described above are executed will be described. do. In an example described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, a display example during a jackpot game based on a jackpot B2 (a jackpot of an even number symbol (666) with a probability variation of 16 rounds) is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 580 to 582 show an example of the display screen during the jackpot, and only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described, and the display during the jackpot game described in each of the above-mentioned control examples is described. Each element displayed on the screen (for example, the number of prize balls during the jackpot, the element indicating the cumulative number of times the jackpot is won (the number of consecutive chans) during the probability change state, or the time saving state) has the same contents. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 580 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect, and FIG. 580 (b) is a probabilistic promotion effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example which is displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 during the 2nd effect period of. FIG. 581 is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22a during the second effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect.

First, when the probabilistic promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the comment "chance if the button pops out" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the frame line, the tilting device 310 is swung in small steps in the opening direction (upward direction) and the closing direction (downward direction) (in the frame line of FIG. 580 (a), the explanation is given. For the sake of convenience, the state in which the frame button 22a swings in small steps in the vertical direction is described).

Then, when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) from the state of FIG. 580 (a), as shown in FIG. 580 (b), the frame button 22a raised on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The button display mode shown is displayed, and a "press" comment urging the frame button 22a to be pressed is displayed. In the frame line of FIG. 580 (b), by describing the state in which the frame button 22a is completely projected for convenience of explanation, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), and the player presses the frame button 22a. It indicates that it is in a pressable state.

When the player presses the frame button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 580 (b), the third symbol display "666" at the time of the jackpot is displayed as a probabilistic promotion mode for indicating that the jackpot this time was a probabilistic jackpot. The characters "super" are displayed in the vicinity until the end of the jackpot game. Then, the character "lucky" is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 581). Then, when the frame button 22a in the protruding state is pressed, the frame button 22a is located in the initial state (lowering state) as shown in the frame line of FIG. 581. In this way, by constantly displaying the probabilistic promotion mode (“super”) on the display screen, the probabilistic promotion effect is completed so that the probabilistic state is set for the player after the end of this jackpot game. Even after that, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, a display mode in which the character "super" is added is used as the probabilistic promotion mode, but the display color is not limited to this, and for example, the display color of the third symbol "666" is in a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed. Is variable to a display color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is set, or a display mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating that a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends on the display screen. It may be configured to display a character). Further, in this control example, by configuring the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot to have a probabilistic promotion mode without changing it, it is possible to play a game in which third symbol display mode is used to win the jackpot. Although it is configured to be easy for the person to understand, it is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed to a display mode (for example, "777") indicating that it is a probabilistic jackpot. It may be configured to allow.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the jackpot this time is jackpot A (16 rounds, time reduction 100 times), the above-mentioned probability variation promotion effect is executed. In this case, since the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game ends, when the player presses the frame button 22a in the state of FIG. 580 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 581 is replaced. , The word "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that the probabilistic promotion effect has failed. Even in a part of the case of jackpot B2 (big hit of even symbol (666) with 16 rounds probability variation), even if it is configured to display the character "sorry" indicating that the probability variation promotion effect has failed. good. As a result, even if the probabilistic promotion effect fails, the probabilistic state may be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the jackpot game ends. ..

Further, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the probabilistic promotion effect, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) for inciting whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is completely opened (raised). It is configured to execute only the effect, and then execute the fanning effect of moving (evacuating) the tilting device 310 to the initial position. And, this fanning effect is an effect condition other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, when the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or during the round game, a predetermined number or more is set in the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be executed even when the ball wins a prize or when a condition) that is satisfied when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the big hit game is satisfied.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the probabilistic promotion effect has been executed, and at the time when the fanning effect is executed, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended). , Can give the player expectations. In addition, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the fanning effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this case, the effect fusion pattern for executing the display mode (fanning effect display) shown in FIG. 580 (a) during the first effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect, that is, during the fanning effect, and the movable accessory (tilting device). It is preferable to configure the character effect pattern that causes the fanning effect to be executed only in 310) so that it can be executed. As a result, whether this fanning effect is part of the probabilistic promotion effect, or if the effect conditions other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, if the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or the round game) It is executed when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65a, or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a fanning effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the hold continuous production will be described. FIG. 582 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilting device 310 is in a state of being completely opened (raised) during the hold continuous production, and is a schematic diagram of FIG. 582 (b). Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of FIG. 582 (a).

In this control example, at the timing when the ending period of the jackpot starts, the winning information stored on hold is analyzed (discriminated), and as the result of the analysis (discrimination), the information indicating that the probabilistic jackpot is won is stored on hold. It is configured to execute the hold continuous production when it is included in the winning information. When this hold continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 582 (a), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is completely opened (raised) during the ending period (see the frame line in FIG. 582). In the display screen, a button display mode indicating the completely raised frame button 22a and the character "press" for prompting the player to press the frame button 22a are displayed. In FIG. 582 (a), the character "ending" indicating that the state during the jackpot game is the ending period is displayed in the upper left of the display screen.

Then, when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of FIG. 582 (a), the characters "super lucky" indicating that the hold continuous effect is successful are displayed, and a character imitating many fish appears on the display screen. A video that crosses the screen is played. In addition, the edge of the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the big hit is changed to a success display mode indicating the success of the hold continuous production. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hold continuous production is successful (there is a probable change jackpot in the hold memory).

In this control example, it is set as an execution condition of the hold continuous effect that it is determined that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory, and it does not matter whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a probability change jackpot. Hold continuous production is feasible. As a result, for example, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is executed and fails during the jackpot game (even if it is highly possible that the jackpot this time is not the probabilistic jackpot), there is a possibility that the hold continuous effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with expectations until the end. In addition, if the probability change promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is successful, the probability variation state in which the jackpot probability is high after the jackpot game is set is set, so that the winning information for winning the probability variation jackpot is stored in the hold memory. It becomes easy to be included. Therefore, the player who succeeds in the probabilistic promotion effect during the big hit game can play the game until the end of the big hit game while increasing the expectation that the hold continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the execution condition of the hold continuous production is that there is a probable change jackpot in the hold memory at the start of the ending period, but the execution condition is not limited to this, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or a specific round game. It is a hold continuous production that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory that is held and stored at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game such as when it starts or ends, or when the special figure fluctuation that won the jackpot stops. It may be set as an execution condition. Further, when there are a plurality of winning information indicating a big hit in the hold memory, the hold continuous effect may be executed even if the big hit is not a probable change big hit, or the effect mode of the hold continuous effect may be set. , May be configured to be variably set according to the number of winning information indicating the jackpot included in the hold storage.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 583 to 587, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are used. , Are different in that they are changed, and otherwise they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 583, the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 583, the ROM 222 of the eleventh control example has the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia and the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table 222ib with respect to the ROM 222 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 467). , Is different from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic in that. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during the jackpot game and selecting the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed. In this control example, whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect (the effect mode that progresses to a state where the frame button 22a can be pressed, or the frame button 22a cannot be pressed. It is referred to when selecting the end fanning effect mode).

Here, the contents of the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize will be described with reference to FIG. 585 (a). FIG. 585 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize. As shown in FIG. 585 (a), the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia defines different tilting motion scenarios based on the winning jackpot type and the acquired effect counter 223h value. ..

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A (16 rounds, time saving hit)", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined in the range where the acquired effect counter 223h value is in the range of "0-9", and "10-". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "99". The range of "100 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario.

Here, to briefly explain the tilting motion scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, this tilting motion scenario defines an motion scenario for driving the tilting device 310 which is a movable accessory. The operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the drive of the tilt device 310 after the tilt operation scenario is set, and the operation time of the tilt device 310 (operation period). ) Is set as the timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db. That is, depending on the operation data (scenario) selected from the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310. , Operation effect contents and are set.

Although the details will be described later, each tilting operation scenario has information in which the operation mode of the tilting device 310 is different, and the tilting device has various operation modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above. The 310 is configured to be operable.

Returning to FIG. 585, the description will be continued. It is stipulated that the jackpot type is "big hit B1 (16 rounds, probability variation, odd symbol jackpot)" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is not set in the range of "0 to 199". That is, in this control example, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIGS. 580 and 581) is configured to be executable as the operation effect executed during the jackpot game, and this probabilistic promotion effect is the probabilistic change after the jackpot game ends. It is an effect to suggest (notify) to the player that the state is a big hit for which the state is set.

That is, in the "big hit B1" which is stopped and displayed with an odd number symbol which is a display mode indicating that the third symbol is a probabilistic jackpot at the time of a big hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot). Even if the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, it only provides the player with a meaningless effect and may reduce the motivation for the game. It is configured so that the tilting motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2 (16 rounds, probability variation, even symbol jackpot)", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined, and "50". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "~ 149". The range of "150 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario. In addition, the jackpot type is "big hit C (2 rounds, probability variation)", but the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, "no tilting operation scenario is set" is specified in the entire range. ing. This "big hit C" is set to have a smaller number of round games (2 rounds) executed during the big hit game than other big hit games, and in this control example, the number of rounds (2 rounds) is set. After the jackpot game is executed, the probability change state is always set.

Therefore, the "big hit C" is a special prize because it is a clear jackpot that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed by grasping the game mode of the big hit game as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1". The operation effect (tilting operation scenario) is not selected by using the middle operation effect selection table 222ia. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player. Further, by executing the operation effect within a small number of rounds, it is possible to prevent the effect mode during the jackpot game from becoming complicated.

Here, the contents of the tilting motion scenario type specified in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize will be briefly described. Of the contents of the tilting operation scenario, the same parts as the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted in detail. In this control example, the tilting motion scenario B and the tilting motion scenario C are included as the tilting motion scenario types defined in the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia. The tilting operation scenario B moves the tilting device 310 in the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the fifth control example control example described above, and executes a preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. During the preparation period, the tilting device 310 is repeatedly moved in the vertical direction (opening / closing direction) three times, and the tilting drive is executed. A scenario for moving the tilting device 310 so that the period is set is defined.

On the other hand, the tilting motion scenario C defines an motion scenario in which only a part of the tilting motion scenario B described above is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved up and down during the preparation period for executing the preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. A scenario is defined in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after the fanning effect period for executing the fanning drive for repeatedly moving the tilting device 310 in the direction (opening / closing direction) is set. That is, when the tilting motion scenario B is set, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIG. 580 (b)) in which the player presses the frame button 22a is executed during the jackpot game, and the tilting motion scenario C is set. In this case, it is configured to execute a fanning effect (see FIG. 580 (a)) in which the frame button 22a is not pressed during the jackpot game.

Then, as described above, the preparatory drive (preparation period) and the fanning drive (fanning effect period) for the tilting device 310 executed when the tilting operation scenario C is set have the same contents as the tilting operation scenario B. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the frame button 22a can be pressed after the fanning drive (fanning effect) of the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the probabilistic promotion production in the journey in which the fanning production is executed.

Further, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 and the inclination are set for each tilting operation scenario, as in the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above. A timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operating time (operating period) of the device 310 is specified. In the tilting operation scenario B, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer. The value T2 is defined as 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds), and in the tilting operation scenario C, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer value T2 is 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds). It is stipulated. That is, it is specified that the period set as the operation effect start time TI is shorter than each tilting operation scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above.

That is, the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected with reference to the operation effect selection table 222ia described above is executed during the special figure change, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since it is necessary to move the movable accessory in accordance with the variable display executed on the screen, it was necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation effect start time TI. Since the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected by reference is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), the player feels uncomfortable even if it is executed immediately after the start of the round game. This is because it does not give. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the movable accessory immediately after the start of the round game, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by executing the effect of moving the movable accessory at an early stage, it is possible to easily end the effect of using the movable accessory within a specific period (round game period).

As described above, in this control example, the rate at which the tilting motion scenario B is selected as the tilting motion scenario selected using the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize is the jackpot type "big hit A". It is designed so that the case of "big hit B2" is higher than the case. Specifically, it is configured so that the selection ratio is 5 times higher. With this configuration, when the tilting motion scenario B is set and a state in which the frame button 22a can be pressed is provided, the possibility that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Therefore, when the fanning effect is executed during the jackpot game, the fanning effect (see FIG. 580 (a)) progresses, and the frame button 22a shifts to a pressable state (see FIG. 580 (b)). It is possible to make the player play the game during the big hit while expecting the player. Further, when the frame button 22a can be pressed, the probability change promotion effect can be succeeded with a high probability, so that the frame button 22a can be enthusiastically pressed, and the player's willingness to participate in the effect is motivated. Can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when a specific effect condition is satisfied other than selecting the tilting operation scenario C with reference to the above-mentioned special prize operation effect selection table 222ia (for example,). When the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, or when the player hits the frame button 22a during the jackpot game. The tilting motion scenario C can be set when a specific operation is performed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to execute the fanning effect other than when the probabilistic promotion effect is set (when the tilting motion scenario is selected by the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize), so that the probabilistic promotion effect can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game ended with or whether the fanning effect other than the probabilistic promotion effect was executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the production in which the probabilistic promotion effect is successful is executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib is a data table in which the operation contents for the tilting device 310 executed during the jackpot game are stored. Regarding the specific contents, the same parts as the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted in detail, but the tilting operation selected in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia. A data table for setting the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the scenario type and the tilting operation scenario is set.

Here, the contents of the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib will be described with reference to FIG. 585 (b). FIG. 585 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 585 (b), the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib has a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, a tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1, an origin detection operation B table 222db4, and an ending scenario table 222ib2. There is. Of these, the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib and the origin detection operation B table 222db4 have the same contents as the above-mentioned fifth control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 defines an operation scenario in which the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) moves to the initial position after performing a fanning effect of swinging in small steps in the vertical direction. This is a partial diversion of the operation scenario specified in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 of the fifth control example described above.

Here, the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 will be described with reference to FIG. 586 (a). FIG. 586 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1. This tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize at the start of the jackpot game. Then, when the operation effect start time set in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia elapses after the tilting operation scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is started.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (see Z2953 in FIG. 480). Then, the defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" (50 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) is executed, and the lock is released. , The operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (movable 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "4" (moving 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (20 steps in the forward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed. (Movable) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "6" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "7" (20 steps during 200 ms) is executed. (Movable in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "8" (movable in the backward rotation direction in 20 steps for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation pointers "3" to "8" are executed three times. The motion data with the motion pointer "9" (moving 50 steps in the backward rotation direction for 500 ms) is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. The operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion (fanning effect) during the jackpot game (during a round game) (see FIG. 580 (a)), and the tilting device 310 is subsequently directed to the player. Can be suggested to be completely open (rised), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, only a specific fanning motion (movements from the motion pointers "3" to "8") is specified as a fanning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of repetitive motions and the repetitive motion. It may be configured to execute a plurality of fanning effects with different positions (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, among the probabilistic promotion effects, a fanning effect (successful effect mode) that is easily executed as a probabilistic promotion effect in which the success effect (see FIG. 581) is executed, for example, a fanning effect in which the number of repeated operations is 7 times. By configuring to set the effect mode of the above, the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the fanning effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the content defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 is the same as the content defined in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 up to the first half (the part where the fanning effect ends). It is configured so that the definition contents after that are different. Specifically, it is defined that the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position as it is after the fanning effect is completed.

With this configuration, it is expected that the fanning effect this time will be a probabilistic promotion effect (a probabilistic promotion effect that allows the frame button 22a to be pressed) until the fanning effect is being executed. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the probabilistic promotion effect has a low degree (probability change promotion effect in which the frame button 22a cannot be pressed), the player can grasp the effect result first. By suppressing it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, unlike the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) stands by at a specific position (the most open (elevated) position) corresponding to the period for causing the player to press the frame button 22a. Since it is not necessary to set the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1, it is possible to define an motion for returning the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to execute the movable accessory (tilting device 310) from the start to the end of the operation based on a series of operation scenarios, and the accessory operation can be smoothly executed. In this control example, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is configured to be returned to the initial position in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1, but the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is used without limitation. Similar to the operation of the accessory, an operation scenario for returning to the initial position (origin position) may be separately provided.

Returning to FIG. 585 (b), the description will be continued. The ending scenario table 222ib2 is a scenario table that defines the operation content of the tilting device 310 for the operation effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game. If (the holding memory contains the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot, and the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is located at the initial position), the setting is made.

Unlike the various tables of the tilting operation scenario described above, the ending scenario table 222ib2 does not set the operation effect start time T1. Therefore, when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 592), the tilting operation timer 223db The value corresponding to is set, and the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 589).

The ending scenario table 222ib2 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (see Z2953 in FIG. 480). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "6" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as the partial operation contents of the tilting operation scenario A222db1 of the fifth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 moves in the backward rotation direction (right in FIG. 159). By rotating 210 steps in the (rotating direction), the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (FIG. 586). (B))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 586 (a))). After a stop period of 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and locks. It is moved to the removed position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 586 (b)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengagement position to the locking disengagement position, as shown in FIG. 168 described above, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise direction), whereby the rotary claw is rotated. The member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 310, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 586 (b))).

After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586 (a))), and the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position. After that, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167) for 1.9 seconds, so that the tilting device 310 moves (descends) to the initial position (origin position). And the driving force is transmitted.

As described above, in this control example, as in the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 of the fifth control example described above, the ascending speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved, so that the movable accessory executed during the ending period can be improved. The character production using (tilting device 310) can be a powerful production. Further, since the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be quickly moved (ascended) to the highest ascending position within the limited period of the ending period, it is executed after moving to the highest ascending position. The period of production can be lengthened, and various productions can be performed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period is started, but the ending scenario is not limited to this, and for example, the ending scenario is set before the ending period is set. It may be set so that the operation of the operation pointer 2 of the ending scenario is completed at the start of the ending period. With this configuration, the period from the start of the ending period to the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to the highest position can be further shortened.

Further, in the eleventh control example, by setting the ending scenario table 222ib2, the operation of the tilting device 310 is changed from the start of operation (operation from the initial position (origin position)) to the end of operation (initial position (origin position)). It is configured to execute a series of operations up to (operation of It may be provided separately from the scenario table for termination.

Further, in the eleventh control example, the tilting device 310 is configured to set the operation valid period in which the frame button 22a can be pressed for 3 seconds in which the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position, and the operation thereof. When the player presses the frame button 22a during the valid period, the operation valid period is cleared, and the value of the tilting operation timer 223db corresponding to the ending scenario table 222ib2 is subtracted to the value at which the waiting state for 3 seconds ends. It is configured to do. With this configuration, the operation valid period ends when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period depends on the passage of time without pressing the frame button 22a during the operation valid period. It is possible to execute the end operation of the movable accessory by using a common scenario.

Returning to FIG. 583, the explanation will be continued. The operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic is a data table for determining at which timing (round game) the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is referred to at the start of the jackpot game ( (See Z8301 in FIG. 590), the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect is selected. The execution timing selected here is stored in the motion information storage area 223ib during the special prize, and when the jackpot game progresses and the round game set as the execution timing is reached, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed.

Here, the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic will be described with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic. As shown in FIG. 587, different execution timings are defined in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic according to the jackpot type and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 39", and the execution timing is in the range of "40 to 109". Is defined as the "8th round" as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "110 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 20% in the first round, and the rate of 35% is the eighth round, 45%. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

With this configuration, the probability change promotion effect is easily executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), so the failure effect is executed as the probability change promotion effect in the first half of the jackpot game. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play during the remaining period of the jackpot game. Further, since the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed can be set over the entire jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the probabilistic promotion effect will be executed.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the operation effect execution timing is not limited to this so that the probability variation promotion effect can be executed multiple times. The selection table 222ic may be configured to specify a plurality of execution timings. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 587, the explanation will be continued. When the jackpot type is "big hit B1", it is specified that the value of the acquired effect timing counter 223ia is not set in the range of "0 to 199", that is, the execution timing is not set in the entire range. .. That is, in this control example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, when the jackpot type is "big hit B1", the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) is not selected. The selection table 222ic is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is selected even though it is a "big hit B1", it is possible to reliably prevent the probabilistic promotion effect from being executed. can.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2", the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is "first round", and the execution timing is in the range of "20 to 99". The "8th round" is defined as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "100 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit B2" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 10% in the first round, and the rate of 40% is 50% in the eighth round. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

That is, in the "big hit B2" in which the success effect is executed in the probability change promotion effect, the probability change promotion effect is more easily executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned "big hit A". Therefore, the later the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed, the more the expectation that the current jackpot will be the probabilistic jackpot (“big hit B2”) can be expected.

In this control example, the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit A" (1,8,16 rounds) and the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" (1,8,16 rounds). , Is configured to select the execution timing from the same number of rounds, but the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be executed only for the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" is not limited to this. It may be configured to be set. With this configuration, the player can pay close attention to the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed. Further, when "big hit C" is set as the big hit type, the execution timing is not set as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1".

Next, with reference to FIG. 584, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 584 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 584, the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 223 (FIG. 468) in the fifth control example described above in that an effect timing counter 223ia and a special prize operating information storage area 223ib are added. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect timing counter 223ia is formed by the same loop counter as the effect counter 223h described above, and its value is updated every time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). It is a thing. The effect timing counter 223ia acquires the value of the effect timing counter 223ia in the opening process 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 590) executed at the start of the jackpot game (Z8314 in FIG. 590), and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is obtained according to the acquired value. The execution timing of the operation effect during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation effect execution timing selection table.

The effect timing counter 223ia and the effect counter 223h are both formed by a loop counter that updates the range of "0 to 199" every 1 millisecond, but it is difficult to obtain the same value. As you can see, the updated contents are different. Specifically, the values added by one update are configured to be different prime numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the value of the effect counter 223h from being updated in synchronization with each other.

The motion information storage area 223ib during the special prize sets the effect mode of the probability variation promotion effect set at the start of the jackpot game and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect as the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) executed during the jackpot game. It is a storage area for temporary storage. Specifically, the tilting motion scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 590) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 590) and the execution timing of the selected tilting motion (see Z8315 in FIG. 590) are stored. (See Z8316 in FIG. 590).

Then, it is read out by the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) executed during the jackpot game (see Z8411 in FIG. 591), and when it is determined whether or not the current round game is the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect. (See Z8412 in FIG. 591), and when it is determined that the execution timing is reached, the operation based on the effect mode (operation scenario) stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize is started.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 588 to 592. In the eleventh control example, the operation effect of the tilting device control process (see Z2891 in FIG. 477) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161 in FIG. 474) is being performed with respect to the fifth control example described above. There is a difference between the change in the content of the process (see Z2905 in FIG. 478) and the change in the process content executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 472). ing. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 588, the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) will be described. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989). This operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed when the tilting operation status is set to 2. The difference is that the processing during the operation effect (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above is added with the processing during the ending that is executed when the ending of the jackpot is in progress.

When the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2951), and it is determined that the value is larger than 0. (Z2951: Yes), then determines whether the current time is in the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (Z2991: Yes), the ending processing is executed. (Z2922), the process proceeds to Z2952. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2991 that it is not during the ending period (Z2991: No), the processing of Z2992 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2952.

The details of the ending process executed in the process of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. 589. In this ending process, the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation of the tilting device 310 executed during the ending period. If so, the processing is executed.

Returning to FIG. 588, the explanation will be continued. When the processing of Z2991 and Z2992 is completed, the same processing of Z2952 to Z2956 as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the above-mentioned fifth control example is executed, and then the display command corresponding to the operation executed this time is set. (Z2993), and this process is terminated. In the processing of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (the most open position) by the operation based on the set tilting operation scenario table, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying a display mode (see FIG. 580 (b)) for indicating that the frame button 22a can be pressed is set, and the tilting device 310 is in a fanning operation. In this case, a display command for displaying the button display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be set in a display mode corresponding to the operation content.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (setting the display command) based on the actual operation content of the tilting device 310, the movable accessory (tilting device). The operation mode of 310) and the display mode of the effect display can be easily synchronized, and an effect with a high effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2951: No), it is the same as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above. Z2957 to Z2961 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the ending processing (Z2992) will be described with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending processing (Z2992). When the ending processing (Z2992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201), and when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201 :. Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is set to 3000 (Z8202), and the process proceeds to Z8202.

That is, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223db reaches "3190" while the ending scenario (see FIG. 586 (b)) is set, the tilting device 310 is in the cause state for 3 seconds, and the frame button during that time. The operation validity period during which the operation of 22a is valid is set. In this way, by setting the operation valid period of the frame button 22a according to the progress of the operation scenario of the tilting device 310, the operation valid period can be easily set according to the timing when the tilting device 310 is positioned at the highest position. Can be set.

In this control example, the operation status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress status of the operation scenario (although it is configured to be discriminated based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223db). ), Not limited to this, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223db becomes a value that shifts to the next operation pointer, the detection means that can detect whether the operation content based on the current operation pointer is normally executed ( For example, a movable accessory position detection sensor) may be provided, and the detecting means may be configured to manage the operating status of the tilting device 310 based on the detection of the normal operation of the movable accessory.

With this configuration, for example, a state in which the period required for the tilting device 310 to move to the highest position (0.5 seconds corresponding to the operation pointer 4 in the ending scenario of this control example) has elapsed. When it is determined that the tilting device 310 has not completed the movement to the highest position, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db can be stopped and a retry period for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) can be set. can. Then, when the tilting device 310 has been moved to the highest position during the retry period, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db can be restarted, and the operation valid period for the frame button 22a can be set. ..

As a result, for example, while the tilting device 310 is performing an ascending operation (opening operation using an elastic member), the player applies a force to resist the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 (for example, on the tilting device 310). Even if the tilting device 310 cannot move to the highest climbing position within a specific period (within 0.5 seconds), the tilting device 310 will rise to the highest position within the subsequent predetermined period (1 second). When the player moves to the position, the operation valid period can be set according to the timing, and the player can perform an appropriate effect. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the above-mentioned predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, another effect (press the frame button 22a) without setting the operation valid period. It is also possible to switch to a production that does not let you.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8201 that the value of the current tilting operation timer 223db is not 3190 (Z8201: No), the processing of Z8202 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z8203.

Next, in the processing of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z8203: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set. Reset to "190" (Z8204), set the value of the SW valid time counter 223k to "0" (Z8205), and end this process.

That is, when the frame button 22a is pressed and the tilting operation flag 223de is turned on during the operation valid period set in this operation effect (during the period when the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0). , The value of the tilting operation counter 223db is changed from the standby state of the ending scenario, that is, the state of the operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586 (b)) to the value immediately shifting to the operation pointer 6, and the operation valid period. The value of the SW effective time counter 223k is changed to "0" in order to terminate. As a result, no matter when the player presses the frame button 22a during the operation valid period, the period (3 seconds) in which the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position can be skipped. In addition, even if the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22a or the operation valid period ends due to the passage of time, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problem.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is changed so as to shift the operation pointer of the ending scenario from "5" to "6". After pressing the frame button 22a, the tilting device 310 is configured to perform an operation for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position (origin position), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the frame button 22a is pressed. Therefore, when using a configuration in which the tilting device 310 moves to the initial position (origin position), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db may be changed to "0". As a result, unnecessary operation processing can be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON in the processing of Z8203 (Z8203: No), then the currently set operation scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222ib2) is supported. Read the operation content to be performed (Z8206), then determine whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z8207), if it is determined to be larger than 0 (Z8207: Yes), and then the frame button. It is determined whether 22a is pressed (Z8208).

If it is determined that the frame button 22a is pressed in the processing of Z8208 (Z8208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period in which the ending scenario is set, so that a super lucky display is displayed. A display command indicating (see FIG. 582 (b)) is set (Z8209), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8210), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of Z8207 (Z8207: No), or the frame button 22a is not pressed in the processing of Z8208. If it is determined (Z8208: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the process of the opening process 11 (Z8301) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is a process executed when the opening command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and in this control example, the third operation is performed during the opening period. In addition to the process of setting the opening command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during this jackpot game, and the probability change promotion effect. Is executed, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.

When the opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z8311), and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia is obtained based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the current jackpot type. A more tilting motion scenario is selected (whether or not execution is performed and the scenario type is selected) (Z8312). Then, it is determined whether or not the tilting operation scenario is selected in the processing of Z8312 (Z8313), and if it is determined that it is selected (Z8313: Yes), then the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is acquired (Z8314) and acquired. Based on the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the current jackpot type, the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is selected from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic (Z8315).

After finishing the processing of Z8315, next, information for showing the type of the tilting motion scenario selected in the processing of Z8312 and the execution timing of the tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315 are shown. The information and the information are stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize (Z8316), the opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8313, if it is determined that the tilting operation scenario is not selected as a result of the processing of Z8312 (Z8313: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the round process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 11. This round process 11 is a process executed when a round command indicating that a new round of the jackpot game is started is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and is executed in this control example. , In addition to the process of setting the display command corresponding to the number of rounds, the process of determining whether or not to execute the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is executed.

When the round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize (information for indicating the type of the tilting operation scenario and information for indicating the execution timing) is displayed. Read (Z8411), determine whether the round game this time is a round for executing a tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412), and if it is determined to be an execution timing (Z8412: Yes), it is stored. A tilting motion scenario corresponding to the type of tilting motion scenario is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds this time is set (Z8414), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8412, if it is determined that the current round game is not the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412: No), the processing of Z8413 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z8414.

Next, the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303) will be described with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when the ending command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and in this control example, the third is executed during the ending period. In addition to the process of setting the ending command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, the process of determining whether or not to execute the operation effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period is executed. Will be done.

When the ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information (winning information stored on hold) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (Z8511), and then in the read winning information. It is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot is included (Z8512). Here, if it is determined that the winning information indicating the probability variation jackpot is included (Z8512: Yes), then it is determined whether the tilting device 310 is located at the initial position (origin position) (Z8513). If it is determined that the position is located at the origin position (Z8513: Yes), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, "2" is set in the tilting operation status (Z8515), a display command corresponding to the current determination result is set (Z2952 process 8516), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8513, when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not located at the origin position (Z8513: No), a display ending command indicating that there is a probable change jackpot in the hold is set (Z8517). , End this process. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of Z8512 that there is no winning information indicating a probable change jackpot in the winning information (Z8512: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is set in the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of the movable accessory. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, at the execution timing of the compound effect, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect has not returned to the initial position. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the composite effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the accessory effects overlap, one of the accessory effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is composed. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation promotion effect may be executed multiple times. .. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the content of the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect is set differently according to the position of the movable accessory, for example, the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position. If it is determined that the display is performed, a predetermined compound effect (for example, a compound effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position within 1 second. When it is determined that the position (state) is correct, a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is delayed by 1 second and executed, and the movable accessory is within 1 second. If it is determined that the position (state) can be moved to the initial position, various effects may be set so as to execute the suggestion effect of only the liquid crystal effect without moving the movable accessory. This makes it possible to perform various effects without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as the accessory effect for moving the movable accessory, the first accessory effect executed with the predetermined first position as the initial position and the second position different from the first position as the end position, and the above-mentioned first accessory effect. If it is a pachinko machine that can at least execute the first position and the second character effect executed with the third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-mentioned second position as the end position, the combined effect. It may be configured to determine whether to execute the first accessory effect or the second accessory effect based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the contents of.

Further, in this case, regardless of the fluctuation of the special figure, it is preferable to configure the movable accessory so as to be able to execute the fanning effect of bringing the movable accessory closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite effect desired by the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In this control example, an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect for suggesting the winning jackpot type during the jackpot game has been described. The technical idea used in this control example may be applied to the effect for suggesting (variable effect) and the effect for suggesting the lottery result of a normal symbol (normal figure variable effect). Further, in this control example, the tilting device 310 arranged in the vicinity of the frame button 22a as a movable accessory is used as an example, but at least the predetermined first position (initial position) is different from the first position. Any movable accessory (movable member) configured to be movable between the second position (movable position) may be used, for example, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) arranged in the variable display unit 80. Alternatively, it may be a movable accessory (movable member) for decoration attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in this control example, as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310), a first operation condition that can be satisfied during the jackpot game and a second operation condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the special symbol are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time is reached, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22a, and a hold. A fifth operating condition or the like that is established based on the fact that the number of stored items is a predetermined number (for example, eight) may be set as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). By setting a plurality of operating conditions of the movable member (tilting device 310) in this way, the movable member can be moved at various timings, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to this control example, even if the opportunity to move the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the effect display is increased for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, the accessory using the movable member is used. It is possible to provide the player with a composite effect that combines the effect and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a big hit game) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. It is also possible to provide a production (fanning effect) to be performed so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means. In this case, since the position of the movable member becomes indefinite when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed, a situation in which the movable member is not located at the initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period is likely to occur. However, by using the technical idea of this control example, it is possible to execute a compound production (holding continuous production) during the ending period without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the promotion effect in which the operation means is notified whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is a probabilistic jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, and when it is determined that the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, execute the hold continuous effect suggestion to that effect. You may. As a result, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed, even if the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, the hold using the movable member is held without operating the operating means (so that the movable member does not move). It is possible to facilitate continuous production. In this way, by executing the hold ream suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being intentionally moved in one effect (promotion effect), and to make it easier to move the movable member in another effect (hold ream effect). It becomes possible. Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the effect to be executed can be made more diverse, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<12th control example>
Next, a twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 593 to 603. In the eleventh control example described above, when the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect is executed, the movable member used for the accessory effect at the start timing of the composite effect (the movable member). When it is determined whether the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, it is configured to execute the composite effect and it is determined that the tilting device 310) is not located at the initial position. Was configured not to perform compound effects. As a result, when the combined effect is executed, the control means (voice lamp control device 113) that controls the effect has the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display effect and the drive means (driving means) that operates the movable accessory. Even if commands (commands) related to the combined effect are output independently to the drive motor) and (hereinafter referred to as each device), the effect executed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the effect is achieved. Was able to be enhanced.

However, in the technique used in the eleventh control example described above, in order to output a command for simultaneously executing the composite effect to each device, for example, the movable member is moved to the initial position corresponding to the compound effect. The operation (preparation operation) for making the compound effect is executed after receiving the command (command) for executing the compound effect. That is, when the composite effect is executed using a plurality of devices (movable members, liquid crystal devices, etc.), the preparatory operation for making the composite effect feasible is completed in each device (preparation). It is necessary to configure the period) to be included in the first half period of the compound production.

When such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect in which the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the character effect are synchronized, but it is necessary to provide a long preparation period and within a limited time. There is a problem that the effect period in which the actual compound effect (the effect executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set is shortened when the compound effect is executed. Further, there is a problem that the player is aware of the effect content of the compound effect executed by the movement status (preparation operation) of the movable accessory during the preparation period, which is the stage before the compound effect is performed.

In particular, as a composite effect, the first compound effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and the accessory effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. If the pachinko machine has a second compound effect and is configured to have a different selection ratio between the first compound effect and the second compound effect according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the character moves to the first position or the second position, it becomes easier for the player to determine even the lottery result of the special symbol, which is an effect (directing effect). There was a problem that the effect of the composite effect) was reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, at a time point before the setting of the compound effect (a time point before the determination of whether or not the compound effect is executed is executed). , It is configured to execute the control to execute the preparatory operation for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by configuring the preparatory movement to be set separately from the setting of the compound effect, when the preparatory operation of the movable accessory is executed for the player, the compound effect (character effect) is performed. It can make you think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparatory movement is executed regardless of whether or not the compound effect (feature effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined according to the movable status of the movable accessory during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is discriminated.

Further, in the eleventh control example described above, since the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the control for the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310), for example, a predetermined effect period (big hit). For a display effect in which the effect is continuously executed during the round period (variation period of the special symbol), a display command (for example, a display round) indicating the effect mode of the display effect to be executed within the effect period. The command and the variable pattern command for display) are output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period, and within the predetermined effect period (big hit round period, change period of special symbol). For a character effect in which the effect is executed only for a specific period (for example, a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the effect period), for a movable member (tilting device 310) after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the effect period. Therefore, it is necessary to output a command to perform the preparatory operation (for example, the preparatory period is 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (timer or the like) for measuring the timing of outputting a command to the movable member is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, but in order to enhance the effect of the effect, the effect period is set. In the case of configuring the accessory effect using the movable member at a plurality of timings, it is necessary to design the measuring means so that the measuring means can be measured for a plurality of periods, and the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. ) Is configured to output a command to move it. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 12th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 593, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the operation control of the movable accessory is added to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the operation command (command) can be output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the block diagram of FIG. 593, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configurations of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the electrical configuration not described (for example, for example). The same configuration as the above-mentioned eleventh control example is applied to the power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 593, in the twelfth control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on the image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third symbol display device 81. , It is configured to output a command for operating the movable accessory to the accessory control device 229. Here, as shown in FIG. 593, the accessory control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive the data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and the data (various types) output from the display control device 114. Input port y304 for inputting commands), MPUy301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit, and output port y306 for outputting operation data to various movable accessories (tilting device 310, other devices 228). And, are installed. The MPUy301 has a ROMy302 that stores predetermined program information (operation scenarios for operating movable accessories (preparatory operation scenarios, etc.)) when executing various control programs executed by the MPUy301, and various types. RAMy 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data and the like of the above, is built in.

The MPU y301 of the accessory control device 229 is electrically connected to the input port y305 and the output port y306. When a command for designating movable data for moving a movable accessory is received from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229, the command is sent to the MPU y301 via the input port y305 and the bus line. Entered. Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROMy 302, and the operation instruction corresponding to the read operation pattern is given to various movable accessories via the output port y306. Is output.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Further, in this control example, data (command) related to audio output can be output to the audio output device 226 from the output port 239 of the display control device 114. Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114. Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the voice output device 226 is configured to be able to receive data (command) related to voice output from the voice lamp control device 113 as in each control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 593, the audio output device 226 is equipped with MPUm301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPUm301 has a ROMm302 in which program information (operation scenario for operating a movable accessory (preparatory operation scenario, etc.)) predetermined for executing various control programs executed by the MPUm301 is stored, and the relevant ROMm302. It has a built-in RAMm 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU m 301.

The MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port m305 and the amplifier unit m306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU m301 via the input port m305 and the bus line m304. Will be done. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM m302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the amplifier unit m306. For example, the voice data corresponding to the BGM is output to the CN1, the voice data corresponding to the stop sound is output to the CN2, and the voice data corresponding to the warning sound is output to the CN3. Then, it is amplified by the amplifier unit m306 and input to the speaker unit 450. As a result, various sounds designated by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450.

Here, the configuration of the ROM m302 provided in the MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMm 302 of the MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the display control device 114, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier unit m306.

Specifically, in the voice file storage area (not shown), music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sound, and voice generated during preparation drive for accessory operation are simulated. Pseudo-voice data related to the reproduced pseudo-sound is stored. In this control example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned pseudo voice during the preparation period in which the movable accessory can execute the preparation drive.

With this configuration, the same pseudo voice is output regardless of whether the preparation drive is actually executed or the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, it is configured to execute the bonus effect of moving the tilting device 310 as a movable bonus, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game. In the case of the accessory effect executed during the operation, the operation contents (see FIG. 586 (b)) of the operation pointers “1” and “2” defined in the ending scenario table 222ib2 correspond to the preparatory drive.

Here, the operation contents of the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 586 (b)) defined in the ending scenario table 222ib2 are operations for moving the mechanism (cam, etc.) inside the tilting device 310. Therefore, the player cannot visually recognize the operation, but since the drive motor is driven during the preparatory drive, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is disengaged reach the player. There is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, as in this control example, by outputting the sound generated at the time of the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player is determined. It can be difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparatory drive is executed.

<About the flow of production during the jackpot game in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 594 to 596, the flow of the effect during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to output an effect execution command to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226 with respect to the eleventh control example described above. The control content for the effect executed during the final round (16 rounds) and the control content for the effect executed during the ending period are different, and other than that, they are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 594, a flow in the case of executing a hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, will be described during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 594 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 594, when the jackpot game (big hit game period) is started, the specific period (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) forming the jackpot game period is started at the timing. A display command indicating a display mode of the effect content (liquid crystal display) within a specific period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 creates image data based on the received display command, and displays the liquid crystal display (opening display, round) on the third symbol display device 81. Display, interval display,) is executed. Since the detailed control content for the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute various displays is the same as each control example described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a display command (display final round command) corresponding to the final round (16 rounds), the voice lamp control device 113 assigns a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of the round game) to the display command. Set including the specified information for specifying. Upon receiving the final round command for display, the display control device 114 executes the liquid crystal display during the final round, and at a specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display, the accessory control device 229. , And a command (operation command) is output to the voice output device 226.

Upon receiving the operation command (command for the accessory) output from the display control device 114, the accessory control device 229 executes a preparatory drive for the movable accessory (tilting device 310). Further, the voice output device 226 executes pseudo-voice output when it receives an operation command (voice command) output from the display control device 114. That is, based on the designated information included in the final round command for display, the preparation drive (preparation period 2 seconds) for the composite effect (last effect) that can be executed during the ending period is executed.

Here, the specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display is set to be 2 seconds before the timing at which the final round can be completed. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is the first condition that 10 balls win the specific winning opening 65a in one round game, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the above-mentioned control examples. , It is configured to end when any of the second conditions in which 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round game is satisfied. Therefore, in this control example, the timing obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the timing at which the first condition can be satisfied (the timing at which 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game) (8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game). Timing) is set as the timing specified by the specified information.

During this preparation period, the accessory control device 229 executes the preparation drive for the tilting device 310, and the voice output device 226 outputs pseudo voice to the speaker 450 during the preparation period. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the round display of the final round is continuously executed (standby state) so that the player is not determined that the current preparation period is in progress. After that, when the round game of the final round ends and the ending period starts, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the combined effect (last effect) during the ending period, and determines whether or not to execute the compound effect (last effect). When it is determined that the (holding continuous effect) is to be executed, a display ending command including the execution of the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command including the execution of the last effect, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last effect, and causes the accessory control device 229 to execute the liquid crystal display. Outputs a command for a character to execute an operation effect corresponding to the last effect. Then, when the bonus control device 229 receives a command for the bonus to execute the operation effect corresponding to the last effect, the tilt device 310 whose preparatory drive has been completed is provided with the bonus effect corresponding to the last effect. It outputs operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for execution.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, similarly to the eleventh control example described above, it is configured to determine at the start of the ending period whether or not to execute the composite effect (last effect) during the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16 rounds), which is the timing before the start of the ending period, it is not determined whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed. By designating the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory in such a state, that is, in a state where it has not been determined whether or not the compound effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period. The preparation drive is executed regardless of whether the compound effect (last effect) is executed or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period, depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595, the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 595 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 595 is the same as FIG. 594 described above, except that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 595, when it is determined that the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not executed as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the voice lamp control is performed. A display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 11th control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 596 differs from FIG. 595 described above only in that the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed during the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds). Everything else is the same. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 596, in the final round (16 rounds), an operation effect for moving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed (round effect drive is executed), and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. When the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory command output from the display control device 114 during the moving operation (return operation), the preparatory drive based on the received accessory command is performed by the movable accessory (tilting device 310). ) Is determined to be in an unexecutable state, and the preparation drive is not executed. Even in this case, the audio output device 226 outputs pseudo audio.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. Further, since the preparatory drive was not executed during the final round (16 rounds), the compound effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. In this case as well, as in the pattern described with reference to FIG. 595, as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the last effect (holding continuous effect). If it is determined not to execute, a display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 11th control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

As described above, in this control example, even if it is not determined whether or not the specific operation effect is executed, the preparatory drive for the specific operation effect that can be executed during the specific effect period (ending period) is not determined. It is configured to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, the preparation drive is executed as an obstruction means for setting a preparation period for executing the preparation drive in advance and making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed during the preparation period. It has a pseudo-voice output means for pseudo-outputting the sound generated in the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, in this control example, the preparatory drive is not executed when a predetermined non-executable condition is satisfied during the preparatory period, and even if the preparatory drive is not executed during the preparatory period, it is simulated. It is configured to output pseudo-voice by voice output means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

<Control processing in the audio lamp control device of the 12th control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 597. The twelfth control example differs from the eleventh control example described above in that the round process 12 (see Z8352 in FIG. 597) is executed instead of the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591). The other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 12 (Z8352). The round process 12 (Z8352) is a process for determining whether the newly executed round is the final round (16 rounds) with respect to the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that a process of setting a display command dedicated to the final round (16 rounds) is added when it is determined to be the final round (16 rounds).

Specifically, when the round process 12 (Z8352) is executed, the same Z8411 to Z8413 as the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above are executed, and then newly executed. It is determined whether the round is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451). In the processing of Z8451, when it is determined that it is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: Yes), then the final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the round processing 11 of the above-mentioned 11th control example (FIG. The same processing of Z8414 as (see Z8302 of 591) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8451 that it is not the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing of Z8452 includes information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16 rounds) and information for indicating the timing for executing the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310). The final round command for display is set. In this way, by including the information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory drive in the final round command for display set at the start timing of the new round, the voice lamp control device 113 has a movable accessory (tilting device). It is not necessary to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring the timing of executing the preparatory drive of 310).

When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the display data table is stored in the clock counter 233h. Since the effect display corresponding to the value of the timekeeping counter 233h that is set and updated is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the timing for executing the preparation drive for the final round command for display is executed. By including the information for indicating the above, it is possible to determine the timing at which the preparation drive is executed by diverting the time measurement information of the time measurement counter 233h used for displaying the image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a new measuring means (timer) for determining the timing of executing the preparation drive, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 12th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 598 and 599. In the twelfth control example, the command determination process 12 is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) for the control process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. (See Z3392 in FIG. 598) is different in that it is performed.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392). When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes from Z3401 to Z3419 as the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) are executed, and it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Z3418. If so (Z3418: No), then it is determined whether there is a final round command for display (Z3491).

If it is determined that there is a final round command for display in the processing of Z3491 (Z3491: Yes), the final round processing is executed (Z3492), the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and it is determined that there is no final round command for display. If this is the case (Z3491: No), the process proceeds to the same Z3420 process as the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 599, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in the command determination process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 598) will be described. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting a display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting a command to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226. And are executed.

When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), and then the standby display timing set in the display data table is set. Set the process to output the accessory command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory drive and the audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output pseudo-audio. (Z3496), this process is terminated.

As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes a value for indicating the standby display timing (start timing of the preparation period), the command for the accessory and the command for the voice can be output in synchronization.

<Control processing in the audio output device of the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 600 and 601 various control processes executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 or the command output process of the display control device 114. The voice output device 226 is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

In this way, various display commands and voices output to the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive commands for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110. By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (effect display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). (Visual display mode) and directed sound mode (auditory voice mode) output from the speaker 450 via the voice output device 226) can be centrally set. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set a voice command (command for outputting a pseudo voice) to be output to the voice output device 226. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can output the sound at the timing when the display data is actually created. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display contents are displayed. It is possible to perform an effect that is more synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 450.

In addition, for example, when the effect display is not properly executed due to an abnormality in the control process of the display control device 114, the sound command is not output to the sound output device 226, so that the effect display is not executed. Regardless of this, it is possible to suppress that only the sound is output or that the effect display and the sound execution timing are different from each other.

First, with reference to FIG. 600 (a), the main process executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 600A is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (Z8501). The details of this command determination process (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. 601. However, when various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are received, the commands are received. The process for outputting the voice corresponding to the voice command is executed. After the processing of Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In the processing of the Z8502, processing for executing playback of audio data and updating of the value of the pointer for music is executed.

When the processing of Z8502 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM m 303 (Z8503). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z8505), and the power-off process is executed (Z8506). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: No), it is determined whether or not the RAMm 303 is destroyed (Z8504) based on the keyword stored in the RAM m 303, and the RAM m 303 is destroyed. If not (Z8504: No), the process returns to Z8501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMm 303 is destroyed (Z8504: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 600 (b). FIG. 600B is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 600 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMm 303 (Z8601), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, the command determination process (Z8501), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 600 (a)) executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. 601. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z8501), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z8701: No), a command is used. The judgment process is finished and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z8702), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z8703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice command output from the display control device 114, that is, a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704), and the pseudo voice is determined. When it is determined that there is a voice command for outputting (Z8704: Yes), a voice file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area of the ROM m302. Next, set the value of the pointer for music to the value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo-voice is played, set the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo-voice data, and set the playback of the pseudo-voice data. (Z8706), the process proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no voice command output from the display control device 114 in the processing of Z8704 (Z8704: No), or when the above-mentioned processing of Z8706 is executed, then another voice command is used. It is determined whether or not there is a command, that is, a voice command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707).

In the processing of Z8707, for example, a music BGM corresponding to a special symbol variation effect or a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, a stop sound sound corresponding to a stop display timing of a special symbol (third symbol), and a frame button 22a. It is determined whether or not a voice command for indicating a pressing sound corresponding to the pressing timing of the button, an error voice corresponding to an error notification, or the like is output from the voice lamp control device 113. Here, if it is determined that there are various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707: Yes), the voice file (music data) corresponding to the voice (music) indicated by the received various voice commands. The group) is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (data group for music) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the voice data indicated by the received various voice commands is set in a predetermined time measuring means (timer), the playback of various voice data is set (Z8708), and the process of Z8701 is performed. Transition.

If it is determined that there is no other voice data in the processing of Z8707 (Z8707: No), other command processing is executed (Z8709), the process shifts to Z8701, and the above-mentioned control is repeatedly executed.

<Regarding the control process of the accessory control device 229 in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 602 and 603, the control processing contents of the accessory control device 229 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the accessory command set by the display control device 114 is output to the accessory control device 229 by the command output process of the display control device 114, and the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory. It is configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) corresponding to the command to the corresponding movable accessory.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the display control thereof. By setting various command for the accessory that the device 114 outputs to the accessory control device 229, a plurality of effect display modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to operate the movable accessory in synchronization with the effect display mode (visual display mode) to be performed. Therefore, as an effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, various devices (third symbol). When a composite effect of a display device 81, a movable accessory, and a speaker 450) is executed, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode set by each of the various devices, and the effect can be achieved. The effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 602 (a), the main process executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the accessory control device 229 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is executed (Z9001). The details of this command determination process (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 603, but when various command for the accessory output from the display control device 114 is received, it corresponds to the received command for the accessory. The process for outputting the made operation data is executed. After the processing of Z9001, other processing for executing the reproduction of the operation data and the update of the value of the operation timer for updating the operation scenario is executed (Z9002).

When the processing of the Z9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAMy 303 (Z9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z9005), and the power-off process is executed (Z9006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAMy 303 is destroyed (Z9004) based on the keyword stored in the RAMy 303, and the RAMy 303 is destroyed. If not (Z9004: No), the process returns to Z9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMy 303 is destroyed (Z9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 602 (b). FIG. 602 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 602 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the display control device 114.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMy 303 (Z9101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, with reference to FIG. 603, the command determination process (Z9001), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 602 (a)) executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229, will be described. FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z9201: No), a command is used. The judgment process is finished and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z9202), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z9203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory command among the unprocessed commands (S9204), and if it is determined that there is an accessory command (Z9204: Yes), then this time. It is determined whether or not the movable accessory to be operated by the received accessory command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the processing of Z9205, first, it is determined which movable accessory command is the command indicating the operation scenario for which the accessory command received this time, and for example, the operation scenario for moving the tilting device 310. When the command indicates, the displacement of the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is determined. When this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation because the drive motor is being driven.

In this way, by configuring so as to directly grasp the drive status of the drive motor, even when the configuration in which operation data is output from a plurality of control devices is used, the movable status of the movable accessory can be reliably grasped. Can be grasped.

If it is determined in the processing of Z9205 that the target movable accessory is in operation (Z9205: Yes), the operation based on the command for the accessory received this time cannot be executed, so the operation is performed. Without outputting the data, the command for the accessory received this time is discarded (Z9206), and the process proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, when it is determined that the target movable accessory is not in operation (Z9205: No), the operation data (ending scenario table 222ib2) for causing the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to execute the preparatory operation. (Operation data corresponding to the operation pointers “1” and “2” (see FIG. 586 (b))) are output (Z9207), and the process proceeds to Z9201.

Further, in the processing of Z9204, if it is determined that there is no command for the accessory (Z9204: No), other command processing is executed (Z9207), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z9201.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, tilting) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. It is configured to output a command for moving the device 310). Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in this control example, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player by outputting a voice generated during the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed. Can be made difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparation drive is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, a composite effect executed during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but the timing at which the composite effect is executed is not limited to the jackpot game, and for example, to show the lottery result of a special symbol. The special map may be changing. In this case, when the technical idea of setting the character effect and the preparatory operation differently is used as the variation effect executed during the special figure variation, for example, the winning information stored on hold is preliminarily determined. Based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means, for example, when it is determined that the compound effect is to be executed in the special figure variation executed after two fluctuations, or the composite effect is not executed in the special figure variation executed in the two fluctuation degrees. In a part of the case where it is determined that the preparatory movement is executed, it is preferable to set the preparatory movement so that the preparatory movement is executed before the special figure fluctuation after the two fluctuations is executed.

Further, when a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory operation is provided for the operation means (frame button 22) when a specific operation is executed, and it is determined by the determination means to execute the preparatory operation. It may be configured to perform a preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation effect so that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is located at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, the probability that the composite effect is executed can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means, so that the player can operate the operating means more positively. Further, the operation timing to the operation means in which the above-mentioned determination means is used is, for example, an operation means as a suggestion effect suggesting a lottery result of the previous special figure change executed before the special figure change in which the operation effect is executed. As a result of operating the operation means, when the effect suggesting that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out of order is executed, the determination means decides to execute the preparatory operation. Good to configure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player operate the operating means for performing the preparatory operation without discomfort. Further, since it is possible to execute the preparatory operation of the movable accessory while the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the change in the previous special figure is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the movable accessory It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

<13th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 615. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example) described above, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change, the pachinko machine is reproduced according to the special figure change when the power supply is cut off. The configuration is such that the playback position of the BGM is backed up, and then, when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the playback of the BGM is started from the backed up playback position. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the special figure fluctuation that was being executed before the power was turned off was restarted as it was after the power was turned on again. Was there.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change and then the power is turned on again to restart the special figure change, the initial display control device 114 After the setting is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81), the variation display effect corresponding to the special figure variation interrupted by the power failure is started in a pseudo manner. It was configured to be. This pseudo variation display effect is also executed when the special figure variation restarted based on the power being turned on again ends before the completion of the initial setting. That is, during a predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, the first is not synchronized with the fluctuation start timing or stop timing of the actual special symbol fluctuation (variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37). 3 The configuration is such that the variable display effect that is pseudo-executed in the symbol display device 81 is executed. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the thirteenth control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned ninth control example, when the background change operation (pressing operation for the frame button 22a) is executed during the execution of the special figure change, the “silhouette display” is displayed at a predetermined ratio. It was configured to be selectable. This silhouette display is basically configured so that it is easier to set when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation than when it is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, so the degree of expectation of a jackpot depends on the presence or absence of the silhouette display. It has realized a novel game property that the player who wants to predict can be made to positively change the background mode while the special figure change is being executed. In other words, since it is configured so that the player can positively change the background mode, the effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special figure change is also frequently changed. It was possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example is common to the 9th control example up to the point that the silhouette display can be set by executing the background change operation, but the suggestion content by this silhouette display Is different from the ninth control example. More specifically, in the thirteenth control example, silhouettes of a plurality of shapes (display modes) are provided, and the silhouettes are displayed according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouettes displayed during the execution of the variable display effect. It is configured to be able to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display. With this configuration, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively execute the background change operation. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In this thirteenth control example, the effect using the silhouette display is referred to as "silhouette notice effect".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 9 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 604, in the thirteenth control example, the transition of the display mode in the BGM and the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation. explain. FIG. 604 (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation restarted after the power is turned on elapses after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604 (a), in the thirteenth control example, among the special figure variation BGM composed of the A melody, the B melody, and the C melody, the end timing of the C melody and the initial stage of the display control device 114. The reproduction start position of the special figure variation BGM is set so as to match the end timing of the setting. FIG. 604 illustrates a case where the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end timing of the C melody of the special figure variation BGM are matched by starting the special figure variation BGM from the middle of the B melody. ing. By setting the playback start position of the BGM so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody of the BGM match, after that, the special figure fluctuation BGM is simply loop-played until the end of the fluctuation as in the normal time. Then, at the return timing of the display control device 114, the BGM can be started from the beginning of the special figure variation BGM. That is, the timing at which the initial setting is completed and the variation display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81 can be matched with the timing at which the BGM is reproduced from the beginning of the special symbol variation BGM. Therefore, the BGM in the special figure variation effect executed in the remaining variation time at the end of the initial setting can be reproduced in a natural voice mode. Therefore, a more suitable voice mode can be realized. Further, since it is not necessary to set the reproduction from the head position of the BGM at the end of the initial setting, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes according to the progress of the special figure change. The display control device 114 executes control to transfer images used for various effects to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while performing the initial setting. Here, if the special figure change is not executed, only the transfer of the resident image needs to be executed, and the initial setting time is relatively short. However, if the special figure change is executed, the initial setting is completed. Sometimes, it is necessary to prepare image data used for variable display effect. Therefore, the more image data used for the special map fluctuation, the longer the period required for the initial setting. In this thirteenth control example, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, or after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or the supermarket using the most image data. The time required for initial setting varies depending on whether the reach has been developed. Specifically, before the reach development, the initial setting is completed in 1 second, but after the development to the normal reach, it takes 2 seconds for the initial setting, and after the super reach development, the initial setting is completed. It takes 4 seconds to complete. Therefore, in this thirteenth control example, the development status of the fluctuation display at the time of turning on the power is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation type, the period required for the initial setting is predicted, and the predicted initial setting period is met. The configuration is such that the start timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM is set. As a result, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be surely matched.

FIG. 604 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off and restarted after the power is turned on is completed before the initial setting is completed. FIG. 604 (b) illustrates a case where the special figure change is executed in a situation where at least one holding ball is present when the power is cut off. As shown in FIG. 604 (b), when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the end timing of the initial setting is predicted, and the BGM ends according to the predicted end timing. Playback start position is set. That is, similarly to FIG. 604 (a), since the reproduction is started from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody coincide with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604 (b), when the special figure change ends during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, the special figure based on the reserved ball (held ball 1) held at the time of power failure. Figure variation (variation display of the first symbol in the first display device 37) is started. FIG. 604 (b) illustrates a case where the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball 1 (maintenance 1) is later than the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604 (b), the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the hold ball 1 at the time of power failure continues across the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. do. On the other hand, as a display mode of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 604 (b), the screen during the initial setting (image at power-on) continues to be displayed until the initial setting is completed. Based on the completion of the initial setting (it is possible to display a normal image), first, a pseudo deviation display for 1 second is executed. This is a variation for simulating the result of the variation display interrupted when the power is cut off (the result was shown in the first symbol display device 37 during the initial setting) in the third symbol display device 81. It is a display effect. By executing this pseudo-variation effect, the result (comparison) of the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the simple variation display by the power-on variation image in the third symbol display device 81, which ended during the execution of the initial setting. It is possible to notify the player who overlooked the result of the variation display in a mode that is difficult to confirm) in a mode that is easier to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of the special figure change during execution when the power is turned off. If the lottery result of the special figure change that was being executed when the power was turned off was a big hit, the fluctuation period of the special figure change that was restarted after the power was turned on has elapsed (that is, during the execution of the initial setting). ) Since the jackpot is started (there is no room to execute the pseudo fluctuation), even if the pseudo fluctuation is not executed, the player may be suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure. not.

As shown in FIG. 604 (b), after the pseudo fluctuation display for 1 second is completed, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining fluctuation time. With this configuration, both the result of the variation display that ended during the execution of the initial setting in the display control device 114 and the result of the variation display that started during the execution of the initial setting are displayed to the player. It can be easily understood.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 1 second (the fluctuation time elapses during the execution of the pseudo fluctuation), the fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off. After the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the display is executed, the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. If the residual variation time of the variation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the pseudo variation corresponding to the variation display that was being executed at the time of power failure was executed over the residual variation time. Later, a one-second pseudo-variation corresponding to hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. With such a configuration, the pseudo-variation can be more preferably executed.

<Electrical configuration in the 13th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 605 (a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 605 (a), in the configuration of ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example, the background notice selection table 222ga is deleted with respect to the configuration of ROM 222 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558 (a)). The difference is that a silhouette notice selection table 222ja is provided instead. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 9th control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette notice selection table 222ja is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect in the thirteenth control example. Here, as described above, the silhouette notice effect in the thirteenth control example is the latter half of the variation display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed by the background change operation during the execution of the variation display effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in (predetermined period). More specifically, as the silhouette mode (shape) that can be displayed in the silhouette notice effect in the 13th control example, a bubble-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a bubble and a fish-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a fish (FIG. 560 (a). ), A wooden silhouette imitating the shape of a tree (see FIG. 560 (b)), and a volcanic silhouette imitating the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes suggests the type of advance notice effect (notice type) executed in the latter half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that a bubble warning effect in which a large number of bubbles are generated in the display screen is executed when developing into super reach, and the fish-shaped silhouette develops into super reach. It suggests that a school of fish will be announced when the school of fish crosses the display screen, and the wooden silhouette shows the display mode in which the tree sways due to strong wind when it develops into super reach. The volcanic silhouette suggests that the notice effect will be executed, and the volcanic silhouette suggests that the eruption notice effect will be executed, which shows the display mode in which the mountain erupts when developing into super reach. be.

The bubble notice effect and the fish school notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the sea mode, and the wind advance notice effect and the eruption advance notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the mountain mode. It is a notice production of. The fish school notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the bubble notice effect (the rate of selection is low in the case of deviation fluctuation), and the eruption notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the wind notice effect. Is. The bubble notice effect and the wind notice are configured to have the same jackpot expectation when executed, and the fish school notice effect and the eruption notice effect are also configured to have the same jackpot expectation. ing. For this reason, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect in which the bubble warning effect is set, the variable display effect is switched to the wind notice effect, and the wind notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background by performing the background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect, the display is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect. In addition, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the fluctuation display effect in which the fish school notice effect is set, the change is switched to the variation display effect accompanied by the eruption notice effect, and the change in which the eruption notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background during the high-speed fluctuation period in the display effect, the display effect is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the fish school notice effect. The details of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja for selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 606.

FIG. 606 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 606, in the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example, the type of the silhouette notice effect to be selected is defined in association with each range of the value of the effect counter 223h. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 606, for the variable display effect in which the advance notice type that does not accompany the development to super reach is set, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation, A silhouette notice "none" is specified in association with the entire range that the effect counter 223h can take. Therefore, if the player performs the background change operation while the variable display effect of the effect mode that does not accompany the development to super reach is executed, the silhouette notice effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the bubble notice super reach, the effect counter. The value of 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 149" in association with the silhouette notice "none", and in the range of "150 to 198" in association with the silhouette notice effect of the "bubble-shaped silhouette". There is. Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the bubble warning super reach, the bubble-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a bubble notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to positively change the background mode for the player who wants to confirm the silhouette notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the fish school notice super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 179", and a silhouette notice effect of a "fish-shaped silhouette" is associated with a value of "180 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the fish school notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the fish-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a fish school notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, the silhouette notice effect is achieved by configuring the super reach effect with the fish school notice effect, which has a relatively high expectation of being a big hit, at a lower execution rate than the super reach effect with the bubble notice effect. If this does not occur, it can be expected that the fish school notice effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the silhouette effect is executed and the type of silhouette, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the wind warning super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 99", and a silhouette notice effect of a "wooden silhouette" is associated with a value of "100 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the wind warning super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the wooden silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a wind notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the wind notice super reach is higher than the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the bubble notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 149", and a silhouette notice effect of a "volcanic silhouette" is associated with a value of "150 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the fluctuation display is accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the volcano type silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by an eruption notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the eruption notice super reach is higher than the rate of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the fish school notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the player performs the background change operation during the execution of the variable display effect in which the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, it is predetermined for each type of the advance notice effect. At a certain rate, the silhouette notice effect that suggests the execution of the notice effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to know whether or not the advance notice effect has been executed and the type of the advance notice effect before the advance notice effect is started. The background can be changed. Further, in the thirteenth control example, when the silhouette notice effect occurs, it is confirmed that the super reach, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit, is developed. Expectations can be improved. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, the silhouette notice effect can also indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 605 (b), the details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 605 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirteenth control example has a pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja and a pseudo fluctuation time with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558 (b)). The only difference is that the counter 223jb and the silhouette lottery flag 223jc have been added.

The pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is the number of fluctuation displays in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol (excluding the fluctuation image when the power is turned on) is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 among the fluctuation displays executed after the power is turned on again. It is a counter for counting (the number of executions of pseudo-variation). The pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is incremented by 1 each time a stop command is received (at the fluctuation stop timing) during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 (see Z2277 in FIG. 607), and the pseudo fluctuation effect is produced. Each time it is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see Z2316 in FIG. 610 and Z2560 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223j is 1 or more, a new pseudo-variation is executed every time the variation or the pseudo-variation ends.

The pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation effect. At the start of the pseudo fluctuation, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 610, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223jb becomes 0, and when the value of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 1 or more, the execution of the pseudo-variation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb becomes 0 during the execution of the fluctuation display, the normal fluctuation display is executed for the remaining fluctuation time, and the pseudo fluctuation time counter is in the fluctuation stop state (pending out state). When the value of 223jb becomes 0, the fluctuation is stopped as it is.

The silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is a flag for indicating whether or not the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222ja has been executed in the variable display of 1. If this silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is on, it means that the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222ja has already been executed in the variable display during execution, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed. means. The initial value of the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to off, and is set to on at the timing when the background change operation is first performed during the execution of the variation display (see Z2896 in FIG. 613). It is also set to off when the fluctuation is stopped (see Z2280 in FIG. 607).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 607 to 615, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. First, the fluctuation stop processing 13 (Z2246) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 607. The fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example, and is the same as the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 564). This is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

Of the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 is the same as each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265), and the process shifts to Z2266. When the processing of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the processing is shifted to Z2273.

In the processing of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2275). If it is determined in the processing of Z2275 that the return-changing flag 223ff is off (Z2275: No), the processing is shifted to Z2280. On the other hand, in the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223ff is on (Z2275: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot stop symbol is set (Z2276). When it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is set in the processing of Z2276 (Z2276: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is cleared to 0 (Z2278), and the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off (Z2278). Z2279), the process shifts to Z2280.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2276, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the jackpot is not set (Z2276: No), it is determined that the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2277), and the process shifts to Z2280. In the processing of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to off (Z2280), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607), the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja can be added by 1 each time the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to accurately execute the pseudo-variation effect for the number of deviation fluctuations executed during the initial setting after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the initial setting is completed, the variation display that was being executed when the power is turned off and the variation display of the third symbol that is the same number of times as the variation display based on the reserved ball when the power is turned off are displayed to the player. Can be done at. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, the fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 608. The fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541), and the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). ) Is the process for executing the control according to the return variation command received from the main control device 110, as in the variation return process (see FIG. 541).

Of the fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284, the fluctuation recovery processing (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) Z2281 to Z2181 to The same process as each process of Z2284 is executed. Further, in the fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, when the processing of Z2284 is completed, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation recovery command and the fluctuation type (variation time) is next. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the residual variation time corresponds to the normal reach effect (Z2331), and if it is determined to be the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2231: Yes), the special figure variation. BGM is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 2 seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2331 that it is not the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2331: No), then whether or not it is the residual variation time corresponding to the super reach effect is determined. If it is determined (Z2333) and it is determined that the super reach effect is in progress (Z2333: Yes), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 4 seconds before the end of the music (Z2333: Yes). Z2334), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2333 that the super reach effect is not being executed (Z2333: No), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is reproduced from the reproduction position corresponding to 1 second before the end of the music. Set to (Z2335) to end this process.

By executing this fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation can be terminated at the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. That is, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or after the super reach development where the image data used is the most. By making the start timing of the special figure variation BGM different depending on the case, it is possible to surely match the end timing of the initial setting with the end timing of the special figure variation BGM.

Next, the display rising process 13 (Z2247) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 609. The display rising process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed in place of the display rising process (see FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the display rising process 13 (and the eighth control example). ), This is a process for setting the variation display of the third symbol according to the value of the remaining variation time counter when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, as in the display rise process (see FIG. 542). ..

Of the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299, the display rise processing (FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 of (see) is executed. Further, in the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223ff is ON in the processing of S2291 (Z2291: Yes), then the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is used. When it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z2301) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is determined to be larger than 0 (Z2301: Yes), the display control device 114 Since it means that the special figure change has been completed at least once during the initial setting, the pseudo change start process for starting the pseudo change effect indicating the result of the special figure change completed during the initial setting is performed. Execute (Z2302) to end this process. The details of this pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. 610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 in the processing of Z2301 (Z2301: No), the processing is shifted to Z2292.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation start process (Z2302) is a process for starting a pseudo-variation effect indicating the result of the special figure variation completed during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 610, when the pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2311), and the balance specified from the read-out residual fluctuation time counter 223fg value. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2312 that the residual variation time is not 0 (Z2312: No), then it is determined whether or not the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). When it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2313 (Z2313: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2312 (Z2312: Yes), 1 The start of the pseudo-variation effect for one second is set (Z2314), and the counter value corresponding to one second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2315). Next, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2316), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2313, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: No), then it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317), and the residual fluctuation is performed. If it is determined that the time is 1 second or less (Z2317: No), it means that the remaining fluctuation time is not sufficient to perform the pseudo fluctuation, so the display of the power recovery screen (image when the power is turned on) is continued. Is set (Z2318), 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja to update (Z2319), and the process shifts to Z2231. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2317, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: Yes), if the pseudo fluctuation of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the pseudo fluctuation is set. Is less than 1 second, and there is not enough time left to perform the special figure fluctuation. Therefore, the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2320), and the process is shifted to Z2321. In the processing of Z2321 executed after the processing of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2321), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation start processing (see FIG. 610), the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the form of a pseudo-variation effect by the third symbol after the completion of the initial setting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 611, the details of the variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) in the thirteenth control example will be described. The variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). 8 This is a process for executing control according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, as in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the control example).

Of the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534, the variation in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of the display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) are executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, when the processing of the Z2503 is completed, a detailed variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is subsequently determined, and the determined variation display is performed. The variation pattern command setting process for setting the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the embodiment is executed (Z2521), and the process is transferred to Z2535. The details of this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 612.

FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command setting process (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg (Z2551), and then the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is set. If it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2552: Yes), the variation according to the extracted variation pattern is determined. A display mode is selected (Z2553), a display variation pattern command indicating the selected variation display mode is set (Z2554), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2552, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is a value larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time indicated by the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg It is determined whether or not is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555), and if it is determined that it is 2 seconds or less (Z2555: No), if a pseudo-variation effect of 1 second is set, after the pseudo-variation ends. Since the remaining fluctuation time becomes insufficiently long for performing the fluctuation display effect, a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the pseudo variation effect of the variation time over the remaining variation time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2555, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555: Yes), even if the pseudo fluctuation effect for 1 second is executed, it is sufficient (at least 1) after the pseudo fluctuation is completed. Since a time (longer than a second) can be secured as the fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of a pseudo fluctuation for 1 second is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2559), and the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2560), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 612), the variation display mode can be preferably set in consideration of the remaining number of pseudo variations at the start of the variation.

Next, the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 613. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, and is the same as the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example. In addition, when a background change operation is performed, it is a process for setting a background change according to the timing of the operation.

Of the background change processes 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2967 or the process of Z2968 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is on (Z2981). , If it is determined that the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is off (Z2981: No), it means that the lottery for the silhouette notice effect has not been executed in the variable display being executed this time, so the lottery for the silhouette notice effect. And the process for making the setting (each process of Z2982 to Z2986) is executed. More specifically, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2982), and the silhouette advance notice mode corresponding to the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is selected from the silhouette advance notice selection table 222ja (Z2983).

When the processing of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is then set to ON (Z2984), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the silhouette notice effect by the processing of Z2983 is the result indicating the execution of the silhouette notice effect. (Z2985). In the process of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating the execution of the silhouette notice (Z2896: Yes), a display silhouette notice command indicating the execution of the selected silhouette notice effect is set (Z2896), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating "none" of the silhouette notice effect (Z2985: No), the processing of Z2896 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this background change process 13 (see FIG. 613), a lottery for the silhouette notice effect can be executed based on the initial background change operation during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, since the player who has confirmed the silhouette notice effect can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the counter update process 13 (Z2177) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 614. The counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process executed in place of the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). ) Is the same as the counter update process (see FIG. 552), which is a process for updating various counters.

Of the counter update processes 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2861 to Z2866, the counter update processes (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) are Z2861 to Z261 to each. The same process as each process of Z2866 is executed. Further, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2864 or Z2865 is completed, the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is next to a value larger than 0 (1 or more). If the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is 0 (Z2871: No), the process shifts to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2871, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is subtracted by 1 (Z2872). ), It is determined whether the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223jb after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2873). In the processing of Z2873, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z2873: Yes), whether to execute the pseudo fluctuation or the normal fluctuation display according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja. Pseudo-variation setting processing for determining is executed (Z2874), and the processing is transferred to Z2875. The details of this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. 615. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: No), the processing of Z2874 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z2875.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) is a process for determining whether to execute the pseudo-variation or to execute the normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja. In this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2881), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2882).

If it is determined that the value of the read pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 in the processing of Z2882 (Z2882: Yes), then whether or not the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read in the processing of Z2881 is 0. Is determined (Z2883). In the processing of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2883: No), the execution of the variation display over the residual variation time is set (Z2884), and the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2884). Z2885), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2883, it means that the gaming state of the actual pachinko machine 10 is the fluctuation stop state, so that the execution of the fluctuation display is not set. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is not 0 (1 or more) (Z2882: No), then whether or not the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds. (Z2886), and if it is determined that the residual variation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: No), it is determined whether or not the residual variation time is 0 (Z2887). If it is determined in the processing of Z2887 that the residual variation time is not 0 (Z2888: No), the start of the pseudo variation over the residual variation time is set (Z2888), and the residual variation time is set with respect to the pseudo variation time counter 223jb. The counter value corresponding to (Z2889) is set, and the process shifts to Z2893.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2886 (Z2886: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2887 (Z2887: Yes). The start of the pseudo-variation effect for 1 second is set (Z2890), and the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2892), and the process shifts to Z2893. In the processing of Z2893, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2893), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 615), when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation has elapsed, the pseudo fluctuation is set again according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja, or the normal fluctuation display is displayed. You can accurately determine whether to execute it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, the power supply is cut off during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the power is turned on again to perform the special symbol variation (the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37). When the variable display) is restarted, it is restarted when the power is turned on after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81). The configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation display effect showing the result of the special figure variation. In other words, the configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation effect asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display of the first symbol that is restarted based on the power-on. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the thirteenth control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special figure fluctuation interrupted due to the power off is executed without being discarded after the power is turned on again, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the execution of the variation display, if a specific condition is satisfied, a silhouette notice effect that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition is predetermined. It was configured to be feasible at the rate of. More specifically, the background is changed to determine whether or not the silhouette notice effect can be executed, which suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display according to the display mode of the silhouette display. The lottery is based on the fact that the operation has been executed. With this configuration, when the silhouette advance notice effect is executed, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively know the type of the advance notice effect. The background change operation can be executed. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, the silhouette notice effect can also indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the execution of the special figure change, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end of the special figure change BGM are reproduced. In order to match the timing, the end timing of the initial setting is determined when the power is turned on, and the playback start position of the special figure variation BGM is adjusted (variable) according to the determination result, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the reproduction start position may be adjusted so that the special figure change BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special figure change restarted when the power is turned on.

In the thirteenth control example, the number of special figure fluctuations completed during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the initial setting is completed, a pseudo variation display effect for the number of counts is performed. The configuration is such that the three symbol display devices 81 are sequentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the completion of the initial setting, the result of the special figure variation for the number of counts may be collectively notified by the pseudo variation display effect of 1. More specifically, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided by at least the number of counts, and in each of the divided display areas, the result of the special figure change completed during the execution of the initial setting is obtained. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation display shown. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the effect time of the pseudo-variation effect for notifying the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting, so that the normal third symbol variation can be performed earlier. The display can be returned to an executable state.

In this thirteenth control example, the silhouette notice effect is developed into a specific type of reach effect (bubble notice super reach, fish school notice super reach, wind notice super reach, eruption notice super reach) in the variable display during execution. Although it was configured to be executed as an effect for notifying in advance, the target to be notified by the silhouette notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the silhouette advance notice effect may be executed not only when there is a holding ball that develops into a reach effect to be targeted in the pending variation display as well as the variable display being executed. With this configuration, not only the variable display that is being executed when the silhouette notice effect is executed, but also the reserved ball at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed can be expected, so that the game can be played. It is possible to maintain a person's expectation for a big hit for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is restarted based on the power-on, the period required for the initial setting of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the special figure change BGM ends in the predicted period. , The configuration was such that the start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM when the power was turned on was set, but in addition to this, when the end timing of the actual initial setting deviates from the prediction result, the initial screen (display of the image when the power is turned on). By extending the period), it may be configured to match the end timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM. With this configuration, the end timing of the special figure variation BGM and the end timing of the initial screen can be more reliably matched.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 to 625. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example described above, the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is moved from the display control device 114 with respect to the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member. It was configured to output a command. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the preparatory operation from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229 (accessory). It was configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command), and the display control device 114 was configured to determine whether or not it was the execution timing of the preparatory operation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example, the timing for outputting the command for executing the preparatory operation is set in advance in the display data table, and when reading the drawing contents from the display data table, the drawing contents are read. , The configuration is such that the command for the accessory is output by reading the information indicating the output of the command. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a timer means or the like for timing the timing of outputting the command for the accessory, so that the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified.

Further, in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs and the line of the reach line or the like before the reach effect occurs. When the reach effect occurs, the expectation of the big hit increases, and as the reach line increases, the expectation of the big hit increases, so pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and let the game play. Can be done.

First, the contents of the reach line suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 and 617. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 616 (a), when the reach line suggestion effect is executed, first, a character imitating a dinosaur is placed behind the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 810 is displayed, and a balloon image 810a imitating a balloon is displayed on the right side of the character 810. In this balloon image 810a, the characters "The more the same numbers are lined up, the higher the expectation!" Are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the advance notice effect in which the numbers are lined up is executed and that the degree of expectation changes depending on how the numbers are lined up. In this reach line suggestion effect, an effect is executed in which the nine numbers are divided into three times and displayed inside the balloon image 810a. Of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, two numbers are aligned vertically, so that the expectation is higher than the double line reach effect (the effect is higher than the single line reach effect). It is confirmed that it will develop into a production of or become a big hit. In addition, out of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, three numbers are aligned vertically, which leads to a triple-line reach effect (a production with higher expectations than a double-line reach effect). It is decided that it will be done or that it will be a big hit. Furthermore, it is confirmed that a big hit will be achieved by aligning three numbers horizontally. In this way, since the reach line suggestion effect can suggest the reach line of the reach effect that develops after that, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and play the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the following figures, in order to make the content of the effect easy to understand, the description of the image (dashed line arrow pointing to the left) showing the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is omitted.

FIG. 616 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of the nine numbers are displayed in the reach line suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 616 (b), the first three numbers are displayed side by side on the upper side of the balloon image 810a. FIG. 616 (b) illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

FIG. 617 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are vertically aligned. As shown in FIG. 617 (a), when the same numbers are aligned, the effect image 810b surrounding the same numbers is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the numbers are aligned and the number of aligned numbers. If two or more numbers are aligned in the reach line suggestion effect, the mode shifts to the dedicated background mode according to the number of aligned numbers. Specifically, the "super sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line by aligning two identical numbers vertically. (In the case of), or shift to the "super mountain mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is the mountain mode). In addition, by aligning the same three numbers vertically or horizontally, the "premium sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the triple line. (Case), or shift to "Premium Mountain Mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is Mountain Mode). In addition, in "Super Sea Mode" and "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability that it will develop into a single line reach production with lower expectations than a double line reach production, but this background mode and the reach that occurs Patterns that are inconsistent with the type of are selected only in the case of a jackpot. Similarly, if you move to "Premium Sea Mode" or "Premium Mountain Mode" but do not develop into Triple Reach (developed to Single Reach or Double Reach), the jackpot will be confirmed. In this way, the single reach effect and double reach effect, in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively low in normal times, are confirmed when the big hit occurs under specific conditions. Therefore, the reach after the background mode is promoted in the reach line suggestion effect. You can play the game by paying attention to the number of lines. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 617 (b) shows a display mode in the case of shifting to the premium sea mode by aligning three numbers vertically in the reach line suggestion effect executed in the sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 617 (b), the characters "premium sea mode" are displayed for the mode display area Dm1a. Further, as shown in FIG. 617 (b), when the "premium sea mode" is entered, the three effective lines of the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the upward-sloping effective line L2, and the downward-sloping effective line L3 It develops into a triple reach production that takes reach. As mentioned above, the triple reach production has a higher expectation of being a big hit than the single reach production and the double reach production (the ratio of being selected in the case of a loss is low), so that the player has a feeling of expectation for the big hit. Can be improved. As described above, the reach line suggestion effect is not only an effect suggesting the number of reach lines, but also an effect suggesting promotion of the rear mode (mode promotion effect).

<Electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 618, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 618 is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 618, the configuration of ROM 222 in the 14th control example differs from the configuration of ROM 222 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 584) only in that the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is added. do. This mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is a data table referred to for selecting an effect mode (the number of the same numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect). The details of this mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620.

FIG. 619 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 619 (a), the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka has a hit table 222ka1 for selecting whether or not the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect mode in the variable display of the jackpot. And, in the variation display of the deviation, at least the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed, and the disengagement table 222ka2 for selecting the effect mode is composed of at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 619 (b), the defined contents of the winning table 222ka1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 619 (b), the hit table 222ka1 has a range of values of the effect counter 223h and an effect mode (numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) for each number of reach lines when the reach effect is developed. The correspondence with the aspect) is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit fluctuation in which the single line reach occurs, the mode promotion effect “none” is used as the effect mode for the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “0 to 149”. Is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 149", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 150, so in the jackpot fluctuation where the single line reach effect is set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 75.4% (150/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h corresponds to the range of "150 to 192" as the effect mode. It is specified with. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "150 to 192", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is also displayed vertically. A mode (separate) that is not lined up side by side is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 43, so a jackpot with a single-line reach effect set. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the looseness is executed is about 21.6% (43/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "193,194", and the effect mode is "two vertical alignments". It is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "193,194", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "two vertical alignments" is two, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 1% (2/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "195" of the effect counter 223h is defined by associating "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. ing. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "195", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and three same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "3 vertical sets" is 1, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "196 to 198" of the effect counter 223h is associated with "3 horizontal alignment" as the effect mode. It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "196 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "horizontal 3 sets" is 4, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 2% (4/199).

As described above, in the reach effect in which the reach of the single line occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 3/4 (it is difficult to execute the mode promotion effect). Therefore, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect the reach effect of the double line or the triple line, which has a high expectation of a big hit, to occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit fluctuation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "0 to 99". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 100, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the double line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 50.2% (100/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "100 to 119" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 119", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "120 to 189" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "120 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 70, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 35.2% (70/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined as "190" in association with "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "190", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 1, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "191 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "191 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 8, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4% (8/199).

As described above, in the hit variation in which the double line reach effect occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher (about 25% → about 50%) than in the hit variation in which the single line reach effect occurs. Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, two vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 10% of the staggered modes are also selected. Therefore, even when the looseness is displayed, the player can be expected to produce an expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 49". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 50, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the triple line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 25.1% (50/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "50 to 69", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "70 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 30, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the ratio of executing the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is about 15.1% (30/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "100 to 189" as the effect mode of "alignment of three vertical pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 vertically. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 90, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 45.2% (90/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "190 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "190 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 9, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher than the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line or the double line occurs (about 75%). Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, three vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 25% of the staggered and two vertical mode are also selected. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to have a triple-line reach effect even when the mode promotion effect is displayed, which is a set of two vertical lines.

Next, with reference to FIG. 620, the details of the disengagement table 222ka2 constituting the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described. As described above, the deviation table 222ka is a data table referred to for drawing whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect mode when the mode promotion effect is executed in the deviation variation. Similar to the hit table 222ka, the disengagement table 222ka defines the correspondence between the value range of the effect counter 223h and the effect mode for each number of reach lines.

As shown in FIG. 620, for the non-reach variable display effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223h. There is. Therefore, in the variable effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the single line, the mode promotion effect "None" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "0 to 155". With respect to the range of "156 to 198", the effect mode of "separation" is defined in association with each other. That is, in the single-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the mode of "separation" is performed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). The promotion effect is executed. In other words, the rate at which the "separate stitch" is selected is the same (21.6%) regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. In addition, only the percentage (about 3.5%) that the winning pattern (the production pattern that develops into a single reach with 2 or 3 verticals or the production pattern with 3 horizontals) is selected is out of order. The single-line reach effect has a lower execution rate of the mode promotion effect. In other words, if the production mode of "bare eyes" is set and develops into a single-line reach production, it will be difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion production mode, so the result of the reach production will be You can pay attention to the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the double line, the mode promotion effect "none" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223h of "0 to 108". The range of "109 to 128" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "129 to 198" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Has been done. That is, in the double-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 54.8% (109/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the effect mode of "two vertical pieces" is executed at a rate of about 35.2% (70/199). In other words, in the double-line reach effect, the selection rate of "separate stitches" and "two vertical lines" is the same regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion effect itself when the mode promotion effect of "separate eyes" or "two vertical lines" is executed and develops into a double line reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the triple line, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “0 to 58”. The range of "59 to 78" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "79 to 108" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Therefore, the effect mode of "three vertical alignments" is defined in association with the range of "109 to 198". That is, in the triple line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 29.6% (59/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the production mode of "2 vertical alignment" is executed at a rate of about 15.1% (30/199), and "3 vertical alignment" is executed at a ratio of about 45.2% (90/199). The production mode is executed. That is, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, the ratio of selecting each of "separate stitch", "vertical two-piece alignment", and "vertical three-piece alignment" is the same. Therefore, if the mode promotion effects of "separate eyes", "vertical 2 pieces", and "vertical 3 pieces" are executed and develop into a triple line reach effect, a big hit from the mode promotion effect itself. Since it becomes difficult to estimate the degree of expectation, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect can suggest the effect mode (reach line of the reach effect) executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in the reach production, the higher the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be, so the result of the mode promotion production is expected to be a production mode that suggests more reach lines. You can check it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the specified contents of the display data table in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round accompanied by a preparation drive of an accessory in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 621, the display data table in the 14th control example defines a command to be output to another control device (for example, accessory control device 229) in addition to the drawing contents. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 621, a preparatory drive command is defined as a command for the accessory for the end of the drawing content stored in the address "00FAH". Therefore, when the value of the pointer 233f updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds) becomes the pointer value corresponding to the address “00FAH”, the address “ In addition to the drawing contents specified in "00FAH", the preparation drive command is read out. When the preparation drive command is read, the preparation drive command is output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. With this configuration, the control process for acquiring the drawing contents and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 622 and 623, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. First, the variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 622. The variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 14th control example is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), and is the twelfth control. Similar to the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the example (and the first control example), this is a process for determining the mode of the variation display effect according to the variation type (variation time) notified by the variation pattern.

Of the variation display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the 14th control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2513, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2501 to Z2509 is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the 14th control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed or not, and the effect mode is drawn by lottery. The mode promotion effect lottery process is executed (Z2571), and the process shifts to Z2504. The details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 623.

FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing the mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined to be a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771: Yes). Then, the winning table 222ka1 (see FIG. 619 (b)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is read out (Z2772), and the process is shifted to Z2774. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2771 when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (that is, it is a fluctuation pattern of deviation) (Z2771: No), the deviation table 222ka2 of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka (see FIG. 620). ) Is read (Z2773), and the process is transferred to Z2774. In the processing of Z2774, the effect mode (number of reach lines) set for the current variation pattern and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223h are determined from the table read by the process of Z2772 or Z2773. Then (Z2774), this process is terminated.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 623), whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect are performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect. Aspects can be suitably drawn.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 14th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625. First, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 624. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process executed in place of the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the twelfth control example (and the first control example), and is a process executed in place of the twelfth control example (and the first control example). ), Based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, as in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). Is a process for specifically specifying.

Of the display setting processes 14 (see FIG. 624) in the 14th control example, in each of the processes Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321, the display setting process (and FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 of (see) are executed. Further, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in the 14th control example, when the Z4305 process is completed, the drawing content acquisition process for acquiring the drawing content for one frame from the content of the display data table is next. Is executed (Z4331), and the process shifts to Z4307. The details of this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG. 625.

FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing a drawing content acquisition process (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, among the display data tables set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired drawing content includes the specified content indicating the accessory command (Z4352), and when it is determined that the content indicating the accessory command has been acquired (Z4352: Yes). , The command for the accessory of the acquired contents is set to be output to the accessory control device 229 (Z4353), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4352, if it is determined that the content indicating the accessory command is not acquired from the display data table (Z4352: No), the process of Z4353 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this drawing content acquisition process (see FIG. 625), the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. In this mode promotion effect, before the reach effect occurs, the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs, the number of reach lines, etc. is executed, so that the actual reach effect is performed. Can increase expectations for a jackpot before it is executed.

Further, in the 14th control example, a command output instruction to the accessory control device 229 is also included in the specified contents of the display data table in which the drawing contents in various effects are specified for each frame. Then, when the drawing content is acquired from the display data table, if the command seed and force instruction are acquired, the display control device 114 executes the command output together with the acquisition of the drawing content. .. With such a configuration, the control process of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be different, the probability of winning a small hit may be different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, or the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the game state. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to be a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main control device 110 but on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be different, the probability of winning a small hit may be different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, or the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to be a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. May be. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, a driving means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacement means to the predetermined direction side, and the displacement means. It is provided with a resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance to the displacement in a predetermined direction.
The gaming machine a1 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to displace a displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the place where the load from the displacement member is received is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid receives an excessive load, so that the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail at an early stage. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine a1, the resistance means is on the predetermined direction side (driving means side) of the displacement means.
Since resistance to the displacement to the displacement means is generated and the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the drive means from receiving an excessive load. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the gaming machine.

The mode for reducing the load applied to the drive means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be distributed by increasing the number of places where the load is received to suppress the load, or the load may be transmitted by providing a gap between the displacement means and the drive means by the resistance means. It is also possible to cut off the load, or to increase the surface on which the resistance means acts on the displacement means to reduce the load per unit area.

The gaming machine a1 is provided with a supporting means for supporting the displacement means, and the driving means is arranged on the supporting means side as compared with the resistance means.

According to the gaming machine a2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a1, the load applied to the resistance means is applied by suppressing the arm length (arm length of the force moment) between the supporting means and the driving means to be short. It is possible to avoid becoming excessive.

In the gaming machine a2, the supporting means rotatably supports the displacement means on a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. ..

According to the gaming machine a3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from reversing in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left-right direction).
Since the side where the rubbing of the portion covering the rotation axis occurs can be limited to one side (avoiding slight displacement to the left and right), the portion that needs to be formed thick can be limited.

In the gaming machine a3, the first resistance means that causes a load for the displacement toward the predetermined direction is
The first resistance means and the second resistance means are provided with a second resistance means that generates a load for displacement in the opposite direction on the predetermined direction side, and the first resistance means and the second resistance means are displaced from each other at different positions in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine a4 comprising a portion, wherein the first resistance means is arranged away from the predetermined axis as compared with the second resistance means.

According to the gaming machine a4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a3, the load given to the displacement means from the first resistance means can be reduced. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by lengthening the arm length of the moment of the force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

Further, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated by separating the place where the load is generated between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the place where the load is generated between the second resistance means and the displacement means. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine a3 or a4, the displacement means includes a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means and an accessory portion extending in the outer diameter direction of the transmission portion, and the first resistance. The gaming machine a5 is characterized in that the means is disposed so as to be in contact with the accessory portion.

According to the gaming machine a5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine a3 or a4, it is possible to transmit the driving force to the displacement means even if the accessory portion is damaged, so that the driving control can be performed during the period until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

The mode of the transmission unit is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be configured at a position close to the driving means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction on the side where the driving means is arranged with reference to the shaft member arranged along the predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, the mode on the opposite side in the axial direction on the side where the drive means is arranged is not limited in any way with the shaft member as a reference, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the drive means and the transmission unit may be configured at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the shaft may be configured. In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmitting portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5 is provided with a load applying means for applying a load to the displacement means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine a7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a6, it is possible to avoid an imbalance in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A game machine a8, wherein in any of the game machines a1 to a7, the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine a8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

The gaming machine a8 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to receive an external force, and the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Gaming machine a9.

According to the gaming machine a9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
The basic means, the intermediate means displaceably supported by the basic means, the distal end side means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and the intermediate means supported by the intermediate means with respect to the basic means. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement-constituting means configured to displace the tip-side means with respect to the intermediate means, the basic means can be displaced in a non-corresponding manner to the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A gaming machine b1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which a pinion is arranged so as to sandwich the pinion between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, since the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, the displacement speed of the other rack with respect to one rack can be increased, and a high-speed displacement effect body can be constructed. It is possible.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effect body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b1, since the basic means is configured to be displaceable, the basic means can be displaced by the tip side means or the intermediate means by displacing the basic means according to the displacement of the tip side means or the intermediate means. Can be hidden. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the tip-side means can be improved.

In the gaming machine b1, the basic means is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both members (basic means and tip side means) sandwiching the pinion are racks that are displaced in parallel, when the pinions and the rack are arranged on the same plane, the racks are arranged in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed at a position that overlaps the rack in the displacement direction view, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that it was.

In addition, since it is necessary to arrange the support portions at a plurality of points in order to maintain the posture of the rack and optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk that the member structure will be complicated and the assembly man-hours will increase. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the overhanging portion on the foundation means side and the recessed portion on the tip side means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b2, since the basic means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the basic means and the displacement constituent means can be arranged at positions where they overlap in the slide displacement direction view of the intermediate means, which saves space. In addition to being able to improve the structure, it is sufficient to have a configuration for supporting the basic means, so that the structure can be simplified.

Further, since the overhanging portion on the foundation means side can be arranged on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine b2, a part of the basic means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the basic means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating with the other part as a fulcrum. The gaming machine b3 is characterized in that the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine b3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine b2, since a part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are both supported by the intermediate means, the part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are separated from each other. Load transmission can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in the direction intersecting the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of a part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the entire foundation means can be measured.
It can be suppressed (up, down, left, right).

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the tip side means is on one side (overhanging side) of the displacement range.
The gaming machine b4, characterized in that, in a state of being arranged at the terminal position, the basic means receives a load for maintaining a posture from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine b4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the load required for the slide displacement is reduced as compared with the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. Can be done. Further, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the posture of the basic means is maintained while the tip side means is arranged at the one-side terminal position.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the tip side means is on the other side (evacuation side) of the displacement range.
A gaming machine b5, wherein the basic means takes a posture in which a load given from the intermediate means faces the displaceable direction of the basic means in a state of being arranged at a terminal position.

According to the gaming machine b5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the basic means,
The start of intermediate and displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b5, the tip side means is on the other side (evacuation side) of the displacement range.
The gaming machine b6, wherein the basic means is provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the retracted position side of the intermediate means in a state of being arranged at the terminal position.

According to the gaming machine b6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines b1 to b5, an intermediate means is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the overhanging portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (evacuation side) terminal position which is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to configure the basic means to be blindfolded by an intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while keeping the vertical dimension of the above to less than the dimension of the basic means.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b6, the basic means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means is an electric wiring guided to the basic means. The gaming machine b7, characterized in that the

According to the gaming machine b7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b6, the displacement of a part of the basic means is suppressed to easily secure the passage path of the electric wiring and the electric wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the machine.

In the gaming machine b7, the tip-side means is configured to be slidable and the electric wiring is arranged outside the tip-side means.

According to the gaming machine b8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine b7, the load applied to the electric wiring is compared with the case where the electric wiring is connected to the tip side means which is displaced by the slide displacement which easily puts a load on the electric wiring. It can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the tip-side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. for example,
The drive means for driving the intermediate means based on the basic means and the drive means for driving the tip side means based on the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b8, the displacement constituting means is characterized in that the tip side means is configured to be displaceable with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Gaming machine b9.

According to the gaming machine b9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines b1 to b8, the tip-side means can be stably displaced at a high speed (higher-speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are asymmetrically configured>
A plurality of displacement means configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position arranged apart from the first relative position are provided, and the plurality of displacement means are the first relative position. Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visible in a series of predetermined shapes.
The gaming machine c1 is characterized in that the plurality of displacement means include a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of moving parts having substantially the same shape are arranged close to each other to form a series of shapes (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095).
.. According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily configure a large effect body by combining small moving parts, the structure of the moving parts themselves is almost the same, so the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced. can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the shapes of the moving parts are configured to be substantially the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each moving part is common to each moving part, which is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in design so that the space could be used.

For example, when the moving unit is displaced on the right side of the display device exemplified for the liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the side closer to the display device is more noticeable from the player. Nevertheless, the space required for displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the displaceable amount on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem that it would be limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine c1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means visually recognized in a series of shapes are composed of different sizes, the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means. Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so that the limited space can be used satisfactorily and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the gaming machine c1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are characterized in that the outer shape is set according to the displaceable region in the second relative position.

According to the gaming machine c2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are visually recognized at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the displaceable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

Further, it is possible to improve the decorativeness when the decoration of the region at the second relative position is substituted by the first displacement means and the second displacement means, as in the case where the game board is formed of the light transmissive resin.

The gaming machine c1 or c2 is provided with a guiding means arranged on the back side of the plurality of displacement means and guiding the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guiding means and the displacement means is viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine c3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the gaming machine c3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c1 or c2, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from being visually recognized from the gaps of the plurality of displacement means. Thereby, instead, it is possible to make effective use of the gap, such as making the decorative portion other than the guiding means visible from the gap.

In the gaming machine c3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the plurality of displacement means is viewed in the predetermined direction from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction. A gaming machine c4 characterized in that it is arranged at a displaced position.

According to the gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c3, the part (reference) that the player predicts that the guiding means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged in consideration of the load balance and the like. By concealing (corresponding to a line) with a plurality of displacement means and making it difficult for the player to see, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the design.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c4, the driving means for generating the driving force is provided, the first displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means is said. The gaming machine c5, characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path from a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c4, the member is configured to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, so that the member becomes smaller locally in the driving force transmission path. It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

In the gaming machine c5, the driving means and the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left portion of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged in the upper left portion. 1 The gaming machine c6 characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means disposed at a position different from the upper left portion.

According to the gaming machine c6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c5, from the configuration arrangement of the payout device,
The drive means and the transmission means arranged in the upper left portion, which is easy to secure a large area as the internal area of the rear case as compared with the upper right portion, can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged in the upper left portion. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driving means and the transmitting means. This makes it unnecessary to configure another cover for hiding the driving means and the transmitting means.

In the gaming machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means is set to a posture in which gravity acts in the tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to be close to the second displacement means by the tilt displacement. Characteristic gaming machine c7.

According to the gaming machine c7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows contact, but the clearance for enabling the displacement ( When a gap is created without contact due to misalignment that fits in the play of the gear teeth that mesh with each other, the gap between the guide rail and the guided portion, etc., it is easy to fill the gap by the tilt displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being maintained in a state where a gap is formed, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and a series of series. It is possible to improve the design when forming the shape.

A gaming machine c8, wherein in any of the gaming machines c5 to c7, electrical wiring passes through the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to the gaming machine c8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c5 to c7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are excessive by passing the electric wiring to the second displacement means side where the overdisplacement is unlikely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load generated on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c8, the predetermined shape is composed of a symmetrical shape, and the split surface component portion constituting the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is the center of the gaming area. A gaming machine c9 characterized in that it is arranged on the side far from the position.

According to the gaming machine c9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c8, the asymmetrically shaped split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult for the player to see), whereby the first displacement means. And it is possible to prevent the appearance of the second displacement means from being deteriorated.

By making the shape of the center position side (the side close to the field of view, the side that is easy for the player to see) on the opposite side to the center position, the appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged so that the side where the size of the displaceable region is limited at the second relative position faces each other at the first relative position. Machine c10.

According to the gaming machine c10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means composed of asymmetrical shapes in a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of the game machines c1 to c10, the plurality of displacement means have a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is composed of a downward displacement, and the first displacement thereof. The gaming machine c11 is composed of different second displacements, and is configured so that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine c11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines c1 to c10, by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, when the upper inner surface of the rear case is displaced up and down on the left and right due to the shape of the dispensing device, multiple displacement means are not affected by the vertical displacement of the rear case (corresponding to a predetermined section). By starting the second displacement after only descending, the area where the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is allowed can be formed equally without being affected by the vertical positional deviation of the upper inner surface of the rear case. Even when the displacement mode of the displacement means is the same, it is possible to easily prevent a plurality of displacement means from colliding with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement depending on the arrangement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means are provided, and the first displacement means supports one of the second displacement means. The first support portion and the second support portion that supports the other second displacement means are provided, and the first support portion is supported by the first support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2 Displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means generated in the displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion due to the occurrence of a predetermined displacement in the first displacement means. The gaming machine d1 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the displacement mode with respect to the above.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced when the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) are displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine d1, the second displacement means is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced.
Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be different depending on whether the displacement means is supported by the first support portion or the second support portion, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be used. The displacement mode of the above can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine d1, the gap between the first second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first one. Displacement means
The gaming machine d2 is characterized in that the displacement amount on the first support portion side is larger than that on the second support portion side.

According to the gaming machine d2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d1, the displacement of the first displacement means can be configured so that the gap of the first support portion is eliminated, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

In the gaming machine d1 or d2, a load applying means configured to give a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the first displacement means is supported on one side portion in a predetermined direction, and the one side portion can be displaced. The amount and the displaceable amount of the other side portion are configured to be different, and the load applying means is the first.
The second displacement means is configured to give a load to the other side portion of the displacement means, and the second displacement means is the one side second displacement means arranged on the one side and the other side second displacement means arranged on the other side. A gaming machine d3 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine d3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d1 or d2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where the load applying means applies the load to the first displacement means. It can be different depending on whether it is placed on the other side or on the other side.

In any of the gaming machines d1 to d3, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the load applying means is arranged at a plurality of positions and each of the first displacement means is independently displaced. A gaming machine d4 characterized in that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the gaming machine d4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d3, it is possible to eliminate the need for an auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means.

In any of the gaming machines d1 to d4, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface is provided, and the load applying means is at least attached to the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine d5 characterized in that a part thereof is shielded in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine d5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting substrate. That is, using a light emitting board that is necessary for the convenience of light emission production,
It is possible to prevent the load applying means from being visually recognized by the player. In this case, by irradiating the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate with strong light, the visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting board can be reduced. However, it can be made difficult for the player to see.

When the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a drive device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) for driving the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since the electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to separately create a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine d5, the light emitting board is arranged on the back surface side of the gaming board, and the gaming board is provided with a recessed portion in which the facing side is recessed at a position facing the light emitting board. Machine d6.

According to the gaming machine d6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d5, an area for arranging the light emitting substrate can be secured between the gaming machine and the gaming board, and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the gaming board. It can be prevented from being done.

In the gaming machine d6, the recessed portion is arranged outward with respect to the outer shape in the front view of the gaming region.

According to the gaming machine d7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d6, even if the film member formed on the front surface of the recessed portion is displaced, it is necessary to prevent the displacement from affecting the gaming area. Can be done.

A game characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines d1 to d7, a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the guiding means is arranged on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine d8.

According to the gaming machine d8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines d1 to d7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guiding means, and the guiding means is arranged closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced, the friction between the first displacement means and the guide means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine d8, a support plate that supports the guiding means, a thin film member whose predetermined region is fixed to the support plate, and a light emitting substrate that is arranged on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and has a light emitting portion. The gaming machine d9 is characterized in that the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without a gap.

According to the gaming machine d9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d8, by partitioning the guiding means and the light emitting substrate with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent the rubbing powder of the guiding means from entering the light emitting substrate side. can.

In the gaming machine d9, the thin film member is configured to have dimensions that can avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the gaming machine d10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d9, it is not necessary to secure the rigidity of the thin film member. Therefore, by forming the thin film member as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member. Can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. The point for communication ＞
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displace the displacement means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement means are provided, and the transmission means is driven. The gaming machine e1 characterized in that the state can be changed so as to change the transmission mode of force.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of the displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to displace the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove (. For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed so as to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb a slight excess displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the deformed groove is configured to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means, the wall thickness and the dimensional length corresponding to the deformed groove are required extra. The limitation of the shape of the displacement means becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine e1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means by changing the state of the transmission means. can. Therefore, since it is not necessary to add an extra configuration to the displacement means, the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

The change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rigidity of the transmission means may be changed, the direction of the load applied to the transmission means may be adjusted to change the transmission efficiency of the driving force, or the change may occur by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. ..

In the gaming machine e1, the gaming machine e2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmitting means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine e2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e1, a load for changing the state of the transmitting means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source to change the state of the transmission means.

The mode of change in the state of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Further, examples of the deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, bending and twisting, and deformation in which a boundary such as bending and misalignment occurs. Further, as an embodiment of the change in rigidity (strength), an embodiment in which the wall thickness of the transmission means is changed, a mode in which the core inserted in the transmission means is removed, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine e2, the transmission means is configured to have a shape in which the flexibility differs depending on the direction.
The gaming machine e3 is characterized in that the angle formed by the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means and the direction in which the displacement means is easily flexed changes before and after the displacement means passes through a predetermined reference position due to the displacement. ..

According to the gaming machine e3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e2, the change in the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means during the displacement of the displacement means can be used to change the shape of the transmission means.
With a predetermined reference position as a boundary, it is possible to divide a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the transmission means is mainly flexed and deformed by the driving force.

In the gaming machine e3, the displacement means is driven to stop in a predetermined intermediate posture, and the transmission means is a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is in the intermediate posture. The gaming machine e4 is characterized in that the direction of the machine is configured to be along a direction in which the machine is easily bent.

According to the gaming machine e4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture by the bending of the transmission means, so that the amount of the driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly determined. Even if it is set, it is possible to make it easier to keep the displacement means in the middle posture.

In the gaming machine e4, the driving force exerts a driving force so that the pushing portion for pushing the displacement means of the transmission means passes through the contact position in the intermediate posture of the displacement means in the state before bending. A gaming machine e5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate.

According to the gaming machine e5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e4, the driving energy can be inherently stored even after the displacement means is in the middle posture, and the displacement means can be vibrated by using this.

That is, since the transmitting means is in a posture in which it is easy to bend, it is possible to generate vibration using the bending in the transmitting means without generating the driving force of the driving means in a mode for generating vibration. As a result, vibration can be generated by a simple mechanism.

The gaming machine e6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines e1 to e5 is provided with a range setting means configured so that a range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set.

According to the gaming machine e6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines e1 to e5, the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes can be set by the range setting means, so that the degree of the state change of the transmitting means can be determined. It can be adjusted depending on the situation.

In the gaming machine e6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with respect to a predetermined position. ..

According to the gaming machine e7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range opposite to the driving means, so that the driving force is transmitted on the upstream side of the transmission path. It is possible to suppress the decrease in efficiency.

Further, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of the state change occurring in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced.
Therefore, even if the driving means cannot be controlled precisely, the displacement of the displacement means (for example, the displacement of the stop position) can be kept small.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatable and an electric supply means configured to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means arranged along a line connecting a rotation shaft and an outside diameter. The gaming machine f1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes an arranged portion arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an electric wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member rotatably supported and the electric wiring is connected to a displacement member connected to the arm-shaped member (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electric wiring is only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and the electric wiring may expand or contract due to the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, which is given to the electric wiring. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine f1, the placed portion of the electric supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotation displacement means, so that the rotation displacement means occurs when the rotation displacement of the rotation displacement means occurs. It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the placed portion that occurs with respect to the electric wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine f1, the gaming machine f1 includes an arrangement displacement means displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means and a suppressing means for suppressing the displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction close to the arrangement displacement means. The gaming machine f2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine f2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f1, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

The gaming machine f3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine f2, the arrangement displacement means is configured so as to easily separate from the electricity supply means when an unplanned displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine f3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f2, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine f3, the dispositioned displacement means has a first dispositioned displacement means that is closely displaced and stopped to the electricity supply means, and a position of the first dispositioned and displaced means that is displaced and stopped close to the electricity supply means. It is provided with a second arrangement displacement means set at a position farther from the electricity supply means than the stop position, and the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means to the electricity supply means. The gaming machine f4 is configured to be in contact with each other by being displaced close to each other and to apply a load in a direction away from each other from the electricity supply means.

According to the gaming machine f4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f3, it is possible to avoid giving a load to the electricity supply means even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced too much. can do.

The gaming machine f5 is characterized in that the first-arranged displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second-arranged displacement means.

According to the gaming machine f5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first disposing means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

It should be noted that the mode constituting the magnitude of the inertia is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first arrangement displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second arrangement displacement means, or the mode of the support portion may be different. The magnitude of the inertia may be configured by causing the magnitude of the displacement resistance.

In any of the gaming machines f1 to f5, the supporting means for supporting the rotational displacement means is provided, and the supporting means includes an opening portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means. The gaming machine f6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the open portion.

According to the gaming machine f6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines f1 to f5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed as compared with the case where the electric supply means is passed through the inside of the predetermined rotating shaft. be able to.

In the gaming machines f1 to f6, the displaced displacement means displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electric supply means and the driving means for generating the driving force for driving the displaced displacement means are provided, and the driving means is provided. The gaming machine f7 characterized in that it is arranged on the side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.
..

According to the gaming machine f7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines f2 to f6, it is possible to improve the arrangement efficiency.

A gaming machine f8, wherein in any of the gaming machines f1 to f7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to the gaming machine f8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines f1 to f7, the means for guiding the electrical wiring can be provided with a driving force transmission function, so that the members can also be used. The number can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a machine and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. It is provided with a rotating member that is rotated by a sliding member and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. A gaming machine g1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which a provision portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions are formed so as to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is the same as the above), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine g1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. The protrusion is projected from one of the wing members, and the sliding groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not tilt with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be equal to the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. ..
As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted projecting portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the gaming machine g1, the gaming machine g2 is characterized in that the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine g2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the wing member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine g1 or g2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A gaming machine g3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the gaming machine g3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g1 or g2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extended linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. also,
Since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extended length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove and improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine g4, characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to start driving the wing member in the stopped state and smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine g4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines g1 to g3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation at the time of starting the driving of the wing member in the stopped state and opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

The gaming machine g4 is characterized in that when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the gaming machine g5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g4, when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which the wing member is released, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine g4 or g5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. A gaming machine g6 characterized in that an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to a direction is formed.

According to the game machine g6, in either the game machine g4 or g5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to the direction of gravity,
Even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface and upward in the gravity direction of the slide member. The slide displacement toward can be started smoothly.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine g7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine g7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the gaming machine g7, the gaming machine g8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by the slide member being slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine g8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g7, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the sliding member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding part being accepted by the receiving part.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the slide displacement are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine g9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion is abutted, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine g9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing members facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, whereby the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, in the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. The slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is rotated. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines g1 to g8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member.
A protrusion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is formed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The rotating member is recessed and includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion.
The slide member includes a one-sided contact portion to which one side of the contact portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member, and one side cover thereof. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the contact portion and the other side of the contact portion are brought into contact with each other. Equipped with a contact portion on the other side
In the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, and from the state where the wing member is closed, the one-sided contact with one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine g10 is characterized in that when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position where the portions are in contact with each other, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine g10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing members facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the rotation accompanies the rotation.
When the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, the wing member is closed while the rotating member is rotated to the other side. Along with the rotation, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side, so that the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in an allowable shape so that it can rotate to the other side.
Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that easily holds the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g10, the passage member is provided to form a passage for the gaming ball inserted into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. The gaming machine g11, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine g11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g10, a passage member for forming a passage of the gaming ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the slingshot ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member for forming a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entrance is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine g12 comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the gaming machine g12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member has a rubbing part that rubs against the edge of the
It is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the game ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing portion crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing portion is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member for forming a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entrance is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine g13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the gaming machine g13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of each other are crossed. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the game ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members are inserted. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine g12 or g13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member causes the drive shaft of the drive means to be the first.
A gaming machine g14 characterized in that it is performed by displacing it in a direction.

According to the gaming machine g14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g12 or g13, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g14, the rotating member comprises an abutting portion, and the sliding member is the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion with which the other side of the contact portion is abutted is provided, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine g15.

According to the gaming machine g15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines g1 to g14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one-sided contact portion to which one side of the contact portion is abutted against and the one-side contact portion. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding and displacement the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the posture of the slide member with the member are unacceptable, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidly displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is connected to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in a state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

The gaming machine g16 is characterized in that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion in the gaming machine g15.

According to the gaming machine g16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. The width dimension on one side and the other side of the contact portion is preferably set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is easier to achieve the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. Second to open or close the mouth
In a gaming machine provided with an opening / closing member and a second driving means for driving the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back surface side of the second opening / closing member. The gaming machine h1 characterized by.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first. (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball entrance and a second driving means for driving the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the slingshot, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine h1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first opening / closing member).
It can be secured on the back of the entrance), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

The gaming machine h1 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the gaming machine h1 or h2, the gaming machine h3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means.
..

According to the gaming machine h2 or h3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h1 or h2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. And since it is made larger than the total front projection area of the second driving means, the second entrance (second)
The dead space on the back surface of the opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine h3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port.
A gaming machine h4 characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the gaming machine h4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A gaming machine h5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the gaming machine h5, in any of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first driving means and the second driving means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The drive unit is provided with a drive unit that drives and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the gaming machine h5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine h6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine h6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body portion is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first position is such that the outer surfaces of one of the main bodies are substantially flush with each other.
Since the drive means and the second drive means are arranged and the outer surfaces do not form a step, the shield plate can be formed into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for limiting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines h1 to h6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the ball entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are provided. The gaming machine h7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a sliding member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine h7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines h1 to h6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a slide member that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, the first passage member is seconded in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product.
Since it is not necessary to bend it toward the passage side, the first ball entry port can be brought closer to the second ball entry port by that amount.

In the gaming machine h7, the rotating member is a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine h8 comprising a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by bending in a substantially shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine h8, in addition to the effect of the game machine h7, the rotating member is a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and being driven first. It is provided with a second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotation axis in the present invention to the slide member. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be the same, the slide amount of the slide member can be the same as that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the driving means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide amount of the slide member can be secured and the slide can be made with the first drive means. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine h8, the gaming machine h9 is characterized in that the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion opposite to the slide member.

According to the gaming machine h9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. The gaming machine h10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the gaming machine h10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, the second opening / closing member is opened to open the second opening / closing member.
When fraudulently applies to the first driving means from the entry port, the first driving means can be hidden by a part of the detection sensor, so that such fraudulent activity can be made difficult.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention, the first driving means is arranged on the back surface side of the second opening / closing member.
Even if the opening / closing member is opened and the first driving means is fraudulently applied from the second ball entry port, by closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the fraud is committed. Since the added portion becomes invisible, it is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above.

The gaming machine h10 includes a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member, and the detection sensors are arranged in pairs and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.
11.

According to the gaming machine h11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first drive means from the second ball entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used for fastening and fixing the two members, or may be used for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the gaming machine h11, the gaming machine h12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine h12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. When fraudulently applied to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a route from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Or,
It is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activities without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activities.

In the gaming machine h12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine h13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. So, for example,
When the second opening / closing member is opened to perform fraud on the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the gaming machine h12 or h13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Game machine h14 to play.

According to the gaming machine h14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h12 or h13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter expands so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the gaming machines h12 to h14, the gaming machine h15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine h15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines h12 to h14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of.
That is, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to perform fraud on the first driving means from the second entry port, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member, and the above-mentioned In a gaming machine provided with a second member disposed on the back side of the game board, a first member that engages with the first member.
A gaming machine i1 comprising a third member having an engaging portion and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. A gaming machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the gaming board is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20).
12-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board,
Pass through the second passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if a misalignment (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, a positioning hole for positioning each of these members is provided on the game board. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine i1, a third member having a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member is provided. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine i1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine i2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the gaming machine i2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the first one is formed.
Since the connecting portion between the first passage of the member and the second passage of the second member is provided with an opening arranged in the internal space, and the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, the third member It is not necessary to separately provide an opening for disposing the above. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine i1 or i2, the first engaging portion of the third member is the first member of the first member.
The gaming machine i3, wherein the second engaging portion is engaged with the second passage of the second member.

According to the gaming machine i3, in the gaming machine i1 or i2, the first engaging portion is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, it is effective to generate a misalignment (step) as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the gaming machine i3, the gaming machine i4 is characterized in that a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine i4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i3, since a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A gaming machine i5, wherein the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member in any one of the gaming machines i1 to i4.

According to the gaming machine i5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i1 to i4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the gaming board. When attaching each member, it is not necessary to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the gaming machine i6 is characterized in that the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the gaming machine i6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the gaming board, it is not necessary to separately engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine i7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine i7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the gaming board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the gaming board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the attachment operation. 2 The engaging part is the second
Can be engaged with a member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member to be fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member.
The gaming machine i8, characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine i8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Prepare,
Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed to the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from being forgotten to be attached when the first member and the second member are attached to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines i1 to i8, the first member is formed so that the gaming ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port that communicates with the first passage and the entry opening. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported and open or close the ball entry port, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the member, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine i9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i1 to i8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member displaced by the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (side) of the first passage, as compared with the conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only with the rotating member.
Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine i9, the slide member includes a protrusion portion in which the pair of feather members are projected toward the slide member, and the slide member is provided with a sliding groove through which the protrusion portion is slidably inserted.
The gaming machine i10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i9, a pair of wing members is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the sliding member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the slide. Since the slide member is provided with a moving groove and the third member is provided with an lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member, the sliding member is slid by the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the entry opening is rolled, and its rolling. A gaming machine j1 comprising a passage member into which a gaming ball that has rolled on a surface flows, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, and
A gaming machine equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball that has been entered into a ball entrance is known (
For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entrance is formed to a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is poured into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, so that an over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine j1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the gaming ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the aisle member can be shortened by that amount, and the aisle can be quickly flowed into the aisle member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The game machine j1 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine j2.

According to the gaming machine j2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j1, a detection sensor for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted until the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine j1 or j2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided at one side end portion of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine j3, characterized in that it is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j1 or j2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the gaming ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The first guiding means is provided, the entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the entry opening, and the first guiding means is one in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arranged between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member so as not to be stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface.
Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result,
It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member.

The gaming machine j4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines j1 to j3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member. ..

According to the gaming machine j4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j1 to j3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to receive the gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is suppressed that another game ball is entered before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member. Then, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine j4, the gaming machine j5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the longitudinal length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j4 or j5, the gaming machine j5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j4 or j5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball, so that when a plurality of gaming balls are accepted in the guiding groove, It is possible to guide the game balls to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In any of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guiding means is arranged, with the passage member interposed therebetween in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine j7 is characterized in that the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the gaming machine j7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is
Since the second region on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region in which the first guide means is arranged is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region. , The game ball that has entered the second region or the game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by using the downward inclination of the second region. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The gaming machine j8 is characterized in that the gaming machine j7 is provided with a second guiding means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine j8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j7, since the second guiding means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, while increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member, the speed is reduced in front of (immediately before) the passage member, and the game ball passes through the passage member from the second region to the first.
It is possible to suppress rolling to the area. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In a gaming machine j7 or j8, a game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is rolled toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine j9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to be able to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the gaming machine j9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j7 or j8, the second region of the rolling surface is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is provided with a second guiding means formed so that the gaming ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the gaming ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j9, the gaming machine j10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the gaming machine j9 in a state where the entrance is open.

According to the gaming machine j10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j9, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball when the entrance is open. The gaming ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guiding means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guiding means is separated from the first guiding means. The gaming machine j11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side portion opposite to the first guiding means.

According to the gaming machine j11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guiding means is
The side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is inclined in a direction away from the entrance as the distance from the first guide means is increased, and the upper surface thereof is directed toward the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means. Since it is tilted downward, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member with the second region, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding the ball to the entrance side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed and decelerated reliably by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the jumping out from the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening and closing member closes the entry opening, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the game machine j11, in the second guide means, the side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means is extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and the second guiding means extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. It is characterized in that the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine j1
2.

According to the game machine j12, in addition to the effect of the game machine j11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the gaming machine j11 or j12, the gaming machine j13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guiding means.

According to the gaming machine j13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j11 or j12, a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guiding means, so that the upper surface of the second guiding means is included. The gaming ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guiding means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the gaming machine j14 is characterized in that the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in an inclined direction.

According to the gaming machine j14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction, so that the first guiding means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball is brought into contact with (collision) with the second guiding means. , It is possible to decelerate, and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine j14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The gaming machine j1 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.
5.

According to the gaming machine j15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guiding means is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball, the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball can easily abut (collide) with the second guiding means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member.
It can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines j1 to j15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine j16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j1 to j15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the gaming ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. It is possible to easily change the rolling direction of the game ball toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the entry port, and a game board on which the entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided. Amusement machine K featuring
1.

Here, a game including a ball entry unit formed with a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the entry unit with another entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the gaming board. can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the gaming board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine k1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since it is provided with one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage as well as being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board, it is provided on the front surface of the game board. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be diverted (also used) and the specifications of the game board can be changed. You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the gaming machine k1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A gaming machine k2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the gaming machine k2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. Since it is arranged at a position overlapping with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board may be formed from plywood or a sticker may be attached to the game board. wear,
Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the gaming machine k2, the gaming machine k3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine k3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k2, at least the second of the second unit.
Since the front side of the passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, the game ball flowing down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed.
A gaming machine k4 characterized in that the unit is formed of a colored light transmissive material.

According to the gaming machine k4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k4, the gaming machine k5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine k5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines k1 to k5, the second passage has a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of second upstream passages. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The gaming machine k6 is characterized in that a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is provided in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k6, in any of the gaming machines k1 to k5, the second unit is the first.
A second upstream unit arranged on the back side of the unit and forming a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages, and a plurality of second connecting passages arranged in the second upstream unit. A second downstream unit is provided, and a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in a plurality of second branch passages. Therefore, for example, the number of the second upstream unit can be increased by the number of the second branch passages. When manufacturing a gaming machine with different specifications by changing to a small number of different units, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection sensors arranged.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine k6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. The first unit,
A detection sensor for detecting a gaming ball is provided in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit while being formed over each of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit. A gaming machine k7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine k7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the gaming ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entrance. The third through which the game ball passes
A passage is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and a detection sensor for detecting a game ball is arranged in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Therefore, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passage can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine k7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine k8, characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by the combination.

According to the gaming machine k8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is the same as the first passage. By directly or indirectly engaging the third passages with each other for positioning, positioning can be performed with respect to the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. , Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (as compared with the case of positioning other parts) ( The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

In any of the gaming machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit and is projected thereof. The gaming machine k9, characterized in that a receiving portion that receives a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine k9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While allowing you to do this, you can prevent some of the detection sensors from sticking out.
The size of the second unit as a whole can be reduced.

In the gaming machines k1 to k6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a gaming ball can enter, and a third passage through which the gaming ball entered into the second entry opening passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine k10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines k1 to k9, the third passage through which the gaming ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines k1 to k10, a bent portion that is bent from the front surface to the back surface of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is formed in the bent portion. The gaming machine k11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the pachinko machine, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back surface side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the gaming machine k11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines k1 to k10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed.
An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the bent portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the second passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is placed along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide and smoothly flow down the bent part, the standing part is located in front of the game ball in the front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing part and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. ,
The gaming machine l1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member through which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this way, the first
In the structure connecting the passage member and the second passage member, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that a step is formed at the connecting portion between the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member. , There is a problem that the smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine l1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ,
The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

In the gaming machine l1, the gaming machine l2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the gaming machine l2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1, a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface, so that the gaming ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time on the game ball, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence.
By that amount, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

In the game machine l1 or l2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side of the downstream ends of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passage direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine l3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine l3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1 or l2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.
The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the passage member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the gaming machine l3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passage direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes).
Can be made to.

Further, according to the gaming machine l3, the protruding piece of the gaming machine is used as the first passage member, and the recess is used as the second passage member.
Since each of them is formed, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Compared with (a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position), it is easy to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, like the gaming machine l3, the ability to regulate the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the gaming machine l3, the gaming machine l4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the gaming machine is formed orthogonally to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the gaming ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

The gaming machine l5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore,
Compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. , Can be hard to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the gaming machine l5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having a protruding piece or a recess, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed and molding can be performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

The gaming machine l6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine l4 or l5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine l6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l4 or l5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collided with the upstream end can be pressed to the bottom side. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up and bouncing at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a pachinko machine and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members is opened from the outside in the opening direction. A gaming machine m1 characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close. The driving means to make it
When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, and the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. And a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entrance port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the gaming ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can enter the ball. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is possible to regulate the entry of a ball.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so that the displacement is not regulated.
For example, since the pair of feather members can be forcibly released from the outside and the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position, the effect of restricting the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is effective. There was a problem that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine m1, when the pair of feather members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A protrusion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state where the receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the slingshot when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine m2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the gaming machine m2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. In the state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the gaming machine m2, the gaming machine m3 is characterized in that the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine m3, in addition to the effect of the game machine m2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine m2 or m3, the gaming machine m4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine m4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m2 or m3, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the sliding member is heavy. By using (self-weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the abutted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contact portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine m5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine m5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the one-side contact portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing member so as to face each other, the rotating member is on one side. When rotated to, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing member is released.

In this case, in the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. The slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is rotated. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the abutted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. , The gaming machine m6, wherein the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine m6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the one-side contact portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing member so as to face each other, the rotating member is on one side. When rotated to, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in an allowable shape so that it can rotate to the other side.
Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that easily holds the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the gaming machines m2 to m6, the passage member is provided to form a passage for the gaming ball inserted into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. The gaming machine m7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine m7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines m2 to m6, a passage member for forming a passage of the gaming ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the slingshot ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members thereof. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entrance. A gaming machine n1 comprising a passage member forming the passage of the above, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism comprises a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the game ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a gaming ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine n1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that cause the detection sensor to detect multiple times.

In the gaming machine n1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member rubs against the edge portion of the passage member. A gaming machine n2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine n2, in addition to the effect of the game machine n1, the transmission mechanism is such that when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member,
The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the thread and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. The gaming machine n3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine n3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine n1, a pair of pachinko machines that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. Since the transmission mechanism includes a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, the wing member is displaced. The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine n2 or n3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. The gaming machine n4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine n4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine n2 or n3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Characteristic A group> (Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the movement. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided with a light emitting means disposed inside the operating device and irradiating light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means unless the aim is aimed at. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Characteristic B group> (Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while being able to respond to repeated hits)
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing the player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
It is provided with a first driving means that can form a state and generates a driving force to move from the second state to the first state, and is provided with an urging means to generate an urging force to move from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 2
By pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extension position is executed and the operating means is arranged in a position where the voice coil motor can be in contact with the voice coil motor.
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Damage of the driving means is prevented by blocking the transmission of the driving force with the clutch)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the purpose of production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in an operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, "as an effect", when the button is driven, if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. And if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period when the button is stopped becomes long, and "
The feeling that "it started to move because the load on the player was released" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Characteristic E group> (The position of the protrusion of the cam is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. The first means is provided with a disengagement load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the first means, disengagement by the disengagement load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E, characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. , When the cam is placed in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are out of sync, and in other phases, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is subjected to a load given by the first means.
The gaming machine E3 is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, it is possible to realize an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position with the same configuration.

<Characteristic F group> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed.
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is lowered as compared with the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<Characteristic G group> (One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part)
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means or
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role as a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a part for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
To prepare for. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristic H group> (Structure to prevent ball lumps with thread)
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02).
See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.
..

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Characteristic I group> (Structure of board retainer)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that
It has the effect of pushing the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is used.
A load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<Characteristic J group> (Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-).
See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a first place and a second means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a second place.
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by different methods.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the invading member.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means refers to a member that has entered from the outside.
The gaming machine J5 is provided with a eliminating means for guiding to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Characteristic K group> (Structure of a decorative plate with a five-sheet structure. Including fraud prevention)
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Characteristic L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guide means. Not reached as a point)
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other. With the club
The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Characteristic M group> (Bass reflex speaker layout structure)
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means arranged so that at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
See Publication No. 6088). Then, in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine, where it is easy to produce a low-pitched sound.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means for supporting the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the directing means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the directing. Things can be adopted.

<Characteristic N group> (Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop in the middle)
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. A second switchable state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means, a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being provided with.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed with respect to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a production device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Characteristic O group> (Utilization of shell buttons and punching holes. The point is not reached)
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second machines are used.
Since the opening is formed of a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, it is possible to easily remove the solid object through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

<Characteristic P group> (G2 notice control)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, an effect executing means for executing the effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a plurality of times. It is determined that the determination means for deciding to execute the specific effect by the effect executing means for the continuous dynamic display of the identification information and the determination means for determining the specific effect to be executed by the determination means. If so, the gaming machine P1 is characterized by having an interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, by executing a special effect for multiple continuous variable effects, a series of effects using multiple variable effects can be provided to the player, which is a hobby of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741) has been proposed. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if an irregular notification effect, etc. that should be executed during that period occurs, the execution is delayed, and the player is given a game. There was a risk that the content would be difficult to understand. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of making the contents of the game easy to understand for the player.

According to the gaming machine P1, even when it is determined by the determining means that a specific effect is executed for each of a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect is based on the establishment of the specific condition. Since the execution of is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied, even if the execution of a specific effect is decided, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control etc. can be performed, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game. In addition, since the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player that the specific effect has not ended in the middle, and the player is provided with an easy-to-understand effect. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Based on the operating means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine P1, the switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the above-mentioned setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine P2 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the user, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is.

In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is satisfied by switching the setting by the switching means when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means. Gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine comprises a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned machine, and the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the gaming ball whose information is acquired by the gaming ball being inserted into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. It has the effect of improving the interest in pachinko.

In the gaming machine P4, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first ball entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the determination result, and when the determination means determines the second information. Dynamically displays the second identification information for showing the determination result, and the determination means preferentially determines the second information over the first information stored in the storage means. The specific condition is that the execution of the specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession. The gaming machine P6, which is established when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second ball is entered. Even if the ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed. It has the effect of making the player easily understand that it has started.

In the gaming machine P7, when the first ball entry means is in the first gaming state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter than the second entry means, and the second entry means is The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that when it is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, it is configured to be easier to enter than the first entering means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P7, in the first gaming state, the gaming ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, so that the first identification information moves continuously. It has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to perform a specific effect many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In the case of a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect of executing a specific effect on a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information is specified. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by having an effect executing means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed, which does not result in a specific determination result, the identification information can be displayed a plurality of times as a dynamic display of 1, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the interrupting means for suspending the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having the above.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player knows that the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being easy to show. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is restored, so that the problem that the specific effect ends in the middle and the content of the effect is halfway and confuses the player can be suppressed. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by the player, a switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the above.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. , It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is an effect.

The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching means when the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine Q5, characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned machine.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the gaming ball whose information is acquired by the gaming ball being inserted into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. It has the effect of improving the interest in pachinko.

The gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that it has a pre-determination means for executing a determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q5, the pre-determination is executed by the pre-determination means, so that the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the determination result, and the determination means determines the second information. In the case, the second identification information for showing the determination result is dynamically displayed, and in the specific condition, the second identification information is moved after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that it is established when it is displayed as a target.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second is determined. Even if the ball enters the ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information has priority. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

In the gaming machine Q7, a launching means capable of varying the firing force based on the operation of the player to launch a gaming ball and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first launching force can flow down. The first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are configured to be difficult to flow down, and the game ball launched with a second firing force different from the first firing force is configured to be able to flow down. The first ball entry means is provided with a second flow path, and the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means is the above. The gaming machine Q8 is characterized in that the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path are arranged at positions where they can enter.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally make it easier to satisfy a specific condition by adjusting the firing force of the gaming ball.

<Characteristic R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of the time reduction, it does not shift to charge production until 5 fluctuations)
A first ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entry means that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means that can acquire the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition, the staging means for performing an effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. A production determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the above-mentioned effect, a prohibition means for prohibiting the specific effect from being executed by the effect determining means when a prohibition condition is satisfied, and a prohibition means. The gaming machine R1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set that makes it easier to enter the starting port than usual, an effect is executed to notify in advance or during the special period that the special period will be executed. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls have been generated immediately after the state in which the ball can easily enter the starting port is finished, the notification is performed, so that the notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. There was a risk that there would be a problem that the interest of the game would be reduced. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine R1, the establishment of the prohibition condition prevents the execution of the specific effect indicating that the gaming ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the game is played. It is possible to execute a production that meets the needs of the person, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine R1 has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more variable than a normal state from the second state to the first state. The prohibited condition is set with at least one condition being the first condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine R2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the end of the special state in which the gaming ball is easily entered into the second entering means is set as the establishment condition as a prohibition condition. Therefore, a large amount of the second information is stored, and even if the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means, the specific effect is executed during the period when the profit to the player is low, and the problem of deteriorating the interest of the game is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine R2, the prohibition condition is that when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored when the special state ends, so that the second information is abundant. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the stored state, and even though the number of stored second information is small, there is an effect that the problem that the specific effect is not executed and the profit of the player is impaired can be suppressed. ..

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the discriminating means is longer than the first discriminating result and the specific first discriminating result that causes the second ball entry means to be changed to the first state during the first period. During the second period, it is configured so that it can be discriminated from the specific second discriminant result that is variable to the first state, and the effect determining means is said to be based on the fact that the specific second discriminating result is discriminated. The gaming machine R4, which is characterized by determining the production.

According to the gaming machine R4, in any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify the player that the period is more advantageous by executing the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be.

<Characteristic S group> (Volume control)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to set the sound output means capable of outputting the sound and the volume output by the sound output means based on the operation from the outside of the gaming machine. The sound is at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting means, the first state in which the sound is output from the voice output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the volume set by the volume setting means. An output control means for switching between a second state in which sound is output from the output means, and a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started from a power supply cut state in which the power supply for operating the game machine is cut off. The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having an initial setting means for setting the second state when the second state is set.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, a game machine that can change the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as an effect by the operation of a player or the setting of a game store has been proposed (Patent Document: Special). Open 2011-200511). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control. The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitable volume control.

According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state in which the power is output at a predetermined volume is set regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means, so that the power is turned on. It has the effect that it can be recognized by and suitable volume control can be executed.

In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be lower than the setting of the lowest volume set by the volume setting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means, so that when the power is turned on all at once. It has the effect of reducing the noise of pachinko parlors. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continuously sets the second state until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed, so that the power supply is supplied during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that the effect is executed after the power is turned on by the volume of the effect 1 executed later.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to the initial state, provided that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the voice output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the initial state has been set by the notification sound, and when the gaming machine is illegally initialized. It also has the effect of being able to detect fraud at an early stage.

<Characteristic T group> (Variable control of reserved symbol display area)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. For each information, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is changed according to the number of the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine T1 having a symbol display area variable means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, in the display area where the reserved ball information is displayed, the display area becomes difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed, and the gaming machine that displays the reserved ball information in an easy-to-understand manner is executed. I was asked. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the number of information stored in the storage means, so that the display mode is stored according to the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of making it easier to recognize the number of information and providing an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating that the symbol is a display area even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area variable means. Is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the area information is variably displayed according to the number of stored information, so that the area information according to the number of displayed symbols is displayed. It has the effect of being easy to understand.

The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information that can identify an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. ..

The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to be hidden when the symbol, which is the upper limit number, is displayed.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is suppressed. , There is an effect that the design can be easily identified.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a period determination means for determining a predetermined number of periods for which the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed according to the period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine T5 is characterized by having a rule changing means for changing a variable display rule.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is satisfied by changing the display mode, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area variable means displays the first display mode until the first number of the symbols is displayed, and when the number exceeds the first number, the first display mode is displayed. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a second display mode different from that of the above.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to establish the game and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic U group> (Releasing the display of the number of pending items)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. A symbol display means that displays a corresponding symbol for each information, and a display mode variable means that changes the display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period in which a predetermined number of the information is acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of information is acquired, so that the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of information is acquired. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine U1 is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the symbol is displayed based on the period.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is changed based on the period, so that the period is also checked while confirming that the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode suggesting that the symbol is displayed in the display area of the symbol display means is displayed even during the period when the symbol is not displayed. A gaming machine U3 characterized in that the display is set.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode is displayed even during the period when the symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to confirm that the information has been acquired at an early stage. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine U3, the gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the suggested mode according to the period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is changed according to the period required for storing a predetermined number of information, so that the frequency of information being stored according to the suggestion mode. It has the effect of being able to confirm.

In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed in a regularly variable manner based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode variable means is displayed based on the period. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U4, the acquisition frequency of information can be confirmed by a special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode can be changed regularly or irregularly. There is an effect that you can play the game while enjoying the case.

<Characteristic V group> (Hold navigation)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means is predetermined with the information before being determined by the determination means. The gaming machine V1 is characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on a number or more stored.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, so that not only the determination result but also the number of stored information can be interested. It becomes possible and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information stored by the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the effect executing means are pre-determined by the pre-determination means. The gaming machine V2 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result, so that the identification information is stored before the identification information is dynamically displayed by the specific effect. It is possible to suggest the judgment result of the existing information, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. ..

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the frequency with which information is stored can also be identified by the production.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, there is a history information storage means for storing game history information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. The gaming machine V4, characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so that the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes a specific number or less. ..

According to the gaming machine V5, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number becomes less than the specific number. It has the effect of being able to motivate people.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, for each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the symbol display means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine V6 is characterized by having a symbol display area variable means for varying the display mode of the region in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means according to the number of the information.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of stored information, so that the information is stored. It has the effect of being able to identify the numbers in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic W group> (Lucky number)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. The game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed is stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. For each piece of information, the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the storage means stored in the storage means at the time when the stored information is stored. A specific effect is executed based on the number information storage means in which the number information corresponding to the number in which the information before being determined by the determination means is stored and the number information stored in the number information storage means. The gaming machine W1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of capable.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the game machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the stored number of the information at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information is stored. Since the production is executed, there is an effect that the interest can be further improved when the information is stored.

The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1, as a specific effect, it is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be a specific determination result, so that it is determined as a specific determination result. It is possible to make people interested in the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in an embodiment showing an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored in the information determined to be the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, the number information stored for the information previously determined to be the specific determination result by the specific effect can be confirmed when the symbol is displayed. , There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the symbol will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

A gaming machine W4, wherein any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 has a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information attached to the symbol.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the symbol is given a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information, so that when the number of information before the determination is increased or decreased. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the time of being stored can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, and the number information of the specific effect when the privileged game is executed. It is characterized by having a notification means for notifying suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game, which is executed based on the storage of the information in the storage number corresponding to. The gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the suggestion information suggesting the type of the privileged game executed by storing the information up to the storage number corresponding to the specific effect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the game memorize information even during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the type of the privileged game is difficult to identify from the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W5, the identification information has an effect that the type of the privileged game is difficult to identify, so that the value of being notified of the suggestion information can be increased. be.

<Group X> (Derived from charge production)
A first ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entry means that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means that can acquire the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the second state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition, the staging means for performing an effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. The gaming machine X1 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the game machine X1.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a blade shape that regulates the entry of the ball into the starting port and releases the restriction when the opening condition is satisfied to facilitate the entry of the game ball. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). In the above-mentioned pachinko machine or the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member is movable, there is a possibility that the player may get tired of the game. The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and the game is performed with the expectation that not only the specific determination result but also the specific effect will be executed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the gaming machine X1 has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the determination of a specific effect by the effect determining means when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, it is prohibited that the specific effect is determined by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed unnecessarily. effective.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more variable than a normal state from the second state to the first state. The avoidance condition is characterized in that the condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means is set as at least one condition. The gaming machine X3.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1 or X2, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state. By making it easy to establish the above, there is an effect that the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that it is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the second information is excessively stored.

In any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball by varying the firing force based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first launching force. The first flow path is configured to allow flow down, and the game ball launched with a second launch force different from the first launch force, which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to flow down the first flow path. The first ball entry means is provided with a second flow path configured to allow flow down, and the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that it notifies the player of the suggestion information suggesting that the player is allowed to do so.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect played on any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information for causing the gaming ball to flow down to the first flow path is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a person causes a game ball to enter a second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (button pop-out control)
It has an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player, a moving means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the moving means. The moving means is configured to be able to execute a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operating means in the first moving mode and a second operation of moving the operating surface of the operating means in a second moving mode different from the first moving mode. The motion control means executes the first operation when the first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Y1 characterized in that it controls the operation of.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operating means can be moved in different movement modes depending on the motion controlling means, the player can be watched by the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing using the operating means can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means is characterized in that the operating surface of the operating means is moved from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the gaming machine Y2, the movement mode until the operating surface of the operating means is moved to a specific operating position can be changed by the motion controlling means, so that the game can be played even for the process of moving the operating surface of the operating means. Can be interested in people.

The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the moving means moves the operation surface of the operating means so that the moving period in the second operation is longer than the moving period in the first operation. Amusement machine Y3.

According to the gaming machine Y3, since the movement period can be changed according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls for the drive means, and makes the operation contents of the moving means different according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. The featured gaming machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, it is possible to make the operation contents of the moving means different by changing the contents of the drive control to the driving means. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotating motion, and the motion controlling means is a first driving control for rotating the driving means in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. And the second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving means is the first when the first drive control is executed by the control means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that one operation is executed and the second operation is executed when the second drive control is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the moving mode for moving the operation surface of the operating means.

The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that the gaming machine Y5 has a speed variable means capable of changing the rotation speed of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed variable means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and it is possible to produce an effect of the effect using the operation means. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed variable means. Characterized gaming machine Y7.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, a discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The moving means has a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. The gaming machine Y8 is characterized in that the motion control means determines the content of motion control according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine Y8, the discrimination result of the discriminating means can be suggested by the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means to be executed, so that the player pays close attention to the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the operating means.

<Characteristic Z group> (Prevention of button pop-out destination)
The predetermined movement is performed by an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means. A moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when the conditions are satisfied, a movement control means for controlling the moving means, and predetermined to the operating means. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation of the above, the moving means has a first operation for moving the operation surface of the operating means to the protruding position. The second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position can be executed, and the movement control means is operated by the operation means to perform the predetermined operation by the effect executing means. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the first operation is executed when the effect becomes feasible.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine Z1, in order to cause the moving means to perform the first operation regardless of whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved, the moving means operates to move the operating surface of the operating means. By grasping whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, there is an effect that the player can expect that the second operation is executed by performing the first operation.

In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means is a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by a rotational operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The movement control means comprises, as the plurality of movement controls, a first drive control for rotating the drive means in the first direction, and rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. The second drive control can be executed, and the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and the second drive control is executed. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the second operation is executed when the above-mentioned second operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z1, the operation surface of the operating means can be configured not to move even if the driving means is driven, and the position of the driving means can be set according to the state of the operating surface. Has the effect of being able to change without moving.

The gaming machine Z2 has a regulating means that can be changed between a regulated state that regulates the movement of the operation surface of the operating means by the moving means and a release state that cancels the regulation, and the control content of the movement control means. The first operation performed by the moving means accordingly is an operation for changing the regulating means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the protruding position. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being an operation.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to change the state of the regulating means according to the control content executed by the motion controlling means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means is a rotating member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotating operation of the driving means, and an acting member that is connected to the operating means and on which the rotating operation of the rotating member acts. The rotating member has a protrusion capable of contacting the working member, and the regulating means rotates the driving means in the first direction to make the protruding portion the working member. The gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by being brought into contact with the machine.

In the gaming machine Z4, the regulating means is characterized in that it does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction and the protruding portion is brought into contact with the working member. The gaming machine Z5.

In the gaming machine Z5, the position where the protrusion is stopped is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6 to play.

In the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, a discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. , A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminant result, and the predetermined movement condition according to the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine Z7, which is characterized in that the above is established.

<Characteristic α group> (Over prize at the time of big hit)
The discrimination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination result for showing the discrimination result by the counter-parting means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result to the display means are provided. When displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the first privilege game in which the first privilege advantageous to the player is given as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the above-mentioned In a gaming machine having a second privilege game in which a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given, and a deciding means that can determine either of them, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Is executed, it is characterized by having a type determining means for determining the notification type for notifying the player of the notification information for notifying the type information of the privileged game being executed from a plurality of types. The gaming machine α1.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of the privilege game is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification types are executed in various ways and the game is enjoyed. Has the effect of improving.

In the game machine α1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and as the privilege game, from the closed state. It has a variable control means for playing an open game that changes the variable ball entry means until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. The gaming machine α2 is characterized in that it includes at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value of having more than a predetermined number of gaming balls entered into the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine α2, the privileged game executes the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, the open game is executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine α3 characterized by having a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α2, even if the first notification type is determined, the game can be switched to another notification type in the middle of the privilege game, so that the number of gaming balls exceeds a predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

The gaming machine α3 is characterized in that the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that specific notification information is not notified, so that there is an effect that the problem of overlapping notifications can be suppressed. ..

<Characteristic β group> (Produced with normal hit as probable hit)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. If the pre-determination execution means for executing the determination and the information determined to be the specific determination result by the pre-determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are stored. , A gaming machine β1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the privilege game is executed, if it is further determined that the privilege game is executed after that, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. It has the effect of making the player expect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine β1, the privileged game has a first privileged game in which a normal gaming state is set after execution, and a probability that the player is determined to have the specific determination result is higher than in the normal gaming state after execution. The second privilege game in which the special game state is set is at least set, and the specific effect is characterized in that it is configured in an aspect suggesting that the special game state is set. Gaming machine β2.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, if the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored, the stop display switching means capable of displaying the stop display in the specific stop display mode is provided. A gaming machine β3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, the stop display is performed in the specific stop display mode, so that it is as if the second privilege game is executed. It has the effect of being able to remind you.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information on which the first privilege game is executed is dynamically displayed. However, it is characterized in that it switches to the specific stop display mode based on the storage of the information determined to be the specific determination result during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, so that the chance of being displayed in the specific stop mode can be increased. be.

<Characteristic AA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means is notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Characterized game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, if the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -No. 005505). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the power was turned on by displaying the return screen. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a gaming situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the sound output during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the above-mentioned gaming machine AA1 is used, it is between a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the determination result is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is turned off during the special map fluctuation, or if the special map fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the effect corresponding to the remaining variation time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic AB group> (Background change timing is different according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A gaming machine AB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation effect). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the gaming machine AB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, various effects can be provided. In the above-mentioned gaming machine AB, as the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. Thereby, when the operation means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. This makes it possible for the gaming company to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation when the operation for changing the effect mode is executed.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided from the operation of the operating means to the change of the effect mode, for example, the predetermined period is set up to the timing when the next special figure change is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic AC group> (Switches development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to be performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. Characterized gaming machine AC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operating means. With a gaming machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operating means, so it was possible to enhance the production effect, but more diverse production. There has been a demand for a gaming machine whose mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is different. Good to configure. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing to the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, it may be configured to change the effect mode executed after the continuous operation effect according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure change, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic AD group> (Provides a state in which the hold number display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of hold balls and a state in which the hold number is not synchronized).
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. To indicate a storage means that can store information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The mode display means includes a mode display means for displaying the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for this purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine AD1 is characterized in that a second aspect for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is one that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of holdings, the game content can be determined based on the number of holdings, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function to determine the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds is a specific number. In that case, there was a case where a series of effects (continuous effects) were executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds was executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on the result of one lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous production, and there is a problem that the production effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be produced in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AD1, the display mode indicating the storage number displayed on the display means displays the storage number stored in the storage means according to the conditions to be satisfied, and the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of stored memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of storages stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times of effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times that the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.

<Characteristic AE group> (Notice effect performed only when the background is changed)
An effect mode in which an effect mode is changed based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy specific conditions. , A gaming machine AE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, there is a device that performs a suggestion effect for the player to play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is one that variably configures the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one that changes the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the dedicated production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AE1, since it is configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is played during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute effects that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic AF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the non-notifying period).
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the effect mode. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine AF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the gaming machine AF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period without the notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It is preferable to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player to the operating means.

<Characteristic AG group> (Step up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. It is possible to change the vibration amount by the vibration amount changing means that can change the vibration amount that vibrates the operation means to a different vibration amount, and the vibration amount changing means based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine AG1. According to the gaming machine AG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic AH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of pattern fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means. The mode-variable means is the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. AH1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic AI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the discrimination information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. If this is the case, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine AI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. It has an effect operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and an effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the effect operation. It has a preparatory movable control means that can be executed, and the preparatory movable control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. A game machine AJ1 characterized by this. According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Furthermore, since the preparatory movement control is configured to be performed separately from the production operation based on the production scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the production operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the effect operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic AK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said for the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above-mentioned method, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine AK1 to play. According to the gaming machine AK1, the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, so that the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the effect mode changing means. It is preferable to configure the effect mode that is not used, for example, the effect mode that uses only the display means as the replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the gaming machine with enhanced effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic AL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period differs depending on the game state)
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby for setting a standby state when a predetermined wait condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the dynamic display execution means. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine AL1 characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the gaming machine AL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the operating means can be changed according to the set gaming state, so that the operation is carelessly executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress the frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminating means can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AM group>
It is executed by a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means, and the notification means thereof. The effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification, and the reproduction reproducible of the predetermined voice data based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the power supply means. In a gaming machine having a means and an audio output means capable of outputting an electric power corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, the notification is set as a reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. The gaming machine AM1 is provided with a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been required to make the gaming situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine AM1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. , The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the predetermined power supply means based on the start of the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine AM2.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

The gaming machine AM1 or AM2 is characterized in that the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio is output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided. The gaming machine AM4 is characterized in that the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the presence or absence is present, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AN group>
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. As a dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in a gaming machine having an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating between, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed thereof. A speed setting means capable of setting a speed, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. And, the gaming machine AN1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AN1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and predetermined operating means. The operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and the effect mode variable by the effect mode variable means. The effect mode is changed based on the effect execution means capable of executing the corresponding effect and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. It has a variable timing setting means for setting the timing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AN1 has an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the effect executing means is provided by the speed setting means. The gaming machine AN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information to be set.

According to the gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. The gaming machine AN3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN2, the player can be made to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's game. You can increase your motivation to participate in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AO group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the predetermined operation by the operation determination means within a predetermined first period. Based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined to have been performed and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, the effect mode during the second period set after the first period is set. It has an effect mode setting means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine AO1 characterized in that a suggestion effect suggesting an effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AO1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. A second set after the first period based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined by the discriminating means and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means. The effect executing means includes an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode during a period and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AO1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of times it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means has the number of times the determination measured by the measuring means. The gaming machine AO2 is characterized in that the effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing in which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AO2, when the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times, the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means during the second period. The gaming machine AO3, which is characterized by performing a unified production that does not suggest a production mode.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO2, it is possible to prevent the player from early grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AP group>
The discrimination means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specified. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above method up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and a display means thereof, at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display mode to be displayed on the screen, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. Of the display control means capable of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means, a third predetermined number equal to or less than the second predetermined number. The game AP1 is characterized by comprising an aspect ending means for terminating the display of the specific display aspect based on at least the use of the information in the determination by the discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means thereof. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to display the execution means, the storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined display mode until at least the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display means and a display mode to be displayed on the display means, it is specified based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. The second predetermined number of the display control means capable of displaying the display mode of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. It is provided with a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the use of the following third predetermined number of the information for the discrimination by the discriminating means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number-of-times suggestion mode that suggests the number of discriminating counts of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode. A gaming machine AP2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP1, the number of times suggestion mode for suggesting the number of times of discrimination of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode is provided to the display means. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine AP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means is difficult to distinguish from the number suggestion mode. The gaming machine AP3, which comprises a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2, an information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed. Since the third display control means for displaying in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode.

In the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means sets a predetermined specific condition when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. If is satisfied, the gaming machine AP4 is characterized in that the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AQ group>
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a discriminant result that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. The specific effect of the specific effect is based on the fact that the execution means, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the discriminating means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine AQ1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Based on this, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AQ1, as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first specific effect in which the first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the effect. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. AQ2.

According to the gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AQ1, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a first effect mode is provided after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A plurality of including at least a first specific effect to be executed and a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. The suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means. , It is possible to positively operate the operation means for the player who wants to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the player's preference.

<Characteristic AR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the mode setting means. Based on the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode and the predetermined first condition being satisfied, the suppression period during which the effect mode notification means suppresses the notification of the effect mode is set. It is provided with a suppression period setting means and a notification control means for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A game machine AR1 characterized by being there.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AR1, a mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. The notification of the effect mode by the effect mode notification means is suppressed based on the fact that the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode set by the mode setting means and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. A notification control for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period and a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. It is provided with means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the first operation for the operation means are detected during the specific period included in the effect period as the type of the effect executed by the effect execution means. The effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the above means, and the suppression period setting means is provided for at least the specific period. The suppression period is set, and the effect mode notification means notifies the effect mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The gaming machine AR2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AR2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of the effect executed by the effect executing means are the above-mentioned during a specific period included in the effect period. The suppression includes an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the detection of the first operation on the operating means. The period setting means sets the suppression period at least for the specific period, and the effect mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The effect mode is notified based on the above. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

The gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic AS group>
Between the operation means that can be operated by the player and the specific effect execution means that executes the specific effect in which the valid period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and the effective period. The specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation on the operating means, and the first control and the second control as the types of the specific control executed by the specific control executing means. When a control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least, and as the type of the specific effect, a specific number of operations are performed on the operating means during the valid period of one. A plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is easily executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. The gaming machine AS1 is characterized by comprising a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AS1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and a specific effect execution means. The first is a specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operating means during the valid period, and a specific control type executed by the specific control executing means. A control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control, and a specific number of operations for the operating means in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. The first type in which the first control is easily executed when the first control is performed, and the second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. It is provided with a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AS1, in the specific effect, the correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is determined in advance for each type of the specific effect. A gaming machine AS2 characterized by being defined.

According to the gaming machine AS2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AS1, the specific effect corresponds to the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control makes the operating means different from the first vibration intensity. The gaming machine AS3, which is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine AS3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is the operation. Since the means is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AS1 to AS3, in the specific effect, the correspondence between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is the specific effect. The gaming machine AS4, which is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of.

According to the gaming machine AS4, in addition to the effect of any one of AS1 to AS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution for the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. The display control means for displaying the history of the control executed by the means is provided. As a result, the type of the executed specific effect can be easily understood by the player, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic AT group>
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation effect based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. In a gaming machine having various operation effect execution means, as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation effect setting means for setting one of the operation effects from a plurality of the operation effects, and the operation means. The mode-variable means comprises a mode-variable means capable of varying the mode of the above-mentioned, and the mode-variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine AT1 characterized by being.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AT1, based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, and as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects. It has a setting means and a mode variable means capable of changing the mode of the operation means, and the mode variable means sets the mode of the operation means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable to the suggested mode. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AT1 is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. AT2.

According to the gaming machine AT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect of notifying the player who intends to operate the operating means of the current situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machines AT1 or AT2, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine AT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine AT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AT1 or AT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AU group>
A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the game execution means, the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means are the dynamic. The first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second aspect different from the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed are displayed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and between the start of the dynamic display of the identification information and the elapse of the specific period. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The gaming machine AU1 comprising, a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second aspect is displayed, and a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality including at least. ..

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AU1, it is advantageous for the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means for executing the privileged game, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. The first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed at least after a specific period has elapsed since the start of the dynamic display, and the first mode after the specific period has elapsed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed, and the identification after the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is suggested that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of possible first specific effects and a second specific effect that can suggest that the second aspect is displayed is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AU1, the specific effect executing means can display a deviation effect mode showing a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect of 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is the first combination. The gaming machine AU2 is characterized in that the combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine AU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the deviation effect mode showing the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is 1 The combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AV group>
In a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect and an effect mode setting means thereof. It has an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the above-mentioned, and based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect unit is provided with respect to the first effect means. Based on the first effect control means for executing the effect operation and the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined second effect operation is executed by a second effect means different from the first effect means. The first effect control means has a second effect control means, and the first effect control means can output specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. The gaming machine AV1 characterized by having the above.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AV1, in a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means is an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. And an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means. A predetermined effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. It has a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, and the first effect control means transfers specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has a specific information output means that can be output. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means indicates the overlap effect mode. The effect information is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the overlapping effect modes. A gaming machine AV2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV1. That is, the effect mode setting means can set an overlapping effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means can set the effect information indicating the overlap effect mode. Is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the duplicate effect modes. .. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlap effect mode is set so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Amusement machine AV3.

According to the gaming machine AV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AW group>
When the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is being set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means, at least from the first position. While the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable to the second position different from the first position and the first effect period are set, the first effect is set. In a gaming machine having a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, the first effect. In the specific effect period within the effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member, the display means, the movable state determining means for determining the movable state of the effect member, and the above-mentioned It is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Pachinko machine AW1.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AW1, when the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means. The first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, and the first effect period are set. In the middle of the process, it has a second effect executing means that can execute a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied. In the gaming machine, in the specific effect period within the first effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and the movable state of the effect member are determined. It has a movable state determining means and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. It is a thing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AW1, the gaming machine AW2 is characterized in that the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminating result when the effecting member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine AW2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW1. That is, the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the effecting member is not located at the first position. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW1 or AW2, the gaming machine AW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means is for executing the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine AW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3, the first one has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. The effect condition is satisfied when it is determined by the operation determining means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine AW4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine AW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AX group>
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , A game state setting means that can set, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation means. The operation discriminating means has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the game state is set based on the game state setting means. The gaming machine AX1 is characterized by having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AX1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and an operation thereof. A first gaming state in which the first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display execution means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. A game state setting means that can set a possible second game state, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. The operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the waiting state is set by the waiting state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. It has a standby condition variable setting means capable of variablely setting the standby condition based on a gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is established. The means is to variably set the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine AX2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX1. That is, the waiting condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means is satisfied. The waiting condition is variably set so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AX1 or AX2, the gaming machine AX3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to be discriminated by the discriminating means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AX3, the second gaming state is easier to discriminate by the discriminating means than the first gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally , there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..
In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed as a gaming machine in which is displayed on the display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means thereof. A determination means that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display means that can dynamically display the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period. And the privileged game executing means capable of executing the privileged game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A symbol display means capable of causing the display means to display a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the symbol display means displays the symbol. It has a symbol display area variable means for varying the display mode of the area, and the symbol display means is in a state where the symbol is not displayed with area information indicating that the area is the area where the symbol is displayed. However, the gaming machine has means capable of executing a specific effect when the area information in which the symbol is not displayed is variably displayed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the storage means are stored. A determination means for executing a determination based on the above information, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the display means. Has a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, and is determined by the determination means. A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before the display means, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means. It has a symbol display area variable means for varying the number of symbols, and the symbol display means can display area information indicating that the symbol is a display area even when the symbol is not displayed. The gaming machine has means capable of executing a specific effect when the area information in which the symbol is not displayed is variably displayed .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is sectional drawing of the window part movable unit in XX line of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member showing the meshing state of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a top view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base member. It is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. (A) to (c) are sectional views of a light guide member, a plate-shaped displacement member, and a hollow member in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of the 2nd operation unit. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotational displacement of a large receiving part schematically. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the LXXII-LXXII line of FIG. 58. (A) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the 2nd operation unit of 5th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in the 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in line XCVIII-XCVIII of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a specific winning opening unit and a driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a sectional view of the distribution unit in the line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a sectional view of the distribution unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the distribution unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a sectional view of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a sectional view of the exchange unit in the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in the 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit in the eighth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back surface base and the displacement member in tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in the eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit in the CXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144 (a). FIG. 143 is a front perspective view of the operating device in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 143. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. 144. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 151 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 151 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in the XIVc line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 154 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 155, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 155. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 143 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXX-XXXIX line of FIG. 143. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 196 (a). It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 196 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 199, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. 202 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 202 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 199, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXVIb-LXVIb of FIG. 203 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. Is. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member, the ring member, and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 211 (a), and FIG. Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 213 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 214 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 215 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 215 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 215 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 231 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 232 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a binding movable member and a harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (a), and (c) is a binding movable member and a harness. It is a schematic diagram of the back surface schematically shown, and (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 233 (c). (A) and (b) are the top schematic views of the front frame, the inner frame, the binding movable member and the harness which schematically show the binding movable member and the harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 249 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 252 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 261 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 261 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction view, and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction view of FIG. 261 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 261 (a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of the above. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line of FIG. 264 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 283 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 284 (a). It is a partial front view of a ball launching unit, an inner rail and an outer rail after launching a ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation apparatus in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 290. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate, the side base material, and the second effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in eleventh embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 340 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 340 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 340 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 343 (a). Yes, (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 343 (a), and FIG. 343 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing the upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing four reserved balls set during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode in which the character J0 appeared from the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (b) is further reserved from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when the number of balls increased and exceeded the recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram in which character J0 in the display area C indicates an optimum number of reserved balls according to a state. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing a change to a reserved ball during the change of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode when the character J2 is displayed in the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C is changed when an over prize is won. It is a figure which showed. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which a player is allowed to store up to 6 reserved balls during reach, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the number of reserved balls is stored up to 6 and the symbol arrangement is changed. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a lucky display of a previous jackpot hold, and (b) shows a display mode when a player presses a button after the number of reserved balls has been accumulated up to six. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect during long opening, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of the long opening prize. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table per ordinary hit in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table for normal use which is a part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern selection table for time saving which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the winning command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold effect mode selection table in the first control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A mode holding lid range selection table in the 1st control example, (d) is the notice B mode holding lid range in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the holding lid range selection table during reach effect in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows the lucky hold command table in the 1st control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the reserved character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal balloon selection table in the first control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice B balloon selection table in the first control example. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a balloon table during reach effect in the first control example. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect lottery table during reach in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through-gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky display determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding hold effect setting process during reach executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding lid setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold character setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon lid setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term winning determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term prize management process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold hold effect management process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing the holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding character display processing. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special symbol variation and the continuous production in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the 2nd control example. (A) is a display mode showing a display screen during continuous production in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing a display screen during special production in the second control example. This is a display mode showing a background change during continuous production in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving middle processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect return process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect return process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen of the first rotation after the power is turned on in the fourth control example. .. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the volume table in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial volume setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of turning on the power in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a retry operation in a tilting device. It is a timing chart when the touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. be. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection B table in the fifth control example. , (C) are schematic views schematically showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry process during touch input executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting device control process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during operation effect which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect backtracking operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a variation of the jackpot A in the reserved ball and showing the display mode during the variation of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing the display mode in which the reserved ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 483 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one was digested and became a jackpot A. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which one more reserved ball is digested from the state of FIG. 483 (b) during super time, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the reserved ball is shown in FIG. 484 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one more digested from the state of) and became a big hit by this fluctuation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during probabilistic change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when a jackpot is started, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect of the first jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram showing that the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 487 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of notifying a player that a probability change was given. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends and the probability variation mode is entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol switching process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning ball processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a sixth control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the game state setting process to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 6th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when the long opening is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a display mode in the case of the long opening effect in the seventh control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the long opening effect regulation in the 7th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening-related processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the display screen and the flow of BGM at the time of power-off in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the power is turned on, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return variation after the initial setting is completed. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the background change according to the background change operation timing during the special figure change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change of the third symbol, and (b) is the next figure after the background change operation is performed during the low-speed change. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of a variable screen. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the fluctuation state of the 3rd symbol in the 8th control example, the validity period of a touch sensor, and the operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch effect is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode after a touch operation. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed, and (b) shows an example of a display mode of the first variation after the eight hold effects are executed. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a new prize is awarded after the eight-piece hold effect is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when eight hold effects are executed and a new prize is awarded. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 1st variation. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end of 8 hold productions. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a touch operation is performed during a touch effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a special operation is performed during a touch effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the vibe pattern data in the eighth control example. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an eight-held lottery table in the eighth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 8th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the 8 production scenario selection table in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold number control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the left-right button input process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode identification process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed 8 display setting processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background notice selection table in the 9th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the sea mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect is executed in the mountain mode. be. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a background change process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the crack effect in 9th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the start of the cracking effect, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a button is operated during the first period of the cracking effect. be. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of the second period of the cracking effect, and (b) is the display mode when the button is not operated during the first period of the cracking effect. It is a figure which showed an example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the cracking effect selection table in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the cracking effect end processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the tenth control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation effect pattern 1 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 11th control example, and (b) is the operation effect pattern 2 during the special prize during the jackpot game period in the 11th control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot medium effect screen in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the PUSH effect screen during the jackpot in the eleventh control example. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the success of the PUSH effect in the jackpot in the eleventh control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a screen during the ending effect in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the success of the ending effect in the eleventh control example. .. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special prize middle operation effect selection table in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a schematic view of the contents of the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario C table in the eleventh control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the ending scenario table in the eleventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table in the eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the processing during the ending executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 11th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 11th control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is the last effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the accessory operation, the liquid crystal display, and the flow of the pseudo voice when there is no last effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. 12 is a timing chart showing a bonus operation, a liquid crystal display, and a flow of pseudo voice when the bonus control device is driven during the round effect of the jackpot game period in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the final round process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the twelfth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the twelfth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the accessory control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the twelfth control example. (A) and (b) are the display contents of the BGM and the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example when the power is cut off while the special figure is changing and the special figure change is restarted when the power is turned on. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the silhouette notice selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation return process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display rise process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 13th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the counter update process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when three identical numbers are vertically aligned in the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the mode promotion effect in the 14th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode after the background mode was promoted by. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the mode promotion effect selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is the schematic diagram in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the regulation contents of the hit table which constitutes the mode promotion effect selection table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the out-of-order table constituting the mode promotion effect selection table in the 14th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the defined contents of the round number display data table in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode promotion effect lottery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 14th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing content acquisition process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 14th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 4
With reference to 4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply "pachinko machine").
An embodiment when applied to 10) will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Front view to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in (see) or changing the effect content of the super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 3 with built-in light emitting means such as LEDs on the periphery of the window 14c
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, a front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1).
(See) In the upper left portion, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball lending is performed according to the operation. Will be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through. The gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62, similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not the winning opening 140 has been won. specifically,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 14
The time for opening the wing member 945 (electric accessory) associated with 0 is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the wing member 945 is in the open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the wing member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the wing member is hit once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the 945 is opened more than during normal times. also,
During the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least one of the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit. May be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 and the number of times for opening the wing member 945 for each hit are not performed, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol. May be changed so as to be higher than normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140.
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is used only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened).

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the feather member 945 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the ball to the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened for each hit. If the player is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. Wing member 945 against
The opening time and the number of opening times may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is done in (see Fig. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first.
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same, but the balls are paid out to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a prize paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140 may be set to five.

A wing member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. The wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), And the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times the feather member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a feather member as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the wing member attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.
A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to pass the ball through the second winning opening 14.
Since the wing member 945 attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the wing member, and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140. It will be advantageous to the person.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, the first winning opening 6
When the jackpot lottery conducted due to winning in 4 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot,
After a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a big hit. After that, the game state shifts to the special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each substrate.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and it is possible to remove the sealing sticker in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 205
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display device 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as the axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving a wing member is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
It is connected to 11, but not to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength according to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
The display of 1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts.
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motor, etc., 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, a power failure (power failure) (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 on the determination that the power is cut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are NMI.
The interrupt process (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 6
3. First winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, pair of left and right window movable units 150, and balls discharged from the game area can flow down. The ball flow unit 290 and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of plywood on which veneer plates are overlapped, and the base plate is prevented from allowing the player to see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. It is formed so as to be shieldable at 60.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 is drilled for passing electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67, in addition to a through hole drilled so that the variable display device unit 80 can be disposed at a substantially central position. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through holes 60a to be provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b recessed so as to be concavely fitted to the front end portion of the operating unit 300. The lower left and right sides are provided with a plurality of (two in this embodiment) light transmission holes 60c formed in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position where the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side can pass through, and from the viewpoint of light emission effect, the effect of the game board 13 is improved. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passage hole 60c, a flow bottom component member 91 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is 91.
, 92 are arranged, and the outer side portion 94 of the flow bottom component members 91 and 92 thereof is the light passage hole 60c.
91, 92 of the flow bottom constituent members are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in the manner of lining.

The left and right flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 have a covering plate FB on the front side of the right flow bottom constituent member 92.
Since it is configured in a substantially symmetrical shape except that is disposed of, the flow bottom component member 91 on the left side
Will be described in detail, and the description of the flow bottom component member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the flow bottom component member 91, the plate-shaped portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60 is formed in a strip-shaped portion having a width equivalent to that of the inner rail 61, and the gaming area is formed by the strip-shaped portion 93. Is partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, the outer portion 94 which is the outer portion (front view outer portion) of the game area partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, and the game partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93. It includes an inner portion 95 which is an inner portion (inner portion in front view) of the region.

As described above, the outer portion 94 is outside the gaming area, and is therefore configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consider the influence on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

Further, as a result of designing the outer portion 94 thinly, even if the wall thickness of the inner portion 95 becomes thin, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95, so that the rigidity of the base plate 60 is increased. It is possible to suppress the displacement (deformation in the thickness direction) of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction by utilizing the above. Further, by designing the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to have a thin wall thickness, it is possible to sufficiently secure the front-rear width of the game area.

In this way, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the function required for the inner portion 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. , It can be easily made visible to the player through the outer portion 94.

In the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the back surface side through the wall thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) as in the present embodiment and arranging the light emitting means on the back surface side thereof, the base plate 60 is composed of a wooden plate member while the base plate 60 is formed. The brightness visually recognizable through the can be easily changed.

For example, when forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized so as to be continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions in a front view, it is arranged on an illuminated substrate 777 arranged on the back side of the outer portion 94. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 with a plurality of types and changing the brightness of the outer portion 94, the appearance of the same decorative pattern can be changed with a plurality of types.

Further, for example, a decorative member that changes a visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

The mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode is not limited at all. For example, a member typified by an illumination plate may be used, which is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle at which light is applied. Further, for example, a member designed to change the visually recognized pattern by changing the emission color may be used on the premise that the pattern is drawn in a plurality of colors and a plurality of colors of the emitted light are prepared. ..

The inner portion 95 is arranged inside the gaming area as described above. The inner part 95 is displaced (
If it is deformed), it may affect the ball flowing down the game area, but in the present embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95 (light). (Because the transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side with respect to the band-shaped part 93 when viewed from the front)
The rigidity of the base plate 60 can be used to prevent displacement (deformation) of the inner portion 95.
This makes it possible to stabilize the flow of the sphere.

A general winning opening 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95, the general winning opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow bottom component member 91 is arranged on the front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed by fixing it from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window portion movable unit 150 is arranged at the left and right upper corners of the center frame 86. Are arranged.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 7, the lower part of the game board 13 is not shown, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and shown in a front perspective.

The window movable unit 150 is rotatable and displaceable, and is disposed of a displacement member 151 that is visible to the player in the window portion inside the center frame 86 and a displacement member 151 on the back surface side of the displacement member 151. It is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force for driving 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape in the anteroposterior direction, and is arranged at both tip portions of a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end portion configured near a bent portion and the bifurcated portion 152, and the back surface side is opened. It is provided with a tip portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) and an overhanging portion 154 protruding in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip portion 153 is fastened to an effect portion 153a formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side and arranged so that the player can see it, and to the open portion side of the effect portion 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped portion 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped portion and has a shape in which the opposite side of the effect portion 153a is narrower than that of the effect portion 153a side.

The effect portion 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner surface thereof, and can diffuse the light emitted from the back surface side to the inside of the open portion, so that the light actually emitted is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated with light, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a visually as if the entire effect unit 153a is shining (pale).

The overhanging portion 154 is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a projecting from the center frame 86 side in a displaceable range in both directions in the rotational direction. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable at an angle (an angle of less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the overhanging portion 154.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 includes a contact member 161 arranged at a position where it can contact the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7), and a metal having one end (front end) connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to each other. (In this embodiment, brass) transmission shaft rod portion 162 and its transmission shaft rod portion 162
Driven member 163 connected to the other end (rear end) of the above non-rotatably, and transmission shaft rod portion 162.
A known E-ring 164 that is fitted to both ends of the illumination from the radial direction, a support case 170 that is configured so that the transmission shaft rod portion 162 can be pivotally supported, and the entire support case 170 is arranged inside the support case 170. It is provided with an illuminated substrate 180 to be mounted.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a columnar member having a perfect circular outer shape in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the middle abdomen, and is cut from a predetermined radial direction at the tips on both sides to form a plane on both sides. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. The both end portions are fitted with the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, whereby the contact member 161 and the transmission shaft rod portion 16 are fitted.
2 and the driven member 163 are connected so as to be relatively non-rotatable (integrally).

The contact member 161 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 161a through which an insertion hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. ,
The arm portion 161 extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a U-shaped front view.
With c.

The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 163a through which the inserted hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. , The arm portion 1 extending straight toward the outside of the base end portion 161a and having a substantially flat plate shape.
It is equipped with 63c.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB1 is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engaging with the elastic claw 163d.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-back slide of the metal plate member MB1 are arranged at both ends of the arm portion 163c in the radial direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. It is formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pushed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is placed on the back side wall of the rail portion. By hitting, the slide is restricted, and at that position, the elastic claw 163d is released from being pushed down by the metal plate member MB1 (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is made of metal. Engage so as to restrict the withdrawal of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied up with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 includes a rear member 170B, a middle member 170M having a support hole 174 arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B and through which a transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and a middle member 17 thereof.
It is provided with a front member 170F which is arranged on the front side of 0M and has a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) plate-shaped members are laminated and fastened to the front and back. ing.

The illuminated substrate 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape in front view according to the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect. The light emitting means 181 is provided with a connector 182 arranged as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 bored in the illuminated substrate 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 is a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 and a weak light emitting means arranged outside the light transmitting hole 177 (arranged facing the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F) in a front view. It is provided with 181b.

The through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction of inclination. This will result in
It is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is formed in a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is tilted (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding column portion 172 is not tilted (the front-back direction), so that it is compared with the case of assembling in the same direction. Assembling defects (not assembled or loosened) are likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined. The margin of the through hole 183 along the inclined direction can be made large, and the assembling of the through hole 183 to the projecting columnar portion 172 can be facilitated.

The illuminated substrate 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M.
The illuminated substrate 180 is in a posture in which the front surface of the plate faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward on the front side). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window portion movable unit 150 in the X-ray line of FIG. For ease of understanding, the rear member 170B is not shown, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is shown by an imaginary line. The XX rays are arranged so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding columnar portion 172. In the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

The aspect of the wall-shaped portion on the front side of the middle member 170M differs between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. That is, the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces the horizontal direction), and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD is an inclined wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces downward on the front side). It is configured as.

In contrast to the wall-shaped portions having different normals, the illuminated substrate 180 has a lower side wall-shaped portion 170 on the back surface of the plate.
It is supported so as to be in a posture along the MD (a posture in which the normal is inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting columnar portions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion. 172 and left and right outside (
Left side) Wiring through hole 173 drilled in the front-rear direction in an arrangement surrounding the connector 182 at the corner.
And prepare.

The projecting frame portion 171 abuts on the front and rear of the outer frame portion of the front member 170F, whereby the illuminated substrate 180
Seal around the area. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 becomes the front member 170F and the middle member 17.
It is possible to prevent the light from being visually recognized from between 0M and prevent light leakage from the same position.

The projecting columnar portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 183 of the illuminated substrate 180. The back surface of the illuminated substrate 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the projecting column portion 172 disposed in the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is higher than the seat portion of the projecting column portion 172 disposed in the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined posture can be stably supported, and a gap can be secured between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the illuminated substrate 180.

The protruding tip of the seat portion of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protrusion length becomes shorter toward the lower side) according to the posture of the illuminated substrate 180. .. As a result, not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be imparted to the projecting cylindrical portion 172.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illuminated board 180. Since the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the illuminated substrate 180 via the electrical wiring, the illuminated substrate 180 can be maintained without being fastened and fixed.
The posture of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stably supported.

The front member 170F is formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-transmitting resin material so that the back side surface is substantially parallel to the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD, and is formed in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A plurality of light transmission holes 177 and a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the back surface side.
And the L-shaped support portion 1 having an L-shaped view in the left-right direction connecting the back surface of the plate and the frame portion forming the outer circumference.
It is equipped with 79.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 in front view. As a result, the mode of being visually recognized from the front side of the front member 170F changes between the light emitting means 181 arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181.
That is, the inside of the light transmission hole 177 can be visually recognized as if it emits stronger light than the other parts.

A plurality of the projecting column portions 178 are formed with substantially the same projecting length. As a result, the illumination substrate 180 in the inclined posture is surface-supported at a plurality of positions while making the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination substrate 180 uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination substrate 180. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode, the illuminated substrate 18
It is possible to improve the sense of stability of support of 0.

That is, since the illuminated substrate 180 has an inclined posture in which the front surface of the plate faces downward on the front side, it is preferable to support it from the front side in order to maintain that posture, but a large-area support portion is provided at one place. When the illuminated substrate 180 is supported, the area in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged tends to be limited. When the area of the support portion is reduced by giving priority to the distributable area of the light emitting means 181, the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 collapses and the front member 170F.
The distance between the main body plate portion and the illuminated substrate 180 is likely to vary depending on the arrangement range of the illuminated substrate 180, and there is a possibility that unevenness in the light emitting mode is likely to occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter projecting columnar portions 178 having the same projecting height are provided.
Since the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 can be supported at a plurality of points at the same time, a projecting cylinder that supports the illuminated substrate 180 at a plurality of small gaps generated between adjacent light emitting means 181s. A plurality of portions 178 can be arranged. As a result, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 is arranged to face the upper surface and the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 arranged to face the front surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 180 supports and prevents the illuminated substrate 180 from tilting forward due to its own weight.

Further, the rear portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 arranged to face the upper surface of the illuminated substrate 180 and the illuminated substrate 1
By arranging the 80 with a gap, it is possible to loosely support the illuminated substrate 180 and minimize the vertical displacement of the illuminated substrate 180.

The support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is the lower wall surface portion 170M of the middle member 170M.
It is also formed on the front side of the D (formed at two positions on the left and right), and is arranged to face the lower surface and the back surface of the illuminated substrate 180, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, in the present embodiment, the L-shaped support portions arranged above and below the illuminated substrate 180 are configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is stably supported by being sandwiched and supported by the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illuminated substrate 180 are fastened and fixed to form a single rigid body, the illuminated substrate 180 may vibrate under the influence of the vibration generated in the middle member 170M. , It is a measure in consideration of it.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if the middle member 170M or the front member 170F vibrates, it is said. It is possible to independently maintain the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 disposed on the back side of the intermediate member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the intermediate member 170M, but in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 has an upper side wall shape. It is arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the illuminated substrate 180 with a gap generated on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 180 via the small-diameter projecting column 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the projecting column 172. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the illuminated substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being directly transmitted from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as the vibration source to the illuminated substrate 180.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 formed in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and an electromagnetic solenoid S.
It includes a lower regulating portion 175 disposed below the OL1 and an upper regulating portion 176 disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the magnetic force (electromagnetic force). The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and displaced ascending. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1
The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 rotate as a result of the displacement between the ascending position where the electromagnetic force rises as a result and the descending position where the electromagnetic force disappears and is arranged as a result of the descending due to its own weight. Displace. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

11 (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11 (b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150. 12 (a) is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12 (b) is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

In addition, in FIGS. 11A and 11B, a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state in the descending position) is shown in FIG. In (a) and 12 (b), a state (a state in the ascending position) in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by the electromagnetic force generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) and 12 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the rear member 170B
11 (b) and FIG. 12 (b) show the outer shape of the displacement member 151 and the shape of the open portion on the back surface side by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 12A, the driven member 163 abuts on the cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower restricting portion 175 at the descending position, and the descending displacement is restricted to ascend. At the position, the cushion portion 17 attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating portion 176.
It abuts on 6a and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The materials of the cushion portions 175a and 176a are not limited in any way. For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane and epoxy resin may be used, and rubbery materials may be used. In addition, the cushion portion 175a,
The material of 176a may be the same or different.

Here, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with respect to the transmission shaft rod portion 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load generated by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. Can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulatory unit 175
It is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (the position substantially at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulation unit 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, and therefore the upper regulation member 176.
There is little advantage in relating the arrangement of to the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the driven member 163 is arranged so as to face the rotational tip of the driven member 163.
The load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 via the above is reduced.

That is, when a moment of the same magnitude of force is generated, the position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is long) is transmitted via the driven member 163. Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulating member 176 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width dimension (diametrical width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion). It is shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and stably generate the load transmission at the rotating tip.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) due to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 rebounds after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulation portion 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface to be loaded can be increased, and the cover can be covered. The pressure generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the weight of the drive member 163 (
Stress) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the driven member 163 while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a via the driven member 163 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions.

Below the upper restricting portion 176, a protruding portion 176b is formed so as to project in a curved shape on the back surface side of the middle member 170M. The projecting portion 176b is arranged so as to face the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the driven member 163 is suppressed in contact with the driven member 163 in a small area. Guide the rotation of.

As shown in FIGS. 11B and 12B, the tip portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 in front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect unit 153a makes it possible for the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a to visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale). While the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, the change in the light emitting mode of the effect unit 153a can be suppressed even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced.

In other words, the light visually recognized through the effect unit 153a can be visually recognized by the player as if it is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect unit 153a, so that the LED or the like can be seen inside the effect unit 153a. The light emitting means of the above is arranged, and it is possible to make an illusion as if the displacement is synchronized with the displacement of the effect unit 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illuminated substrate 180 is arranged while adopting the illuminated substrate 180 having a fixed arrangement. It can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a also arranged on the illumination substrate 180 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, by adopting multiple illuminated boards, the first board is fixedly arranged and the second board is displaceable, the light emission effect that tends to be realized can be achieved by fixing the arrangement and using a single electric circuit board. It can be realized by using a decorative substrate. As a result, the number of illuminated boards can be reduced while achieving the same effect.

It will be described back to FIG. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a back case 310 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

The rear case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit 300 is arranged in the internal space of the rear case 310 with the first operation unit 400 in which the movable device is displaceably arranged in a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. The left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above and the like and the second operation unit 700 arranged under the opening 311a are accommodated respectively, and this is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is arranged at a position above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is arranged at a position below the opening 311a on the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310, respectively. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are mounted on the rear case 310.

The rear case 310 is along the back of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall 312 (eg,).
It is extended as a flat plate (arranged in parallel) and includes a support plate portion 313 that surface-supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with the fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b (circular or oval in the present embodiment) may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape). Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is also rectangular.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case 310, and the formation of the support plate portion 313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood on which veneer plates are overlapped as in the present embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. Is invisible, so that the entire back surface side of the area where an opening can be formed (concave from the side surface) in the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is effective as an effect area for arranging the movable members so as to be visible.

On the other hand, in the place where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in the front view. The area that can be disposed of will be narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the fact that many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can see the ball fired in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed in a place other than the range where the fired ball can be visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and passes through the return ball preventing member 68 in the gaming area. Introduced in, and thereafter configured to flow down the gaming area. In the ball game, the place that is considered to attract the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61). ) Is usually low in attention.

Therefore, as a range that the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left parts based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right parts based on the upward convex arc. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and the game board 13 is made of a veneer plate that is difficult to transmit light in the first place, and the outer edge member 73 from the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized via the block-shaped member 74 or the block-shaped member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged in the places where the attention is low or invisible. In fact, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portion 313 is formed near the corner portion of the rear case 310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62. Will be done.

In other words, by selecting the place where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the place where the visibility is low (low production ability) in the first place, the operation unit 300
Further, while achieving the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board 13, it is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player paying attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, the range in which the ball does not flow down is the lower left and upper left. It can be easily arranged in the portion and the upper right portion.

The substantially lower half portion of the outer wall portion 312 on the right side is provided with a notch portion 312a that is notched (notched is formed) toward the back surface side. The cutout portion 312a is cut out below the band-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in the front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a gap is provided between the cutout portion 312a and the game board 13. Form.

By forming the notch portion 312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the cutout portion 312a can function as a wiring passage through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring interferes with other components as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Further, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space having a configuration required for the variable winning device 65. The configuration required for the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which a sphere flows, a substrate that accompanies a light emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a sphere, and other structures. Is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion 312a, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means as light having a blurred outline.
In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). Therefore, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to prevent the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 from depending on the shape of the rear case 310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the light emission effect.

Further, as compared with the case where the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as the LED is arranged so as to be exposed to the outside of the operation unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, the electric wiring is operated through the notch portion 312a. A configuration such as this embodiment in which the unit 300 is exposed to the outside can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electric wiring so that it can be taken out of the operation unit 300 without turning it to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED.

The length of formation of the notch portion 312a (length in the vertical direction) is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion 312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the fastening and fixing with the game board 13 is omitted in the right side portion of the rear case 310, the rigidity of the operating unit 300 is relied on when considering the rigidity in the right side portion of the game board 13. Can't.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. Hereinafter, the metal plate-shaped member 75 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75.
FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, for ease of understanding, the game board 13 is shown as a single unit, and the illustration of other members arranged on the game board 13 is omitted.

The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, has an arc wall portion 73a that constitutes an upper portion and has an arc shape on the inner side surface, and is extended downward from the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape. A vertical wall portion 73b and an inclined wall portion 73c formed having an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left are provided. In this way, by forming the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 can be compared with the case where the outer edge member 73 is formed of a plurality of members that are vertically divided. The man-hours for assembling to the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape toward the back surface along the right surface portion.
And, at the joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed in a U-shape in the vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion, and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, a columnar shape is formed toward the back side. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion 73b3 to be projecting, and a fastening portion 73b4 attached to the columnar projecting portion 73b3 so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the fastening portion 73b4.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, the metal plate-like member 75 has the plate-like protrusion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 as compared with the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-like member 75. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being generated in any one place.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction, while being bent to the left at the main body plate portion 75a formed without creases in the longitudinal direction and the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and formed through the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through hole 75d and an insertion hole 75e in which a fastening screw is inserted into a plate portion provided on the plate portion on which the through hole 75d is formed and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the long direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b which is easily curved in the long direction.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size capable of inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 through the seam penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a columnar protrusion is provided. Part 73b3
Is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip portion thereof engages with the game board 13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the game board 13 will be described.

The game board 13 accepts a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed so as to be able to accept the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and a cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. It is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 13f, which are formed in a recess as a possible recess.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b.
Reference numeral 3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. This makes it possible to reduce the number of positionings.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b by itself, and the vertical wall portion 73b does not need to be sufficiently rigid. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Further, since the deformation of the game board 13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 The shape can be maintained.

It will be described back to FIGS. 5 and 13. A first operating unit 400 is arranged on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 of the operating unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to the position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the display of the third symbol display device 81. It is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. Hereinafter, the details of the first operation unit 400 will be described.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. FIG. 16 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 17 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operating unit 400 is retracted to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81. 3 The overhanging state of overhanging (descending) toward the symbol display device 81 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the rear case 310 is not symmetrically formed. In particular, regarding the upper side wall (ceiling surface), the shape of the tank 130 of the payout unit 93 (
(See FIG. 3), the right side of the front view is lower than the left side of the front view. That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, the upper side wall of the rear case 310 is arranged at a position where the right side is lower than the left side in order to secure the arrangement area. It is installed (arranged along the wall schematic line UL).

As described above, inside the rear case 310, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is a margin in the ceiling height). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring are used. An auxiliary device that does not directly affect the appearance of the production such as SP1 (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) is arranged on the left side.

As a result, a dent (gap portion) caused by the asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310
The drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be arranged by effectively utilizing the above, and the lower edge of the first operating unit 400 can be moved to the upper side as much as possible while having a symmetrical shape. It is possible to easily secure a large vertical dimension of the viewing area.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the shapes of the pinnate member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400, the first operating unit 40 is matched to the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310.
The shape of the side to be arranged facing the upper wall of the rear case 310 in the retracted state of 0 is designed. That is,
The wing-shaped member 460 on the left side is designed to project toward the upper wall side of the rear case 310 as compared with the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side.

The pinnate member 460 is configured to be united by changing the state of the first operation unit 400 from the retracted state to the overhanging state and to be visually recognized integrally, and is designed to have a symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In the present embodiment, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the asymmetrical portion of the pinnate member 460 (the upper side that abuts when united) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are configured in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21.
Is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. 18 and 20 show the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 show the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates and moves via a plurality of gears interposed between the drive motor MT1, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 made of metal that is arranged at substantially the center position on the left and right and is vertically expandable and contractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 arranged on the left and right opposite sides of the arm member 414. Ru.

The elevating plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and rotates symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. A plurality of displaced pinnate members 460 are displaced.

Therefore, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement mode in which raising and lowering and rotation are combined with the driving of the drive motor MT1. As a result, the constituent members can be displaced in a plurality of directions even though the single drive motor MT1 is used, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the auxiliary arm member 4
The upper end position portion of the arcuate gear portion 444b of 44 is configured to project upward from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430. In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is overhanging.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 to the overhanging state, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state. The arcuate gear portion 444b, which overhangs upward (see FIG. 27),
It is displaced downward with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430, and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude from the elevating plate 430 at the position shielded by the base plate 60 in terms of arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 is allowed to protrude.
By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so as to hide the overhang on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until it is displaced to a position not shielded by the base plate 60, the elevating plate 43 is always present.
It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 as compared with the case where the auxiliary arm member 444 is hidden on the back side of 0.

For example, since the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 can be arranged on the lower side, the elevating plate 430 can be arranged.
It is possible to easily avoid interference between the upper edge portion and the outer wall portion 312 on the upper part of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 16).

Further, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, the third symbol display device 81
While avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped part (the part having the gear teeth formed along the straight line) is maintained overhanging on the side, the overhanging length of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is increased. It can be secured sufficiently.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the elevating plate 430 is displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430. The relative displacement member 442 can be displaced vertically, but in this case, it is necessary to always dispose the fixed rack gear-shaped portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which most of the elevating plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 as in the elevating plate 430 of the present embodiment is diverted, the fixed rack gear-shaped portion is used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401. It was necessary to project from the third symbol display device 81 side to form.

Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by a fixed rack gear-like portion, which causes a problem that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates, and the rack gear is mounted on the evacuation plate 430 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400. For the purpose of concealing the shaped portion, there is a possibility that a problem may occur in which the degree of freedom in designing the evacuation plate 430 is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is adopted instead of the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, it is placed on the back side thereof according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430.
Auxiliary arm member 444 can be arranged (to hide). Therefore, while avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped portion is maintained overhanging on the third symbol display device 81 side, the overhang length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is sufficient. Can be secured.

22 (a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, FIG. 22.
(B) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 showing the meshing state of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400. It is a figure.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a), 23, 24 and 25, the first operation unit 400 is
The bottom wall portion 3 of the back case 310 (see FIG. 16) is formed from a resin material into a long plate shape on the left and right.
A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate portion 401 fastened and fixed to 11 and a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate portion 401, and an arm member 41 of the transmission unit 410.
A back arrangement plate 420 composed of a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged on the same plane including a connecting plate portion 421 connected to the tip of 4, and a back arrangement plate 420 arranged on the front side of the back arrangement plate 420. 4
It is provided with an elevating plate 430 to which 20 is fastened and fixed, and a synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
..

In addition, the first operation unit 400 is a plate-shaped support plate portion 4 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430.
50 and a pair of left and right pinnate members 460 that are rotatably supported by the support plate portion 450 and rotationally displaced by the load given by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. Auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the pinnate member 460 (FIG. 2).
2 (a), FIG. 22 (b) and FIG. 24).

The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft strut portion 402 that pivotally supports the transmission gear 412, a terminal support portion 403 that is arranged at the lower right portion thereof and supports the terminal gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 arranged in the center of the left and right and fixed on the back side so that the front side can be displaced vertically, and a long opening on the right side of the metal rail 405. A long hole portion 406, a lid portion 407 that is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material and covers a region where the long hole portion 406 is formed from the back surface side, and a detection sensor SC1 for detecting a state. To prepare for.

The terminal support portion 403 includes a shaft strut portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft strut portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b projecting along a circle centered on the shaft strut portion 403a, and an annular protrusion thereof. It is provided with a stopper portion 403c which is projected on the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion portion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the region where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaches the back side of the long hole portion 406 is a long hole. It is guided to the front side through the part 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid portion 407 and the back surface side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 overhangs to the back surface side, and during the assembly work, between the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 13) of the rear case 310 and the main body plate portion 401. There is a risk of being pinched by. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid portion 407, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. Can be done.

As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the rear case 310 without confirming the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 402. The terminal gear 413 that is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and the arm support portion 404 that can change its posture as the terminal gear 413 rotates.
The arm member 414 is pivotally supported by the arm member 414.

The end gear 413 has a gap between the annular protrusion 413a projecting toward the back surface in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b and the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. The stoppered portion 413b, which is projected in a fan shape in the same manner as the stopper portion 403c, and the shaft strut portion 40.
A cylindrical overhanging portion 413c that projects cylindrically to the front side at an eccentric position away from 3a, and a detected portion that extends in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from the flange-shaped flange portion formed on the front side of the gear portion. 41
It is equipped with 3d.

The annular protrusion 413a is arranged so that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b.
The annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the stoppered portion 413b and the annular protrusion 403b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail for guiding the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stoppered portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stoppered portion 413b is the stopper portion 4 in the rotation direction thereof.
Interferes with 03c. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is the stopper portion 4.
It will be limited by the dimensions in the circumferential direction of 03c and the stoppered portion 413b. That is, the end gear 413 is rotationally displaced at a rotational angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is 36).
The stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 41 are bisected at an angle obtained by subtracting the angle from 0 degree.
The shapes of 3b may be designed respectively. As a result, it is possible to prevent one of the stopper portion 403c and the stopper portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, so that the useful life of the first operating unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to a resin terminal gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip portion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected unit 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. When the detected unit 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the voice lamp control device 1
The MPU 221 of 13 can determine that the first operation unit 400 is in the retracted state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, and an annular portion 414a.
A plate-shaped portion 414b extending radially from the front side portion of the annular portion 414a and a plate-shaped portion 414b extending in parallel with respect to the plate-shaped portion 414b and arranged toward the back surface side. An intermediate plate portion 414c connected to the portion and a long hole portion 414d bored in the intermediate plate portion 414c in a long hole shape.
And the tip plate portion 414e which is arranged by translating to the back surface side with respect to the intermediate plate portion 414c and connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and the tip plate portion 414e thereof from the extended tip to the front side. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 414f that overhangs in a columnar shape.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed to have a size that allows the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate portion 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f, and the connecting plate portion 421 of the rear arrangement plate 420 cannot be removed from the cylinder. It is connected and supported by the overhanging portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operation unit 400. In FIG. 26, the first operation unit 4
The second intermediate position of 00 is shown, and the coil spring SP is shown for ease of understanding.
1. The fixed pulley to which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1 and the base plate to which the drive motor MT1 is fastened and fixed are not shown.

According to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, the arm member 414
By forming the shape in a bent shape in the front-rear direction, it is possible to functionally avoid interference with other members. This will be described below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged on the front side of the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the limitation of the front-rear position of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (the portion opposite to the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Then, the front-back position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c disposed on the opposite side of the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1 is arranged on the back surface side as compared with the plate-shaped portion 414b. As a result, the front-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 on the root side of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. It is possible to prevent the load transmission efficiency from being lowered due to the deformation of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c.

Further, since it is due to the relationship with the terminal gear 413 at the front-rear position of the intermediate plate portion 414c, a portion not related to the terminal gear 413 (the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404 with reference to the terminal gear 413)).
In the place on the opposite side of)), the front-back position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e disposed on the opposite side of the rotating shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the terminal gear 413 is arranged on the back surface side as compared with the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the front-rear dimensions of constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set for the purpose of avoiding interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by forming the arm member 414 in a stepwise bending manner, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from being locally (one point) concentrated (the stress concentration can be relaxed), and the arm member can be relaxed. The durability of 414 can be improved.

Further, by forming the minimum necessary gap in order to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a gap gathered on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other members that secure the gap. Therefore, it is possible to crawl the electric wiring (electrical wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) by using the gap, or to dispose of an additional effect member (illumination board or the like).

Further, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 arranged so as to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is unintentionally sandwiched or rotated by the pinnate member 460. It is configured to be able to prevent being bitten into the gear tooth portion of the gear 441 or the relative displacement member 442. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 first passes through the elongated hole portion 406 from the main body plate portion 401 side to the auxiliary arm member 44.
You will be guided to 4. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is passed through the extension portion 444c by being inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448.

Inside the extension portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. After that, the electrical wiring DH1 is connected to the base end side portion 44.
It is guided from 4a to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, passes through an L-shaped region partitioned by a frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, and reaches the through hole 427.

The frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 is provided with an abbreviated portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over substantially half a circumference centering on the insertion hole 425a. Electrical wiring DH by omitting part 425b
An angle at which 1 is guided to the front side of the block plate 428 can be provided at 180 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is bent in the vicinity of the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated.

The electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front-rear direction by passing the through hole 427 to the front side, and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430. It is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of the 450 with a binding band or the like, and is connected to a connector arranged on the illuminated substrate of the light emitting effect device LA1.

As described above, the electric wiring DH1 is a constituent member (auxiliary arm member 444) in most of the path thereof.
And because it is arranged inside the rear arrangement plate 420), the electric wiring DH1 is compared with the case where the electric wiring is exposed (exposed) in most of the path as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to reduce the possibility of colliding with other movable members and receiving a load.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that is slidably displaced are separated. That is, it is limited to the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by the slide displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or bending in the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the deformation of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442
By breaking the relationship with the displacement speed of, it is possible to avoid an increase in the load applied to the electric wiring DH1.

It will be described back to FIG. 22A, FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25. The rear arrangement plate 420 is provided on the elevating plate 430, which is arranged on the right side of the plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 which is connected to the columnar overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 and is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, and the connecting plate portion 421. The accommodating plate portion 425 to which the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed, and the accommodating plate portion 4 thereof.
It is provided with an L-shaped plate-shaped closing plate 428 that is fastened and fixed to 25 and partially closes the back side portion of the accommodating plate portion 425.

The connecting plate portion 421 is formed in the main body plate portion in a long hole shape long in the left-right direction, and the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f.
A support box portion 423 formed in a box shape in which the front side and the upper side are opened below the insertion length hole 422 is provided.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion length hole 422, the rigidity of the accommodating plate portion 425 can be reinforced by using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box portion 42
Reference numeral 3 is arranged so as to face the support wall portion 426 on the left and right sides, and when the support wall portion 426 is largely bent to the left and deforms and comes into contact with the support box portion 423, the deformation is caused by the rigidity of the support box portion 423. It can be suppressed.

The accommodating plate portion 425 has a support wall portion 426 projecting to the front side in a straight plate shape along the vertical direction at the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a penetration formed on the front side of the closing plate 428. It is provided with a hole 427.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter through which a connector arranged at the end of the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts on the frame portion projecting in a frame shape on the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425 so as to partition the area between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. It is composed. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is configured to be arranged only inside the frame portion of the accommodating plate portion 425 (front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (on the left side of the frame portion).

A deformed hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that the temporary fixing portion 425c, which is a portion protruding in a U shape on the back surface side at the position on the through hole 427 side of the omitted portion 425b, can be visually recognized from the rear view. To.

The deformed hole 428a is composed of a horizontally long shape portion having a left-right width slightly longer than the width of the temporary fixing portion 425c and a vertically long shape portion provided intersecting the horizontally long shape portion in order to secure an area through which a binding band can pass. It is formed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion of the binding band. Electrical wiring D with a cable tie
By temporarily fixing the H1, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. in this case,
By tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 side can be brought closer to the closing plate 428 side. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the circular plate portion and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As a result, the electrical wiring DH1 becomes the accommodating plate portion 42.
Since it is possible to avoid rubbing against the edge portion of 5, the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the block plate 428.

As a result, the temporary fixing position of the electric wiring DH1 is the position between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428, that is, the position where the electric wiring DH1 is fixed with respect to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 (that is, the electric wiring). Electrical wiring DH from the light emitting effect device LA1 to which one end of DH1 is connected
Temporarily connect the electric wiring DH1 at the part that overlaps with the path to the base end side portion 444a of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first part to displace the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the elevating plate 430 when traveling along the path of 1. While fastening, the binding band can be replaced without removing the closing plate 428. Therefore, the service life of the electric wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintainability of the binding band related to the electric wiring DH1 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 crawls on the front side of the closing plate 428 along the shape of the closing plate 428. Since the closing plate 428 has an L-shaped rear view, the electric wiring DH1
Is curved along a first plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction on the front side of the closing plate 428, while is along a second plane (a plane orthogonal to the first plane) orthogonal to the left-right direction near the through hole 427. It will be curved. As a result, the holding force for holding the electric wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 has a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing of the rear arrangement plate 420, and a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of parts related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440.
A tubular portion 433 formed so that the electrical wiring DH1 can be inserted, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a main body plate portion to avoid interference between the members. It is provided with a plurality of coping portions 435 formed in the above and a decorative portion 436 having a substantially symmetrical pattern on the front surface of the plate.

The fastening portion 431 is arranged at least at the lower end portion of the elevating plate 430 and is a relative displacement member 442 (
It is provided with a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a that support the vertical displacement of the slide rack). Although the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, a female screw shape is formed from the tip portion thereof, and a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the accommodating plate portion 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed in. Ru. That is, it is also used as a portion related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420 and a portion related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440.

The tubular portion 433 extends to the back surface side through a gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and the rear end side end thereof abuts on the front surface of the accommodating plate portion 425. The inside of the tubular portion 433 is continuously connected. Electrical wiring DH through this continuously connected part
1 is inserted back and forth.

As the coping unit 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, the raised fastening portions arranged side by side in the vertical direction), the main body plate portion is used. Notch portion 435a cut out upward from the lower edge and auxiliary arm member 444
An example is a recessed portion 435b which is recessed in a wall portion formed in a wall shape so as to protect the upper side of the axis of the arcuate gear portion 444b and is formed so as to avoid interference with the arcuate gear portion 444b. ..

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back surface side of the pinnate member 460, and is configured so that a series of patterns can be visually recognized in cooperation with the pinnate member 460 as the pinnate member 460 is displaced. It will be described later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 includes a pair of rotary gears 441 that mesh with each other and their rotary gears 4.
A relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the 41s and is displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of elongated holes 443 formed in the relative displacement member 442 in a long hole shape, and the other and teeth of the rotary gear 441. An auxiliary arm member 444 having matching rotary gear teeth and an end side plate 448 fastened and fixed to the rotational tip portion of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back surface side are provided.

A gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted through the elongated hole 443. The longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the elongated hole 44
By arranging the third in the elongated direction substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the relative displacement member 442.

In addition, since the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced as compared with the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be combined with each other. The frictional resistance generated between them can be reduced.

The auxiliary arm member 444 has a ring-shaped base end side portion 444a pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432 and an arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the base end side portion 444a. Extension portion 4 extending in the radial direction of the ring shape from the gear portion 444b and the proximal end side portion 444a.
44c and a portion formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape arranged at the extension tip portion of the extension portion 444c so that the opening portion inside the cylinder is continuously connected to the opening portion of the extension portion 444c. It is provided with a cylindrical member 444d to be formed.

The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a through which a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a is inserted in a state of being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. The accommodation plate 425 regulates the movement to the back side. That is, the base end side portion 444a is the elevating plate 430.
And, it is pivotally supported so as not to fall off in a manner facing the accommodating plate portion 425 from the front and back.

The extension portion 444c is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and is extended from one side in the lateral direction to the other side in the rear side portion, and the short end of the electric wiring DH1 with the other side. It is provided with a retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the directional dimension (width dimension). The retaining portion 444c1 has a role of preventing the electric wiring DH1 disposed inside the extending portion 444c from coming off after the electric wiring DH1 is passed between the extending portion 444c and the other side in the lateral direction. have.

The mode of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, extension part 4
The gap between 44c and the retaining portion 444c1 is the lateral dimension (width dimension) of the electrical wiring DH1.
May be configured shorter than. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electric wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electric wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the vertical displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be minimized. It will be described later with reference to 30.

The tubular member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the lateral dimension of the elongated hole portion 406, and is inserted through the elongated hole portion 406 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the elongated hole portion 406. It enables the sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along the above.

The end side plate 448 is provided with a through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.
The electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a has a cylindrical portion 4 inserted through the elongated hole portion 406.
It passes through the inside of the 44d, passes through the inside of the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the proximal end side portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate portion 425. Then, it is guided to the front side through the through hole 427 and the cylindrical portion 433.

Since the electrical wiring DH1 is passed through in this way, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is the electrical wiring DH1.
It is formed larger than the outer shape of the connector connected to the end of the. In other words, through hole 448
a is formed in a size that allows the connector to be inserted.

The through hole 448a is formed not only in the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also in a deformed shape including an eccentric region outside the diameter, and in particular, a large opening is formed on the extending portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electric wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extension portion 444c, so that the electric wiring DH1 is largely arranged with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes. It is possible to avoid changing (ramping).

In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the extension portion 444c side in the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. With this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right side, so that the lateral displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced to the left and right when the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the orientation of the through hole 448a is changed to cause the end side plate 448 to be displaced in the left-right direction. It can function to be mitigated. Therefore, since the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448, the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 is shortened. As well as being able to, the end side plate 44
The load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from 8 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, the elevating plate 4
Similar to the relative displacement of 30 and the relative displacement member 442, the support plate portion 450 fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced.

The support plate portion 450 is formed in a disk shape, and a light emitting substrate is arranged on the back side.
Reference numeral 1 is a plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the front side, and is internally fitted into a plurality of fastening portions 451 into which fastening screws inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed, and a cylindrical portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. , Lifting plate 43
A pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which a fastening screw to be inserted through 0 is screwed, a through hole 453 formed in a pair of left and right under the fastening shaft support combined portion 452, and a light emitting effect device LA1.
A support portion 454 for hooking and supporting the upper projecting piece LA1b of the above is provided.

The light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions LA1a into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the support plate portion 450 is screwed in at the lower portion, and a pair of protrusions projecting at the upper portion so as to be inserted into the support portion 454. It is equipped with LA1b. In this way, while supporting the lower part of the light emitting effect device LA1 by fastening and fixing,
By supporting the upper part by engagement, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from being cast on the upper back side of the illuminated board while ensuring sufficient support strength.

The front surface of the light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are visually recognized without being hidden (FIG. 34). reference).

In the present embodiment, the shape of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is a shape imitating a shellfish (for example, a scallop), and the shape of the light emitting effect device LA1 arranged between them is like a pearl. It is formed from a visible frontal circular shape. That is, by integrally visualizing the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470, it is possible to construct an appearance reminiscent of a series of concepts of "pearls arranged inside an open shell". ..

The pinnate member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and is centered on a tubular portion 461 rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452 and the tubular portion 461 thereof. An arcuate gear 462 formed in an arcuate shape and meshed with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extension portion 463 thereof. Formed portion 464L formed on the extended end side and configured to be able to reflect light strongly by applying a plating to the front portion of the plate.
, 464R, a downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the arc gear 462 along an arc having a smaller diameter than the arc gear 462, and a flange portion formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arc gear 462. It is provided with a 466 and a columnar overhanging portion 467 in which the flange portion 466 extends in a columnar shape from the extending end portion extending in the external direction toward the back surface side.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed in an arc having the same diameter that meshes with each other at an intermediate position between the pair of tubular portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) pinnate members 460 that rotate due to the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extension portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is concavely formed only on the right side. Recessed part 4
Reference numeral 63a is a shaped portion for facilitating interference with the electrical wiring guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 and are configured as a series of substantially semicircular (substantially semi-elliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17), while the first.
In the retracted state of the operating unit 400, the operation unit 400 is arranged separately on the left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, the left forming portion 464L is formed so as to project in the rotational direction as compared with the right forming portion 464R in the shape of the upper side that abuts at the time of coalescence. By being done, it is formed large. In other words, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is arranged closer to the right side (FIG. 17).
reference).

The shape of the upper end portion of the pinnate members 464L and 464R, which are arranged so as to face each other, is
It depends on the distance from the tubular portion 461. That is, the side close to the tubular portion 461 (the side close to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) is the pinnate member 464L, 464R so that the pinnate members 464L, 464R can overlap each other in front view when they are closest to each other. Interference unit 4 arranged offset in the direction of the rotation axis
It has a shape provided with 64a.

In the present embodiment, the side close to the tubular portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. When the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other due to the above-mentioned interference portion 464a, the pinnate member 464L,
Since it is possible to prevent the contact surface S1 of the 464R from having a cut, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized by the player without discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the tubular portion 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the pinnate member 464L
, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L, 464L
The shape is such that the contact surface is arranged at a position that matches in the rotation axis direction of R.

By providing the portion where the load generated by the contact of the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of stopping is provided in the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the force moment is the longest, the pinnate member 46 due to the contact.
The load generated in 4L and 464R can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the pinnate members 464L and 464R according to the distance from the tubular portion 461, the player feels uncomfortable with a series of decorative patterns formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. The load that can be generated on the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of the closest approach of the pinnate members 464L and 464R can be minimized.

The flange portion 466 is used for both suppressing the positional deviation of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and partitioning the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with the fixed transmission plate 490 and being caught, resulting in excessive resistance.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted through the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and the ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted through the overhanging tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed at the overhanging tip portion, and a fastening screw having an umbrella portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is screwed in while being inserted into the collar C1. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 so as not to fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-shaped members that are rotatably supported, and has a supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed tubular shape and a through hole 453 that is inserted through the supported portion 471 and cannot rotate. A metal insertion metal rod 472 fitted to the metal rod 472 and a gear portion 473 having gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472 which is non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472.
And prepare.

A female screw is formed in the radial direction on the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472, and the supported portion 471 is formed.
At the corresponding position of, a through hole is formed through which the screwed portion of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw can be inserted. By inserting the insertion metal rod 472 into the supported portion 471 and then screwing the fastening screw into the female screw through the through hole, it is possible to prevent the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported portion 471.

The gear portion 473 has a through hole 4 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453.
It is rotatably supported around 53. The gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (
(See FIG. 22B), so that the pinnate member 460 rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle.

The fixed transmission plate 490 is provided at a plate-shaped portion to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 formed as a long hole curved in the plate-shaped portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-shaped portion. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a metal rod-shaped member that is non-rotatably supported and projects to the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 has a vertical portion 491a formed along the vertical direction and a vertical portion 49.
It is provided with a bending change portion 491b formed by being bent in the left-right direction from 1a. By partitioning the elongated hole portion 491 in this way, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 that accompanies it are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The connection and fixing of the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 is performed by the above-mentioned insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 47.
It is the same as the connection mode with 1. This makes it possible to prevent the metal rod 492 from falling off from the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28, 2
9 and FIG. 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( The first operation unit 4 in which the elevating plate 430 is lowered from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical displacement dimension (see FIG. 16).
In FIG. 29, the first intermediate state of 00 is the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 in which the longitudinal direction of the auxiliary arm member 444 faces the left-right direction, and in FIG. 30, the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 is. , Each illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the detected portion 413d enters the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1 to determine the posture of the terminal gear 413. In the present embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, overhanging state) are only the displacement amount preset from the retracted state. It is a state after displacement and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member). The radial direction of rotation of 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413, so that the arm member 414 is in a state where the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off.
Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is arranged outside the arc MXS circumscribing the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 from interfering with each other during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the elongated hole portion 406 so as to be slidable,
It is not non-resistive, but the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes operating resistance. That is, due to the action of this operating resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

As shown in FIG. 28, the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward due to the rotational displacement of the arm member 414, and the rotation of the rotary gear 441 that meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly.
The relative displacement member 442 is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of.

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the pinnate member 460 has the same posture as the posture in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing at which the pinnate member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In this embodiment, the elevating plate 430 descends by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) until the pinnate member 460 starts rotating, so that the pinnate member 460 rotates. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a defect that collides with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when it is displaced.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the pinnate member 460 is rotationally displaced after descending by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed so that the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 does not shift in height from side to side. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the pinnate member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can be realized by diverting the operation conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. As a result, the cost required for the design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 4 hidden behind the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state.
As shown in FIG. 28, 14 is displaced so as to project above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pinnate member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the pinnate member 460 is not only as an effect means for allowing the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the surface side to execute the effect of enlivening the game, but also the arm member 414 for drive transmission is used as the elevating plate 430. It also functions as a joint concealment shield.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the wing-shaped member 460 on the side where the arm member 414 having the driving force transmission function is arranged is compared with the forming portion 464R of the wing-shaped member 460 on the opposite side. Since the shape is large, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

Similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, due to the configuration, the arm member 4 is in the second intermediate state.
While 14 projects above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 overhangs the upper side of the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to overhang the upper side of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when the forming portion 464R having a shape smaller than that of the forming portion 464L (the amount of protrusion of the elevating plate 430 to the upper side at the same point is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L) is used, there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. The 444 can be hidden from the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 is in a posture in which the elongated direction faces the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the rightward load applied from the arm member 414 to the elevating plate 430 tends to be large.
On the contrary, when the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the elevating plate 430 at the same timing, the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the tubular portion 44 is tilted.
By arranging 4d (see FIG. 25) at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be changed. The elevating plate 4 is loaded with the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction while suppressing the displacement resistance.
It is possible to prevent the 30 from being displaced in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the terminal gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is defined as a guideline position only, and the terminal gear 41 is used.
The design of 3 and the arm member 414 is performed by dynamically examining whether or not interference occurs when the termination gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the termination gear 413 rotates with the position where the stoppered portion 413b of the termination gear 413 comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as the end point. For control, the stoppered portion 413b is the stopper portion 40.
Drive motor M so that the termination gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where it comes into contact with 3c.
I am trying to drive T1. As a result, the stoppered portion 413b and the stopper portion 40
It is possible to structurally prevent the termination gear 413 from over-rotating while avoiding early damage to the 3c.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction (arm) of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414. The radial direction of rotation of the member 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413, so that the arm member 414 is in a state where the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off.
Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, not only the displacement in the gravity direction but also the upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the overhanging state to the retracted state side can be prevented.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing up and being displaced after reaching the overhanging state, so that the elevating plate 430 on the downstream side as a transmission path of the driving force can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, pinnate member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the pinnate member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported by the elongated hole portion 406 so as to be slidable,
It is not non-resistive, but the contact friction generated between the cylindrical portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406 causes operating resistance. That is, due to the action of this operating resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 are on one side (left and right).
Although the configuration occurs only on the left side), it is possible to prevent the posture of the elevating plate 430 from becoming unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405.

Here, as described above, as long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 is minimized. Explain what you can do.

When the path of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting effect device LA1 side, the auxiliary arm member 444
The path is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches, and the path becomes variable for the first time with the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is fixed while the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is displaced by expansion and contraction. can.

At the position where it comes out from the through hole 448a to the back side, the end side plate 44 is connected to the electric wiring DH1.
The left-right displacement is caused by the left-right displacement of 8. In this way, the electrical wiring DH1
Since the displacement that can cause expansion and contraction is limited to the displacement of the end side plate 448,
In the present embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured, and the required extra length is calculated.
After adding the extra length to the electric wiring DH1 in the path from the fixed position of the electric wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electric wiring DH1 loosened), the electric wiring DH1 is fixed to the main body plate portion 401. ing.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448, and in addition, the displacement amount that causes the elevating plate 430 can be limited. It can be suppressed to less than half of the amount of vertical displacement.

Further, as described above, due to the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448, the end side plate 448
Since the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 can be reduced as compared with the displacement width of the electric wiring D,
The extra length of H1 can be shortened.

31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, and FIG. 34 are front views of the first operating unit 400. Figure 3
1 to 34 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 31, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 32, the first operating unit 400 is in a retracted state. The first intermediate state, in FIG. 33, is the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400.
In FIG. 34, the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge portion of the pinnate member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly downwardly displaced, the posture of the pinnate member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a symmetrically shaped movable member.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the pinnate member 460 does not change as compared with the retracted state shown in FIG. 31, while the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are the same as the elevating plate 430 descends. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward with a displacement amount exceeding the downward displacement amount.

Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the single elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced with respect to the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430, but also the elevating plate. Since it is possible to visually recognize how the decorative portion 493, which is displaced by a vertical displacement amount different from the vertical displacement amount of 430, is vertically displaced, the effect of effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative portion 493 increases as compared with the first intermediate state, and in addition, the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 changes posture.

FIG. 34 illustrates a state in which the pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other at facing positions. Pinnate member 46
0 is visually recognized as if it is a single substantially semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members, and the contact surface S1 is formed by a metal rail 405. It is formed at a position shifted to the right from the arranged center position on the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is configured to be extra on the forming portion 464R side as compared with the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R, so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is displaced from the left and right center. It is configured in.

Since the upper edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged at positions shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the forming portions 46.
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 4L and 464R are configured in a left-right asymmetrical shape. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the left-right asymmetry of the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Further, since the contact surface S1 is displaced from the metal rail 405 in front view, even if the pinnate member 460 bounces off due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is generated again, the rail member is formed from the gap. It is possible to prevent the 405 from being visually recognized, and it is possible to visually recognize the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401.

As a result, the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visually recognized from the gap. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is arranged at a position deviated from the left and right center positions generally assumed by the player as a break between the pair of movable members that abut and separate from each other on the left and right sides. That is, the contact surface S1 that does not create a gap at a position (left-right center position) that the player visually recognizes while anticipating that a gap will occur, and that may generate a gap at a position deviated from that location. By arranging them, even if a gap is generated, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the pinnate member 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operation unit 400, the outer shape portion of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the feather-shaped member 460, and the player can see the whole picture. The structure is difficult to grasp.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape portion of the decorative portion 436 arranged under the pinnate member 460 is visible, and the outer shape portion is the pinnate member 460. It is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of the above.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (in the present embodiment, the shape of a "shell") that the pair of pinnate members 460 make visible in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge portion. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining a pair of pinnate members 460.
It can be made visible to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement process until a series of decorative shapes are formed by the displacement of the pinnate member 460 is not one step. That is, as the first displacement process, there is a process in which the pair of pinnate members 460 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes are displaced and coalesced in a manner close to each other to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as a process of the second displacement, the pinnate member 460 and the decorative portion 436 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes overlap each other in the front-rear view in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and overhang. As the state approaches, the process of forming a series of decorative shapes by displacing the pinnate member 460 in the direction in which the overlapping allowance becomes smaller (the direction in which the pinnate member 460 separates from the decorative portion 436) can be mentioned.

By these different processes, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 itself can be made into a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, but the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the pinnate member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, the pinnate member 460 that is individually displaced
It is possible to form a series of decorative shapes that are united in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, while suppressing the shape of the first operating unit 400 to be small.

35, 36, 37 and 38 show a support plate portion 450, a pinnate member 460, and an auxiliary member 4.
It is a rear view of 70 and a fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 35, the retracted state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 36, the first operating unit 400 is shown. 37 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 38 shows the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c dispersedly arranged along an arc shape are formed on the back surface side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks to the back surface side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the through hole LA1
Since the pinnate member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back surface side of c, the light leaked from the through hole LA1c can be reflected to the front side by the forming portions 464L and 464R of the pinnate member 460.

The rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Pinnate member 4
Since the rotational displacement of 60 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in particular detail.

From the retracted state shown in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 36, the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction).
Since the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the pinnate member 460 from being rotationally displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

In this embodiment, an individual member for urging the pinnate member 460 to the retracted state side is not prepared, but the center of gravity is arranged on the left and right outside the rotation axis due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R. It is maintained in a retracted posture due to its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, when the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the bending changing portion 491b, a load in the left-right direction is generated on the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and the pinnate member 460 starts rotational displacement. Explaining from the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is the fixed transmission plate 4
It is transmitted from 90 to the pinnate member 460 on the left side via the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and then to the pinnate member 460 on the right side. That is, compared to the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side, the wing-shaped member 46 on the left side
0 is on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path.

In the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the pinnate member 460 on the left side, which is considered to be the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier than the forming portion 464R) as compared with the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be sequentially arranged so as to be lighter toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path. As a result, good transmission of the driving force can be achieved, and it is possible to prevent each component member from rebounding and being displaced after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the tubular portion 433 as the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in the weight of the forming portions 464L and 464R. More specifically, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact between the facing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R. Errors and
Due to aged deformation of the elongated hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460, the forming portion 46
It is possible that the positions of 4L and 464R after displacement may change slightly.

In this case, the change in the position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the extension portion 463 of the pinnate member 460 is arranged below the tubular portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, the recessed portion 463a is provided so that the overlap between the tubular portion 433 and the extended portion 463 is reduced. As a result, even if a displacement that is unintentionally pushed down occurs in the forming portion 464L, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 and the forming portion 464L interfere with each other can be reduced.

Further, since it is assumed that the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced, the tubular portion 4 is viewed from the rear.
It can be designed at a position where 33 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other (see FIG. 38).
This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

In the present embodiment, the forming range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower portion of the tubular portion 433 can be particularly opened. As a result, it is possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electric wiring DH1 that tends to hang down due to its own weight and the extension portion 463 inside the tubular portion 433.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from getting too close to the forming portion 464 side, whereby the recessed portion 463a is placed on the back side of the auxiliary member 470 in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400. The recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially concealed by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, in any state from the retracted state to the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470. Therefore, the extending portion 463 and the forming portions 464L, 464R of the pair of left and right pinnate members 460 can be easily visually recognized symmetrically, so that the symmetrically displaced members are configured asymmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

The transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward from the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. Along with the transmission of the driving force, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is hung on the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 461. However, assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is It is configured so that it does not displace at a constant velocity (it is configured so that the angular velocity changes).

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the tubular portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the bending change portion 491b is a long hole extending in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). In this case, the downward displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 increases the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, it is possible to construct a powerful effect of displacing and coalescing at a high speed as compared with a configuration in which a pair of pinnate members 460 decelerate during displacement.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the pinnate member 460 immediately before the pair of pinnate members 460 are closely united. There is a possibility that the pair of pinnate members 460 will rebound greatly due to the impact of the impact, and there is a risk that the effect of the present embodiment of combining the pair of pinnate members 460 to visually recognize a series of decorative patterns will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curvature changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the pinnate member 460 (the pinnate member 460 on the left side) provided with the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction). It is formed as an elongated hole extending in the direction of ascending inclination. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) at the place where the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is arranged.
Corresponds to the amount of upward displacement (hereinafter, also referred to as "upward correction amount") of the bending change portion 491b with respect to the elongated hole parallel to.

When the curvature changing portion 491b is configured as an elongated hole extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the rotation axis side as in the present embodiment, the columnar overhanging portion 467 is displaced downward (a pair of pinnate members 4).
The closer to the state in which 60 is united), the larger the above-mentioned upward correction amount. Therefore, the degree (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 changes downward.

Therefore, the speed increase can be moderately suppressed as compared with the configuration exemplified in the brake structure that maintains the same friction state. The actual displacement speed of the pinnate member 460 will be described later.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 400. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 39 (a). b)
In FIG. 39 (c), the rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39 (c), the rotation amount (angle change) of the pinnate member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, the terminal gear 41
While 3 rotates at a constant speed, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not result in constant speed rotation, and the elevating plate 4
The vertical displacement of 30 is not a constant velocity displacement either.

That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant velocity rotation) and the control mode of the elevating plate 430 (non-constant velocity displacement), and the elevating plate 43 in the driving force transmission path.
The displacement mode on the downstream side of 0 is affected by this displacement. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed, it is difficult to displace the constituent members arranged on the downstream side in the transmission path at a constant speed.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is still large. Since it depends on the elevating displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, it does not become a constant velocity displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined in the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the elevating displacement (vertical displacement) of the elevating plate 430. The configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same manner as the conversion to.

That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 into the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 accompanying the vertical displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, FIG. 39 (a)).
The conversion formula for converting the numerical value on the horizontal axis to the numerical value on the vertical axis) is to be converted from the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By applying in reverse, the displacement of the displacement mode can be partially offset, and the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement mode of the rotary gear 441 can be approximated.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 is such that the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is 90 degrees, 1
On the other hand, the rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is such that the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is from 30 degrees to 17 degrees, while the deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 begins to occur from around 40 degrees (see FIG. 39 (a)).
The deviation from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed over the vicinity of 0 degrees (see FIG. 39 (b)).

As a result, for example, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed by rotating the drive motor MT1 and the terminal gear 413 at a constant speed (see FIG. 39B), so that the relative displacement member 442 can be rotated at a constant speed. Can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed.

As a result, the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the first operation unit 40 can be visually recognized by the player.
It is possible to easily set the speed of the drive motor MT1 by back calculation from the displacement mode to be executed to 0.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence on the tip end side of the transmission path by the configuration in which the advantageous effect occurs only on the drive device side in the transmission path of the driving force. here,
With reference to the elevating plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side will be described as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side thereof will be described as the tip end side of the transmission path.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the extended state of the first operating unit 400.
It is preferable from the viewpoint of quickly starting and stopping the arm member 414, but on the tip side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state becomes extremely small, so that the displacement There was a problem in that it tended to be slow.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 is set before the arm member 414 reaches the displacement end. It can be dealt with by changing the speed to or controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the deceleration of the arm member 414 occurs (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, there is a problem that the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for the displacement on the tip side of the transmission path becomes small and the width of the displacement mode is narrowed. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode on the tip end side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, so that synchronization is performed immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operating unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 (and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 arranged on the downstream side thereof) arranged on the tip end side of the transmission path while making the maximum use of the rotation angle of the arm member 414). It is possible to prevent the displacement of the.

What is visible to the player is the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. FIG. 39 (
As shown in c), the rotational angular velocities of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the end gear 413 is rotated at a constant speed tend to increase (constant speed or higher) until immediately before the stop, and are described above immediately before the stop. The speed is reduced according to the shape of the bending change portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491.

As a result, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be increased or decreased as compared with the case where the displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430. Therefore, a powerful displacement can be realized and the effect of production can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while the rotational angular velocities tend to increase (the pinnate members 460 are united with each other), the pinnate member 460 is provided with a section for decelerating immediately before the pinnate member 460. It is possible to suppress the bouncing displacement after coalescence.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 that is displaced on the downstream side thereof, and the fixed transmission plate 490. , The displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be different.

In particular, the displacement mode once changed can be changed to the original return side while heading downstream along the transmission path of the driving force. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are displaced in synchronization, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

Although the case of displacement from the retracted state to the extended state has been described as a control mode of the drive motor MT1, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to invert at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reverse-controlled so that the first operation unit 400 reciprocates (repeatedly reciprocates) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending, the elevating plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state before the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, so that the player can visually recognize the evacuation plate 430. The displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be limited to the vertical displacement, and the rotational displacement can be eliminated.

Even if the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are displaced relative to the elevating plate 430 in the vertical direction, so that the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, the operating unit 3
The state in which the game board 13 is removed from 00 and placed on the front side is shown in the figure, and the operation unit 30 is shown.
0 and the upper part of the game board 13 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 40, a transparent cover member 79 is arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and is formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin.
The outer shape of 0 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the configuration below it is visually illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for a game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The upper surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operating unit 700 are visibly arranged in the light guide member 714. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60.

41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a light guide member 714 in which a plurality (8 in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and an illumination member arranged on the left and right. It includes a substrate 777.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide the irradiation light emitted from below, and the irradiation light is transmitted from the upper end portion. The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED configured to be able to irradiate the front side with light. In this way, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714, and can emit light to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777.

43 and 44 are an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is shown in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is shown in a directional view looking up from below. Further, in FIG. 45, the projecting holding portion 724 is shown in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, the second operating unit 700 is a rear case 31.
A base member 701 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of 0 (see FIG. 40) and a base member 70 thereof.
A cover member 720 that is covered from above 1 and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is sandwiched between the cover member 720 and the base member 701 and can be rotationally displaced (rotatably displaced at a rotational angle of about 6 degrees).
A plate-shaped displacement member 730 pivotally supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and a plurality of hollow members (eight in the present embodiment) configured to be at least vertically displaceable, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. 740 and a plurality of variable decorative members 75 (three in this embodiment) that are placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side of the hollow member 740 and can be displaced at least vertically.
A pair of 0 and each of which are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701 have a configuration substantially axisymmetric with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and can apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It includes a drive unit 760 and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40).

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member having a shape that covers the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any of the constituent members of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back surface side, the light guide member 714
A part of the light emitted directly above from the upper end of the can be refracted toward the back side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so that even when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light is guided. Optical member 71
It is possible to make it easy to notice the change in the lighting state of 4 (including the change in light and darkness, the vibration of light, and the displacement of the hollow member 740).

In addition, in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, and FIG. 45, the illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 7
01 faces a plate-shaped member 702 formed so as to have sufficient strength, an illuminated substrate 705 that is fastened and fixed facing the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 702, and the upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705. A partition member 708 that is arranged and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702, a thin film cover member 712 that is a member that covers the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from a resin, and a thin film cover member 712 thereof. A plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 714 placed in contact with the light guide member 714, and a plate-shaped member covered from above the light guide member 714, the light guide member 7.
A displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the ascent and horizontal displacement of the 14 is provided.

The plate-shaped member 702 is formed in pairs on the left and right side portions of the plate-shaped member 702 and the engaging portion 702a formed so as to be engaged with the hook-shaped portion 721c of the cover member 720. A receiving recess 702b that is recessed so that the 731 can be pivotally supported, a regulating protrusion 702c that is projected upward from the front side edge and is formed so that the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be regulated, and a fastening screw can be screwed in. And a plurality of columnar projecting portions 703a formed in the above, and a plurality of columnar projecting portions 703b formed in a columnar shape extending upward beyond the fastening portion 703a so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the projecting tip portion. , A plurality of through holes 704 bored in the vertical direction are provided.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing the fastening screws to be inserted into the illuminated substrate 705, and are formed at three locations, the center on the left and right and the left and right ends, and particularly the fastening portions 703a on the left and right ends.
Is provided with a protruding pin for positioning.

By arranging the illuminated board 705 so that the projected pin is inserted into the through hole formed in the illuminated board 705 corresponding to the protruding pin for positioning, the fastening screw is inserted into the illuminated board 705. Since the through hole to be drilled and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected to each other, the illuminated substrate 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702 by inserting a fastening screw through the through hole.

The columnar projecting portion 703b includes a displacement regulating member 716, a thin film cover member 712, and a partition member 70.
It is a portion into which the fastening screw to be inserted in the order of 8 is screwed, and the base end side is formed to be inclined in a trapezoidal shape. This makes it easier to place the Illuminations substrate 705 in an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 is formed with a size capable of passing a connector (not shown) arranged on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 705 and electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illuminated substrate 705, and does not project above the illuminated substrate 705. This will result in
The entire upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705 can be utilized as a disposable area of the light emitting means 706 such as an LED.

The illuminated substrate 705 includes a plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs and the like, and a base member 701.
In the assembled state (see FIG. 43), a columnar projecting portion 703b and an open portion 707 that is openly formed so as to have a slight gap are provided.

A plurality of light emitting means 706 are arranged along a straight line facing the left-right direction (8 in this embodiment).
The individual light emitting means 706a and a plurality of whole light emitting means 706b arranged at different positions from the individual light emitting means 706a are provided.

The open portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b, and the columnar projecting portion 7 is formed.
The protruding end position of 03b is above the position where the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illuminated substrate 705 is downwardly displaced to the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the open portion 707 advances along the columnar projecting portion 703b.

In the present embodiment, since the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a top view circular shape and a front viewing table shape that narrows toward the upper side, the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed. The sides are tilted with respect to the vertical direction. When the illuminated substrate 705 is displaced downward, if it is largely displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the position arranged in the assembled state, it is along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b. Since the misalignment of the illuminated board 705 can be corrected.
The illumination substrate 705 can be easily arranged at a desired position.

The partition member 708 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of translucent holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a.
A plurality of through holes 710a formed with an inner diameter capable of inserting the tip portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed in. A plurality of receiving portions 710 that are recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to accept the projecting pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at a position displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the fastening portion 710b.
With c.

The translucent hole 709 is formed in a front and rear long crystal-shaped (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) cross section, and the long direction thereof faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. That is, the more the translucent hole 709 near the center, the smaller the deviation between the long direction and the front-back direction (in the present embodiment).
(Matched), the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the length direction is toward the front and the direction toward the center of the left and right.

That is, the long direction of the translucent hole 709 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a colorless and transparent resin member in the form of a thin film having low rigidity, is formed so that the central portion is raised, the lower surface side is open, and the thin film cover member 712 is bored up and down at the left and right ends of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through holes 712a, a plurality of middle through holes 712b bored up and down inside the outer through holes 712a in the left-right direction, and vertically displaced with respect to the middle through holes 712b. It is provided with a plurality of small through holes 712c to be drilled.

The large through hole 712a is formed to have a diameter longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 in an annular shape surrounding the periphery of the insertion hole 716a. Since the projecting portion 716e projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 projects with a projecting length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, a load (fastening) at the time of assembling to the edge portion of the large through hole 712a is provided. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of load).

One of the middle through holes 712b is arranged at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b at the center position on the front side, and the other is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through hole 712c is arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b arranged at the position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and is projected from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 and is a partition member. The protrusion pin 716b received by the receiving portion 710c of the 708 is formed to have a size that allows it to be inserted.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, and the displacement regulating member 7 is placed on the partition member 708.
When each member is fastened and fixed by screwing fastening screws into various places after the 16 is placed, the protruding pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the partition member 716 has a small through hole 712c and a receiving portion 71.
Since it is inserted through 0c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 can be easily (simultaneously) aligned with the partition member 708 before the fastening screw is screwed in, and then the fastening screw is screwed. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the work to be entered.

The light guide member 714 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and is formed into a bottomed cylinder shape having a bottom at the top, and the outer shape of the top view is formed into a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a main body portion 714a, an overhanging edge portion 714b projecting from the lower edge thereof to the left and right and forward, and an inclined surface portion 714c that is inclined downward toward the front side at the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body portion 714a is textured, a single individual light emitting means 7 is formed.
When the light emitted from 06a, traveling inside the light guide member 714 and reaching the upper end portion is visually recognized by the player, the light can be visually recognized as if it is emitted by a surface instead of point emission.

On the other hand, in the main body portion 714a, a smooth surface is formed without embossing on a portion (intermediate portion or the like) other than the upper outer surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body portion 714a, and the light is totally reflected by the smooth surface of the main body portion 714a. Since it is possible to easily move the light toward the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a, it is possible to reduce the energy loss of light at the intermediate position of the main body portion 714a.

The long direction of the upper surface of the main body 714a of each light guide member 714 follows the setting of the long direction of the translucent hole 709 described above. That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide member 714 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front and the left and right center. It is said to be in the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the light guide member 714 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end portion in the long direction in the top view of the light guide member 714 (
The portion close to the player as the portion that irradiates the player side with light) can be directed toward the player side (front side, left and right center) as compared with the center position in the elongated direction. That is, the light guide member 71
It is possible to make the player feel that the light radiated from 4 to the player side is gathered toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed with a constant vertical thickness and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and posture of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c frontally receives light incident from below the light guide member 714. It functions to emit light toward the side, but details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is provided from a plurality of insertion holes 716a through which fastening screws can be inserted and projecting from the lower surface. The inner shape of the lower edge portion of the plurality of projecting pins 716b, the plurality of receiving cylinder portions 716c formed in a tubular shape vertically penetrating at the positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and the receiving cylinder portion 716c is expanded. It is provided with a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are recessed in a stepped manner so as to allow the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714 to be received.

The inner shape of the receiving cylinder portion 716c is substantially the same as the inner shape of the translucent hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 716d is the light guide member 7.
Since it is the same as the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b of 14, the second operation unit 70
In the assembled state of 0 (see FIG. 40), the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 71.
The overhanging edge portion 714b can be stably supported on the surface so as to sandwich the overhanging edge portion 714b with the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed overhanging on the left and right and the front side, and the formation on the back side is omitted. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 is also recessed on the left and right and the front side, and the recessing on the back surface side is omitted. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction.

That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is to be assembled, the arrangement of the recessed portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b is misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is provided on the recessed portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the overhanging edge portion 714b projects from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. The gap corresponding to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is the thin film cover member 712.
By causing it between the displacement regulating member 716 and making it difficult to fasten and fix it, the assembly worker (or the automatic machine for assembly) is made aware that the light guide member 714 is oriented upside down. Can be done.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 71
The overhanging edge portion 714b is sandwiched between the light guide member 714 and the light guide member 714 in the vertical direction, whereby the position and posture of the light guide member 714 are stably fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the illuminated substrate 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b, placed at the fastening position, and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702. Next, the illuminated board 7
Above 05, each component is arranged in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-shaped member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar projecting portion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712 are positioned.
By passing the protrusion pin 716b through c, the displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Further, by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716. In this way, since the constituent members are relatively positioned before the fastening screw is screwed in, the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

Finally, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 716a, and the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projecting portion 703b are inserted.
Each component can be fastened and fixed by screwing into. According to the present embodiment, after each component arranged above the illuminated substrate 705 is placed at an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, thereby simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the process of screwing the fastening screw (use of an automatic machine for screw turning).

In the present embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be pulled out at the stage where the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protrusion 703b, but the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the fastening portion 710b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is mounted on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially identified with the configuration in which the light guide member 714 is mounted on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714. By supporting the light guide member 714, it is possible to stabilize the support of the light guide member 714.

In addition, since the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, it is possible to prevent light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708. Can be planned.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The cover member 720 is a member formed of a colored (blue in the present embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and is disposed on the peripheral edge of the lower surface with respect to the base member 701. Multiple joints 72 used for bonding
1 and a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a pair of left and right on the front side of the rear through hole 722. A plurality of front through holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) as one set of through holes, and downward from the rear left and right outer portions and the front left and right inner portions of the rear through holes 722. It is provided with a plurality of projecting holding portions 724 to be projecting.

The joint portion 721 has a plurality of insertion holes 721a through which the fastening screw can be inserted from above.
A plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws inserted from below are inserted into the base member 701, and a plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the left and right outer back surfaces and engaged with the base member 701. Be prepared.

The upper and lower positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are different between the four locations closer to the center and the four locations closer to the left and right. In this embodiment, the one closer to the center is formed higher. This is the cover member 7
It is with the design of the upper surface shape of 20. That is, in order to give a three-dimensional effect to the upper surface shape of the cover member 720, the upper and lower positions of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722 are formed so that the portion near the center is raised and visible. Has been adjusted.

The protrusion length of the protrusion holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially offset the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722. That is, the protrusion holding portion 724 arranged closer to the center has a longer protrusion length, so that the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 is adjusted equally on the left and right. In addition, both the protrusion holding portion 724 on the front side and the protrusion holding portion 724 on the back side are
Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 in the vertical direction, even if the posture of the hollow member 740 is lost, the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is a plate-shaped displacement member 7.
It is possible to prevent the portion 30 from falling off from the small receiving portion 735.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower positions of the lower end of the protrusion 724 on the back side are arranged lower than the upper and lower positions of the lower end of the protrusion 724 on the front side. As a result, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the projecting pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the backward tilted posture. As a result, it is possible to easily show the shape and pattern on the front side of the tubular main body portion 741 of the hollow member 740 to the player who sees the hollow member 740 when looking down from the front side.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of shafted support portions 731 that are coaxially projected from both left and right ends in a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are bored in the vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and a shafted support portion 731. A pair of loaded parts 733 that are extended in a plate shape to the front side and receive a push-up load from below, and
A plurality of light guide insertion holes 734 that are vertically bored with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted, and a pair of light guide insertion holes 734 that are arranged diagonally to form a top view ring. It is provided with a plurality of small receiving portions 735 projecting from the top view, and a plurality of large receiving portions 736 arranged at the center position of the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 and projecting in the shape of a top view ring.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The loaded portion 733 is arranged on the front side of the rotation shaft passing through the center of the shaft-mounted support portion 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to each of the left and right, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the mode of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, or the load at short time intervals. Is given, or whether a continuous load is given, etc.), and the rotational displacement is performed around the shafted branch 731 in a different manner, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front and rear, and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. ..

That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front and the left and right center. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set to be inclined toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to be larger toward the left and right ends.
In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the hollow member 740, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and guides light. The relationship of the insertion hole 734 with respect to the long direction (the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the angle between the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side), the assembled state of the second operation unit 700. The posture of the hollow member 740 in (see FIG. 40) can be changed.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the hollow member 740 is closer to the center, and the longer direction is closer to the front left and right toward the center as it is closer to the left and right ends. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the elongated direction of the hollow member 740 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a circular cross section, and the front small receiving portion 735a is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. It is provided with a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in the shape of a bottomed cylinder.

In the present embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the projecting columnar portion 7 of the hollow member 740
The diameter of the cross section of 43 is designed to be 3 [mm], and the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is 4.8 [.
The diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, the gap size generated in the opposite direction between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743 is such that the gap size between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 is larger than that of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion. Part 7
It is smaller than the clearance dimension with 43.

This makes it possible to order the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported by allowing rattling. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a can be more likely to occur than the rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b.

In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily displaced in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. , Hollow member 7 due to rotational displacement of plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later.
The direction of displacement of 40 can be adjusted so as to spread outward to the left and right toward the back surface side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the variable decorative member 750.
Compared to the large receiving portion 736 arranged on the center line CL1, the large receiving portion 736 arranged on both the left and right sides has a longer distance from the rotation axis passing through the center of the shafted branch 731, and is in the vertical position. Is formed differently, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the left side and four identically shaped members arranged side by side on the right side are formed in a symmetrical shape. The hollow member 740 will be described in detail, and the hollow member 740 arranged on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714 so that the light leaking from the front, back, left and right of the light guide member 714 is not visible (difficult) to the player. Light guide member 71 that makes it easy to see the light
A cylinder that is configured to attract the player's line of sight to the upper tip of 4, and has an outer frame designed in a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, approximately turtle shell shape) in the front and back, and is open vertically. A cylindrical main body portion 741 formed in a shape, a flat plate extending portion 742 extending in a flat plate shape in the front-back and left-right directions from the lower edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741, and a plate lower surface of the flat plate extending portion 742. It is provided with a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 projecting downward from the column.

The outer shape of the tubular main body 741 in the upper view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720, while the outer shape of the flat plate extending portion 742 in the upper view is the cover member. It is formed so as to be larger than the top view inside shape of the rear through hole 722 of the 720. That is, the second
In the assembled state of the operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is restricted from being pulled out upward of the cover member 720 while being vertically displaceable while being inserted through the rear through hole 722. ..

The upper edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741 is lowered toward the front side. As a result, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. on the other hand,
Most of the light directed upward on the back surface side is blocked by the cylindrical main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be satisfactorily delivered to the eyes of the player, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from being deteriorated due to this.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion where the ascending displacement is restricted by the projecting holding portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the projecting holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting columnar portion 743 on the back surface side, and regulates the ascending displacement of the hollow member 740. In this way, the hollow member 74 is formed by forming the protruding holding portion 724 and the protruding columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions.
Even when 0 changes its posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 is the small receiving portion 7 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from coming out of the 35, the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The projecting columnar portion 743 has a projecting tip formed in a hemispherical shape and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (See FIG. 40), it is accepted by the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of projecting columnar portions 743 and the tubular main body portion 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetric. This makes it possible to change the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 when assembled upside down. , It is possible to prevent erroneous installation. It should be noted that the hollow members 740 are arranged four each on the left and right.
Is formed from a symmetrical shape, so that it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 assembled on the left side from the left-right center position from being assembled on the right side (it is possible to prevent erroneous attachment).

Here, the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the center of the rotation axis facing the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the projecting columnar portion 743 is mainly due to the vertical displacement allowed by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49 (a), 49 (b) and 49 (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. Figure 49 (
In a), the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown, in FIG. 49 (b), the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown, and in FIG. 49 (c), the plate-shaped displacement member is shown. The upper end posture of the member 730 is illustrated. The horizontal posture corresponds to the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 2.1 degrees around the reference O1 from the lower terminal posture, and the upper terminal posture is
From the horizontal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 rotates about 4 degrees around the reference O1 (rising displacement).
Corresponds to the posture.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture (lower end posture (initial posture)). ), The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, the rear small receiving portion 735b is recessed deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, so that the support position of the front small receiving portion 735a in the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( Support position (bottom) and rear small receiving portion 735b (bottom)
The vertical deviation of the bottom) is suppressed.

As a result, the hollow member 74 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture).
It is possible to prevent the posture of 0 from becoming a forward leaning posture. Further, the hollow member 740 is configured so that the surfaces of the support positions (bottoms) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even when is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 is set closer to the front (initial position) before the operation of the drive unit 760. Can be maintained stably.

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 both in the front and rear. ..
Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be randomly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the process of displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 abuts on the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed to the back side. Be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with respect to the upper end posture (near the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is centered on the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. Is easy to rotate and displace. That is, it is configured so that the displacement mode that tends to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 that is the reference of the small vibration.

A light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the tubular main body portion 741, and a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 are supported by being received by the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, first, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced according to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced about the reference O1 which is a straight line (straight line facing the left-right direction) connecting the shaft-mounted support portions 731, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (the reference O1 direction (straight line)).
It does not displace in the left-right direction), but displaces on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1. Along with this, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also promoted to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is not only displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1 but also displaced in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) due to the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination. Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. The displacement or posture change of the 740 in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the side closer to the center line CL1 (center side) 7
The change in the degree of inclination of 35 and the pair of small receiving portions 7 on the side far from the center line CL1 (left and right outside)
It is different from the change in the degree of inclination of 35. In the present embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of left and right small receiving portions 735 having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. Is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). As a result, the amount of change in posture of the hollow member 740 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a certain manner is determined by the center line C.
It can be changed depending on whether it is near or far from L1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress the resistance of the hollow member 740 at the time of displacement, the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714
The arrangement of the small receiving portion 735, the shape of the hollow member 740, and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed in relation to the size of the gap between the outer surface and the outer surface of the light receiving portion 735.

Here, the design gap is different between the long direction of the light guide member 714 in the top view and the direction orthogonal to the long direction. That is, the gap in the long direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the long direction.

Therefore, as the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the long direction becomes larger (the one arranged on the left and right outer sides), the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 become larger. The gap in the front-rear direction between them will be narrowed.

Therefore, when the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-rear direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides are pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or large. It may be easily loaded and damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of shielding the portion other than the tip portion of the light guide member 714 by the hollow member 740 and gathering the line of sight of the player at the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow member 740 arranged on the left and right center side. It is configured as follows.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are located on the left and right center sides. It is arranged so that the distance between the front side small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the arranged small receiving portion 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the amount of front-rear displacement of the hollow member 740 that is pushed forward and displaced rearward is arranged on the left and right center sides. It can be geometrically defined so that the members arranged on the left and right outer sides are slightly smaller than the members arranged on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is formed substantially evenly in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel in the horizontal direction. It is provided so as not to fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 even if it moves.

Therefore, in a state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced, the displacement is suppressed to less than the clearance dimension between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

Since the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the center of the small receiving portion 735 and the hollow It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while being aligned with the center of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the member 740.

At least in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743, the small receiving portion 735
Since the arrangement of the projecting columnar portion 743 is changed with respect to the above, the hollow member 740 may be displaced in the left-right direction or the posture may be changed due to this change.

A mode for pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large).
), The front side portion of the inner side surface starts to come into contact with the front side surface of the projecting columnar portion 743, and is pushed toward the back surface side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, the front portion of the inner surface of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743.
A gap is maintained between the front part and the front part of the. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction about the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. It is configured to be able to cope with the change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 in the top view due to the displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 toward the back surface side, and the rear small receiving portion receives a rattling that allows rotational displacement around the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the projecting columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide with each other during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated with the 714 can be kept small, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from being cracked or chipped.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The variable decorative member 750 is a cover member 72.
A bifurcated support member 751 supported between 0 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and the bifurcated support member 7
It is provided with a decorative member 756 which is fastened and fixed to 51 and is arranged on the upper side of the cover member 720.

The bifurcated support member 751 has a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting downward from the lower surface of the central portion of the plate-shaped body portion formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and both left and right end portions of the plate-shaped body portion. A pair of tubular protrusions 753 (different lengths) that are projected upward from the center, and a plate-shaped extension that extends from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. It is equipped with 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The tubular protrusion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 has a front through hole 723.
The front through hole 723 allows the bifurcated support member 751 to be vertically displaced, while the large receiving portion 736 is rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of the shafted support portion 731.
Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, the tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. can.

The plate-shaped extending portion 754 acts to arrange the position of the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the back surface side of the center of the columnar projecting portion 752. That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stable under its own weight can be set as the backward leaning posture. As a result, the contact position between the columnar projecting portion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since it can be moved toward the front side, the displacement amount of the variable decorative member 750 near the start time of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be increased.

The decorative member 756 is a pair of projecting leg portions 75 projecting downward corresponding to the tubular projecting portion 753.
A female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg 757. The projecting leg portion 757 is inserted inside the tubular projecting portion 753.

The plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the tubular projecting portion 753. By inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the projecting leg 757, the bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 75 are inserted.
7 is fastened and fixed.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is attached to the cover member 720. That is, the tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the tubular projecting portion 753 to project. The fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg portion 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed in this order on the base member 701, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. The cover member 72
When assembling 0 to the base member 701, the hook-shaped portion 721c is engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back surface side of the plate-shaped member 702, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above to cover the cover member. After fastening and fixing the 720 and the base member 701, turn it upside down and fasten the fastening portion 721.
Screw the fastening screw into b.

As a result, a plurality of members are non-fixedly arranged between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and the fastening screws are screwed into a plurality of places from the lower surface, but each component member is in the middle of assembly. Can be prevented from falling off from between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is arranged below the base member 701, and the fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix the drive unit 760. In the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the traveling direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, so that the second operating unit 700 is attached to the rear case 310. It is difficult to remove the fastening screw in the housed state. Therefore, when the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently taken out from the rear case 310.

Further, on the back side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 is formed in which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screw is inserted through the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operating unit 700. Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at the stage, it is possible to make the operator aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. This makes it possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being forgotten to be assembled.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, a drive unit 760 arranged on the right side of the front view is shown. The drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, but the components are symmetrical, so the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail.
The description of the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 is a load member 7 configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The shaft rod portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment) that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761 and the shaft rod portion 762, and the shaft rod portion 762 thereof are fixed and as a whole. Is a case-shaped support case 763, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 arranged inside the support case 763, and a front lid member 770 arranged on the front side of the support case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763. And the illuminated substrate 777, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770.
And have.

The load member 761 is formed of a resin material, and extends outward from the base end portion 761a in which a through hole through which the shaft rod portion 762 is inserted is formed and the base end portion 761a, and is abbreviated. A rod-shaped extension portion 761b that is bent and formed in a U-shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c that is formed in a rod shape that bends upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b to the front side, and a rod-shaped extension portion. Setting part 761b
An arc centered on the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d protruding from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction and the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Opposing curved portion 761e formed in a shape and arranged to face the curved projecting portion 774 of the front lid member 770.
And prepare.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB2 is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.
In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b by engaging with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB2 are arranged on both sides of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b in the longitudinal direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (Only the back side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB2 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. This regulates the slide, and at that position, the metal plate member MB2
The push-down of the elastic claw is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw engages so as to restrict the retracting of the metal plate member MB2 to the back surface side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.
It may be tied up with a binding band, or it may be stuck with an adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 has a projecting frame portion 771 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protrusions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion 771. From the back of the plate, the cylindrical portion 772, the wiring through recess 773 recessed so that the electric wiring connected to the illuminated board 777 at the lower edge portion or the connector connected to the end of the electric wiring can be passed through. Shaft rod part 76
It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 projecting in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on 2.

The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to face the periphery of the illuminated substrate 777, and is a portion that prevents the illuminated substrate 777 from being loaded from the vertical and horizontal directions.

The projecting columnar portion 772 includes a front-view gourd-shaped seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 779 of the illuminated substrate 777. By assembling, the back surface of the illuminated substrate 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided in the seat portion, and the illuminated substrate 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion.

The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect, and a plurality of through holes 77 formed in the illuminated substrate 777 for assembly.
9 and.

The through holes 779 are formed at a plurality of places (two places in the present embodiment) as a pair of circular through holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the projecting columnar portion 772.

In this embodiment, the illuminated substrate 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is,
This corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777, which are arranged close to each other on the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, are configured like a single rigid body. Therefore, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2
The vibration generated by the excitation of the light emitting means 778 can easily vibrate the illuminated substrate 777, and the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be configured to vibrate the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778. ..

In this embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is arranged between the load member 761 displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, it is possible to prevent excessive transmission of vibration.

The width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the light emitting means 77
The setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from 8 is to be vibrated or not to be vibrated. In the former case, the width dimension may be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 has a lower regulating portion 764 disposed below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and an upper regulating portion 765 disposed on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
And a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 310 is screwed.

The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51 (a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and is displaced ascending.

That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the ascending position arranged as a result of rising by the electromagnetic force and the descending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and descending by its own weight. , The plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives the load from the load member 761 is the shafted support portion 7.
It is displaced in the direction of rotation about 31. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, FIG. 51
In (a) and FIG. 51 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 77 except for the curved protrusion 774.
The illustration of No. 7 is omitted, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 7
The state in which the 61 is arranged in the descending position by its own weight is illustrated. In FIG. 51 (b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 76.
The state in which 1 is arranged in the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the load member 761 abuts on the lower restricting portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper restricting portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are arranged with reference to the shaft rod portion 762 (the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are arranged with reference to the shaft rod portion 762.
The distance from the shaft rod portion 762) is configured to be different, but the effect caused by this will be described.

First, the load applied to the lower regulation unit 764 via the load member 761 is mainly the load member 7.
Since the load is generated by the own weight of 61, the load member 761 can be stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the position of the center of gravity is substantially the center position of the member, but the load member 76
In No. 1, the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend bifurcatedly from the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, so that the center of gravity is on the extension tip side of the substantially center position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. Will be placed in.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower regulation portion 764 is arranged on the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b as a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761. ..

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly a load due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The benefits associated with location are small. In the present embodiment, the upper regulation portion 765 is arranged to face the rotational tip of the load member 761 to reduce the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is higher at a position away from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (a position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper restricting member 765 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the load member 761, so that in the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Overhanging to the outer diameter side of the circle centered on the shaft rod portion 762, and the overhanging portion 761d
Is configured to come into contact with the upper restricting member 765. As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and stably generate the load transmission on the rotation tip side.

In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 but is configured to pull it up by an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core arranged in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured to pull up the load member 761 by attracting the metal plate member MB2.

According to this configuration, as compared with the configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by the member that moves by the electromagnetic force, the load member 761 is overloaded (locally) even when the load member 761 is displaced by the load applied to the load member 761. Since the load is unlikely to occur, it is possible to easily prevent the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being damaged. Thereby, even if the load member 761 is configured to receive a fluctuating load as in the present embodiment, the useful life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the load member 761, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (predetermined on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state of receiving an attraction force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (rising position). While making contact at multiple points on a flat surface), a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (the part containing the coil), and the above-mentioned surface contact surface is provided. The upper regulating portion 765 and the overhanging portion 761d are configured to be in contact with each other on a surface parallel to the surface.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is applied to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 to prevent the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being overloaded. It can be dispersed and received at the lower edge portion or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid a large load locally.

At the ascending position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. It is configured to be provided, and the load from the load member 761 is applied to the upper regulating unit 7.
It may be configured to receive only 65. In this case, since the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be cut off, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
The durability of L2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load tends to concentrate on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken).
Even in this case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one point. can.

Further, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 abuts on the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points, so that a detection sensor is separately configured so that this abutment can be detected. Therefore, the breakage (breakage) of the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) due to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 rebounds after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the upper regulation unit 765 is considered only for the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765.
The arrangement and posture of the shaft can be designed (a straight line passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 76).
The angle with the straight line along the width direction of 5 can be designed to be small).

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulation portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulation portion 764 and the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the lower regulation portion 764 has a lower regulation portion 764. The direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed as compared with the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line (force decomposition). As a result, it is possible to suppress the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764.

Moreover, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a long width dimension (width along the radial direction), a wide area of the surface to be loaded can be secured, and the load due to the weight of the load member 761 can be used. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulation portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulation unit 764 and the upper regulation unit 765 via the load member 761 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions.
Bounce can be suppressed.

The materials of the upper regulation unit 765 and the lower regulation unit 764 are not limited in any way.
For example, general-purpose plastics such as polypropylene and polystyrene may be used, engineering plastics such as polycarbonate may be used, thermosetting resins such as melamine resin, polyurethane and epoxy resin may be used, and rubbery materials may be used. In addition, the upper regulation part 765
And the material of the lower regulation part 764 may be made of the same material or may be different.

For example, when the upper regulating unit 765 is provided with a function of suppressing the positional displacement in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 can receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the raised position. As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent frictional resistance as well as damping property may be adopted.

In this case, the load member 7 is applied by the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761.
It is possible to easily prevent the 61 from being displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction) only in a state where the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposed curved portion 761e is displaced on the back surface side of the curved projecting portion 774. Since both the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side and the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the facing curved portion 76
Since the 1e and the curved projecting portion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, the resistance to rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposed curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above the portion. In the present embodiment, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is arranged in this secured space.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the facing curved portion 761e, but unlike the facing curved portion 761e that is formed to be curved, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is extended straight in front view. That is, the load member 761
Is formed in a rod shape extending in the vertical direction when viewed from the front in a state where the is arranged in the ascending position.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the load member 761 from bending and deforming to the left and right due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even with the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stably pushed up. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the support mode will be described later.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is formed in a rod shape that extends straight in the vertical direction in the front view, but is in the middle position (axis) so that the upper end portion is arranged on the front side rather than the lower end portion in the side view. Bending (bending at an obtuse angle) is formed at the left position of the rod portion 762).

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 below the vicinity of the shaft rod portion 762 can be moved toward the back surface side, and the arrangement area of the member arranged on the front surface side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illuminated substrate 777 can be moved to the back side, by separating the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illuminated substrate 777, the light emitting means 778 irradiates the bottom surface of the flow. The light visually recognized through the members 91 and 92 can be easily recognized as a wide light. In other words, instead of the point emission that is visually recognized by the size of the outer shape of the LED, the surface emission that the light reaches in a circle around the optical axis and shines in a plane can be easily recognized.

Further, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed by bending back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, an overload is locally caused when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if it occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the flexibility of the load member 761 different in the front-rear and left-right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. The effect of being able to do it can be achieved.

The load member 761 has an upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and a downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761 in a state of being arranged in the ascending position. Is supported more stably.

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the base end portion 761a to the overhanging portion 761d are still stably supported by the load. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, the load member 761 may be damaged by rubbing against other members.
It is possible to prevent an extra driving force for driving the load member 761 from being required.

<Action of the second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700,
Since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right, the displacement of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly. Is also configured differently. In the following, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be described.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 52,
A state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the lowered position is shown. In FIG. 53, only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 is arranged in the lowered position, and the load of the right drive unit 760 is placed. The state in which the member 761 is upwardly displaced from the descending position to the ascending position is shown, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the ascending position.

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state (non-excited state) in which no current flows through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not in contact with each other.
The posture of is the lower end posture (initial posture) maintained by the contact with the base member 701.

The state shown in FIG. 53 is the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side) (
(See FIG. 50) corresponds to a state in which the current is controlled to flow (one-sided excitation state).
In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pushed up by the load member 761 on the right side, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in an intermediate posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal posture in the intermediate posture.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In the present embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in the shape of a small-diameter rod and is formed to be bent in the front-rear direction, and is easily bent in the lateral direction (front-back direction). It is formed with strength (rigidity) that allows it to bend and deform due to its own weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied in the direction including the front-rear direction component at the contact position with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured so as to be easily deformed by bending, and the load can be released by this bending deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to the state in which the load member 761 is flexed and deformed.

The plate-shaped displacement member 7 in the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below.
The difference in posture in the rising direction of 30 can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, the difference in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be designed. The elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be the same on the left and right, or may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the shape of the load member 761 of the left and right drive units 760 is symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (FIG. 50) is in the state opposite to that shown in FIG. 53. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown in FIG. 5 even if a current is passed through (see) and no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on the right side.
It is equivalent to the posture shown in 3. Therefore, in the following, the state shown in FIG. 53 is referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and the description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of its own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced to half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the load member 761 on the left side being arranged in the raised position as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load member due to the load applied via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is used. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. be.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so that the load member is divided into two. The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the bending deformation of the 761 is small (a state in which the bending deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55A, when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the load member 761 on one side. Focus on. Since the deflection deformation generated in the load member 761 is increased by this load, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed by the amount of the deflection deformation even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. A state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulation protrusion 702c (initial posture, FIG. 5).
In 5 (a) (illustrated by an imaginary line), the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The normal extending from the normal line abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the extending direction of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, the bending deformation generated in the load member 761 can be suppressed to a small extent. .. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted via the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the midway posture (see FIG. 55A), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the lower side in the front direction on the lower side in the front direction from the reference O1. It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending to.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)) where the amount of bending deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed toward the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The applied load comprises a frontal component and a downward component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the front, the load including the frontal component and the downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). The percentage of being done gradually increases)
..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the easiness of bending and deformation of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes with the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. That is, the posture in which the load starts to be applied from the load member 761 to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)).
), A rear load is generated in the direction in which the load member 761 is less likely to bend and deform, and from a horizontal posture, a load in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to bend and deform than in the direction of the rear load (downward load and , Load on the front side) occurs.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761 and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c) and the load are applied. Depending on the design of the portion 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to bend (the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted.
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 when the drive unit 760 is driven can be designed to be different.

In the present embodiment, since the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is formed to extend upward while projecting to the front side, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be bent and deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is flexed and deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of its own weight transmitted through the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be started to be used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 from the stage before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture.

In this way, the load is configured so that the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761. Even if the member 761 is over-displaced or under-displaced, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
The fluctuation that occurs in the posture of 0 can be reduced.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 directly affect the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are precisely designed so as not to be displaced, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required both in the manufacturing stage of the member and in the assembling stage, so that the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 is flexed and deformed, even if there is a slight difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 or the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761, it is designed to be offset by the flexure deformation of the load member 761. By setting the position, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stabilized. Therefore, the accuracy of the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage required for stabilizing the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed low, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

This is not limited to the load member 761 alone, but the same can be said for the displacement of the left and right load members 761 combined. That is, when the load member 761 of the left and right drive units 760 is configured to have a symmetrical shape as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the upper end portion of the load member 761 in the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761.

As a result, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized in the middle posture regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven in the one-sided excitation state.

Further, the load member 761 is applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733.
The direction of bending that occurs in can be limited to the front side. In this direction, the rod-shaped extension portion 761
With respect to b, it coincides with the direction of the positional deviation in the front-rear direction set in the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.
As a result, the load that causes the load member 761 to bend and deform can be configured to face the direction away from the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the influence of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 on the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Can be made smaller. In other words, load member 761
It is possible to suppress the influence on the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c.

That is, rubbing or deformation that occurs in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion portion 774 and the opposed curved portion 761e, etc.). Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the mode of bending deformation of the load member 761, so that the structure of the load member 761 and the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the premise that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. Can be easy.

In addition, the direction of bending generated in the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (the same portion can be prevented from bending toward the front side or bending toward the back side depending on the situation. ) Therefore, the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of bending of the load member 761 can be related one-to-one, and the load member 761 can be compared with the case where it can bend both in the front and rear directions.
Durability can be improved.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the ascending position. (See FIG. 51 (b)).

Therefore, as described above, the load member 761 is affected by the bending deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.
The displacement of the load member 761 in the front-rear direction due to the load applied to the load member 761 can be suppressed by the friction generated between the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765.

Therefore, even when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in the excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the excited state). Control mode of repeatedly switching between the non-excited state) and the load member 761 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole.

This is because the load member 761 is not only the shaft rod portion 762 but also the shaft rod portion 7 as in the present embodiment.
It can be satisfactorily realized by the configuration supported by 62 and the upper regulation unit 765. More specifically, it is not a mode in which the load member 761 is placed between the descending position and the ascending position and receives a load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but a plate-shaped displacement with the load member 761 fixed in the ascending position. It is satisfactorily feasible because it is in a mode of receiving a load from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the shaft rod portion 762, which is the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, with respect to the longitudinal component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
Although it will resist including the side part, if the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or misaligned in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, it will be between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. There may be a gap in the space.

When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance at which the electromagnetic force is effectively generated, the electromagnetic force suddenly weakens, and it becomes difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the ascending position. As a countermeasure, increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, or increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, or increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extending portion 762 and the load member 7.
Countermeasures can be taken by increasing the resistance with 61, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavy and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 becomes larger, and in the latter case, the load member 761
It is not preferable because the driving force for rotating the solenoid solenoid SOL2 is excessively required and the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably placed not only at the shaft rod portion 762 but also at the left and right ends of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b as compared with the case of supporting on one of the left and right sides, the frictional resistance generated between the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the upper regulating portion 765 causes the axial displacement of the load member 761. It can be suppressed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released without increasing the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In this embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extending portion 761b due to the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from being twisted and deformed.

It will be described back to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state (excitation state) in which a current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the load members 761 on both the left and right sides are loaded with the load portions 73 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
When 3 is pushed up, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction, and is in the upper terminal posture. In this embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture.
Is rotationally displaced by about 2.7 degrees from the midway posture (about 6.1 degrees from the lower end posture and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. By doing so, the deflection generated in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In FIG. 54, for the sake of convenience, the left and right load members 761 are shown as being so small that the deflection cannot be discriminated. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the shape of the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in the present embodiment, by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed in a plurality of ways (at least three ways). You can switch with.

In order to switch the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. 54, the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is maintained while the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is maintained. Since the SOL2 may be excited, the posture can be easily switched smoothly.

56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b) are schematics showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and the attitude change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a figure. In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b), the upper timing chart shows the continuity state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on the left side, and the middle timing chart shows the electromagnetic solenoid on the right side. The conduction state of SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In addition, due to the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing of conducting electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs), but in FIGS. 56 and 57, for the purpose of facilitating understanding. For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown to be displaced at the same time as the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56A is the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53.
It is the same as the mode in which the states shown in are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56B is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is shown in FIG.
It is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 2 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53.
It is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 is alternately switched and the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched are repeated.

As described above, the patterns of switching the states described above in FIGS. 52 to 54 are not one, but are generated in a plurality of patterns by different combinations of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since the pattern of switching the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 occurs in a plurality of ways, the hollow member 740 that rides on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (FIG. 43).
The displacement pattern of (see) can be configured in a plurality of ways, and the details will be described later.

In addition, in FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), FIG. 57 (a) and FIG. 57 (b), for convenience,
The short-term conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown as constant, but this is only an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set separately, or may be configured to be gradually lengthened or gradually shortened, and can be arbitrarily set.

Further, by shortening the conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 for a short time, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
While the posture change of 30 can be generated instantaneously (pulse-like), the posture change can be maintained with a sufficient length by lengthening the conduction length. Furthermore, the electromagnetic solenoid SO
By shortening the conduction interval of L2, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operation unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape in a top view. In the following, the portion on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the portion on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 59, 60, 61 and 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 60, a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 61, a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 62, a plate-shaped displacement member is shown. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of shafted support portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is shown as a reference O1 as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Reference O1 is shown in the following drawings with the same meaning. In FIGS. 59 to 62, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right at the center in the left and right direction is shown.

The variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 59, 60 and 61, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 61 and 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
It is displaced (backward) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of 0, and load transmission in the front-rear direction occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The displacement of is a combination of the first stage mainly occurring in the vertical direction (the stage where the posture change from the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is small, see FIGS. 59, 60, 61) and the vertical direction and the front-back direction. It is composed of a second stage (a stage in which the posture change from the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is large, see FIGS. 61 and 62) that occurs in the direction of the above. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction).

Here, since the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state, the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) can be changed by switching the drive mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The displacement mode of can be switched by a plurality of variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the cylindrical portion constituting the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are not in a relationship of sandwiching the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of a load is suppressed and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. Can be done.

63, 64, 65 and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. 63, 64, 65 and 66 show the displacement of the second operating unit 700 in chronological order, and FIG. 63 shows the plate-shaped displacement member 73.
The state in which 0 is the lower end posture (initial posture) is illustrated, and in FIG. 64, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.
Is shown in a horizontal position, FIG. 65 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and FIG. 66 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an upper end position. Will be done. In FIGS. 63 to 66, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 on the right side at the center in the left-right direction is shown.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are arranged at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and away from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction as compared with the large receiving portions 736a in the center of the left and right.

In the following, the variable decorative member 75 (on both the left and right sides) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The displacement of 0 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 63, 64 and 65, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 65 and 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is the variable decorative member 75.
Although it is displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar protrusion 752 of 0 (although it is retracted).
The load transmission in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of the relationship of pushing further.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed of the load in the vertical direction, and when comparing only the vertical components of the displacement, the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the horizontal direction is used. The displacement amount of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of.

In this way, the variable decorative member 7 (in the center in the left-right direction) accompanying the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
While the displacement of 50 is configured so that its direction is different for each step, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction mainly occurs in the vertical direction. As a result, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
Depending on the degree of change in posture of 30, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be different.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely secured, as shown in FIG. 66, the bifurcated support that occurred when paying attention to the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front through hole 723 disappears, and the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 constitutes the front through hole 723 at the same front-rear position. It has a dimensional relationship that cuts into the tubular part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 abuts on the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front side through hole 723 and is translated to the back side is shown. It is illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Given. As a result, the holding force of the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Therefore, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. for that reason,
The appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 after the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to the upper end posture can be changed.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is configured to allow a slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are. By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right.

As described above, the vertical displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 due to the posture change is larger in the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides than in the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides tend to attract the attention of the player,
When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper end posture, it is possible to easily attract the attention of the player to the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right.

Therefore, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper terminal posture or the posture changes repeatedly so as not to be held (stopped) in the upper terminal posture. It is possible to easily attract the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper terminal posture, the player is placed on the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. It is possible to easily gather the line of sight of.

As a result, among the plurality of light guide members 714, the specific light guide member 7 that the player wants to pay particular attention to is
When there is 14, the drive unit 760 is controlled to be driven by the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 in such a manner that the player's line of sight can be easily gathered (light emission mode of the light guide member 714 and the drive unit). By controlling in relation to the driving mode of the 760), the line of sight of the player can be focused on the specific light guide member 714.

FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, the directional view of the reference O1 is shown, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper terminal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is arranged above the front side of the reference O1, the displacement in the front-rear direction is larger than the displacement in the vertical direction at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged directly in front of the reference O1 (because they are arranged on the horizontal line), a slight angle (about 4 degrees) at which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced (about 4 degrees).
In, the vertical displacement is larger than the longitudinal displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced to the center of the reference O1 to make the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a different from the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b. Can be done. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be different between the member arranged in the center of the left and right and the member arranged on the left and right outside.

68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 68, 69, 70 and 71, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). Is illustrated, and in FIG. 69, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
The state in which 30 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 70, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 71, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture is shown. Illustrated.

In FIGS. 68 to 71, a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction is shown. As described above, the front small receiving portion 735a is up to the intermediate posture (see FIG. 70) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.
The front portion of the inner surface of the hollow member 740 does not come into contact with the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743, and the displacement of the hollow member 740 is mainly a vertical displacement.

On the other hand, between the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the upper terminal posture, the front small receiving portion 735a
The front part of the inner side surface of the above and the front side part of the projecting columnar portion 743 come into contact with each other, and after the contact, the hollow member 740
Is pushed toward the back surface side with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this way, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
It is possible to provide a time difference between the start timing of the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of 0 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the action of changing the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture), the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side is the width LH1a, whereas the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the upper side. The width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side in the terminal posture is the width LH.
It changes to 1b (LH1a> LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back surface side) is maintained by the width LH2. Therefore, it is possible to change the balance between the amount of light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light radiated to the back surface side as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is directed toward the player as compared with the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). Since the light is weakened, the light guide member 714 can be easily seen (easily seen), and the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger in the same comparison. Therefore, the light guide member 7
The light radiated from 14 can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the line of sight is directed to the light guide member 714.
Can be drawn to.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 in the line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705 as described above, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in the present embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705, and the dimension of the gap is the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illuminated substrate 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed to the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but when the other light emitting member 714 (one individual light emitting means 706a is focused on, the true light thereof is true. It is configured to prevent heading toward the light guide member 714) other than the light guide member 714 arranged above. That is, since the proximal end side of the light guide members 714 is separated by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and heading toward another light guide member 714 (FIG. 72). See enlarged view).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is configured to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a from reaching the other light guide member 714.

Therefore, when the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different from each other, the light reaches the other light guide member 714 and the appearance of the other light guide member 714 is changed. It is possible to avoid affecting it. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or being visually recognized through the light guide member 714 in a state where the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a is mixed. ..

When the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illuminated substrate 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the whole light emitting means 706b and visually recognized by the player. Can be done.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is displaced in a different manner by differently driving the drive units 760 (see FIGS. 56 and 57) arranged at the lower left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. do.

For example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as the first displacement mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reciprocally displaced between the lower end posture and the intermediate posture by repeatedly operating one drive unit 760. Can be made to. Further, as a second displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and then the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to move the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the intermediate posture and the upper terminal posture. Can be reciprocally displaced with.

Further, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower terminal posture (initial posture), the plate-shaped displacement is performed by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state as the first stopping mode. The member 730 can be stopped in the middle posture. Further, as a second stop mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and then the other drive unit 760 is maintained.
By maintaining the excited state, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped in the upper terminal posture.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 when only one drive unit 760 is excited, without providing a structural difference between the left and right drive units 760. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the bending generated in the load member 761 (see FIG. 55 (a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Instead, it can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 7 on the side that maintains the excited state.
By alternately switching 60 and the drive unit 760 on the side that repeatedly operates according to the number of operations, or by switching each period, the degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 is adjusted (adjusted). be able to. As a result, the left and right drive units 760
As a result, the useful life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time because the replacement time can be adjusted.

It should be noted that the degree of bending generated in the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the bending does not depend on the magnitude of the bending. That is, a configuration that can make a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the drive units 760 and driving and controlling both of them is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly arranged at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 from the player's point of view through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is arbitrarily set, and for example, the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a, and the driving unit 760. It may be controlled so as to correspond with the control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination substrate 705.

For example, as an association with the control mode of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning opening 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation is turned on. It may be controlled so that a plurality of game balls enter the second winning opening 140, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side is turned on according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. ..

In this case, by confirming the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls. Then, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-mentioned first displacement mode, while being more advantageous to the player than entering the first winning opening 64. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 140, which is often the case, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the above-mentioned second displacement mode, and the game is played due to the difference in the displacement mode of the second operation unit 700. It is possible to easily make the player know whether the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be driven and controlled in relation to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is the upper limit value, the winning ball is obtained, but the player cannot obtain the opportunity of fluctuation. If the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed. Because it can be done, it can attract the attention of the player. Therefore, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value), the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value) for the player. ) Can be easily noticed.

In addition, the entry of the game ball, the control mode of the drive unit 760, and the light emitting means 70 of the illuminated substrate 705.
As another example of associating with the control mode of the lighting state of 6, it may be associated with the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, for example, the number of balls expected to be entered when the specific winning opening 65a is opened may be associated with the entry of a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (maximum count number per jackpot round). It may be associated with the fact that a game ball having a larger number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over-winning).

As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and that a game ball having an unexpected number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a. It can be grasped by the player.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the suction force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described, but the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the suction force acts in the left-right direction. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the energization is released and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 has a contact member 2190 that is coaxially supported with the auxiliary device 160 and is arranged so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and an urging spring SP21 that urges the contact member 2190. And prepare.

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163 so that the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight in a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. (See FIG. 73 (b)).

The abutting member 2190 is a cushion portion 175a disposed so as to be in contact with the driven member 163.
And a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction of pushing the rotating member 2191 back to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 side.

The displacement mode of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by an electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and via the state shown in FIG. 73B, the rotating member 2191 opposes the urging force of the urging spring SP21. Is rotationally displaced. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced by itself until the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) as a boundary.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73B, the driven member 163 can be oscillated and displaced by a fluctuating urging force. This makes it possible to increase the variation in displacement of the driven member 163.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant speed. It is provided with a transmission means 3410 (for example, a transmission mechanism by a rack and pinion (not shown)) for transmitting a driving force so as to be. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 74 to 77, the state in which the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward is illustrated in chronological order.

FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operating unit 3400. In FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis in FIG. 78 (a). b
), The rotation amount (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78 (c), the displacement amount of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis.

In the first operation unit 3400, an L-shaped elongated hole portion 3406 (a shape in which rectangles whose long sides are orthogonal to each other are integrated) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed with an opening having a size such that the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the tubular portion 444d is arranged at the upper end position of the long opening in the vertical direction of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the long opening is displaced downward in the vertical direction by the displacement up to FIG. 75. do. That is, since the left-right position of the tubular portion 444d does not change in the displacement from FIG. 74 to FIG. 75, the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. And can be configured.

By configuring a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 is cut off. However, this role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to the present embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 is improved). be able to).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 while maintaining the effect that the operation start timings of the elevating plate 430 and the pinnate member 460 can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, the transmission means 3410 facilitates the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 by a constant velocity linear motion (see FIG. 78 (a)). In this case, the synchronization described above in the first embodiment is performed. If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is diverted as it is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

More specifically, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of change in angle with respect to the amount of displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a becomes smaller).

Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 cannot be displaced at a substantially constant velocity with respect to the elevating plate 430. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, meshed with the upper right rotary gear 441, and connected to the relative displacement member 442. An armed rotary gear 3441 with an extension is provided. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially offset, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, it is not the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with (proportional) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a, but the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a. By converting the amount of change in angle with respect to the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm into the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion, the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion. , The difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (offset).

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the lift plate 430 can be brought closer to the displacement mode of the lift plate 430.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 passes through the rotation axis of the rotation gear 3441 with an arm.
It may be configured to be guided by the relative displacement member 442. That is, the path of the electric wiring DH1
Auxiliary arm member 444, elevating plate 430, rotary gear with arm 3441 and relative displacement member 4
By forming continuously in the order of 42, the electrical wiring D due to the displacement of the first operating unit 3400
It is possible to avoid a large fluctuation in the path length of H1.

In this case, since the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative portion 493, it is easy to dispose an illuminated substrate in the decorative portion 493 and execute a light emitting effect by a light emitting means such as an LED. Can be done.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operating unit 700 is not arranged has been described, but the second operating unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. It is equipped with a detection device 4780 for the purpose of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operating unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are not shown except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, in FIG. 79 (a), no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4
The state in which the 761 is arranged in the descending position by its own weight is illustrated. In FIG. 79 (b), the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and the load member 4
The state in which 761 is arranged in the ascending position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the load member 4761 abuts on the lower restricting portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and in the ascending position, the upper restricting portion 765.
It comes into contact with and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, except that the overhanging portion 761d is changed to the thick overhanging portion 4761f and the thin overhanging portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that protrudes from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b with a wall thickness (front-back width) equivalent to that of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the process of arranging the load member 4676 in the ascending position, it abuts on the upper regulation portion 765 and corresponds to the portion where the load is received and stopped.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is a thick-walled overhanging portion 476 from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f.
It is a plate-shaped portion thinner than 1f (shorter front-rear width) and overhangs along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is configured to come into contact with the upper restricting portion 765 in the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the ascending position, as compared with the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. Since it is thin, it is preferentially damaged as compared with the thick overhanging portion 4761f due to the accumulation of fatigue due to repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are It does not have to be formed flush with each other, it is sufficient if at least the upper surface is flush with each other, and the position of the lower surface can be arbitrarily set. For example, by shortening the vertical width of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g as compared with the vertical width of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, the electromagnetic solenoid SO until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged.
By reducing the number of repeated excitations of L2, the period until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged can be adjusted.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged on the printed circuit board 4781 so that a thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g can be inserted and removed in the detection groove.
And prepare.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g blocks the detection light at the lowered position of the load member 4761 (see FIG. 79 (a)), and the load member 476.
At the ascending position of 1, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is arranged upward so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79 (b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be described. Normally, the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, so that it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This confirmation is MPU22
By making it perform in 1 (see FIG. 4) and issuing an alarm when it is determined that the malfunction is occurring or displaying an error on the display device, the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700 is caused to the player or the hall clerk. It can be made easier to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged (broken) and dropped, the thin-walled overhanging portion 47
Since 61 g and the load member 4761 do not operate in synchronization with each other, the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other, an alarm is generated in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error is displayed on the display device to overhang the wall. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the hall clerk to notice that the portion 4761 g is damaged (broken).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used by both the position detecting means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and the damage detecting means for detecting the breakage (breakage) of the load member 4761. ..

According to the present embodiment, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f may come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 to stop the load member 4761 at the raised position. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and put it in a maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, which gives the player an unexpected disadvantage. It can be avoided.

In this way, among the parts that come into contact with the upper regulation portion 765, a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) is provided, and the breakage (break) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, whereby the thick overhanging portion 476 is provided.
The load member can be replaced before fatigue accumulates to the extent that 1f is damaged (broken).

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, the case of bending and deforming in relation to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c has been described, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment gives a load to the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c. It is provided with a deflection adjusting device 5780 for adjusting the bending deformation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

80 (a) and 80 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. The deflection adjusting device 5780 is a box-shaped foundation member 5781 having a built-in metal coil and an iron rod supported by the foundation member 5781 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to project above the foundation member 5781. It is provided with an adjusting member 5782 to be formed.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-sided excitation state, the load member 761 is less flexed and deformed by driving the deflection adjusting device 5780 (deflection deformation is about half). The state changes to). In other words, in the first embodiment, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper terminal posture by putting the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 in an excited state (both). ing.

That is, with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 in a one-sided excitation state (see FIG. 80 (a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjusting device 5780 moves around the adjusting member 5782. By energizing the metal coil to form an electromagnet and driving the adjusting member 5782 upward in the situation where it is arranged to be wound, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the bending of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is applied. It can be applied to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c (FIG. 80 (b).
)reference).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is driven in cooperation with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side and the adjusting device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side. The displacement member 730 can be maintained in the lower terminal posture (initial posture), the intermediate posture, and the upper terminal posture.

As a result, the arrangement of the drive means can be solidified as compared with the case where the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 need to be arranged in pairs on the left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be fixed, the area required as the route for passing the wiring can be set in various places (for example,).
It can be avoided to disperse to the left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 shows
It is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 82, the illustration of the winning opening unit 930 and the unit other than the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later in the front view, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side to the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper in FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface (front side of the paper in FIG. 83 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 has a through hole 6 having an outer shape of the base plate 60 in the front view.
It is formed larger than 0a. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. This will result in
The game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 penetrates from a space other than the passage path (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a) of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later. It is possible to suppress the passage through the hole 60a.

The specific winning opening unit 950 is partially inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening unit 95 through the specific winning opening 65a.
It is possible to throw the ball inside 0. A detailed explanation of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 on the front unit via the displacement member 966. Be concatenated. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 8
7 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a front unit 940.
It is a rear view of. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b),
The outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945 that are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. Hole 60a
You can see the inside of.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by a notch on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87). b) The specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, and the specific winning opening 65.
It mainly includes a second winning opening 140 formed through above a, and a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at an edge opposite to the first out opening 71.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 has a back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) as a base plate 60.
It is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing is inserted, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Further, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is provided.
Since the diameter is reduced from the front side to the back side, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a projecting from the back surface of the back surface base 941 in a columnar shape is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. Thereby, the back surface base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back surface base 941, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The rear base 941 is formed so that the outer shape of the lower end in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the bottom portion of the notch (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () The game ball that did not flow into any of them is passed through the first out port 71 to the game board 1.
The ball can be thrown to the back side of No. 3 (the opposite side of the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87 (b))).

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b)) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, is moved to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.
You can throw the ball to the front side of the page).

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a) and is formed in a cup shape) and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back surface side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. It is provided with a guide portion 941 g1 that is erected so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and the game ball flowing down in the flowing region collides with the first receiving portion 941g, and the first receiving portion 941g.
Can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the interest of the player may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide portion 941g1, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the back base 941. As a result, the base plate 60
It can be made to collide with a game nail (not shown) arranged in the game ball again, and can easily change the flow direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the first throwing unit 942 g is
The bottom surface is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), and the protruding tip side is at the edge of the inflow port 982d of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later. Be abutted. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving section 941g to the first throwing section 942g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first notched portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first notched portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is notched to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, is moved to the back side (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87) via the second winning opening 140.
(B) The ball can be thrown to (the front side of the paper)).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper)) at the edge thereof.
), And a second throwing portion 942c projecting to the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface thereof abuts on the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by being bent into a substantially L-shape in the back view at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140. The dimension of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the front base 94, which will be described later,
It is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of 3 from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the facing portions in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 9 is set inward.
43a is arranged. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is notched and formed on the other side of the protruding tip portion in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87 (b))). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87 (b))) from the gaming area side of the rear base 941 to the opposite side to the gaming area. The first shaft hole 941d which is recessed in two places in a circular shape, and the two first openings 941e which are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941. A protrusion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. And formed with.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. also,
The first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c is formed in an isosceles triangle shape in the front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b is a wall that guides the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b is formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and is extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. As a result, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 is formed on the first guide wall 9
The displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated by abutting on the bent portion of 42b.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening in the facing direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) of the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 via the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the longitudinal direction. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later. As a result, the specified winning opening unit 950 is inside the standing unit 942f.
Can be easily positioned and arranged.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, the rod member 952 becomes the plate member 951.
When the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h to prevent the rod member 952 from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87).
b) Provided with a second guide wall 942d projecting upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the displacement member 966 described later (see FIG. 90).
Is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 9
A predetermined gap can be formed between 66 and the back surface of the back surface base 941. As a result, the displacement member 9
When the 66 is displaced, the frictional (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The rear base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of both ends in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) of the specific winning opening 65a. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed into a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge portion of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball rolling on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 has a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above.
It is formed mainly with and.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view, and the back base 94 is inside in the front view.
The second winning opening 140 of 1 is arranged. Further, the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (U-shaped open side).
Is provided with a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back surface base 941 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the rear base 941 and the front base 943, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the facing surfaces of the pair of feather members 945 described later. can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c includes a throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and a throwing guide portion 943d.
First recess 94 recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper surface)
It is provided with 3ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

The throwing guide portion 943d is formed in pairs on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the pair of feather members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, respectively, and the rear base 941 and the front base 94 are formed.
When combined with 3, the end faces are brought into contact with each other. As a result, a pair of feather members 945
The game ball that has flowed into the opposite space can be thrown between the opposite sides of the throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the upper end surface 943a1 in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is a rear base 94.
In a state where 1 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), they are arranged inside the recess 941j, and the tip is on the back side of the back base 941 (FIG. 87 (b) front side of the paper surface).
It is projected to.

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. Can be thrown to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular projection 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 at its inner edge, and the second shaft hole 943 thereof.
The other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U-shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite to the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back surface base 941 interposed therebetween in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back surface base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (rear surface) on the back surface base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front surface base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted through the insertion hole 945c, so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate the wing member 945. It can be arranged between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the tip thereof is the first opening 941e of the rear base 941.
The size is set so as to project to the back surface side (opposite side of the game area) of the back surface base 941 in which the displacement member 966 is arranged. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a detailed description of the displacement member 966 will be given. FIG. 90 (a)
) Is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90 (b)) at a substantially central position in front view. 2nd opening 9
In the 66c, the shape of the inner edge in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 is displaced by the displacement member 96.
It is possible to suppress the collision with the inner edge of 6.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), and the longitudinal direction and the like. A bulging portion 9 that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90 (b)) to the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).
It is equipped with 66b.

The protrusion 966a is a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction.
And the contact portion 96 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is provided with 6a1.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 has a sliding groove 966a2.
The width dimension is set larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, the protrusion 945b abuts on both inner surfaces facing each other in the width direction of the sliding groove 966a2, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the wing member 945 from being restricted.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge toward the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. as a result,
The resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is
It is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. note that,
A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). , The other side contacted portion 966b3 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))) is provided.

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a bulging portion 965 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
This is the surface with which e1 abuts. The displacement member 966 has a bulging portion 965 on one side contacted portion 966b2.
The wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the abutting and sliding displacement of e1.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a bulging portion 965 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
The side surface opposite to e1 is the surface that abuts. The displacement member 966 is slidably displaced by abutting the side surface on the opposite side to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3, thereby causing the wing member 94.
5 can be displaced to the closed state (see FIG. 91).

Next, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In FIGS. 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed in parallel with the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. The surface 945b1, the third surface 945b3 which is connected to the first surface 945b1 and is located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b.
It mainly has a second surface 945b2 connected to 3.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side), and has a lower inner surface 966a4 that abuts on the protrusion 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in an open state, and a lower inner surface 966 thereof.
The upper inner surface 966a3 that faces a4 and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in a closed state, and the lateral inner surface 96 of the displacement member 966 from the outside (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) to the lower side.
It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 that inclines inward in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966 toward the 6a4 side.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is a displacement member 966.
Is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91) to be in the closed state, and the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91) to be in the open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member.
It is arranged inside 66a2.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b has a sliding groove 96.
It is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of 6a2 (outside in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at predetermined intervals are formed on the upper and lower sides, and the projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism is a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 into which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement member 966
Since the displacement of is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the protruding portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. Displacement member 966 when operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (other side in the direction of gravity)
As the weight of the above is added, the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to start driving the wing member 945 in the stopped state and smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed.
The protrusion 945b is located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945 in the gravity direction. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945. As a result, the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2
The displacement component of can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the stopped state (
The driving of the wing member 945 in the closed state) can be started, and the initial operation at the time of opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (self-weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the direction of gravity due to the contact of
Horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, the feather member 94 when it is in the closed state.
It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of 5. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is displaced from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 becomes a protrusion 945.
The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with the first surface 945b1 of b. As a result, the wing member 945
Can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. Figure 9
4 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a box-shaped first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion arranged so as to face each other. 9
A solenoid 610 disposed in the space between 63, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 9 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.
It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to 64.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 and a back base 941 side (FIG. 85) from the covering portion 962a. A guide portion 962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d projecting to the outside of the facing wall surface in the facing direction.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view.
As a result, before fastening the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963, the engaged portion 962c
Since the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 96.
The workability of fastening with 3 can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is a second accommodating portion 9 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled.
It is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of 63, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (FIG. 93).
(A) A through hole 962da penetrating toward (lower side) is provided.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and the fastening hole 96 is formed.
It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than 3b1. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 96
3 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the covering portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f on the opposite side of the covering portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e is located on the back base 941 side (from each of the facing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a).
(See FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side is formed into a substantially L-shaped side view that bends to the other side (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in the direction of gravity. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the distal end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in the front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in the front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the direction of gravity (FIG. 93 (a) vertical direction) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 to the upright portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (see FIG. 91).
L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 9 is located between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941.
The 66 can be arranged and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facings of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) to the opposite side to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. In addition, the protrusion 962 g
The inner dimension L7 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is set to be slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. Further, the protrusion 962 g is set so that the dimension in the direction of gravity is substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the upright portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is arranged on the rear base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the facing portions of the projecting portions 962 g, and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b are inserted. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape covering the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view.
Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the first accommodating portion 962 side from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of portions of both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e in the plurality of portions. An engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in a wall portion on one side (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) extending in the lateral direction.

The projecting portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape.
A fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962 is provided. This will result in
A screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in the space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the first
The solenoid 610 disposed between the accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be lengthened. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later.
It is recessed into a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body portion 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft portion 961b that is inserted inside the main body portion 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 961a, and a shaft portion 96 thereof.
It includes an annular portion 961c disposed at an end opposite to the main body portion 961a of 1b, and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a.

The main body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape.
The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annulus 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is displaced from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964.
The connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a facing each other. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 is a base portion 96 formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.
It is formed to include 4a and an upright portion 964b that bends from the other side of the base portion 964a in the direction of gravity to the back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85).

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. It includes a first recessed portion 964c to be formed, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the first recessed portion 96
The annulus 961c can be inserted into 4c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. Yes, it is formed in a substantially U-shape with the lower side open in the rear view, and the first recessed portion 964c.
It is formed by opening from the side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965 described later is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, the connecting member 9
When 64 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 96 on the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e
The transmission member 965 is displaced by the contact with 5d. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed so as to be bent in a side view, and the shaft portion 961 of the solenoid 610 is formed.
It is formed of a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of b and a rotating portion 965b that is connected to the tip portion 965a and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b is located at the end on the 964 side in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 (in the lateral direction).
FIG. 93 (b) vertical direction) A rotary shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides and a rotary shaft 965c thereof.
It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the gravitational direction in the radial direction of the above.

As described above, the rotary shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in the top view. Further, in the protruding portion 965d, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (main body portion 96).
In the state before power is applied (supplied) to 1a, the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610
The width dimension in the displacement direction is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced around the rotary shaft 965c, the shaft portion 961
It is possible to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 965 from being restricted due to the contact between the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of b and the insertion hole 964e.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is arranged so as to be inserted into the inside of the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. Figure 96
(A) and FIG. 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. In addition, FIG. 9
In 6 (a) and FIG. 96 (b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96A, electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In the non-existing state, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is extruded in a direction away from the main body portion 961a, the transmission member 965
The surface of the protrusion 965d on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the inner surface of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 on the solenoid 610 side are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) with the rotation shaft 965c as the axis. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.
In this state, the shaft portion 961b becomes the main body portion 961a due to the magnetic force generated in the main body portion 961a.
The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) to the solenoid 610 and the connecting member 964
The inner surface of the insertion hole 964e on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) to the solenoid 610 side is in contact with the solenoid 610 side. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 96B) about the rotation shaft 965c. In addition, the transmission member 96
The displacement of the tip portion 965a of the fifth portion 965a to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 abutting on the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to the first accommodation portion 962 or the second accommodation portion 963.
Can be brought into contact with either one. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when the player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. By that amount, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotary shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotary portion 965b, and is extended from the rotary shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The protruding portion 965d is provided, and the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in a substantially shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set to the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance of the rotating portion 965b, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 9 can be set.
The distance from 66 becomes large, and the whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension up to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b have the rotating shaft 96.
By being formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial view of 5c, it is possible to suppress the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 while ensuring the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. As a result, the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b can be effectively utilized, and the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized. That is, the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (the throwing unit 97 described later).
0) and the transmission member 965 in the space between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950.
Can be efficiently arranged to reduce the size as a whole.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are the XCVII of FIG. 97.
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in line I-XCVIII. In addition, FIG. 98 (a)
Then, the state before the operation of the solenoid 610 is illustrated, and in FIG. 98 (b), the solenoid 61 is shown.
The state after the operation of 0 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is the connecting hole 966b of the displacement member 966.
It is inserted in 1.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIG.
As shown in 8 (a) and FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is in the direction of gravity. It is slid and displaced to the other side.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is opened.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the transmission member 96 is caused by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above.
The tip portion 965a of 5 is displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), the connecting hole 966b between the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the displacement member 966.
The displacement member 966 is slid and displaced to one side in the direction of gravity by abutting against the other side contacted portion 966b3 of 1.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is closed.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to an illegal act by the player. When the wiring is cut, the wing member 945 is opened and the second winning opening 1 is opened.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from easily flowing into the 40.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, a pair of feather members 94
The change in posture of the displacement member between 5 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. Where the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed when acted, the displacement member 96
When 6 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places, the displacement between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Changes in the posture of the member 966 are unacceptable, and resistance is generated when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered.
On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two points and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other-side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). ((
It is set to be less than 3 times (see a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, the insertion portion 965
When the width dimension D1 of e is set large, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 are likely to come into contact with each other when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965. Where the posture change of the displacement member 966 is restricted, the posture change of the displacement member 966 is regulated by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. Can be suppressed. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101.
99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view.
It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. It is provided with a plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is made of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 has a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b cylindrically recessed on both outer sides of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c protruding from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d protruding from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and has a shape slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to project to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is tilted toward the game area side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed in the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 described later inside the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, the plate member 951 has a shaft hole 951.
When it is rotationally displaced around b, a part of it protrudes toward the flow-down region, so that the main body portion 951
It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down to a from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting into an annular shape on the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A projecting portion 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, and a protrusion 9 projecting from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951.
It is formed with 53h and two inflow ports 953j formed through the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a.

The main body portion 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. Formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the upright portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of feather members 945 described above on the outer side in the facing direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The opening 953a1 has an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the plate member 9 is formed.
When the 51 is in the open state, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body portion 953a on the lower side in the gravity direction, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back surface side (passage member 955 side) to the front surface side (plate member 951 side) is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the opening 9
The game ball thrown from 53a1 to the inside of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 is placed on the upright wall 953b and the engaging portion 953.
It can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated by the thickness of the detection device SE1 from the proximal end side. Therefore, the detection device SE1 is engaged with the engagement portion 953f and is arranged on the main body portion 953a.
Can be suppressed from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in the state of a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is
It is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and can pass a game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the facing portions thereof is formed to be shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. This will result in
The plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is the shaft hole 95 of the plate member 951.
It is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of 1b. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 95 from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951.
By inserting into the 3d1 and the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protrusion dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the recess 941h formed in the back base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, the front unit 9
By combining the 40 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting projection 942j of the front unit 940.
Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the insertion hole 953g formed through the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the projecting portion 953g.
1 is arranged coaxially, and the projecting portion 953 g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other.
As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusion 953h is a plate member 95 of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the engaging portion 951d.
It is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction of No. 1 (FIG. 99 (a) left-right direction). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entrance is formed to a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is poured into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, so that there is a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inflow port 953j is formed in pairs (at two places) at predetermined intervals, the inflow port 9 is formed even when the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a is enlarged.
The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball up to 53j can be shortened. Therefore, that much
The time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened so that the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is the inflow port 953.
It is arranged at the connecting portion between j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. This will result in
The game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore,
It is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball by the plate member 951 until the opening 953a1 is closed, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, the position where the inflow of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 is large. The inflow port 953j can be brought closer. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in the front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in the front view of the ball entry member 953 described above. Further, the passage member 955 is a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and is located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b that is formed through the third opening 955b, a pair of third openings 955c that are formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. The drive unit 9 is located between the rolling portion 955d to be installed and the pair of recessed portions 955a.
It is formed with a second recessed portion 955f recessed from the 57 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 9 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later.
It is a space in which 58 is arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that projects in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space in which the detection device SE2 is arranged so that the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the gravity direction, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c.
Further, the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c, and the detection hole S is provided.
E1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e becomes the detection device SE2.
Is engaged with the detection board SE1b side of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, the rolling portion 955d is a plate member 95 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined.
The end on the 1st side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 is specified as the winning opening unit 950.
The ball can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

As described above, the second recessed portion 955f is formed between the pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99 (c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

In the second recessed portion 955f, an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side are formed. Insertion hole 95
Reference numeral 5h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and is a second accommodating portion 96 of the drive unit 960.
It is formed at a position facing the elongated hole 963f formed in 3. As a result, the drive unit 9
The 60 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed to include a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b that covers the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c that is disposed at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a has a main body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped and the main body portion 957a thereof.
A shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and an annular portion 957a3 arranged at an end portion of the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the main body portion 957a1.
A coil spring SP2 disposed between the annulus portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1 is provided.

The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 by the magnetism is the main body portion 957a.
It can be inserted by pulling it inside 1.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to protrude from the main body portion 957a1.

The annulus portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annulus portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member wound a plurality of times in a spiral shape. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annulus portion 957a3 becomes the main body portion 957a.
It can be urged in the direction away from 1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. In addition, the case member 957b
Is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating in the axial direction of the shaft portion 957a2 and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw.
Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the main body 957
Wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99 (b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion thereof. A second position located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2.
A recessed portion 957c2 and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in a cross-sectional view. In addition, the first recessed portion 95
The groove width of 7c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. This will result in
An annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by being bent into a substantially L-shape in the side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a abuts on the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular side view. The transmission member 958 has a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from the end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a abuts on the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced around the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore,
When the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up.
As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

In addition, in FIG. 102 (a) and FIG. 103 (a), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.
In FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the open state of the plate member 951 is shown. also,
The closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the main body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
In the state where the application (supply) of electric power to a1 is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is in a state of protruding toward the plate member 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)) due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annulus portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is the plate member 9.
It is pushed out to the 51 side. As a result, the shaft hole 958 is formed in the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958.
The force is transmitted in the direction of rotation around b in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)).

When the tip 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip 958c and the recess 951d
1 is in contact with the plate member 951, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is rotated in a direction approaching the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the force of unauthorized operation from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), the main body portion 957 of the solenoid 957a
When electric power is applied (supplied) to a1, the shaft portion 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a)
Similarly, the connecting member 957c arranged in 3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)) is transmitted to the transmission member 965.

When the tip 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip 958c and the recess 951
In contact with d1, the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 becomes the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953.
It is rotated in a direction away from the opening side of. As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is shown in FIG. 104 (b).
Is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). In addition, in FIG. 104 (a), the state in which the plate member 951 was removed is illustrated, and FIG. 1
In 04 (b), the state in which the plate member 951 is attached is illustrated. Further, FIG. 104 (a).
) And FIG. 104 (b) show the closed state of the plate member 951.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body portion 953a, the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (FIG. 1).
04 (a) Left-right direction) Inclined surface 954 that inclines to the outside in the direction of gravity from the intermediate position
a, a recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protrusion 954c projecting at a connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a passage member 955. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in a row on the side surface.

The inclined surface 954a has a game ball flowing into the space between the pair of inflow ports 953j facing each other, and the inflow port 953j.
It is a rolling surface of a game ball that is rolled to the side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. As a result, the game ball flowing in between the opposite sides of the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j to the inflow port.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (lower side in FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a and receives the gaming ball, and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, the plate member 951
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (FIG. 104 (b).
) It is extended in a straight line in the vertical direction). As a result, the rolling surface 953a2 is changed to the rolling surface 953.
A game ball that rolls in the longitudinal direction of a2 (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the received game ball can be guided (flowed) to the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b has a width dimension L9 (FIG. 104) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2.
(B)) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in a state where the game balls are aligned. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, the plate member 9
It is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the 51, and to suppress the over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955).
It is formed with a downward slope toward. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the inflow direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955).
A second guide surface 954d1 is provided on the side.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and the rolling surface 95.
It is disposed between the longitudinal end of 3a2 and the passage member 955. As a result, the opening 953a
The game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of 1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and is projected toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the inclined surface 95
The rolling speed of the game ball that rolls 4a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a to the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is the side edge portion 954c3 on the concave portion 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the gaming ball on the inclined surface 954a of the gaming ball (the outward direction in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2). Formed at an angle to the side. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is set to the recess 954.
It can be decelerated before b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is increased, and the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Then, the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b and the second inclined surface 9
It is possible to suppress rolling up to 54e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, as described above, since the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction, when the plate member 951 is in an open state, it is formed. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (on the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Further, the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 is introduced to the plate member 95.
Since it can be brought into contact with 1, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball, the front of the recess 954b (
Immediately before), the rolling of the game ball can be decelerated to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 provides an opening 95.
It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of another game ball before closing 3a1.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downward inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 has an opening 953a1.
The game ball can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time while suppressing the jumping out from the.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed.
Since the risk of jumping out from a1 is low, the opening 953a is brought into contact with the guide surface 954c1.
By guiding to the first side, the second inclined surface 954e passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a.
It is possible to suppress the rolling up to, and to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed and decelerated reliably by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is extended in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the upright wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d has a protruding portion 95.
The second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface facing the 4c is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and the rolling surface 95 of the second side edge portion 954d2.
It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of 3a2. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 is placed on the second side edge portion 954d of the erection wall 954d.
It can be brought into contact with 2 to surely decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. as a result,
The plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line in the inclined direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d, and the rolling of the game ball guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball is pushed into the projecting portion 9
It can be brought into contact with 54c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c has a distance dimension L33 from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip (FIG. 10).
4 (a)) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the vertical wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time.
As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, and can suppress the over-winning.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) shows the specific winning opening unit 95.
0 is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a specific winning opening unit 95.
0 is a side view of 0 and the drive unit 960. FIG. 106 (a) shows the CVI of FIG. 105 (a).
FIG. 106 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960 in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). Is.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the solenoid 9 that operates the plate member 951 is shown.
A part of the wiring HS1 connected to the wiring HS1 connected to the 57a and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 610 operating the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) is shown in the illustrated state. In addition, FIG. 106 (
In b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown in the illustrated state.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the wing member 945 of the winning opening unit 930 (FIG. 83 (FIG. 83).
The drive unit 960 for driving a)) is a specific winning opening unit 95 when viewed from the front.
It is formed at a position where 0 and a part thereof overlap. From this, the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 9)
A space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the game area of 45).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a. And the plate member 951 that opens or closes the specific winning opening 65a, and the plate member 95.
A gaming machine provided with a second driving means for driving 1 is known. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first driving means and the second driving means have a pair of wing members 945 and a pair of wing members, respectively.
Since it is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 and the plate member 951, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 is
Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 (see FIG. 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space for a pair of feather members 945
It can be secured on the back side of (the second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit to be visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operating unit is normally (retracted) and is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60.
It is placed near the central opening where it is difficult for the player to see it and it is easy for the player to see it by projecting it inside the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 when it is movable (overhanging). By disposing the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 to be horizontally overlapped with the specific winning opening unit 950 located far from the central opening.
It is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, normal (evacuation)
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the movable body of the motion unit at the time. As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of feather members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, the two displacement members (plate member 951 and pair of wing members 94).
In the game board 13 provided with 5), since the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and drive unit 960) are arranged on the back surface of the side having a large projected area (plate member 951 side) in the front view, the respective drive means are provided. Can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and a space can be formed on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945).

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the drive unit 96 for driving the pair of feather members 945.
The drive unit 957 that drives 0 and the plate member 951 is in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (FIG. 10).
5 (a) Left and right direction) are arranged side by side. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) by the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of feather members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. This makes it easier to secure a space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the rear base. Since it is connected to 941, the front base 943 and the back base 94
At the same time as the action of fastening and fixing 1, the drive unit 960 is held by the front base 943 (
Can be arranged). As a result, the front unit 94 is attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13).
It is possible to prevent the drive unit 960 from being forgotten to be attached when the 0 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached.

Solenoid 957a of drive unit 957 and solenoid 610 of drive unit 960
Is set at substantially the same position at the end of the specified winning opening unit 950 on the opposite side (rear side) to the plate member 951 side, and is connected to the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 to be connected are connected from the end portion on the opposite side (rear surface side) to the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950. This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, game board 1
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) of No. 3, and the wiring HS1 and HS
It is possible to prevent 2 from interfering with other devices or accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 and the plate member 95 of the drive unit 960 that drives the wing member 945.
The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives 1 has a shaft portion 961b and a shaft portion 957.
The a2 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction is the same, and the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 9 are arranged.
Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the opposite sides of the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 of 57a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 95
It is possible to easily combine the wiring HS2 of 7.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity. As a result, a partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged.
The shape of can be simplified.

That is, the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a of the drive unit 957.
When the side surfaces of 1 are formed to have different sizes, or when both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are arranged at different positions in the gravity direction, the drive is driven. Since both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a of the unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the gravity direction, it becomes necessary to form a partition member according to the step, and the shape of the partition member becomes complicated. Become.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can be formed into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the tip thereof (insertion portion 96).
5e) is provided with a displacement member 966 that slides and displaces with the rotation of the transmission member 965 to open and close the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the second winning opening 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950, so that the second winning opening unit is correspondingly second. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106A and 106B, the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair on the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, the detection board SE of the detection device SE1 is used.
Since the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the 1b, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such a fraudulent act.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to find the illegality. There was a risk of being played.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953,
The ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951, and it is difficult for the clerk to detect the fraudulent use of the ball entry member 953.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the plate member 951 is closed so that the drive unit 960 can be the plate member 9.
Since it is shielded by the 51 and the location where the fraud has been added becomes invisible, it is particularly effective to be able to detect the fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same diversion (off-the-shelf product) as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls, the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices of the detection device SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the player's fraudulent activity cannot be notified to the clerk.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a route from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (disconnection) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easy. Alternatively, it is recognized that it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3.
It can be easy to deter cheating.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed to the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. By setting the fastening position of the above, the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented by the screw, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is a ring projection 953 of the ball entry member 953.
It is wrapped around c and placed. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened, and the drive unit 96 is opened from the open side of the ball entry member 953.
When fraudulently added to 0, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10
Since the detection failure can be recognized by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can easily notify the clerk of the error to detect the fraud.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shearing direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, wiring HS
When 3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction, so that the detection device SE1 and A force in the shearing direction acts on the connecting portion with the wiring HS. Detection device SE1
Since the connecting portion between the wiring HS3 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connection portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other has the detection device SE.
The wiring HS3 of No. 1 is formed at a position biased toward the end opposite to the discharge side. Therefore, since the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annulus projection 953c), the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, the plate member 951 is opened to open the specific winning opening 65.
When fraud is added to the drive unit 960 from a, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraud.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the throwing unit 970 is on the player side (game area side).
It is formed by including a distribution unit 980 having a space inside which a game ball can be inserted, and a passage unit 990 arranged on the side opposite to the game area of the distribution unit 980.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 of the above-mentioned winning opening unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, the game ball can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980.
The insertion holes 991a to the second insertion holes 991d are provided, and a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 can be received from the opening. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b).
) Is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 11
2 (a) is a distribution unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a).
112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 has a rear base 985 and a rear base 985.
The front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985 and the front base 98.
The distribution unit 983, which is rotatably arranged between 1 and the back base, and the back base 98.
A distribution portion 983 and a cover member 987 arranged at a corresponding position are mainly provided on the back surface side of the 5.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
A base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body, a plurality of openings (openings 985b to 985 g) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, and recesses in the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction. The recess 985h to be formed and the accommodating portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.
And a projecting portion 986e are mainly provided.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. Formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the dimension of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the opening 985
The b and the opening 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a position substantially at the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 109 (b)), and the position in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 109 (b)) is substantially the same as the openings 985b and 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is the opening 985b and the opening 9.
Similar to 85c, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 of the space opened on the front base 981 side and the front base 981.
It is mainly provided with a discharge passage 985e3,985f3 in a space that opens on the opposite side to the side, and an intermediate passage 985e2,985f2 that extends in the direction of gravity and communicates the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. To.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, a recessed portion 985f4 is formed which is recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and the detection device SE is viewed from the rear.
It is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of 3. Thereby, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.
It is set parallel to the extension direction of the detection hole SE1a and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the intermediate passage 985e2.
, 985f2 is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the space. As a result, the game ball is placed in the intermediate passage 9
When the 85e2,985f2 flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the gravity direction, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 have inflow passages 985e1,985f1 and discharge passages 98.
It is formed in series with the space of 5e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passage 985e2,985f
2 is formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, the intermediate passage 985e2,985
It is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of f2 in the direction of gravity. As a result, the back base 985
Can be suppressed from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed to a size that allows the game ball to pass through. also,
The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 have the third insertion holes 991c and the fourth passage unit 990 of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined.
It is connected to the insertion hole 991d. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). also,
Similar to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is the magnetic material 98.
It is set larger than the axial dimension of 8b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings.
Even when the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be very small due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings can be elastically deformed to dispose of the magnetic body 988b.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987 described later is inserted, and the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985 by screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the screw. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 98 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of 1d and a through hole 981c penetrating in the plate thickness direction on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion hole 981 g is a base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) of the thrown ball unit 970 in the assembled state.
It is a hole through which a screw (not shown) to be fastened to is inserted, and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular annular shape, and the bulging portion 982 described later is described.
Is formed as a pair in the lateral direction with a pair of hands sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed with the open portion of the semicircle facing substantially the center side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that the inner edge shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the first guide wall 981f and the second
The wall around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981 can be inserted.
f and the second guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981.
It is formed in the center of d. The second insertion hole 981e has a front base 981 and a back base 985.
Is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in the assembled state, and the front base 9 is formed.
The front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened by inserting a screw from the 81 side and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. also,
The through hole 981c is formed to include a side wall portion 981b that is erected along the edge portion on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)). Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 1 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60.
It is formed at a position overlapping with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the 40.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the vertical tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back surface base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erected tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c of the through hole 981c.
When the game ball is thrown to 1, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. The rolling surface 9 of the through hole 981c from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a.
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to 81c1 will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside the swelling portion 982, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. It is formed by including a throwing passage TR0, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at the inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. In addition, the inflow port 982d is
In a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60, the inner edge portion is formed at a position overlapping with the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 of the winning opening unit 930.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting on the opposite side to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and is the first when the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60. Recessed part 942g
The second protrusion 982d1 is in contact with the inner edge of 1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1.
The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side of the gravity direction of the throwing portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, the first ball throwing unit 94 is passed through the first winning opening 64.
When the game ball thrown into 2 g flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 9)
82) and the first throwing portion 942 g can be prevented from being pinched.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravity direction.

The erection wall 982a has a distance L36 in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982.
(See FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the game ball can pass are formed between the opposites.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is thrown to either side. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back surface base 985 side. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, the shaft member 988a is attached to the bearing portion 982c.
By inserting it into, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, one end side of the shaft member 988a is a bearing portion 985 of the rear base 985.
Since it is inserted into j, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j, and the other end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact with the action portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage T
The R1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d is flowed in, and the game ball that has flowed in is used as the back base 98.
It is possible to flow into the opening 985e of 5.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d is flowed in, and the game ball that has flowed in is used as the back base 98.
It is possible to flow into the opening 985e of 5.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. In addition, the recess 982 g
Inside, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
Is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, so that the distribution unit 980
Can be miniaturized.

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is the first
The game ball flowing down the passage or the second passage is formed so as to be acceptable, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is inclined and extended toward the back surface base 985 toward one side in the gravity direction. In addition, the inclined portion 98
2b has an opening 98 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined.
It is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from 5b. As a result, the first passage TR1 and the second passage
By bringing the game ball flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 into contact with the inclined portion 982b, the flowing game ball is opened 985b to 985.
It can be easily guided to the f side and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 have a recess 982h and a recess 982.
It is connected to j and the inclined portion 982b, and the standing tip surface is on the back base 985 side (FIG. 109).
(B) It is tilted downward toward (the front side of the paper). As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to be guided to the openings 985e and the openings 985f. It can be easily flowed into the openings 985e and 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portions 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided to the rear base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Furthermore, the inclined portion 982
Since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 pass through the front unit 940.
It becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball flowing down. Further, the opening 985e and the opening 98
When the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 is erected on the front side of 5f, the guide portion 982h1,
Due to the thickness of 982j1, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the opening 985
The game ball (the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) sent to e and the opening 985f can be easily visually recognized even in a state through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while being guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. A through hole 983c to be formed, an abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a contact portion 983d.
The wall portion 98 formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back base 985 side.
It is formed mainly with 3e.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back surface base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988
By inserting a into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the front base 981 and the back base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is performed in the first passage TR1 or the second passage T.
It is regulated by either one or the other of R2. Further, the intermediate plate 983b has a distribution unit 98.
By rotating 3 around the through hole 983c, the state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 is switched to the state in which the throwing of the game ball is restricted to the other of the second passage TR2.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the working portion 983a is connected to the contact portion 983d at the intermediate plate 98.
It is set on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of 3b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball thrown to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is the action unit 9
It is assumed that a load is applied to the 83a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and the through hole 98 is connected.
It is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of 3c. The wall portion 983e has a through hole 983c.
It is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the above-mentioned, and the thickness dimension is set smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Therefore, in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, the game ball thrown into the inside of the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d becomes the concave portion 9.
By being caught inside the 85h, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being obstructed.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b side at the radial outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet, and the magnetic body 9 disposed on the back surface base 985.
It is arranged in a state of repelling 88b. As a result, in the distribution portion 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985 to rotate around the through hole 983c as an axis, and the extending direction of the working portion 983a is one or the other. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic material 9 to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1.
It is possible to prevent 88c from coming out of the accommodating portion 983e1. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 is a magnetic material 9.
It can be magnetized on 88b and the magnetic material 988c to prevent it from staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and the recess 9 of the back base 985 is formed.
It is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of 85h. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above inside, and is set to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, as described above, with the magnetic material 988b housed inside the housing part 986b, the housing part 9 is stored in the first recess 987a.
By accommodating the tip of the 86b, it is possible to prevent the magnetic material 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b from coming out of the accommodating portion 986b.

The second recess 987b is a through hole 9 for fastening and fixing to the back base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess.
It is equipped with 87b1. Further, in the second recess 987b, the inner shape of the recessed portion is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 9
The 87 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, a screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (Fig. 113)
b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the through hole 9 is formed.
The intermediate plate 983b on the outer side in the radial direction from 83c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As mentioned above, the working part 983a
Since the connection position with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position with the contact portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b, the load of the game ball is first. It can act on the acting portion 983a on the passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the magnetic material 9
The repulsive direction of 88c is the second passage TR2 through the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c.
The state of acting on the side is switched to the state of acting on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 utilizes the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c.
The through hole 983c can be rotationally displaced about the axis. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, it is possible to maintain the rotated state of the distribution unit 983. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the tilting direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball and a third passage member 993 that is arranged in the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992.
And a detection device SE4 disposed between the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the side of the second passage member 992 with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a first insertion hole 9 thereof.
The second insertion hole 991b formed through the 91a on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction. Insertion hole 991d and a plurality of through holes 9 formed in a circular shape around the outer side in front view.
It is formed mainly with 91f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where 85 g and the internal space are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, in the second insertion hole 991b, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 85b are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be used as the distribution unit 9.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized operation from the outside in a state where the 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to suppress a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (left direction in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 85b are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be used as the distribution unit 9.
It is possible to prevent unauthorized operation from the outside in a state where the 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. 922
The sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 are mainly formed.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is a first insertion hole 9 of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
It is formed at a position where the internal spaces of 91a are connected. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

On the outer peripheral surface of the erection wall 992a, an engaging portion 992d projecting in the horizontal direction and a first passage member 9
It is formed with a projecting wall 992e projecting horizontally from the end on the 91 side. Engagement part 99
The 2d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and the tip of the 2d bends toward the third passage member 993. The engaging portion 992d is a detection device SE4, which will be described later, while facing the erection wall 992a.
And the wiring of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 is inserted. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE can be locked.
3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the vertical wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is a first passage member 99 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
The through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of No. 1 and the fastening hole 9 is formed.
It is located coaxially with 91g1. As a result, the through hole 992e from the second passage member 992 side.
The first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into 1 and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the second insertion hole 991 of the first passage member 991
The game ball passing through b can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extension direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning in which the detection device SE4 is arranged, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is thrown to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 is provided with an annular protrusion 992f projecting to the third passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular projection 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. Fastening hole 992
f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, in the first insertion hole 991a, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is a distribution unit 980.
And the opening 9 of the distribution unit 980 in the state where the passage unit 990 is combined.
It is formed at a position where 85 g and the internal space are connected. As a result, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, in the second insertion hole 991b, the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the second passage member 9.
It is formed with a downward slope toward the 92 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in front view. The third passage member 993
The seventh insertion hole 993a formed through the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, the guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and the second passage member 992 side from the other edge in the gravity direction. The erection wall 993e erected on the floor, the engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and the second passage member 99.
It is mainly provided with a recess 993c recessed in the side surface on the two side.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front view. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the guide wall 993b
Is that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (
The second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the side opposite to the 992 side. As a result, the 7th
The game ball thrown into the insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)).
The third passage member 993 can be arranged close to the erection wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the vertical wall 993e, when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 and the first wall portion 992c2 facing each other is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the sixth insertion hole 9
The game ball passing through the 92c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from fraudulently, the inside thereof is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c that positions the detection device SE4 on the lower side in the gravity direction on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball cannot be inserted.
Since 2 is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted is detected in the detection hole SE1a.
Can be easily inserted into.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. Bent part 993d
1 is a second passage member 992 and a third passage member 993 in a combined state.
The distance dimension between the passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is a through hole 993 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof.
It is provided with c1. As a result, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side to enter the fastening hole 9.
By screwing it into 92f1, the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 is formed.
And since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the second winning opening 140, the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) can be replaced and another unit can be arranged. It is possible to use another game form without affecting the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. FIG. 118 (a) is shown in FIG.
17 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line, and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is made of a colored translucent resin material. Also, the front base 19
The outer shape of the 81 is formed to be substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the distribution unit 980 is arranged and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with the specifications in which the exchange unit 1980 is arranged are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification, and the color schemes of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is the base plate 981 of the distribution unit 980.
It is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of a. Therefore, from the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 198
When the specification is changed to 0, the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) can be arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980,
It is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that only one game ball can pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be sent to the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The rear base 1985 has the outer shape of the distribution unit 980 in front view as the rear base 98.
An opening 98 that is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of 5 and communicates with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982.
It is formed with 5d and an opening 985g communicating with the internal space of the through hole 981c.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the base plate 1
Since the outer shape of the 981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, the distribution unit 980 can be easily replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specification change).

Here, a game including a ball entry unit formed with a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the entry unit with another entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the gaming board. can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the gaming board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d and the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are arranged in the first passage T.
Since the passage unit 990 connected to the R1 and the second passage TR2 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is provided. It is not necessary to secure it in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the game board 1
The space in front of 3 can be effectively used.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Also, the distribution unit 98
In order to make the 0 or the replacement unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential that the base plate 60 be formed from a light transmissive material, for example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate, or the base plate 60 may be formed. Attach the seal to. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the distribution unit 980 is passed through the front unit 940.
Alternatively, the game ball flowing down the inside (passage) of the exchange unit 1980 can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transmitting material) resin material, the front surface is formed. Through the unit 940, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980.
That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, in the distribution unit 980, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2
A detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the ball is arranged. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged for the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the exchange unit 1.
When changing to 980, since the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the exchange unit 1980, the second winning opening 1 is located at the same position as the distribution unit 980.
A side wall portion 981b for throwing a game ball flowing in from 40 is formed. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, the exchange unit 1980 is replaced with the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 93).
When arranging in 0), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the exchange unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same, so that the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a.
By positioning, even the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is misaligned (stepped) at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980.
Since the target portion can be positioned where the purpose is to suppress the occurrence of, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. can. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d are the second protrusion 982d formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g.
1 is placed. Further, the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b are the second throwing portion 942c.
981b of protrusions formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in
1 is placed.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 98 of the distribution unit 980.
The 1b is arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which communicates with the first passage of the first member. A gaming machine having two passages and a second member arranged on the back side of the gaming board is known. The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if a misalignment (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, a positioning hole for positioning each of these members is provided on the game board. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front unit 940 and the drive unit 9 are used.
When the 60 is arranged, a pair of second guide walls 942d of the front unit 940 are inserted between the facing portions of the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And prepare. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is a pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940.
It is located on the outside in the opposite direction of. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. The position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to prevent a positional shift (step) from occurring in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (Connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) is referred to the guide portion 962b (arm portion 9).
Since the direct positioning can be performed by 62e), the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, the front unit 940
Since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

As described above, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide unit 962b has a second ball throwing unit 942.
Since it is arranged (formed so that it can be held) on the front unit 940 provided with c, it is not necessary to separately attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the front and back of the game board 13, respectively. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can also be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the front unit 9 is arranged.
The projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the front unit 9 is attached to the base plate 60.
After attaching the 40 and the drive unit 960, it is not necessary to separately engage the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engageable with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged with the arm portion 962e. By mounting the drive unit 960 on the back surface of the base plate 60 after mounting the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the mounting operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and the arm portion 962e is in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined.
The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 of the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is a protrusion 94 of the pair of feather members 945.
The displacement member 966 into which the 5b is inserted is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 in the opening direction. Therefore, the sliding groove 9 of the displacement member 966 is formed by the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960.
The opening of 66a2 can be blocked from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are shown in FIG.
FIG. 119 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the CXXb-CXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). be. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member through which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 have the base plate 6 as described above.
It is fastened and fixed on both sides of 0. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (the left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is formed as a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, there is a gap K1 in the space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion. The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed linearly has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. Recess 8966 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122))
It is provided with a6 and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941.
When the displacement member 8966 is arranged on the front unit 940, the second winning opening 1 is inside the displacement member 8966.
40 is arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side of FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 122) and the other end side of the longitudinal direction (FIG. 12).
2 It is formed with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the lower side) to the back side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 122).

The protrusion 966a is a sliding groove 8966 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction.
A2 and the contact portion 966 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is provided with a1.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and is extended in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 is located on the other side in the gravity direction (gravity) on the lateral side in the lateral direction. It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (left-right direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction thereof is.
It is parallel to the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 94 is formed inside the recess 8966a6.
At least a part of 5b can be accommodated, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the recess 8966a6 to regulate the displacement of the protrusion 945b.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the wing member 945
The protrusion 945b can be extracted from the inside of the recess 8966a6. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be restricted that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with the protrusion 945b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965e has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b) are shown in FIG. 96.
Corresponds to (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engagement state during the displacement to is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 according to the eighth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and the tip portion 996 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
Rotating portion 96 connected to 5a and its tip portion 9965a and extended to the connecting member 964 side.
Formed from 5b.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a includes an insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the tip thereof and a rotary shaft 96.
It is formed with an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with 5c to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

The insertion portion 9965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, is arranged so as to be inserted through the inside of the connecting hole 966b1, and the end portion of the tip is the connecting hole. It is projected from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e has a connecting hole 9
Formed with an engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from 66b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion 965e1 protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. Will be done.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position so as to separate a slight gap from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the displacement member 9
When 66 is displaced in the direction of arrow Y (other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with each other to regulate the displacement of the transmission member 9965.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the connecting hole 966b1
One side contacted portion 966b2 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotary shaft 965c. Therefore, due to the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c, the contact surface 9965e4 is displaced by the displacement member 966.
Can be brought into contact with the front surface of. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is rotated before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965 is used.
It is possible to prevent e from coming into contact with the displacement member 966. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is connected to the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9
The rotation of the transmission member 9965 can be restricted by abutting against the 965e4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment has the insertion portion 9965e and the insertion portion 99 thereof.
With the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of 65e and the wing member 945 closed, the displacement member 966 is displaced and the insertion portion 99 is inserted into the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966.
When one side of 65e is brought into contact, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 96
6 can be engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the sixth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965
Described the case where the tip is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, but in the ninth embodiment, the tip of the insertion portion 10965e of the transmission member 10965 is the connecting hole 109.
Engage with 66b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124 (a) and 124 (b) show the drive unit 10960 according to the ninth embodiment.
And is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 10966. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, in FIG. 124 (a), the wing member 9
The closed state of 45 is shown, and in FIG. 124 (b), the open state of the wing member 945 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and the tip portion 10 extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610.
It is formed of 965a and a rotating portion that is connected to the tip portion 10965a and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a has a tip portion 10965a.
Insertion portion 109 inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later at the tip thereof.
It is formed to include 65e and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

The insertion portion 10965e has a connecting hole 10966 whose outer shape is a displacement member 10966 when viewed from the front.
It is formed smaller than the inner edge shape of b, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion bulging from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. Formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 is provided with a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap in the state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in front view. Second
The opening 966c is arranged in a state where the shape of the inner edge in the front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction.
A bulging portion 966b that bulges from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and a recess 10966d that is recessed on the opposite surface of the bulging portion 966b are mainly provided.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and is provided with the contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. Contacted surface 109
The 66d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and the contact surface 10965e of the transmission member 10965e is formed.
It is arranged so as to face each other with a slight gap between them. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is a contacted surface 1096 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.
It is formed radially inward from 6d1.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4
Is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other to prevent the rotation of the transmission member 10965 from being restricted.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 1096
5 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 1 of the transmission member 10965
Since the contacted surface 10966d1 of 0965e4 and the displacement member 10966 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotating shaft 965c, the contact surface 10965e4 is covered. It is displaced while maintaining a state of being separated from the contact surface 10966d1 with a slight gap. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, from the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 to the one side contacted portion 966.
Since the distance dimension between the facing surfaces up to b2 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, by rotating the transmission member 10965, the recess 1096 of the displacement member 10966 is formed.
The insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the 6d can be extended to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3 to slide and displace the displacement member 10966. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when the pair of feather members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the transmission member 1
The tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of 0965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1 to displace the displacement member 10966 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , The engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the engaging portion 10
The contact surface 10965e4 of the 965e3 is in contact with the contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contacted portion is provided. One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e is engaged with the other side contacted portion 966b3 in the gravity direction (bulging portion). When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the transmission member 10965 is in contact with the 965e1), the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without rotating. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, the wing member 94
It is possible to prevent 5 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engagement portion 10966e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 is slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 94.
5 can be opened.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, the displacement member 1196 according to the tenth embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 in the tenth embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the rolling portion 9 arranged between the facing portions of the second throwing portion 942c.
The tip position of 43a is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b has a first tooth surface 1194 of a gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof.
2b1 is formed. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 is set between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is a first gear GY1 pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966 described later.
Are toothed. As a result, the displacement member 11966 is displaced by sliding, so that the first gear GY1 meshing with the first tooth surface 11942b1 can be rotated.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the displacement member 11966.
It is formed by including a second member 11968 which is displaceably arranged in the first member 11967 and a first gear GY1 which is pivotally supported by the first member 11967 and meshed with the second member 11968. Tooth.

In the first member 11967, a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 is on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c.
In addition, a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966, and a second
It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction with the opening 966c interposed therebetween.

The support portion 11966d is projected from the first member 11967 side, and the tip thereof is the first gear G.
It is inserted into the shaft hole of Y1. Thereby, the first gear GY1 can be supported on the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected from the first member 11967 side, and its tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968
Can be arranged in the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126 (a)) and a second member thereof. 2 Sliding groove 11968b formed through the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) in a long hole shape in the plate thickness direction, and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on the end face extending to the plate.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are each meshed with the first gear GY1. Thereby, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slid and displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is rotated from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 119.
It is transmitted to 68, and the second member 11968 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is formed from the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the facing portions of the second throwing section 942c is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing section 942c. As a result, the end and blade of the rolling surface flowing in from the second winning opening 140 and 1196
With 8c, foreign matter inserted inside the second winning opening 140 can be cut.

According to the displacement member 1966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is in the open state, the first member 11 of the displacement member 11966
By displacing the 967 upward by the transmission member 965, the second member 11968 is displaced. The displacement amount of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount double the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, it is possible to allow the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), cutting an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 1) in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and the ball is passed through the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball.
With the game ball reaching (see 14), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. 1966 (second member 11968) is slide-displaced, and the blade portion 11968c is the rolling portion 9.
When crossing the passage of 43a and the second throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 11968c and pressed against the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c. At the same time, when the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, a thread is inserted between the blade portion 11968c and the edge portion of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c. Can be disconnected. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128, the displacement member 1296 according to the eleventh embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. note that,
The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 in the eleventh embodiment is
A pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set short, and the protruding tip surface is set at a position where the protrusion tip surface abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. Displacement.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, there are displacement members 129.
A first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting to the 66 side are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are the first gear GY described later, respectively.
It is inserted through the shafts of the 1st and 2nd gears GY2, and the 1st gear GY1 and the 2nd gear GY2 can be pivotally supported.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposite direction on one end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the gravity direction. The distance dimension between the facing portions of the pair of contact portions 12942b2 is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a second member 12966 disposed in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the rear base 94
It is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of No. 1, and its tooth surface is meshed with the first member 12967 and the second gear GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small diameter gear GY2a on the small diameter side and a large diameter gear GY2b on the large diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to accommodate the large diameter gear GY.
The tooth surface of 2b is meshed with the second member 12968.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 12966c is formed through the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 12967 has a second opening 12
On the other side of the 966c in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 and an annular ring on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching the second opening 12966c. The sliding protrusion 12966e projecting from the surface and the third gear tooth surface on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.
It is formed with a tooth surface of 12966f.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, in the second opening 12966c,
A second blade portion 12966c2 is provided on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of wing members 945 is closed, and the pair of wing members 945 is provided. 2nd blade part 12966 in the open state
c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip thereof is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12968. As a result, the second member 12868
Can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. This will result in
The first gear GY1 can be rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965. Also, as mentioned above, the first
The small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2 is meshed with the gear GY1 and thereby the second gear GY2.
The gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12968 is formed from a metal material into a plate-like body having a substantially H-shape in front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is located on the outer side of the pair of extending portions in the facing direction along the second tooth surface 12968a of the gear tooth surface and the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a (vertical direction in FIG. 128 (a)). The sliding groove 12968b is formed through the elongated hole in the plate thickness direction, and the blade portion 6683 is provided on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12968a. Therefore, by rotating the second gear GY2, the second member 12968 is slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 has the first member 129 due to the transmission member 965.
67 is rotated by being slidably displaced. Therefore, the second member 12868 is the first.
It can be displaced with the displacement of the member 12967.

The slide displacement direction of the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 is set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12968 is set via the second gear GY2 having a small diameter.
It is set large.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 1
2968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the rolling passages of the game balls of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c and rub each other's edges. The second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to be moved to the first member 12967 and the second.
Since the member 12966 (displacement member 12966) is provided, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and at the same time, the ball is passed through the rolling passages of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is removed from the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 66.
It can be sandwiched between 83 and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second member 12868 has a blade portion 6683 in a state where the wing member 945 is open.
Is arranged on the other side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is open, the first member 12967
The second blade portion 12966c2 of the above is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of feather members 945 is open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 make a second member.
Since it is possible to block the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the winning opening 140, the second member 12868
The displacement distance of can be made smaller than that of the second member 11968 in the tenth embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 is closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 has been described. The transmission of the drive from the solenoid member 945 to the wing member 945 is performed by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, FIG. 1
29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for ease of understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the main body 9
The pair of wing members 945 is closed when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the 61a, and the pair of wing members 945 is opened when the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. It is considered to be in a state.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the solenoid 61.
It is arranged in a state where the axis of the shaft portion 961b of 0 is oriented in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 has a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and a wing member 94 from the end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side.
It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j which is erected toward the protrusion 945b side of 5.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the engaging portion 1
The erecting dimension of the 3965j is set to a length exceeding the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945.
It is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, the engaging portion 13965j has a support portion 13965j having a substantially C-shaped side view at the erection tip thereof.
1 is projected. In the support portion 13965j1, the dimension between facing each other inside the opening is set to be larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the protrusion 945b. Further, the pair of engaging portions 13965j are opposed to each other (FIG. 1).
The width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in (29 (a) left-right direction) is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1
Can be arranged.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid and displaced in the gravitational direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid and displaced in the gravitational direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced along with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are the plate member 9.
Since it is arranged on the back surface side of the 51, a space can be formed on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957.
By consolidating the arrangement space on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members and devices on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 (second winning opening 140). , The space can be used effectively.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the displacement member 1496 according to the thirteenth embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the displacement Connecting hole 966b of member 14966
A case where the inner edge shape of 1 is formed sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) show the winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment.
It is a rear view of. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a cross-sectional view of CXXX of FIG. 131 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the line Ib-CXXXIb.

In FIGS. 130 (a) and 131 (a), the outer shape of the pair of feather members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 94 of the pair of wing members 945 are shown.
The open state of the pair of feather members 945 when 5b is cut is shown. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the displacement member 1 in the thirteenth embodiment.
The 4966 is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view, and has a second opening 9 at a substantially central position in front view.
66c is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 is provided on one end side in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) (FIG. 130 (a)).
A protruding portion 966a protruding from the upper side (upper side) in the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (a)) and a rear side (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) from the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)). ) Is provided with a bulging portion 14966b.

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (rear surface base 941 side) and is formed.
A horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. Connecting hole 149
The 66b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

In the connecting hole 14966b1, the shape of the inner edge in the front view is set to be substantially square, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be substantially square.
One side contacted portion 966b of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)))
2 and the other side contacted portion 96 of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 90 (a)))
6b3 and the like.

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a width dimension L4 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e from the separation distance L40 between the facing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2).
The dimension obtained by subtracting 1 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 (L40-L41). )> (L42-Diameter of the game ball). As a result, the displacement member 1496
When 6 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), it is the second at the edge of the displacement member 14966.
It is possible to block the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the winning opening 140.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusion 9 of the pair of wing members 945.
The case where 45b is cut will be described. As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e and the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the other side covering is formed. Insertion portion 965e into the contact portion 966b3
As shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), a pair of feather members 94 are brought into contact with each other.
When the protrusion 945b of No. 5 is cut, the displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the gap between the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L4).
Since 0-L41)> (L42-diameter of the game ball), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 is blocked by the edge of the displacement member 14966 when the displacement member 14966 is freely dropped. Can be done.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, the pair of feather members 945 is the sliding groove 966 of the displacement member 14966.
In the state of non-communication with a2 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), a part of the displacement member 14966 is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be restricted by the displacement member 14966. can.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the drive unit 15 according to the 14th embodiment.
960 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment.
132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13.
FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the 14th embodiment is
The first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged so as to face each other,
A solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 15962.
It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 that is pivotally supported by the accommodating portion 963 and is connected to the connecting member 964.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (upper side in FIG. 132 (a)) and a back base 9 from the covering portion 962a.
It is provided with a guide portion 15962b projecting to the 41 side (see FIG. 85).

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodation unit 962 and the second accommodation unit 963, which are formed in a box shape and are arranged facing each other, and the first accommodation unit 962 and the second accommodation unit 963. The solenoid 610, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the transmission member 9 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964.
It is formed mainly with 65.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a covering portion 962a that covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 and a back base 941 side (FIG. 85) from the covering portion 962a. A guide portion 15962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The guide portion 15962b is connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in the side view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and the wall portion 962f formed in the front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. The side opposite to the lining part 962a from 962f (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125))
), A second arm portion 15962j located on the other side of the pair of arm portions 15962e in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f, and a second arm portion sandwiching the wall portion 962f. 159
It is mainly provided with a third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of 62j.

The arm portion 15962e has a back base 941 from each of the facing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a.
It is formed into a substantially L-shaped side view that projects to the side (see FIG. 85) and bends the protruding tip side to the other side (opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in the direction of gravity. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of facing portions is set smaller than the width dimension between the facing portions of the pair of arm portions 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second arm part 15962
In j, the distance dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 facing each other in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are set.
Is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b in the combined state.

Further, in the pair of second arm portions 15962j, the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing sides in the horizontal direction of the side wall portion 981b. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the side wall portion 981b
It can be positioned by arranging the second arm portion 15962j inside the.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the second arm portion 1 is attached to the third arm portion 15962h.
A projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back base 941 side end of the 5962j is formed.

The projecting portion 15962h1 is a rear base 941 (FIG. 85) from the end of the second arm portion 15962j.
(See) The protrusion distance to the side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and the second recessed portion 94 is formed.
It is placed inside 2c1.

Therefore, the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b is
Since the game balls are formed at different positions in the passing direction, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side can be different. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Will be. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is the notch 1698 of the side wall 16981b.
It is arranged inside 1b2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.
The description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 13
4 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has a winning opening unit having an upright tip surface in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. 93
It is formed in a size that abuts on the tip of the second throwing portion 16942c of 0.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b is a recessed portion 16981 recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface.
It is provided with b2. The recess 16981b2 is formed at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface 981c1 in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the side view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. It should be noted that the rolling surface 981 of the through hole 981c from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a.
A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown to c1 will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the side wall portion 16
The inner surface of 981b on the erection base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, the recess 1698
It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing up on the concave tip surface of 1b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when the game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is thrown to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, the rolling surface 98 of the distribution unit 980 from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930.
It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow) to 1c1.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the rolling surface 9
Since the upstream end of 81c1 is formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side are different. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

Further, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 is located downstream in the rolling direction of the game ball.
16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the downstream end of the side surface of the second throwing portion 942c and the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a are brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. Can be done. That is, the upstream end of the side surface of the second throwing portion 942c is the rolling portion 94.
When the game ball is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of 3a, the second ball throwing portion 942c is formed until the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b. The protrusion 16942c2 can guide the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively weak rigidity and may be broken.
According to the embodiment, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, even if the protrusion 16942c2 is broken, the bottom upstream end and the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b are formed on the game ball. It is possible to maintain a state in which the positions are different in the passing direction, and it is possible to make the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom side and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by these steps on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly.
Can be made to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the recessed portion 1698 is formed on the protrusion 16942c2.
By abutting the side surfaces of 1b2, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the distribution unit 980 with respect to the rolling portion 943a in the upward direction in the gravity direction. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to restrict the position of the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b from being displaced above the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a in the direction of gravity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the end portions of the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in the side view. However, in the 16th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the 16th embodiment. In addition, FIG. 13
4 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment is the tip surface 1798 of the erecting tip thereof.
1b3 is formed with a downward inclination from the proximal end side toward the distal end side. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed by ascending and tilting along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 has the tip surface 1 of the projecting tip surface thereof.
The 7942c3 is formed by ascending and tilting along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a.
Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (Sixth embodiment), the side wall portion 1798
A game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of 1b can be slid along an inclination to prevent it from being bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having the recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be made gradual, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Then, with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137, the displacement member 1896 according to the 17th embodiment.
6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 135 (a). CX
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the XXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136
(B) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) shows CXXXVIIb-C of FIG. 137 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the XXXVIIb line.

It should be noted that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. In addition, FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a).
Only the pair of feather members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a rear base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the 17th embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and is a non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the direction of gravity and a non-transmission portion 1 thereof.
Transmission unit 18 that bends and extends from the lower end of 8966a6 in the direction of gravity to the center side in the left-right direction.
It is equipped with 966a7.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 is closed, the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 is moved to the rolling portion 94.
It is possible to regulate the inflow from 3a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the lower side on the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is,
When the pair of feather members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the 17th embodiment, the rotation range on the tip portion 965a side is set larger when the solenoid 961 is driven, as compared with the 1st embodiment. That is,
The displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896
The g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the opening of the second winning opening 140 can be arranged inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. The sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b is slid inside the transmission portion 18966a7 after the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6. In this case, the non-transmission unit 18966
Since the extension direction of the above and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the protrusion 945b
Slides the inside of the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without changing the position with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is the second winning opening 140.
The side surface on the front side is in contact with the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, so that the side surface is displaced downward in the gravity direction. Between the blade portion 18966 g and the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, as the movement is performed.
It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of wing members 945 is opened to the position where the pair of wing members 945 is closed. The edge of the passage (rolling portion 943a and second throwing portion 942)
Since the blade portion (18966 g) that rubs against the end portion of c) is provided, it is possible to cut the urging object illegally inserted into the passage through which the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140, and the game ball is passed through the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the 17th embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slidably displaced and the blade portion 18966 g crosses the passages of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 189 is in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball.
When 18966 g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with 66 g and pressed against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, 1
A thread can be cut between 8966 g and the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the displacement member 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140.
The through hole 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the player has a pair of feather members 9
When the 45 is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 has a coil spring SP1 (FIG. 9) on the solenoid 961.
4), the tip portion 18965a side is urged in a direction of being displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 is forcibly released by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotation axis direction (the driven member 163 is displaced). It may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the direction intersecting the plane to be driven).
In this case, a frictional force is generated with the driven member 163, and the frictional force causes the driven member 1 to be driven.
63 can be decelerated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulation unit 175 or the upper regulation unit 176 is driven by the driven member 163.
It is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and is arranged to face the driven member 163 in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated, and the driven member 163 at other timings. It may be configured to retract outside the displacement locus of. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driven member 163 may be arranged at an overlapping position in the displacement direction view, or the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis side of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating portion 175. Is also good.

Further, not only when the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating shaft of the driven member 163, one of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 is on the left side and the other. May be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 exerts an electromagnetic force in the direction of pulling up the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force that pushes it up. Further, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting means 181 is composed of the LED has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a miniature bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-damping resin member may be filled in the region between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the placement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180.

On the contrary, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 may be closed, and the filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect of oscillating the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 in accordance with the vibration of the illuminated substrate 180. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a punching metal may have a plurality of through holes.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is formed in the shape of a thin plate has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in the front view, it is possible to prevent the plate portion of the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized while exposing the light emitting means 181 in the front view. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or may be transmitted by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in the vertical direction with respect to the horizontal direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the long hole portion 406 is a long hole long in the horizontal direction has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends at an angle with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of pinnate members 460 abut against each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide a slight gap from the design stage. As a result, the fatigue accumulated due to the contact with the feather-shaped member 460 can be eliminated as compared with the case where the feather-shaped members 460 come into contact with each other. Therefore, the feather-shaped member 4
The durability of 60 can be increased. It should be noted that the pattern formed on the back surface side of the gap or the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player through this gap.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by adjusting the gear ratio by making the size of the arcuate gear 462 of the pinnate member 460 different on the left and right, the pair of pinnate member 460
The displacement amount and the displacement speed may be different. As a result, a pair of pinnate members 460
Even when the shapes of the sides that come into contact with each other are symmetrical, the contact surface S1 can be displaced from the left-right center position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate member 460 at the time of contact is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, most of the parts may be symmetrical, but may be partially different. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, the pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the shapes of the pinnate member 460 are symmetrical, it is possible to make the player think that the pinnate member 460 constitutes a symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 in contact with each other are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pair of pinnate members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction and come into contact with each other. In this case, the wing-shaped member 460 on the left side can be formed in a larger area than the wing-shaped member 460 on the right side in comparison with the shape of the back case 310.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pinnate member 460 and an invariant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape in a front view. As a result, the pinnate member 4
Since the shape completed by only 60 and the shape completed by other predetermined members and the pinnate member 460 can be visually recognized by the player, the effect of the pinnate member 460 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 reminds us of the concept of "shellfish and pearls" has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into the wall, and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be configured to have a shape representing the momentum of a bullet. In this case, the shape of the pinnate member 460 is diverted, and it can be realized by forming the light emitting effect member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 with different members having different shapes or decorations. That is, it is possible to newly configure another operation unit by diverting a part of the members, so that the development cost can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slidably displaced in the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 444 of the auxiliary arm member 444.
The elevating plate 430 may be configured so as to be axially supported by fixing the arrangement of d, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable in an arc orbit centered on this axis.

Further, when the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, the elevating plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the displacement in the left-right direction of the arcuate gear portion 444b can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing an urging means or an electromagnetic solenoid for urging the relative displacement member 442 on the arcuate gear portion 444b side in the left-right direction, the tooth engagement between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

The arcuate gear portion 444b may not be made of a highly rigid resin material, but may be made of a flexible resin material used for a gear belt or the like. In this case, the deformation of the material can absorb the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the window portion defined in the central portion of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 is configured to have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shape inside the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the pinnate member 460. As a result, the game board 13 can be provided with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmission hole 60c has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the illuminated substrate 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, since the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow bottom component 91 can be brought close to each other, the outer portion 94 is formed to be thin so that the outer portion 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform an effect of making (wavy).

In other words, the portion displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 to be visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 but also outside the window portion. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the recessed portion of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the lower left and right sides of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of the game ball, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed of a resin material having less bending (high rigidity resin material) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed of a rubber resin material. In this case, due to the elastic deformation of the partition member 708, the partition member 708 can be brought into close contact with the illuminated substrate 705 and the thin film cover member 712, and light leakage can be prevented.

In the first embodiment, the position where the left and right load members 761 come into contact with the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance between the reference O1 are the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the left and right, the load member 7
The position where the 61 abuts on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be different from the reference O1.
The arrangement of the load member 761 with respect to the reference O1 may be different on the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the load member 761 may be displaced to the front side so that the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 come into contact with each other. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced toward the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the arrangement of the load member 761 can be returned to the back surface side by the load applied from the front lid member 770.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the flexibility of the load member 761 is changed by a method such as changing the density (locally), changing the thickness, or changing the material of the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. As a result, the left and right drive units 76
When 0 is set to the one-sided excitation state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped can be changed depending on which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven. That is, the plate-shaped displacement member 7
It is possible to increase the posture in which 30 can be stopped.

Even if the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical configuration on the left and right, the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is asymmetrical (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side). The same effect can be achieved by providing an extra wall thickness on the lower bottom side).

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be vertically displaced while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. Thereby, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state in which the load member 761 is easily bent (posture) and a state in which the load member 761 is hard to bend (posture).

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d can be assembled to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c in an assembling manner such as fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, and sandwiching, so that the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be assembled. And may be composed separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c can be diverted and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced. In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are plate-shaped displacement members 7.
Although the case where the position is displaced in the rotation axis direction of 30 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a can be orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The change in the spacing between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be changed by the hollow member 740.
It can be used to change the holding force of the hollow member 740 instead of changing the posture of the hollow member 740.

That is, the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed by increasing the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It can be used to sandwich from. Therefore, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, the clearance of the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be configured to be the same as the clearance of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear projecting columnar portions 743 also increases, the posture of the hollow member 740 is higher than that in the case where the side having a large clearance is allowed to rotate with the side having a small clearance as an axis. It is possible to easily suppress the change.

In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portion 735 supporting the pair of projecting columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 is separately arranged before and after the reference O1 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be slidably displaced in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove in a direction inclined with respect to the slide direction. In this case, by providing the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b on the opposite sides to the slide direction, the protruding columnar portion 743 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are provided with the slide displacement. The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pivotally supported and displaced by the left-right direction axis has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a mode in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can rotate even in the front-rear direction axis (for example, a support mode with a ball joint).

Further, on the upper side of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (
A long plate configured in the left-right direction) may be supported so as to ride as a separate body. in this case,
Depending on the drive mode of the drive unit 760, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation of the left-right axis and rotation of the front-rear axis.

Further, the shaft support portion may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is long in the vertical direction so as to allow the vertical displacement of the shaft-mounted support portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, the plate-shaped displacement member 73
Not only the rotational movement of 0, but also the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right axial support portions 731 with respect to the other (corresponding to the rotational displacement around the axis in the front-rear direction).
Therefore, the displacement modes of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 due to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the core material extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes with the displacement of the load member 761. (It may be configured so that the core material comes off). In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes depending on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent along with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, the case where one of the portions for decelerating the driven member 163 is configured to be displaceable has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driven member 16
Both of the portions that decelerate 3 may be configured to be displaceable. In this case, both of the decelerating portions (lower regulation unit 175 and upper regulation unit 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, the case where the urging spring SP21 does not directly hit the driven member 163 but applies an urging force via the contact member 2190 between them has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the urging spring SP 21 may be configured to come into direct contact with the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the urging spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a plurality of contact points between the urging spring SP21 (s) and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points may be located on the rotation shaft side and the rotation tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment, by extending the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 in the displacement direction of the elevating plate 430, a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the elevating plate 430 is configured. The case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the section is cut off has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a section in which a sliding portion (an angle region where the gear teeth do not mesh) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441 so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. May be configured to block the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotary gear 3441 with an arm is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed all around, but a partially overhanging portion is formed so as to be able to function as a cam, and the overhanging portion gives a load to the relative displacement member 442. This may be configured to displace the relative displacement member 442. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhanging portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured for detecting the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g which is a part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick overhanging portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjusting member 5782 projects upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjusting member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening is formed inside the wall of the load member 761, and the adjusting member 578 is formed in the opening.
2 may enter and function as a core. In this case, the flexibility of the load member 761 can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjusting member 5782.

In the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the load member 761 has an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.
The case of being driven by is described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the load member 761 may be configured by a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to the instantaneous drive mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape as a rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in an irregular shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is curved, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to form an inner wall and a protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 94
When the gap between the protrusion and the 5b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the amount of the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966, whereby the sliding groove 966a during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 is performed.
The gap between the inner wall of 2 and the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extended length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lightening amount due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 and improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966.

In the sixth embodiment, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other.
The case where the screw screwed into the ball is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the screw may be used to fasten and fix the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is formed so as to project in an annular shape has been described.
It is not always limited to this. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (direction away from the axis of the annular projection 953c in the radial direction).

In the sixth embodiment, the game area (front) of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980.
The case where the side is visually recognized by the player has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
A sticker on which information consisting of characters or figures is displayed may be attached to the game area (front) side of the distribution unit 980.

In this case, the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR of the distribution unit 980
Since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of 2, even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized through the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the display is marked (). As a reference position), the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player. The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is replaced with the first member 11967 and the second member 11.
Although the case where the blade portion 11968c is formed from the two members of 968 and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967, the present invention is not limited to this. The displacement member 11966 is formed from one member, and the one member (displacement member 1196) is formed.
The amount of displacement by the transmission member 965 of 6) may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 is closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. for example,
When the pair of wing members 945 is closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. Drive unit 960 (solenoid 6) for cutting illegal objects (threads)
It can be performed by using the electromagnetic force of 10). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using the electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961 of the drive unit 960
The coil spring SP1 is arranged between the coil spring SP1 and c in a compressed state, and power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a, so that the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body 961a (the shaft 961b is the main body). Although the case of being drawn into the inside of the part 961a) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using the electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. for example,
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are other pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 181 and an eighteenth embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 138 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighteenth embodiment, FIG. 139 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 140 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 138, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 138) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 139) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 138) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 138), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 138) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 139) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball lending is performed according to the operation. Will be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change of electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back side of (see 138). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 138) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 139.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 141) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 139) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 139) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 139) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low-probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable nor shortened (
Neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol has increased).

During probabilistic change or shortening of time, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is released is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the time for opening the electric accessory 640a and the number of times for the electric accessory 640a to be opened at one time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used.
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 141), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 141), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 has an electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variation display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”).
Is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed by using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 141), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. (See FIG. 141), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, it should be noted that
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls are paid out to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a prize paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is the second winning opening 6
It will be easy to win a prize in 40.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of a big hit lottery by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a attached to 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640. , It is advantageous for the player.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 148) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 140, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each substrate.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and it is possible to remove the sealing sticker in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 141) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11 is provided.
No. 2 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
7A, 37B, the display setting in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device, and the like, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). The RAM 203 retains data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 205
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display device 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as the axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like.
A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, is connected to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erasure signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power supply is cut off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
It is connected to 11, but not to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off ().
The firing solenoid is excited according to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the display content is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
The display of 1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 140). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, a power failure (power failure) (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 on the determination that the power is cut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are NMI.
The interrupt process (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 142 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 142, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 138).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertip on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 144).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with his left hand.

143 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 143 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 143 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 144 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 144 (a).

In FIGS. 143 and 144, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 143 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 144 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 144, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press a button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 139).

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to operate by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to forcefully drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

With reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described. 145 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow VIII directional view of FIG. 143, and FIG. 146 is a front perspective view of the operating device 300 in the arrow IX directional view of FIG. 144. In addition, in FIGS. 145 and 146, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 146, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it becomes invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i is gradually increased in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, and the LED device 341f (FIG. 3) is arranged inside the operation device 300 accordingly. Since the amount of light in (see 149) is gradually increased, the difference in the amount of light (degree of lightness and darkness) that the player can see between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the first state and the second state are displayed. The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 144) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. FIG. 147 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 147, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state lower the tilting device 310. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, etc. on the outside of the lower frame member 320, the inner region of the lower frame member 320 is largely used for tilting. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. As a result, a large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 149 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 150 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operating device 300. As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 149) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining the push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged facing each other and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. To the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and the arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. It mainly includes a drive device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and protects the drive device 340 by covering the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member having a mode in which the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 which is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end portion on the back side of the above, and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, which is a tilting device 310. The lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from the lower side, the left side detection sensor 324L arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the bottom plate portion 321 horizontally at the center position in the left-right direction. It mainly includes an opening 325, which is an opening opened by scraping a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a plurality of openings so as to determine the moving end of the tilting device 310 by abutting with the tilting device 310, and the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321 through the openings. To.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right on the left and right of the opening 325. It mainly includes an insertion hole 321c that is formed symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. By arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR protruding from the detection hole 321b in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to have a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the drive device 340 is operated. A through hole is formed to a position where interference with the 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape extending upward from the upper surface thereof and having an open portion on the front side in the cross section. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distances (positions of the detection grooves) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 are the same on the left and right sides.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 154 (b)), the drive device 341f passes through the opening 325 and then the drive device. By pushing the 340 upward, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is compared with the vertical width including the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extending portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be separable in the vertical direction and is configured to cover three directions except the front side, and is a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351 thereof. The voice coil motor 352, which is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and the vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, the left side detection sensor 353L, which is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and the right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 149 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the center of the left and right visible.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). As a result, when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of the drive device 340
The 44R is arranged in such a manner that it is arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and it is possible to detect that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by the 3Rs.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. 151 (a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 151 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 151 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus 310 in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 152 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 153 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the tilting device 310 has a mode in which a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and upper and lower openings and a lid on the upper opening of the case main body 311 are covered. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. A ring shape that inseparably fixes the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312. Mainly includes a ring member BR1.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the spring, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. And the insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 are arranged at a position where they can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 152), and a stretch extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311h and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and a protective lens member 311i formed of a light transmissive material, and a bottom plate portion. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j that is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20 on a surface.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 154 (b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the drive device 340. To prepare for.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are the portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL. However, the overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In this embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 159) to the push-in end (FIG. 159). The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 160).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and projects to a position where it is locked to the opening portion 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). Consists of aspects.

Since the protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape in the top view (see FIG. 151 (a)) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 151 (c)), the player can use it. The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 166), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321a and its tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 153, the lid 312 has a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b having the top plate member 312a. It is mainly provided with a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 143).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 143), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical due to its positional relationship. While staying inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 144), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is configured to have a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer end portions of the twisted portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. 154 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 154 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 154 (a), and FIG. 155 is a side view of the drive device 340. It is a front view exploded perspective view of.

As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 that constitutes a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam) fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 and the transmission shaft rod 343 so as not to rotate. 344R), the arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second of the disc cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. The release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhanging portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, the rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and that moves relative to each other with the rotation of the release member 346, and the rotary claw member 347 are tilted down. A torsion spring-like first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of causing the force to separate from each other between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. It mainly includes a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is a motor accommodating portion 3 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above by being bent rearward on the left and right sides.
A shaft support hole 341b that is bored at the same position of the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a and the plate portion that is arranged to face each other and supports the disk cam 344, and a shaft parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. The shaft portion 341c is projected in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, the extension portion 341d extending from the motor accommodating portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and the motor. Lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the accommodating portion 341a
Mainly includes e and an LED device 341f arranged at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source inside.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and is a portion that refracts light (a portion).
A part that refracts light) is provided. This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light of the LED device 341f both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 has a motor accommodating portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor accommodating portion 341a.
A fixing member 342a to be fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored in a perfect circle shape at one end, and is bored in a rectangular shape at a shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by a connecting pin 344d of a disk cam 344 and at the other end. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 152) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 155) is fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotary gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b. Mainly prepared for.

The cylindrical member 343a is a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2 are provided, and the right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
The 43c is formed to have a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
The movable clutch 343c is provided with a clutch portion 343b2 in which irregularities along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
It is provided with 43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged opposite to the transmission gear 343b and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. ..

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It consists of a mountain-shaped convex and concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged with each other. Therefore, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. This makes it possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 155) by rotating the drive motor 342.

The movable clutch 343c is usually a transmission gear 3 due to the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arranged at a position close to 43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along 43a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. 157. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R have a substantially mirrored shape, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR, so only the left disk cam 344L. The description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

157 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 155, and FIG. 157 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. 155. be. Note that FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG. 155.

As shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is a member at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. The engaging rib 344c, which is convex inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and has a portion protruding radially outward at two points, and the outer side between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the direction and is connected to an arm member 345 (see FIG. 155), and a detection hole 344eL which is formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 156), and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 155). It is composed. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 155) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, the misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c protrudes outward in the radial direction at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated from the angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and the angle θ3 from the second overhanging portion 344c3 (angle in the present embodiment). θ3 = 20 °) Mainly provided with a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a displaced position.

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 159). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. 158. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

158 (a) and 158 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. Note that FIG. 158 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 172).

As shown in FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b), the release member 346 has a shaft support hole 346a formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155). From the convex pin 346b having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a and protruding in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion overhanging at the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is a portion configured to be in contact with the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 157) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 147). In the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 155) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b is bored along along the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 so as to be able to guide (the convex pin 346b is bored with a size including the movement locus inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. It is possible to insert the insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 155). It is mainly provided with a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 158 (a), the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 158 (a)) with respect to the rotary claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engaging portion is When a load in the push-up direction is applied to the 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 158 (b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 159 to 161, an operation example in which the player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

159 to 161 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 159 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 160 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 159. Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 160 to the first state is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 159 to 161 show an example of a player's hand in which the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit.

As shown in FIG. 159, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 159) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 159, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 148).

As shown in FIG. 160, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 160). In this state, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 159 and the state shown in FIG. 160 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. The return of the spring is not in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 155), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and the space cannot be saved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in. To.

As shown in FIG. 161, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 160 in the extension direction, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. This will result in
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 167. 162 to 167 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a).

Note that FIG. 162 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 163 shows that the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the posture has changed is shown, and FIG. 164 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 163 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 returns. A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown, FIG. 166 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 165 to the terminal position, and FIG. 167 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 165, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 164 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 166, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 162, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 163, from the state shown in FIG. 162 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 163). When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346, so that the disengaging member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 163). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 34 of the engaging rib 344c.
Since the disc cam 344 is maintained until it faces the 6d, the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 163).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 162 and 163, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 164, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, Due to the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 164), and the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 6). Return to the state shown in 162). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 164), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG. 163.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area visible from the player's point of view of the protective lens member 311i increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can be irradiated in the front direction (direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 165, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 165) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 165), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 165, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 165) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 165).

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See Fig. 162). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 165, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 165, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 165, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 165 to the end of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 166) and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by subsequently pushing the tilting device 310, the rotating claw member 347 becomes the tilting device 310. Return to the engageable position (rotate in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 165. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 166, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 161), and the purpose is to vibrate the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 167, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, it is determined whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing when the tilting device 310 is pushed.
Only the player who pushed the tilting device 310 into operation can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means.
As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 167, from the state shown in FIG. 166, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward until the second overhanging portion 344c1 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the disengaging member 346 (FIG. 166 counterclockwise). By rotating the drive device 340 by a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction), the drive device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 166, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 166), and the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d and then rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 166 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 162. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 166) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 171, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (the tilting operation). The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (fanning operation) of reciprocating up and down through the second state.

168 to 171 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). In FIG. 168, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 167, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 168). In FIG. 169, the state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state from the state shown in FIG. 168 is shown, and in FIG. 170, the state shown in FIG. 169 is shown. A state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates is shown, and FIG. 171 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 170. Further, in FIG. 170, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 169 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 171 an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 168, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be moved up with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 169, the posture of the disk cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 168 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). The 310 can be placed in a posture in which it can be arranged in the second state (a posture in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state shown in FIG. 167, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 170, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. By repeatedly rotating the tilting device 310 (clockwise in FIG. 169), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 170. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 170, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 170) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. It can be expanded not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 170).

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 170 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 165. That is, in the present embodiment, as an aspect of the vertical movement of the tilting device 310, two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), that is, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 165 and the vertical movement shown in FIG. 170, are tilted by the rotary claw member 347. This can be done immediately after the restriction on the ascending movement of the device 310 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to make two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big hit) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time, and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 169, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 170, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion). The 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 170, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 171) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotary claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. 170 (see FIG. 171), the tilting device 310 is put into the first state. Can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 172 to 174, an operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state after the push-in operation by the player without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the rotary claw member 347 will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

172 to 174 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 172 illustrates a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. 171. In FIG. 173, after the rotary cam 344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) more than the state shown in FIG. The state of rotation (counterclockwise in FIG. 172) is shown, and in FIG. 174, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. 173 to detect the left side of the protective cover device 350. The state in which the sensor 353L is turned on is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 172 to 174, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 171) from the state shown in FIG. Contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. It stays and the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 172.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172) from the state shown in FIG. 172 to disengage the engagement rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotary claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 172, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 172), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 172). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 173, but the disk cam 344 goes through the second initial state shown in FIG. 173. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is possible to perform a vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2 as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. be.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the restriction by the rotary claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 may be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on in the state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 173) from the state shown in FIG. 173. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 174, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350 is used. (See FIG. 151) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the tilting device 310 does not ascend due to the player's hand being placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 173 to the state shown in FIG. 174. The change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 172 to 174, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 152) is maintained in the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 168) from the state shown in FIG. 173, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 173. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) can be extended.

With reference to FIGS. 175 and 176, measures for preventing destruction of the drive device 340 will be described. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. 176 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 175. In addition, in FIG. 175, the player's hand that grips and fixes the tilting device 310 in the state where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 176, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 175, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state of FIG. 175. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) starts to rotate, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) may break down. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate idly with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, whereby the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are used. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be disengaged, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. This makes it possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, for example, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c are out of phase. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
By detecting that the state has been reached, it is possible to specify that the drive device 340 has reached the first initial state, so that the control of the drive motor 352 is restarted with that state as the initial position (of the drive motor 342). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a realigned state. It can be performed.

As a result, the drive motor 342 is used when the tilting device 310 is operated to produce an effect.
It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform the effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 176, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

177, 178, 179 and 180 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 177 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175, and FIG. 178 shows a state in which the disk cam is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 177. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW is shown. Further, in FIG. 179, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 175 is shown, and in FIG. 180, the disk cam is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 179. The state in which the 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW is shown.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 177. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 179.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in such a manner that it separates from the release member 346 from the state shown in FIG. 179 to the state shown in FIG. 180, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the release member 346, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case, the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotary claw No load is generated in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operation from FIG. 175 to the first state shown in FIGS. 177 and 179 both appear to be the same operation, and the subsequent movement after the first state is reached. Will be different in either FIG. 178 or FIG. 180.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by the control of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176), but the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in the change, the player may notice the mode of control being performed, and the player may be aware of the effect to be performed, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 175 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is Since the direction is different only, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, the player confirms whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state, so that the player can produce the effect. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player can see the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 175) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. You can make them watch over.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 176) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the burden given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. This can improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotary claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a). In addition, in FIG. 181, a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 181) from the first initial state (see FIG. 162) of the drive device 340 is shown, and the first state is shown. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 181) at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by an imaginary line. ..

As shown in FIG. 181, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 engage with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 181) as the posture of the release member 346 changes. Even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated by the player in the case of vertical movement, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is in the first state (rotation) when the player releases the hand. It is possible to carry out an operation mode in which the claw member 347 moves upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. 181. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the movement was performed or the movement was performed up and down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide a lot of timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the nineteenth embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183.

182 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the 19th embodiment, FIG. 182 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 182 (c) is a release member 2346. It is a side view.

183 (a) and FIG. 183 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

FIG. 183 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 rotates with respect to the release member 2346 to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 183 (b) shows the release member 2346. The small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 rotates due to contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 185).

As shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 184) has a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and rotation thereof as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 184). With the slide claw member 2348, which is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 184). , Mainly prepared. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those of the eighteenth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. The hook-shaped portion 2348b is projected in a hook shape toward (left side of FIG. 182), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 184 (a) in the vertical direction of the paper surface). Mainly a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is replaced with the rail portion 2.
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the eighteenth embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that is attracted to the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotating plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 183), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
As the 6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d becomes the functional elongated hole 23.
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, and the like.
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotated on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on a shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184) in a state of being arranged at the terminal position (183 counterclockwise).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 184). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with the convex pin 2348d inserted through the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be supported. It is possible to suppress wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length composed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 183, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. Slide to move.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also slows down.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 may slide and move due to the rotational operation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. It doesn't move. Therefore, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

184 to 186 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 184 shows a state in which the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is arranged below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. 185 shows the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 184. Is shown in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 184) and the engaging portion 346d of the disengagement member 2346 is pushed up. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated clockwise) and returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 184, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will never be done.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by a magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 185). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is lifted (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 186, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 185) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the eighteenth embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the movement mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be used. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 185, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. Since the tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310, the tilting device 2310 can be applied to the tilting device 2310 by ensuring a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. The load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, lift the player's hand in the state shown in FIG. 185. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in an embodiment.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the ascending direction (force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be noticed. Can be improved.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the twentieth embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. To. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the twentieth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 187, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311 gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311 gL in the 18th embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and opposite to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR, and its extension length is shorter than that of the left side detection piece 311 gL in the 18th embodiment.

188 (a) and 188 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 188 (a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 188 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed in. Further, in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R. None (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, while the right side is inserted. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. Left side detection sensor 324L is OFF and right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

189 (a) and 189 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. Note that FIG. 189 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 189 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. .. Further, in FIGS. 188 (a) and 188 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 189 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the push end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L. , The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the state of being changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to give an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is moved to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. It is possible to effectively give a load for raising the tilting device 3310 by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is operating ascending rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155), the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly strikes the tilting device 3310, the ascending motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous striking operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably performed.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the 21st embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the 21st embodiment. As shown in FIG. 190, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection groove (slit) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 191) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

19 (a) and 191 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300 showing the pushing-down operation of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 191 (a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 191 (b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 191 (a), and the front detection piece 4311k is detected on the lower side. The state in which the sensor 4321e has passed downward is shown. Further, in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each detection is performed. Sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 191 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 191 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor. It passes through 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 becomes high. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the push-in end, and decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform a gentle pushing operation, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval at which the voice coil motor 352 is switched between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the timing interval described above is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled by driving.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against the force, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the push-in end can be applied. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 overhangs below the lower frame member 4320. It is controlled by pushing the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 to the side close to the tilting device 4310 in advance.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is being pushed out during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the voice coil motor 352.

192 (a) and 192 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. Note that FIG. 192 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 192 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. ..

Further, in FIGS. 192 (a) and 192 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them is shown. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 192 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is projected and convex while the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction as in a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 192 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, the state shown in FIG. 192 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 192 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 192 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310 after pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to produce a vibration effect.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 205.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 by vibrating the voice coil motor 352 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 in the 22nd embodiment is attached to the lower frame member 5320. The drive motor 5411 for rotating the weight member 5412 whose center of gravity is eccentric is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

FIG. 193 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating device 5300 according to the 22nd embodiment, and FIG. 194 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 and the drive device 340 is the drive device 5340, as compared with the operation device 300 in the eighteenth embodiment. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the 18th embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibrating device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 195 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 195, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is composed of a flexible material. The flexible member 5420 and the flexible member 5420 are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 are separately accommodated and are fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. Mainly equipped with 5430.

The transmission device 5410 has a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft overhangs.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side of the insertion side, and the main body portion 5421 in the assembled state. A pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 that are convexly provided on the left, right, left, and right sides in the radial direction, and a rib-shaped leg portion 5422 that is projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintenance part 5423 in which the fixing part 5411a is embedded
And a convex leg portion 5424 which is convexly provided in a pair of columns upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth configured at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the left and right sides is larger than the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 because the posture maintaining portion 5423 is arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is convex in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in the contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310
The resolution of the degree of deformation of 20 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 is adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and the first accommodating portion 5431 thereof, and the weight member 5 is provided.
The second accommodating portion 5432 in which 412 is accommodated, and the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the 432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is the flexible member 54 until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom.
When the 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load release state), the depth is set so that the convex leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. To.

196 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 196 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a). ) Is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 196 (a). In FIG. 196 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 196 (a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region are pushed into the player by three degrees from the first state. The end area S52, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the end position of the push, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to secure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left and right (tilting to the left and right on the paper surface in FIG. 196 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 196 (b).

As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d into which the convex leg portion 5424 can be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 and facilitate the translation of the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 196 (b)).

197 (a) and 197 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 on the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 196 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 197 (a) illustrates the assembly load release state, and FIG. 197 (b) shows the convex leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 196 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 is shown. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembled load release state, and when the assembled load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion are formed. As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194). The elastic restoring force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is pushed back. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 194) can be mitigated. Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without a time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 194), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 175). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is ascended only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, the vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the accommodating member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced vertically due to the deformation of the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422. Consists of acceptable aspects.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and is uniformly spaced from the central axis to the left and right. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, the radial outer ends of the rib-shaped leg 5422 move outward on the left and right (at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422) as the flexible members 5420 move downward. It deforms in a manner of moving to the one with the smaller resistance) (see FIG. 197 (b)). In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is partially applied by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

198 (a) and 198 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 196 (a).

FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 198 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side of the rotation axis. In b), a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Note that FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) show a state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the terminal region S52.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axis is placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof becomes the second accommodating portion 543.
Contact (rub) with 2. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 198 (b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). It is possible to reinforce the force to push back in the direction).

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) upward is separately the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. By configuring it with a combination of generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force that pushes back the tilting device 310.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 from the start of contact with the convex leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 196 (a)). After the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 is applied to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the lightness of the tilting device 310 operation and the mitigation of the impact during the pushing operation can be satisfactorily achieved. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 194), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 194) is different due to the difference in the detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to alleviate the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof is raised upward by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located above the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 198 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in this embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 198 (a)), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10, for example, other than the portion touching the tilting device 310.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. Through, vibration can be transmitted to the player. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), the weight member 5412 only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 193) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other, and vibration is generated.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the motor.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (a pulsed pushing operation), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the preparation for vibration generation is ready, so that the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the eighteenth embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the 18th embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 199 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 199, a long hole recess C1 is formed in a central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 200A is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 200B is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the eighteenth embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 from the disk portion at the center position thereof.
A support cylinder portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape to the side where b is arranged, and an axially symmetric elongated hole shape up to a position of about half of the extension distance along the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. From the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion and the axial end of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1, extending toward the disk portion side along the axial direction. It mainly comprises a pair of holding arm portions A1 to be formed.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged so as to sandwich the elongated hole recess C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 199). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated recess C1 is formed with a concave cross section having a width slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1 (
It is configured to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction).

Further, the facing surface of the elongated hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
It is possible to prevent the 343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

The pinching arm portion A1 is formed from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm.
It is provided with an engaging convex portion A1a that is convex toward the arm portion on the other side. Engagement convex part A1a
Engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 201). As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 202). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured for a long time.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the axis. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 200B) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 202 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 200B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a. Can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 202 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for the e-ring to touch the surface and slide it) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 201. FIG. 201 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the 18th embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fitting groove 5343a3 from a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 and the groove for fitting the e-ring and the disk cam 534 by the e-ring.
When the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of 4 and the disc cam 5344 are fitted until the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3 is reached, the engagement convex of the holding arm portion A1. Mainly includes an engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates in which the shaft support hole 341b is bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a part where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 199), and then the e-ring is fitted. In addition to preventing the misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent the misalignment of the disk cam 5344 in the axial direction.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the columnar member 5343a is the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. Insert from the opposite end to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the engaging groove 5343a4, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between the two is expanded. After that, when the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 202 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203.

202 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV of FIG. 199, and FIG. 202 (b) is the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 202 (a). It is a cross-sectional view, and FIG. 202 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 202 (a). 203 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXV in FIG. 199, and FIG. 203 (b) is a right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 203 (a). It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

Note that FIG. 203 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player gives an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 202.

As shown in FIGS. 202 and 203, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes small. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected, the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R. The resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large because of the contact with the cylinder member 5343a.

Therefore, when the player forcibly presses (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 199)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of small resistance, as shown in FIGS. 203 (a) and 203 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, On a surface parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 202A.

204 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. 204 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 204 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 204 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to fall. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 204 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is enlarged and shown. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 204 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 204 (a), when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199), the shaft support of the arm member 345 is rotated by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned, and in order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 204 (a) due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment can partially absorb the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the drive motor can be driven while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the 342 (see FIG. 199) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 204 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other on a surface contact basis. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in a direction repulsive to it. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disk cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is dammed by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so that the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (direction of arrow CCW, see FIG. 205), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or the disk cam 5344 is operated regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. Of any of the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be increased by the disc cam 5344. It can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of.

In this embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed from a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). Since the elongated hole recess C1 is extended to the right disk cam 5344R, the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

FIG. 205 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 143 (a), and FIG. It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 205 (b), the protective cover device 350 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 205 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied and the shaft collapses. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

FIG. 205 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) from the second state and tilted down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting of the arm member 345, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disk cam 5344R is also applicable to the left disk cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (b) and 205 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 199) operates while the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the eighteenth embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right side detection sensor 353R. However, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the right side detection sensor. Since the input to the 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the occurrence of overload is detected, the right disk cam 3 is in a state where no overload has occurred.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate the 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 203B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, a method using a notification device E1 fixed to the engaging rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 203A). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 202 (b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 203 (b)). Thereby, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 210.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the 23rd embodiment has the disk cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207.

FIG. 206 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the 23rd embodiment, and FIG. 207 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the 18th embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is composed of a mirrored shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the eighteenth embodiment, and the second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL arranged in the same manner as in the eighteenth embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and a disk member 6344L1 thereof. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially pivotally supported and rotates relative to a disk member 6344L1 is provided.

In the disc member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the eighteenth embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape. The annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convex along the ring rib 6344f.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the eighteenth embodiment and having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. The lid plate portion 6344h is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion and is arranged radially outward in the thickened portion.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the annular body 6344g on the axial disc member 6344L1 side is the annular rib 63.
It abuts on 44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disk member 634 is formed on the surface.
Compared with the case of contacting with 4L1, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations, the disk member 63 is composed of three times the number of rotations of the disk member 63.
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the deceleration transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set in a mode in which the 44L1 makes one rotation).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the columnar member 343a.
A second that is fixed to a and its auxiliary pillar member 6348a and is meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary pillar member 6348.
It mainly includes a deceleration transmission gear 6348c meshed with the receiving gear tooth 6344i of the 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 208 to 210, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is configured by a plurality of types.

208, 209, and 210 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143 (a). Note that FIG. 208 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 173, and FIG. 209 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 208 (correctly). A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) as well as a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of the rotation after the rotation exceeding one rotation. Is illustrated. Further, FIG. 210 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 209, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 208 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 171).

In the operation device 300 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 171).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c. The relative relationship between the two can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 209, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 and tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 210). As described above, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 208 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 209. It can rise to (without waiting for the rotation of 344) and change the position to reach.

Thereby, for example, when the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and configures the gaming machine in such a manner that the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height reached, the attention of the tilting device 310 is attracted. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 210) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 171) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is reached. It is possible to relate the magnitude of the displacement and the magnitude of the displacement amount that the player pushes the tilting device 310 into, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 222.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the plate cam 344 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described.

211 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the 24th embodiment, FIG. 211 (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 212 (a) is FIG. 211. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the LXXVa-LXXBa line, and FIG. 212 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb of FIG. 211 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L is composed of a mirrored symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a into which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 199) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. The ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7434R2 and the engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. Mainly includes an engaging member 7344R3 having the above.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a in the center.
Detection hole 344eR in the portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape.
The engaging ribs 344c are partially omitted (first overhanging portions 344c1 and first).
It is a member having a shape (the space between it and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
The 410, the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled in the radial direction between them, and a side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 to the outside in the radial direction. It mainly includes a fixed protrusion 7440 that is convexly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from an intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
From the first elongated hole 7431 which is a long rectangular elongated hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the displaced position and the bottom end portion of the disk member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. The second elongated hole 74, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
It mainly includes a return portion 7433 that is formed so as to project to the 32 side.

The width direction (short side) dimension of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
It is made smaller than the dimension in the lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 212 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outward of the second elongated hole 7432.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 213. 213 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 213 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 213 (c) is an arrow LXXVIc direction view of FIG. 213 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is convexly provided and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. Mainly includes a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and forming a star-shaped through hole in the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and the outer diameter dimension is slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. This makes it possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 212 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This prevents the resistance of relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to operate in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 212 (a)) in the assembled state. be able to.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

214 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 214 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 214 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 211 (b)). An arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 214B) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and an extension thereof. It is arranged on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 214 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620. It mainly includes a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion to be inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state.
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction facing the elastic force, its extending tip is configured to have an extending length extending inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the widthwise dimension of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 212 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 215. 215 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 215 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 215 (a). c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, FIG. 215 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 215 (c), and FIG. 215 (e) is a side view. It is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 215 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 215 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 215 (a), FIG. 215 (b), FIG. 215 (c) and FIG. 215 (d), a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is shown, and FIG. ) And FIG. 215 (f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIGS. 215 (b), 215 (d) and 215 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly mistakes.

Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 to a position where the positions of the engaging portion 7630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other in the depth direction of FIG. 215 (d). Moving.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 215 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engagement member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward from the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 215 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 215 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 215 (d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 215 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 with the engaging member 7344R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned process, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 218, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backflip direction will be described. 216 (a), 216 (b), 217 (a), 217 (b) and 218 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In addition, in FIG. 216 (a), FIG. 216 (b), FIG. 217 (a), FIG. 217 (b) and FIG. Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the 18th embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the eighteenth embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion of FIG. 217 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is slanted in order to minimize the interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 216 (a), 216 (b), 217 (a), 217 (b), and 218, the disk cam 744 rotates in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 216 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 216 (a) illustrates a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the release member 7346 and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and FIG. 216 (b) shows FIG. 216 (a). ), The right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, and in FIG. 217 (a), the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2 is shown. In (b), the state in which the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 217 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 218, the right disk cam is shown from the state shown in FIG. 217 (b). The state after the 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is shown in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 216 (a), FIG. 216 (b), FIG. 217 (a) and FIG. (Small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a), in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start to come into contact with each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the angle between the releasing member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is small. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. The disk cam 7344 has a positional relationship in which the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the inner peripheral surface and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c are in contact with each other. It is arranged (see FIG. 217 (a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From the 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, so that the rotation of the disk cam 7344 is based on the rotation. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 217 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 217 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 217 (a). However, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one equally divided recess 7522 originally arranged to another different equally divided recess 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 The phase with and is rotated relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 218, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction. The engaging portion 7630 is again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by going through the process shown in FIGS. 216 (a) to 218, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 219, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. 219 (a), 219 (b), 220 (a) and 220 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In FIG. 219, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

In FIGS. 219 (a) to 220 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 219 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 219 (a) shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other, and FIG. 219 (b) shows the engagement member 7344R3 upward to the release member 7346. FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 219 (b). In (b), the state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 219 (a) to 220 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clock 219 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Will only be.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 and then separates from the engaging member 7344R3. Keep overhanging. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether or not the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 219 and 220), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the eighteenth embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 216, 217, and 218), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the eighteenth embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 221) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state that is not noticed by the player (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is moved up from the first state. 221 and 222 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 143. In FIG. 221, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 144 (b) (without rotating the disk cam 7344). ) The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced is shown, and in FIG. 222, the ring member 7344R2 changes from the state shown in FIG. , A state in which the disk member 7344R1 is rotated relative to the equally divided recessed portion 7522 by one, and in FIGS. 221 and 222, the second overhanging portion 344c3 hits the engaging portion 346d. The state of contact is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, according to the present embodiment, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 from the first state, the tilting device 310 immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 221, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 222, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. Move to a state where it sinks below the 2 state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is tilted from the first state.
The position at which 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending motion can be changed. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 316.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 223, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 223) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Further, the definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings prior to FIG. 223.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. 223 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 224 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 225 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 226 is a front perspective view. FIG. 227 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 227 is a pachinko machine 8010 in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of. In FIG. 227, the reference numeral of the internal configuration of the game board 13 is omitted for convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The member may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It can rotate forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) when viewed from the front, and the right side is rotated. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 224, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 223, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 223, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the metal plate with holes) with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 263) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (the diameter of the upper columnar in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically). Is externally fitted to the support pin 19a (which has a small shape) and is pivotally supported.

As shown in FIG. 226, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (illumination portions 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 223). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back surface side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 226, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having a larger outer shape than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is formed of synthetic resin into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the double glazing. Has been done.

The glass unit 16 is colorless and transparently formed by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. The glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. If the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 223, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls and a light emitting means that lights up during the payout of prize balls.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 223, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged side by side.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 50 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area of the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of places, or may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 226, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 229).

In the upper corner portion of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port portion 143 that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 226, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received by the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 229), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 229), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed like this.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper part and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the lighting unit 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic board is disposed to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is connected, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h. An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 240), and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 240), electricity is supplied to the illuminated portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 226). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal board of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotation tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
It has a positional relationship facing the device on the upper side of 0 (see FIG. 263) in the front-rear direction, and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member having an open front side formed of a resin material is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring has a structure. The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. Consists of shape.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is abutted against the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame portion 14. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c gently curves in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the change in the position of the wiring (see FIG. 233) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and causing a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14)
It is formed of a resin material between the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the main body frame 14a and the vertically long plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 which is a part of the main body frame 14. A reverse cup-shaped reverse cup portion 178, which is a portion of the plastic and opens downward, is arranged.

The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion that illegally expands the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserts a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and enters the game area to take measures against fraudulent acts. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat causes the reverse cup portion 178.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and passed through the reverse cup portion 178.
Will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact with each other (close to each other). Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 (
Since it travels in the left-right direction), it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits fraudulent activity through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is supposed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window portion 14c).
You can make the cheating person naturally (without suspicion that the piano wire is not inserted properly) to insert the piano wire deeper (until you can see the tip of the piano wire from the front side through). .. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and tries to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 226, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 227, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. It is equipped with a launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward the area between them, and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 226) one by one on the launch rail 730. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the launch rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 227, a substrate 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 227, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side and the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side are opened toward the back side so that one end thereof can communicate with the through hole penetrated in the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) so that the end portion of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. To.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 226) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 227, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is provided with a shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162. .. The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowable position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) that urges the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are the main controller 1.
While the connector CN3 is used for transmission with 10 as it is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, the transmission target is different, so the intention is to prevent malfunction in advance by separating the board. by.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled, and FIG. 229 is a window portion of the front frame 14. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below 14c.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, it is the front side of the upper plate 17 on the front side of the main body frame 14c, and diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50. The operation device 300 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the operation device 300.

The cover cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width similar to the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body bending portion 371 having a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left-right center portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to form a front view V. The hanging portion 372 formed in a character shape, the curved portion 371 of the main body, and the hanging portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by 72 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. The left side plane support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body, the right side plane support portion 375 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right side plane support portion 375 from the back side. A support groove 376, which is a groove to be recessed and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The curved portion 371 of the main body has a curved front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17 as a back side edge portion, and is an upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 223). The back left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 17 in the front-rear direction and the back left edge portion 371a are connected to each other and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. The back middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction and the back middle edge portion 371b are connected to each other on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40. It mainly includes a back right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body and supports the operation handle 51, and is a right corner cover 38 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14.
It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap between 0 and the shape (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is located on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, in the recessed portion 1.
A screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the 5a is formed, so that the recessed portion 15a is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the lower frame member 320 is placed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 169). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are 6 LEDs (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light upward, and 2 LEDs (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e) that irradiate light downward. , Each placed.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operating device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 159), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 169), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then transmits light. Pass through section 373.

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 169) to the first state (see FIG. 159), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed as the state changes from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 that accompanies the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat surface support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031.

The right-side plane support portion 375 abuts vertically with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 in the assembled state (FIG. 223). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right flat surface support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 comes into contact with the lower surface of 0 and is displaced downward, the illuminated portion 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, so that the upper panel unit 400 can be supported. The force required to support the illumination can be widely dispersed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that accepts the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the illuminated portion 8032 is assumed to have entered the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front side end portion of the right side plane support portion 375. And the position matches.

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illuminated portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. Separate fixing portions for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 is fixed to the main body frame 14a or a plate so as to cover the passage forming unit 140 from the back side by fastening and fixing the main body frame 14a to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like). It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of the synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire having a heated tip, a piano wire, or the like is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 and melted), the front frame It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145,
The illustrated wire is the passage forming unit 1 even when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.
It is possible to prevent the entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 and a through hole is opened. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear becomes thinner (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 223). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 226 and 228, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the left-right long plate member. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a screw are formed above and below the through hole 156, and a screw for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 is inserted into the main body frame 14a. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored vertically in a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation base end rather than a through hole 156. Mainly includes an opening / closing restricting portion 159 projecting to the back side on the side.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is a connecting portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
It is arranged so as to match 48 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a connecting insertion hole 1 at a position corresponding to the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
It is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction with the protruding portion 148a having a columnar inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and projecting to the back side. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 148b, which is formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation unit back member 1 can be easily inserted.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle and the lower edge. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back surface side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. In the assembled state (see FIG. 226), the 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be surface-contacted with the wall portion 158a in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 227) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223), and details will be described later. Under predetermined conditions, it has an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by coming into contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back surface member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the plate thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the back side, or is fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a from another member to the back side. It may be composed of a metal part extending to. However, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is formed of synthetic resin, the board surface support device 600 comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 227) formed of a metal member. It can be prevented from being chipped or dented. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is further arranged on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are erroneously locked when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. can.

As a path for a foreign substance such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 233) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 is inserted into the wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 240) formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 194).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured in a substantially case shape. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick at the game result may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At that time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to be splashed with drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 155) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 150) fail. There is a risk of

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separably independent configuration, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion. It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 150, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps), passing through the inside of the operation device 300 and downward of the operation device 300. The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 150 and 154 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 154 (b) and 155), liquid such as drinking water is transferred to the drive motor 342. It can be hung directly and prevented from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that a liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other parts are covered with the bottom plate portion 321, drinking water or the like may be applied. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 150 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 233. In FIG. 230 or FIG. 233, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 is shown as in FIG. 228.

FIG. 230A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 230B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 230 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) and are extended to the left from the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 229) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) are up to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, the harness connected to each of the illuminated parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 223) is once arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. A bundle of extension harnesses HN3 heads toward the binding movable member 180 from the relay board, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 233).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back surface side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230 (a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the side surface on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 230 (a)). At a position (intermediate position) between the pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions arranged on the side surface) and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183. It mainly includes a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and having the extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side. A plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181c and the fixed portion 181c.
(See FIG. 233 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened, which is a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. Mainly equipped with 181e.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
The attitude toward d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d and the harness HN1 to HN3.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extending end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from sliding downward, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. The region (plate member 14d and intermediate stop 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape curved along the arranged circle.
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region (region sandwiched between 1c and 1c).

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181.
In e, the outer peripheral surface thereof is fitted inside the portion on the proximal end side of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is pivotally supported (see FIG. 233).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the flat surface OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1. It becomes the same as the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept not intended for elastic deformation (high rigidity), and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept intended for elastic deformation (low rigidity) depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portions 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. The binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 in the fixed state (see FIG. 230 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 230 (b)), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1 thereof.
It mainly includes a small opening 184b, which is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with 84a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 233).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When you want to lock the binding arm part 183 to the locking part 184, you can easily adjust the size (tightening condition) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm part 183 by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted and fixed through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 231 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 231 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 231 (a). 232 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 232 (b) is a front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 232 (a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of 14.

In addition, in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one of the limit states of the movable range) is illustrated, and FIGS. 232 (a) and 232 (b.) In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis facing in the vertical direction). This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 231 and the state shown in FIG. 232). Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally pinched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and being disconnected.

233 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 233 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 233 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 233 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 233 (a) and 233 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 233 (c) and 233 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 233, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the binding movable member 180 is changed to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180.
It can be made to follow the shape of 2. As a result, FIGS. 233 (b) and 233.
As shown in (d), the shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by 3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 233 (b)). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

234 (a) and 234 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. Note that FIG. 234 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 234 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 223) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also has a rotation center point P57 as a center with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 234 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 234 (b), the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Since the frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 233 (FIG. 233). b), also see FIG. 233 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 234 (a) and 234 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed through the vicinity of a vertically long metal portion (a portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 233 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotation tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are fitted when the front frame 14 is closed ( (Fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side) can be improved (see FIGS. 233 (b) and 234 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 228). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire is advanced toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 229) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (the early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to make it easier to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 139) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to launch a ball to a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent giving an illegal benefit. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 229) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 226) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 226) becomes impossible. Therefore, there is a risk that a person who commits fraudulent acts will not be able to collect the bills and the remaining amount of balls inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his or her fraudulent acts. Therefore, it is possible to exert deterrence against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity will be performed without leaving the seat, so that the pachinko / pachislot machine store can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output. At the gaming machine store, the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed. As a result, the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 235 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 235, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 235, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. The lower end portion of the ball guide opening 53 is partitioned by the partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50, respectively. Each of the S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 is provided with the extension direction facing (switching) at least once on both the left and right sides.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223). Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed in the lower plate 50 (and its upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (when the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, the balls are removed from the Senryobako box. A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress) due to being required to be replenished or the like can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions whose extension directions can be bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged on the downstream side of the first bending region NEa1 and on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. , Equipped with. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 236 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 236, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. The proximity walls Nc and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc are mainly provided, and the respective walls Na, Nb, and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the distance between the gap Nin and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 236, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 236, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, a route that advances to the upstream side of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance can be considered. A person who commits a fraudulent act will proceed while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 236 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 236, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, if the wire HM overhangs from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM overhangs in a downward posture, so that the wire HM is further advanced. Even so, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the gaming area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 139). By forcibly opening the movable device such as the above to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to obtain an illegal payout ball and prevent a person who commits an illegal act from obtaining an illegal profit.

It will be described back to FIG. 235. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the sphere flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the spheres simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that vertically connects the respective bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The left-right width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a is formed so that the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 projects downward toward the front side.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 140 is positioned as a surface position with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the above is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a larger front-rear width in the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when a ball stays in the foul ball passage portion 145, the number of balls that can stay can be increased because a plurality of balls can be arranged so as to be displaced back and forth in the upstream of the passage portion 145. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being lined up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being pinched and engaged between the upper and lower walls.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. From the inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that is extended in a plate shape toward the back surface side and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 146 to be on the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

Since the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a), the outer shape is larger than that. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 237 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 238 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 237 and 238 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long to the left and right, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 255) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

This makes it possible to connect and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to each other by fastening and fixing them to the main body frame 14a, while eliminating the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. It is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other to the left and right by the configuration in which the portions are sandwiched and fitted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 223).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 239 and 240, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 226) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunction cover members 171 and 172 are the main body frames. The state decomposed from 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 238), and is a recessed portion 462,482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 259) are provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 238) of the upper frame member 410. It is a part for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 241 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIG. 241, the main body frame 14a
The state in which the right panel unit 500 to be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole bored in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown. And the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223).

242 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 244 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
245 and 246 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 245, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 246, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 242 to 246, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate unit 50 thereof.
Mainly provided with vertically long plate-shaped support plate portions 510 to be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) in which 0L and 500R are fastened and fixed.

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side by a screw.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 241) by a screw inserted through the 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed into an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. In (see FIG. 223), the fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a and the substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511. A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, and a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512. It mainly includes a pin support hole 515 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the board member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

Since the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 223) (see FIG. 252 (b)), the base portion 511b can be brought into contact with the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the left-right direction. Can be suppressed from collapsing. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right side by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 rather than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is displaced. The outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the back side end portion as a surface at substantially the surface position with the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510, and the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). It comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic circuit board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide member 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 244).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 244 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It is incident on the 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in a fastening ready state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is displaced up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, the protrusion 566
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L, with respect to the support plate portion 510,
By moving the 500R up and down by the amount of the misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and the fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the left heavy plate unit 500L comprises an inner cover member 520 formed of a resin material that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 223) and is opaque to light, and the inner cover member 520 thereof. It includes an inner lens member 530 that is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
And the outer lens member 550 formed of a light-transmitting white resin material that comes into contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and has front end portions facing each other in the front-rear direction, and the outer lens member thereof. Arranged on the right side of 550, it is made of a resin material that does not transmit light and is a light guide member 54.
Mainly includes 0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 247 and 248 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L, 500R. In addition, FIG. 247 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 248 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end of the main body plate portion 521, and the upper fastening portion 52 is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5.
A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are formed longer than the short fastening portion 525 and are inner. The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530, and the inner cover member 520 is used.
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing to the main body plate portion 521 are screwed in, and a plurality of back fastening portions into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed from the back surface side while being projected to the right side of the main body plate portion 521. 527
And mainly prepare.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wave shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wave shape. To prepare for.

The back side base portion 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that abuts (matches the shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged so as to be inclined to the left toward the back surface side, and the opening portion 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals above and below, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 251). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is provided with a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front-rear direction and recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. It is provided with a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 229) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations above and below, and the inner lens member 530 is in the assembled state.
Functions as a window for visually recognizing. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 251).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 247). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The surface of 0 (left side) corresponds to the portion overhanging to the left (see FIG. 248). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is designed to be concave and curved to the right between the above-mentioned boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is a main body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front side end portion 531a of 31 has a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. A support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 246) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c is provided.

The support hole 531b is formed in a corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back surface side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can abut with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back surface side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, it is possible to align the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending to the right from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c.
A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect 2a and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b and are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left as it goes toward the back side, so that the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is at the tip in top view). (Triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is turned to the left and right through the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The lens. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 242 and 244), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, LED 512a).
) Is a processed part for changing the light from) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notched concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to guide the light guide member 5.
It is emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are distributed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in the brightness distribution.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the LED 512a side end of the light guide member 540 is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 223), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end portion is slightly displaced toward the back side from the front side end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed from side to side. Is also formed from a wavy wave shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. About the degree of wavy,
There is no particular limitation, but the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm on the curved surface.
The following is preferable. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design that has less distortion after thermal bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and can be given a three-dimensional degree of freedom. ..

The details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 251), but the inner cover member 520
Is located to the left at the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, and is located to the right at the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It has a wave shape.

As described above, the wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (female type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C.
It is made by pressing the base material against a mold having a male mold). More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and the main body plate portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a fastening portion 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the 41 and into which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
At positions other than the above, it does not have a portion that penetrates in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The back side end portion of the light guide member 540 is positioned substantially on the back side end portion of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, projecting to the right and passing through the outer cover member. A visible overhanging portion 554, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion being projected from the back side of the main body plate portion 551. It mainly comprises a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear ends follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is convex to the front side at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of protrusions internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 on the opposite side, to the front side,
Innumerable bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 252 (a)) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed up and down. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be a band-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged in the outer lens member 550, but not in the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close to the right side edge of the support plate portion 510 (outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) as much as possible (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be expanded.

In the main body plate portion 551, the surface on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). The 540 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 251 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and
It is possible to prevent the position of the light guide member 540 from being displaced, and it is possible to accurately inject light from the LED 512a into the light guide member 540.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in the shape of a long plate vertically and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper portion to be fastened 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561.
A lower side to be fastened having a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and into which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. Long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561.
It is a receiving surface that can accept 26, and is formed by a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a convex portion from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side. It mainly comprises a plurality of protrusions 566 to be formed.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 255) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is a covering cover 3
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of 70 (see FIG. 229) are formed as a groove to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 223), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. However, it is possible to stably support the upper panel unit 400 by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is internally fitted (
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

With reference to FIGS. 249 and 250, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be described. 249 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 249 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 249 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 250 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 250 (a).

Note that FIGS. 249 (a) and 249 (b) show a state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. 250 (a) and 250 (b) show the convex portion. Part 55
The state in which 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the convex portions 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 from the front side surface) to fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, whereby light is blocked by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. When a load is applied to the optical member 540, the light guide member 540
Can reduce the range in which there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support hole 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L is combined with the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Since it functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right heavy plate unit 500R in the front-rear direction, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 has the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
Where 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are each assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures can be considered for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.
This is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, it can be assembled and disassembled in two steps, so the operator who performs maintenance etc. can use which procedure to use the right panel unit 50 depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and it is possible to shorten the working time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembling, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are required to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Convex portions 551b, 551c and support holes 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the mating with. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid from each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223), and the right panel unit is united. It is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that travel inside the 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening a screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws must be removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 241) to the left. By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel through the inside of the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 251, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 251 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 251 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (c),
The illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 242) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 251 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the vertical width increases as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1).
> R2) Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be generated can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower end openings 524 can be increased, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 251 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the openings 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 to be arranged facing each other with the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower opening 524 is formed in such a manner that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, radius of curvature R).
In the portion 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while in a location where the degree of light focusing is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emission mode of each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 251 (b) are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 251 (c), the region K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in the area KE, LED 512
The light emitted from a in the front-rear direction is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 251 (c)).
(See), the process proceeds in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is the inner cover member 520.
Since it is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small even if the action of condensing light is reduced.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 is formed to have a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5 are turned off.
By turning on 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without a gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhanging portion 554 (FIG. 243).
The light emission mode of (see) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 243) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, although it is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
By preparing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 242) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting a high degree of jackpot expectation for that effect, the position of the player's eyes can be set. , The right panel unit 500 can be moved to a side away from the game board 13 from the front side end portion. As a result, the degree to which the player's eyes get tired can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 243). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

252 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 252 (b) is FIG. 252.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion (LED 512) on the front side of the light guide member 540.
The part farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the lateral width dimension is reduced with the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 248) is compared with the end face of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 248).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes long, the taper is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the upper and lower portions of the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 in the portion facing the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of 0, the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is set to the support hole 53.
The amount of light that can be visually recognized in the portion near 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be alleviated. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) over the top and bottom.

FIG. 253 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 253, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 253, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an arrow of an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 253, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540.
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, the light emission mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
Since 0 is curved and formed as shown in FIG. 252 (b), it is refracted toward the player side instead of right beside it (see the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 252 (b). Imagination in FIG. 252 (b). The line arrow is
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 237 and FIG. 238. The upper panel unit 400 is the upper side plate member 14.
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 245 and 246) that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and are arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
It is a unit fitted to and supported from the lower side, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front frame 14.

FIG. 254 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 255 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 254 and 255, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 237), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 thereof. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 254 and 255, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and is L.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the contained LED
Directing with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the tubular shape. A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly prepared.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LEDs are arranged on the electronic board, and the LEDs are arranged on the electronic board.
The electronic board is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave portion on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 256 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 257 is an upper frame member 41.
It is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the upper frame member 410 is
A lower edge plate member formed from a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. The 420, the right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, is fitted into the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling off to the back surface side and constitutes an illumination unit 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the tubular portion 405 of the lighting unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. A support through hole 413 that is formed through a slightly larger inner shape,
It mainly includes an opening 414 formed through the upper part of the right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed with substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted through the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 223). As a result, the wiring overhanging through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. On the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237), the LED 14 is located at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The e2 is arranged so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape on the back surface side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back surface side on the lower right corner lower surface, and a concave portion from the back surface side on the left corner lower end surface. A supported groove 418 to be supported, a fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and a second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in a position closer to the top and bottom. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily perform positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 242 and 243) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state thereof (see FIG. 223). ), The load (weight, etc.) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 223), the upper panel unit 400 is formed through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight, etc.) given from the above can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. It is provided with an enlarged rib 419a to be formed.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a portion sandwiched between and (see FIG. 262 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged rib 419a, ribs having the same shape are arranged at three positions around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
It is formed at a position corresponding to 2,482 (see FIG. 259), and is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 259) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view on the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end portion, and has a cross section L.
A plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 formed in a character shape and a plurality of portions arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left and right center positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and penetrating in the vertical direction. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a through hole having a small diameter.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 260).
It is an opening through which the vibration wave (voice) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibration generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through the upper frame member 410 at a position corresponding to the opening 414 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the lens member 440 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 258 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 259 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIG. 258 and FIG. 259, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. It is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e at the lower end portion. The speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R, 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
Since it is composed of 0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4 will be described.
The description of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted. It is formed with an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side and the outer shape of the front side assembly 460.
Rear assembly 48 that forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).
Mainly equipped with 0.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and at the same time, emits a production sound in connection with the game, and one end thereof is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. The speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 239), and the terminal of the speaker connecting wire 453. By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 239), it is configured to be connected to the speaker lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 141).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 223), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received from the cage. You can play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a main body 46 that is long left and right and is formed in a cup shape with the back side open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the outside of the vertical width, and the main body 461.
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. A through hole 466 that is passed through in a circular shape, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and are inserted into the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to fasten and fix the screwed screws, a connecting hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237) are inserted, and a main body on the tip side. A front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the portion 461T is mainly provided.

The main body portion 461 has a base end side main body portion 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed as a region divided in the left-right direction, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 Mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the center side in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 258) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between the base end side main body portion 461B and the rear end side assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds almost the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H is provided with an inwardly non-returned edge portion (an edge portion in which a flange or the like is not formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 463
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.
Through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480, which is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 239) of 4e.
And through the through hole 463a, it is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 257) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened enough to tighten the screw. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a by sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e (fastening and fixing to the hard material by sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 258 and 259, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through hole 465 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front-rear direction, and is bent a plurality of times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
It is a rib forming (see FIG. 260). This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being created on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear side assembly 480 is a main body portion 48 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open front side.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 toward the outside of the vertical width, and the main body 481.
From the wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body portion 481, the light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner portion of the main body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side and a fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460.
A plurality of through holes 488 formed through as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front side to back side at positions corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Mainly includes a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape fitted inside the back side wall portion 461H of
It is equipped with 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position where the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is sandwiched between the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 261 (c)), the speaker connection line 45
Even if 3 is displaced from the wiring passage recess 464 and is about to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 237 and 238) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 483
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.
It is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 239) of 4e, and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46.
It passes through the through hole 463a of 0 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 238).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width that is internally fitted into the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connection wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464.
By passing 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is created between the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. It can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing through.

The light passage through hole 485 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 237).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 237). ), The light passage through holes 465 and 485 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 260) that bends by turning. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H.
It is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of. That is, the back end of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents a gap from being created on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back surface side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is loaded by the compressive force.
67 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction and close the gap between them (FIG. 261 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force does not work well and there is a possibility that the gap cannot be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 237), the back surface is overlapped. It can be reinforced by the strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front concave portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424. It is placed in a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 260 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 260 (b) is a rear assembly 48.
It is a front view of 0. In FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded so that the surfaces facing each other face the front side of the paper is shown. That is, by folding FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the center of the left and right sides of the paper surface, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 237), the base end side main body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back surface side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 260 (a) and 260 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately arranged vertically toward the left side. Ribs 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 is formed at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e is connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back surface side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
Where the vibration wave generated from the above travels linearly, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 260 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is on the left side (arrow) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrow L, U direction).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion closest to the left and right direction). , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When the 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the oscillating wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the oscillating wave Ws is secured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of a standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 462, 463b has the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 461 on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction of (arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the recessed portion 462 and 463b.

As shown in FIG. 260 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 which are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from 84 and are arranged at a plurality of places (5 places in this embodiment) alternately up and down toward the left side.
It is equipped with 87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is assembled on the front side 4
Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of 60 is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and is arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 237).

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 482, 483b has the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed on the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b above the recessed portion 482 arranged on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recess 48
In addition to the effect produced at the time of assembly, 2,483b also has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so that the output is output from the back side of the speaker 451. The generated vibration wave Ws (speaker) travels toward the tip side main body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, in search of an outlet. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T sequentially passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 257). As you can see, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 223)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, a recessed portion 47.
Since the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is directly contacted with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed by 1,491. It is possible to play back and output with high sound quality without making a basket.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471, 491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. This will result in
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect.
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 228), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of the 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 237) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223) is discharged downward). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

For tuning the sound of vibration wave Ws (voice), set the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rear assembly 48 of the front assembly 460 are
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path for avoiding each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of 0. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the 7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extending length in the vertical direction.

In this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front assembly 460 are provided.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of 67d, 467e and rear assembly 480
In addition to the above-mentioned purposes, d and 487e are arranged in a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed in.

Further, the extended plates 436 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 262 (a)), and each rib portion 46 is pressed.
The 7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged on the extension plate 433, 483 side of the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 433 and 48
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of 3, and the rib portions 467c and 4 are fixed when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed.
By bringing 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
It is possible to prevent the deformation of 0. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d can reinforce the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portion 462,482 is a portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 239 and 262) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The recessed portion 462,482 of 0 rides on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied to the upper end portion from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and it is possible to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 257) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is the front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is inserted through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e is arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the points where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent the profit of the fraudulent act.

261 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 261 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXIVb-CXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 261 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 261 (a), and FIG. 261 (d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 261 (a).
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the Vd direction view. In addition, FIG. 261 (a)
) And FIG. 261 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 261 (c). ..

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 261 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 261 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. , The outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 261 (b)).
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side, and the inner side surface 461H.
The shape is such that it fits with i in the assembled state. This makes it possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 261 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c is elastically deformed by receiving a compressive load from the rib portion 467c. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are designed so that the rib portions that abut against each other have a dimensional relationship in which a compression load is generated.

As shown in FIG. 261 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body portion 46
Compared with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M. This makes it possible to improve the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIG. 261 (d), the internal space of the tip side main body portion 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is secured to a large extent in a manner that bulges in the front-back direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip side main body portion 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear the deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 262 (a) shows the front assembly 46 in the CXXVa-CXXXVa line of FIG. 261 (a).
0, rear side assembly 480, upper frame member 410, main body frame 14a and upper side plate member 14e. FIG. 262 (b) is a front side assembly 460 in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, A portion that sandwiches the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), whereby the front assembly 460
And, it is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the rear side assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 255) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the back surface side is disposed inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 237) is a recessed portion 462.
It is arranged inside the 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the other side speaker assembly 450R,
The conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in the 450L is avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being distorted.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 262 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear side assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) on the entire surface with respect to the upper side plate member 14e, and is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, a portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be disposed, or a glass member may be disposed. A member made of concrete may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add thickness to the sound.

Further, it is desirable that the member has a high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like fall under this category. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of a spike, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4.
It may be on the side or front of 50.

For example, when arranging on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear side assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on the tightening of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 has the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 260A) and the connecting hole 469 thereof.
A screw inserted into a through hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction having the same shape as the above, and a through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding the fixing to the upper side plate member 14e of the upper frame member 410, the upper frame member 41
In addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a, 0 is the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1).
A screw inserted from the back surface side into (see 00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 262 (b)) to fasten and fix the screw. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same thing as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be seen.
It can also be said that the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the main body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

263 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 264 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 264 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. In addition, FIG. 264
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 263, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated back and forth for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in front view, a front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a cup shape in which the central portion is open is formed. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 is jointly with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a.
A tapered shape is formed that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 and 266.

265 (a) and 265 (b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXXV of FIG. 264 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the inner frame 12 in line IIIa, and FIG. 266 (a) and FIG. Is. Note that FIGS. 265 and 266 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 265 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 265 (b) and FIG. 266 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 266 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 265 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the game board 13 is used.
The left end portion of the above is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 265 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support portion 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other.
Can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a).
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 about the contact position between the back side edge of 1 and the front surface of the game board 13. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is provided in the assembled state (see FIG. 227). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1 that are supported from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 265 (a) to FIG. 265 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the leading edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
It is possible to improve workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rearward inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 265 (b), as shown in FIG. 266 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (a portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are the game board 13.
Since it is configured to evacuate from the approach path of the game board 13, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the rear claw member 640 after rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to the fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. FIG. 266 (a)
) And FIG. 266 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not abut on the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (the game board 13 is on the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum.
The force required to apply a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 263). Therefore, for example, the game board. When the right end of 13 is not sufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 271 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed in to close the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) with respect to the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted to the vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 266 (b)), the game board 13 is arranged at the lower end portion on the back side of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board that is arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 140) and the like is connected on the back surface is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 263 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower surfaces are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, the description of one board support device 600 will be described and the description of the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

267 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 267 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 268 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 268 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, FIG. 267
(A) and FIG. 267 (b) show a fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), the game board 1 by the board surface support device 600 is shown.
The release state in which the fixing of 3 is released is shown in the figure. As shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 269 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 270 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a rotary front claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, and rotation thereof. A regulated front claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the rotating front claw member 620. Rotating rear claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 which is inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620.
Mainly equipped with 40.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , The plate portion 6 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
An arc recess 614 recessed in 11a from below and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is formed by a rod-shaped regulation rod 615 that is inserted and fixed in 1a, and a screw that extends from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 264 (b)). Mainly includes a pair of fixing plates 616 to be fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form the support hole 612.
Is fixed to. The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of the main body plate portion 621 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 thereof. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed to penetrate in a straight line through the plate portions 621a that are arranged facing each other on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the upper corner portion on the front side of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621.
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 that are formed through in a straight line on the back side portion of a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the regulated front claw member 63 is simultaneously inserted.
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of 0, and the third shaft member P63 is the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the post-rotating claw member 640.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1 and an upper edge of the plate portion 621a are connected. The connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, and the back side extending plate 621c extending from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b so as to be inclined downward by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b. Part 621a
The hanging back plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of 2 toward the plate portion 621a on the opposite side, and the hanging back plate portion 621d from the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d. It mainly includes a front side extension plate 621e that is extended so as to be inclined toward the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 271A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb becomes the main body plate portion 611.
Begins to come into contact with.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 226) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the post-rotation claw member 640 is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed through the plate portion 631a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined toward the front side. It mainly includes an inclined extending plate 633 that is extended and a curved surface 634 that is curved and formed as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a board surface support device 600.
Is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 263), whereby the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 is restricted.

The rotating rear claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and is pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 226) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. It is formed.

271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a) and 272 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 271 (a), FIG. 271 (b), FIG. 272 (a) and FIG. 272 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIGS. 271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a) and 272.
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunction cover member 171 arranged close to the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, in FIG. 271 (a), the release state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 272 (b).
The fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in the figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 272 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 by simply pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulated front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
The posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is restricted by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 271 (a), 271 (b), 272 (a), and 272 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 620 The front side on which the extending portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the regulated front claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and is a second shaft member P.
While abutting with the resistance portion 634a intersecting the circle centered on 62 (FIGS. 271A to 13).
In (up to 5 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615.
When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is canceled and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 272 (a) to 272.
See (b)).

The angle range in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates (FIGS. 271 (a) to 272 (a).
), Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end of the regulated front claw member 630, is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 at the time becomes the posture change toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the regulated front claw member against the downward load. The posture change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, so that the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is applied.
Can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In this embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extending plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
Rubbing friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state of FIG. 271 (b).
It is possible to prevent 3 from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, when a load is applied to the game board 13.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the reaction.

Here, in the case of a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 is arranged. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it will happen.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) can be closed in that state, between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 223) and the front surface of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the distance will be shortened and the game will be hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), in the state immediately before the rotary front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 and the regulation front claw disposed on the front frame 14 Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotation front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
The situation that the front frame 14 does not close is solved until the front frame 14 is installed stably, and in this case, the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so as to be in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with each other (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640, and the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since the downward load is not applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. Game board 13 in this state
When moving (tilting) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the torsion spring NBb given to the rotating front claw member 620 via the rotating rear claw member 640 Is given as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13 reacts to the load.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the above from moving (tilting) to the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 272 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 272 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistive portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 272 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resisting portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases by that amount.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 272 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 272 (b).
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 273 to 276), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 has the limiting rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 272 (a).
A curved surface is formed in which the radius of the second shaft member P62 is gradually increased from the portion in contact with the second shaft member P62 toward the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 272 (b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunction cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 272 (a), and the rotation front claw member 620 rotates to cause the second shaft member P62.
Is displaced, the non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 272. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 272 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the regulation front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 272 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is the multifunction cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 271 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is used.
To rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 6 in the rotation direction).
Since it is not in contact with 15), the regulated front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force.
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 271 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 266 (a) and 271 (a), the game board 1 is in the released state.
The upper end surface of 3 abuts on the lower surface of the back surface extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 will fall to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are in the released state.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to a change in the state of the board support device 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 64.
The operation of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (b), the rotary front claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 is compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630.
The amount of displacement of 20 and the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 272 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13).
During the transition to 4 (a)), the rotating rear claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle between the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that.

Therefore, compared to the displacement amount of the rotation front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the rotation rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the game board at the position supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the front-rear position of 13. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 273 to 276, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 273 to 276 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. In addition, in FIGS. 273 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 273, the released state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 274, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 275, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 276, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 273 to FIG. 276, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, FIGS. 273 and 1
The opening / closing restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIG. 37 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 275 and 276.

As shown in FIG. 273, when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 273), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
It is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 is removed, but it is restricted to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 274, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 274), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 275, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 138). The opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 275 clockwise direction) and the direction of rotation of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 275)
As described above, it is difficult to use a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive due to the opposite direction (counterclockwise direction) (see FIG. 271 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 275, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 275). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 276, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 276), the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extending plate 633, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is caused by the action of the regulation rod 615. Direction (clockwise in FIG. 275) and rotation direction of regulated front claw member 630 (FIG. 13)
8 Counterclockwise direction) is not the opposite direction, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 272 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 276, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159, and the board surface support device 600 is pushed.
Can be fixed, so that it is permissible to close the front frame 14.

FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Note that FIGS. 277 and 278 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 285. FIG. 279 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 279 (b).
Is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 280 (a) and 280 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 280 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 280 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 280 (b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state that partially covers the front surface of the 710 (see FIG. 279 (a)) and an open state that opens the front surface of the base member 710 (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23).
a) Ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported with (see).
And mainly prepare.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the posture of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. A mounting hole 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 is a locking portion 7 in which a pair of receiving portions 712 through which a rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner portion and a hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction can be locked.
13 and the convex portion 714 projected on the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 are arranged to face each other in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. Mainly provided with a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, before the failure of the ball launching unit 112a occurs, repair (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported by the foundation member 711 and a cover member 721.
Switching between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permissible state that allows the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to flow down to the launch rail 730. The device 740 is mainly provided.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 280 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the ball P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722.
8 (see FIG. 281) is arranged in a positional relationship between a ball passing opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a size that allows passage and a slightly upward protrusion from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passing opening 724. A shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports the metal member 725 for cutting and the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 and are mainly provided.

The switching device 740 is a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 7
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generation solenoid 741. The metal plate 743, the guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward toward the distance from the ball passing opening 724, and the guide inclined portion 744 above the base of the guide inclined portion 744. The metal ball P8 is extended by an interval that can accommodate it, and the extended end is the shaft rod portion 72.
It mainly includes a regulated overhanging portion 745 that overhangs the sphere passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 281), and is a flow plate portion 724 that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the radial direction of rotation.
a and a rib portion 724b which is arranged facing above the flow plate portion 724a and is extended downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extending tip surface is inclined downward as the extending tip surface toward the back surface side.
Left inner side surface 724 that is connected to the left end of the flow plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
c and are mainly provided. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 281) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 279 (a)), the sphere P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the line. Therefore, the ball P8
Flows away from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
While the 25 is arranged so as to project inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from colliding with the cutting metal member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Near the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 arranged at a distance shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged.

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. Through hole 731a, which is formed as a long hole along the direction and allows the fastening screw to pass through.
And, like the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the elongated hole direction of the through hole 731a), and the width is slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and the bulging portion 716a bulges. It is provided with a regulation groove 731b formed at a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731 when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716. It can be slid along the straight line to be emitted, whereby the standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 223) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and has a mounting plate portion 73.
It is attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into the attachment holes 732 formed in plurality (two in this embodiment) in 0b and 730c.

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and is a sphere P8 (FIG. 283 (b).
)) It is configured to guide the ball P8 upward by contacting each of the two front and rear points on the peripheral surface.

FIGS. 281 (a) to 281 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the ball by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. It should be noted that FIGS. 281 (a) to 281.
In (c), the cover member 721 is not shown for ease of understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 281 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats to the upper part of the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts on the front side wall of the foundation member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not abut on the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back surface side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 281 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 281 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 281 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 223), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. be.

FIG. 282 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with a sharp tip formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower blade portion 725b thereof, and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extended from
Mainly equipped with 5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Then, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the sphere P
The treatment of the thread Y8 when the thread Y8 is fixed to the 8 and allowed to enter will be described.

283 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 283 (b) is FIG. 1
46 (a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb, FIG. 284 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 284 (b) is FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 285 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725 showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the metal member for cutting 725 in the state of FIG. 285. FIG.
12a, is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. In addition, FIG. 283 and FIG. 14
In 7, some components of the ball launching unit 112a are omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 283 (a) and 283 (b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730.
No. 8 stays in contact with the left lower edge portion of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 283 (a)), and a current is passed through the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously overhangs. , A firing force is applied to the sphere P8, and the sphere P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 284 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by using the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 283 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow plate portion 724a and passes through the launch rail 730.
When the thread Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 projects above the flow-down plate portion 724a. It will enter the lower side of the portion 725c, and will enter the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

When the player holds the front end (the other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is loaded by applying a load due to the firing of the ball P8 to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 285). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 235), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 316. 286 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 287 and 288 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 286 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86 in comparison with the game board 13 shown in FIG. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 287 to 289 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (operation including at least one of the operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921 via 24, and a drive motor 92 that generates a drive force that drives the drive side arm member 910.
1 and a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a sliding operation in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the 800.

Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 290 shows the petal operating device 80.
0 is a front view, FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 290. In FIG. 291, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 289, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to the position on the right side of the upper end portion of the central main body of the support base material 801 and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 293), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 8 is located at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, disposed to the right of its opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a free fitting device 880 described later is 88.
Donut-shaped recessed portion 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 289) is formed.

Central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 289) to which the central motor 804 is fixed.
Below, the oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side (see FIG. 293).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion constituting the upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion constituting the region below the upper end region.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly long in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later.
It is possible to reduce the operating space when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P as described later, respectively, and the second gear 830G and the third gear 810 are arranged so as to overlap each other.
Since it is interlocked (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It is arranged to the right via the two gears 830G and the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 291, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the space between the support base material 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 289) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from being widened, via the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801.

FIG. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIG. 292 and FIG. 293, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. It is formed as a member of the above, and is provided with a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back surface side.

FIG. 294 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 294 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (FIG. 15).
4).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petals 802, and the peripheral edges also have irregular irregularities in the front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are molded into substantially the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge portion is such that the specific color (red) becomes darker without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, near the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. There is.

The petal 802 is located on the rear side 80 than the rear side 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 294 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a on the sharp tip shape side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 294 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the anterior side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is superimposed on the posterior side of the anterior portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five. The petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are gathered toward the same center.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear position, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are displaced at the gathering position (see FIGS. 311 and 312).
Since b can be overlapped in the front-rear position, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 316) becomes remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 292).

As shown in FIGS. 292, 293 and 294, the flat plate member 803 has the above five petals 8
It is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to 02 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and the outer peripheral edge portion thereof has a shape extending forward.

Further, in the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (near the inner circumference).
A pair of screw-in portions 803S, which extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have a screw hole inside, are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the side wall of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 294 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screwing portion 802S of the above is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803.
The 02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

295 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 296 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 295 and 296, FIGS. 292 and 293 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, a slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having five similar shaped portions having a continuous front shape in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 296, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 293) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 293. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The positioning boss 81 is integrally formed with the screwed portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension, and from the tip edge of the portion where the screwed portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations.
3a is postponed. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwed portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 295, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 81 is directed outward from the center of the circular opening 811, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811.
Reference numeral 4 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the center slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits of the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof are formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape that coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and both side slits 81
It is possible to prevent the flat plate on which 5 is formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 295, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815.
Since each set of the members extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are brought closer to each other inward. , It is arranged and formed more densely, and this also causes the slit member 81.
The outer shape of 0 is made compact.

In other words, if 5 sets of central slits 814 and double-sided slits 815 are circular openings 811
When arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than when arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller by that amount.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 294, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and the thickness is small at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip portion is formed into a semicircular shape in front view. The central portion where the thickness is larger than the effect portion at the position between the extension portion and the extension portion, the screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, and the front surface from the center of the slide member 820. It is provided with a guide pin 822 that is convexly provided on the side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 so as to protrude toward the back side. ..

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at a right angle, and the central slit 814 And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 810 have
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, a screw with a washer (washer head screw) 824 is inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and is screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 has a flat plate member 8 with a slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
It is fixed to the rear side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide and move in a posture facing a constant outward direction without turning around 22.

FIG. 297 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG. 298.
(A) and FIG. 298 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 298 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In addition, FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 298, FIGS. 292 and 293 are referred to as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 297 and 298, the rotary plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 297, the rotary plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall having a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side.

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends forward.
It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to be closed in a loop shape elongated in the front view along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to fall off.

The guide rail 832 is tangent to the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.
It extends in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction approximately intermediate between the tangent and the normal of the pivot opening 831, and then arcs further toward the front-view clockwise than in this intermediate direction. While bending, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 312 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the side end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends from the surroundings to the outside in a spiral shape.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 298, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the shape of a peripheral wall and having teeth on the outer periphery thereof is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 291, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 311 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably supported.

Further on the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 298 (a), the second gear 830G
The third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and the pivot opening 81 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are located at positions corresponding to the three screwing portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 293) at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. Each of the positioning holes 810c is bored.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is arranged so as to overlap the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
On the other hand, positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 293) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b to the screwing portion 813S (FIG. 1).
It is fixed by screwing into (see 56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the central axis rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 299 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and is shown in FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a lumen portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two front screw holes 857 having internal screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen 856, and the front screw hole 857 to the lumen 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the lumen portion 856, it extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, extends further to the rear from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and inwardly. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, the rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853 at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852.

As shown in FIGS. 299 and 300, the LED substrate 861 is located on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

On the LED board 861, a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861.
By screwing into the front screwing portion 857 of 51, the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 299, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are one central location and a large number of locations that are arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed toward the rear.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a columnar shape, and a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed is formed in the center. A pair of screwing portions 869 are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 sandwiched between them.
The screwed portion 869 that has passed through the above is abutted from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screwed portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855, whereby the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 8 is provided at four locations corresponding to the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
The 83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in a rib shape in the outer diameter direction with the same protrusion length as the screwed portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at a position intermediate in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and is also axial. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 286) and the decorative member 884 thereof are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, and the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side to form a cup shape with a bottom, and the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is abutted from the back side and fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by being irradiated with light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is provided in the central portion so as to be large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 293).

As shown in FIG. 298 (a), a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G.
It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8.
It rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via 08.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 88 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be overlapped with the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and is positioned with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. Positioning is performed by inserting the 883a (see FIG. 300) into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw-in portion 883S (FIG. 16).
It is fixed by screwing into 3).

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back surface side in an arc shape centered on a rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d has a donut-shaped recess 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 291).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C housed in 1D (see FIG. 289) and capable of detecting a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, the arc plate 88 for detection is used regardless of the posture in which the fourth gear 880G starts rotating.
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7).
2 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their respective rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

Supporting base material 801 supports the rear positioning boss 854 that protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852.
The rear screw-in portion 853, which is inserted and positioned in the positioning notch (not shown) in (see FIG. 289) and also protrudes rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base material 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and fixing it with screws.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out to the rear through the lumen portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801.
The posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8 is fitted to the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so as to fit outward.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed at eight points along the circumferential direction, and the screwed portion 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, thereby linearly contacting the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

FIG. 301 shows the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 95.
0 is a rear perspective view, and FIG. 302 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by being applied with a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 301, FIGS. 287 to 15
Refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 225) that is fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed so as to be accommodating from the front side above the support column 1110, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the above, and the support elongated hole 1140 drilled as an elongated hole that is inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly prepared for.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910.
Near the outer periphery of the front end, a pair of upper and lower holes on the same surface as the screwed portion 1111, which is a pair of holes arranged on the left and right so that a screw can be screwed in, and the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111 are on the front side. It is provided with a positioning boss 1112 that extends to.

As shown in FIG. 301, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 that is rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar column on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the main body member of the shaku to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914 and a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission slot 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. The first accommodating portion 1121 and the second accommodating portion 11 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
A third accommodating portion 112 in which the arm gear 924 is arranged opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween and is fitted with the drive side arm member 910.
3 and are mainly prepared.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 287, not shown in FIG. 302) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line.
Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front, and is arranged from the vicinity of the outer circumference. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 301, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is provided in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 with the collar fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 303 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 304 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) so as to be slidable to the left and right on the side substrate 1000S, and is supported by a plurality of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 by the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 303, the side base material 1000S has a cylindrical portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support pillar portion 1150, and has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is arranged at a position corresponding to the support pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S, which is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and the right corner portion in the front view, is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Convex portion 1005S convex on the front side along the arc shape at the same center as
And mainly prepare.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S.
It is arranged in the gap between the long hole 931 to be supported and is configured as a part that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a screw for preventing slipping from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state. Slide.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S is formed at a convex height that does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but can abut if the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and pivotally supported by sandwiching a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column portion 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. Part 942 and
Mainly prepared.

The shafted strut portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 289). Shaft support hole 1003 with the shaft support column 941 sandwiching the collar
A disk-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the lid member 945 while being inserted into S, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a to cause the lid member 94.
5 serves as a retaining role. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 306), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the slide plate 930 from coming off. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc recess 1004S and causes resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 302. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921.
The collar that guides the detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 protruding in the out-of-diameter direction from the arm gear 924 and the coil spring SP8 that generates the urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatable. The shaft support 1163 to be supported, the cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
It mainly includes a wiring stopper 1165 hidden in 00C from the front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effecting member 940 at a slight distance from the second effecting member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use.
Even if the part that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be regulated by the screwing portion 1006S.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base materials 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction, thereby fastening and fixing the substrate cover. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 and 00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easier to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 310, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. It is a front view of 1100, FIG. 306, FIG. 1
71 and FIG. 310 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

In addition, in FIGS. 305 and 306, the state in which the drive side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range is shown, and in FIGS. 307 and 308, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 301). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 309 and 310, the drive side arm member 910 is shown.
Is illustrated on the lower end side of the moving range.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 310, in a state where the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the moving range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive-side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. 306). 288) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, at the time of starting the drive motor 921, the inner fitting convex portion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle range), the resistance at the time of starting the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 307 and 308, the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 307 and 308, in the range of FIGS. 309 and 310, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 moves as if the petal operation device 8 were used.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 311 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 311 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 311 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. It is a front view showing through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 311 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830.

FIG. 312 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 312 (b) is a petal operating device 8
00 is a rear view, FIG. 312 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 312 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 313 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 313 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 313 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 313 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotary plate 830.

FIG. 314 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 314 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 314 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 314 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 315 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 315 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 315 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 315 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotary plate 830.

316 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 316 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 316 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 316 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the petal operating device 800 descends due to the ascending / descending operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 starts from the initial position (gathering position) shown in FIGS. 311 and 312 to FIGS. 313 and 314.
After the expanding position shown in FIG. 315, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully opened position shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, and further, the rotational operation (second operation) is performed at the fully opened position, and then the assembly is performed. It is configured to be able to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

At the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 311 (d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 of (see FIG. 294) is the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
Located at the inner end of 4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and as shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, the five petals 802 are most concentrated toward the central decorative member 868 in the center. In the position, it is in a gathered state that constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (gathering position) as described above, the first in the central motor 804
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 312 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 312 (d)) is interlocked with the gear 804G, so that the rotating plate 83 is interlocked with the gear 804G.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view as shown by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, since the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831, it can be easily wrapped around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotary plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotary plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8 is initially first used.
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 313 and 314).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 312 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 294) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 311 (d).
Since it is regulated by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is linearly guided and moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves to the central slit 8 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 313 and 314, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expansion operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 314. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves outward, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

Further, at this time, as described above, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends from the central end to the front clockwise side along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

The more the guide rail 832 tilts clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. In addition, the guide rail 832
Is curved in an arc toward the front clockwise direction from the direction D15, so that the slide pin 823 is curved.
Both the decrease in load and the decrease in moving speed are more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, problems such as deviation are prevented and the reliability of power transmission is ensured, while the central slit 8 is used.
14 is used to increase the moving speed of the slide pin 823, which is a configuration in which the roles are divided.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the slide pin 823 has a central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in 4, is reached (see FIG. 315 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 expand radially to the fully open position and become fully open, and the expansion operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 311 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. 3). See 315 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is thereafter.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque lower than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member The 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the counterclockwise direction of the front view indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 315 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. Thus, after the expansion operation, the petals 802 rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 315 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotary plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous immediately. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully open state as shown by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 315 (b). Therefore, the decorative member 8 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After finishing the above rotation operation, the central motor 804 sets the first gear 804G to the opposite direction.
When rotated in the clockwise direction as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 316 (b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, and only the rotating plate 830 is first rotated in FIG. 316 (b). As shown by the arrow A15 in b), it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction of the rear view, whereby the gathering operation in the direction opposite to the expansion operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit in the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are transferred from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the center. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 311 and 312, returns to the gathering state, and completes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without stopping, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. It operates again, and the first gear 804 is further operated by the central motor 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 316 (b), the petals 802
However, as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 311 (b), it rotates in the front-view clockwise direction in a gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the aggregated state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 311 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, the decorative member 8 is compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped.
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this gathering operation to the rotational operation, by controlling the central motor 804 as described above,
It can be stopped and paused before the transition, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 290), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotational operation.

Next, the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. In the 25th embodiment, a case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the 26th embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320.

317 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the 26th embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 319 and 320 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent and formed toward the front side in such a manner that the notch 9145b is covered from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) to the back surface side, and is upward generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible fraudulent activities will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 285. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the 25th embodiment is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 319, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8.
Thread Y9 in a state where 8 is weakly launched and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the sphere P9 fixed to the other end of the sphere is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back surface side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that the sphere P9 is vigorously moved. Even if it is embossed, the thread Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 223).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 can be won. It can be repeatedly passed through 63 (see FIG. 139) and the like, and an illegal profit can be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, a thin plate blade is passed through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when the cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 317). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed toward the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. The thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can abut on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145 to increase the resistance to an upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 toward the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits fraud is afraid of discovering the fraud, after grasping the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, a pocket of trousers, etc.). ), It is easy to perform fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the sphere above the bottom surface of the sphere guide opening 53 (see FIG. 223).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the lower plate 5 is formed from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the lower plate 50 (FIG. 138) while stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the thread Y8. (See) flows down to the right and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball pulling lever 52. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate Passage 9
The ball discharged from the 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it possible to easily give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 via the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes.
You can point the ball toward. That is, since the right-sloping surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component toward the right (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side has a ball guide opening 5.
The left portion of 3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is the remaining region (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. It occupies a region (about 1/3 of the width dimension), and a riding control step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary thereof.

As shown in FIG. 317, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a has a right end portion (right end side) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a lower plate passage portion 91 on the front door side.
The 42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the riding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding control step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323. In the 25th embodiment, a case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the 27th embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 to 323.

321 to 323 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the 27th embodiment. FIG. 321 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 322 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 323 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 321 to 323, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the 25th embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c is provided. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 317). The radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole bored in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 228) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to be convex from the side surface on the back surface side to the back surface side. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 321 and 322, and is omitted in FIG. 323.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 317)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius is about Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
Since the ball flowing down the 45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 from being cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is the passage portion 14.
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is replaced with the thin plate blade portion 1.
It becomes easy to insert into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap in which 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a part that constitutes the forked blade part with 10153, and is the first thin plate blade part 10153.
It is extended to the left in a manner that slightly rises and slopes from the right end of the front side edge of the. As a result, there is an acute-angled recess 1015 with a sharp recess between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154.
5 is formed.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the 26th embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side edge. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 is inserted into the acute-angled concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8 is inserted.
Can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraudulent activity. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is the rolling plate portion 10145d.
It is configured to abut on the lower surface of the foul ball passage and withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, the thread Y8 or the ball P8 is loaded in the opposite directions at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y is retained.
By prolonging the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraudulent activity.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the yarn and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

Next, the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 327. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) whose firing intensity is weak and does not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment has the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball receiving entrance 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 324 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the 28th embodiment, and FIG. 325 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 324 and 325, the outer rail 2062 is arranged from the resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the 25th embodiment on the game region side. A guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 having a width at which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b and.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed. Foul ball passage 2
The 062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the full tank switch (not shown) arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering a fraudulent act as described above, in which balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8 and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c so that the thread Y8 is inserted into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, by hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 326 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 326, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 326, FIG. 325 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back surface side of the return ball prevention member 68. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically projected from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and has a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A blocking plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is surface-contacted with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed on the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4.
A long screw B11 is formed in a through hole previously drilled in the base member 68b1 as a mounting hole in a state where the b1 is in contact, and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 by matching the position with the through hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in that state, so that the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that abuts on the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 326) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20 is provided.
It is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increasing portion 206
The straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, the diameter of the sphere). It intersects with the tip member 2062a at the lower side by about 1/3).

With this configuration, when launching a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 20
62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the blocking plate 2062b4 and the side surface 2062d1.
A notch 206 that is smaller than the diameter of the sphere and has a width that allows the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back surface to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is on the front side of the side surface 2062d1.
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (FIG. 327 (FIG. 327).
a) See). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act performed through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball to the front side (see FIG. 319), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front surface, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back surface side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion overhanging downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and is O when the posture of the gate member 68a changes.
It is arranged so that N-OFF can be switched.

327 (a) and 327 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 327 (a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
The state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of 2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 190 (b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the gate member 68a.
The state in which the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the foul ball passage 2062c is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. also,
In FIG. 327 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button-type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 327 (b), the button-type switch SW11 is shown. It is shown that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 327 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. Since it returns to the state shown in 327 (a), the foul ball passage 20 is next.
This is because the state shown in FIG. 327 (a) can be restored by the timing when the ball is guided to 62c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that travels while filling a passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 328 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 328, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is to be advanced while being excluded. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 328 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is dismissed by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 327 (a), it is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1
By controlling so as to sound an alarm when 1 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 327 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped as much as possible (see FIG. 327 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging the above, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced at an early stage. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity even before the replacement, and saves the trouble of forgetting the storage location, as compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be disposed).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. , The cheating person does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it is replaced, the deterrence of fraudulent activity can still be maintained by not knowing the degree of damage.

Next, the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the 29th embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 329 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the 29th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 329, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a flange portion 2887 thereof in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the 25th embodiment. The flange portion 2887 is provided with a regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip to the back surface side. The play-fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment has only a difference in the back cover 2886 as compared with the play-fitting device 880 in the 25th embodiment, and is provided with the same loose-fitting device 880 in other parts. ..

The regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 and 331.

330 (a) and 330 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, FIG. 19
4 (a) and FIG. 331 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in FIG. 330 and FIG. 331, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is shown in chronological order, and FIGS. 330 (a) and 331 (a), 330 (b) and 331 (b).
) Shows the state of the simultaneous points.

Further, in FIGS. 331 (a) and 331 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 330, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the regulating portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 332 and 333).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 331 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that is inclined so as to move away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed at an angle. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 330A and 330B, the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulating portion 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 292) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) shown in FIG. 331 (a). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 331 (b), the central slit 814
And it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
At 02, a posture change occurs to the extent possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this way, the regulating unit 28
While the load from 88 is parried, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 331 (a), the slide member 2820 has only the narrow slide rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 331 (b), the slide member 2820 has a slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and an inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since each of the 3Ts is abutted (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 331 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 The sliding member 28 due to the increased movement resistance to the movement in the longitudinal direction.
Slide pin 823 without waiting for 20 to reach the end of slits 814,815
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) (movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and tilted posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 330 (b).
Start rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 332 is a front view of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 332, FIG. 330 (
The state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 332, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 292) (clockwise in front view). In the state shown in FIG. 332, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293).
Since it exceeds the braking force (see FIG. 293), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the position during expansion.

333 (a), 333 (b) and 334 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 333 (a), FIG. 333 (b) and FIG. 334, the appearance of the petals 802 moving from the position during expansion to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 333 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 293) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 332, and the front side portion 802b of the petals 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 333 (b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to the normal postures.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 293) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 293) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and therefore the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts on the regulating portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided. Therefore, it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petals 802 to the fully open position and rotate the petals 802 at the fully open position.

Further, as for the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802 may be arranged at a position where they do not abut on the petals 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position, or even if they abut on the petals 802 which rotate at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it can pass through the regulating part 2888, and by setting it in a position where the load can be dissipated, it is possible to prevent the regulating part 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in front view, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802
When it expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern, and the difference in perspective causes the petals 802 to expand to the maximum and rotate. It is possible to make a difference between performing and rotating operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulating portion 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulating portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 may come into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture, which may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning to be conveyed to the player depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change their posture changes. Therefore, even if the regulating portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 335 and 336. In the 29th embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described, but the petal operating device in another example of the 29th embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

335 (a), 335 (b), 336 (a) and 336 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 335 and 336, an operation example of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a) is shown in chronological order. also,
In FIGS. 335 (a), 335 (b), 336 (a) and 336 (b), the rotary plate 83 is shown.
The arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of 0 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as the 29th embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 335 and 336, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 335 (a) (see FIG. 335 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 on the side receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 differs from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is located on the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Of the central recessed portion 3814a recessed in a manner of widening the width of the wall and the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the slits 815 on both sides arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814, the clockwise side of the front view. In the radial direction of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a recessed in the wall portion of the double-sided slit 815 in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction, and the double-sided slit 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view. Slits 81 on both sides in the wall part on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall parts extending along
Mainly includes a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b which is recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of 5.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
3 is arranged to face the slide rib 803a.

The fovea centralis 3814a is a slide member 2820 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the above (FIG. 19).
8 (a) Lower side) is continuously formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is a flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG. 335 (a).
From the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03, the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (
It is continuously formed in FIG. 335 (a) lower side).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the rotary plate 830
When the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 start to rotate clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction (the direction in which the slide rib 803a at the right end enters the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side) (FIG. See 335 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the front view of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 336 (a) and 336 (b)) with the portion that first abuts with the 3810 as a fulcrum.
)reference).

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28 are described above.
Contact between the guide pin 822 and the fovea centralis 3814a and the screwing portion 280 during the rotation of 03.
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 335 and 336) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. The slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side abuts on the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side
Moves to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front with respect to the concave base end of the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 331).
(A). Therefore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotary plate 830 in the clockwise direction in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 335 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the 29th embodiment.

In other words, in the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 331 (b). ), The rotation operation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates around the slit member 3810). Rotational motion) is present (see FIGS. 332, 333 (a) and 333 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 335 (FIG. 335). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 336 (b)). That is, the rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 330 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the 29th embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 335 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) clockwise in front view, a flat plate member 2803 and a flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) can be obtained. From the position of the petals 802 to be fastened and fixed, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position. As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate during the expansion (see FIG. 335 (a)), and then the gathering position. Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 334) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 340. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface constituting the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the thirtieth embodiment is the bending of the lower frame member 8320. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

337, 338, 339 (a) and 339 (b) are front perspective views of the operating device 8300 according to the thirtieth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 337 and FIG. 339 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, in FIG. 338, the first state of the tilting device 310 is shown, and in FIG. 339 (b), the tilting device 310 is the first state. The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the difference between the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment and the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been explained yet. Yes, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged so as to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are formed along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at a surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a front view. Mainly provided with a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as drinking water described above downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between 0 and 0.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, There is a high possibility that foreign matter will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151 (b)) arranged at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the easier it is for the tilting device 310 to be displaced (deformed) to the left or right near the front end. It should be noted that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides
However, even when the gap V13 is designed so that a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin) is not inserted, the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, to the right) is the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding up the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the
It becomes 3 and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is also formed in the tilting device 310 by utilizing the play near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 151 (b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to shift (deform) the position, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 339 (a) and 339 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good feeling of operation, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 339 (a)) protrudes outward from the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be executed by the operation device 8300.
When it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign substance has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-shaped foreign substance. It had to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

340 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 340 (b) is FIG. 20.
3 (a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb, FIG. 2;
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 340 (d) is a view of FIG. 340 (a).
) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIId-CCIIId line.
340 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 340 (a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 195). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center position on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the upper surface of the extending portion 311h is tilted (left and right in the vertical view of the second state). An inclination D81 that inclines downward toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310, and an inclining D82 that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the tilting device 310. (See FIG. 338), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, it is possible to easily secure the strength of the lower frame member 8320 as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object in a portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 149) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. It is considered to be larger than the size of the object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a left-right width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that allows light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 which are connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished (mirror-finished members) in the present embodiment. Is fixed) to reflect the light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially blocked, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 152) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. Member 832
It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will remain at 0. In addition, this effect is the first through hole 832.
The same applies not only to the case of visual recognition through 6a but also to the case of visual recognition through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 and is removed from the bottom plate portion 32.
It is configured as a through hole that can be discharged in the direction along the surface of 1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 has a size that allows the largest possible coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) to be discharged. The width in the normal direction is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the leading edge of the bottom plate portion 321. You can remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

To remove the coin-shaped foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 and exposing the operating device 8300 in front view (see FIG. 229). The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with a screw through which the fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 228) of the curved portion 371 of the main body is inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is recessed with a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since the installation portion 15a is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which it is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 226). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 340 (b)). Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 141).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to promptly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 does not operate normally and the pachinko machine 10 stops operating, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 341. In the 25th embodiment, the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, but the board surface support device 600 in the 31st embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

341 (a) and 341 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 31st embodiment of the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 223. Note that FIG. 341 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12 (the front frame 14 is not shown), and FIG. 341 (b) shows the front frame 14 as the inner frame 12. The closed state is shown. Further, in FIG. 341 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 341 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 341 (a) and 341 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment is provided with a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the
The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the 52 from above and below at two locations in the front-rear direction and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and faces the front-rear displacement member 2652. 2655 urging members such as coil springs that add urging force toward
To prepare for.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 341 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position shown in FIG. 341 (b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 341 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 341 (a)) and by being pushed backward by the front frame 14. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 341 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is a front-rear displacement member 26 from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position.
It is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the 52 is arranged at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is a vertical displacement member 2651 at a position in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
Is set to the lower position, and the inclination angle and the forming range are set so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is set to the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction thereof. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the rear claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the 25th embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the 25th embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force that becomes, the degree of freedom of choice of the worker and
Workability can be improved.

Next, the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 342. In the 25th embodiment, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by a heated piano wire, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 against the illegal intrusion into the inside as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated. The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt out and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, the fraud detection device 2280 according to the 32nd embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

342 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the 32nd embodiment, and FIGS. 342 (b) and 342 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that FIG. 342 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is restored to a tensile shape (stored shape) by applying heat. Will be done. Further, in FIGS. 342 (b) and 342 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the main body box portion 2281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with the back surface side and the lower surface side open, and the reverse cup portion 2
It is provided with a main body box portion 2281 stacked above the main body box portion 2281 and a back cover member 2482 attached from the back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281, and the main body box portion 228.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2482.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner portion to form an inverted cup portion 217.
The extension portion 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of No. 8, the narrowing portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner portion, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowing portion 2284. It is housed in a protruding portion 2285 that is projected upward from the main body and a recess that is recessed from the back side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. The first conduction portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and the main body box portion 228
1 is housed in a recess recessed from the back side in the right wall portion of 1, one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and the first conduction. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that allows contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 that generates an urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284, is supported by the protruding portion 2285, and is arranged below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conduction portion 2286 and the second conduction portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion overhanging the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 141). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other and conduct (see FIG. 342 (b)) (FIG. 342 (FIG. 342). c) By doing so, the continuity is cut off, and the error signal is output with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 257), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 224) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 342 (a) to 342 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the 25th embodiment, and the extending portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extending portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, and has a property of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a pre-memorized shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 342 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2482 in a vertically long shape in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tension state and then returns to a low temperature state, the operator pushes the extension portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce it (see FIG. 342 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 343. In the 25th embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the curved shape of the light guide member 540 causes a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

343 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 343 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 343 (c) is a schematic downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 343 (d) is a guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543 d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 343 (a). FIG. 343 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 343 (e) schematically represents an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 343 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 343 (a), the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 343 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the 25th embodiment. In the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portions 2543 is formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side and the region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side with respect to the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between c, the region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 343 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

As shown in FIG. 343 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 244) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a.
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted by the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 343 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the 25th embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), according to the above-described configuration, the light is advanced toward the inner lens member 530 side in the direction of collecting light, and the light is advanced toward the outer lens member 550 side in the direction of spreading light. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate and can have a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the right panel unit 250.
It is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect while suppressing the left-right width of 0.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. can.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting device 310 than in the eighteenth embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, deterioration of the drive motor 342 can be suppressed, and the effect can be produced in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched.

In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (while the tilting device 310 is in the descending operation), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotary operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the end point and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the accommodating member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the accommodating member 5430. When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to the tilting device 310, for example, when the convex leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321 and the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower push-in end, the convex leg portion If the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the accommodating member 5430 is switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the flexible member 5420 is operated at a predetermined speed or higher. It is possible to increase the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player.
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) by the designated pressing method, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut on the accommodating member 5430 while the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, while the weight member 310 is pushed to the end of movement. The 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the housing member 5430 may not be in contact with the accommodation member 5430. In this case, the vibration can be transmitted to the player in a state where the tilting device 310 is not operated to make the effect lively, while the player can change the effect (expected) by stopping the vibration when the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Since it is possible to recognize (difference in degree), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, there are cases where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 cannot be in contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5
It is desired to generate both a case where the 412 and the accommodating member 5430 are continuously in contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft and the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. not. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunction cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the back side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the back side extension plate 621c, and the game board is fixed in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there. 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction directly behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by making the path bend back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 are prevented from interfering with each other. Can be made easier.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear side assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front side assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connecting line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the speaker connection wire 453 is pulled out to the outside of the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from being disconnected from the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H abuts more than that. In the range of length, there may be a configuration in which a step is provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, a range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the 25th embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip side main body portion 461T are jointly used. You may configure a large speaker room with.

Further, although the volume of the base end side main body portion 461B is larger than that of the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the volume may be the same. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the 25th embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (base end side main body portion 461B and tip end side main body portion 461T). The connection direction, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491) have been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in a left-right direction view. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491. By making it difficult to perform cheating by invading the tip of the game into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating, it is possible to suppress the cheating. Here, examples of the suppression of fraudulent activities include suppression of fraudulent activities themselves and suppression of obtaining profits from fraudulent activities (successful fraudulent activities).

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotary plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotary plate 830 and the play fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the play fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the gathering operation. Can be made to. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the 25th embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 will be described. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). Since the right side of the board 13 is tilted toward the front side), the part of the game board 13 which is arranged to face the operation part back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere with each other. be able to. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
Whether or not 00 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the lower board support device 600, the operation unit back member 155 arranged opposite to the lower board support device 600, and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it can be restricted that the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not abut on the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600 (.
It may be configured to be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, so that the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of damage can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a state in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The right panel unit 500 is configured to rotate around a parallel axis), so that the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. Further, by switching the mode of the light radiated to the center frame 86 and the moving accessory that overhangs the inside of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost openings 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side on one side and on the other side. Consider switching between the case where it is placed on the front side and the case where it is placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged facing the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching that changes the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a that controls light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness becomes higher, the amount of light becomes larger, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (low brightness, low light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal display or moving accessory)
It is possible to change the light emission mode of.

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal display). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display have a beam shape (
It is possible to emit light in a wide range in the direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal display while irradiating the light (in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to emit light in a wide range of positions away from the moving accessory and the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory and the liquid crystal display.

In the 26th embodiment and the 27th embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to fall, and the detection sensor is placed at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss incurred by the gaming machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the 29th embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T may be formed.
A recessed portion may be formed so that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance by causing the inclined surface 2803T to enter the recessed portion.

In the 33rd embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light. As explained, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is a direction in which the light is inclined upward in all of each region CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of a person walking to select the aircraft to be played. It is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward. This makes it possible to improve the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

Further, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCV, which are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530.
The downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and the upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of tilting upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in the direction of the player, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who is playing while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. for example,
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are other pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a gaming machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and it is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and the player is given a predetermined game value on condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 344 to 424. It should be noted that the first control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description of the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Is omitted.

FIG. 344 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 344, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, general ball entry port 63, second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, distribution device 700, etc. It is attached to the back surface side of FIG. 138). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the distribution device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed by the distribution device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 345).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 138) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 344.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 138) surround the front and back of the game board 13, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 355) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion of FIG. 344) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 344) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 344) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is configured to be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is the second ball opening 640 or the right second ball opening. When a prize is won in 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot (big hit A, C), a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot (big hit B), or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R time saving 100 times jackpot (big hit A), 16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot (big hit B1), 16R probability variable even symbol jackpot (big hit B2), and 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) are prepared. ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "16R time reduction 100 times jackpot" (big hit A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered symbols. After the round jackpot game, it is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state and is in a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). "16R probability variation odd jackpot" (big hit B1) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same odd symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R probability variation even symbol jackpot" (big hit B2) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same even symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variation jackpot" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a combination of specific symbols (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot. It is a probabilistic jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed). In the case of the jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. Further, the "electric support state" in the "high probability state" means a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the electric support (during the electric support game state) and the time reduction during the probability change, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It will be changed and a longer time will be set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time of each hit. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general entry openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r, and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 355), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 344)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display to be made. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640 during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change.

It should be noted that the second method during the probabilistic change or the time reduction can be performed by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit to increase the hit probability during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the ball entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board 13 can pass through the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a sphere can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) through the opening 710a with respect to this distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Be done. When the ball wins (balls) in the first ball slot 64, the first ball slot switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball slot switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 355), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 375), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. This second entry port 640 does not allow the game ball to enter (it is difficult) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric accessory 640a, which is normally formed in the shape of a blade, is upright. ) The electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern when it hits a normal symbol, which will be described later. The game ball is guided to the 2 entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the 2nd entry port 640.

In addition, 5 balls are paid out as prize balls in each of the 1st entrance 64 and the right 2nd entrance 640r, and 2 balls are awarded in the 2nd entrance 640. It is also one of the winning openings paid out as a ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640, and the right number. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 2 entry ports 640r is configured to be different, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entrance 640r may be configured as the same number.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal period, so that the variation of the second symbol is short. The symbol "○" is easily displayed on the display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize in the second entrance 640 than in the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically moves to the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r.

On the other hand, during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, in addition to the ball entering the opening 710a being distributed to the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640r, the second entry ball is entered. The big hit lottery that accompanies entering the ball into the mouth 640 is also easy to be executed. Therefore, since there are more chances of big hit lottery than during normal times, it is advantageous for the player as compared with normal times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is for the player depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the electric support during the probability change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). , You can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any of the first entry slot 64, the second entry slot 640, and the right second entry slot 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variation). After the lapse of time), the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The occurrence of a jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the distribution device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 138).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win a prize in any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the distribution device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 375). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, a setting switch 291, RTC292, a firing sensor 293, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. There is.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 375). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 345, the distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. The through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down. It is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side by the base member of the distribution device 700.

The winning member 730 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a thereof. A through hole (not shown) that is located on both sides in the left-right direction and is formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) that is located below the through-hole and is formed through in the front-rear direction. Formed mainly in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a distribution member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and a distribution member 762. It is mainly provided with a throwing port formed above the.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annular shape with three protrusions 762a projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof. It is formed with a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the annulus of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and is in the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the sphere passes (distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third throwing path KR3”) in which a ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 described above is rolled and thrown, and is a rolling surface of the distribution member 760. It is formed by inclining downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the ball distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 is rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the intermediate member so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 is rolled to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r of the intervening member arranged in front of the distribution member 760. Can be thrown to. More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first entry port 64. On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second entry port 640r.

The interposition member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, the first ball opening 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. It is mainly provided with a right second entry port 640r penetrating in the front-rear direction and these first entry openings 64.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are each formed on the front side of the left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above to the through hole of the winning member 730 through the first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r. Can form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the opening 710a is thrown to the sorting member 760 and is thrown to the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is inside the first entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first entry port 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entry port 64.

On the other hand, when the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entry port 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entry port 640r.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the opening 710a is alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the game ball is evenly distributed to the first entry port 64. It is possible to uniformly generate a reserved ball by inserting a game ball into the right second entry port 640r. As a result, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes an upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as a reserved ball can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to change at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to change at the same time. With such a configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 375) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B1", one of the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is doublet and stopped and displayed. Variable display is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit B2", variable display is performed in which any one of the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, the chance eyes composed of the combination of "341" are displayed. It should be noted that this combination of chances is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 354, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the hold symbol on which the change is executed is moved and displayed when the hold ball held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). be. The reserved symbol moved to the execution display area is displayed with a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol change is in progress. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation is executed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, the right second entry opening 640r, and the second entry opening 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and the preview effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a notice effect image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number or more is set.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are visually displayed, so a total of 9 main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, in the small area Ds1, the executing pedestal symbol m0 indicating that the reserved ball corresponding to the executing special symbol is moved and displayed is displayed, and FIG. 347 ( When the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. Of the reserved symbols (circular symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the round symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area is displayed. A round symbol having a diameter larger than that of the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed by moving the reserved symbol displayed side by side to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved symbol was displayed. Will be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as a symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol that starts to change, the selected variation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the running symbol are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected fluctuation pattern from the running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1, and the game can be played. Can improve the interest of. The pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol within the period of change. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation and the reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in a scroll manner with the same symbol). It is executed at the timing or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 346 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the variable order is the first reserved symbol is displayed is an area. It is displayed on the left end. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, the second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is the second, the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is the third, and the reserved order. The 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is the 5th, and the 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is the 6th. m6, the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is the 7th, and the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is the 8th are in a state where the reserved symbols are not displayed. Is also displayed.

When the predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols are not displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggestion symbol P is configured with a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed on the upper part of the 6th reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the holding order is 7 on the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the second is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the holding order is the eighth is displayed at the upper part of the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol. It is composed of the symbols of.

As shown in FIG. 346 (b), when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P straddles the area from the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. Further, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is set by adding the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, a character display pedestal C1 indicating that the area is for displaying the advance notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the advance notice character is not displayed, the player can confirm the area in which the character is displayed in advance, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 347 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed in the main area Dm (when the special symbol is variablely displayed), the first entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640, if the number of holdings corresponding to the special symbols that have entered is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the holding order. The pending symbol is displayed in. FIG. 347 (a) shows the display of the reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 347 (a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (b), when the number of holdings is 4, the variable lid symbol in which the 5th holding of the holding number suggestion symbol P is displayed is hidden and variably displayed. .. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed near the variable lid symbol, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (b), when the number of reserved balls is 4, not only the variable lid symbol in the display area of the 5th reserved balls is hidden, but also the girl's character display area C is covered with the variable lid symbol. It is configured to display a character symbol.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, up to the maximum number of reserved balls for the player. The remaining number of can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 7, the character "1 more" is displayed in the comment display, and when 1 more reserved ball is stored, the maximum number of reserved balls is stored. It is suggested that the eight reserved balls are in the memorized state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and with the number of reserved balls up to the upper limit, the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, right. By entering the ball into any of the second entry ports 640r (the entry opening corresponding to the special symbol that is not the hold upper limit), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not held and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the poor game ball is alternately placed in the first ball entry port 64 (first ball slot 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. It is divided into 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the 2nd special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be alternately and evenly stored. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined) is seven. The game can be continued as if the ball were to enter.

Further, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is reached, the character "MAX" indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit is displayed, and the player even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Can suppress the problem that the reserved ball overflows due to the continuous firing of the game ball.

In FIG. 348 (a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the hold ball is determined by the look-ahead process (Z320: see FIG. 386) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. Information with the selected variation pattern type is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpot or missed super reach, the player The display mode of the holding ball is changed (for example, the white holding symbol is changed to red) and displayed as an effect to give the expectation to the big hit, and the fifth variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is also not. Display as it is without displaying it. Further, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, the character "as is" is displayed, and an effect suggesting that the number of reserved items is not increased any more is executed. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 348 (b), the character "OVER" is displayed in a balloon from the girl in the character display area C, so that the character does not overflow. Anyway, you will be notified as if it overflowed. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the fourth reserved ball will be displayed in a variable manner, and even though the reserved ball with a high expectation for a big hit is stored, the holding ball ( It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily firing and consuming the game ball).

As shown in FIG. 349 (a), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th reserved ball is stored. Variable lid of the number of pending symbols P The 5th and 6th symbols P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the word "early" is displayed, and the pending period is set. Due to the short length, the notification suggesting that the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in a specially variable manner is executed. Here, normally, when there are four holding balls, the fifth holding ball of the variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is hidden, but within 5 seconds, 0 holding balls are hidden. By increasing the number to 4, it is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols are displayed as hidden. With this configuration, the effect to be executed can be changed according to the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can determine that a predetermined number or more of the reserved balls are generated in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is configured to be different from the usual one, but the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is not changed and the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, for example) is not changed. The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol may be changed).

Next, a variable display example of the variable lid symbol P in the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 349 (b). In the time-saving gaming state (high probability of winning / failing judgment of normal symbol), unlike the normal gaming state (low probability of winning / failing judgment of normal symbol), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 349 (b). As shown in, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable lid symbols P are hidden. Then, the character of the girl is displayed, and a character that informs the player to memorize the sixth reserved ball, such as "Put up to 6", is displayed by a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric support) 640a can be easily set to the open state. It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, during the time-saving game, the overflow of the reserved ball is likely to occur. Therefore, unlike the normal game, the variable lid symbol P is hidden a lot during the time-saving game, which is the upper limit value of the reserved ball 8. By encouraging the player to play so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of balls, it is possible to play the game so as to suppress the situation where the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit and overflow is likely to occur. can. In the time-saving game state, when the reserved ball becomes the 5th, the 7th (m7) variable lid symbol P is hidden, and when the reserved ball becomes the 7th, the 8th (m8) variable lid symbol is hidden. P is hidden.

In this control example, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden when the 5th holding ball is reached during the time saving game, but the limitation is limited to 7 holding balls up to 6 holding balls. The eyes and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the 4th reserved ball is stored, the 6th and 7th variable lid symbols are hidden by the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the number of reserved balls to the 6th. It may be configured so that the character "Put up to 6" suggesting is displayed. In this way, by notifying the player in advance whether it is a type of big hit game (probability change hit or normal hit) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player is motivated to save reserved balls. Can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 350A to 350B, it is configured to be variable depending on the look-ahead result (information indicated by the winning command) of the reserved ball in which the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is stored. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 351 (a), a girl character that is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls is four is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 350 (b), four characters are displayed. An example is shown in which a special girl character different from the normal time is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the reserved ball of the eye is memorized. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery to determine the type of girl different from the normal time, and when the look-ahead result is a big hit or a missed super reach, the winning probability is set high. .. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, with reference to FIGS. 351 (a) to 351 (b), a display mode when the number of reserved pieces reaches the maximum value and then an over prize is won will be described. FIG. 351 (a) shows "MAX" indicating that when the reserved number is stored up to the upper limit value, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C has the reserved number as the upper limit value by a balloon comment. Character is displayed. After that, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the characters "Overflow" are displayed to indicate that the overflow has occurred. In this way, in the case of overflow, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of overflow by notifying the player that the overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow, but when the purpose is to increase the profit of the game store side, the displayed character is displayed by generating overflow. Depending on the type of game and the content of the comment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner, the pre-reading result of the stored reserved ball (win / fail judgment result, etc.), and the current game state (normal game state or probability change game state). ) May be configured to notify the type. With this configuration, the player can enjoy various effects by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while being enjoyed.

With reference to FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), a display mode when the hold effect during reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 352 (a), when the variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) that is the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 399) is executed, and the lottery is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 352, the display mode of the reach hold effect is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the hold effect during reach is executed, the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and "save up to 6" by a balloon comment, regardless of the number of balls on hold. A character suggesting the player to accumulate 6 reserved balls during the reach fluctuation is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 352 (b), when up to 6 reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type advantageous to the player. It is variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed in a balloon from the girl character J1, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball and playing the game even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the side of the game store.

In this control example, an example is shown in which the reach symbol is changed when the number of reserved balls becomes a specified number (6), but the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even symbol is used. In some cases, instead of changing the reach pattern to an odd number, the main display area Dm is displayed to swim from right to left, and the expectation of a big hit is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to notify and display a notice such as "Congratulations" to suggest a result of a pass / fail judgment.

The display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 353 (a) and 353 (b). When a specific fluctuation (the fluctuation that won the advance notice lottery to execute the lucky hold effect) is executed When the previous big hit, the number of reserved balls when the reserved ball corresponding to the fluctuation is stored is stored. , The mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 353 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of reserved balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 353 (b), when up to 6 hold balls are stored during the lucky hold effect, the characters "well done" are displayed, and the main display area Dm is displayed by pressing the frame button 22. A character (notice display mode) indicating that a probability change jackpot is given in the changing special symbol "probability change confirmation" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify up to the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, this effect is configured to be executed when the jackpot is a big hit, but the jackpot is not limited to that, and even if the hit is off, the jackpot if the jackpot is hit, depending on the judgment value of the acquired jackpot type. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and a jackpot may be expected.

In the lucky hold effect, when the hold balls stored in the variable lid symbol P (hold 5 to 8) are hit, the number of hold balls is stored, and when the next big hit change is executed, the lucky hold effect is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a hold number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of how many holdings were stored when the previous jackpot occurred, and the number of holdings can be saved as much as possible to make a lucky hold. It is possible to make the game play so that the production can be easily executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 353 (a), the reserved symbols are numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (number of reserved symbols at the time of winning: FIG. The number indicated by i shown in 353) is added and displayed. This number of pending symbols at the time of winning is moved (variable) by sliding to the reserved symbol display area where the order of change is one younger when the reserved symbol is digested (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol has started). Even if it is displayed, it will be displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of holdings at the time of winning in the fluctuation.

In the case of a big hit, the number of holdings at the time of winning the big hit game executed in the production during the big hit game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) is displayed by numbers or symbols to notify the player. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (b), a hit game in which a long-time hit (the electric accessory 640a is open for a longer period than the normal hit time), which is one of the hit types of the normal symbol. ), The display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 354 (a), when a player wins a long-time hit of a normal symbol and a long-time hit game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that the long-time hit game is being executed, and the player does not fire the game ball during the long-time hit game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball misses the opportunity to enter the ball mouth 640r. In addition, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r during this long-time hit game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is black, which is different from the normal time. It is displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the reserved ball stored during the game for a long time and the reserved ball stored during the other period.

As shown in FIG. 354 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the game for a long time is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start. , The treasure chest symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the characters "Great chance when the treasure chest opens !!" are displayed, and the treasure chest opens while the third symbol is changing. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol of is highly expected to be a big hit.

With this configuration, when a normal symbol is hit for a long time, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and the special effect is executed even during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By executing a hit for a long time, the production of the game can be greatly changed, and a fresh game can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 344, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variablely displays whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation is completed. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64 and the right 2nd ball entry port 640r. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the distribution device 700, game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762. A first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640r, the first entry opening switch and the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is the first. 1 It is indicated by LED37a of the symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry slot 64 and the right second entry slot 640r are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the ball is entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls is not limited to the same, and the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first entry port 64, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640r as three prize balls, and when a ball enters the right second entry opening 640r, a prize is given to the right second entry opening 640r as four prize balls. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entry port 64.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the distribution device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds in the case of the jackpot A) set for the type of the jackpot game to be executed. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 138).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 355). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 355 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 356, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variation pattern selection The variation type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 392). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) for storing the holding ball of the first special symbol, and a holding ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding 1st to 4th areas) is provided for each, and a common special symbol holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the right second ball entry port 640r.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), reaches the maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 392).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 358 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 358 (a))? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of order. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as "big hit A", "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C", and "big hit A" and "big hit A" are set by the special hit type counter C2. One of "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "3/958".

On the other hand, there are 27 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers is 27 while the total number of random numbers is 958, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "27/958".

In this embodiment, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the big hits are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value that becomes a big hit regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside and the big hit may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes a big hit is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first, which are referred to in correspondence with the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, which is referred to corresponding to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the lottery result in the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 359 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 75" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "76 to 79" were "big hit B2" and "80 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 359 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 87" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "88 to 91" were "big hit B2" and "92 to 99". As the jackpot type in the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the determination result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (60%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress problems in which the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time off, long-time off, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 392) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 357b) that stores the random value that determines the variation time of the symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 358 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used for the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is low. , The time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, respectively, is set. Although it will be described in more detail in the description of the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 described later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and the variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 361. FIG. 360 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter are set for each of the variation patterns. The value with CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern is set for the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is performed. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of any of "60", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is performed. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to have a big hit as a result of the winning / failing determination.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4, the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 5 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When the reach loss A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and is super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern with a small number of reserved balls (when the number is 1 to 4) and a long fluctuation time is easily selected. By inserting a game ball into the 1 entry slot 64 or the right 2nd entry slot 640r, a reserved ball is likely to occur, and a period in which the change of the special symbol is stopped occurs (lottery game is not performed). It is configured so that the problem that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach and super reach is set low, so that the normal reach and super reach are changed when there are many reserved balls, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is made to the player. Can be expected to be a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation pattern corresponds to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the acquired special hit type counter C2 value). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 361, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is made. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). When it is any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the variation occurs. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the variation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of, super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value “0 to 100” of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and super reach for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 “101 to 198”. The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, it is possible to expect the player to be a big hit in the winning / failing determination result.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls of 1 to 2, and the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value out of normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ". Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for the number of reserved balls of 3 to 8, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When out of reach A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (variation period) in the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. There is. As a result, when the hit / fail judgment result is out of order and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the out-of-order short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbol can be changed a lot in a short time. , The period until it is determined to be a big hit (the period between big hits) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be measured.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) has a probability of hitting a normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the time is shortened for a normal symbol), and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability gaming state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state is executed once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In this embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probable variation period during the time reduction in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of a long hit, and the variation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 358 (c), if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 6 in the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is hit normally. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 7 to 8, it is determined that the normal symbol is a long-time hit. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the normal symbol has a high probability, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long-time hit, so that it is normal. The hit is virtually the same as the long-time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, during the time reduction and the probability change period, which have a high probability, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port can be given. It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640r. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entry port 640r is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol has been won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640r Since the opening period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640r is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 380). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 392).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 355, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 356, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 392) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 391) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 390) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 357 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358) and the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 358 (b)) described above. In addition to the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 359 (a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

FIG. 362 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the winning command table 202e, in the look-ahead process (Z320: FIG. 386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the determination result such as the variation pattern in which the stored reserved ball is selected at the start of the variation is determined, and the determination is made. It is a table for determining the winning command corresponding to the result. As shown in FIG. 362, when the lottery result in the look-ahead is a jackpot, a winning command corresponding to the determined jackpot type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the fluctuation pattern type and the winning / failing determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. If the lottery result is out of order, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e as the variation pattern types are all out of the deviation length A, the deviation short A, and the deviation short B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 357 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, opening number counter 203g, long-time opening flag 203i, time saving medium counter 203j, and variable execution. It has a flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a jackpot medium flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a reserved ball storage area 203a. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ) Is stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other hold areas are won. The shift processing is performed to pack the data of the above into the holding area which is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display (variation display performed by the display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see Z305 in FIG. 385). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z206 in FIG. 244).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z207 in FIG. 381 and Z306 in FIG. 385). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning a prize in the right second entry slot 640r, and is the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in other configurations. Therefore, the detailed explanation is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the main control device by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. See Z504 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 387).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the normal random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 389). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. FIG. 389 Z503: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric accessory 64c. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the player is hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: FIG. 387), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game per long time is executed, the variation of the next normal symbol is started. If) is set to off.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the fluctuation is started according to the order in which the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r (the order in which the ball is reserved and stored). Here, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process (Z204: FIG. 382) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. Based on the order data of the hold storage stored in the change order storage area 203p described later, it is determined whether the change stored next is the hold data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 382).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The probability variation flag 203m is set when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110 (Z1104: FIG. 393). Z1111: No) is set to on. Further, in the processing of Z220 in the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is in the jackpot game. The jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the process of Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the end timing of the jackpot game is reached.

The variable order storage area 203p is an area in which when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r and is stored as a hold ball, the hold order is stored. In this control example, the fluctuations of the special symbols are configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. Further, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r, the fluctuations are started in the order in which they are reserved and stored. As a result, even when the special symbol changes, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details thereof will be omitted.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 363 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, Hold lid color change selection table 222f, Lucky hold command table 222g, Background mode selection table 222h, Hold character selection table 222i, Hold character change table 222j, Blowout selection table 222k, Reaching production lottery table 222m, Reach start time The calculation table 222n and the lucky hold lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold change selection table 222b determines whether or not to display the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the change content. It is a selection table for acquiring the pending change value.

FIG. 364 (a) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222b. In the hold change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is distributed according to the type of the received winning command, and the hold symbol of the sub-display area Ds is changed with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 348 (a)) and a pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described in the hold effect mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved symbol shall not be changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined and the pending change value gets 0. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved symbol is variable from the white circle symbol (normal reserved symbol display mode) to the blue circle symbol (change A). It is decided to make it, and the pending change value gets 1.

When the winning command type is out of the normal reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined and the pending change value is acquired. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. In the case of any of "101 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed in the green circle symbol, and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is out of super reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 30", no change is determined and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "31 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 20", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 10", no change is determined, and the pending change value is 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "101 to 189", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2. In the case of any of "190 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed as the red circle symbol, and the pending change value is acquired by 3.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so it is reserved and stored not only from the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner but also from the displayed reserved symbol. It is possible to predict the result of the pass / fail judgment corresponding to the pending symbol. Further, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the reach display mode will be obtained when the change B is variably displayed, the hold storage should be performed even in the state before the special symbol changes. For example, the player can be expected to start the fluctuation, and even if the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop a reach effect via different execution effects even for the same hold change, and the player can be surprised with the effect. It is possible to attract.

The hold effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the hold change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 364 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 403). Specifically, when the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the normal mode, when all the reserved symbols being displayed have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the distance between the reserved symbols and the variable lid symbol P display range is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 347 (b)).

When the hold change value is any of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The notice A mode is a hold (state) in which any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the hold symbol being displayed, and is held when the number of hold balls is 4 or more. This is a hold effect mode in which the symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range (see FIG. 348 (a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 348 (a) is not a display mode showing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of the hold effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 348 (a) is different. In the notice A mode, when a holding ball is generated after the holding symbol whose color is variable and the holding symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is also hidden accordingly (for example, the state of FIG. 348 (a)). By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from, the variable lid symbol P with the letter 5 will be hidden), and a comment indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot for the reserved symbol with a variable color. The display is performed by a balloon. In this way, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, the game is performed so as to generate the reserved ball. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation of.

When the hold change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where there is a change in the reserved symbol being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, one of the changes (change A) is made to the reserved symbol being displayed as in the notice A mode. , Change B, Change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the reserved symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range. (See FIG. 348 (a)), or the mode in which the reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 348 (b)).

With this configuration, not only the color of the reserved symbol can be changed, but also the display range of the variable lid symbol P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls. It is possible to expand the enjoyment of playing and attract players. In addition, unlike the advance notice A mode, it is a hold effect that causes the player to play a game so as not to generate a hold ball any more, and the player is interrupted with the game (the operation of launching the game ball), and the color is variable. Expectations can be raised by concentrating on the start of fluctuations (dynamic display) of special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The holding lid range selection table 222d has a plurality of data tables for acquiring the holding lid range value necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

Here, the special production performed during the normal mode will be described. As special effects, the normal mode has a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during reach, and a lucky hold effect.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the time when the number of reserved balls is stored and becomes 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the distance between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is set to be one holding ball (the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. 349 (a). The number of the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed so that the space between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol P is two, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production that the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls is 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time elapses 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 404). ), The execution is started (see FIG. 349 (a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q elapses 5 seconds, 0 is set in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 407), and the execution is terminated. Is.

The on-reach hold effect is an effect of setting a notice display mode for urging the player to play a game so that the number of holds can be accumulated up to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 352 (a)) during the reach fluctuation. .. When the variation type is reach, the reach start time is calculated by drawing a lottery based on the reach effect lottery table 222m, which will be described later, and when the execution is possible. The value of the hold effect start timer 223r set by the table 222n based on the variation type becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 399) (see FIG. 352 (a)). It is a production that ends at the end of the fluctuation.

The lucky hold effect is to store the number of holds when the hold ball (hold symbol) is stored (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) is obtained, the hold ball that became the big hit is stored. A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 353 (a)) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time of entering the ball entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to the mark symbol. It is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that encourages the player to play a game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 353 (b), by pressing the frame button 22, the current gaming state (probability changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming is achieved. An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls when a big hit is obtained in the winning / failing judgment result of the start winning in the past. When the lucky hold storage value 223p, which is stored when is 5 or more, is stored, and whether or not the execution is possible is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described later, and the execution becomes possible. , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 398) to start the execution (see FIG. 353 (a)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation starts.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no hold change, the hold effect related to the hold symbol can be determined by the time interval of the start prize, the number of hold balls during the reach fluctuation, and the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the past start prize. Depending on the contents of the memory, various effects can be provided and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

FIG. 365 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the holding lid range selection table 222d. The holding lid range selection table 222d includes a normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222d4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 365 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls. Further, in the case of the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability gaming state (big hit probability is low probability and non-time saving). (Game state)) to acquire the hold lid range value (see Z2354 in FIG. 400) and when the lucky hold effect is in progress (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3), the hold cover range value is acquired (FIG. 400). (See Z2346) in some cases.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 365 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2. In the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

The notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the notice B mode.

FIG. 365 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3, the hold cover range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls and the value (range) of the hold notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired when the value of the holding notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the hold notice counter is "1 to 4", the hold cover range value is 4 and the value of the hold notice counter is "5". In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the hold notice counter value is "6", the hold cover range value is 2 and the hold notice counter value is "7". 1 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the value of the holding notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 366 (a)) is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 366 (a) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d4 at the time of short-term winning. In the short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222d4, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The holding lid range selection table 222d5 during reach effect is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in the case of hold effect during reach effect. FIG. 366 (b) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect. In the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 8", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired.

In the time saving hold lid range selection table 222d6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time reduction state (the value of the time reduction medium counter is other than 0). ) Is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value.

FIG. 366 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6. In the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 400).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", 0 is acquired as the reserved cover range value.

With this configuration, the display range of the variable lid symbol P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the winning / failing judgment at the start winning and the hold effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a directing effect that enhances participation.

The holding lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 from the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222d. A table used to select commands for.

FIG. 367 (a) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid command selection table 222e. The holding lid command selection table 222e sets a holding lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the holding lid range value (range) acquired by the holding lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the holding lid range value is "0", BF00 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 351 (a)). When the holding lid range value is "1", BF01 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 1 (only the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is "2", BF02 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area from holding 7 to 8 (see FIG. 349 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "3", BF03 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area from holding 6 to 8 (see FIG. 350 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "4", BF04 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 4 (the area from holding 5 to 8 (see FIG. 348 (a))).

The hold lid command is set in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the start winning, and is executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of variation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting a display holding lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 400) based on the holding lid range value every time the number of holding balls changes.

The holding lid color change selection table 222f has an instruction number (in the example shown in FIG. 348 (a), when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the holding number shown in FIG. 348 (a) is executed. It is a data table for discriminating the holding lid symbol P corresponding to the area where the holding symbol is displayed when the holding ball occurs more than 4). The holding lid symbol P determined by the holding lid color change selection table 222f is usually (normally, it is a black frame and the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the holding display area is displayed inside. It is displayed in a variable manner with a specific color (internal color is transparent green) different from the display mode (display mode). In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the hold notice counter 223 g for recognizing the display position of the hold symbol whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of hold balls. This is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the holding lid symbol P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 367 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid color change selection table 222f. In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the color change range is specified for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223 g and the value (range) of the number of hold balls. A hold lid command for changing the display range of the variable lid symbol P from the normal white display mode to green (see (b) in FIG. 348) is set according to the change range (see Z2348 in FIG. 400). do.

Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223g is any of "0 to 4", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the hold lid command is issued. Not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF11 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF12 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF13 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of hold balls is "5", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF21 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF22 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is "6", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF31 is determined for the holding lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, it is possible to further increase the attention of the player by changing the display mode in a region different from the reserved symbol, which is changed by the determination of the winning / failing determination result (pre-reading determination) in the previous winning. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is increased depending on whether or not the launch is stopped, so that it is possible to widely enjoy the mode of the reserved symbol and the later fluctuation notice effect.

The lucky hold command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of hold balls to be held.

FIG. 368 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, the area of the target number of reserved balls is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223p when the lucky hold effect is being performed, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 398). See Z2306).

Specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223p is 5, the hold cover command FB50 is determined, and the area 5 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 6, the hold cover command FB51 is determined, and the area 6 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 353 (a)). When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 7, the hold cover command FB52 is determined, and the area 7 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 8, the hold cover command FB53 is determined, and the area 8 of the variable cover symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls for which the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit in the previous start winning, the interest of the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. On the other hand, it is possible to encourage them to win a prize, and it is possible to realize a production that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 369 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected with respect to the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, the background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. ..

The hold character selection table 222i sets the content (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting (deciding).

FIG. 369 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The hold character selection table 222i has a hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The contents of (see Z2363 in FIG. 401) are set. As for the reserved characters, J0 is a girl with short hair (see FIG. 347 (b)), J1 is a girl with hair tied (see FIG. 350 (a)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 350 (b)). ), J3 is prepared with an image that can be easily identified by the player, such as a blonde girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 347 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 350 (a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 350 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 150". If either is the case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the reserved characters with high expectations according to the difference between the reserved effects mode and the background that have changed from the start prize, the display mode of the reserved effects with high expectations can be obtained without damaging the atmosphere of the background effects. It will be possible. In addition, the player can recognize the notice with a high degree of expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbol and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of big hits, the number of times the super reach is executed, and the symbol or character with the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game production are acquired. The history information such as the number of points obtained by the above may be stored, and the selected character may be changed in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the selected character can be changed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided and the character selected may be variable depending on the date and time information or the like. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed according to the passage of time since the pachinko machine 10 was introduced, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

The hold character change table 222j displays the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 as the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on.

FIG. 370 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The reserved character selection table 222i has a background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, a reserved effect mode stored in the reserved effect mode storage area 223 m, the current reserved character in the display mode, and a value of the effect counter 223h. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit and the over prize is obtained (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 401). .. Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. It is a mode that does not (variable).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is ". If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 351 (b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 80". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and the current hold character is "J0". When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 50". J0 is determined as a reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means to confirm the winning / failing result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and it is possible to raise the interest in the game. can. In addition, as the reserved character to be changed, a character with a higher expectation after the change is set than before the change, and when the reserved effect mode is other than the normal mode, the change ratio of the reserved character is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the hold effect mode, the player can have a means to know the result of the pass / fail judgment through a means of intentionally generating an over prize, and it is possible to provide a playability that enhances the operation. Will be.

In the balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 348 (a)) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

FIG. 371 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. The balloon selection table 222k includes a normal balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, a reach production blowing balloon selection table 222k5, and a lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. A balloon selection table 222k7 for shortening the working hours is provided. Further, the balloon content to be set is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 347 (b)), and the game state is the normal state. , It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 371 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is not acquired (see FIG. 347 (b)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In that case, YES is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 351 (a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 348 (a)).

FIG. 371 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A balloon selection table 222k2, the balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3", the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the hit / fail determination result is In the case of a hit, the content of the balloon is throbbing, and in the case of a miss, the content of the balloon is throbbing. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be acquired, and if it is not, the expected balloon is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is out of order, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is extremely hot! Is acquired, and if it is off, what happens to the contents of the balloon! Is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h to display the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as a production to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 348 (b)).

FIG. 371 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222k3, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the blowout is acquired as it is (see FIG. 348 (a)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", OVER (see FIG. 348 (b)) is acquired as the content of the blowout, and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In that case, STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 5", the content of the blowout is OVER. When the value of the hold effect counter is "6", the STOP is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the value of the hold effect counter is "0 to 6". In any of the cases, OVER is acquired for the blowout content, STOP is determined for the blowout content when the value of the hold effect counter is "7", and the value of the number of hold balls is "8". The MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the winning when a change of the reserved symbol with high expectation occurs by the contents of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls can be increased by continuing to launch more than the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the judgment as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the occurrence of unnecessary launches, and enable the game to be played efficiently. Further, even when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the balloon content may be changed so that the launch can be continued.

The balloon selection table 222k4 at the time of short-term winning is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon at the time of short-term winning (see FIG. 349 (a)).

FIG. 372 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, the balloon content is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 402).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! When (see Fig. 349 (a)) is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the content of the balloon is super fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! !! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the balloon content is fast! !! !! Is obtained.

With this configuration, the interval between starting prizes is short, and the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the reach effect (see FIG. 352 (a)).

FIG. 372 (b) schematically shows the contents of the balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect. In the reach effect during balloon selection table 222k5, the balloon contents are acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the hold effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the hold effect counter is "0", and when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4", the contents of the balloons are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 352 (a)) is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is OK, and "7-8". In any case, OVER is acquired for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the hold effect counter 223h is "other than 0", the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4". , Save up to 6 balloon contents! Is acquired, in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is well done (see FIG. 352 (b)), and "7" is acquired. In any case of "~ 8", OVER is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the reserved character during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach effect during the hold effect, the balloon is generated. You can change it and play the game without getting bored.

The lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon during the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)).

FIG. 373 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6, when the winning / failing judgment result of winning in the past becomes a big hit, the value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the number of lucky hold balls (see Z2444 of Z268). The contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value of, the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "5", the hold change value is "0 to 3" when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 4". In any case, the target of the balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is acquired as OK. When the hold change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the number of reserved balls is acquired. When the value of is any of "6 to 8", and when the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 5", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , Aiming at 6 as the content of the blowout (see FIG. 353 (a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the change value of the hold is "0", the content of the blowout is OK. If it is acquired and the pending change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is determined for the content of the balloon, and if the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired although it was done well. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "7 to 8", and when the value of the reserved change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the blowout.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 6", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The aim of the blowout content is 7 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", when the hold change value is "0", the blowout content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the content of the blowout, and when the hold change value is "3", the content of the blowout is well acquired but the value of the number of hold balls is "8". In the case of "," if the pending change value is any one of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the blowout.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 7", and when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3", , The aim of the balloon content is 8 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the reserved change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired as the balloon content, and when the pending change value is "3", the balloon content is acquired although it is well done.

In this way, by changing the content of the balloon depending on the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result is a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 holds, the display mode of the lucky hold can be updated without getting bored. You can continue the game.

In the time-saving balloon selection table 222k6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving medium counter is other than 0). It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 373 (b) schematically shows a time-saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the time saving balloon selection table 222k7, the balloon content is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 402) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any one of "0 to 5", the balloon content is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 349 (b)) and the reserved balls are acquired, and the number of reserved balls is "6 to 7". In any of the cases, the contents of the balloon are OK.

With this configuration, the optimum number of reserved balls can be notified in a short time, and the player can grasp the transition status of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If the situation of the optimum number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the player is in a standby state, which is inefficient in time, and the over-winning that starts and wins when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is exceeded can be avoided. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

The reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the hold display effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 374 (a) schematically shows the contents of the effect lottery table 222m during reach. In the reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (See Z2324 in FIG. 399) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the reach is in progress. The hold effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", the hold effect during reach can be displayed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "4 to 5" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the hold effect during reach is not displayed and "141 to 199". In the case of ", it is possible to display the hold effect during reach. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "6 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the hold effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the hold effect during reach when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

The reach start time calculation table 222n is a reach in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode (display mode in which the symbols in the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the hold effect during reach in the time (period) which becomes the display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, the hold effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the reach hold effect (see FIG. 352 (a)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed and the variation type.

FIG. 374 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n is set by the hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the reach hold effect acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed (FIG. 399). See Z2326).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms. When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the variation type is super. When the reach jackpot D is set, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 ms, and the variation type is out of normal reach A. In that case, 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer, 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer when the variation type is out of normal reach B, and when the variation type is out of normal reach C, the hold effect is determined. The start timer is determined to be 10000 ms.

The lucky hold lottery table 222p acquires whether or not the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 374 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222p. In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 398).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 99", the lucky hold effect is executed. Is not performed, and if it is any of "100 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "3 to 4" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the lucky hold effect is not executed and " If it is any of "190 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "5 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the lucky hold effect is not executed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of performing the lucky hold effect when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to save the hold is executed when the hold is small.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Winning information storage area 223f, hold notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW valid time counter 223k, hold effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky hold storage value 223p, short-term winning At least a timer 223q, a hold effect start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. A counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the special symbol variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball count command is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 396). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b. , A display hold ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223b is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 of FIG. 397), and the variation start flag 223d is turned on. It is turned off when the variable display on the display device 81 is set (see Z2502 in FIG. 406). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs variation display of the third symbol. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 3960), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z2506 in Figure 406). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first area). It has 4 areas), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area- Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in the various information predicted corresponding to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing of starting winning, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, or when the jackpot game starts or ends), or when the special symbol changes start (or). At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (so-called look-ahead effect).

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball even before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The hold notice counter 223g changes the number of holds (the display position of the hold symbol whose hold color has changed due to the digestion of the hold ball) when the hold color of the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Even if it changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color is variable. The hold notice counter 223g has a value of 0 on the hold notice counter 223g in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when the winning command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In a certain case (Z2403: YES), when the hold change value acquired from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No), there is a change in the hold symbol (see FIG. 348 (a)). ), The reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 403). For example, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the start is 4, the hold notice counter 223g is set to 4. The set hold notice counter 223g was decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuated in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, 1 is added in the range of 0 to 198 and the update is repeated. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a hold change selection table 222b, a hold character selection table 222i (hold character), a hold character change table 222j (hold character), and reach. There is an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not the hold effect during reach can be executed) and a lucky hold lottery table 222p (whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Further, when making these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to prevent the update cycle of the effect counter 223h from synchronizing with other counters and timer values, and the selection result is a part. I try not to be biased toward the selection result.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for storing numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (Z2801), and when it is determined to be in the standby state (Z2801: Yes). When it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, when the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting the effective time (valid period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 performed during the change of the special symbol or the like. The SW effective time counter 223k has a fluctuation pattern accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 when the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). When set (Z2803: Yes), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. When the set SW effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and when the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW is set. When the value of the effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), if the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is reset (0 is set), and the notice display command for display is used. Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The hold effect mode storage area 223 m contains information for discriminating a plurality of hold notice modes prepared according to the hold change when executing the notice effect regarding the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

In the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, the hold notice counter 223 g is 0 in the prize command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 403) executed when the prize command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is set (Z2404) according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired for the change type of the winning command of the received special symbol. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3". If so, the notice B mode is set.

The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223 m is the value of the hold notice counter 223 g, which is decremented by 1 each time the change of the special symbol starts in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 397) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. When becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223 m (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the hold effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 353 (a)). Yes, the special effect is executed according to the change in the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

In the short-term winning effect, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 is counted. When the value of is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts execution. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) in the short-term winning management process (Z2111). , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the reach hold effect, the change type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. In the case of (Z2321: Yes), when the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes) and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222m is used. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect start timer 223r is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). When the hold effect start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the reach effect hold effect management process (Z2112) after a lapse of time, a notice display command for performing the reach effect hold effect is set (Z2706). By doing so, the hold effect during reach starts execution. While the reach hold effect is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of the end of the change of the special symbol (Z2707: Yes), and the reach hold effect ends.

The lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2301: Yes) when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), and the lucky hold storage value. Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is accepted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts execution. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation when the effect is started. The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky hold storage value 223p is the time when the winning ball corresponding to the holding ball determined to be the jackpot is determined when the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command output at the start winning timing is determined to be a jackpot (look-ahead determination). It is a storage area in which the value of the number of reserved balls of is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223p is a case where the lottery result of the winning is a big hit in the lucky holding storage process (Z2408) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the start winning (Z2442: Yes). ), If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the hold effect mode is the lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 398) based on the lucky hold storage value 223p, and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 353 (a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes 1 or more to 4 or more. In the short-term winning timer 223q, 5 seconds is set as the timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), it is short-term until it becomes 0. The winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)), the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning effect with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes, and the player It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after winning 4 pieces. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 352 (a)), which is an effect related to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach fluctuation of the special symbol.

The hold effect start timer 223r is in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the variation type of the special symbol is the reach variation. In a certain case (Z2231: Yes), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222m. When it is possible to enable or reject the execution effect acquired from (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222n.

When the timer value is set in the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 until the on-reach hold effect is started to be executed in the reach hold effect management process (Z2112). If the hold effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No) in Z2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effect is performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ), The notice display command for performing the reach hold effect is set (Z2706), so that the reach hold effect starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is effective. The sensor effective time counter 223s gives notice when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When the effect display is set (Z2282: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), during which the touch sensor detection becomes valid. Further, when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. It is reset (Z2809) to (Z2828: Yes).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223t has a touch sensor 290 when the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 addition (Z2826) is performed, and when the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 396) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 375.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 141). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 390).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 140) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 411).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 376). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at the time of power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 375, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 346) with numbers from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the corresponding data is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entry. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 377. FIG. 377 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified over time.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 377). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 378). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 378).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 378, in the example of FIG. 378). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 380) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 380, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 376 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 411) (see Z3005 in FIG. 411). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 422 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 413 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 413 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 413 (b) see Z3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 420 to 421 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 422 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 422 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 379), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 379) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 379) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (Z3303 in FIG. 420). (See), the pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 421 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 379) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 379. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 379, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 413 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 420). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 423). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 423). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 424).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 of FIG. 424).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 380 to 393. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299, respectively in this embodiment). , 99, 239), clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (Z104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 381 to 393.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process (Z106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 388 and 389. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 290, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (Z104). This special symbol variation processing (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z201). Here, it is determined whether the big hit middle flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big hit is in progress. As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (Z203) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved balls in the special symbol N1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is acquired (Z203). .. After acquiring the value of each counter, the variation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 382, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined by the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z206). Z207). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the processing of Z208, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 383. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined in the processing of Z205 that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (second special). It is determined whether or not the variation is executed in the symbol) (Z210). If it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as that for the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed for the reserved ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set a number command (Z212). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the processing of Z213, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 384.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 383 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 384. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A special design lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the first special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A, a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C. If it is a jackpot of the second special symbol, it will be a jackpot A according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z218). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (Z218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), the stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability gaming state is set, the electric support gaming state (short-time gaming state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support gaming state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j. If is 1 or more (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (Z223), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

In the variation execution determination process, first, by setting the variation execution flag 203k to off (“0” as a value), initialization is performed (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the variable order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246), and the special figure 2 shows. If the variable execution is (Z246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is on. This probability variation flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the Z253 process. In the processing of Z253, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 358 (a)). Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the probabilistic gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z252, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the processing of Z254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random number values of "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these hits. If it matches the numerical value, it is judged to be a big hit of a special symbol. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255 processing.

In the processing of Z255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z253 or Z254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (Z255), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot), and it is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 359 (b)).

In this Z256 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z258). In the processing of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z275 process or the Z259 process is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 384. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 381) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail determination) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, which is first acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probabilistic change period (high probability gaming state) (Z272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic change period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process shifts to Z273 processing. In the processing of Z273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. In some cases, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z272, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable change state (Z272: No), the processing of Z274 is executed. In the processing of Z274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match, the special symbol is set. It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a big hit of the special symbol (Z275), and if it is determined to be a big hit of the special symbol (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot) and it is in the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined that it is a jackpot C (see FIG. 359 (c)).

In this Z276 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jacket A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of Z275, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (Z278). In the processing of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 385) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: No), the over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (Z305). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated by Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the processing of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the hold area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the hold area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set at the lowest position of the variable order storage area 203p (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 386.

Next, with respect to Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes of Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball opening 64 won the right second ball opening 640r or the second ball opening 640. Since the same process is executed only by changing the process to the above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins in the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are also stored as reserved balls. It is acquired and stored in the empty hold area of the corresponding special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter similar to the first special symbol are also applied to the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entry port 640r or the second entry opening 640. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hit probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the look-ahead processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the look-ahead process (Z320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 386 as described above, but to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r and the second entry opening 640. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, the process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of the fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With such a configuration, a storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game can be stored. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 386, a look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this pass / fail determination, the same processing as the Z255 processing in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383) and the Z275 processing in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384) is executed. .. It should be noted that this hit / fail judgment is the hit / fail judgment (discrimination) at the start of fluctuation (Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 383), Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 384)). It corresponds to the pre-judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the process). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (discrimination) from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. (Z353). Next, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect (Z352: No), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire the type (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, a winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. It is possible to recognize the result of the hit / fail judgment and the type of hit in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color for notifying the hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball in advance, based on the winning command. It is possible to execute an effect (such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the reserved ball). Further, as the winning command, one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the normal symbol variation processing (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 387 is a flowchart showing this ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol M). (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405 :. No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the processing of Z407, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol change start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 388, but the normal symbol (second symbol) is determined to be correct or not, and the fluctuation period (variable time or time) of the ordinary symbol is based on the result of the determination. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation (movement pattern of the game per normal figure) of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type is performed. Run.

In the processing of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 388 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or the processing of Z431 in FIG. 388, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to display a stop display (lighting display). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 of FIG. 388, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, and then the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 392) is executed, the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process, the Z431 process, or the Z435 process of FIG. 388. In this control example, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed even when it is a long-time hit or a normal hit, but it is not limited to this, and the symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit and displayed (for example). , If it is a long-time hit, it may be configured as "◎", and if it is a normal hit, it may be configured as "○").

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of the Z412, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 392) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of Z430 or the process of Z434 of FIG. 388 are completed. Since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: see FIG. 388) described later, the hit type of the normal symbol is set in Z413. It is configured to set the open / close control corresponding to. On the other hand, in the processing of Z412, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the processing of Z413 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 388) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380). It is a process to execute.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z421). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z421: Yes), the process proceeds to Z424. In the processing of Z421, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probable nor time-saving (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 358 (c)).

In the processing of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 358 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,7 to 239". , It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 358 (c)).

In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the normal symbol (Z425), and if it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (Z425: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (Z426). The hit type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal hit type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) with the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2, and the acquired value of the ordinary hit type counter is used. If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time hit, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal hit.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (Z427). In this Z427 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, it shifts to the processing of Z430.

When it is determined in the processing of Z426 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (Z426: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z432). Then, if it is a probability change or a time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of a special symbol (Z433). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434 processing. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the big hit of the special symbol, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of Z433, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the processing of Z430, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the processing of Z432, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (Z432: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the processing of Z434, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary symbol (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (Z435). In this Z435 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to Z436 processing.

In the processing of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (Z436), and if the probability change is in progress (Z436: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not probable (Z436: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the time of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In this embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times per long time are set to the same operation as the case where the normal symbol is hit in the probable change state and the time saving state, but the operation is not limited to this, and the opening time and the number of opening times are different. It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through gate passing process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passage process (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), determines whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and if the sphere has passed, a random number that normally hits. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z503). : No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the empty hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4 area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z505), and this process ends. In the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 391, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 345) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 392, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: No). Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 380), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 380), and if there is prize detection information, it corresponds to the number of acquired balls for the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 381) and the start winning process (see FIG. 385) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 386) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of Z412 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 387), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the change is caused by the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process or the Z279 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 384). When the pattern is set, the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 383), or the Z277 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 384) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 383) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of Z258, the processing of Z258, the processing of Z276 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 384), or the processing of Z278. Stop display (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 388), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 387), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process or the Z431 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 388). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process is shifted to Z1001 and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, in the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as that of the Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per normal) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 390 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And send (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state changes of the games performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (Z901). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 393. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 392), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (big hit) is executed. Opening port) This is a process for releasing or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 393), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The Z219 process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 381) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot starts (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set (Z1101: Yes). Z1115), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. Will be sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, when the big hit of the special symbol is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the big hit of the special symbol is in progress (Z1102). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the processing of Z1102, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z1102: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing is completed. do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal time is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the processing of Z1108, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 392) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1110, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the processing of Z1111, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability variation flag 203m is set to on (Z1113), and then the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to off (Z1114). End the process.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 394 to 410, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the Z2118 is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this startup process (see FIG. 395). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 395), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z2118. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of the Z2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to the Z2008 process.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of Z2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to the Z2208 process.

If the power off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is in the middle of executing the power off process of Z1318. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 395). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the Z2118 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed even after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (Z2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of Z2008 via the processing of Z2004 to Z2006 is started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (Z2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). It should be noted that this state command indicates whether or not the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203i in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 391) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the Z2012 process that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013). .. Here, the long-time open flag 203i is turned on when it indicates that the received state command is hit for a long time, and the long-time open flag 203i is set when it indicates that it is not a long-time hit. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when the processing of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the processing of Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the Z2101 process this time was executed (Z2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z2101: No), the process of Z2113 to Z2112 is not performed and the process proceeds to Z2113. In the process of Z2101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) of Z2102 to Z2112, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Z2113, the variation display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process shifts to the Z2105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 409.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z2109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 407, but a specific effect (notice effect) is achieved by measuring the period during which a predetermined number of reserved balls are generated and within the predetermined period. ) Is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the process of the reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the reach hold effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408, but a predetermined number of hold balls are held during the period when the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode. A process of setting a specific effect (notice effect) for notifying the player that the game is to be accumulated is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, the command determination processing is executed (Z2113). The details of this command determination process (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 396. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When the variation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. The details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When a stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. ..

If the stop type command is not received in the process of Z2203 (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 403, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, the winning / failing determination result, the variation type, etc. The pre-determination for determining is executed, and the setting process for executing each hold effect determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (Z2208: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (Z2661), and this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 397, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one of the processes in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396), will be described. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), a variation pattern (effect mode) of a detailed special symbol, a notice display mode, a hold notice display mode, and the like are set based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 397), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, a display notice display command is set in the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223 g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display notice display command is a command for instructing to display various notice effects (for example, a comment notice suggesting a hit / miss determination result, a mini character notice, etc.) determined based on the fluctuation pattern.

When the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), even when the effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the look-ahead determination result is performed, the value of the reserved ball is determined by the value of the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and after the change of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball whose color of the hold ball is changed is started, it is hidden because the change is stopped, and the hold change value. Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started.

Here, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed in the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a prize in the past and setting a mark symbol (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the reserved balls is performed. Run.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 398), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: No), this process ends. In the process of Z2302, when it is determined that the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0, it means that the number of hold balls at the time of winning the special symbol determined to be a big hit is not stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect can be produced is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p provided in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 374 (c)). Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and determining whether to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls. Is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) is feasible (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), the display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 368) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2301, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed due to the previous fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this processing is performed. To finish. If it is determined in the processing of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2308: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the variation and ends when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special symbol is changed once, but the effect is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in the period in which the change is executed a plurality of times. You may. The number of changes in the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined and ended when the change in the number of times is executed, or a lottery to decide whether to end the each variable lucky hold effect. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, when all the reserved balls are exhausted, or when the demo display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), when a change of a special symbol to be a reach display mode is executed, a game is performed so as to store a hold ball in the reach display mode. Executes the process for executing the effect (one of the special hold effects).

Here, with reference to FIG. 399, the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the pending effect setting process (Z2228) during reach.

In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 399), first, it is determined whether the reach is changing (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is changing (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the change is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not normal (Z2322: No), this process is terminated as it is. When the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2232: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2223). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2233: No), this process ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special hold effect is being executed. Therefore, the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent the hold effects from being duplicated. .. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), it is executed by the effect lottery table 222m during reach (see FIG. 374 (a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h. Acquires the propriety of the production (Z2324). Here, in the reach effect lottery table 222m, a determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and whether or not the reach hold effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

It is determined whether the hold effect during reach (execution effect) can be executed by the process of Z2324 (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not feasible (Z2325: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 374 (b)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and this process is terminated.

In this way, according to the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the reach display mode is determined, and no other special hold effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing the reach hold effect is executed, and the timing for starting the execution of the reach hold effect is set by winning the lottery, so that the special symbol in the reach display mode changes. When it is started, the hold effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the current number of hold balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball during reach, and the game store side. Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 397. After executing the hold effect setting process (Z2228) during reach, the hold lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this holding lid setting process (Z2229), a process necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing this holding lid setting process (Z2229).

In the holding lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 400), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of the special reserved effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), it is held at the time of short-term winning in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365 (a)) provided in ROM 222. The holding lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366 (a)) (Z2342). The display holding lid command is set based on the value of the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2342 (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. As described above, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 349 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 366 (a)), the display mode of the variable lid symbol P different from the normal time (normally held). It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule for displaying a symbol and a rule for displaying one reserved symbol at intervals is displayed with a rule for displaying two reserved symbols.

As a result, when the period required for storing 1 to 4 reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable lid symbol P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time, so that the variable lid symbol is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for the reserved ball to be stored is a short period. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so that the reserved ball is memorized earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, the fun of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2343: Yes), the hold lid range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 365) in the hold lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365) during the reach effect. (See FIG. 366 (b)) to acquire the holding lid range value (Z2344). Based on the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2344, the holding lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach hold cover range selection table 222d5, the reach indicating that it is the timing to execute the reach hold hold effect. By receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the display hold lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the hold effect during reach is determined, the mode in which the display of the variable lid symbol P is changed is set, and the display mode is set according to the execution timing of the hold effect during reach. Since the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in, it can be determined that the variable lid symbol P has executed a special hold effect different from the normal time.

On the other hand, in the treatment of Z2343, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 in the processing of Z2345 (Z2345: Yes), the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 365) in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 365). Based on (see 365 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2344). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 353 (a) to 353) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable lid symbol P is the same as the execution of the hold effect in the normal state. A display mode in which one reserved symbol is vacated from the last reserved symbol is set).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice B mode (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 348 (a) to 348 (b), when the number of reserved balls is four or more and the color of the reserved symbol is variable, it is suggested to the player not to let the reserved balls enter any more. Determine if the hold effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display showing the color change of the variable lid symbol P based on the hold lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 367 (b)) provided in the ROM 222. Set the hold lid command for (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 348 (b), the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable color, and the notice B for notifying the player that the game is to be performed so as to restrict the further increase of the reserved balls. When the game of the mode (the number of reserved balls is 4 or more) is being performed and more reserved balls are stored, the variable lid symbol at the position where the variable lid symbol P and the displayed reserved symbol overlap is performed. A setting is executed in which the display color of P is variably displayed in a color different from the normal color (for example, green or the like). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game so as not to memorize the reserved ball.

After executing the processing of Z2348, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2349) based on the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365 (d)), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed. End the process. According to the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 365 (d)), if there is a holding effect in the normal mode as in the case where there are four holding balls as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the holding ball 5 The variable lid symbol P corresponding to the position of the item is hidden, but it can be configured to be displayed by a special rule such that it is in the display state. As a result, in the notice B mode in which the hold effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of hold balls, the variable lid symbol P is used to make the player think that the four hold balls are the upper limit. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the reserved ball is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid symbol P.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2347, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved symbol is changed or set, and the variable lid symbol P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved symbol. It is determined whether or not the hold effect to be displayed without an interval is being executed.

When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the hold lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 365 (c)) (see FIG. 365 (c)). Z2351). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed to end this processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (Z2352). Here, the determination as to whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In addition to the fluctuation type (out of reach, hit) data, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 includes whether the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state) or the probability variation gaming state (high). It is also output with data indicating whether it is a gaming state with probability electric support) or a normal gaming state (game state without low probability electric support).

When it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (a state in which the time reduction gaming state or the probabilistic gaming state is set) (Z2352: Yes), it is based on the time reduction holding lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 366 (c)). And the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. It should be noted that, unlike the normal game state, the variable lid symbol P is the 7th and 8th reserved balls in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 6 during the time reduction (the state where the electric support is present). Is displayed only at the position where is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved symbol is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to be hidden. As a result, the variable lid symbol P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal gaming state during the time reduction with the electric support in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and in a state where a large number of reserved balls are frequently generated. , The load of the display control of the variable lid symbol P is suppressed from increasing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z2352: No), that is, when it is determined that the hold effect of the normal mode is in progress, the normal hold lid range selection table 222d1 (FIG. Based on 365 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold lid setting process (Z2229), the hold character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 401, the reserved character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 397) executed by the MPU221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the hold character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one reserved ball is digested by newly starting the fluctuation, the first ball entry port 64, which is the starting port, is used. , The number of reserved balls was 3 by entering either the right second entry port 640r or the second entry opening 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter). From the state (the total of the values with 223b is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the total of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing to a state.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set hold effect mode are set. And the effect counter 223h, the reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 369 (b)), the display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined and set by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode. .. As a result, the characters displayed depending on the background type and the hold effect mode can be different, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of the character to be determined may be varied depending on the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach or the like). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is preliminarily judged as a hit while it is on hold or a special symbol that is changing depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the reserved ball being held is stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set when it is displayed in super reach depending on the character type, that character is displayed, and super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is executed. You can expect that early.

Further, also in this control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the fluctuation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high expectation of a big hit by the look-ahead judgment or the advance hit / fail judgment result big hit. Since it is easy, by displaying the character of J2 and the character of J3, it is possible to expect the player to execute the super reach type and to expect the hit / fail determination result to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from 3 to 4, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved characters is set (Z2365), and this process is terminated. In this way, since the character is set to be hidden when the number of reserved balls becomes less than 4, it is possible to inform the player of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not the over-winning has occurred is executed by determining whether or not the over-winning information command output when the start winning is exceeded from the main control device 110 and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is received. To. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), the character is changed by the hold character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. Select the reserved character, set the display character command (Z2267), and end this process. If it is determined that the over-winning has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), the present process is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 370), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the character of J3, which is easy to be set when the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or the expectation of the big hit is high in the fluctuation pattern type, is selected while the notice A mode or the notice B mode is decided. Is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. If the character of J2 is selected, or if the character of J0 or J1 that is difficult to select is selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, the character of J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set to a high degree of expectation that a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the hold effect by generating an over prize. It is configured to be able to. Changing this character is a privilege that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 397, the explanation will be continued. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed to end this process. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

Next, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the balloon is selected at the time of short-term winning in the balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 371 (a)) provided in the ROM 222. The contents of the balloon are acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 372 (a)) (Z2382). A display balloon command is set (Z2394) based on the balloon content acquired after executing the processing of Z2382, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the reach effect during balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 372 (b)) (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the balloon contents are acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 373 (a)) (Z2386), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). When it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 371 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 371 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving medium (time saving gaming state or probabilistic gaming state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time reduction is set (Z2391), the balloon content is acquired based on the time reduction balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 373 (b)) (Z2392), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Execute and end this process.

When it is determined in the processing of Z2391 that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon contents are acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 371 (b)) (Z2393). The above-mentioned Z2394 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the comment of the corresponding content is controlled to be selected for each hold effect mode, the comment content corresponding to the hold effect mode can be displayed to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, a winning command receiving process (Z2209), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 396) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command receiving process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, the pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 364 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2402). ..

Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 364 (b)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the processing of Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the current hold ball value (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b) is added to the hold notice counter 223g. (Total value of) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, the short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 404, but if it is the timing to execute the short-term prize hold effect, it is determined (the condition to execute is satisfied). (If so) The process of setting the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is executed. Next, the lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405, but if it is the execution timing, it is determined whether it is the timing (whether the condition is satisfied) to execute the lucky hold effect. Set the execution of the lucky hold effect. Next, the above-mentioned hold lid setting process (Z2409), hold character setting process (Z2410), and balloon setting process (Z2411) are executed to end this process. Since the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 400, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 402, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). If it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (during the time reduction) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424). If it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. As described above, when the period required for the four reserved balls to be established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term prize holding effect is set is set.

Next, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 403) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the winning is acquired from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). If it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current value of the number of reserved balls is 4 or less (Z2443: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the variation display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (Z2114). This variation display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the Z2505 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z2505 processing.

In the process of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). .. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring the period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute the short-term winning holding effect is executed is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1, (Z2604: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1, (Z2604: No), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In that case (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this way, when the short-term prize holding effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4. Not limited to that, the special effect status should be set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is completed (the timing when the hold balls enter up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period has elapsed). It may be configured in.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408, the reach hold effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the pending effect start processing (Z2112) during reach. In this reach hold effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the reach hold effect and setting the display mode of the reach hold effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2, (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is subtracted by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). If it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2, (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command indicating that the hold effect during reach is executed is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 0 in the processing of Z2702 (Z2702: Yes), the timing at which the variable time (variable period) of the special symbol being changed ends (the variable period has elapsed). (Z2707). When it is determined that it is the variation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this process is terminated. As described above, in the hold effect during reach, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the change time of the special symbol, which is the reach variation mode, elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 409), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2801: No). Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW effective time counter 223k (Z2802). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (Z2805). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the process of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 410.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect). (Z2809). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2811). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813) which is a process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z1307: FIG. 409) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in an effective period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2282). When it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is added by 1 and updated (Z2826), and the notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is provided. Set the display command (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to the initial value 0 (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 409. In the processing of Z2801, when it is not in standby mode (Z2801: No), or in the processing of Z2802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: No), the SW valid time counter 223k. It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). When the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2810). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. Since the sensor input process (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 410, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2808 that the advance notice is not being produced (Z2808: No), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 410 is skipped. Is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2811). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2812) based on the set fluctuation pattern, and the sensor input process (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this process. If the fluctuation pattern is not set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: No), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, there are some fluctuation patterns in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and some in which the effect using the frame button 22 is not set. If not, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223k. Will be done.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 411 to 424, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 411, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of the Z3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 412) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 412, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Z3101. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of Z3102, the processing of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 411. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (Z3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 422 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 376 is drawn. The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command for display is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, the interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Z3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413 (a). FIG. 413 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 413 (b). FIG. 413 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 379) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 413 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 414.

In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 420 to 421.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (Z3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simple display setting process (Z3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), which are determined by the task process (Z3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 424.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 376) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed to process the Z3304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 414 to 419, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414), as shown in FIG. 414, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Z3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern is determined. The command process is executed (Z3405), and the process returns to the Z3401 process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (a). FIG. 415 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 415 (a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. It is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by Z3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a display variable type command (Z3406: Yes), the stop type command processing is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401 processing.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (b). FIG. 415 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 415 (b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variable effect to be performed is finally set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the process of Z3401 in FIG. 414.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 414, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 416 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. And the setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the fact that it is a big hit is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 416 (a). FIG. 416 (a) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 416 (a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). Determine the transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table to be displayed at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received notice display command, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is measured by the timekeeping counter. It is set to 233h (Z3704) and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 416 (b), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 416 (b) (Z3411). FIG. 416 (b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode of the change pattern corresponding to the background mode is switched. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode of the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the rear image change flag to turn on the rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command. Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and other rear images are turned on. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set rear image change flag is turned on, the changed rear image type is specified from the set rear image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the received rear image command may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display switching command in the processing of Z3410 (Z3410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold cover command for display (Z3412: Yes), the hold cover command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the holding lid command processing (Z3413) will be described with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing this hold lid command process (Z3413).

In the holding lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the holding lid of the display effect corresponding to the received display holding lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other holding lids on (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z3904). ), The pointer 233f is initialized to 0, and (Z3905) returns to the command determination process.

When the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display hold lid command in the processing of Z3412 (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a hold character command for display (Z3412: Yes), the hold character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the reserved character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 417 (b). FIG. 417 (b) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command process (Z3415).

In the hold character command process (Z3413: FIG. 417), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other reserved characters to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4004). ), Initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination process.

When a hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no display pending character command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), the balloon command process is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 418), first, the display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the blowout set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and the others The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the balloon of is set to off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the blowout set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4104). , The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set to correspond to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is configured to be added to the set display data table and set, but it may be configured to newly set the display data table.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and there is an error command. If (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 419), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Z4201 process, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the Z4202 process is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 is set to turn on the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands in the processing. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 414. When it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the processing of Z3401.

In the Z3401 processing that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes). ), The processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the Z3416 process that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 376 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Extract only the type commands, execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 415 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and perform other processes. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 415 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 420 to 421, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 420, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 421 (a). FIG. 421 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the Z4401 process, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 420. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, the pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 421 (b). FIG. 421 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Z4501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (Z4505), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (Z4503: No). Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 421. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed by the Z4306 processing together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (Z4309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the Z4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (Z4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to stop and display the image (FIG. 376) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 422 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 422 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is off (Z4601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 423.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 422 (b). FIG. 422 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Z4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4702 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4703 process. Further, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4703.

In the processing of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the Z4703 process (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 413 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 413 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 414 to 419) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 420 to 421 (b)) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device is set. An image at normal time is displayed in 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 423) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 422 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, a normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the display setting process (Z3303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Further, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z4805. In the Z4805 process, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

In this Z4806 process, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4806 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that this normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process. Further, as a result of the Z4805 process, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (Z4808), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the Z3603 process is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the Z4809 process. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The discrimination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of Z4809, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: No), the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined by the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 379 is generated (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the Z4902 process (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and used resident from the state of the signal. You may check whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can be used. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scan is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is a transfer data that is not full data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table and the predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time during which important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed in the display control device 114. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process, and the MPU 231 is used as image data. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 is not used to manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the address is used. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above control example, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above control example, a case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may contain a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above control example, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetorescent RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and the MPU 231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (command code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is configured even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be able to directly connect the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 port input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port is not always limited to this. A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously held while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from. good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is transmitted to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read out). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power-on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be non-executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above control example, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data can be completed from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be configured to be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are input. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage status of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. When the power is turned on, the image may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is used. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further sends an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error command. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, by turning on the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 421 (a)). In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the intentional entry of the ball into the entry port due to the change in the flow of the ball due to the magnetic field such as a magnet. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main control device 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. Upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, it is determined that the display control device 114 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, and the display control device 114 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player acts illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone in the time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing with the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required for drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured in.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In the above control example, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the load of processing required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command for display in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation effect can be, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data table corresponding to the specified paper for the variation effect is put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In the above control example, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the definite display data table corresponding to the definite display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 before the definite display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the definite display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the definite display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but it is not always the case. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the main image at the time of turning on the power is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of turning on the power of the resident video RAM 235, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of turning on the power can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on. You can immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problem when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the fluctuation display by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when instructing the transfer of the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, a transfer instruction for image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 is used in the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear image is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the rear image of the super reach that appears frequently or is expected to be high in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data specified in 1 to the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information regarding the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. good. Further, as a rear image, not only an object that scrolls or changes in color tone with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning to be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above control example, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, a case has been described in which one first entry slot 64, in which a lottery for a special symbol jackpot is started when a ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13, but this is not always the case. A plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is independently detected and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the reserved ball number counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above control example, the hold ball number command is mainly used every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to 4 times. However, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertical. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entry port 64, a right second ball entry port 640r, and a second ball entry port 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means), and the game ball is a starting port. By entering one of the balls, a winning lottery (judgment) is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (determination result) is a win (specific determination result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types of the jackpot game are set, and the benefits given to the player are set to be different depending on the type. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the hit type in which a high-probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after the jackpot game, and the player's profit is smaller than the time-saving gaming state (first special gaming state) after the jackpot game. The second special game state) is set, and the hit type and the like are set.

The hit / fail determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After the variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the judgment result by stopping and displaying in a display mode for showing the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result). .. When a game ball enters the starting opening during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entry. Up to 4 reserved balls can be entered into the first entrance 64 (lottery of the first special symbol), and up to four balls can be entered into the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special). Up to 4 balls are stored as upper limit values for the lottery of symbols).

When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. For the reserved ball, the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special symbol before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variablely displayed. Pre-discrimination is performed in which (variation pattern type) is pre-determined. When the pre-discrimination result is a specific discrimination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special hold effects, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, the hold ball is generated further, or the overflow prize is generated so that the starting port is filled with more than the maximum number of hold balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the ball, the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed, and the like is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can be made to win more game balls at the starting port, and the profit of the game store can be increased. In addition, by inserting the game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment, the type of variation, etc. can be determined from the content of the comment. It can be granted and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as one of the special hold effects, a hold effect (notice B mode) is set, which is executed so that the game is performed so that the hold balls are not generated from the state where the color of the hold balls is changed. In this hold effect, the variable lid symbol P is displayed in the display area where the hold symbol is displayed, and the position of the hold symbol displayed when the variable lid symbol P is won next to the hold symbol whose color is variable. Is displayed on the screen to notify the player that the game is to be played so that the reserved ball does not occur. In addition, the comment display also displays content suggesting that the number of reserved balls will not be increased.

Further, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and up to eight reserved symbols in total are the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). The area where the reserved symbol is displayed is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and even if the reserved symbol is not displayed in the area where the reserved symbol is displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed, 4 variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved symbols are displayed even in normal times, and each variable lid is displayed. On the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable lid symbol P in this way, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved symbol is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Further, when the reserved ball is generated and the reserved symbol is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is also changed. In the hold effect which is the normal mode in the normal mode, the variable lid symbol P changes to hide the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth hold symbol is displayed when the number of hold balls is three. Then, similarly, the 6th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so as to be hidden, that is, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so that two reserved symbols are vacant for the reserved symbols for three or more reserved balls. The closure. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

Further, it is configured to execute a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P is changed depending on the period in which the holding ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variable type displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold effect is being executed by the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P. Further, the special hold effect is set depending on the hold / fail judgment result of the prior judgment, the variation type, the pass / fail judgment result of the special symbol displayed in the variation, and the variation type being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is fired on the left side or the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, and the second ball entry port 640 (electric combination). (The object 640a is in the open state) is configured to enter the ball in the same manner, but the route is not limited to this, and the route that makes it easy to enter the second entry port 640, the first entry opening 64 or the right second entry opening 640r. The arrangement of the nails and the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery using only the second special symbol, or to play a game so that the game ball does not enter the second entrance 640. Further, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 425 to 461. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be alternately changed, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. It differs from the first control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change their order depending on the gaming state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 425. FIG. 425 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, a first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the distribution device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710a, the distribution device 700 causes the first ball entry. Although the ball is configured to be distributed to the mouth 64 and the second ball entry port 640, in this second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are used as they are. It differs in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 426 to 430, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the changed point and the content of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 to 428. In the first control example, the special symbol in which the variation start is executed is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the second control example, the variation is given priority over the second special symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to be executed.

FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 428 (a), when the special symbol variation continues to be executed in the first special symbol, the effect display is continuously produced as shown in FIG. 428 (b). To execute. The continuous effect is a set period for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on the winning prize during the continuous effect.

FIG. 428 (a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 428 (a), in the second control example, the running pedestal symbol m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81, and is small. In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and the reserved symbol are displayed. In addition, characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing a story-like effect on the characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 427 and 429.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol change is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 428 (c) and 428 (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 426 (c), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, the first special symbol is used as shown in FIG. 426 (d). The continuous production period of is interrupted, and during the suspension period, a special production with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 428 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol is changed during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), the reserved ball is variably displayed in red. Further, the shellfish K1, the shellfish K2, and the shellfish K3 are displayed in the display area Dm, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is being executed. When displayed as, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 426 (c) and 426 (d). In the second control example, even if the variation is being executed with the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entry port 640, the variation is preferentially executed with the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 426 (c), if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2 while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is executed as shown in FIG. 426 (d). The continuous effect during the variation execution of is interrupted, and the special effect is executed during the variation execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 428 (b), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shellfish are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a story-like effect is executed. With this configuration, it is easy to understand that the player has entered the special production period from the continuous production period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous effect of the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special effect of the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special effect period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are waiting to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2, which is the special effect period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, depending on the special effect period. The suspended continuous production period is resumed.

The relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 427. FIGS. 427 (a) to 427 (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during the special symbol change and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous production period. In the second control example, when changing from the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 429 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 429, the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol is set to the mountain mode as the background mode from the sea mode, which was the period of continuous production. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. .. In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous production is being executed in the sea mode !!", and the player is in the continuous production period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Further, in the display area Dma, "The background is changed by pressing the button PUSH" is displayed, and the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 430. In the second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 430 (a). FIG. 430 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (FIG. 428 (a)). In the prize information related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 437), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes in FIG. 437), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off. When it is (Z5004: No in FIG. 437), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 437) and used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 233).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time correspond to each other. Whether or not to execute continuous production is specified. Specifically, the larger the number of currently reserved balls, the easier it is to execute continuous production, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is the lottery result indicating a big hit, the lottery result is out of order. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is easier to be executed than in the case of indicating.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to execute a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol changes to be executed), and when the continuous effect is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with a high expectation for the big hit, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438), the special symbol 1 reserved ball When the value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 438) and it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes in FIG. 438), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous effect again. Even in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 438).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the continuous effect even for the game ball newly won during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of executing the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period during which the continuous effect is executed longer than the maximum number of reserved symbols (4), it is possible for the player to know which reserved symbol the continuous effect is executed for. It can be difficult to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is defined in the above-mentioned contents, but other contents may be specified. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for measuring the current time, and the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed according to the time measuring content of the time measuring means. It may be specified in.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), the continuous effect may be executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even if the same continuous effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the timing (time) when the continuous effect is executed, so that the player can play the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress getting bored with. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, the guidance notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the remaining period (or the elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is advisable to provide a period notification means for notifying. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the player to perform the continuous production.

Further, a means for discriminating the operation content to the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the launch status (or the ball entry status) of the game ball are provided, and these discriminating means are provided. It may be specified that the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the determination result of the above, or the above-mentioned plurality of contents may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Further, in this control example, the stop command process (see FIG. 438) is performed by using the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the prize information related process (see FIG. 437). However, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect, but when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 437) and the stop command process (see FIG. 438). The selection table referred to in may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 438) is a big hit of the special symbol when the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 437). It is advisable to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period in which the continuous production is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the big hit, and the more the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 430 (b). FIG. 430 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac, the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae are used for the first control example described above. The difference is that the effect count counter 223af, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, the setting prohibition release flag 223ah, the time saving counter 223ai, the fluctuation number counter 223j, the operation invalidation flag 223ak, and the state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The effect counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of counter means for effect. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various advance notice effects, and the like. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Random number value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate at least with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can be updated to a different random number value for each of the production counters and perform a determination. Is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters possessed by the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as the effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not the continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various advance notice effect types. It is used when executing various determinations to be performed, and is updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 435) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In (every 1 ms), the update process is executed so that the values are different.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the values of the effect counters, since a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process. Even in this case, the same counter value is referred to, and the selected effect is suppressed from being biased. However, for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to select. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the update values of the effect counter, the value of the last 1st digit, the value of the last 2nd digit, and the last 1 digit and the lower value of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the 1st digit by the value of the 2nd digit. It is advisable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information-related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 437) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), the stop command processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 437). In (see FIG. 438), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110: Yes in FIG. 438), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 437), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 440) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 442) is executed in Z5204 of 441), it is set to off (see Z5401 in FIG. 442).

That is, does this continuous effect flag 223ab execute continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64? Is determined, and the fact that the determination result is to execute the continuous effect is retained until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol 1.

In this control example, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437), it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 437). ), It is configured to execute the continuous effect when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to start the continuous effect in the current variable display, and the continuous effect is based on the lottery result. May be configured to determine the variable display to start with. With this configuration, the timing when a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous production is started are different (the game ball enters the first entrance 64). After that, the continuous effect can be started with a variable display that does not execute the continuous effect), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

Further, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With this configuration, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing at which the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. It can be easily grasped by the player. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous effect, the game ball can be enthusiastically entered into the first entry port 64 while the special symbol is changing (during the change display execution), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. ..

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display during execution is determined, and the condition in which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device). Only when the variable display displayed in 81 is in a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect. It is good to configure it like this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added and displayed to the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to continuous production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous production is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 441) is executed, and the continuous effect command for display is set. If so (Z5406 in FIG. 442), it is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 442).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 443), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 438). When it is determined that the continuous effect does not continue (Z5106: No in FIG. 438 or Z5110: No), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 438).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, an event in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, continuous production is performed based on the winning information regarding the first special symbol (special diagram 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed in the normal state (a state that is not a probable change state or a time-saving state). It is configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the game is played at the second entrance 640a. It is configured so that the playability (type of special symbol change to be executed) is different between the probable change state and the time saving state where the ball is easy to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) even when the game state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit. The electric accessory 640a, which is attached to the second entry port 640a and regulates the entry of the game ball into the second entry port 640a, opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to perform a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, a game ball enters the second entrance 640a while performing continuous production using a plurality of prize information related to the first special symbol. In some cases, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed even though the continuous production executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem that the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, giving the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, if the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the first special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. It is configured to restart the continuous effect that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad indicates that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 441) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. When it is determined (Z5505: Yes in FIG. 443), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 443). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a “standby” display for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third symbol display device 81 (interruption display mode of FIG. 428 (b)). Set a display interruption command to execute (see ma) (Z5508 in FIG. 443). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 441). ).

With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the fluctuation (lottery) has priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, the continuous production is interrupted when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, and the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). Since the continuous production that had been interrupted can be resumed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 2) is completed, the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not related to the change status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to execute continuous production in correspondence with.

In addition, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the change of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) during the continuous production execution, it means that the continuous production is interrupted for the player. Because it is configured to notify the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable if the continuous production is suddenly ended, and to play the game while expecting that the continuous production will be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, and the background of the display screen is set to "sea background". This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect when the background is changed from "" to another background ("mountain background", "river background").

As described above with reference to FIG. 224 (a), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change (standby state). When the player operates the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation), the background of the display screen becomes "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 429), and "river background (see FIG. 429). It is configured to switch in the order of "river mode)".

Then, as the variation effect corresponding to the set background, the variation effect dedicated to each background and the variation effect common to a plurality of backgrounds are executed. With this configuration, the player can make different production modes of the variation effect for showing the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the fluctuation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode is being executed in the state where the sea mode is set. In addition, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if the player accidentally operates the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous effect and the background of the display screen is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data related to the continuous effect is deleted. Even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed and the effect of the effect is reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even when the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is produced. The execution data of is configured to be temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae, and after the background of the display screen is switched to other than "sea mode" during the execution of continuous effect, the background of the display screen is set to "sea" again. When the mode is switched to, the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous production disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442) (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 442), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". In some cases (Z5405: No in FIG. 442), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 442).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" in the effect return process (see FIG. 445) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 444), it is stored (Z2871: Yes in FIG. 445). Information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 445). After that, when the continuous effect is completed, the information (display data indicating the effect mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period (special figure variation number) during which the continuous effect is executed. This effect count counter 223af determines that continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 437) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 437), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a corresponding to the received prize command. The value of is set (Z5010 in FIG. 437). Then, when it is determined in the effect setting process (see FIG. 441) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes in FIG. 441), the continuous effect is set. The continuous effect setting process for this is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 441).

The effect count counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 442) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 442). With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 437), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. It is possible to execute the continuous effect using the period from the variation display executed in the set state until the variation display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuous effect is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect, for example, the continuous effect. The continuous effect may be started by changing the effect mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON. ) May be executed continuously when the number of fluctuations is two. Further, when the display mode of the new variation display is set (when the variation display setting process 2 is executed) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. The execution discriminating means may be provided, and the continuous effect may be executed when the execution discriminating means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous production is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected production.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to be turned on during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5011 in FIG. 437) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 437). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect (processes of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 437) in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 437) is skipped. This makes it possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by starting a new continuous production while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous production. Then, when it is determined in the stop command process (see FIG. 438) that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438), it is set to off. (Z5103 in FIG. 438).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous effect is performed in addition to the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, the timing when the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 437) is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON at the timing when the stop command is received at the time of termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 438) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 438). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 438), it is also set to ON when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 438).

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time saving state is set when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. The time reduction counter 223ai is set with a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the set number of time reductions when a state command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time reduction state is received from the main control device 110. , In the stop command processing (see FIG. 438), every time the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439) executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 438) is executed. It is subtracted by 1 (see Z5151 in FIG. 439).

Then, in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 439: Yes), the change occurs. 5 is set in the value of the count counter 223aj.

The fluctuation count counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the fluctuation count of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the special effect (see FIG. 428 (b)) is executed. ing. This is because the game ball enters the second entrance 640 in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is intended to be given as a privilege. However, when the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state in which the game ball is easy to enter into the second entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the holding thereof is obtained. The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (hold of special figure 2) may be executed in the normal state after the end of the time reduction. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect becomes frequent after the time reduction ends, and there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special effect.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within the predetermined period after the end of the time reduction. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. If it is determined that, the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which special effects frequently occur after the end of the time reduction.

In this control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction is 5 times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the holding ball of the special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state. Although it is surely prevented from being performed, a condition other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as a condition that the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value smaller than the upper limit (4) (for example, 3) may be set as a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the time reduction, a special effect will be executed, so the player willingly give the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 to the player. It can be saved and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, a condition using the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state is completed. A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the above may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached. It is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game performed by the next player.

In addition, a game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second entry port 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. If it is determined that the ball has been hit, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as a variation display for the ball.

This fluctuation number counter 223aj is special for restricting (prohibiting) the execution of special effects when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving middle processing (see FIG. 439) (Z5152: Yes in FIG. 439). A value indicating the number of fluctuations of the symbol (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 439), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 440) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 443), when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is referred to and it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502: No in FIG. 449). , The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 449).

The operation invalid flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen, and is set to on during the period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is executed. It is configured so that there is no such thing. With this configuration, the player mistakenly operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from switching while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 443) (Z5504 in FIG. 443), and the first special symbol is set in the effect setting process (FIG. 441). When setting the variation effect of (Special FIG. 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 441), it is set to off (Z5302 in FIG. 441). Then, while this operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 240) (the process of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 444) is performed. It will be skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 436), when it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256: Yes in FIG. 436), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 436). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In No. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the state command for indicating the current gaming state is output from the main control device 110, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the gaming state can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by the main controller in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 431 to 434. In the second control example, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 381) is special for the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 431), and the special symbol 1 variation start processing (FIG. 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start processing (FIG. 384) are special. The point that the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 432), the start winning process (FIG. 385) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 433), and the look-ahead process (FIG. 386) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 434). The main difference.

The special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 431. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 432) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 381) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 432), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined to be 1 or more (Z3311: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). By the reserved ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) described later. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the processing of Z265, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z331 that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z3311: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). When it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 395) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the processing of Z339, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340). The special symbol change start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 432. On the other hand, in the processing of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 432, the special symbol change start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 432) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: FIG. 383) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (214: FIG. 384) in the first control example. It is different to perform the processing of. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 433. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 433) in the second control example, the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed for the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 385) in the first control example, and the Z320 The difference is that the processes are collectively executed by the Z360 process. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 434, a look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is a process in the start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. Each value of the counter CS1 is acquired (Z362). Next, among the determination results specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results specified in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning information including the hit judgment result information showing the acquired hit judgment result, the hit type information showing the hit type judgment result, the stop type information showing the stop type judgment result, and the variation type information for showing the fluctuation type judgment result. Set a command (Z367) and end this process.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 435 to 445, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, is performed for the frame button input monitoring / effect for the first control example. The main point is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152) and the variation display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the process 2 (Z2151). It's a difference.

The command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and the present process is terminated. do. Since the processes of Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z2206 (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related process (Z2255) is executed to end this process. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 437.

When it is determined in the process of Z2253 that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). When it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the state information indicating the game state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), the stop command has been received. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. The details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 437, the winning information-related processing (Z2255), which is one of the processing in the command determination processing 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

The prize information-related process (Z2255) first stores the received information of the prize information command in the corresponding prize information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read out (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). When the continuous effect is not executed (Z5007: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set. It is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 438, a stop command process (Z2259), which is a process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that the time saving is in progress (Z5101: Yes), the time saving middle processing (Z5115) is executed, and this processing is terminated. The details of the time saving medium processing (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 439. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a. Is read out (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5105 that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a being 2 or more is obtained. Reading from the storage area 223f is executed (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: No), the continuous production flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is available (Z5107: Yes), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read out (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the above-mentioned Z5116 process is executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the big hit prize is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this process is performed. finish.

With reference to FIG. 439, a time saving medium processing (Z5115), which is one of the processing in the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving and medium processing (Z5115).

In the time saving middle processing (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is larger than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped and the present processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 440, the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (FIG. 435) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different from the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that the processes of Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired by the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. The details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 441.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is subtracted by 1 (Z5208). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 in the processing of Z5207 (Z5207: No), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 441, an effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If the variation is in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5303 that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223af is larger than 0 (Z5305). When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 442.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), the variation pattern of the mode without continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301 when it is determined that the change this time is not the change in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 443.

With reference to FIG. 442, a continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the final mode of continuous effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect count counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a continuous display command for displaying the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the effect count counter 223af is subtracted by 1 (Z5407). ), Set the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac to ON (Z5408), and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is waiting is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the above-mentioned processes of Z5407 to Z5408 are executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 443, a special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). When it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). When it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and the display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is being shortened in the processing of Z5501 (Z5501: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 in the processing of Z5502 (Z5502: No). The effect mode of the normal effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is off in the processing of Z5555 (Z5505: No), or when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: No). Yes), the process of Z5507 to Z5508 described above is skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 444, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151). The second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803 to Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 445, the effect return process (Z2852), which is one of the processes in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be explained. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return process (Z2852).

In the effect return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 444. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed and the present process is terminated.

<Third control example>
Next, the above-mentioned third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 446 to 449. In the third control example described above, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the change of the special figure 2 is performed. A configuration was used in which the continuous effect that had been interrupted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol after the end of was resumed. As a result, the continuous production can be executed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the continuous production can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the change in Special Figure 2), so whether or not the continuous effect is restarted. Since it is not possible to make the player excited, it has been required to further enhance the effect of the production. On the other hand, in the third control example, the interruption is based on the game content (the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the continuous effect inside, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production executed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the third control example, the continuous effect is easily restarted when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous effect is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 (the number of times the special effect is executed) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous production to the resumption is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player does not have a useless expectation for the big hit. In order to make it so, it is configured so that it is difficult to restart the continuous production.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 446. FIG. 446 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification. The third control example differs in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 449) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is set. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 449), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 448) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 447) (Z5602 in FIG. 448). In the processing of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: Yes in FIG. 448), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 448). Z5603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 448), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous production is interrupted. If so, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 448), and if it is determined that there is no winning information (Z5605: Yes in FIG. 448). , The value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 448), and the above-mentioned processing of Z5603 is executed.

That is, in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 448), when the interrupted continuous effect is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the continuous effect interruption is a predetermined number (3 times) or more. , Judgment as to whether or not to restart the continuous production is executed based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, and if the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is restarted. However, since it only disappoints the player, the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous effect is not restarted. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given a useless expectation for the big hit. In addition to being able to suppress this, it is possible to have expectations for the jackpot when the continuous production is resumed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 447 to 449, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441), which is one of the processes in the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 440), is partially changed from the second control example. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 447, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variation display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 447) in the third control example does not execute the Z5310 process for the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 441) in the second control example, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is changed and the continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read out (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined to be larger than 3, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the prize information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223f is read out. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the read prize information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: No), the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, if it is determined that there is a winning prize (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed and the present process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 449, the special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 449) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then the special effect 2 fluctuation counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 450 to 461. The fourth control example differs from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the player has an adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 450, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume are provided. They differ and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, a real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is composed of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. Further, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC292 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power supply 353, for example, a button type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply electric power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC292. The input / output port is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls registers to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored or an operation can be performed on the stored data. The register is provided with at least a timekeeping register and a time information storage area.

The timekeeping register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timekeeping information measured in this timekeeping register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC292) is obtained with respect to the turn-on time storage area of the RAM 223. ) Is stored or the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area is stored. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the time information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by RTC292) is stored in the input time storage area. ..

As a result, the clerk in the hall turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time from the power on that each pachinko machine 10 grasps. Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling an error), the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 451 and X, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 451 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 451 (b) is a schematic diagram showing no game. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and in X (a), a special symbol change is executed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram showing the customer waiting screen in the state where the pachinko machine is not, and X (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the first special symbol change after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. be.

As shown in FIG. 451 (a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment "Please wait for a while" notifying the period until is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and the volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. 1 ”is displayed, and a shaded area corresponding to the set value“ 1 ”is displayed on the gauge. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 451 (b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. To. The volume switching display S3 has a "switching" display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a indicating that the volume is lowered when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a right volume button 23b when the volume button 23b is pressed. It is formed from the volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. While the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the pachinko machine 10 is illegally acted (for example, the control content of the main control device 110 is illegally operated to aim for a big hit), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned on. Some turn it off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent activities, there are measures taken so that a loud noise is emitted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 temporarily emit a loud sound as a method for enhancing the effect of production, and in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating, a loud volume emitted when the power is turned on. There was a problem that the clerk of the amusement park missed the question. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change. Is configured to output a small sound. With this configuration, in a gaming machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game, it is possible to create a state of discomfort compared to the surrounding gaming machines by emitting an unnecessarily quiet sound. It can be easily found by the clerk of the amusement park.

Further, in this control example, since the player is configured so that the volume cannot be adjusted from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change, it is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player who has performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X (a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 451 (b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, and the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. It is composed. In this way, although the volume is internally output lower than the volume setting value "1", it is illegal by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the act from being aware that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine 10 for which fraud countermeasures have been taken by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed while the special symbol is fluctuating in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value "1" is output). , The volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 453 to 455. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 453. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. The control examples described above are different in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) are provided, and are the same except for the provision.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454 (a), the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 454 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is significantly different from the ROM of each of the above-mentioned control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table in which the set value of the volume that can be set by operating the volume button 23 is specified. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 455, in the volume table 222ca, in addition to the set values (set values "1" to "4") that can be set by operating the volume button 23, predetermined conditions after the power is turned on are satisfied. The set value (set value "A") to be set when the table is set is specified, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) in the first rotation is completed after the power is turned on. When the set value "A" is set, a sound having a volume of 15db (decibel) is output. Further, when the volume button 23 is operated and the set value "1" is set, a sound having a loudness of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 db (decibel) is output. When the sound is output and the setting value "3" is set, a sound with a size of 85db (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a sound with a size of 95db (decibel) is output. Sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on, but the initial value of the volume is set according to various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to be turned on only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and if the flag is set to on, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Or it may be configured to determine the time when the power is turned on and set a different set value as the initial value based on the determination result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 454 (b). In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cc, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 457) of the start-up process 4 (see FIG. 456). The installed value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 457). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 458) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 459).

The volume operation invalid flag 223cc is a flag for indicating a period for invalidating the volume change (setting value change) based on the operation of the volume button 23, and the volume change (setting value) based on the volume button 23 operation. Is set to on during the period when (change) is invalid. When it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 253) that the time counting time of the RTC is during business hours (for example, from 10 am to 10 pm), the volume operation invalid flag 223 cb is determined (Z6002 in FIG. 457:). Yes), it is set to on (Z6005 in FIG. 457) and referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 459) (Z6107 in FIG. 459). If it is determined by the processing of Z6107 that it is set to ON (see Z6107 in FIG. 459), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 451 (a)) is not displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 451 (b)). ) Is set for displaying only (Z6110 in FIG. 459). Then, it is set to off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 461) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 460) (Z5122 in FIG. 461). That is, when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on, it is set to off.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is a thing. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is accidentally pressed during the game.

If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation while the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is made. It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared at a volume higher than the volume or the maximum volume set for operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clear and aiming at a hit random value.

Further, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by the operation until one fluctuation at the time of turning on the power is completed. Operation When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a volume lower than the set minimum volume, the voice such as BGM and the sound effect (directing voice) are output, and the volume is set in the third symbol display device 81. May be configured to display a display indicating that the volume is maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With this configuration, when the game starts when the game store opens after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (volume setting on the previous day), resulting in a loud volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by the output in. Furthermore, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, it is possible to make the player aware that the volume is low while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that, regardless of when the power is turned on, by switching to the demo screen, the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum and the volume setting screen may be displayed. Further, after the game is started (the change of the special symbol starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume lower than the minimum volume is continued during the period when the special symbol is changed. The display color (volume symbol and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation)) can be changed depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-reading result), which is stored on hold. It may be configured to notify the degree of expectation of a hit. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game at a quiet volume and raise the volume at the timing when the expectation is high, until the fluctuation with high expectation or the holding memory is performed.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 456 to Z324, the control process in which the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example is executed will be described. In this fourth control example, the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the start-up process, the volume setting process (Z2171), and the sound editing / output process (Z2109) are added to the main process for the first control example. The main difference is that the processing is added and the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

With reference to FIG. 456, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 456) in the fourth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 412) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 457, the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read out (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the present is during business hours (Z6002). When it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON. (Z6005), this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 458, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 4. The main process (FIG. 458) in the fourth control example differs from the main process (FIG. 395) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 459, a volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 458) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). When it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying the volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, a voice setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the setting volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and the adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, when the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), the display volume command for indicating the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 460, the stop command process 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 4 (Z2259). The stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command process (FIG. 438) in the second control example in that a volume-related process (Z5120) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 461, a volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation invalid flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z5122), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed and the present processing is terminated.

<About the 5th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 462 to 482. In the fifth control example, the control process relating to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 142) will be described. Only the differences will be described with respect to the first control example, and the description thereof will be omitted for the same configuration.

In the fifth control example, mainly when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, error processing during the initial operation and initial operation of the tilting device 310, and control processing and error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during a normal game. The processing will be described.

With reference to FIGS. 462 (a) and 462 (b), a display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In FIG. 462 (a), in the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110), the tilt operation timer 223db described later by the tilt device 310 is 0 ( An abnormality notification display mode (error) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when it is not detected at the origin position even when the initial operation period elapses when the initial operation is completed and the origin position is reached). It is a figure which showed display).

As shown in FIG. 462 (a), based on the fact that the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed. The text "Button return error A, please call the staff" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the employees of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. .. In this control example, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends during the initial operation, an error display as shown in FIG. 462 (a) is configured. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, a normal game in which the player may not be able to perform the normal operation predetermined by the production or the like by hindering the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding the operation of the tilting device 310 by hand or the like. Even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, no error is displayed immediately, and the tilting device 310 is operated four times for each of three fluctuations of a predetermined specific condition (for example, a special symbol). When an abnormality is detected continuously until the abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), the error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. Regardless, it is configured to suppress problems that hinder it.

It should be noted that the error display at the time of initial operation is a mechanical (including a control abnormality) abnormality by displaying an identifiable display as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. 462 (a). It is configured so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 462 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in the production of the game during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the origin sensor does not detect the movement (movement) to the origin position even during the period when the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not immediately displayed and an internal abnormality occurs. The status indicates the state in which The text "Button return error B Please call the staff" is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81, and an error display is executed to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. Will be done.

Here, by displaying a character called "button return error B" different from that at the time of the initial operation, it is configured so that it can be easily identified as an abnormality during the normal game. As described above, in this control example, the error display is displayed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured to suppress frequently executed problems. Further, when an error display is executed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a gaming method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error operation of the tilting device 310 at an early stage by confirming the game method by the hall employee or the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 465, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 463 shows a period (origin) during which the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position when the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is executed as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol). It is a timing chart in the example in which the origin sensor does not detect even if the return is completed).

When the fluctuation display of the normal reach deviation A (variation time (variation period) 30,000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later is obtained. If it is collated with any of the above and matches the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 470 (a)), which will be described later, is determined. In the tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 470 (a)), the tilting device 310 is raised to the highest position (see FIG. 169), and then the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 170 as a tilting motion. After the operation of repeating the ascending position (see FIG. 169) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, the operation of descending to the position shown in FIG. 159, which is the origin position, is executed (set).

When the normal reach deviation A is executed, the third symbol is the reach display mode (the third symbol of the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (T1). It will be temporarily stopped (stopped). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, it will be described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the change of the special symbol. When the detection is detected by the detection sensor 324, the operation validity period (T5) for determining that the detection is valid is set.

As shown in FIGS. 463 and 470 (a), the drive motor 342 is 210 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 159) 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is started (T1). By step rotation, the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 470 (a)). ). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and is in the unlocked position. It is moved to (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 470) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengagement position to the locking disengagement position, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise). By being rotated, the rotary claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is subjected to the torsion spring 315. Raised by the force of. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 169), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 50 degrees counterclockwise and moves downward 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 169). It is moved to the rotated fanning descent position (see FIG. 170) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 470 (a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 170) by 50 steps, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated 50 degrees in the clockwise direction, and the tilting device 320 is again tilted. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 470 (a))).

Then, again, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest rising position to the lowering position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 470 (a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position from the lowering position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the ascending position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 470 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 470 (a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 477) is executed, and the driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 471 (a)) described later. When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 169), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the tilting device 320 is driven in the direction of descending to the origin position. Is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 463, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to be lowered by the player at the highest position. In such a case, as already described in the eighteenth embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b is idled so that the drive motor 342 is being driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured so as not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 471 (a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310, which is an internal (abnormal state that is not a state of notifying to the outside) described later.

In this way, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position due to being held by the player or the like, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be driven by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. It can be idled to prevent damage to the drive motor 342, the transmission gear 343b, and the like. Further, by configuring so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that the origin return operation has an abnormality, it is configured so that it can be internally identified as an abnormal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 464, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 463) is executed, the origin sensor is executed even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 ms) has elapsed. The control executed after the tilting motion status is set to "4" without turning on will be described. In FIG. 464, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure) are executed. It is a timing chart when it is done.

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", as shown in FIG. 464, a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every 3 fluctuations of the special symbol. Will be done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by the retry operation four times in a row (retry operation for every three fluctuations is four times) while maintaining "4" as the tilt operation status value until the origin sensor is detected. , The error display shown in FIG. 462 (b) is executed.

As a result, the effect of raising the tilting device 310 is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player plays a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation to perform the origin position. Even if an error occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol change is executed a specified number of times (3 times) without immediately notifying the error as in the case of the initial operation error. If it is determined that the game has not been able to move to the origin position continuously, an error message will be displayed, and the error message will be displayed frequently due to mischief by the player. It is possible to suppress problems that make you busy.

Next, referring to FIG. 465, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing of the change will be described. FIG. 465 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 to be executed when the effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advance notice effect that the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. The operation is executed, and the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven at the timing when it is determined that the touch sensor 290 has detected the on, and the origin detection operation is executed. FIG. 465 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status is maintained at "4". .. As a result, the retry operation is continuously executed every three fluctuations, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be executed.

The player usually operates the firing handle with his right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When the player is playing the game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is possible that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand, so that the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on. By operating the tilting device 310 to detect the origin, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is configured to be executed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. It may be configured to execute the origin detection operation so that the origin detection operation is performed in a state where the player's holding is released more reliably. Further, the touch sensor 290 is not limited to the frame button 290, and the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform a warning effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). , A mobile phone or the like may be used to perform an effect of reading a three-dimensional code or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Of course, it may be a production that notifies the user to use both hands by voice.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 466 to 471. FIG. 466 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example, respectively. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that described in detail with reference to FIGS. 142 to 222, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is in the lower limit position, the tilting device 310 is driven so as to be released from being locked so as to prevent the tilting device 310 from ascending at the lower limit position. When the locking is released, the vibration force in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 of the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, is assisted and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. ..

On the other hand, in the state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward and moved to the origin position by rotating in the opposite direction to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotary claw member 347 (see FIG. 159), and the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 150, and is composed of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 159 is the lower limit position. In the state regulated by, the left side detection sensor 324L detects the left side detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right side detection sensor 324R does not detect the right side detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Therefore, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left side detection sensor 324L and the left side detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilting device 310 can be determined to have been operated by the player at the lower limit position.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position but also when it is restricted at the lower limit position. It can be used for various productions. For example, if the tilting device 310 is set to have a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the tilting device 310 can determine the expectation of the hit / fail judgment result. Can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and by driving the voice coil motor 352, it repeatedly vibrates from the back side direction to the front side side of the tilting device 310, causing the tilting device 310 to vibrate. , The purpose is to perform an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when the tilting device 310 is touched. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the urging force of the spring against the gravity, but the rising force weakens due to the own weight of the tilting device 310, but by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises. , The rising force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the rising force is weakened by its own weight.

<About the electrical configuration in the 5th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 467. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 467 (a). FIG. 467 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the operation effect selection table 222da, the tilting operation scenario table db, the origin detection operation A table 222dcc, the origin detection operation B table 222dd, and the tilting initial operation table 222de are added. are doing.

The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 469 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a determination value of the effect counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability is set according to the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting motion scenario is set for the judgment value for executing the operation effect. In the tilting motion scenario, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 with the lapse of the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Operation valid start time (operation valid), which is a timer value for determining the start time (start period) in which the operation of the tilt device 310 becomes effective and the timer value of the tilt operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of. The start period) and the operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid, are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are played. The setting of the valid period (T5) for effectively determining the operation when the person presses the button is executed.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach out of A", the operation is determined whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect. When it is executed from the effect selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is set. The tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1, which will be described later, is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is set. ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach out of A", the operation effect is determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and executing the operation effect. If it is executed from the selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilting device will be described later as an operation scenario. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 478), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is 41500 ms. Is set, and 45900 ms is set for the operation valid end time (T4). In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are set in advance according to the variation type of the special symbol, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting operation scenario table 222db sets the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario type and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da. The data table for this is set.

FIG. 469 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilting operation scenario table 222db is provided with a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the motion content in the tilting motion scenario A is defined, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit by normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. Operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 470 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered.

In the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 480). ), The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (210 steps in the backward rotation direction during 2100 ms) (Movable to) is executed, and the cam removal operation (the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhanging portion 344c3 is the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167). (That is, the operation of moving the second overhanging portion 344c3 to the upper part of the release member 34 (see FIG. 167) without operating the rotary claw member 347)), and the cam is removed. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped for 3000 ms) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer set to "3" (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second overhanging portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward). The disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the locking with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the operation data with the operation pointer "4" (stopped for 500 ms) is executed, the ascending wait is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (50 steps are movable in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms). ) Is executed to be the position shown in FIG. 170, the operation data whose motion pointer is “6” (movable in the backflip direction in 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed, and the fanning motion to be the position shown in FIG. 169 is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "7" (moving 50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) is executed and the position is again shown in FIG. 170, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (50 steps during 500 ms) is executed. (Movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed, and the position is returned to the position shown in FIG. Is stopped) is executed, the stop is performed at the position shown in FIG. 169, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

As described above, in the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the tilting device 320 is moved from the state where the tilting device 320 is in the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 is in the highest position. After executing the fanning operation, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 463, when the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is considered to be effective. After being determined, a specific advance notice effect (for example, an effect of notifying the expected degree of hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also display a sound effect according to the advance notice effect. And the lamp lighting mode are lit. When the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player after the tilting device 320 starts ascending and before 3.5 seconds of the operation valid period (T5) elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. When the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotary claw member 347 and held at the origin position by moving to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is executed, the origin is detected. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

When the transmission gear 343b is held by the player at the raised position of the tilting device 320 and the transmission gear 343b idles, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is ON and the position is the initial position, and the position of the disk cam 344 is determined. Is executed to return to the origin position.

The tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario B are defined, and the operation data when the tilting device 310 is movable when the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 470 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered.

In the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 480). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "11" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) (Movable to) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (during 200 ms) is executed. The operation data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "4" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (movable in the backward rotation direction) is executed. The operation data (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed for 200 ms, the operation pointer is "6" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction for 200 ms), and the operation pointer is "7". Operation data (20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and operation data with an operation pointer of "8" (20 steps can be moved in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and this operation is executed. The operation data in which the operation pointer is "9" (120 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction for 1200 ms) is executed by using the repeated operation of the pointers "3" to "8" three times as a fanning operation, and the position in FIG. 38. The operation data is executed with the operation pointer set to "10" (stopped for 2000 ms), the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion during the reach effect, prompting the player to operate the tilting device 310, and changing the fanning motion according to the variation type while the operation effect is being executed. In addition, by stopping the rising height (length) at different places, interest in operation is generated, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this control example, the types of tilting motion scenarios are set according to the types of fluctuation patterns, but the tilting motion scenarios A and B are not limited to this, and the hit / fail judgment results are hit and miss, respectively. May be configured to change and set the selection rate according to the result of the hit / miss judgment by dividing and setting the judgment value of the effect counter 223h. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is higher when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit than in the case of a miss is executed, so that the player can make a hit / fail judgment result. Can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type is set so as to move the tilting motion to the origin position without raising the motion to the highest position after the fanning motion is performed at the start of the motion. May be good. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set so that it can be easily selected when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is created. By setting it so that it is easy to select, it is possible to raise expectations for a big hit by making a fanning action.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation A table 222db3, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Or, when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilt operation timer 223db and 3 is set in the tilt operation status 223da based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3. By performing (Z2959), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation process (FIG. 481, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The origin return operation is performed until there is (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting operation scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 471 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222db4, when the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the valid operation period, and the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). , Or when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959). The operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), The origin return operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing origin detection when the origin is not detected even though the origin detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. There is.

FIG. 471 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry operation table 222dc, the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", as in the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above. It is performed until the origin is detected (Z2899: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, and 4 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976) and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223dc is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983), and when the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), retries are made based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the operation time (900 ms) is set to the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986), and the value after subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set. Set to 3 (Z2988). Then, when the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. It is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2899: Yes). As shown in FIG. 464, the above operation is set once every three times of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and if the origin detection is not performed, the above operation is performed up to four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 471 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilt initial operation table 222dd. In the tilting initial operation table 222dd, the operation pointer becomes "2" in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", and the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes), as in the operation of the tilting operation scenario table described above. Or until there is origin detection (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms) is based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. ) Is set to the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062) to start the operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example. In this second control example, the tilting operation status 223da, the tilting operation timer 223db, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc, the detection check counter 223dd, the tilting operation flag 223de, and the pressing notice are valid for the first control example described above. It differs from the timer 223df in that it is added.

The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed when the power is turned on, and is in the initial operation state.

The tilting operation status 223da is determined by the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161), according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da. .. Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is a state during the operation effect during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the return operation after the scenario operation.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation for detecting the origin. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the execution in this process is terminated when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", but the above-mentioned initial operation and return operation are performed. It is an error state when the origin cannot be detected, but if the error state occurs, there is no change in the tilting operation until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 478), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the special symbol change is started (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting motion is in the state of the operation effect during the variable motion of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479), 0 is set when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes) and the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation becomes a standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation effect processing (Z2909: FIG. 480), when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2957: No). In Z2961: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in the standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 481), when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilting operation is in a standby state, and this processing. To finish.

When the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation. Will be.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2899: Yes) after the special symbol change starts (Z2981: No), 0 is set in the tilt operation status 223da (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in the standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (5). Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation timer 223db is set to an initial operating time (Z2061) when the power is turned on, and is repeatedly updated by adding one each time the main process (FIG. 473) is executed.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is "0", the operation time according to the tilting operation scenario table is set (Z2923). When the value of the tilting operation status is "2", the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin when the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc during the retry operation execution.

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 executes the retry operation performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is tilted when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination process is performed. conduct. First, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983), and when the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the fluctuation is to perform a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2896) after the setting (Z2985) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). , The detection variation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation of the tilting device 310 after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is during the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

When the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is executed, the tilting operation flag 223de is moved to the origin position by being pressed by the player during the operation valid period, and the rotating claw member. It is a flag indicating that it has been locked by 347. The tilt operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the operation valid period by the process of Z2956 of the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it will be set to on. On the other hand, after the tilt operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and the tilt operation status is set to off after the origin return operation is executed (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 is pressed as a switch for directing when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, is held by the rotary claw member 347 at the origin position). It is a timer for determining the valid period for validly discriminating the detection of the switch 324. This pressing notice valid timer 223df is based on the start timing of the valid period when the notice effect of using the tilting device 320 as a switch for the effect is determined as the advance effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Data corresponding to the specified validity period is stored. When the data corresponding to the valid period is set in the press warning valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 474), the cam removal operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to have an expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 will be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal being executed, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the press advance notice valid timer 223df is decremented by 1 by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 474) and updated.

<Control processing by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 472 to 345. In the fifth control example, a start-up process (FIG. 472) and a part of the main process (FIG. 473) are added to the first control example, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 409) was changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 410) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475), and retry processing during touch input (Z2860). : FIG. 476), tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), operation effect setting process (FIG. 478), tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. The difference is that the process (Z2911: FIG. 481) and the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 482) are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 472, the start-up process (FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 394) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 472) in the fifth control example, after the Z2012 process or the Z2013 process is executed, the tilt initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 471 (d)) provided in the ROM 222 is displayed. Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (FIG. 473) described later is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 479) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation can be executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in a state of being moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the fact that the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on, so that the drive motor 342 Control can be performed stably.

With reference to FIG. 473, the main process (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In the main process (FIG. 473) in the fifth control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161) with respect to the main process (FIG. 395) in the first control example. ) Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 474, regarding the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 473) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 474 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 474), first, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing (setting the pressing notice) of the special symbol for which the execution of the pressing notice is determined. (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing notice is decided. When it is determined that the pressing notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is in the valid period (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is being executed, and whether the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in progress (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether or not the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). When it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display pressing notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, when the pressing notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the processing of Z2884, when it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player (Z2884: No). , Other processing is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2890 processing.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, when it is determined that the press advance notice is not in the valid period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether the press advance notice is the start timing of the start timing of executing the press advance notice (Z2882: No) (Z2882: No). Z2886). The start timing of the pressing notice is determined by a start timer (not shown) is set at the start of the change of the special symbol and the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value "0").

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press advance notice valid timer 223df is set, and the cam removal operation is 2100 ms. The backflip operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 is not pushed up, so that the player can expect the ascending effect to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2886: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the press advance notice valid period timer 223df is 0. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the press advance notice valid period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the press notice valid timer 223df is reset, and the 1500 ms backflip operation is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2888, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of the sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 475. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 477.

The sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 475. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 475) in the fifth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed for the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 410) in the first control example, and the retry is performed during touch input. The difference is that processing (Z2860) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 476, the retry process during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry process (Z2860) during touch input.

In the retry process during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 476), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), the detection sensor is determined to detect the origin (Z2863). If the detection sensor determines that the origin is not detected (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the backflip direction by one step (Z2864), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process is terminated.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 in the processing of Z2901 (Z2901: No), the processing of Z2902 is skipped and the processing of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed, so that the player can perform the origin return operation. To make it easier to return the tilting device 320 to the origin by performing a retry operation to return to the origin at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290). Can be done.

Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time effect start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. If it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 479. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilting initial operation table 222de is read out (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2931 when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the case of an abnormality at the time of returning to the origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, it is possible to detect the defect of the tilting device 320 at an early stage by displaying an error (abnormal processing) immediately unlike during the game. can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect in progress process (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 480, an operation effect in-process process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process (Z2909).

In the operation effect processing (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read out (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this process ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2951 when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 (Z2957: Yes). Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2957, when it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-mentioned processes of Z2958 to Z2960 are executed, and this process is terminated. If the detection sensor is determined to be at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 481, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described. FIG. 481 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971 when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read out (Z2974), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set in the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), 4 is set in the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 477. In the process of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2912), this processing is terminated as it is.

A retry operation process (Z2913), which is a process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 477), will be described with reference to FIG. 482. FIG. 482 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). When it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection variation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2896). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is the origin position (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2899: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read out (Z2991), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position in the processing of Z2899 (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this processing is terminated.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately performs the unlocking operation. This causes a problem that the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be raised. As such a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 470 (a)), which is the unlocking operation. Is configured to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 168 and not to be fanned, so that the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324, or the tilting device 320 is placed on the upper surface of the tilting device 320. Place a touch sensor to determine if the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off. Then, it may be configured to execute the unlocking operation at the timing when it is turned off. Further, when the tilting device 320 is pressed or it is determined that the player is touching the tilting device 320, the player should take his / her hand off the tilting device 320 (remove the obstruction of the ascending operation by the player) by means of display notification, voice, or the like. It may be configured to notify the user.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 483 to 507. In the first control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of winning / failing is set to a low probability (the electric support is given up to 100 times) is executed after the jackpot game, it is displayed as an even-numbered doublet. It was notified that the jackpot A is a jackpot A, but in the 23rd embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored in the reserved ball, the jackpot to be executed first is executed first. The stop symbol of A and the effect during the jackpot are shown as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect is as if the high probability game state (probability change game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Further, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which the probability variation game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion effects for notifying the above are set, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed thereafter depends on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is promotion). It differs from the first control example in that the type of effect is switched and set. The same points as in the first control example will be omitted in detail.

With reference to FIG. 483, an example of a stop display mode of the special symbol of the hit / fail determination result which is the jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 483 (a), the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third is This is an example showing the case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. In this case, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is changed, it is normally displayed as even-numbered doublets, but when the change starts, the odd-numbered doublets are stopped and displayed. It is displayed by switching to. That is, the same stop symbol as when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 483 (b), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, such as "Super jackpot !! Expect the next one !!", and the probability change game state is set. Notification as if it is a big hit is executed. As a result, in reality, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored even when the jackpot A is executed, so that the effect as if the jackpot B1 is executed is executed even when the jackpot A is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, and to improve the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 484 (a), an effect mode in which the change of the special symbol in the time-saving game state (game state with low probability electric support) after the big hit game in the example shown in FIG. 483 is executed will be described. FIG. 484 (a) shows the third state in which the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball to be the jackpot A is stored (reserved symbol h2). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 484 (a), the character "during super time" is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the game is in the probabilistic game state even though the game is in the time-saving game state. Is displayed, and the character "Big hit expectation is UP" is displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the hit / fail determination probability is not actually set high and the expectation is high is displayed. As a result, it is configured to suppress a defect that significantly impairs the trust of the player by giving the player a false notification different from the actual one. In this way, the notification that substantially approximates the probabilistic gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 484 (b) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 reserved in FIG. 484 (a). The reserved symbol h2 is a hit / fail determination result of the jackpot A, and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot (any of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball, so that it is a normal time. In the same manner as in the above, the stop display is made in the even-numbered doublet, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is executed is executed.

FIG. 485 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving game state set after the jackpot game of the jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 484 (b) is executed is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. As a display mode indicating the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 485 (a), the time saving until the character "chance (100 times)" is displayed and the change of the special symbol is changed 100 times and stopped. It is notified that the game is being set. In addition, each time the change of the special symbol ends once, the number (number of times) is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

FIG. 485 (b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2 is executed. The characters "during super time (during probability change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that the probability change game state is set, and the player is notified that the game state is the probability change game state.

In this embodiment, only a part of the display mode is different between the case where the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball which is the big hit is stored and the case where the probabilistic gaming state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same characters (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. In addition, the game state is set to be notified by the background color without displaying characters, and the time-saving game state is set with the probabilistic game state and the reserved ball that becomes a big hit stored. , It may be configured to display in an approximate color (for example, a red background color (probability changing game state), a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state where a holding ball to be a big hit is stored)). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 487, the promotion effect performed during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 486 (a) is an example of a display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big hit !! Start !!" are displayed until the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the player is notified that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 486 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. Over-winning promotion production is a condition for ending one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65a in one round, but based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. Based on the fact that the game ball has further won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the period until the opening / closing door 65b is changed to the closed state, the promotion effect in which the information regarding the jackpot type is notified is executed.

In the over-win promotion production, the characters "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game ball is put in the specific winning opening 65a (corresponding to the attacker). There is a display suggesting that the symbol is displayed (given to the player). Furthermore, by displaying the characters "Treasure chest chance when 11 keys are accumulated !!", the promotion effect (over prize promotion effect) indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" is executed when 11 keys are accumulated. Is notified to the player. Since one key is configured to be displayed for each winning in the specific winning opening 65a, one over-winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "Treasure chest chance !!" will be executed. Here, when the treasure box is vacant and the treasure is displayed in the "treasure box chance !!", the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored. It is notified that it is a jackpot A (promoted) in the state of being. If the treasure is not displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that becomes a jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot A, the effect of notifying that the player has been promoted is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored during the big hit game, the display mode (the effect that the treasure is displayed in the treasure box) for notifying the promotion is configured to be displayed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. In FIG. 487 (a), when the promotion effect is selected during the round, when the specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, the “promotion chance !! By displaying the comment "!!", the promotion effect during the round is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (notified) that the information regarding the jackpot game type is notified. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 487 (b), the jackpot in a state where the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned reserved ball that is the jackpot is stored is stored. If it is A, the display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right direction to the left direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high probability game state of "probability change GET !!" is set after the big hit game. Will be done. In addition, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored, the character "probability change GET !!" is displayed as a notification as if the player is set in the probability change game state. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 487 (a) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the 16th round of jackpot rounds is completed (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have elapsed) are satisfied)). This is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

On the other hand, FIG. 488 (b) is an example of a display mode in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game ends (the 16th round of jackpot rounds ends (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have passed))). Later, during the period when the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY !! Super chance time !!" are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the left to the right. A special display mode (a different production mode from the normal time) in which a school of fish (fish school) swims is displayed, and a time-saving game state is stored in a probabilistic game state after a big hit game or a reserved ball that becomes a big hit described above. A display mode suggesting that is set is displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 489 to 490.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (a). The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 489 (b). FIG. 489 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to notify that the player has been promoted as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a during the round. It is a lottery table for. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm indicating that the execution of jackpot A is suggested to the player as if jackpot B2 was executed is on. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", the promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) is executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 490. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, the hit changing flag 223 dh, the stop symbol replacement flag 223 dh, the big prize counter 223 di, the promoted flag 223 dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223 dt, and the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm are set with respect to the first control example. It differs in that it has been added. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first control example will be omitted.

The hit-changing flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored. If the change display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit by the winning command is newly stored when the hit fluctuation flag 223 deg is on, the odd-numbered symbols are doublet. The process of switching to a symbol is executed. As a result, even if the special symbol is changed to be the jackpot A, the player can be made to think that it is the jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins the replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd number of doublet symbols. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, it is switched and set to the odd-numbered doublet at the start of the change of the special symbol.

The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big hit game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that the promoted effect (the effect of displaying the treasure from the treasure box) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

The promotion effect type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which when a jackpot game is executed, the type of promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined type data of the promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo-probability flag 223 dm stops the stop symbol of the special symbol in odd-numbered doublets when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started and the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored. It is a flag indicating that the lottery has been lost in the replacement lottery that is controlled to be displayed. The promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or the effect as if the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variation game state (see FIG. 484 (a)) is executed.

<Control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 491, the control process by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 393) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491). Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 491. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 393) in the first control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entering (Z1120: Yes), a ball entering command is set (Z1121), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z1120 that there is no ball entering (Z1120: No), this processing is terminated as it is. By this entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a during the round, and can also determine the over winning.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 491 to 503. In the sixth control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 396) is the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 397) is the variation pattern reception for the first control example. Process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 403), winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495), variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) : FIG. 502), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 409) was changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503), and the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494). Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 496), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 496), opening processing (Z2282: Fig. 497), big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: Fig. 499), round processing (Z2286: Fig. 500), the difference is that the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 492. FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example adds the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 to the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example, and changes the processes of Z2240 and Z2270. Is different.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 492, the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 492), which is one of the commands in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 491) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that the processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the gaming state is configured to be attached to a variation pattern command and issued from the main control device 110. As the gaming state, a low-probability electric support-less gaming state (normal gaming state), a probabilistic variable gaming state (with electric support), and a time-saving gaming state (low-probability electric support-based gaming state) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding gaming state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, the display status command is set (Z2431), and the Z2227 process is executed. .. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 described above is not executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2227 as it is.

With reference to FIG. 494, regarding the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), which is one of the processes in the variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 494 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 494), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the jackpot A does not fluctuate (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). If it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, when it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the winning fluctuation flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing is terminated. ..

In this way, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored at the time when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started, the lottery (discrimination) for replacing the stopped symbol is executed, and if it is replaced, the lottery (determination) is executed. If it is determined), the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that the symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the player loses the lottery, whether the game is stopped and displayed evenly, the jackpot game is started, the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or the game is in a probable change game state after the jackpot game. Special notification such as is given.

The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 495) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 495. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example differs from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 403) in the first control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 496, a stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 494) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 496), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-changing flag 223 deg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223dg is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2461: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a big hit (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received prize information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2464, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the processing of Z2465 is not executed and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A starts to fluctuate, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is newly added during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). If it is stored in, the stop symbol is replaced (replacement to odd-numbered doublets) if the special symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period. In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without a sense of discomfort.

Even when the high-speed fluctuation period has expired, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

With reference to FIG. 497, a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 493) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. ) Will be explained. FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 497.

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, an opening process (Z2282: FIG. 1), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 498) will be described. FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 498), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the Z2293 process is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to the Z2295 process.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to the big hit (Z2297), the display state command is set (Z2300), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: No), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2298), and the game state is set to the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm. It is set during the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-mentioned Z2300 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the large winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 499, the big prize winning ball processing (Z2280: FIG. 497), which is one of the big hit related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize winning process (Z2284).

In the big prize winning process (Z2284: FIG. 499), first, the value of the big prize counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is added by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion production type is an over prize (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2312: No), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314). When it is determined that the value of the large prize counter 223di is smaller than 10 (Z2314: No), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di corresponding to the over prize production is set (Z2315). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the promotion lottery table 222df is acquired based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm or the big hit type. Further promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect has been won is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large prize command for display indicating a deviation between the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2283, if it is determined that the ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), the round process (Z2286) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 500, the round process (Z2286), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 500), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is an over prize (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is the ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. The value corresponding to (Z2335) is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or when it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332). : Yes), or if it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated. ..

Returning to FIG. 497, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z2285, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: Yes), the ending process (Z2288) is executed and the present process is terminated. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 501. On the other hand, in the process of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2289), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 501, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501) which is one of the processes in the jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 497) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 501), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the Z2372 process that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the above-mentioned Z2376 process is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2374 that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the processing of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion effect is notified during the jackpot game, and if it is not executed, the ending promotion effect or the promotion effect during the round is executed. The process of switching to is executed.

As a result, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the frequency of entering the specific winning opening 65a is low.

The variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed for the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 406) in the first control example, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and the display stop type command is set (Z2513). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), the stop type in which the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the above-mentioned Z2513 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 503, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 503) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 for the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 409) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, Z2840 processing is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, another SW process is executed (Z2840), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z2830 process that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 processes are executed, and the sensor input process (Z2813) and other SW processes (Z2840) are executed. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 507. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) will be described with reference to FIG. 504. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 414) in the first control example in that the processes of Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 505 (a). FIG. 505 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is replaced with the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will be continued. In the process of Z3430, when it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 505 (b). FIG. 505 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 504, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that there is no display status command in the processing of Z3432 (Z3432: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434: Yes), the jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, the jackpot-related display process (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not the display opening command has been received (Z3461). When it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the grand prize process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the grand prize processing (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 506.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3463, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). When it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (Z3465: Yes), the display data table of the round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3467, when it is determined that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z3471), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 507, a big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 507), which is one of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506), will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize processing (Z3464).

In the big prize processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 506), it is determined whether or not the received display big prize command has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the number of winnings indicated by the received command and the display data table corresponding to the winning effect are set (Z3481), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), the display data table of the number of winnings indicated by the command and the over-winning corresponding to the out-of-order effect is set (Z3483), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: Yes), the over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of winning commands indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10. Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of winnings is larger than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3486, when it is determined that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this processing is terminated as it is.

<7th control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 508 to 516. In the first control example, the winning opening that triggers the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol, and the lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be more favorable to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning slot that triggers (variation) and the distribution device 700 that alternately wins balls, the electric accessory 640a is used when the second special symbol normal symbol is won or missed as a result of winning for a long time. It was opened for a long period of time (2 seconds) so that the ball could easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Then, when the player wins a normal symbol for a long time, the player is made to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 by displaying the effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to play the game enthusiastically (see FIG. 344).

Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be controlled so that the ball is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, and the normal state is in progress. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 428 (b)) is executed to provide a special feeling to the player. Further, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed even when the normal state is set as the game state for a predetermined period (five fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends. Was configured in. As a result, it is executed when a predetermined number (up to 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol held during the time saving state left) and the time saving state is completed. It is configured so that the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the second special symbol change to be performed. As a result, the special feeling of the special production can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the 7th control example, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is won for a long time, the game is played by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It differs from the first control example in that it is configured to execute an effect (long-time open effect) that suggests that a person has won a prize for a long time in a lottery of ordinary symbols.

Further, as a result of the lottery of ordinary symbols, it is different from the first control example in that it is configured so that the effect mode of the long-time open effect is different depending on the timing of winning for a long time. The details of the same points as those of the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 508. FIG. 508 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 508, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left side region (left side region) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position where the ball is to be fired when the game (left-handed game) is performed. When the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when performing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80, "turtle" is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guideline for the position where the ball is fired. The character imitating the above is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin). Is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball is aimed at to execute the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Further, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the player is directed to the game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually and easily grasp.

Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region (electric accessory) in which the second winning opening 640 can be won when a left-handed game is performed with respect to the first control example described above. When the 640a is in the opening operation, the regulation nail ZK1 is planted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) is low. On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed, the nails are planted so that the ratio of the ball passing through the opening 710 of the distribution device 700 is low. With this configuration, aiming at the distribution device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640, the first 2 It is possible to provide a player with a right-handed game (second game) in which only a special symbol is changed (lottery).

As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a state where it is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so that the player inevitably plays the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is further performed. Even if it is not possible to acquire the hold of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is also possible to perform a left-handed game and a game of acquiring the reserved ball of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509 (a), in the seventh control example, an effect mode displayed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol when the normal symbol is won for a long time will be described. FIG. 509 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Open soon" as an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. Characters are displayed, and the opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and the guidance display mode Za1 imitating the "turtle" indicating the game direction instructed to the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player, so that it is possible to easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be performed.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is configured to be displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, the currently executed symbol is being executed. Based on the discriminating means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result advantageous to the player (big hit, small hit, etc.) and the discriminating result of the discriminating means, the long opening effect and the third symbol A priority display discriminating means for discriminating which of the variable effects is preferentially displayed, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discriminating result of the priority display discriminating means. It may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to give priority to display of an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the above-mentioned example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (priority effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to that, for example, a plurality of different areas of the reduced display area are prepared, and the non-priority effect is determined according to the game result indicated by the effect. It may be configured to change the size of the area for displaying the effect. Further, the effect display on the side determined to be the non-priority effect may be configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, a configuration is shown in which the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is changed based on the lottery result of the changing special symbol and the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol. In addition to that, for example, a holding ball number determining means for determining whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the determination result of the holding ball number determining means. The display area of the long open effect may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509 (b), an effect mode during a long-time hit game (during long opening) of a normal symbol will be described. FIG. 509 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 509 (b), the character "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening target imitates the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation. Aspect Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 509 (a), the guide display mode Za1 imitating the “turtle” indicating the game direction instructed to the player is displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 510 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the long opening effect is restricted among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the long opening effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 509 (a), and the normal state (the second). 2 In a state where it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning opening 640 (when winning a long time hit of a normal symbol), a state advantageous to the player (first). It is configured to reliably notify the player of the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery that is more favorable to the player than the special symbol.

In this configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4), the normal symbol Even if the player wins for a long time, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed. In this way, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time and a plurality of balls are won in the second entrance 640, a new reserved ball is acquired. There was a problem that it was not possible to provide the player with a special feeling of long open production.

Therefore, in the 7th control example, even if the predetermined period (the period until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times) after the time saving state ends is won for a long time of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned is described. It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect under the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the long opening effect has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 510, in the state where the long opening effect is restricted, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 509 (a) is not executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is generated in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, as the game direction instructed to the player, the guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed. In this way, even if a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the timing is a predetermined period (the special symbol changes 5 times after the time reduction state ends). If it is within the period until it is executed), by preventing the long opening effect from being executed, it is possible to surely suppress the provision of a meaningless long opening effect to the player. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be a period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the game contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long open effect may be regulated.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th control example>
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 511. The seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the long open effect flag 223e1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the 7th control example are the same, the various control processes related to the ball ejection of the pachinko machine 10 in the 7th control example are described in the first control example described above. Is the same as. On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the voice lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as those of the second control example except for the above-mentioned points. Therefore, the same parts as those of the first control example are designated with the same reference numerals for various control processes related to ball ejection, and the description thereof is omitted, and the same parts as the second control example are the same for various control processes related to the effect. The description thereof will be omitted by adding a reference numeral.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj is described in the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but a predetermined value (5) is set when the time saving state ends, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long release effect flag 223e1 is when a long-time hit release command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received and when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 514). , Is set to on (see Z2907 in FIG. 514), and is set to off when a long-time hit end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 514).

<Control processing by the main control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 387) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 512). Since the other processes are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 512, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example differs from the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 387) in the first control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. .. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 512, when the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processing of Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example is executed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing in the processing of Z402. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, this long-time open flag 203i is set when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408: FIG. 388) that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: Yes). , A flag set to on (Z428).

In the processing of Z451, if it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on (Z4511: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the long-time open end command is set. (Z452), shift to the processing of Z404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) in the processing of Z451 (Z4511: No), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404 processing. Then, the same processes of Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the winning normal symbol is started to the end of the long-time hit.

In the processing of Z402, if it is determined that the current symbol is currently changing (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then the processing for a long time is performed. Set the middle command (Z453) and end this process. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 392) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the long-time hit command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is long-time hit (long open), and transmits the display command to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509 (b)).

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example>
With reference to FIGS. 513 and 514, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 513) with respect to the second control example, and the long open effect process (Z2272) is performed. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). The command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) in the second control example in that the processes of Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above are executed. When it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether the related command has been received for a long time (Z2271), and it is determined that the command has been received. (Z2208: Yes) executes a long opening effect process described later (Z2272), and ends this process. In this long opening effect processing (Z2272), a process for setting a display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, when it is determined that the related command is not received for a long time (Z2271: No), it is referred to as Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 436) of the second control example described above. The same processes of Z2273 to Z2277 are executed, and this process is terminated. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command (winning in the lottery of the normal symbol for a long time). When the command) shown) is received, it is configured so that an effect for notifying the player to that effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long open effect process (Z2272) executes a process for setting the effect mode of the long open effect when the normal symbol is won for a long time, and is the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Alternatively, the effect mode is set according to the operating state (during fluctuation, during the winning game) of the normal symbol (within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state).

When the long open effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time hit-related command received this time is the long-time hit open command (Z2901). This long-time hit release command is a command set when the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 388) of the main control device 110 is won for a long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is open for a long time (Z2901: Yes), then the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (Z2903: Yes), the target for executing the long open effect. Since it is not a period, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2904). Since the detailed explanation is given in the second control example described above, the explanation will be briefly described. However, this fluctuation number counter 223aj has a predetermined number (5) when the final fluctuation in which the time reduction state is set is stopped and displayed. ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process is executed. The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a counter referred to for determining.

In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2904: No), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed at least 5 times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the state is set, a long open effect command for display is set because it is a period during which the long open effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the game state (Z2906). , The long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main process (see FIG. 395) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 509 (a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed five times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, since it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed long effect command for display is set (Z2905). End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 395) of the main process (see FIG. 395) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating that the long open effect is being restricted on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 510).

In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit-related command received this time is not a long-time hit open command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether the long-time hit medium command is received (Z2908). .. This long-time hit command is set after setting the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 512) of the main control device 110, and is set during the long-time hit game. This is a command that indicates that there is.

In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command has been received for a long time (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is set. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a long release command for display is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2909, if it is determined that the long open effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (set to off) (Z2909: No), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and the present processing is terminated. ..

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, as in the first control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation start processing is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning. It is configured to determine the operation mode (whether or not it is a long open), and is configured to set a long-time hit open command at that timing. Then, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (minimum 3 seconds, maximum 30 seconds) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set, and then the electric motor is used. It is configured to start the operation control of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit medium command. When the value of 223aj is larger than 0, the long-time hit open command is set, and then there is a possibility that the long-time hit middle command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0.

In the seventh control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in such a state, the processing when the long opening command is received is long. When the open effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the long open command for display is not set even if the command is received for a long time. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 510) suddenly becomes the effect of the display mode based on the long open command for display (FIG. 509 (b)). It is possible to prevent the player from switching to (see) and giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 514. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during long-time hit has not been received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether or not the long-time hit end command has been received (Z2911), and the long-time hit end command has been received. (Z2911: Yes), the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to off (Z1912), the long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 497. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2261), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) is changed to the command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 515) will be described with reference to FIG. 515. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 504) in the sixth control example in that the processes of Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: No), the processing of Z3441 is executed. If it is determined that there is no display long release related command in the processing of Z3441 (Z3441: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display status command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), the long open related process (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (FIG. 516, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received long opening effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The time counter is set to 233h (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the 7th control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the game state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time. If you win, it is configured to execute a long open effect during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a is open to the player for a long time, and the game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 can be reliably performed.

Further, in the seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired in the normal state, and the predetermined period after the end of the time reduction is completed. If it is inside, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-mentioned long opening effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege (the privilege of easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state until the change of the special symbol is executed 5 times, but other than that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be the period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. Further, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured in.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation being executed is won as a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the game contains the winning information of winning a big hit, the long open effect may be regulated.

Specifically, for example, in the Z2903 process of the long open effect process (see FIG. 514), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set is provided and continuous. If it is determined that the effect during effect flag 223ac is set to ON, it may be configured to end this process as it is so as not to execute the long open effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without breaking the priority with the effect to be executed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, a right-handed game is performed in order to make the second winning device 640 win a ball, and when the long opening effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 is performed. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so that the left-handed game is performed in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning opening 64 and the right second winning opening 640 are aimed at by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aimed at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

In this seventh control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of flowing the ball to the distribution device 700 and the second winning opening 640 is different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. However, it is not limited to this, for example, by firing a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a strong left-handed game is performed. Therefore, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly different by slightly changing the operation of the launching device, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, although the seventh control example describes the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, the control of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above is described. Not limited to the content, it may be used for the control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, a type of gaming machine that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol. good.

At the end of the game state with electric support (low probability electric support game state (time saving game state) or high probability electric support (probability variation game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls are present. On condition that it is memorized for the second special symbol, the effect of hitting the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed), or the effect of urging the game ball to enter the first entry port 64. It may be configured to switch to and execute. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, it is possible to configure the normal symbol to perform a long-time effect, and the player can perform the second special symbol. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the chance of winning a prize in a special symbol.

Further, in this control example, when the game is switched to the normal gaming state, the normal symbol is not produced for a long time or is different from the normal time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). Is configured to switch to a different effect, but not limited to that, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) regardless of the game state, the normal symbol is for a long time. It may be configured not to produce a hit effect or to switch to an effect different from the normal effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player perform an advantageous game according to the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not producing the effect of the normal symbol for a long time or switching to the effect different from the normal time, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example). , The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) may be set. Further, the time information from the RTC may be acquired and set as a condition for switching if the store is about to close at a specific time (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set in combination with the conditions given in this control example.

<8th control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 517 to 557. In the eighth control example, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see FIG. 376) and the operation of the frame button 22a are based on the first control example described above. The control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the background mode is changed, and the effect content executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (upper limit of 8). The difference is that a detailed explanation is added about the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 517, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example has a plurality of operating means (frame button 22a, left button 22b, right) as operating means that can be operated by the player. Since the button 22c) is provided, the configuration shown as the frame button 22 in the first control example described above is referred to as the frame button 22a, but since the meaning is the same, the frame in the present control example. The detailed description of the button 22a will be omitted. Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the various technical ideas described by using the frame button 22 are also applied to the frame button 22a of this control example.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 starts up (see FIG. 391), the voice lamp control device 113 starts up (see FIG. 394), and so on. Is executed and each startup process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 376, a dedicated display screen (power-on screen) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying, the voice output device 226 is used to perform a notification (notification during the power-on period) to indicate that the power is currently being turned on (each startup process based on the power-on is being executed). It was composed.

In the first control example configured in this way, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbol and then turned on (turned on), the main control device 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol fluctuation is restarted from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but it is output from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 226. Since it is configured to emphasize to the player that the notification sound is being turned on, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is executed before the power is turned off. There was a problem that it made me think that the special symbol fluctuation that had been used was erased.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, when the power is turned off. When the executed special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) is restarted after the power is turned on, BGM (special symbol fluctuation sound effect) indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating during the power-on period is output. It is composed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know that the special map fluctuation that was executed when the power was turned off has been restarted. Further, rather than creating the data of the display image (variable image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processed is smaller, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing immediately after the power is turned on. The details of the audio output control at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 520.

Further, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22a even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing for changing the background mode is changed according to the fluctuation speed of the special symbol (third symbol) at the time when the player operates the frame button 22a to change the background mode. .. More specifically, in this control example, in order to show the lottery result of the special symbol, the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display period of the special symbol It is configured so that the fluctuation display speed can be changed, and if the frame button 22a is operated during high-speed fluctuation where the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is fast, the background mode is immediately changed and the fluctuation of the third symbol is changed. If the frame button 22a is operated during a low-speed fluctuation whose speed is slower than the high-speed fluctuation, the background mode is set after the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed (after the special symbol stop display or at the start of the next special symbol fluctuation). It is configured to change.

Generally, the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured to fluctuate at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of fluctuation, and then fluctuate at low speed (second half period). It is configured to execute a suggestion effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by using the period in which the three symbols are variablely displayed at a low speed. Therefore, by configuring the background mode so that it does not change even if the frame button 22a is operated during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol as in the eighth control example, a dedicated effect corresponding to the currently set background mode is produced. While the (suggestion effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol) is being executed, the background mode is changed, and the player cannot see the effect content (effect result) of the suggestion effect. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since it has a fluctuation notification means for notifying the player whether the fluctuation display of the third symbol being executed is a high-speed fluctuation or a low-speed fluctuation, in order to shift the background mode at this stage. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner at what timing the background mode is switched when the operation of is performed. In this control example, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to be able to be notified to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, whether or not the present is a period in which the background mode can be immediately shifted is determined. It may be configured to notify the player.

Further, the variation notification means for notifying the player whether the variation display of the third symbol being executed is high-speed variation or low-speed variation is during the execution period of the effect (operation effect) using the operation means. It is also configured to execute a notification for the player to know whether or not there is a game. As a result, when the operation valid period, which is the period during which the operation means can be operated, is set, whether the operation valid period is the operation valid period set by executing the operation effect, the background mode is changed. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the operation is valid for the operation to be performed. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to suppress the appearance of an unintended display mode.

In the eighth control example, the above-mentioned fluctuation notification means is provided in the operating means (frame button 22a) operated when the player shifts the background mode (provided in the vicinity of the operating means). Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22a to shift to the background mode, the notification mode of the fluctuation notification means can be easily confirmed.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number (for example, eight which is the upper limit number), it corresponds to the winning information (reserved symbol) of the specific number stored in the reserve. It is configured to execute a specific period effect (8 hold effect) using the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a period effect that uses a longer period than the effect that is executed corresponding to one special symbol variation display period, so that various effects can be executed. It becomes possible and the effect of production can be enhanced. Therefore, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is set to a specific number, and the player can be enthusiastically played the game so that the effect is executed for a specific period.

Here, in the case of being configured to execute the period effect within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored on hold) as in the eighth control example. , As described with reference to FIG. 346 (b) in the first control example described above, the third symbol display is used to notify the player of the number of reserved balls (upper limit number: 8) of the current special symbol. The first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 are formed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the device 81, and the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 is sequentially formed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. If the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol (see FIG. 347 (a)) is used, the reserved symbol corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the period effect execution is displayed in the small area Ds2, so which reserved symbol is used. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the period is the target of the period production, and the player is provided with the production that is difficult to understand.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the period effect is not executed, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above, and the period When the effect is executed, only the number of reserved balls that are the target of the period effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 as the effect hold symbol. With this configuration, even if new prize information is acquired during the period effect, the effect hold symbol displayed in the small area Ds2 does not increase, so the reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect is given to the player. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed contents of the period effect in the eighth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528.

Further, a display area (light emitting area) different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used so that the player can be notified of the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player grasp the current number of reserved balls even while the period effect is being executed.

In addition, the eighth control example is configured so that when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22a, the operated (pressed) frame button 22a vibrates. It is configured so that the amount of vibration can be changed. By configuring the frame button 22a to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22a, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who pressed the frame button 22a, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done. Further, it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22a is pressed.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that can provide a player with an unexpected effect by vibrating the frame button 22a when the player presses the frame button 22a. In such a conventional pachinko machine 10, the player cannot predict whether or not vibration will be applied when the frame button 22a is pressed until the player presses the frame button 22a, and the game There is a problem that the frame button 22a cannot be positively operated (pressed) by a person.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, whether or not vibration is applied to the player when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed) before the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), and vibration. It is configured to be able to suggest the vibration level when doing so. With this configuration, the frame button 22a can be operated in a state in which the player is made to predict the vibration mode when the frame button 22a is operated (pressed), so that the player can be positively operated. Can be operated (pressed) by the frame button 22a.

Further, since the vibration level of the frame button 22a is variably configured, even if a predetermined level of vibration is applied when the player presses the frame button 22a, the frame button 22a is subsequently operated (pressed). By doing so, it becomes possible to vibrate the frame button 22a at a vibration level equal to or higher than a predetermined level. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22a a plurality of times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the eighth control example, similarly to the first control example described above, a plurality of background modes can be displayed, and when a predetermined transition condition (for example, pressing the frame button 22a) is satisfied. , The background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be variable. Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 (the operation of holding his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900), the currently set background mode is notified.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 that changes the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, pressing the frame button 22a). In this case, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the background mode is variable, but the background mode set by the variable background displayed on the display screen (background mode after transition). ) Has a problem that it is difficult to inform the player of which background mode is in an easy-to-understand manner.

In order to solve this problem, for example, a technique of configuring the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to always display the background mode currently set can be considered. In this case, the third symbol display device Since a part of the limited area of the display screen is used only for notifying the background mode, the area used for various effects performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced. There was a problem that the effect of the production was reduced. In addition, the background mode is being executed while a specific effect (for example, an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit) is being executed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Was displayed, and there was a problem that the effect was reduced.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be notified only for an arbitrary period desired by the player by operating the operating means (touch sensor 2900). 3 It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect of various effects executed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 is reduced. Further, in the eighth control example, since the current background mode is notified by using a display means (light emitting means) different from that of the third symbol display device 81, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The limited area of the screen can be effectively used for various productions.

Further, in the eighth control example, an effect (operation effect) using the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is configured to be executable, and the touch sensor 2900 plays a role as an operation means for notifying the background mode and an operation. It is configured to play both a role as an operation means for executing the production (participating in the operation production). In other words, the role of the touch sensor 2900 is changed according to the situation. Then, for example, even while the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the operation can be performed by executing a special operation (operate the touch sensor 2900 while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c). It is configured so that the background mode can be notified without operating the touch sensor 2900 for the effect. Therefore, even if the operation means (touch sensor 2900) is used for a plurality of purposes, the player can operate the operation means in an operation mode suitable for the purpose desired by the player.

<About the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 517. FIG. 517 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 517, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example is the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 138). ), The difference is that the operating means that can be operated by the player has been changed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above is provided with a frame button 22 as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is shown in FIG. 517. As shown above, a frame button 22a, a left button 22b, and a right button 22c are provided as operating means. The frame button 22a is an operation means used for the same purpose as the frame button 22 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. It is an operation means used for making it variable or when shifting to a background mode. Since the specific content of the frame button 22a is the same as that of the frame button 22 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the frame button 22a is also configured so that its mode can be changed by driving the tilting device 310 in the same manner as the frame button 22 of the first control example described above, but it is the same as the frame button 22 described above. Since it is a content, detailed description and illustration thereof will be omitted.

The left button 22b and the right button 22c are operating means provided on the left side of the frame button 22a, and are mainly used as adjusting means for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 450 of the pachinko machine 10. In the eighth control example, the left button 22b and the right button are displayed during the period in which the third symbol is not variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is changing at high speed. By operating 22c, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted. Since the detailed contents regarding the volume adjustment are the same as those of the above-mentioned fourth control example (see FIG. 313), the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this control example, by operating the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, the operation for the other operating means (touch sensor 2900) can be partially invalidated. It is configured as follows. In this way, among the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation is performed only when a specific condition is satisfied (a state in which the third symbol does not change or a state in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed). By configuring the operation means for executing the control (volume control) based on the above to be used for another purpose when the operation means is operated in a state where a specific condition is not satisfied, one operation means can be used for a plurality of uses. Since it can be used, the number of operating means provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 518 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 518, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is held at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the LED 900 is provided, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and the touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device. , Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of a special symbol, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a hold ball number command indicating that the number of hold balls of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 increases, or a decrease. Based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the indicated number of reserved balls command, the lighting is controlled according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol after the increase and the decrease.

By providing an area for notifying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this way, the reserved symbol display displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 519). (Refer to (b)) can be reliably notified of the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol even if it is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed description will be omitted, this holding LED 900 uses a full-color LED and is configured to be capable of exhibiting light emission modes of at least three colors, and is a holding ball of FIG. And the holding ball of the special figure 2 are controlled to be lit so as to be distinguishable. As a result, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed based on the result of the pre-determination (look-ahead) executed for the winning information stored on hold, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, an LED is displayed at the corresponding position of the hold LED 900. Is controlled to emit light in a color different from the normal time. Further, the display mode (light emitting mode) of the hold LED 900 is configured to be less conspicuous than the hold symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In the eighth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a position below the third symbol display device 81, which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized by the player, and may be provided, for example, in the lower right area of the game board 13. Further, in the eighth control example, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is configured to be stored up to eight, the holding LED 900 has the same eight LEDs as the upper limit of the holding storage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and four LEDs may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Further, in the eighth control example, the holding LED 900 is always controlled to display the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but other than that, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the displayed reserved symbol is deleted or used for another effect, that is, the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbol only by the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When becomes, the lighting control for the holding LED 900 may be executed.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as a notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variation effect (variation effect of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special figure lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (for example, a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The player can select one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (for example, a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to be capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode capable of notifying the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third symbol using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is grasped. Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in the first half stage of the special figure change (the third symbol is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a light emitting mode for notifying the current background mode. , In the latter half stage of the special figure change (the period from the end of the high-speed change of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are not in the current background mode, but in a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result. It is configured to emit light. Then, even in the latter half of the special figure variation, when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means (frame button 22), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a notification mode for notifying the current background mode. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special figure lottery result), which is useful information for the player. Can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detecting means (operating means) having a predetermined detection range, and indicates that the player's hand has invaded (arranged) within the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period. When it is detected, it is determined that the operation by the player has been performed. Although the player cannot directly see the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. By displaying the display, the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (easily put his / her hand within the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be capable of discriminating the movement (direction) of a hand that has entered (arranged) within the detection range, and is, for example, a hand. By moving from right to left or from bottom to top, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the hand is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation operation of the player's operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can play the game while being interested in it.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 519. 519 (a) and 519 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example is variablely displayed by the third symbol (in synchronization with the special symbol) with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above. The scroll direction of the decorative symbol is changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 346 (a)). ) To 5 (see FIG. 519 (a)) and the difference in the notification mode of the information related to the game. Further, there are some elements that are the same as (similar to) the first control example but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 519 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence Z3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 519 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. If each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped together with the combination of jackpot symbols on the effective line (in this control example, the combination of the same main symbols), the third symbol is stopped. The jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 519 (a), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 519 (b). As shown in FIG. 519 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 519 (b)) to show the situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (Fig. 5). (Refer to the small display area Dm2 of 519 (b)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. The lottery result of the special symbol is shown by indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed by using the display mode indicating It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 519 (b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the area Dm on the upper left side and the upper right side is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined by the effect of the variation effect executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the embodiment.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the first control example, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), the sub-display area Ds Is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in this eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and the executing area Ds1a is contained in the small area Ds1. And the waiting area Ds1b are formed. Since the display content of the executing area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the waiting area Ds1b will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and normally, the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed as in the first control example described above. are doing. On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), the eight reserved symbols stored on hold are stored. It is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using the above (see FIG. 526). While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed (the reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect). It is configured so that a reserved symbol for effect indicating only is displayed.

With this configuration, even if a new reserved ball is acquired during the period effect, the new reserved symbol will not be displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so the player can be informed of how long the period effect will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 519, a display mode showing the following display contents is also displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area, a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a guide for guiding the player to perform a left-handed game. The display mode of "left-handed" is configured to display, and the display mode of "right-handed" is in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. Further, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is configured to be displayed.

<Regarding the production content in the 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 520 to 529, characteristic production contents among the various effects executed in the eighth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 520 and 521, the contents of the effect when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 520 is a timing chart showing the flow of the sound effect when the power is turned off (power cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuation pattern A and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, when a power failure occurs during a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) and then the power is turned on, while the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are started up. (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 521 (a)). When the special symbol change is executed during the return processing period, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the BGM during the special symbol change. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure change is being executed during the return processing period.

To explain in detail, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if the power is cut off. It is configured to execute a power failure process for storing the previous game information (variation pattern for production, BGM information, background mode, remaining fluctuation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off. It is configured to store game information in the storage area only when a power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part (“B” in FIG. 520) that was output when the power failure occurred is stored, and the BGM part (“B”) that was output when the power failure occurred during the recovery processing period after the power was turned on. ) Is configured to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 520, the progress of the BGM that was output at the time of the power failure is memorized, and the flow of playing the BGM from the place where the power is cut off is shown. It may be configured to play from the start position of the BGM part that was output at the time of disconnection. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the storage process in the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Further, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 is completed (initial setting is completed) is the game information (selected variation pattern) related to the special figure variation executed before the power failure. , Residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the startup process is completed (when the command indicating the completion of the initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 521 (a)) to the normal screen. It is possible to shift the display mode to (see FIG. 521 (b)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special map fluctuation that had been executed before the power failure has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 521, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 521 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 521 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial setting is completed. Since the content shown in FIG. 521 (a) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. 376 (b) of the above-mentioned control example, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the eighth control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the special figure fluctuation is executed while the screen during the initial setting is displayed, the BGM (variable voice) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output from the continuation at the time of power interruption (see FIG. 520). ).

Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 520 (b), a variation pattern dedicated to return based on the remaining period of the special map variation during execution is executed. In this control example, the first determination for determining whether the remaining fluctuation time at the completion of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the second determination for determining whether the time is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. It is configured to execute the third determination for determining whether or not.

Here, if it is determined by the first determination that it is less than 2 seconds, the initial variation time is not set until the remaining variation time elapses (until the execution of the special figure variation is completed) without setting the variation pattern dedicated to the return. The setting screen (see FIG. 521 (a)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a short-time variable display that is difficult to identify.

When the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the reach state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol on the effective line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner. The return-only reach effect is executed, in which the variable display is executed from the state). This return-only reach effect is an effect using fluctuation data of a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of the largest hit is set to be the smallest among the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern in the reach state among the normal fluctuation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. With this configuration, when the special figure fluctuation during execution when the power is turned on is a big hit, it is possible to notify the jackpot winning with a fluctuation pattern that is normally difficult to encounter, thus providing added value to the player. be able to. Further, among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized by using the image data that is rarely actually used (the image data showing the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit in the normal reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 522 to 523, the contents of the operation for changing the background mode during the change of the special figure will be described. FIG. 522 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during the change of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 522, in the eighth control example, in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is configured to be variable. Specifically, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, low speed". As a result, the player can be made to play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol stops. In the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is out of order. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of this special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (background can be changed) by the player operating the frame button 22a during the variable display of the special symbol. The timing of changing the background is different depending on the timing at which the person operates the frame button 22a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 522, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high, the background is changed. The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 522 (a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, if the background change operation is performed, the background is changed immediately after that. Is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 523 (b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 522 (b), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special map is not high-speed fluctuation (medium-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special map is concerned. The background change is not performed until the end of, and the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 523 (a), the "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the mode is displayed. In the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the display area Dm1a, the characters "background change at the next change" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the background change operation has been performed during the special figure change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), so that the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the timing of performing the background change is different depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) for the background change operation during the special figure change. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, while suppressing the background change during the execution of the production (for example, the reach production) in which the lottery result of this special symbol is likely to be a hit, this time. During the period (high-speed fluctuation period) where it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol, the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various effects (background). be able to.

In the background change flow described with reference to FIG. 522, the next special map change is started when the background change operation is executed other than during the special map change during the high-speed change of the special map. An example of executing the background change at the timing is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop display is performed in a stop display mode (combination of three third symbols) for the third symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. It may be configured to execute the background change at the timing (the timing when the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background is at least until after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured not to execute the change, it may be configured so as to prevent the effect suggesting the result of the special figure lottery from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. It may be configured to delay the execution of the background change until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special map is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special map switches to low speed fluctuation. ..

In addition, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the timing at which the background change is executed is switched based on the result of this special figure lottery. For example, when the special map fluctuation during the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the predetermined timing during the fluctuation period (for example, the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation) is higher than the case where the special chart fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. It is good to configure it so that it is easy to execute the background change. Further, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, the timing for executing the background change may be switched based on the result of the special figure lottery this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and at the same time, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation. ..

In FIG. 522, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, but the variation speed is not limited to this. For example, the effect display process executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure change is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and the effect display process at the time of the background change operation is divided. It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "variation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". It is divided into "notification period", for example, "variation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the fluctuation state "high-speed fluctuation" of the special figure of this 8th control example, and "reach production period" and "development production period". , "Effect result notification period" may be configured to correspond to the fluctuation states "medium speed fluctuation", "low speed fluctuation", and "stop" in the special figure of the eighth control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is changed according to the progress of the effect display instead of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure), the control example and the present control example are used. A similar effect can be achieved.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background change is executed after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure change (the next special figure change of the special figure change that executed the background change operation), and the next and subsequent special figure changes. Based on the lottery result (preliminary determination (pre-reading) result for the winning information stored on hold), the presence / absence of execution of the background change and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change may be changed. ..

With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. Then, by enthusiastically executing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, the contents of the variable effect (touch effect) for varying the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation speed of the third symbol and the flow of the touch effect. As shown in FIG. 524, in this control example, the third symbol is configured to be variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while varying its fluctuation speed in accordance with the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation. are doing. Then, the touch effect (see FIG. 525 (a)) is configured to be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol.

When the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the period during which this touch effect is being executed (during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol), the player moves his / her hand within the detection area of the touch sensor 2900 for a predetermined time. (When intruded), a fluctuation effect (reach effect) in which the third symbol changes at a low speed is executed (see FIG. 525 (b)).

That is, in this control example, the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect so that the fluctuation speed of the third symbol can be forcibly switched to the low speed fluctuation. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect is executed by the fluctuation, the frame is set so as to be the background mode desired by the player. By operating the button 22a and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the background mode desired by the player.

Here, an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the touch effect described above will be described with reference to FIG. 525. FIG. 525 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the touch effect is executed (timing of FIG. 524 (a)), and FIG. 525 (b) is a touch sensor in the touch effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen after operating 2900 (the timing of FIG. 524 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 525 (a), in the state where the touch effect is executed, the third symbol is variablely displayed at a high speed on the display screen of the third symbol display device (in the figure, it is represented by an arrow in the left direction). ), In the small area Dm3 on the left side of the fluctuation display area during the high-speed fluctuation (about 1/3 on the left side of the main display area Dm), the touch effect is being executed so as to cover the fluctuation display of the third symbol. The indicated touch display is executed. Specifically, a touch location guidance display mode Dm31 for guiding the location where the player holds his hand and a period display mode Dm32 for indicating the effect period (operation valid period) of the touch effect are displayed. , A "touch" comment urging the player to operate (touch) the touch sensor 2900 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 525, during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol, each third symbol fluctuates at a speed that is difficult for the player to see, so that a part of the variation display area is covered. Even if the touch display is executed, the effect that is difficult for the player to understand (the effect that the third symbol in the variable display cannot be grasped) is not executed.

Then, when the player operates the touch sensor 2900 during the effect period of the touch effect indicated by the period display mode Dm32, the touch effect ends as shown in FIG. 525 (b), and the main third symbol display device 81 is used. A reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire display area Dm is executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the player operates the operating means (touch sensor 2900) during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol to forcibly change the fluctuation speed of the third symbol at a low speed. It is configured so that it can be switched to. With this configuration, the execution period of the variable effect (effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol) executed during the low-speed fluctuation can be lengthened. You can be interested.

Further, since the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period of the third symbol, for example, the frame button 22a is operated during the period when the touch effect is executed to shift the background mode. Is configured to be possible. Since this touch effect is configured to be continuously executed even if the background mode is changed, it is possible to execute the touch effect after changing the background mode.

Therefore, for example, when the touch effect is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol and the player understands that the reach effect can be executed by the fluctuation, the background mode desired by the player is set. By operating the frame button 22a and then the touch sensor 2900, the player can easily experience the reach effect in the desired background mode, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 hold effect) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds, is executed. are doing. This eight-piece hold effect is a dedicated effect using eight hold symbols, and as an effect hold symbol corresponding to each hold symbol, an effect hold symbol in a display mode imitating a treasure box is in the waiting area Ds1b. It is displayed (see FIG. 526 (a)).

Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the eight reserved effects is executed, the first reserved symbol tb0 for the effect is displayed in the executing area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 526 (b). Then, the contents tb10 of the treasure box showing the lottery result of the fluctuation is displayed. The details will be described later, but the content tb10 is configured so that different colors are displayed according to the lottery result of the special drawing.

After that, when new winning information is reserved and stored during the period when the eight holding effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIGS. 527 (a) and 527 (b). In the waiting area Ds1b of the above, the new reserved symbol 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (effect period) during which the eight hold effects are continuously executed is.

Then, when the final special figure change that is the target of the eight hold effects is executed, as shown in FIG. 528, the hold symbol tb7 for effect is displayed in the executing area Ds1a, and the current state Ds1b is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. The pending symbols corresponding to the number of pending storages are displayed. That is, when there are no more reserved symbols that are the targets of the eight reserved effects, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored and stored are displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is confused because the number of reserved balls currently acquired is not known at the end of the eight-held effect.

In this control example, the eight hold effects shown with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528 are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, eight hold effects are in progress for the effect. Even during the period in which the reserved symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, when the player performs a specific operation on the operating means, the pending symbol is not the pending symbol for production in the waiting area Ds1b, but the current one. It may be configured to display a hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is winning information that wins a big hit in the pre-discrimination process executed during the eight-piece holding effect, the eight-piece holding effect is continued until the special figure change corresponding to the winning information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this control example, the lottery result corresponding to the special figure variation to be executed in the period effect (8 hold effect) in which a series of variation effects are executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (reserved symbols). It is configured to set the production mode (contents tb10 of the treasure box) based on Whether or not it is determined in advance (pre-reading) before the special figure lottery based on the reserved symbol is executed, and the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result). You may. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the expectation of winning the jackpot to be set in a plurality of stages, and to set an effect mode in which the expectation of winning the jackpot does not decrease during the period production. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation for the big hit as the period production progresses, and it is possible to pay attention to the period production until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the display contents during the production using the touch sensor 2900 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 529 (a) is a display screen showing a display example when the touch sensor 2900 is operated during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol, and is the display screen of FIG. 529 (b). ) Is a display screen showing a display example when a special operation is performed during the touch effect executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 529 (a), when the touch effect is executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol, the main display area is the same as the touch effect described in FIG. 525 (a). A small area Dm3 is formed on about 1/3 on the left side of Dm, and touch display is executed. In the state of FIG. 529 (a), since the third symbol is changing at a low speed (during reach display), the reach display mode is visually recognized by the player only in the display area of the main display area Dm which is not covered by the small area Dm3. The display is reduced in a possible state, and the touch location guidance display mode Dm31 is displayed in a mode indicating that the touch sensor 2900 has been operated (displayed with diagonal lines in the figure).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, the comment of "great chance" which is the effect result of the touch effect is displayed. In this control example, the touch effect can be executed during the reach display of the third symbol, and by operating the touch sensor 2900 during the touch effect, is the lottery result of the special figure change during execution a big hit? Since it is configured to execute an effect (comment display) that suggests whether or not it is possible, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while expecting that a comment (for example, a big chance) that is likely to be a big hit is displayed. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the operation production.

If the player wants to detect the lottery result of the special symbol as soon as possible, the touch sensor 2900 is positively operated by executing the above-mentioned touch effect, and the touch effect is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. I try to actively display the comment that is the production result, but on the other hand, I want to enjoy the production mode of the variable production of the third symbol (until the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is suggested. Even if the touch effect is executed, the player who thinks that he / she does not want to execute other effects should not display the comment suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol in the comment display area Dm2a without operating the touch sensor 2900. It is conceivable to play a game.

In this case, while the touch effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the operation means (touch sensor 2900) set during the touch effect), the touch sensor 2900 cannot be operated to grasp the current background mode. There was a problem. Therefore, in the eighth control example, the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c (see FIG. 517) arranged on the left side of the frame button 22a, so that the touch effect is being performed. Even if there is, it is configured so that the current background mode can be notified. With this configuration, even if the operation control using one operation means (touch sensor 2900) is duplicated, the player can easily perform only the desired operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 529 (b), when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation (during the reach display) of the third symbol (FIG. 5). In the lower frame line of 529 (b), the display mode imitating the left button 22b and the right button 22c is filled in), and the comment "Attention to the mode lamp" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. As a result, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated at this stage, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the current background mode is notified instead of displaying the effect result of the touch effect. can. Then, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated in that state, the background mode currently set among the mode lamps 1910 for notifying the background mode is used instead of the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation during execution. The corresponding mode lamp 1910a is lit and displayed.

In this control example, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed while the touch effect is being executed during the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol (during the reach display), the touch is performed during the pressing period. It is configured so that the effect result of the touch effect is not displayed even if the sensor 2900 is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c during the touch effect. It may be configured to forcibly end the touch effect. That is, the operation effect being executed may be canceled by executing a special operation on the operation means.

<About the electrical configuration in the 8th control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 530. FIG. 530 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example, and FIG. 530 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. In the eighth control example, eight holding lottery tables 222fa, a special effect selection table 222fb, and a vibe pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, the next background change flag 223fa is held, and the RAM 223 is held. The difference is that the effect executing flag 223 fb and the hold effect counter 2223 fc are added. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a data table used when performing a lottery (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece hold effect (treasure box effect), and is a hold number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540). The upper limit is the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter). 8 ”(Z2473: Yes in FIG. 540), it is referred to to determine whether or not to execute the eight hold effect (Z2475 in FIG. 540). When the execution of the eight-piece hold effect is determined, the above-mentioned eight-piece hold effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528.

Here, the contents of the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa will be described with reference to FIG. 531 (c). FIG. 531 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 531 (c), the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a prize that shows the lottery result (winning) that is advantageous to the player in the hold of the special figure (in the hold used for the eight-piece hold effect). It is configured to determine whether or not the information is included, and to change the execution probability of the eight hold effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning in the hold of the special figure (when the judgment result in the hold is "hit"), the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 140". It is stipulated that the eight-piece hold effect is executed in the case and the eight-piece hold effect is not executed in the case of "141 to 198". On the other hand, when the determination result in the hold is "only out of place", when the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 90", eight hold effects are executed, and when the value is "91 to 198". It is stipulated not to execute 8 hold effects.

That is, in this control example, the case where the winning information indicating the lottery result (winning) which is advantageous to the player is included in the hold which is the target of the eight hold effect is more than the case where the winning information is not included. It is configured so that the eight-piece hold effect can be easily executed. As a result, by executing the eight-piece hold effect, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot will be won soon, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is eight, which is the upper limit, whether or not to execute the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight holds. Although it is configured to perform the lottery, whether or not to execute the continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number (for example, 7), not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. May be configured to perform a lottery. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 hold effect may be varied depending on whether the number of hold balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is 3 or 4 out of the 7 hold.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a big hit (number of prize balls, game state set after the big hit game) given to the player in the big hit game executed when the big hit is won is large. The pre-discrimination result of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is easily executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided and set so that the execution probabilities of the eight hold effects are different. Also, in this case, when there is prize information indicating a big hit winning in the hold of the advantageous special symbol, it is preferable to configure it so that the hold effect of 8 pieces is easier to be executed than other conditions. As a result, the player's expectation for the eight-piece hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 at the time of operating the frame button 22 according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a lottery result (preliminary determination) in the hold. A different vibration amount is set based on the result).

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIG. 531 (a). FIG. 531 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 531 (b) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. It is a figure which showed the content of the vibe pattern data 222fc which has (vibe type).

In the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be changed in three stages. Has been done. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player, the frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to drive the frame button 22 when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates unless the frame button 22 is pressed, and the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Further, this control example is configured so that the vibration amount corresponding to a plurality of frame button presses is specified as one vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger vibration amount. As a result, the player can enthusiastically press the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

In the eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets a variation pattern for variation display based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 543), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence or absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) that vibrates the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed. The vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibe type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 531 (a), the special effect selection table 222fb is a case where a hit is included in the hold of the special figure, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79", which is a vibration amount scenario. "Vibrator A" is specified as (vibe type), "vibe B" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "80 to 139", and vibration amount scenario is specified in the range of "140 to 175". "Vibrator C" is defined as (vibe type), and "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "176 to 198".

In addition, in the case where the hit is not included in the hold of the special figure (only the off), and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is set as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). In the range of "50 to 90", "vibe C" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and in the range of "91 to 198", "vibe D" is specified as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type). It is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531 (b), the detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be described. As shown in FIG. 531 (b), in this eighth control example, four types of vibration types (vibes A to D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of times of PUSH) is set for each vibration type. ) Corresponds to the amount of vibration specified.

Specifically, "Vibrator A" of the vibe type defines "None (does not vibrate)" for the first PUSH count, "Strong" for the second to fourth times, and "Vibrator B" defines PUSH. "Weak" is specified for the first time, "Medium" for the second time, and "Strong" for the third and fourth times. "Weak", "Medium" for the 3rd time, "Strong" for the 4th time, and "Weak" for the 1st PUSH frequency and "Medium" for the 2nd to 4th times are specified for "Vibrator D". ing.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated is made different according to the set vibe type, and the presence / absence of variable vibration amount is made different according to the number of times of PUSH. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to entertain at what vibration amount the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In this eighth control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibe type is configured to increase (do not decrease) as the number of PUSH increases, but it is not limited to this. , It may be configured so that the vibration amount becomes small. In this case, if the special figure fluctuation during execution is a big hit fluctuation, or if there is winning information indicating a big hit winning in the special figure hold, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 tends to be small in the middle of the special effect. It is good to configure it so that it becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the vibration amount is reduced.

Further, in the eighth control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of times of PUSH (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set, but the vibration amount is limited to this. The number of PUSHs for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the type of vibration.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the eighth control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times according to the process of the variation display (reach variation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the frame button operation can be performed a specified number of times (4 times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the variable display effect (operation effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed.

In addition, the eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to the special effect. In the display effect dedicated to this special effect, the display mode is stepwise (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the start of the special figure change). An effect that can be stepped up is executed. This effect is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is variable (increased) by pressing the frame button 22.

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 while expecting that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased. Further, even though the vibration amount scenario (vibration type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated with the maximum vibration amount specified in the set vibration type. It is possible to prevent the special production from ending without causing it to occur.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based not only on the set vibe type but also on the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is increased. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though the display mode is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be described. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined as "frequency (frequency) indicating the number of vibrations per unit time", which is a definition indicating the strength of vibration. , "Amplification indicating the vibration width" and "Indicating the time required for one unit of vibration (period)", the magnitude of the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the vibration. Therefore, since the vibration width felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, the player can easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In the special effect described above, the frame button 22 may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times. Anything can be used as long as the period from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the start of vibration) can be changed, and each may be used in combination. Further, vibration that vibrates the frame button 22 by providing a plurality of vibration means (motors or the like) capable of applying vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) and performing drive control to the plurality of vibration means. The position of the source may be changed, or the vibration mode felt by the player may be changed by changing the drive start timing of each vibration means. Further, the player may be able to select the variable content of the vibration mode.

Further, in the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the special effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set by the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the special effect is currently being performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

The vibe pattern data 222fc is a data table in which the contents of each of the vibe types (vibes A to D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb are stored. The content thereof will be omitted because it has been described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222fb.

Next, with reference to FIG. 530 (b), the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. .. As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example has the following background change flag 223fa, the hold effect execution flag 223 fb, the hold effect counter 2223fc, and the SW special effect counter 223fd added to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Is different.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. If so, it is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background differs depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, there will be a time lag between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (shifted). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is satisfied, the next background change flag 223fa is set to on.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548), the change state of the special figure (speed of change display of the third symbol) at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed. When it is determined that the vehicle is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2964 in FIG. 548: No), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 548). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON in the fluctuation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) executed when the stop command indicating the stop of the special figure fluctuation is received (see Z2242 in FIG. 539). Z2266: Yes in FIG. 539 then determines whether or not the special figure is on hold (Z2267 in FIG. 539), and if it is determined that there is no hold (Z2267: No in FIG. 539), the special figure change is stopped. The background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure is on hold (Z2267: Yes in FIG. 539), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 538).

The hold effect executing flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that eight hold effects (see FIG. 526) are being executed, and is set to be turned on when the eight hold effects are executed. .. Then, when the eight hold effects are completed, the effect is set to off (see Z2534 in FIG. 543). Although detailed illustration is omitted, while the holding effect executing flag 223fb is set to ON, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol). Even if the upper limit number (8) is reached (the value obtained by adding the values of the two hold ball counters 223b), the lottery for executing a new eight hold effect is not executed.

Specifically, when it is determined in the hold ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 540) that the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter is 8 (Z2473: Yes in FIG. 540), then the hold effect is produced. It is configured to determine whether the running flag 223fb is set to on, and to execute the processes of Z2474 and Z2475 of FIG. 540 when it is determined that the running flag 223fb is not set to on (off). ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the eight-piece hold effect from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, so that the value of the eight-piece hold effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the 8 hold effect, a new 8 hold effect is executed. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, as a lottery for whether or not to execute a new eight-piece hold effect, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the lottery for whether or not to execute the first eight-piece hold effect. Specifically, the new eight-piece hold effect may be configured to be easier to execute when a jackpot is included in the target hold than the initial eight-piece hold effect. As a result, when the eight-piece hold effect is executed for more than eight special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the big hit can be further increased. In addition, even during the eight-piece hold effect, the game can be enthusiastically played in order to accumulate the hold balls up to the maximum number again.

The hold effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and every time the main process (see FIG. 536) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). In), the update process is executed so that the values are different. The value of the hold effect counter 223fc is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold effect lottery table 222fa as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect process (see Z2841 in FIG. 547). In this case (see Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 547). Here, in this control example, no matter what type of special effect is set, the special effect for four frame button operations is set, so that the value of 4 is set in the SW special effect counter 223fd.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is subtracted by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 547), and corresponds to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction. SW motor data is set to perform the effect (see Z2497 in FIG. 547).

The return state storage area 223fe stores the remaining time information of the return change (special figure change in which the power is cut off during execution) included in the return command received from the main control device 110 when returning from the power failure state. Storage area for. Specifically, in the fluctuation return processing (Z2252 in FIG. 541), it is used in the processing (Z2281 in FIG. 541) for storing the remaining fluctuation time information included in the received return command.

In this control example, the display mode (variation display mode) after the return processing is completed is set based on the residual fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation stored in the return state storage area 223fe after the power is restored. A detailed explanation will be given later, but if the residual fluctuation time after the return processing is completed is longer than the predetermined time (2 seconds), the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the residual fluctuation time is executed and the predetermined time (2). Seconds) If it is less than or equal to, the return processing screen is configured to be displayed continuously. This makes it possible for the player to easily display the fluctuation of the special figure after the power is restored.

The return fluctuation flag 223ff is a flag for indicating that the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off is fluctuating (return fluctuation) after the power is restored, and is set to ON when the return fluctuation is in progress. It is a thing. This return-changing flag 223ff is set to on (see Z2284 in FIG. 541) when a value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is set in the change-back processing (see FIG. 541). After the display command corresponding to the return variation is set, it is set to off (Z2296 in FIG. 542).

The remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is a counter for counting the remaining time of the fluctuation of the third symbol. The value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern acquired in the fluctuation display setting processing 8 (see FIG. 543) (Z2511 in FIG. 543), and the counter update processing (see FIG. 552). When it is determined that the value set in is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), 1 is subtracted.

The high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is a flag for indicating whether the fluctuation of the third symbol is in the high-speed fluctuation period, and is set to ON when the fluctuation is in high-speed fluctuation. This high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg indicates a high-speed fluctuation period in the counter update process (see Z2176 in FIG. 552), and the high-speed fluctuation is set. If no period is indicated, it is set to off (Z2865 in FIG. 552). Further, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), the touch sensor 2900 is operated (determined to be on) (FIG. 549). Z2825: Yes), it is also set to off when the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is switched to a low speed (Z2833 of Z549). Further, the setting status of the high-speed changing flag 223fh is referred to when determining the timing for shifting the background mode in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 548) (see Z2964 in FIG. 549).

The special operation flag 223fi is a flag for indicating that the player has performed a special operation on the operation means (left button 22b, right button 22c), and is turned on when the player performs the special operation. Is set to. Specifically, when the left button 22b and the right button 22c are pressed in the left and right button input processing (see Z2843 in FIG. 546) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545). (Z2851: Yes in FIG. 546), which is set to on (Z2855 in FIG. 546) when the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off during the fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2853: No in FIG. 546).

Then, in the sensor input process 8 (see Z2842 in FIG. 549), the setting status is determined (see Z2831 in FIG. 549), and when it is set to ON (Z2831: Yes in FIG. 549), the process related to the touch effect is performed. The mode identification process (Z2868 in FIG. 549) is executed without being executed. In this control example, the special operation flag 223fi is set to be turned on while the player continuously operates (presses) the left button 22b and the right button 22c, and the left button 22b and the right button 22c are set to be turned on. When the operation of is stopped, the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (see Z2857 in FIG. 546). That is, when the touch sensor 2900 is operated with the left button 22b and the right button 22c pressed, the effect mode of the touch effect does not change based on the operation result, and the currently set background mode is used. Notification is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as described with reference to FIG. 517, the left button 22b and the right button 22c are arranged at a distance (about 3 cm) so that the player can operate them simultaneously with one hand. Has been done. Therefore, the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with the other hand while the left button 22b and the right button 22c are operated with one hand. The arrangement relationship of each operating means is not limited to the arrangement relationship of this control example. For example, the left button 22b, the right button 22c, and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated with one hand at the same time. Alternatively, the left button 22b and the right button 22c may be configured so that they can be operated by one hand operating the operation handle and the touch sensor 2900 can be operated by the other hand. ..

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in this 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 532 and 533, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, the content specified in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the content specified in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from the first control example described above. Other than that, they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 532 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 532, the work RAM 233 of the eighth control example has eight display setting flags 233fa, eight display effect counters 233fb, a display reserved ball number storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd. It is different from the first control example described above.

The eight-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag for indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the eight-piece hold effect is executed. While the eight display setting flags 233fa are set to ON, the special symbol is displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 521 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the number of reserved balls, the remaining number of reserved symbols (reserved symbols for effect) that are the targets of the eight reserved effects are displayed (see FIG. 528). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the eight hold effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In the eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight reserved effects and the number of reserved symbols for the effect are configured to be displayed in synchronization, but the eight reserved effects are displayed. It suffices to display the number of reserved symbols for effect so that the player can be informed of the execution period of the game in an easy-to-understand manner. The number of reserved symbols for production may be set, or one production reserved symbol may be set for two or more special symbol fluctuations. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight hold effects (how many hold symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner).

The display eight effect counter 233fb is the number of effect hold symbols to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 521 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the eight hold effect. It is a counter for measuring. In this control example, since the number of reserved symbols for effect is changed according to the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight hold effect, eight display effect from the voice lamp control device 113. In the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) executed when a hold command is received, the value of the counter is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 555).

Then, in the variation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) executed when the variation pattern command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the counter is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 554), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter of is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 554). When the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb becomes 0, it means that all the reserved symbols that are the target of the 8 hold effect are used, so the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to end the display of the effect hold symbol. It is set to off (see Z3525 in FIG. 554), and in the hold display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556), the hold symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 528). As a result, when the last special figure change that is the target of the eight-piece hold effect is executed, the hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls of the special figure is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the eight-piece hold effect ends. At that time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives a display reserved ball number command output from the voice lamp control device 113. If so, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and has a different value each time the display control device 114 command determination process (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is executed. The update process is executed so as to be. The value of the display effect counter 233fd is acquired when a lottery is performed with reference to the eight hold lottery table 222fa as to whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 540). (See Z2474 in FIG. 540).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 532, the NAND flash memory 234a of the eighth control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234a of the first control example described above in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 are added. ing.

The eight-piece effect scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the effect result of the eight-piece hold effect, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be the target of the eight hold effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the eight-piece hold effect.

Here, the detailed contents of the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 526 to 528, in the eighth control example, the treasure box displaying the executing area Ds1a is open at the time when the special figure fluctuation is started when the eight hold effects are executed. It is configured to display the suggestion mode for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the suggestion mode is configured to be selected with reference to the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3.

In the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3, the change result (the lottery result of the special figure variation executed this time) is a hit (big hit), and the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4". In that case, that is, when 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the value of the display effect counter 233fd is suggested in the range of "0 to 50". Is defined, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "51 to 90", the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91 to 150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151 to 198". It is stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" in the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", and the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179". Is specified, and "white" is specified in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation result (the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation executed this time) is out of order and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, the treasure box is imitated in the waiting area Ds1b. When 4 to 7 reserved symbols for effect are displayed, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range where the value of the display effect counter 233fd is "0 to 39", and the value is set in the range of "40 to 149". The suggestion mode "blue" is defined, and "white" is defined in the range of "150 to 198". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198". It is stipulated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the eight hold effect, the hit suggestion mode "Rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a hit is provided. When the suggestion mode "Rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure change is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the smaller the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb, that is, the more the 8 hold effect progresses, the easier it is to display various colors as the suggestion mode of the 8 hold effect. It is possible to entertain the production without getting tired of the eight-piece hold production, which is a continuous production performed over the fluctuation of the special figure.

In the eighth control example, when eight hold effects are executed, the effect hold symbol (treasure box) for showing the target special figure change is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and the effect is set. When the special figure change is executed, the treasure box displayed in the executing area Ds1a is open so that a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the change is displayed. Not limited to, for example, when displaying a reserved symbol (treasure box) for effect in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure box is set based on the pre-discrimination result for each reserved symbol. Is also good.

Specifically, it is possible to set multiple treasure chest colors that are easier to select when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot than when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the special map fluctuation executed during the eight-piece hold effect from the stage before the special map variation is executed.

In addition, an effect (look-ahead effect) that changes the mode (color of the treasure box) of the effect reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and an effect that changes the display mode of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the running area Ds1a. When (the variable effect) and (the variable effect) are executed in combination, it is preferable to set a variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect executed earlier. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may also be set in advance. When selecting the variation effect, the variation effect may be selected based on the effect mode of the look-ahead effect set for the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation effect this time. As a result, one reserved symbol (winning information) can be related to the production mode of a plurality of effects (look-ahead effect, the variable effect) executed at different timings, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to perform continuous production without giving.

<Control processing by the main control device in the 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 534, the start-up process 8 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 8. The start-up process 8 in the eighth control example sets a change return command indicating the remaining time of the special figure change during execution after the Z910 process is executed for the start-up process in the first control example. (Z951) The difference is that processing is added. In this eighth control example, a command indicating the remaining time of the return fluctuation is set. Since the other processes are the same as the start-up processes in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 535 to 552, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. In the eighth control example, the start-up process (see FIG. 394) is the start-up process 8 (see FIG. 534), and the main process (see FIG. 395) is the main process 8 (see FIG. 536) with respect to the first control example described above. (See), the command determination process (2113 in FIG. 396) is the command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537), the variation pattern reception process (Z2202 in FIG. 397) is the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538), and the variation display setting. Process (Z2114 in FIG. 406) is variable display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543), hold quantity display update process (Z2106 in FIG. 395) is hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171 in FIG. 544), frame button input monitoring. The effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 409) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 545), and the new processes include the fluctuation return process (Z2252 in FIG. , Left and right button input processing (Z2843 in FIG. 546), SW effect processing (Z2841 in FIG. 547), background change processing (Z2949 in FIG. 548), mode identification processing (Z296 in FIG. 550), lamp setting processing (Z2173 in FIG. ), The counter update process (Z2176 in FIG. 552) is added, which is the main difference. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 535, the start-up process (see FIG. 535) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 394) of the first control example described above in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 394) when a state command is received is deleted. .. Further, it differs in that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) is changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 535) is executed, the processes of Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example will be described with respect to the difference from the first control example described above. In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, if the special figure change is executed during the period when the initial setting is executed, the BGM of the special figure change is output. It is configured in. That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535), the process of reading the game information at the time of turning off the power is executed, and the game information at the time of turning off the power read by the process is changing in the special figure. If it is determined that there is, a change command for voice is set to output the BGM of the special figure change from the voice output device 226.

Although the details will be described later, in the eighth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the power is supplied from the internal power supply provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the power is supplied. The game information (whether or not there is a change in the special figure, the lottery result of the change, the BGM for change, the remaining change time, etc.) at the time of disconnection is temporarily stored in the display storage area. This makes it possible to read the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 535).

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, the contents of the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 536 is a schematic diagram showing the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth control example.

The main process 8 of the eighth control example replaces the hold quantity display update process (Z2106 of FIG. 395) with respect to the main process (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above, and the hold quantity update process 8 (FIG. 395). 544 Z2171) is replaced with a frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 395), and frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 544) is replaced with a command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 395). The command determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 537) is replaced with the variation display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 395) by providing the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 543), and the short-term winning management process (FIG. 395). Z2111), the hold effect management process during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 394) is deleted, and the lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 536) is added. The other processes are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 536) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of Z2105 is completed, the pending quantity display update processing 8 is next executed (Z2171). The detailed contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 544. After finishing the processing of Z2171, the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 545.

When the processing of Z2172 is completed, the same processing of Z2108 to Z2110 as the main processing (see FIG. 395) of the first control example described above is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit 80. The detailed contents of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 551. After finishing the processing of Z2173, the counter update processing (Z2176) is then executed. The detailed contents of the counter update process (Z2176) will be described later with reference to FIG. 552.

Then, when the processing of Z2176 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: No), the command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then the variable display is performed. The setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the first control example described above is executed. The detailed contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537, and the detailed contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 543.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 537. FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174). The command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the hold ball count command output from the main control device 110 for the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the first control example described above. The point that the content of the process to be executed in the case is different, the point that the process to be executed when the stop command output from the main control device 110 is received (variable stop process 8) is added, and the output from the display control device 114. There is a difference between the point that the process to be executed when the display rise command is received is added and the point that the process to be executed is added when the variable recovery command is received. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is the eighth. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2261 in FIG. 537).

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 8 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: Yes), then the variation pattern reception process 8 Is executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538, but at the start of variation with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) of the first control example described above. It differs in that it is configured to execute the process for the background change in.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 537. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs a process of setting a stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a process of executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped. The details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 539.

In the processing of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), then it is determined whether the reserved ball count command has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the reserved ball count command has been received. If this is the case (Z2205: Yes), the hold number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hold number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the process of 2205 (Z2205: No), the Z2207 and Z2208 which are the same as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396). The process is executed, then it is determined whether or not the variable return command has been received (Z2251), and if it is determined that the variable return command has been received (Z2251: Yes), the variable return process is executed (Z2252), and this process is performed. To finish. The detailed contents of this fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described later with reference to FIG. 541.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2251 that the fluctuation return command has not been received (Z2251: No), then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display rise command is set when the display control device 114 finishes the initial setting process after the power is turned on, and the display control device 114 is set by the command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114. Is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command has been received in the processing of Z2244, that is, the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen of (Z2244: Yes), the display rising process is executed (Z2245), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this display rising process (Z2245) will be described later with reference to FIG. 542.

In this Z2245 process, a process for reading the game information (voice data) stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off and outputting the voice data to the voice output device 226 is executed. As a result, as described above with reference to FIG. 520, the audio output device 226 coincides with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 switches from the initial screen to the normal screen. It is possible to output the sound based on the sound data stored in the display storage area from.

In this control example, as game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is changing (information during the special figure change) is executed during the special figure change. Information indicating the type of voice (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting voice data in the processing of Z2245, the special figure changing information and BGM type information are read out and used as the read information. Based on this, the rising voice data is set.

In the processing of Z2244, if it is determined that the display rise command has not been received (Z2244: No), the processing corresponding to other commands (including the processing when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , End this process.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described with reference to FIG. 538. FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). The variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) deletes the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 397) of the first control example described above, and processes the background change at the start of the variation. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed, the same processes of Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 397) of the first control example described above are executed, and then the next process is performed. It is determined whether the background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2256). Here, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2257), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed change period during the special figure change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 538) is executed with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON. Then, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation executed during the previous special figure change. On the other hand, in the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to on (set to off) (Z2256: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242) will be described with reference to FIG. 539. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the variable stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266), and if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure is on hold (Z2266: Yes). Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are read out for determination. If it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is no reservation for the special figure (Z2267: No), the next special figure change will occur even though the condition for executing the background change in the next special figure change is satisfied. Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change when the special figure change is stopped this time, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2268), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the process proceeds to Z2271.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (Z2266: No), or when it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is a hold of the special figure (Z2267: Yes). ) Does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special figure), so that the process of Z2268 to Z2270 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2271.

In the processing of Z2271, it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is ON (Z2271), that is, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a return fluctuation. When it is determined that the return-changing flag is on (Z2271: Yes), the return-changing flag 223ff is set to off (Z2272), and the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return variation flag 223ff is not on (Z2271: No), since the current variation is not the return variation, the processes of Z2272 and Z2273 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, when the condition for executing the next special figure change is not satisfied while the next background change flag 223fa is on (the special figure is suspended at the timing when the current special figure change is stopped). (If there is no), the background change is executed at the stop timing of the special figure change this time, so the player who wants the background change should be provided with the background mode after switching at an early stage. Can be done.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present control example described above, and for example, the next background change flag 223fa may be kept on until the next special figure variation is executed. In this case, a predetermined valid period (for example, 1 minute) is set as the period until the next special figure change is started, and if the next special figure change is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the following background It is preferable to configure the change flag 223fa to be set to off.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON, the next player starts the game. It is possible to prevent the background change from being executed immediately afterwards.

Next, the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243) will be described with reference to FIG. 540. FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243). In this hold number control process (Z2243), a process for managing the number of reserved balls on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the information included in the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and a special figure. The execution process of the effect (8 hold effect) on the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the hold number control process (Z2243), first, the hold ball number of the special symbol is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol hold number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter). (Z2471) is stored in the number counter 223b), and a display hold ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold number counter stored in the process of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is 8 which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2473 that the value of the counter (number of reserved balls in the special figure) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2474), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is used. Based on this, a lottery result is acquired from the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating that the eight hold effect is to be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding eight hold effect is set (Z2477), and the display eight hold effect command is set (Z2478). ), The hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to ON (Z2479), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is set to 8, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that it is a lottery result indicating that the eight holding effect is not executed (Z2476: No), the processing of Z2477 to Z2480 is skipped because the eight holding effect is not executed. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 541. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation return processing (Z2252). This fluctuation return processing (Z2252) executes a processing for updating the remaining time of the return variation based on the return variation command received from the main control device 110.

In the fluctuation return processing (Z2252), first, the residual fluctuation time information included in the fluctuation recovery command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the recovery state storage area 223fe (Z2281). Next, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is 0, that is, whether or not the return fluctuation is in progress (Z2282). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 0 (Z2282: No), the value corresponding to the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is set (Z2283), and the return changing flag 223ff is set to ON (Z2284). Next, BGM information indicating the reproduction position of the special figure change BGM at the time when the power supply is cut off is read from the backup area of the RAM 223 (Z2285), and the BGM of the special figure change is read from the reproduction position indicated by the read BGM information. Is set to start (Z2286), and this process ends. On the other hand, the residual fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2282. That is, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the return fluctuation (Z2282: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this fluctuation return processing (see FIG. 541), when the fluctuation display is being executed when the power is restored, the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is restarted from the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, when the power is momentarily cut off during the execution of the special figure fluctuation (so-called momentary power failure occurs, etc.), the BGM after the power is restored will change the BGM from the continuation of the BGM when the power is cut off. Can be output. Therefore, even after the power is cut off, the player can easily understand that the lottery status at the time of power cutoff is maintained as it is. Therefore, even if the power supply is momentarily (temporarily) cut off during the special figure change, the special figure change that is being executed may be discarded for the player. Since it is possible to suppress the suspicion that there is no such thing, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind.

In the eighth control example, the progress of the BGM output at the time of power failure is backed up by the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the main control device 110, the variation return command may include at least information on the variation type (variation time) in addition to the information on the residual variation time of the special figure variation being executed. Then, from the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation during execution and the remaining fluctuation time information, the period during which the BGM has been regenerated (the fluctuation time elapsed before the occurrence of the power failure) is calculated, and the total reproduction time of the BGM is calculated. By back-calculating the reproduction position of the BGM at the time when the power is cut off from the difference between the two, the reproduction position of the BGM at the time of returning the power may be specified. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide a backup means in the voice lamp control device 113, so that the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified. Therefore, since the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the display rising process (Z2245) will be described with reference to FIG. 542. FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display rise processing (Z2245). In this display rise processing (Z2245), when a display rise command is received from the display control device 114, that is, when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, the remaining fluctuation time is dealt with based on the value of the residual fluctuation time counter. Executes the process of setting the display variation pattern command.

In the display rising process (Z2245), first, it is determined whether or not the return-changing flag 223ff is on, that is, whether or not the return-changing flag is in progress (Z2291). If it is determined that the return-changing flag 223ff is not on (Z2291: No), the return-changing flag is not in progress, and the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return-changing flag 223ff is on (Z2291: Yes), the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2292), and the process proceeds to Z2293.

After executing the process of Z2292, it is then determined whether or not the residual variation time read by the process of Z2292 is 5 seconds or more (Z2293). When it is determined that the remaining variation time is 5 seconds or more (Z2293: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponding to the residual variation time is executed by using various display variation patterns possessed by the variation pattern selection table 222a. Set (Z2294), start up and set the set audio data (Z2295). Next, the return-changing flag 223ff is set to off (Z2296), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2293, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not 5 seconds or more (Z2293: No), it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297). When it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds or more (Z2297: Yes), the display fluctuation pattern for normal reach is made to correspond to the remaining fluctuation time, and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (Z2298). Then, the process of Z2296 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2297, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not 2 seconds or more (Z2297: No), a display command for displaying the returning screen is set until the remaining fluctuation time elapses (Z2299). ), Z2296 processing is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the variation pattern command for displaying the return variation is set according to the remaining variation time, and the voice data is set to notify the player of the result of the return variation without discomfort. can do. In this eighth control example, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set by using the fluctuation pattern table specified even at the time of the return fluctuation. However, the fluctuation pattern table for the return fluctuation is provided, and the fluctuation pattern table is provided at the time of the return fluctuation. The display variation pattern command may be set using the return variation pattern table. With such a configuration, more fluctuation patterns can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described with reference to FIG. 543. FIG. 543 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). The variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) has a control process related to the hold effect (8 hold effects) and a remaining variation time counter 223fg with respect to the variation display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) of the first control example described above. It differs in that it adds the process of setting, and is the same except for that. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501), and if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not set to ON. (Z2501: No), skip to the process of Z2505 as in the first control example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (Z2501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is larger than 0 (Z2531), and is larger than 0. (Z2531: Yes), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is 0 in the processing of Z2533 (Z2533: Yes), since it is the end timing of the eight hold effects, the hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to off (Z2534). ), The process proceeds to the same Z2502 process as in the first control example described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2531, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2531: No), it means that 8 pieces are not currently in hold effect, so Z2532. -The process of Z2534 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of Z2502.

Further, in the processing of Z2533, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), the eight hold effects are being executed and the end timing of the eight hold effects is not reached. Therefore, the process of Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502. When the process shifts to the Z2502 process, the same Z2502 to Z2504 processes as the variation display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) are executed, and the value corresponding to the variation time of the acquired variation pattern remains. The fluctuation time counter is set to 223ff (Z2511). Then, the same processing of Z2502 to Z2504 as the fluctuation display setting processing of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 406) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Further, in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the eighth control example, when the process of Z2511 is completed, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2535), and the process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 544. FIG. 544 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171). In the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the hold LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol is performed.

When the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b) is executed. The hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then the display hold ball count command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b) is executed. Set (Z2632) and end this process.

In this control example, in the process of Z2631, the holding LED 900 is lit in the same manner corresponding to the total value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Although it is configured to be set, the holding LED 900 is not limited to this, and for example, the holding LED 900 can be identified between the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. The lighting may be set so as to light, or the lighting is set so as to light the holding LED 900 according to only the number of holding balls of one of the special figures according to the current gaming state. You may.

Further, in this control example, the holding LED 900 is configured to always execute the lighting setting indicating the special figure holding ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example,). The period during which the eight hold effects are being executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for the effect is movable so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The holding LED 900 is configured to be turned on only during the period when it is difficult to visually recognize the number of reserved balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the variable display is executed using the entire screen. May be.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described with reference to FIG. 545. FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is pressed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed, the processing content that is executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the processing that is executed when the left and right buttons are input is added. Everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same processing of Z2801 to Z2805 as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above is executed, and Z2805 is executed. If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of (Z2805: No), the process related to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2843. In the processing of Z2843, the processing for the operation of the left button 22b or the right button 22c (hereinafter, left / right button 22) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the Z2805 process (Z2805: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed when the switch that comes into contact with the frame button 22 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned on (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to the initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds of the recovery operation. It is composed.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is turned on continuously for at least 0.15 seconds, so that the on state is set. When the detection is continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), it can be determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an on state for a short period (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being erroneously determined to have been pressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 546, the contents of the left and right button input processing (Z2843), which is one of the processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172), will be described. FIG. 546 is a flowchart showing the contents of the left / right button input process (Z2843). In this left / right button input process (Z2843), it is determined whether the special symbol has high-speed fluctuation or low-speed fluctuation, and a process of switching the operation mode of the left / right button 22 is executed.

In the left / right button input process (Z2843), first, it is determined whether or not the left button 22b or the right button 22c has been operated (Z2851). When it is determined that the left / right button 22 has been operated (Z2851: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more, that is, whether the special symbol is being changed (Z2852). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z2852: Yes), it is determined whether or not the high-speed changing flag 223fh is ON (Z2853). When it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on (Z2853: Yes), the volume level according to the operation result of the left and right buttons 22 is set (Z2854), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is off in the processing of Z2853 (Z2853: No), the special operation flag 223fi is set to ON (Z2855), and this processing is terminated. By configuring in this way, the operation mode of the left and right buttons 22 can be changed according to the fluctuation state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2851 when it is determined that the left and right buttons 22 are not operated (Z2851: No), it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856). If it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2856: Yes), the special operation flag 223fi is set to off (Z2857), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is off in the processing of Z2856 (Z2856: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841) executed by the processing of Z2841 in FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. 547. FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), the control process related to the special effect of vibrating the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the background change process of changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22 are described above. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example is executed. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) of the first control example described above is designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when the display variation pattern command is set in the Z2504 process of the variation display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 543), the variation pattern including the special effect is set as the SW effect, and the variation pattern is set. In the Z2804 process of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545), it is determined whether or not the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the operation to the frame button 22 this time is an operation to the frame button 22 during the special effect, so that the control process for the special effect is performed. (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, in Z2942, it is determined whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223fd is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. Is. When it is determined in the processing of Z2942 that the value of the counter is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2943), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is obtained. The special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, regardless of which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four times. Therefore, in the processing of Z2945, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 4. To.

Next, a display special effect command corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2942, when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special effect has already been executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 1. Subtraction (Z2948) is performed, and the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is executed in correspondence with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the above-mentioned processing of the special effect will be specifically described when the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected with reference to FIG. 531 (b). First, the first frame button 22 operation is performed in a state where the special effect is included in the current variation pattern, and the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, 4 is set in the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd in the processing of Z2945, and the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibration type C is set in the processing of Z2447 (FIG. 531 (FIG. 531). b) See).

At the same time, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the button thereof. The pressing suggestion display mode) for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special figure change and the type of the selected special effect. For example, the following frame button. During operation, if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied, a large vibration is applied if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied. It is configured so that the display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is easier to be displayed than when it is not given.

With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery this time is a big hit, it is configured so that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is easier to be displayed than when the lottery result is not a big hit (off). When the next frame button operation is applied with a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated at the current frame button operation, and the special figure lottery result is a big hit, the next frame button operation is the most. It is configured so that the emphasized display mode can be easily displayed.

As a result, the result of the special drawing lottery can be predicted based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration amount generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated at the time of the next frame button operation becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated at the time of the current frame button operation, the player forgets to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set effect can be fully enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button operation is performed for the second time during the special effect, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (3) in the processing of Z2942 (Z2942; Yes), and the SW special effect is produced. The value of the counter 223fd is subtracted by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2, is set in the SW motor data. After that, the same process is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). It is configured in. In this control example, since the variation pattern is configured to correspond to the setting and the special effect can be set as the SW effect, the execution period of the special effect is configured to be within one special figure variation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the special figure fluctuation period). For example, the special effect is set at the start of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and set a special effect based on the determination result. Further, the special effect may be set when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22).

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect regardless of the fluctuation time of the set special figure. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special drawing lottery during fluctuation, the winning information in the hold, and the set gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 547, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), then the frame button input monitoring of the first control example described above is performed. -The same process as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, Z2811 of the effect process (see Z2107 in FIG. 409) is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the current time is the timing when the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: No) Since the frame button 22 this time is a background change operation for changing the background mode, the background change process is executed (Z2949), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. 548. FIG. 548 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed, and the background change is performed based on the operation timing of the background change operation. The process for changing the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548), first, whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is greater than 0 at the timing when the background change operation is executed, that is, the fluctuation period of the special figure (special symbol). (Z2963), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is a value larger than 0 (Z2963: Yes), then whether the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is on. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high-speed fluctuation period (a period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (medium speed, low speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: No), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag. 223fa is set to on (Z2965), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2963, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter is not 0 or more (Z2963: No), it is determined that the present is not the fluctuation period of the special figure (for example, the customer waiting period) (Z2963: No). ) Or, in the process of Z2964, when it is determined that the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately. Therefore, the background mode is added by 1 to the background mode. It is set in the storage area 223i (Z2966), a display switching command to the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2967), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) of FIG. 545 will be described with reference to FIG. 549. FIG. 549 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), the special operation flag 223fi is turned off with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above, and the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when the advance notice effect display is not set, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is larger than 0. However, in this control example, the touch is performed. The difference is that the sensor valid time counter 223s is used to measure the valid period corresponding to the effect set based on the fluctuation pattern among the periods during which the operation to the sensor 2900 can be effectively discriminated. Therefore, even when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Further, also in the eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided, and a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined is provided as in the first control example described above, but the description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831), and when it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is not on (Z2831: Yes). , The same processing of Z2821 to Z2829 as the sensor input processing (Z2813 in FIG. 410) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special operation flag 223fi is on (Z2831: Yes) in the processing of Z2831 or the warning effect display is not set in the processing of Z2822 (Z2822: No), the mode identification processing is performed. Is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z21968), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 550, a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 in the processing of Z2821, the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted (Z2824) to determine whether the touch sensor is on (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor is not on (Z2825: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor is on (Z2825: Yes), a command is set in which the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is low-speed fluctuation (Z2832), and the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to off (Z2832). Z2833). Next, the touch sensor effective time is reset (Z2829), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 550. FIG. 550 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed, first, it is determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2696), and if it is determined to be on (Z2769: Yes), the current background mode is supported. Set the mode display command (Z2970) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated in the processing of the Z2769 (Z2769: No), the processing of the Z2970 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

That is, in the eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player only by operating the touch sensor 2900. With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode in the limited space of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to secure a wide area used for producing a variable display.

In the eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 523 (a)). However, not limited to this, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed at the timing of displaying the current background mode is determined based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, and the display mode of the effect is determined based on the determination result. The display area where is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in the display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting mode of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 518) according to the gaming situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (Z2131), and if it is determined that the special figure is not changing (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is turned on. Set the frame lighting command to light green (Z2135), then set the mode lighting command to light the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and perform this process. To finish.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) which is a light emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light in an arbitrary color by lighting the light emitting means. ing. Then, various information is notified to the player depending on the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The red color is specified as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing fluctuations other than high-speed fluctuations. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (variation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, since the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player contacts) to be operated when the background change operation is executed is made to emit light by the frame lamp, the player who intends to execute the background change operation is asked. Since the current special figure change state (variation speed of the third symbol) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure change state when the background change operation is executed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to suppress the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the timing of executing the background change is different according to the fluctuation speed of the third symbol, and which speed is the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the display screen. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to identify the above-mentioned problem, but the above-mentioned problem should be solved by changing the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol). Can be done.

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly emit light on the surface of the frame button 22, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this, and it is in the viewpoint of the player who performs the background change operation. Any position is sufficient. For example, a frame lamp may be provided in the vicinity of the frame button 22.

Returning to FIG. 551, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of Z2131, if it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), then it is determined whether the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is on (Z2132), and the high-speed fluctuating flag 223fh is turned on. If it is determined to be (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is turned on in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134 processing, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command for turning on all the mode lamps. Is set, and this process ends.

Next, the counter update process (Z2176), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 536), will be described with reference to FIG. 552. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update process (Z2176). In this counter update process (Z2176), a process of updating the values of various counters is executed.

In the counter update process (Z2176), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861). When the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is 0 or more (Z2861: Yes), the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is subtracted by 1 (Z2862), and the process proceeds to Z2863. On the other hand, when the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is not 0 or more, that is, when it is determined to be 0 (Z2861: No), the processing of Z2862 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2863.

In the processing of Z2863, it is determined whether or not the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg read in the processing of Z2861 is a value indicating the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2863: Yes), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to ON (Z2864), other counter values are updated (Z2866), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is not the high-speed fluctuation period of the special figure (third symbol) (Z2863: No), the high-speed fluctuation flag 223fh is set to off (Z2865), and the above is described. The processing of Z2866 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 553 to 557. In the eighth control example, for the first control example described above, the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 553) is replaced with the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414), and the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 415) is performed. The variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 554) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (b)) instead of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in FIG. 557). (See) is executed, and the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 555) and the hold display setting process (see Z3495 in FIG. 556) are added. Other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), when the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is looped with a process executed when eight display hold commands are received and this process. The processing to update the value of the display effect counter, the content of the processing to be executed when the variable pattern command for display is received, and the content of the processing to be executed when the reserved ball count command is received. , Is different in that it is changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same Z3401 to Z3404 processes as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) are executed, and the display variation pattern is executed in the Z3404 process. When it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 554.

In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In the eighth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated every time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed once. The command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of the command (display command) received by the display control device 114. Therefore, the timing at which the Z3496 process is executed can always be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3494 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received in the Z3404 process (Z3404: No), the same Z3406 to Z3411 process as the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 414) is executed. , The process proceeds to the above-mentioned Z3496 process. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), then it is determined whether or not the eight display hold command has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that the command has been received. If this is the case (Z3492: Yes), the eight display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process.

This eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data related to the eight-piece hold effect (see FIG. 526), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 555. In the processing of Z3492, if it is determined that the eight display hold command has not been received (Z3492: No), then it is determined whether the hold ball count command has been received (Z3414), and the hold ball count command is executed. If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3414: Yes), the hold display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to the Z3494 process. This hold display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detailed contents thereof are described in FIG. 556. Will be described later with reference to.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 414). Is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496 processing.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) differs from the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) in that a control process is added when eight hold effects are executed. The elements other than are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3501 to Z3506 as the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 415) are executed, and then eight display setting flags 233fa are set. Determine if it is set to on (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the eight hold effects are not being executed (Z3521: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z3521: Yes), the value of the 8 display effect counter 233fb is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the 8 display display after subtraction is produced. The effect mode (contents of the treasure box) is selected using the eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 with reference to the counter (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight display effect counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to off (Z3526). , End this process. Further, in the processing of Z3525, even if the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, the eight hold effect is continued even in the next and subsequent special figure fluctuations (Z3525: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. 555. FIG. 555 is a flowchart showing the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493). When the 8 display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z5701), the 8 effect display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the 8 display setting data table is set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the set data table for displaying the eight effects is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z5704), the time data is set to the timekeeping counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the display 8 effect counter. , End this process.

Next, the contents of the hold display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. 556. FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display process (Z3495). When the hold display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of hold balls is set in the display hold ball number storage area 233fc based on the information included in the hold ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802), and if it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802: Yes), eight are currently on hold. Display 8 Pointers corresponding to the values of the effect counter 233fb are set (Z5803), and this processing is terminated. That is, while the eight hold effects are being executed, the number of display hold symbols (treasure boxes) corresponding to the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb in the waiting area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed in.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z5802 that the eight display setting flag 233fa is not set to ON (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is set (Z5804). , End this process. That is, while the eight hold effects are not being executed, the hold symbols (circles) corresponding to the number of hold balls of the special figure are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described with reference to FIG. 557. FIG. 557 is a flowchart showing the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). In this resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631), the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above is set in that a command (display rising command) for indicating that all the resident target image data has been transferred is set. Is different from. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same Z4701 to Z4705 processes as the above-mentioned resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 422 (b)) are executed, and the Z4705 process is completed. , Set the display rise command (Z4721), and end this process. In this way, a command (display) for indicating that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 411) in the main processing of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 411) has been completed. By configuring the rise command) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the display control device 114 can normally operate on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the eighth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113, voice output device 226). Therefore, by outputting the display rise command from the display control device 114, it is possible to execute the instruction to display the normal screen after the power is turned on and the instruction to output various voices (BGM) in synchronization.

In the eighth control example, a period (period) in which the period effect is executed for the waiting area Ds1b while the dedicated effect (period effect) using the eight reserved symbols stored in the hold is executed. It was configured so that the reserved symbol for production showing only the reserved symbol that is the target of the production) is displayed. That is, during the execution of the period effect, even if a new start winning is detected, the new reserved symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the look-ahead result based on the new start prize is a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a big hit lottery result, etc.), a hold indicating the start prize corresponding to the specific lottery result. The display range of the reserved symbol for effect may be expanded to the symbol (or the display range may be expanded at a high rate). With this configuration, when the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded, it is possible to make the player recognize that the reserved ball corresponding to the specific lottery result is included. It is possible to further improve the player's expectation for a big hit. In addition, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a hold corresponding to a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result that develops into super reach, a lottery result of a big hit, etc.) in the hold symbol that is the target of the period production. Even if a new start prize is detected while the symbol is included, the display range of the reserved symbol for production is expanded (or the display range is expanded) to the reserved symbol corresponding to the new start prize. It may be configured (so that the ratio is high). With this configuration, even if the display range is expanded, it is possible to have a specific lottery result within the range at the beginning of the period production, so that the variable display corresponding to the specific lottery result can be displayed at any time. It is possible to realize playability that is not known to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this eighth control example, even when the operation effect using the touch sensor 2900 is being executed, the special operation (the touch sensor 2900 is operated while pressing the left button 22b and the right button 22c) is executed. Was configured to be treated as an operation for notifying the background mode, not as an operation of the touch sensor 2900 for the operation effect, but in addition to this, the operation effect is performed when a special operation is mistaken. It may be configured so as not to be handled (difficult to handle) as an operation of the touch sensor 2900. More specifically, for example, when an operation on the touch sensor 2900 is detected while either the left button 22b or the right button 22c is pressed during the execution period of the operation effect, the touch sensor 2900 is used. It may be configured not to be treated as an operation (not treated as a touch operation in the touch effect). In this configuration, even if the left button 22b and only the touch sensor 2900 or only the right button 22c and the touch sensor 2900 are mistakenly operated in an attempt to perform a special operation, the player is not willing to do so. 3 It will develop into a reach effect (low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol) using the entire main display area Dm of the symbol display device 81 (the operation of the touch sensor 2900 is determined to be an operation for the touch effect). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable due to the execution of the effect mode contrary to the player's intention. Further, the player who has made an erroneous operation with the intention of performing a special operation can easily notice the erroneous operation because the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d does not change. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, even if the player who tries to operate the touch sensor 2900 as an operation for the touch effect mistakenly operates either the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900. It is possible to avoid displaying the background mode according to the lighting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d against the intention of the player. Therefore, the player who accidentally operates the left button 22b or the right button 22c together with the touch sensor 2900 while trying to participate in the touch effect feels uncomfortable due to the display contents contrary to his / her intention. It is possible to prevent it from being forced. Further, since the display mode is not changed by the erroneous operation, the player can easily notice the erroneous operation. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the eighth control example, in a special effect involving vibration of the frame button 22a, the mode of vibration (vibe type) generated each time the frame button 22a is pressed is determined by lottery, and a big hit is placed in the hold. The configuration is such that the existence is confirmed (vibe type) and the expectation of a big hit is high, but the vibe type in the special effect may be notified to the player other than the vibration. That is, for example, if the player continuously operates the frame button 22a at short intervals in a special effect, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the correspondence between the number of presses and the vibration mode. There is. In this case, for example, it is misunderstood that the special effect of the mode (vibe A) in which the jackpot is confirmed is executed even though the special effect of the mode (vibe C) that is relatively unlikely to be a big hit is executed. In some cases, it may cause the player to feel distrust. This problem can be solved by providing a means for notifying the type of vibration executed in the special effect, in addition to the mode of vibration transmitted to the finger of the player who has pressed the frame button 22a. More specifically, for example, the correspondence relationship (vibe history) between the number of times the frame button 22a is pressed in one special effect and the type of vibration executed based on the pressing is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured. With this configuration, even if the player cannot identify the vibration mode or misidentifies it, it is easy to check the history of the vibration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to identify the type of vibration this time. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand. Further, instead of the history display, for example, the change with time of the vibration intensity may be displayed by a graph. With such a configuration, the transition of the vibration intensity can be easily understood by the player, so that a more easy-to-understand production mode can be realized. The history or graph of the third symbol display device 81 may be displayed each time a special effect is executed, and the player's operation interval is equal to or less than a predetermined interval (for example, it is difficult to identify the vibration intensity). It may be configured to be executed only in the case of 0.5 second interval or less). Further, for example, even after the specified number of presses (4 times) in the special effect is completed, the vibe pattern is set again from the beginning every time the frame button 22a is pressed (the vibe pattern is repeated every time the frame button 22a is pressed). After the specified number of presses (4 times) is completed, the frame button 22a is maintained in the pressed state (so-called long press) during the long press. It may be configured so that the vibe pattern is repeated. In other words, even after the execution of the vibration mode (vibe type) corresponding to the operation on the frame button 22a is completed, the vibration mode (vibe type) is reconfirmed by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22a. May be configured as possible. With this configuration, the player who could not identify the vibe type can easily reconfirm the vibe type, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. ..

In this eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed in the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode is changed immediately, while the background change operation is performed during the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period. , The background mode is changed at the start of the next variable display, but it is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the background mode may be changed immediately when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation display mode in which the high-speed fluctuation is executed again is executed after the medium-speed fluctuation period or the low-speed fluctuation period is once reached (for example, the normal reach occurs and the medium-speed fluctuation occurs. After the period is reached, if it develops into super reach and returns to high-speed fluctuation again, etc.), the background mode is changed immediately according to the background change operation until the high-speed fluctuation period when developing into super reach. It may be configured. With this configuration, whether or not it develops into a super reach effect by confirming whether or not the background mode change is immediately executed by the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period can be determined. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can be known in advance. Therefore, since the player can be made to positively perform the background change operation in the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this eighth control example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode is only changed at the start of the next fluctuation display, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the background change operation is performed during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, the background mode change is not carried over until the start of the next fluctuation display, but a predetermined notification is performed at a predetermined ratio. May be. By configuring in this way, the change of the background mode is carried over to the next change, and it is suppressed that it takes time to change to the background mode in which the game is desired, which causes stress to the player. can do. In this case, the notification content includes, for example, the jackpot expectation in the running fluctuation display, the expectation that develops into super reach, and the expectation that the jackpot (or the fluctuation display corresponding to super reach) is included in the hold. , The degree of expectation for the so-called latent probability change state may be notified. With this configuration, by intentionally performing the background change operation during the medium speed fluctuation period or the low speed fluctuation period, it is possible to realize a game playability different from the usual one, which improves the player's interest in the game. Can be made to.

In the eighth control example, three types of periods in which the speeds of the fluctuation display of the third symbol are different are provided, but even if the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is synchronized with the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol. good. On the contrary, the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol is configured to have at least a high-speed fluctuation period, a medium-speed fluctuation period, and a low-speed fluctuation period, and the speed of the fluctuation display of the third symbol is the speed of the fluctuation display of the first symbol. It may be configured to synchronize with the speed.

In this eighth control example, the configuration is such that a specific period effect is executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol being the upper limit (8 pieces), but the execution condition of the period effect is not necessarily the upper limit of the reserved balls. It is not limited to the number, but can be determined arbitrarily. As the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is reduced, the chances of executing the period effect can be increased, so that the player's interest can be further improved. Further, as the number of reserved balls, which is the execution condition, is increased, the execution period of the period effect tends to be longer, so that the player's interest in the period effect can be further improved. Further, similarly, the end condition of the period effect is not limited to the case where all the reserved balls at the start time of the period effect are digested, and may be arbitrarily set.

<9th control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 to 566. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 451) of the fourth control example described above. The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the control content are different from the above-mentioned eighth control example, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned eighth control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background mode (background change operation), the timing for changing the background mode according to the operation timing (background change is executed). By configuring the timing) to be variable, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to execute the background change operation with peace of mind, and the background change operation can be positively performed.

However, in the technique of the eighth control example described above, the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is only different, and the execution mode is the same, so that the background change operation is executed. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the background advance notice effect suggesting the background mode after the transition is executed between the time when the background change operation is executed and the time when the background change is actually executed. Moreover, it is configured to change the effect mode of the background notice effect according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, the timing during non-change of special figure, the timing during change of special figure). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different production modes depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the performance to be executed at an early stage. ..

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to see the background notice effect.

Further, in the ninth control example, similarly to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure fluctuation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). There is. Here, the conventional pachinko machine has a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is easily executed (for example, a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state of the normal symbol)) and a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is difficult to be executed. (For example, a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol)) can be set, and if a time saving state is set, a normal state is set. It was configured so that a shorter fluctuation time could be easily set as the special figure fluctuation time.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a period in which the special figure change is not executed occurs during the time saving state, a new special figure change is likely to be started immediately, and a period in which the special figure change is not executed in the normal state. When the above occurs, it becomes more difficult to start a new special map change than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the display for waiting for customers during the period (customer waiting period) during which the special figure change is not executed without considering the set gaming state (for example, the name of the gaming machine). If the function (for example, volume control function, light intensity control function) is executed during the customer waiting period, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is unnecessarily switched during the time saving state. There was a problem that it provided a display that was difficult to understand for the player. Further, the process for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is complicatedly executed, and there is a problem that the control load of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Furthermore, during the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute the special figure fluctuation by continuously firing the ball, so for example, the function during the customer waiting period (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function) can be used. Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure change is started by the time the adjustment operation using the function is completed, which causes discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special figure change is stopped and the new special figure change is not executed, the above-mentioned function during the customer waiting period is enabled. Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, the player needs to stop the game for a predetermined period when the player who is playing the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light. In addition to making people feel annoyed, there was a new problem that the operation of the game was reduced.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in the ninth control example, the period from when the special figure change is not executed according to the set gaming state until the function can be executed during the customer waiting period is different. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, during a high probability state (time saving state, probabilistic change state) of a normal symbol in which the special figure change is likely to be executed, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the special figure change is not executed, and then the customer waits. It is possible to execute the function during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol where it is difficult to execute the special figure change, it is possible to execute the function during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure change is not executed. can.

<Regarding the production content of the 9th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 560, among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example, the background advance notice effect will be described. FIG. 560 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 560 (b) shows a display in a state where the background mode shifts due to the next fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen. Of the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those of the above-mentioned eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed, the advance notice effect suggesting the background mode of the transition destination is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display mode of this notice effect, "mode display", which is a display mode in which the background mode of the transition destination is indicated by a comment immediately before the transition of the background mode, and the transition destination immediately before the transition of the background mode. "Silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is suggested by the silhouette of the character, is configured to be displayable.

Then, when the timing for executing the background change operation is outside the special figure change period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and when the special figure change period is in progress, "mode display" is selected. And "Silhouette display" are configured to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect (background notice effect) to be executed different according to the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player is made to perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Further, in the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change period, the selection ratio between the "mode display" and the "silhouette display" is different depending on the lottery result of the special figure change. I'm letting you. In addition, if the display mode of the pattern that is different from the background mode suggested by the background notice effect and the background mode that is the actual transition destination is selected, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. (To be higher than the display mode of other background notice effects). Therefore, it is possible to have the player positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by actively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to various background modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

On the display screen shown in FIG. 560 (a), the background mode shifts to the sea mode by the background change operation, and the silhouette K100 imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode is displayed as a background notice effect. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode, so that the player can display the display in the background notice effect. It is configured so that the aspect and the actually shifted background mode can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 560 (b), the comment "background change at the next change" indicating that the background mode is changed at the start of the next special figure change after the background change operation is executed is the comment display area Dm2a. It is displayed in. Then, as a background notice effect, a silhouette K100 imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 560 (b) is a state in which the current state is the "mountain mode" and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) due to the next fluctuation, and the background suggesting the background mode after the shift. The silhouette K100, which suggests a mountain mode, is displayed as a warning effect. In this way, if there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestion display mode of the background notice effect, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won due to the change.

<About the electrical configuration in the 9th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 558 and 559. FIG. 558 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and FIG. 558 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and FIG. 558 (b) is the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 558 (a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibe pattern data 222fc is deleted and the background notice selection table 222ga is added. However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background notice selection table 222ga is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the background notice effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, the contents of the background notice selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the background notice selection table 222ga.

As shown in FIG. 559, the background notice selection table 222ga shows the hit / fail determination result (the lottery result of the special figure change being executed at the time when the background change operation is executed), the acquired value of the effect counter 223h, and the value after the transition. It is configured so that the background mode and the background notice of different display modes can be selected according to the background mode.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69", and "silhouette A" is "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is specified in the range of "", "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "160 to 169", and "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198". When is in the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69" for "silhouette B", in the range of "70 to 159" for "silhouette A", and in the range of "160 to 169". "Sea mode display" is specified in, and "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", "silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". When the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", and "silhouette A" is set to "120 to". "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "198". Further, when the background change operation is executed during the customer waiting period, and the background mode after the transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after the transition of "sea mode display" is "mountain mode", "mountain mode display" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 198".

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background notice effect will be described. In this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, "silhouette display" that displays the silhouette of the character suggesting the background mode after the transition, and "mode display" that displays the character indicating the background mode after the transition. Is configured to be configurable.

In the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode shown in FIG. 560 (b), and "silhouette B" is shown in FIG. 560 (a). It is a silhouette of a character that imitates a fish that suggests the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed by a still image, but the display mode dynamically changes as long as the display mode suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. The display mode may be used. For example, immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is suggested, and the passage of time or the operation means by the player ( The background mode of the transition destination may be gradually changed to a display mode that is easy to grasp based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, "silhouette display" and "mode display" can be displayed as the display mode of the background notice effect, and the background is in the period when the special figure does not change. When the change operation is executed, only "mode display" is selected, and when the background change operation is executed during the period when the special figure is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. .. As a result, by executing the background change operation during the change of the special figure, a special effect mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a background notice effect, a display mode suggesting a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination can be set, and the display mode is selected only when the hit / fail determination result is correct. It is configured to be done. Therefore, it is possible to notify (suggest) the lottery result advantageous to the player in advance by giving a sense of discomfort between the content of the background notice effect and the actual background mode transition situation, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, an example using two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode) is shown, but the type of background mode may be three or more, and the background mode to be changed by the background change operation can be selected. It may be set randomly. Further, as a result of performing the background change operation, it may be configured to shift to the same background mode as before the shift. With this configuration, the display mode of the background notice effect this time and the background after the transition are based on the suggestion content of the background mode before the transition and the background mode after the transition displayed in the background notice effect. It can provide the fun of predicting whether or not the mode matches.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the period from the execution of the background change operation to the transition to the background mode is different depending on the timing at which the background change operation is executed, as in the eighth control example described above. It is configured as follows. The background notice effect described above is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period in which only the background notice effect is displayed can be changed according to the timing when the background change operation is executed.

In the ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special figure change during execution, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the winning information included in the special drawing reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be changed (changed) during the special figure change in which the background change operation is executed, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the change, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is changed (changed) in the next special figure change of the executed special figure change, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure change. It is good to configure it like this.

Returning to FIG. 558 (b), the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the ninth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223 ga and a delay counter 223 gb are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current customer waiting period is set, and is set to be turned on when the customer waiting period is reached. The customer waiting flag 223ga is executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol). It is set to ON in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) (see Z2734 in FIG. 565). In addition, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) or probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), waiting for customers. In the effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566), the delay counter is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223 gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 566). Then, it is set to off when the special figure fluctuation is started.

In this ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be adjustable during the period when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON, and the player is informed that the volume is in an adjustable state. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating a period in which the volume can be adjusted. Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be turned on differs depending on the set gaming state, and the gaming state is the normal state. It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223ga is less likely to be set to ON in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state than in the case of the time saving state or the probable change state.

With this configuration, it is difficult to display the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. can. That is, the time saving state and the probable change state are configured so that a shorter special map fluctuation time can be easily set as compared with the normal state, and a period during which the special map fluctuation is not executed may be set temporarily. However, since the time saving state and the probabilistic change state are also gaming states in which a new special figure change is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the period in which the special figure change is not executed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to ON, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be complicatedly switched, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to be turned on unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probable change state. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem can be solved. The predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required to turn on the customer waiting flag 223ga during the time saving state or the probability change state is, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (electric) executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is preferable to set a period longer than the period until the accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second entry port 640). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON only by continuously playing the game during the probable change state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation to the setting of the customer waiting flag 223ga, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to the on in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. This is to delay the timing of the operation.

The delay counter 223 gb is in a probable change state in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 564) executed when the special figure variation is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set when the time is shortened (Z2733 in FIG. 565). Then, each time the customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 566) is executed, the value is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 566), and when the value of the counter becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (FIG. 566). 566 Z2761). As a result, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be on in the probability change state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on in the normal state.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 561 to 566, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. In the ninth control example, for the eighth control example described above, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 566) is performed instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main process 9 (see FIG. 561). , The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 and the command determination process 9 (Z2174 in FIG. 562) is executed instead of the command determination process 8. Other than that, It is the same. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 9 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 561. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 9. As shown in FIG. 561, the main process 9 has a customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), a frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182), and a command determination process 9 (see FIG. 536). It differs in that Z2183) is executed, and is otherwise the same.

Regarding the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 (Z2182), the background change process (FIG. 548) is performed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 545) of the eighth control example described above. Since the difference is only in that the background change process 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 563) is executed instead of Z2949), only the background change process 9 which is a subroutine of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182) is executed. It will be described with reference to FIG. 563, and the illustration of other control contents (the same control contents as the eighth control example) will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 9 (Z2174). This command determination process 9 (Z2174) adds a process for setting the customer waiting flag to off when a variation pattern command is received, in addition to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 396) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242 in FIG. 539) is changed to the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651 in FIG. 562). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 396), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 396) executed when the stopped type command shown in the figure is received is the eighth. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2661 in FIG. 562).

When the command determination process 9 (Z2174) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 9 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: Yes), the customer waiting flag 223ga is on. Whether or not (Z2253). When it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is on (Z2254: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command is received, and since it is the timing of the end of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to off (Z2254). The value of the delay counter 223 gb is set to 0 (Z2255), the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not on (Z2253: No), the processing of Z2254 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2255 processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (Z2203). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes), the variable stop process 9 (Z2651) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

Returning to FIG. 562, the explanation will be continued. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a process for executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped, and a customer. The process for setting the waiting effect is performed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

If it is determined that the stop command has not been received in the processing of Z2203 (Z2203: No), the same Z2207 to Z2261 as the command determination processing of the eighth control example described above (Z2174 of FIG. 537) is executed, and the present invention is performed. End the process.

Next, the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541) will be described with reference to FIG. 563. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) is relative to the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 548) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that a process for setting the display mode of the background notice effect has been added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes of Z2963 to Z2967 as the above-mentioned background change process (see Z2949 of FIG. 548) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2978). , The effect mode of the background advance notice effect is selected using the background advance notice selection table 222ga based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2979). Then, a display background notice command indicating the effect mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display switching command set in the Z2967 process and the display background notice command set in the Z2980 process are set in the same process. It is output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the display background notice command, and then 0.5 seconds later. It is configured to execute the display using the image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed before the background transition.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 564. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). The fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is the customer waiting setting processing (Z2652) after the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 is completed with respect to the fluctuation stop processing (see Z2242 in FIG. 539) of the eighth control example described above. Is different in that it is executed, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process for setting a customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold exists (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are both 0.

If it is determined that a special figure hold exists in the processing of Z2731 (Z2731: Yes), the next special figure change is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped. Then, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Z2731 when it is determined that the special figure hold does not exist (Z2731: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732). When it is determined that the time is not shortened or the probabilistic state is not (normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2734), and the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2732 that the current state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732: Yes), then a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the delay counter 223gb (Z2733), and this processing is terminated. do. The value of the delay counter 223 gb set here is subtracted in the main process executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. 566. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181). In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 565) is subtracted, and the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0. The process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on and the volume adjusting process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on are executed.

In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z2751: Yes), the volume button is pressed. Among them, it is determined whether the right button (up button) for raising the volume is operated (pressed) (Z2764). If it is determined that the right button has been pressed (Z2764: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2754). , End this process.

If it is determined in the Z2764 process that the right button is not pressed (Z2764: No), it is determined whether the left button (lower button) that lowers the volume is operated (pressed) among the volume buttons (Z2764: No). Z2765). If it is determined that the left button has been pressed (Z2765: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2757). , End this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON in the processing of Z2751 (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2758), if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2758: No), since the special map fluctuation is not currently stopped, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then the value of the delay counter 223gb is subtracted by 1 (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is subtracted. Is 0 (Z2760). When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223 gb after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds have not elapsed since the previous special figure change stopped. If is (Z2760: No), this process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223gb is 0 in the processing of Z2760 (Z2760: Yes), the gaming state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds after the previous special figure change is stopped. Is the elapsed timing, so the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2761), the display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and then it is determined whether the left or right button is pressed (Z2763). If it is determined that the left or right button has been pressed (Z2763: Yes), the above-mentioned Z2764 process is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2763, if it is determined that the left or right button is not pressed (Z2763: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<10th control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 578. In the tenth control example, an operation effect (cracking effect) for changing the effect mode based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 is executed for the ninth control example described above, and the third control example. The third symbol (variably displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbol (special symbol)) that is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner according to the stop display mode. The difference is that the effect of shifting (changing) the background mode (background change effect) is executed based on the stop display mode of the decorative pattern), and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the production content of the 10th control example>
Here, among the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, unlike each of the above-mentioned control examples, a crack cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbol are executed.

First, the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 567 to 569. The cracking effect is an operation in which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22a) a plurality of times within a predetermined effect period to gradually change the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is a production. In the tenth control example, the effect mode after the effect period is set based on the display mode on the display screen at the end of the effect period. With such a configuration, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means in order to execute the effect in various production modes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 567, the flow of the cracking effect in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 567 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of cracking effect. In this control example, the crack 820, which is a variable display mode, is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means during the predetermined effect period, and the operation means within the effect period. A cracking effect is executed in which the number of cracks 820 is variable (increased) based on the operation content (number of operations). The variable display mode can be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) and the number of operations during the above-mentioned effect period.

Specifically, among the fluctuation patterns of 60 seconds, the operation valid period (button effect period) in which the operation to the frame button 22a, which is the operation means, is effectively determined for 15 seconds after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. ) Is set. Then, when the button effect period is reached, the crack effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 568 (a)).

Then, as the button effect period in which the cracking effect is executed, a first period, which is the first half period, and a second period, which is the second half period after the first period, are set, and the first button effect period is set. By operating the frame button 22a during the period, one crack 820 is displayed on the display screen (see FIG. 568 (b)), and the remaining period of the first period is variably set to the second period. With this configuration, the period in which the second period is set can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set.

In addition, by pressing the frame button 22a during the first period, the condition that the crack 820 of the second transition is displayed during the second period based on the pressing timing, that is, the crack displayed as a variable display mode. The number of operations to the frame button 22a for varying the number of 820s is configured to be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing to the operation means and the number of operations, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set, even if the second period is set longer, the condition (frame) that the second and subsequent cracks 820 are displayed based on the operation timing. Since the condition that the number of operations is large may be set as the number of operations to the button 22a), operating the frame button 22a immediately after the first period is set causes more cracks 820 to be displayed. There is no direct connection to that.

Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to participate in the operation effect while entertaining the player at which timing during the first period the frame button 22a is to be operated. In the tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracking effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to select a variable pattern of the variable display mode after the second time according to the timing of the frame button operation. Further, in this control example, the fully variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode during the effect period is configured to be selected according to the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Then, when the second period is set, a display screen for urging the player to execute the operation of the frame button 22a a plurality of times is displayed (see FIG. 568 (b)), and the first period ends. When the display condition set at the time (condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks 820) is satisfied, the number of cracks 820 displayed on the display screen is variably displayed, and after the second period elapses (20 from the start of fluctuation). An effect based on the number of cracks 820 displayed after the lapse of seconds) is displayed (see FIG. 569 (a)).

In the cracking effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation that causes the selection of the display condition (variable scenario) for increasing (variable) the number of cracks 820 (variable display mode) is executed. , No matter when the frame button operation is executed, one crack 820 (the same variable display mode) is displayed. That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the cracking effect has been executed by the first frame button operation, and based on the first frame button operation. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

This makes it possible to play the game while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, the cracking effect of this control example makes the ratio of selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode different based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the cracking effect of this control example, the button effect period during which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22a) (the operation to the operation means is effectively determined) is the first period (5 seconds). And the second period (10 seconds) after the lapse of the first period, and the operation for selecting the variable scenario of the variable display mode (the number of cracks 820) during the first period (first time). By executing the frame button operation), the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed during the first period, the cracking effect is terminated at that point (clear the setting of the operation valid period during the second period and switch to an effect other than the operation effect). (See FIG. 567 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22a from being notified of the effect of urging the operation of the frame button 22a for a long time.

Here, the flow of the effect when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 567 (b). ) Elapses, a display screen (see FIG. 568 (a)) prompting the operation to the frame button 22a is displayed, the operation valid period is cleared at the end of the first period, and after the first period ends, the frame button 22a is pressed. A display mode (sorry display) indicating that the button has not been pressed even once is displayed until a predetermined second period (10 seconds) has elapsed (see FIG. 569 (b)). After that, the effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) is executed.

In this control example, the display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a has not been pressed even once is configured to be displayed until the second period (10 seconds) elapses. Not limited to this, for example, a display mode (sorry display) indicating that the frame button 22a has never been pressed is displayed only for the start 2 seconds of the predetermined second period (10 seconds), and then. , The effect corresponding to the case where the crack 820 is not displayed (zero cracks) may be executed. With this configuration, the period during which the disappointment display is displayed can be shortened, and therefore, if the player intentionally does not operate the frame button 22a during the first period, the player feels uncomfortable. Can be difficult to give.

In addition, when the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is executed during the first period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first production period). It is configured. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Next, an example of the display content displayed during the cracking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 568 and 569. FIG. 568 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the display content displayed immediately after the cracking effect is started, and FIG. 568 (b) shows the frame button 22a during the first period of the cracking effect. This is a display screen showing an example of the display contents displayed when the operation is performed. Further, FIG. 569 (a) is a display screen showing an example of the effect content executed after the button effect period ends with three cracks 820 displayed, and FIG. 569 (b) shows the crack effect effect. This is a display screen showing an example of display contents displayed when the first period ends without operating the frame button 22a during the first period.

When the cracking effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 568 (a), the effect executed this time is an operation effect (an effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means (frame button 22a)). In order to notify the player that this is the case, on the right side of the main display area Dm, there is a button display mode Dm5a that imitates the frame button 22a, and the remaining period (4) of the first period (5 seconds) of the button effect period. The remaining period display mode Dm5b for notifying the second) is displayed.

Here, the button display mode Dm5a is displayed in a display mode (represented by two arrows in the figure) for encouraging the frame button 22a to be pressed (repeatedly hit) a plurality of times instead of being pressed only once. Further, in the remaining period display mode Dm5b, the remaining period (represented by diagonal lines in the figure) is dynamically displayed with respect to the indicator indicating the length of the first period (5 seconds).

Then, in the comment display area Dm2a, the comment "Crush the screen by repeatedly pressing the button" is displayed. As a result, by operating the frame button 22a a plurality of times during the current operation effect, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect that destroys the display screen is executed. Further, a small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm so that the progress of the cracking effect (the number of cracks) of this time is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player. In addition, in FIG. 568 (a), since the crack cracking effect has just been executed and the frame button 22a has never been operated, the small display area Dm4 is set as the progress status display mode Dm4a. 0 "is displayed.

Then, when the frame button 22a is operated during the first period of the crack cracking effect, one crack 820 is displayed in the main display area Dm and the progress of the small display area Dm4 is displayed as shown in FIG. 568 (b). "1" is displayed as the display mode Dm4a. Further, since the first period ends and the second period is set by operating the frame button 22a during the first period, the remaining period display mode Dm5b for indicating the remaining period of the first period is replaced. Then, the remaining period display mode Dm5c for indicating the remaining period of the second period is displayed. In addition, a comment of "more repeated hits" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a.

With the display screen of FIG. 568 (b) displayed, when the frame button 22a is operated multiple times (continuous striking operation) and the display condition for increasing the number of cracks 820 is satisfied, the number corresponding to the display condition is satisfied. The crack 820 is displayed on the display screen. When the number of cracks 820 is 3 at the end of the second period of the button effect period, as shown in FIG. 569 (a), the central portion of the main display area Dm is destroyed and the fish is fished from the back. An effect in which a large number of characters 822 imitating the above appears is executed, and a "fish school reach" indicating the effect mode executed this time is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a. In this control example, the progress status display mode Dm4a is displayed in the small display area Dm4 even after the button effect period ends, and the button effect period is displayed with three cracks 820 displayed. A value of "3" indicating that is finished is displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand what was the production result of the cracking effect corresponding to the "fish school reach" executed this time.

As described above, based on the effect result of the first effect (cracking effect), it is possible to set the effect mode of the second effect to be executed after the first effect, and when the second effect is executed. In addition, when the configuration for displaying the effect result of the first effect is used, for example, the effect result display of the first effect is configured so that the effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect can be displayed. May be. In this case, when the lottery result of the special figure variation is a big hit, it is preferable to display an effect result different from the actual effect result of the first effect. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with an uncomfortable effect, and it is possible to easily win a big hit when the uncomfortable effect is executed, so that a novel effect can be provided.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period of the button effect period of the crack effect, the small display area Dm4 is displayed at the end of the first period, as shown in FIG. 569 (b). "0" is displayed as the progress display mode Dm4a, the button display mode Dm5a that does not prompt the operation to the frame button 22a is displayed, and the display mode in which the remaining period is 0 is displayed as the remaining period display mode Dm5b. Then, the comment "Sorry, end" is displayed in the comment display area Dm2a, and a display screen for notifying the player that the cracking effect has ended at the end of the first period is displayed.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is not operated during the first period, even if a player who does not like the operation of the frame button 22a is playing the game, he / she does not feel uncomfortable. The display screen shown in FIG. 569 (b) is displayed at the end of the first period, and the button effect period (operation valid period) is terminated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first period. At the end of one period, the number of cracks 820 may be determined by lottery, and the determined number of cracks 820 may be displayed on the display screen. As a result, even for a player who does not operate the frame button 22a, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to various numbers of cracks 820. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of cracks 820 (for example, 0.5) that is difficult to be displayed when the player operates the operating means a plurality of times during the first period can be displayed. As a result, the player can be made to think whether or not to operate the frame button 22a during the first period in order to experience various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. be able to.

Next, the background change effect is an effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives the stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols). Is configured to determine.

Therefore, the background change symbol type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113, and when the background change symbol type command is received, it is included in the command. It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped symbol information. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special figure is out of order, the player can be interested in which stop mode the outlier is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81. You can enjoy the production performed on the display screen of.

Further, it is the first to determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and to notify the player that the background will be changed based on the determination result that the determination results in changing the background mode. 3 Unlike the conventional pachinko machine that stops and displays the symbol (background change notification symbol is stopped and displayed), it is determined whether to execute the background change according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, the stop mode of the third symbol is configured to trigger the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily control the ease of changing the background or the destination of changing the background based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set gaming state. ..

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special figure lottery is missed, the player By operating the operating means, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably selected. With this configuration, the stopping mode can be changed based on the operation result of the player, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, in this case, it is better to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. For example, the background is changed only when the operating means is operated. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to participate in the production more enthusiastically.

<About the electrical configuration of the 10th control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 570 and 572. FIG. 570 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and FIG. 570 (b) is a schematic view of the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 570 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is used when selecting the effect mode of the cracking effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the cracking effect selection table 222ha is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cracking effect selection table 222ha is used when selecting an effect mode (display condition for displaying the second and subsequent cracks), which is one of the operation effects for executing the operation to the operation means (frame button 22a). In the SW effect process 10 (see Z2897 in FIG. 577) executed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the data table referred to in the above, it is determined that the SW (switch) effect being executed is a crack effect. (Z7101: Yes in FIG. 577), which is referred to (Z7105 in FIG. 577).

Here, the contents of the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 572. FIG. 572 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the cracking effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 572, on the cracking effect selection table 222ha, the lottery result (win / fail determination result) of the special figure variation in which the cracking effect is executed and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect. Depending on the operation (pressing) timing of the operation (pressing) and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223ha, different production modes of the cracking effect (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) are defined.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is The effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the effect B is specified in the range of "40 to 89", and the effect C is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the specific contents of each effect type defined in the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described. For the effect type A, the number of frame button operations required for the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack is set to "10". In the scenario, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second production type B is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the scenario shown, the production type C requires "10" for the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to occur, and "25" for the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack. This is the scenario set to.

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations according to the effect mode of the crack cracking effect set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is performed to change the crack, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

The crack cracking effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 572 shows only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times. No matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, the effect type in which the second crack is not displayed and the effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also specified. In this way, by defining the production type in which the cracks are difficult to change and the production type in which the cracks are not variable, even if the production type in which the cracks are not variable is set, the frame button operation can be expected until the end. Can be done.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 572. The hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In this case, the effect type A is specified in the range of "0 to 19", the effect B is specified in the range of "20 to 79", and the value of the SW special effect counter ha is specified in the range of "80 to 99". , Direction C is specified.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is "0 to 29". The effect type A is defined in the range, the effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and the effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In, the effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 4" for the value of the SW special effect counter ha, the effect B is specified in the range of "5 to 79", and the effect B is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Direction D is specified.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 571. As shown in FIG. 571, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example has a SW effect counter 223ha, a button pressing counter 223hb, and crack information storage for the RAM 223 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the area 223hc is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used for selecting a crack effect, and is repeated by adding 1 in the range of 0 to 198 each time the voice lamp control device 113 main process (see FIG. 573) is executed. Will be updated. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned effect counter 223h, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The button pressing counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the tenth control example, the effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button pressing counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected by using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the control content of the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 573 to 577. The same control contents as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 573, the main process 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 10. As shown in FIG. 573, in the main process 10, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 with respect to the main process 8 of the eighth control example described above, and a command. The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the other points are the same.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. The command determination process 10 is different from the above-mentioned command determination process 8 in that a control process for receiving a display background change symbol command is added, and the other steps are the same. The details of this display background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and is a stop mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Information for indicating (combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop) is included.

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2208 as those of the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display background change symbol command has been received (Z7201). When it is determined that the display background change symbol command has been received in the processing of Z7201 (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z7202), and the set background mode is supported. A display switching command for a variation pattern is set (Z7203), and this process ends.

That is, in the tenth control example, the process of changing the background mode is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the stop mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special figure lottery is wrong, which It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stopped mode.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 differs from the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 in that the SW special process executed is changed to the SW effect process 10, and is the same except for the above. be. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the crack cracking effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracking effect end processing (Z2896). In this cracking effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period has elapsed in the cracking effect, a process for setting a subsequent effect mode is executed.

When the cracking effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed from the start of the cracking effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is determined. It is determined (Z7002), if it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: No), and then it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not elapsed (Z7006: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the button press counter 223hb is larger than 0 (Z7003), and it is not larger than 0. If it is determined (Z7003: No), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), and the values of the SW effective time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb are cleared (set to 0). End the process.

If it is determined in the processing of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223b is larger than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that 15 seconds have passed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is cleared. (Z7008), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 577. FIG. 577 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. The SW effect processing 10 is different from the SW effect process described above in that a process related to the cracking effect is added. Other than that, they are the same, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that the SW effect is not a crack effect (Z7101: No), the above is described. The same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z7101 that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: Yes), then the information indicating the effect mode of the crack effect in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7101: Yes). It is determined whether the data) is stored (Z7102).

In the processing of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the cracking effect is already stored in the cracking information storage area 223hc, the value of the (Z7102: Yes) button pressing counter 223hb is added by 1. (Z7106), the cracking effect type set in the cracking information storage area 223hc is read (Z7107), and the effecting mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button press counter 223hb (variable number of cracks). Set a display effect command to indicate the fan effect), and end this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the processing of Z7102 (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is acquired, the cracking effect selection table 222ha is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed. Based on the value of the effective time counter and the acquired value of the SW effect counter 223ha, the corresponding crack effect type is determined, set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , End this process.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 578. The control content of the display control device 114 of this control example is different from the control content of the eighth control example described above in that the stop type command process 8 is changed to the stop type command process 10, and the rest is the same. Is. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 578 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command process 10 (Z3496). In the stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (display background change symbol command) for outputting information related to the stop symbol set in the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop symbol set in the Z3602 process changes the background. It is determined whether it is a stop symbol indicating (Z8001). If it is determined in the Z8001 process that the symbol is not a stop symbol for executing a background change, the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8001 that the stopped symbol indicates a background change, the display background change symbol command is set (Z8002), the stop symbol discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this processing is performed. To finish.

<11th control example>
Next, the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 579 to 592. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a liquid crystal display using the third symbol display device 81 and a bonus effect using a movable accessory (for example, a tilting device 310) for moving the frame button 22. , Was configured to perform a suggestive effect suggestive to the player.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command including information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is used. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the accessory effect based on the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure included.

The liquid crystal display set here is output to the display control device 114 as an effect command for display, and various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are created by the display control device 114. On the other hand, as for the accessory effect, a drive scenario for driving the movable accessory in a predetermined operation is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the movable accessory (for example, the tilting device 310) is set based on the set drive scenario. ) Is moved, drive control is executed for the drive means (for example, the voice coil motor 352).

In this way, based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), data for liquid crystal effect and data for accessory effect are created, respectively, and a plurality of effect devices (first) are created based on the created data. When performing an effect on the 3 symbol display device 81, a movable accessory), it is possible to execute a more interesting effect by synchronizing the effects executed by each effect device. In each of the above-mentioned control examples, since the voice lamp control device 113 outputs data related to the effect to each effect device (display control device 114 and tilt device 310), the effect content executed by each effect device. There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize.

In particular, in a character effect that moves a movable character that is configured to be movable between an initial position and a movable position, such as the tilting device 310, in order to perform a specific character effect, the movable character is used. Since it is necessary to perform a preparatory operation for moving from the initial position to the production start position and an end operation for moving the movable character to the initial position after the character production is completed, one information (variation pattern command) is used. When executing an effect for a plurality of effect devices based on the above, if the effect is executed without considering the position of the movable accessory at the time when the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is executed, the liquid crystal display effect and There was a problem that it deviated from the character production.

Therefore, in the eleventh control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is the movable accessory at the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, in the eleventh control example, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position at the execution timing of the composite effect, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect is moved to the initial position. When the execution timing of the composite effect arrives in a situation where the compound effect has not returned, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the compound effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Here, in the eleventh control example, the above-mentioned compound effect is configured to be executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The details of the production will be described later, but by executing the compound production (last production) during the ending period, the next jackpot will be won immediately after the jackpot game ends (there is a high possibility of winning). Is configured to suggest (notify) to the player.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the accessory effects overlap, one of the accessory effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is composed. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 579, the flow of setting the composite effect in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 579 is a timing chart showing the flow of the display effect and the accessory effect (operation effect) during the jackpot game. Of the flow of effects shown in FIG. 579, the contents of the OP effect displayed during the opening period of the jackpot game, the round effect displayed during the normal round game period, and the interval effect displayed during the interval period. Since the contents are the same as those described in the above-mentioned control examples, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 579, in this control example, a plurality of character effects (operation effects) are configured to be executed during the jackpot game. Specifically, during a specific round (any of 1, 8 and 16) of the jackpot game, an operation of opening (raising) the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) attached to the frame button 22a is executed. When the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) attached to the frame button 22a is opened during the first operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 and the ending period of the jackpot game. When the (ascending) operation is executed and the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended), the second operation effect of pressing the frame button 22 is executed.

Here, the first operation effect is a probabilistic promotion effect, which is an effect of giving an effect result for notifying the player whether or not the game state set after the jackpot game is in the probable change state. The operation effect is to notify the player whether or not there is winning information indicating that the lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot (big hit B1 or jackpot B2 (see FIG. 359)) in the reserved memory of the special symbol. The hold continuous effect, which is an effect to which the effect result of the above is given, is configured to be executed.

For example, according to the flow shown in FIG. 579 (a), the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round (final round) of the jackpot game. Here, the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is the first effect period (about 6 seconds) and the first effect period, which encourages whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is completely opened (raised). The tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended) during the second effect period (about 2 seconds) in which the player can press the frame button 22, and the player presses the frame button 22 during the second effect period. This is formed by a third effect period (about 2 seconds) for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position when the second effect period has elapsed.

On the other hand, the round game during the big hit game is configured to end when 30 seconds have passed or when 10 balls have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, depending on the winning condition during the round game, as shown in FIG. 579 (a), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is not completed at the end of the 16th round (final round) (tilting device 310). Is not in the initial position). Further, for example, when the end condition of the 16th round (final round) is satisfied, even if it is in the middle stage or if it is configured to forcibly end the first operation effect, it is in a state of being forcibly ended. Since a period for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position is required, the tilting device 310 cannot be positioned at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round).

In this way, when the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to be the target of the operation effect is not located at the initial position at the end of the 16th round (final round) or at the start of the ending period, the ending period Even if the condition for executing the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is the second operation effect, is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is used without executing the operation effect using the tilting device 310. It is configured to execute the last effect only by the display effect.

As a result, the operation effect corresponding to the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) has not been completely completed (the movable accessory (tilting device 310) driven by the first operation effect is not located at the initial position). Therefore, even if the execution timing of the hold continuous effect (last effect) is reached, the last effect can be executed using only the display effect, so that the player can experience the hold continuous effect.

Further, in this control example, an effect that the second operation effect executed later can be an effect result in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given is executed than the first operation effect executed first. It is configured to be. Therefore, by configuring as in this control example, a second operation effect that can be more advantageous to the player than the first operation effect is executed depending on the execution status of the first operation effect to be executed first. It is also possible to suppress the problem that the effect is lost or the effect is reduced because the operation effect and the display effect in the second operation effect are misaligned.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the execution conditions of each effect are set so that the hold continuous effect is more difficult to execute than the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game. Therefore, by configuring as in the present control example, it is possible to suppress the problem that the execution of the difficult-to-execute effect is hindered by the easy-to-execute effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 579 (b), when the first operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the probability change promotion effect is executed using a predetermined period from the first round. After that, since the 16 rounds (final round) can be completed with the tilting device 310 positioned at the initial position, the hold continuous effect (last effect) executed during the ending period can be performed by the movable accessory (last effect). The second operation effect using the tilting device 310) and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in synchronization with each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the operation effects (first operation effect, second operation effect) during the jackpot game described above are executed will be described. do. In an example described with reference to FIGS. 580 to 582, a display example during a jackpot game based on a jackpot B2 (a jackpot of an even number symbol (666) with a probability variation of 16 rounds) is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 580 to 582 show an example of the display screen during the jackpot, and only the characteristic display mode in this control example is described, and the display during the jackpot game described in each of the above-mentioned control examples is described. Each element displayed on the screen (for example, the number of prize balls during the jackpot, the element indicating the cumulative number of times the jackpot is won (the number of consecutive chans) during the probability change state, or the time saving state) has the same contents. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 580 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the first effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect, and FIG. 580 (b) is a probabilistic promotion effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example which is displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 during the 2nd effect period of. FIG. 581 is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22a during the second effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect.

First, when the probabilistic promotion effect (first operation effect) is executed, the comment "chance if the button pops out" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Then, as shown in the frame line, the tilting device 310 is swung in small steps in the opening direction (upward direction) and the closing direction (downward direction) (in the frame line of FIG. 580 (a), the explanation is given. For the sake of convenience, the state in which the frame button 22a swings in small steps in the vertical direction is described).

Then, when the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised) from the state of FIG. 580 (a), as shown in FIG. 580 (b), the frame button 22a raised on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The button display mode shown is displayed, and a "press" comment urging the frame button 22a to be pressed is displayed. In the frame line of FIG. 580 (b), by describing the state in which the frame button 22a is completely projected for convenience of explanation, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (raised), and the player presses the frame button 22a. It indicates that it is in a pressable state.

When the player presses the frame button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 580 (b), the third symbol display "666" at the time of the jackpot is displayed as a probabilistic promotion mode for indicating that the jackpot this time was a probabilistic jackpot. The characters "super" are displayed in the vicinity until the end of the jackpot game. Then, the character "lucky" is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 581). Then, when the frame button 22a in the protruding state is pressed, the frame button 22a is located in the initial state (lowering state) as shown in the frame line of FIG. 581. In this way, by constantly displaying the probabilistic promotion mode (“super”) on the display screen, the probabilistic promotion effect is completed so that the probabilistic state is set for the player after the end of this jackpot game. Even after that, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, a display mode in which the character "super" is added is used as the probabilistic promotion mode, but the display color is not limited to this, and for example, the display color of the third symbol "666" is in a probable change state after the jackpot game is completed. Is variable to a display color (for example, rainbow color) indicating that is set, or a display mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating that a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends on the display screen. It may be configured to display a character). Further, in this control example, by configuring the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot to have a probabilistic promotion mode without changing it, it is possible to play a game in which third symbol display mode is used to win the jackpot. Although it is configured to be easy for the person to understand, it is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the jackpot can be changed to a display mode (for example, "777") indicating that it is a probabilistic jackpot. It may be configured to allow.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this control example, even if the jackpot this time is jackpot A (16 rounds, time reduction 100 times), the above-mentioned probability variation promotion effect is executed. In this case, since the probability change state is not set after the jackpot game ends, when the player presses the frame button 22a in the state of FIG. 580 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 581 is replaced. , The word "Sorry" is displayed to indicate that the probabilistic promotion effect has failed. Even in a part of the case of jackpot B2 (big hit of even symbol (666) with 16 rounds probability variation), even if it is configured to display the character "sorry" indicating that the probability variation promotion effect has failed. good. As a result, even if the probabilistic promotion effect fails, the probabilistic state may be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play the game with expectations until the jackpot game ends. ..

Further, in this control example, as a failure pattern of the probabilistic promotion effect, the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is executed during the first effect period (about 6 seconds) for inciting whether or not the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 142) is completely opened (raised). It is configured to execute only the effect, and then execute the fanning effect of moving (evacuating) the tilting device 310 to the initial position. And, this fanning effect is an effect condition other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, when the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or during the round game, a predetermined number or more is set in the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to be executed even when the ball wins a prize or when a condition) that is satisfied when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the big hit game is satisfied.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the probabilistic promotion effect has been executed, and at the time when the fanning effect is executed, the tilting device 310 is completely opened (ascended). , Can give the player expectations. In addition, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the fanning effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this case, the effect fusion pattern for executing the display mode (fanning effect display) shown in FIG. 580 (a) during the first effect period of the probabilistic promotion effect, that is, during the fanning effect, and the movable accessory (tilting device). It is preferable to configure the character effect pattern that causes the fanning effect to be executed only in 310) so that it can be executed. As a result, whether this fanning effect is part of the probabilistic promotion effect, or if the effect conditions other than the execution condition of the probabilistic promotion effect (for example, if the effect lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, or the round game) It is executed when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65a, or when the player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22a during the jackpot game). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a fanning effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 582, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the hold continuous production will be described. FIG. 582 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed when the tilting device 310 is in a state of being completely opened (raised) during the hold continuous production, and is a schematic diagram of FIG. 582 (b). Is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of FIG. 582 (a).

In this control example, at the timing when the ending period of the jackpot starts, the winning information stored on hold is analyzed (discriminated), and as the result of the analysis (discrimination), the information indicating that the probabilistic jackpot is won is stored on hold. It is configured to execute the hold continuous production when it is included in the winning information. When this hold continuous effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 582 (a), the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is completely opened (raised) during the ending period (see the frame line in FIG. 582). In the display screen, a button display mode indicating the completely raised frame button 22a and the character "press" for prompting the player to press the frame button 22a are displayed. In FIG. 582 (a), the character "ending" indicating that the state during the jackpot game is the ending period is displayed in the upper left of the display screen.

Then, when the frame button 22a is pressed in the state of FIG. 582 (a), the characters "super lucky" indicating that the hold continuous effect is successful are displayed, and a character imitating many fish appears on the display screen. A video that crosses the screen is played. In addition, the edge of the third symbol "666" at the time of winning the big hit is changed to a success display mode indicating the success of the hold continuous production. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the hold continuous production is successful (there is a probable change jackpot in the hold memory).

In this control example, it is set as an execution condition of the hold continuous effect that it is determined that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory, and it does not matter whether or not the jackpot game being executed is a probability change jackpot. Hold continuous production is feasible. As a result, for example, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is executed and fails during the jackpot game (even if it is highly possible that the jackpot this time is not the probabilistic jackpot), there is a possibility that the hold continuous effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with expectations until the end. In addition, if the probability change promotion effect executed during the jackpot game is successful, the probability variation state in which the jackpot probability is high after the jackpot game is set is set, so that the winning information for winning the probability variation jackpot is stored in the hold memory. It becomes easy to be included. Therefore, the player who succeeds in the probabilistic promotion effect during the big hit game can play the game until the end of the big hit game while increasing the expectation that the hold continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the execution condition of the hold continuous production is that there is a probable change jackpot in the hold memory at the start of the ending period, but the execution condition is not limited to this, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or a specific round game. It is a hold continuous production that there is a probability change jackpot in the hold memory that is held and stored at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game such as when it starts or ends, or when the special figure fluctuation that won the jackpot stops. It may be set as an execution condition. Further, when there are a plurality of winning information indicating a big hit in the hold memory, the hold continuous effect may be executed even if the big hit is not a probable change big hit, or the effect mode of the hold continuous effect may be set. , May be configured to be variably set according to the number of winning information indicating the jackpot included in the hold storage.

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 583 to 587, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are used. , Are different in that they are changed, and otherwise they are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 583, the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 211 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 583 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 583, the ROM 222 of the eleventh control example has the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia and the special prize middle tilt operation scenario table 222ib with respect to the ROM 222 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 467). , Is different from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic in that. Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize is a data table used when selecting whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during the jackpot game and selecting the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed. In this control example, whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect (the effect mode that progresses to a state where the frame button 22a can be pressed, or the frame button 22a cannot be pressed. It is referred to when selecting the end fanning effect mode).

Here, the contents of the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize will be described with reference to FIG. 585 (a). FIG. 585 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize. As shown in FIG. 585 (a), the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia defines different tilting motion scenarios based on the winning jackpot type and the acquired effect counter 223h value. ..

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A (16 rounds, time saving hit)", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined in the range where the acquired effect counter 223h value is in the range of "0-9", and "10-". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "99". The range of "100 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario.

Here, to briefly explain the tilting motion scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, this tilting motion scenario defines an motion scenario for driving the tilting device 310 which is a movable accessory. The operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the drive of the tilt device 310 after the tilt operation scenario is set, and the operation time of the tilt device 310 (operation period). ) Is set as the timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db. That is, depending on the operation data (scenario) selected from the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310. , Operation effect contents and are set.

Although the details will be described later, each tilting operation scenario has information in which the operation mode of the tilting device 310 is different, and the tilting device has various operation modes based on the progress of the timer value T2 described above. The 310 is configured to be operable.

Returning to FIG. 585, the description will be continued. It is stipulated that the jackpot type is "big hit B1 (16 rounds, probability variation, odd symbol jackpot)" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is not set in the range of "0 to 199". That is, in this control example, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIGS. 580 and 581) is configured to be executable as the operation effect executed during the jackpot game, and this probabilistic promotion effect is the probabilistic change after the jackpot game ends. It is an effect to suggest (notify) to the player that the state is a big hit for which the state is set.

That is, in the "big hit B1" which is stopped and displayed with an odd number symbol which is a display mode indicating that the third symbol is a probabilistic jackpot at the time of a big hit (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot). Even if the probabilistic promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, it only provides the player with a meaningless effect and may reduce the motivation for the game. It is configured so that the tilting motion scenario) is not selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2 (16 rounds, probability variation, even symbol jackpot)", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and "tilting operation scenario B" is defined, and "50". "Tilt motion scenario C" is defined in the range of "~ 149". The range of "150 to 199" is defined so as not to set a tilting motion scenario. In addition, the jackpot type is "big hit C (2 rounds, probability variation)", but the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, "no tilting operation scenario is set" is specified in the entire range. ing. This "big hit C" is set to have a smaller number of round games (2 rounds) executed during the big hit game than other big hit games, and in this control example, the number of rounds (2 rounds) is set. After the jackpot game is executed, the probability change state is always set.

Therefore, the "big hit C" is a special prize because it is a clear jackpot that the probability change state is set after the big hit game is completed by grasping the game mode of the big hit game as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1". The operation effect (tilting operation scenario) is not selected by using the middle operation effect selection table 222ia. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for playing by performing a meaningless effect on the player. Further, by executing the operation effect within a small number of rounds, it is possible to prevent the effect mode during the jackpot game from becoming complicated.

Here, the contents of the tilting motion scenario type specified in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize will be briefly described. Of the contents of the tilting operation scenario, the same parts as the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted in detail. In this control example, the tilting motion scenario B and the tilting motion scenario C are included as the tilting motion scenario types defined in the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia. The tilting operation scenario B moves the tilting device 310 in the same operation as the tilting operation scenario B used in the fifth control example control example described above, and executes a preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. During the preparation period, the tilting device 310 is repeatedly moved in the vertical direction (opening / closing direction) three times, and the tilting drive is executed. A scenario for moving the tilting device 310 so that the period is set is defined.

On the other hand, the tilting motion scenario C defines an motion scenario in which only a part of the tilting motion scenario B described above is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved up and down during the preparation period for executing the preparatory drive for moving the tilting device 310. A scenario is defined in which the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position after the fanning effect period for executing the fanning drive for repeatedly moving the tilting device 310 in the direction (opening / closing direction) is set. That is, when the tilting motion scenario B is set, the probabilistic promotion effect (see FIG. 580 (b)) in which the player presses the frame button 22a is executed during the jackpot game, and the tilting motion scenario C is set. In this case, it is configured to execute a fanning effect (see FIG. 580 (a)) in which the frame button 22a is not pressed during the jackpot game.

Then, as described above, the preparatory drive (preparation period) and the fanning drive (fanning effect period) for the tilting device 310 executed when the tilting operation scenario C is set have the same contents as the tilting operation scenario B. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the frame button 22a can be pressed after the fanning drive (fanning effect) of the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is executed. can do. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the probabilistic promotion production in the journey in which the fanning production is executed.

Further, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period) T1 and the inclination are set for each tilting operation scenario, as in the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above. A timer value T2 of the tilting operation timer 223db for setting the operating time (operating period) of the device 310 is specified. In the tilting operation scenario B, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer. The value T2 is defined as 7900 milliseconds (7.9 seconds), and in the tilting operation scenario C, the operation effect start time TI is 1000 milliseconds (1 second), and the timer value T2 is 5200 milliseconds (5.2 seconds). It is stipulated. That is, it is specified that the period set as the operation effect start time TI is shorter than each tilting operation scenario defined in the operation effect selection table 222da of the fifth control example described above.

That is, the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected with reference to the operation effect selection table 222ia described above is executed during the special figure change, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since it is necessary to move the movable accessory in accordance with the variable display executed on the screen, it was necessary to provide a predetermined grace period for the operation effect start time TI. Since the effect using the movable accessory based on the tilting motion scenario selected by reference is executed during the jackpot game (during the round game), the player feels uncomfortable even if it is executed immediately after the start of the round game. This is because it does not give. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the movable accessory immediately after the start of the round game, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by executing the effect of moving the movable accessory at an early stage, it is possible to easily end the effect of using the movable accessory within a specific period (round game period).

As described above, in this control example, the rate at which the tilting motion scenario B is selected as the tilting motion scenario selected using the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize is the jackpot type "big hit A". It is designed so that the case of "big hit B2" is higher than the case. Specifically, it is configured so that the selection ratio is 5 times higher. With this configuration, when the tilting motion scenario B is set and a state in which the frame button 22a can be pressed is provided, the possibility that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Therefore, when the fanning effect is executed during the jackpot game, the fanning effect (see FIG. 580 (a)) progresses, and the frame button 22a shifts to a pressable state (see FIG. 580 (b)). It is possible to make the player play the game during the big hit while expecting the player. Further, when the frame button 22a can be pressed, the probability change promotion effect can be succeeded with a high probability, so that the frame button 22a can be enthusiastically pressed, and the player's willingness to participate in the effect is motivated. Can be enhanced.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when a specific effect condition is satisfied other than selecting the tilting operation scenario C with reference to the above-mentioned special prize operation effect selection table 222ia (for example,). When the production lottery executed at the start timing of the round game is won, when a predetermined number of balls or more are won in the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, or when the player hits the frame button 22a during the jackpot game. The tilting motion scenario C can be set when a specific operation is performed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to execute the fanning effect other than when the probabilistic promotion effect is set (when the tilting motion scenario is selected by the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize), so that the probabilistic promotion effect can be performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the game ended with or whether the fanning effect other than the probabilistic promotion effect was executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the production in which the probabilistic promotion effect is successful is executed until the end of the jackpot game.

The special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib is a data table in which the operation contents for the tilting device 310 executed during the jackpot game are stored. Regarding the specific contents, the same parts as the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted in detail, but the tilting operation selected in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia. A data table for setting the origin detection operation table B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the scenario type and the tilting operation scenario is set.

Here, the contents of the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib will be described with reference to FIG. 585 (b). FIG. 585 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 585 (b), the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib has a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, a tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1, an origin detection operation B table 222db4, and an ending scenario table 222ib2. There is. Of these, the special prize middle tilting operation scenario table 222ib and the origin detection operation B table 222db4 have the same contents as the above-mentioned fifth control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 defines an operation scenario in which the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) moves to the initial position after performing a fanning effect of swinging in small steps in the vertical direction. This is a partial diversion of the operation scenario specified in the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 of the fifth control example described above.

Here, the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 will be described with reference to FIG. 586 (a). FIG. 586 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1. This tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize at the start of the jackpot game. Then, when the operation effect start time set in the special prize operation effect selection table 222ia elapses after the tilting operation scenario C is set, the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is started.

The tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (see Z2953 in FIG. 480). Then, the defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (1000 milliseconds) has elapsed, the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" (50 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) is executed, and the lock is released. , The operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (movable 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "4" (moving 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "5" (20 steps in the forward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed. (Movable) is executed, the operation data with the operation pointer "6" (movable 20 steps in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "7" (20 steps during 200 ms) is executed. (Movable in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "8" (movable in the backward rotation direction in 20 steps for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation pointers "3" to "8" are executed three times. The motion data with the motion pointer "9" (moving 50 steps in the backward rotation direction for 500 ms) is executed, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. The operation pointer becomes "10" and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion (fanning effect) during the jackpot game (during a round game) (see FIG. 580 (a)), and the tilting device 310 is subsequently directed to the player. Can be suggested to be completely open (rised), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, only a specific fanning motion (movements from the motion pointers "3" to "8") is specified as a fanning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of repetitive motions and the repetitive motion. It may be configured to execute a plurality of fanning effects with different positions (open state of the tilting device 310). In this case, among the probabilistic promotion effects, a fanning effect (successful effect mode) that is easily executed as a probabilistic promotion effect in which the success effect (see FIG. 581) is executed, for example, a fanning effect in which the number of repeated operations is 7 times. By configuring to set the effect mode of the above, the player can pay attention to the effect mode of the fanning effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the content defined in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1 is the same as the content defined in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 up to the first half (the part where the fanning effect ends). It is configured so that the definition contents after that are different. Specifically, it is defined that the tilting device 310 is positioned at the initial position as it is after the fanning effect is completed.

With this configuration, it is expected that the fanning effect this time will be a probabilistic promotion effect (a probabilistic promotion effect that allows the frame button 22a to be pressed) until the fanning effect is being executed. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the probabilistic promotion effect has a low degree (probability change promotion effect in which the frame button 22a cannot be pressed), the player can grasp the effect result first. By suppressing it, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, unlike the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) stands by at a specific position (the most open (elevated) position) corresponding to the period for causing the player to press the frame button 22a. Since it is not necessary to set the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) in the tilting motion scenario C table 222ib1, it is possible to define an motion for returning the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to execute the movable accessory (tilting device 310) from the start to the end of the operation based on a series of operation scenarios, and the accessory operation can be smoothly executed. In this control example, the tilting device 310 (frame button 22a) is configured to be returned to the initial position in the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1, but the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is used without limitation. Similar to the operation of the accessory, an operation scenario for returning to the initial position (origin position) may be separately provided.

Returning to FIG. 585 (b), the description will be continued. The ending scenario table 222ib2 is a scenario table that defines the operation content of the tilting device 310 for the operation effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game. If (the holding memory contains the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot, and the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is located at the initial position), the setting is made.

Unlike the various tables of the tilting operation scenario described above, the ending scenario table 222ib2 does not set the operation effect start time T1. Therefore, when the ending scenario table is set (Z8514 in FIG. 592), the tilting operation timer 223db The value corresponding to is set, and the operation of the tilting operation scenario C table 222ib1 is started (see Z2992 in FIG. 589).

The ending scenario table 222ib2 reads out the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (see Z2953 in FIG. 480). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "6" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the same contents as the partial operation contents of the tilting operation scenario A222db1 of the fifth control example described above are defined, and when the ending scenario is set, the drive motor 342 moves in the backward rotation direction (right in FIG. 159). By rotating 210 steps in the (rotating direction), the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 159) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 167 (operation pointer 1 (FIG. 586). (B))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds (500 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 586 (a))). After a stop period of 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and locks. It is moved to the removed position (see FIG. 169) (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 586 (b)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengagement position to the locking disengagement position, as shown in FIG. 168 described above, the release member 346 is rotated downward (counterclockwise direction), whereby the rotary claw is rotated. The member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 310, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 586 (b))).

After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586 (a))), and the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position. After that, the drive motor 342 rotates 190 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 167) for 1.9 seconds, so that the tilting device 310 moves (descends) to the initial position (origin position). And the driving force is transmitted.

As described above, in this control example, as in the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 of the fifth control example described above, the ascending speed of the tilting device 310 can be improved, so that the movable accessory executed during the ending period can be improved. The character production using (tilting device 310) can be a powerful production. Further, since the movable accessory (tilting device 310) can be quickly moved (ascended) to the highest ascending position within the limited period of the ending period, it is executed after moving to the highest ascending position. The period of production can be lengthened, and various productions can be performed.

In this control example, the ending scenario is set after the ending period is started, but the ending scenario is not limited to this, and for example, the ending scenario is set before the ending period is set. It may be set so that the operation of the operation pointer 2 of the ending scenario is completed at the start of the ending period. With this configuration, the period from the start of the ending period to the movement of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to the highest position can be further shortened.

Further, in the eleventh control example, by setting the ending scenario table 222ib2, the operation of the tilting device 310 is changed from the start of operation (operation from the initial position (origin position)) to the end of operation (initial position (origin position)). It is configured to execute a series of operations up to (operation of It may be provided separately from the scenario table for termination.

Further, in the eleventh control example, the tilting device 310 is configured to set the operation valid period in which the frame button 22a can be pressed for 3 seconds in which the tilting device 310 stands by at the highest position, and the operation thereof. When the player presses the frame button 22a during the valid period, the operation valid period is cleared, and the value of the tilting operation timer 223db corresponding to the ending scenario table 222ib2 is subtracted to the value at which the waiting state for 3 seconds ends. It is configured to do. With this configuration, the operation valid period ends when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period depends on the passage of time without pressing the frame button 22a during the operation valid period. It is possible to execute the end operation of the movable accessory by using a common scenario.

Returning to FIG. 583, the explanation will be continued. The operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic is a data table for determining at which timing (round game) the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is referred to at the start of the jackpot game ( (See Z8301 in FIG. 590), the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect is selected. The execution timing selected here is stored in the motion information storage area 223ib during the special prize, and when the jackpot game progresses and the round game set as the execution timing is reached, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed.

Here, the contents of the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic will be described with reference to FIG. 587. FIG. 587 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic. As shown in FIG. 587, different execution timings are defined in the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic according to the jackpot type and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "big hit A", the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 39", and the execution timing is in the range of "40 to 109". Is defined as the "8th round" as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "110 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit A" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 20% in the first round, and the rate of 35% is the eighth round, 45%. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

With this configuration, the probability change promotion effect is easily executed at the end of the jackpot game (16th round), so the failure effect is executed as the probability change promotion effect in the first half of the jackpot game. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play during the remaining period of the jackpot game. Further, since the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed can be set over the entire jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the probabilistic promotion effect will be executed.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the operation effect execution timing is not limited to this so that the probability variation promotion effect can be executed multiple times. The selection table 222ic may be configured to specify a plurality of execution timings. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 587, the explanation will be continued. When the jackpot type is "big hit B1", it is specified that the value of the acquired effect timing counter 223ia is not set in the range of "0 to 199", that is, the execution timing is not set in the entire range. .. That is, in this control example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, when the jackpot type is "big hit B1", the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) is not selected. The selection table 222ic is also configured so that the execution timing is not selected. By configuring in this way, even if the probabilistic promotion effect is selected even though it is a "big hit B1", it is possible to reliably prevent the probabilistic promotion effect from being executed. can.

Next, the jackpot type is "big hit B2", the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is in the range of "0 to 19", the execution timing is "first round", and the execution timing is in the range of "20 to 99". The "8th round" is defined as the execution timing, and the "16th round" is defined as the execution timing in the range of "100 to 199". That is, when the jackpot type is "big hit B2" and the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed, the rate is 10% in the first round, and the rate of 40% is 50% in the eighth round. It is stipulated that the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) is executed in the 16th round at the rate of.

That is, in the "big hit B2" in which the success effect is executed in the probability change promotion effect, the probability change promotion effect is more easily executed as the jackpot game progresses than in the above-mentioned "big hit A". Therefore, the later the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed, the more the expectation that the current jackpot will be the probabilistic jackpot (“big hit B2”) can be expected.

In this control example, the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit A" (1,8,16 rounds) and the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" (1,8,16 rounds). , Is configured to select the execution timing from the same number of rounds, but the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be executed only for the probabilistic promotion effect based on "big hit B2" is not limited to this. It may be configured to be set. With this configuration, the player can pay close attention to the timing at which the probabilistic promotion effect is executed. Further, when "big hit C" is set as the big hit type, the execution timing is not set as in the above-mentioned "big hit B1".

Next, with reference to FIG. 584, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 584 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 584, the RAM 223 in the eleventh control example is different from the RAM 223 (FIG. 468) in the fifth control example described above in that an effect timing counter 223ia and a prize-winning operation information storage area 223ib are added. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect timing counter 223ia is formed by the same loop counter as the effect counter 223h described above, and its value is updated every time the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). It is a thing. The effect timing counter 223ia acquires the value of the effect timing counter 223ia in the opening process 11 (Z8301 in FIG. 590) executed at the start of the jackpot game (Z8314 in FIG. 590), and the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is obtained according to the acquired value. The execution timing of the operation effect during the jackpot game is selected based on the operation effect execution timing selection table.

The effect timing counter 223ia and the effect counter 223h are both formed by a loop counter that updates the range of "0 to 199" every 1 millisecond, but it is difficult to obtain the same value. As you can see, the updated contents are different. Specifically, the values added by one update are configured to be different prime numbers. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the value of the effect counter 223h from being updated in synchronization with each other.

The motion information storage area 223ib during the special prize sets the effect mode of the probability variation promotion effect set at the start of the jackpot game and the execution timing of the probability variation promotion effect as the operation effect (probability variation promotion effect) executed during the jackpot game. It is a storage area for temporary storage. Specifically, the tilting motion scenario (see Z8312 in FIG. 590) selected by the opening process 11 (see Z8301 in FIG. 590) and the execution timing of the selected tilting motion (see Z8315 in FIG. 590) are stored. (See Z8316 in FIG. 590).

Then, it is read out by the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) executed during the jackpot game (see Z8411 in FIG. 591), and when it is determined whether or not the current round game is the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect. (See Z8412 in FIG. 591), and when it is determined that the execution timing is reached, the operation based on the effect mode (operation scenario) stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize is started.

<Regarding the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example>
Next, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 588 to 592. In the eleventh control example, the operation effect of the tilting device control process (see Z2891 in FIG. 477) executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161 in FIG. 474) is being performed with respect to the fifth control example described above. There is a difference between the change in the content of the process (see Z2905 in FIG. 478) and the change in the process content executed when a jackpot-related command is received in the command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 472). ing. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 588, the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) will be described. FIG. 588 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989). This operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed when the tilting operation status is set to 2. The difference is that the processing during the operation effect (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above is added with the processing during the ending that is executed when the ending of the jackpot is in progress.

When the operation effect in-process 11 (Z2989) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2951), and it is determined that the value is larger than 0. (Z2951: Yes), then determines whether the current time is in the ending period of the jackpot game (Z2991), and if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (Z2991: Yes), the ending processing is executed. (Z2922), the process proceeds to Z2952. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2991 that it is not during the ending period (Z2991: No), the processing of Z2992 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2952.

The details of the ending process executed in the process of Z2992 will be described later with reference to FIG. 589. In this ending process, the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation of the tilting device 310 executed during the ending period. If so, the processing is executed.

Returning to FIG. 588, the explanation will be continued. When the processing of Z2991 and Z2992 is completed, the same processing of Z2952 to Z2956 as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the above-mentioned fifth control example is executed, and then the display command corresponding to the operation executed this time is set. (Z2993), and this process is terminated. In the processing of Z2993, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the highest position (the most open position) by the operation based on the set tilting operation scenario table, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying a display mode (see FIG. 580 (b)) for indicating that the frame button 22a can be pressed is set, and the tilting device 310 is in a fanning operation. In this case, a display command for displaying the button display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be set in a display mode corresponding to the operation content.

In this way, by setting the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (setting the display command) based on the actual operation content of the tilting device 310, the movable accessory (tilting device). The operation mode of 310) and the display mode of the effect display can be easily synchronized, and an effect with a high effect can be executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2951: No), it is the same as the processing during operation effect (Z2905) of the fifth control example described above. Z2957 to Z2961 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the ending processing (Z2992) will be described with reference to FIG. 589. FIG. 589 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending processing (Z2992). When the ending processing (Z2992) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201), and when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 3190 (Z8201 :. Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is set to 3000 (Z8202), and the process proceeds to Z8202.

That is, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223db reaches "3190" while the ending scenario (see FIG. 586 (b)) is set, the tilting device 310 is in the cause state for 3 seconds, and the frame button during that time. The operation validity period during which the operation of 22a is valid is set. In this way, by setting the operation valid period of the frame button 22a according to the progress of the operation scenario of the tilting device 310, the operation valid period can be easily set according to the timing when the tilting device 310 is positioned at the highest position. Can be set.

In this control example, the operation status of the tilting device 310 is managed based on the progress status of the operation scenario (although it is configured to be discriminated based on the value of the tilting operation timer 223db). ), Not limited to this, when the value of the tilting operation timer 223db becomes a value that shifts to the next operation pointer, the detection means that can detect whether the operation content based on the current operation pointer is normally executed ( For example, a movable accessory position detection sensor) may be provided, and the detecting means may be configured to manage the operating status of the tilting device 310 based on the detection of the normal operation of the movable accessory.

With this configuration, for example, a state in which the period required for the tilting device 310 to move to the highest position (0.5 seconds corresponding to the operation pointer 4 in the ending scenario of this control example) has elapsed. When it is determined that the tilting device 310 has not completed the movement to the highest position, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db can be stopped and a retry period for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) can be set. can. Then, when the tilting device 310 has been moved to the highest position during the retry period, the update of the value of the tilting operation timer 223db can be restarted, and the operation valid period for the frame button 22a can be set. ..

As a result, for example, while the tilting device 310 is performing an ascending operation (opening operation using an elastic member), the player applies a force to resist the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 (for example, on the tilting device 310). Even if the tilting device 310 cannot move to the highest climbing position within a specific period (within 0.5 seconds), the tilting device 310 will rise to the highest position within the subsequent predetermined period (1 second). When the player moves to the position, the operation valid period can be set according to the timing, and the player can perform an appropriate effect. In addition, if the tilting device 310 does not move to the highest position even after the above-mentioned predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed, another effect (press the frame button 22a) without setting the operation valid period. It is also possible to switch to a production that does not let you.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8201 that the value of the current tilting operation timer 223db is not 3190 (Z8201: No), the processing of Z8202 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z8203.

Next, in the processing of Z8203, it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z8203: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set. Reset to "190" (Z8204), set the value of the SW valid time counter 223k to "0" (Z8205), and end this process.

That is, when the frame button 22a is pressed and the tilting operation flag 223de is turned on during the operation valid period set in this operation effect (during the period when the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is larger than 0). , The value of the tilting operation counter 223db is changed from the standby state of the ending scenario, that is, the state of the operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 586 (b)) to the value immediately shifting to the operation pointer 6, and the operation valid period. The value of the SW effective time counter 223k is changed to "0" in order to terminate. As a result, no matter when the player presses the frame button 22a during the operation valid period, the period (3 seconds) in which the tilting device 310 waits at the highest position can be skipped. In addition, even if the operation valid period ends by pressing the frame button 22a or the operation valid period ends due to the passage of time, the ending scenario can be executed to the end without any problem.

In this control example, when the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period, the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is changed so as to shift the operation pointer of the ending scenario from "5" to "6". After pressing the frame button 22a, the tilting device 310 is configured to perform an operation for moving the tilting device 310 to the initial position (origin position), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the frame button 22a is pressed. Therefore, when using a configuration in which the tilting device 310 moves to the initial position (origin position), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db may be changed to "0". As a result, unnecessary operation processing can be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON in the processing of Z8203 (Z8203: No), then the currently set operation scenario setting table (ending scenario table 222ib2) is supported. Read the operation content to be performed (Z8206), then determine whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z8207), if it is determined to be larger than 0 (Z8207: Yes), and then the frame button. It is determined whether 22a is pressed (Z8208).

If it is determined that the frame button 22a is pressed in the processing of Z8208 (Z8208: Yes), it means that the frame button 22a is pressed during the operation valid period in which the ending scenario is set, so that a super lucky display is displayed. A display command indicating (see FIG. 582 (b)) is set (Z8209), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z8210), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of Z8207 (Z8207: No), or the frame button 22a is not pressed in the processing of Z8208. If it is determined (Z8208: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the process of the opening process 11 (Z8301) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process 11 (Z8301). This opening process 11 (Z8301) is a process executed when the opening command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and in this control example, the third operation is performed during the opening period. In addition to the process of setting the opening command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, whether or not to execute the operation effect (probability change promotion effect) during this jackpot game, and the probability change promotion effect. Is executed, a process for determining the effect mode is executed.

When the opening process 11 (Z8301) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z8311), and the special prize middle operation effect selection table 222ia is obtained based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h and the current jackpot type. A more tilting motion scenario is selected (whether or not execution is performed and the scenario type is selected) (Z8312). Then, it is determined whether or not the tilting operation scenario is selected in the processing of Z8312 (Z8313), and if it is determined that it is selected (Z8313: Yes), then the value of the effect timing counter 223ia is acquired (Z8314) and acquired. Based on the value of the effect timing counter 223ia and the current jackpot type, the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is selected from the operation effect execution timing selection table 222ic (Z8315).

After finishing the processing of Z8315, next, information for showing the type of the tilting motion scenario selected in the processing of Z8312 and the execution timing of the tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) selected in the processing of Z8315 are shown. The information and the information are stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize (Z8316), the opening command for display is set (Z8317), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8313, if it is determined that the tilting operation scenario is not selected as a result of the processing of Z8312 (Z8313: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the round process 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 591. FIG. 591 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 11. This round process 11 is a process executed when a round command indicating that a new round of the jackpot game is started is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and is executed in this control example. , In addition to the process of setting the display command corresponding to the number of rounds, the process of determining whether or not to execute the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) is executed.

When the round process 11 (Z8302) is executed, first, the information stored in the operation information storage area 223ib during the special prize (information for indicating the type of the tilting operation scenario and information for indicating the execution timing) is displayed. Read (Z8411), determine whether the round game this time is a round for executing a tilting motion (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412), and if it is determined to be an execution timing (Z8412: Yes), it is stored. A tilting motion scenario corresponding to the type of tilting motion scenario is set (Z8413), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds this time is set (Z8414), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8412, if it is determined that the current round game is not the execution timing of the tilting operation (probability change promotion effect) (Z8412: No), the processing of Z8413 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z8414.

Next, the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303) will be described with reference to FIG. 592. FIG. 592 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 11 (Z8303). This ending process 11 (Z8303) is a process executed when the ending command of the jackpot game is received in the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 336), and in this control example, the third is executed during the ending period. In addition to the process of setting the ending command for display indicating the display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, the process of determining whether or not to execute the operation effect (holding continuous effect) during the ending period is executed. Will be done.

When the ending process 11 (Z8303) is executed, first, the winning information (winning information stored on hold) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (Z8511), and then in the read winning information. It is determined whether or not the winning information indicating the probability change jackpot is included (Z8512). Here, if it is determined that the winning information indicating the probability variation jackpot is included (Z8512: Yes), then it is determined whether the tilting device 310 is located at the initial position (origin position) (Z8513). If it is determined that the position is located at the origin position (Z8513: Yes), an ending scenario for moving the tilting device 310 is set (Z8514).

Then, "2" is set for the tilting operation status (Z8515), a display command corresponding to the current determination result is set (Z2952 process 8516), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z8513, when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not located at the origin position (Z8513: No), a display ending command indicating that there is a probable change jackpot in the hold is set (Z8517). , End this process. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of Z8512 that there is no winning information indicating a probability variation jackpot in the winning information (Z8512: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in this control example, the content (effect mode) of the composite effect to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect (drive effect) is set in the execution timing of the compound effect. It is configured to be set based on the operating status of the movable accessory. Specifically, at the execution timing of the composite effect, the composite effect is configured to be executed only when the movable accessory is located at a predetermined position (initial position). With this configuration, even if the control instruction related to the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the control instruction related to the accessory effect (movable effect) are executed separately, the display effect and the accessory effect are different from each other as a composite effect. It is possible to suppress the fact that it is lost, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Further, at the execution timing of the compound effect, the movable accessory is not located at the initial position, that is, the movable accessory driven by the previously executed accessory effect has not returned to the initial position. When the execution timing of the effect arrives, the display effect showing the effect result equivalent to the effect result of the composite effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the game is continued without the player recognizing the effect result to be notified to the player even by using the compound effect.

Further, in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned composite effect (last effect) during the jackpot game, the accessory effect for driving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed, for example. A role of notifying whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player or a normal state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probable change state. It is configured so that the object production (probability change promotion production) is executed. In addition, the tilting device 310 can be driven as a decorative effect to liven up the period during the jackpot game. In addition, the tilting device 310 is configured to be movable in various operation patterns (operation scenarios). In this way, by driving one movable accessory (tilting device 310) in various operation modes for a plurality of purposes during the jackpot game, one movable accessory can be used for a plurality of purposes. , The effect of production can be enhanced efficiently.

However, as described above, the more efficiently the effect is configured, the easier it is to set another character effect during the period in which the movable accessory is being driven (the execution period of the character effect is longer). It becomes easy to overlap), and there is a problem that the production that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. In addition, if the execution period of a plurality of character effects is fixed in advance so that the character effects using movable characters are not executed in duplicate, the character effects become monotonous. There was a problem that the effect was reduced. On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution periods of the accessory effects overlap, one of the accessory effects is switched to another effect (for example, a display effect using a liquid crystal display device). It is composed. As a result, even if the effect contents can be set so that the execution periods of the character effects can be overlapped, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect, and further, it is possible to execute various character effects. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this control example, the probability variation promotion effect is configured to be executed only once during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation promotion effect may be executed multiple times. .. In this case, for example, in the operation effect selection table 222ia during the special prize, a plurality of effect modes of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected, and the effect mode of the probabilistic promotion effect executed during the jackpot game can be selected. It is good to configure it so that it is different. As a result, a wider variety of probabilistic promotion effects can be executed at various timings, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the jackpot game at an early stage.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, the start timing of any round game is set as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interval period set between the round games is set. When the number of balls winning in the specific winning opening 65a in the round game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), or during the jackpot game, the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22a. In some cases, or when a ball is inserted into the general entrance 63 during a big hit game, it may be configured so that it can be set as one of the start timings. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player execute the probabilistic promotion effect at a timing that is more difficult to predict, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the content of the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect is set differently according to the position of the movable accessory, for example, the movable accessory is positioned at the initial position. If it is determined that the display is performed, a predetermined compound effect (for example, a compound effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position within 1 second. When it is determined that the position (state) is correct, a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is delayed by 1 second and executed, and the movable accessory is within 1 second. If it is determined that the position (state) can be moved to the initial position, various effects may be set so as to execute the suggestion effect of only the liquid crystal effect without moving the movable accessory. This makes it possible to perform various effects without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as the accessory effect for moving the movable accessory, the first accessory effect executed with the predetermined first position as the initial position and the second position different from the first position as the end position, and the above-mentioned first accessory effect. If it is a pachinko machine that can at least execute the first position and the second character effect executed with the third position different from the second position as the initial position and the above-mentioned second position as the end position, the combined effect. It may be configured to determine whether to execute the first accessory effect or the second accessory effect based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the contents of.

Further, in this case, regardless of the fluctuation of the special figure, it is preferable to configure the movable accessory so as to be able to execute the fanning effect of bringing the movable accessory closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite effect desired by the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In this control example, an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect for suggesting the winning jackpot type during the jackpot game has been described. The technical idea used in this control example may be applied to the effect for suggesting (variable effect) and the effect for suggesting the lottery result of a normal symbol (normal figure variable effect). Further, in this control example, the tilting device 310 arranged in the vicinity of the frame button 22a as a movable accessory is used as an example, but at least the predetermined first position (initial position) is different from the first position. Any movable accessory (movable member) configured to be movable between the second position (movable position) may be used, for example, a decorative movable accessory (movable member) arranged in the variable display unit 80. Alternatively, it may be a movable accessory (movable member) for decoration attached to the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in this control example, as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310), a first operation condition that can be satisfied during the jackpot game and a second operation condition that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the special symbol are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a third operating condition that is satisfied when a predetermined time is reached, a fourth operating condition that is established when the player presses the frame button 22a, and a hold. A fifth operating condition or the like that is established based on the fact that the number of stored items is a predetermined number (for example, eight) may be set as a condition for operating the movable member (tilting device 310). By setting a plurality of operating conditions of the movable member (tilting device 310) in this way, the movable member can be moved at various timings, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to this control example, even if the opportunity to move the movable member (tilting device 310) independently of the effect display is increased for the purpose of enhancing the effect of the effect, the accessory using the movable member is used. It is possible to provide the player with a composite effect that combines the effect and the display effect using the third symbol display device 81 without discomfort.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a big hit game) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. It is also possible to provide a production (fanning effect) to be performed so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means. In this case, since the position of the movable member becomes indefinite when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed, a situation in which the movable member is not located at the initial position (origin position) at the start of the ending period is likely to occur. However, by using the technical idea of this control example, it is possible to execute a compound production (holding continuous production) during the ending period without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the promotion effect in which the operation means is notified whether or not the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed is a probabilistic jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, and when it is determined that the hold continuous effect (last effect) is executed, execute the hold continuous effect suggestion to that effect. You may. As a result, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is executed, even if the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, the hold using the movable member is held without operating the operating means (so that the movable member does not move). It is possible to facilitate continuous production. In this way, by executing the hold ream suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being intentionally moved in one effect (promotion effect), and to make it easier to move the movable member in another effect (hold ream effect). Is possible. Therefore, by giving the player the option of not moving the movable member, the effect to be executed can be made more diverse, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<12th control example>
Next, a twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 593 to 603. In the eleventh control example described above, when the effect (composite effect) to be executed by combining the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the accessory effect is executed, the movable member used for the accessory effect at the start timing of the composite effect (the movable member). When it is determined whether the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310) is located at the initial position, it is configured to execute the composite effect and it is determined that the tilting device 310) is not located at the initial position. Was configured not to perform compound effects. As a result, when the combined effect is executed, the control means (voice lamp control device 113) that controls the effect has the control means (display control device 114) that controls the display effect and the drive means (driving means) that operates the movable accessory. Even if commands (commands) related to the combined effect are output independently to the drive motor) and (hereinafter referred to as each device), the effect executed by each device can be easily synchronized, and the effect is achieved. Was able to be enhanced.

However, in the technique used in the eleventh control example described above, in order to output a command for simultaneously executing the composite effect to each device, for example, the movable member is moved to the initial position corresponding to the compound effect. The operation (preparation operation) for making the compound effect is executed after receiving the command (command) for executing the compound effect. That is, when the composite effect is executed using a plurality of devices (movable members, liquid crystal devices, etc.), the preparatory operation for making the composite effect feasible is completed in each device (preparation). It is necessary to configure the period) to be included in the first half period of the compound production.

When such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect in which the liquid crystal display (display effect) and the character effect are synchronized, but it is necessary to provide a long preparation period and within a limited time. There is a problem that the effect period in which the actual compound effect (the effect executed after the preparation period has elapsed) can be set is shortened when the compound effect is executed. Further, there is a problem that the player is aware of the effect content of the compound effect executed by the movement status (preparation operation) of the movable accessory during the preparation period, which is the stage before the compound effect is performed.

In particular, as a composite effect, the first compound effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and the accessory effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. If the pachinko machine has a second compound effect and is configured to have a different selection ratio between the first compound effect and the second compound effect according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the character moves to the first position or the second position, it becomes easier for the player to determine even the lottery result of the special symbol, which is an effect (directing effect). There was a problem that the effect of the composite effect) was reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, at a time point before the setting of the compound effect (a time point before the determination of whether or not the compound effect is executed is executed). , It is configured to execute the control to execute the preparatory operation for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by configuring the preparatory movement to be set separately from the setting of the compound effect, when the preparatory operation of the movable accessory is executed for the player, the compound effect (character effect) is performed. It can make you think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparatory movement is executed regardless of whether or not the compound effect (feature effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined according to the movable status of the movable accessory during the preparation period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is discriminated.

Further, in the eleventh control example described above, since the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the control for the display control device 114 and the movable member (tilting device 310), for example, a predetermined effect period (big hit). For a display effect in which the effect is continuously executed during the round period (variation period of the special symbol), a display command (for example, a display round) indicating the effect mode of the display effect to be executed within the effect period. The command and the variable pattern command for display) are output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period, and within the predetermined effect period (big hit round period, change period of special symbol). For a character effect in which the effect is executed only for a specific period (for example, a period of 5 to 10 seconds from the start of the effect period), for a movable member (tilting device 310) after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the effect period. Therefore, it is necessary to output a command to perform the preparatory operation (for example, the preparatory period is 2 seconds). In this case, a measuring means (timer or the like) for measuring the timing of outputting a command to the movable member is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, but in order to enhance the effect of the effect, the effect period is set. In the case of configuring the accessory effect using the movable member at a plurality of timings, it is necessary to design the measuring means so that the measuring means can be measured for a plurality of periods, and the processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. There was a problem of doing it.

On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. ) Is configured to output a command to move it. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 12th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 593. FIG. 593 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 593, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the operation control of the movable accessory is added to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that the operation command (command) can be output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the block diagram of FIG. 593, for convenience of explanation, only the characteristic configuration of this control example is described among the electrical configurations of the entire pachinko machine 10, but the electrical configuration not described (for example, for example). The same configuration as the above-mentioned eleventh control example is applied to the power supply device 115, the payout control device 111, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 593, in the twelfth control example, a command (information) for displaying an image based on the image data is output from the output port 239 of the display control device 114 to the third symbol display device 81. , It is configured to output a command for operating the movable accessory to the accessory control device 229. Here, as shown in FIG. 593, the accessory control device 229 is connected so as to be able to receive the data (various commands) output from the display control device 114, and the data (various types) output from the display control device 114. Input port y304 for inputting commands), MPUy301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit, and output port y306 for outputting operation data to various movable accessories (tilting device 310, other devices 228). And, are installed. The MPUy301 has a ROMy302 that stores predetermined program information (operation scenarios for operating movable accessories (preparatory operation scenarios, etc.)) when executing various control programs executed by the MPUy301, and various types. RAMy 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing the data and the like of the above, is built in.

The MPU y301 of the accessory control device 229 is electrically connected to the input port y305 and the output port y306. When a command for designating movable data for moving a movable accessory is received from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229, the command is sent to the MPU y301 via the input port y305 and the bus line. Entered. Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) specified by the display control device 114 is read from the ROMy 302, and the operation instruction corresponding to the read operation pattern is given to various movable accessories via the output port y306. Is output.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is being driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

Further, in this control example, data (command) related to audio output can be output to the audio output device 226 from the output port 239 of the display control device 114. Here, the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data (various commands) output from the display control device 114. Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, the voice output device 226 is configured to be able to receive data (command) related to voice output from the voice lamp control device 113 as in each control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 593, the audio output device 226 is equipped with MPUm301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPUm301 has a ROMm302 in which program information (operation scenario for operating a movable accessory (preparatory operation scenario, etc.)) predetermined for executing various control programs executed by the MPUm301 is stored, and the relevant ROMm302. It has a built-in RAMm 303, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing various control programs executed by the MPU m 301.

The MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port m305 and the amplifier unit m306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU m301 via the input port m305 and the bus line m304. Will be done. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM m302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the amplifier unit m306. For example, the voice data corresponding to the BGM is output to the CN1, the voice data corresponding to the stop sound is output to the CN2, and the voice data corresponding to the warning sound is output to the CN3. Then, it is amplified by the amplifier unit m306 and input to the speaker unit 450. As a result, various sounds designated by the display control device 114 can be output from the speaker unit 450.

Here, the configuration of the ROM m302 provided in the MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. The ROMm 302 of the MPU m301 of the audio output device 226 is provided with at least an audio file storage area (not shown).

The audio file storage area is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, and the like are stored. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the display control device 114, the audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area and output to the corresponding channel of the amplifier unit m306.

Specifically, in the voice file storage area (not shown), music data related to music (BGM), stop sound data related to stop sound, and voice generated during preparation drive for accessory operation are simulated. Pseudo-voice data related to the reproduced pseudo-sound is stored. In this control example, it is possible to output the above-mentioned pseudo voice during the preparation period in which the movable accessory can execute the preparation drive.

With this configuration, the same pseudo voice is output regardless of whether the preparation drive is actually executed or the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed. Specifically, in this control example, as in the eleventh control example described above, it is configured to execute the bonus effect of moving the tilting device 310 as a movable bonus, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game. In the case of the accessory effect executed during the operation, the operation contents (see FIG. 586 (b)) of the operation pointers “1” and “2” defined in the ending scenario table 222ib2 correspond to the preparatory drive.

Here, the operation contents of the operation pointers "1" and "2" (see FIG. 586 (b)) defined in the ending scenario table 222ib2 are operations for moving the mechanism (cam, etc.) inside the tilting device 310. Therefore, the player cannot visually recognize the operation, but since the drive motor is driven during the preparatory drive, the drive sound and the sound generated when the cam is disengaged reach the player. There is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, as in this control example, by outputting the sound generated at the time of the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player is determined. It can be difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparation drive is executed.

<About the flow of production during the jackpot game in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 594 to 596, the flow of the effect during the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to output an effect execution command to the accessory control device 229 and the voice output device 226 with respect to the eleventh control example described above. The control content for the effect executed during the final round (16 rounds) and the control content for the effect executed during the ending period are different, and other than that, they are the same. The detailed description of the same element will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 594, a flow in the case of executing a hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, will be described during the ending period of the jackpot game. FIG. 594 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 594, when the jackpot game (big hit game period) is started, the specific period (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) forming the jackpot game period is started at the timing. A display command indicating a display mode of the effect content (liquid crystal display) within a specific period is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 creates image data based on the received display command, and displays the liquid crystal display (opening display, round) on the third symbol display device 81. Display, interval display,) is executed. Since the detailed control content for the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute various displays is the same as each control example described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a display command (display final round command) corresponding to the final round (16 rounds), the voice lamp control device 113 assigns a specific timing (for example, 6 seconds after the start of the round game) to the display command. Set including the specified information for specifying. Upon receiving the final round command for display, the display control device 114 executes the liquid crystal display during the final round, and at a specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display, the accessory control device 229. , And a command (operation command) is output to the voice output device 226.

Upon receiving the operation command (command for the accessory) output from the display control device 114, the accessory control device 229 executes a preparatory drive for the movable accessory (tilting device 310). Further, the voice output device 226 executes pseudo-voice output when it receives an operation command (voice command) output from the display control device 114. That is, based on the designated information included in the final round command for display, the preparation drive (preparation period 2 seconds) for the composite effect (last effect) that can be executed during the ending period is executed.

Here, the specific timing specified by the designated information included in the final round command for display is set to be 2 seconds before the timing at which the final round can be completed. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is the first condition that 10 balls win the specific winning opening 65a in one round game, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the above-mentioned control examples. , It is configured to end when any of the second conditions in which 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round game is satisfied. Therefore, in this control example, the timing obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the timing at which the first condition can be satisfied (the timing at which 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game) (8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round game). Timing) is set as the timing specified by the specified information.

During this preparation period, the accessory control device 229 executes the preparation drive for the tilting device 310, and the voice output device 226 outputs pseudo voice to the speaker 450 during the preparation period. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the round display of the final round is continuously executed (standby state) so that the player is not determined that the current preparation period is in progress. After that, when the round game of the final round ends and the ending period starts, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the combined effect (last effect) during the ending period, and the last effect. When it is determined that (holding continuous effect) is to be executed, a display ending command including the execution of the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command including the execution of the last effect, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute the liquid crystal display corresponding to the last effect, and causes the accessory control device 229 to execute the liquid crystal display. Outputs a command for a character to execute an operation effect corresponding to the last effect. Then, when the bonus control device 229 receives a command for the bonus to execute the operation effect corresponding to the last effect, the tilt device 310 whose preparatory drive has been completed is provided with the bonus effect corresponding to the last effect. It outputs operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for execution.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, similarly to the eleventh control example described above, it is configured to determine at the start of the ending period whether or not to execute the composite effect (last effect) during the ending period. Therefore, at the start of the final round (16 rounds), which is the timing before the start of the ending period, it is not determined whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed. By designating the timing for executing the preparatory drive for the movable accessory in such a state, that is, in a state where it has not been determined whether or not the compound effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period. The preparation drive is executed regardless of whether the compound effect (last effect) is executed or not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the composite effect (last effect) is executed during the ending period, depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive.

Next, with reference to FIG. 595, the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 595 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the hold continuous effect (last effect), which is a compound effect, is not executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 595 is the same as FIG. 594 described above, except that the composite effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 595, when it is determined that the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not executed as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the voice lamp control is performed. A display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 11th control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 596, the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 596 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed in the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds) of the jackpot game. Note that FIG. 596 differs from FIG. 595 described above only in that the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is not executed during the preparatory period set during the final round (16 rounds). Everything else is the same. The detailed description of the same part will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 596, in the final round (16 rounds), an operation effect for moving the movable accessory (tilting device 310) is executed (round effect drive is executed), and then the tilting device 310 is moved to the initial position. When the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory command output from the display control device 114 during the moving operation (return operation), the preparatory drive based on the received accessory command is performed by the movable accessory (tilting device 310). ) Is determined to be in an unexecutable state, and the preparation drive is not executed. Even in this case, the audio output device 226 outputs pseudo audio.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the preparation drive is not executed during the preparation period. Further, since the preparatory drive was not executed during the final round (16 rounds), the compound effect (last effect) is not executed during the ending period. In this case as well, as in the pattern described with reference to FIG. 595, as a result of the determination executed by the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the ending period, the last effect (holding continuous effect). If it is determined not to execute, a display ending command that does not include the last effect is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In this case, for example, as in the 11th control example described above, if the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is not satisfied (there is no winning information indicating the probability change jackpot in the hold symbol), the normal ending is performed. When the display is executed and the execution condition of the last effect (holding continuous effect) is satisfied, but the compound effect cannot be executed due to the operation status of the movable accessory, the same effect result as the held continuous effect is displayed. It is good to configure it to execute the effect display.

As described above, in this control example, even if it is not determined whether or not the specific operation effect is executed, the preparatory drive for the specific operation effect that can be executed during the specific effect period (ending period) is not determined. It is configured to run. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, the preparation drive is executed as an obstruction means for setting a preparation period for executing the preparation drive in advance and making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed during the preparation period. It has a pseudo-voice output means for pseudo-outputting the sound generated in the case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

Further, in this control example, the preparatory drive is not executed when a predetermined non-executable condition is satisfied during the preparatory period, and even if the preparatory drive is not executed during the preparatory period, it is simulated. It is configured to output pseudo-voice by voice output means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of whether or not the specific operation effect is executed depending on the presence or absence of the preparation drive before the specific operation effect is executed.

<Control processing in the audio lamp control device of the 12th control example>
Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 597. The twelfth control example differs from the eleventh control example described above in that the round process 12 (see Z8352 in FIG. 597) is executed instead of the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591). The other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process 12 (Z8352). The round process 12 (Z8352) is a process for determining whether the newly executed round is the final round (16 rounds) with respect to the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above. The difference is that a process of setting a display command dedicated to the final round (16 rounds) is added when it is determined to be the final round (16 rounds).

Specifically, when the round process 12 (Z8352) is executed, the same Z8411 to Z8413 as the round process 11 (see Z8302 in FIG. 591) of the eleventh control example described above are executed, and then newly executed. It is determined whether the round is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451). In the processing of Z8451, when it is determined that it is the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: Yes), then the final round command for display is set (Z8452), and the round processing 11 of the above-mentioned 11th control example (FIG. The same processing of Z8414 as (see Z8302 of 591) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z8451 that it is not the final round (16 rounds) (Z8451: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing of Z8452 includes information for indicating the round display corresponding to the final round (16 rounds) and information for indicating the timing for executing the preparatory drive of the movable accessory (tilting device 310). The final round command for display is set. In this way, by including the information for indicating the timing of executing the preparatory drive in the final round command for display set at the start timing of the new round, the voice lamp control device 113 has a movable accessory (tilting device). It is not necessary to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring the timing of executing the preparatory drive of 310).

When the display control device 114 receives the final round command for display, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received command is set, and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the display data table is stored in the clock counter 233h. Since the effect display corresponding to the value of the timekeeping counter 233h that is set and updated is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the timing for executing the preparation drive for the final round command for display is executed. By including the information for indicating the above, it is possible to determine the timing at which the preparation drive is executed by diverting the time measurement information of the time measurement counter 233h used for displaying the image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a new measuring means (timer) for determining the timing of executing the preparation drive, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 12th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 598 and 599. In the twelfth control example, the command determination process 12 is replaced with the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) for the control process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example described above. (See Z3392 in FIG. 598) is different in that it is performed.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) will be described with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 12 (see Z3392). When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, the same processes from Z3401 to Z3419 as the above-mentioned command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) are executed, and it is determined that there is no error command in the process of Z3418. If so (Z3418: No), then it is determined whether there is a final round command for display (Z3491).

If it is determined that there is a final round command for display in the processing of Z3491 (Z3491: Yes), the final round processing is executed (Z3492), the process proceeds to the processing of Z3401, and it is determined that there is no final round command for display. If this is the case (Z3491: No), the process proceeds to the same Z3420 process as the command determination process 2 (see Z3302 in FIG. 367) described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 599, the contents of the final round process (Z3492) executed in the command determination process 12 (see Z3392 in FIG. 598) will be described. In this final round process (Z3492), a process for setting a display data table based on the received final round command for display and a process for outputting a command to the accessory control device 229 and the audio output device 226. And are executed.

When the command determination process 12 (see Z3392) is executed, first, the display data table for the final round corresponding to the received final round command is set (Z3495), and then the standby display timing set in the display data table is set. Set the processing to output the accessory command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory drive and the audio command for causing the audio output device 226 to output pseudo-audio. (Z3496), this process is terminated.

As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes a value for indicating the standby display timing (start timing of the preparation period), the command for the accessory and the command for the voice can be output in synchronization.

<Control processing in the audio output device of the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 600 and 601 various control processes executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the voice command set by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is the voice output device 226 by the command output process of the voice lamp control device 113 or the command output process of the display control device 114. The voice output device 226 is configured to output voice data corresponding to the received voice command.

In this way, various display commands and voices output to the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113 that can receive commands for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110. By setting various voice commands to be output to the output device 226, a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (effect display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). (Visual display mode) and directed sound mode (auditory voice mode) output from the speaker 450 via the voice output device 226) can be centrally set. Therefore, when a plurality of effect modes are executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in this control example, the display control device 114 is also configured to set a voice command (command for outputting a pseudo voice) to be output to the voice output device 226. With this configuration, the display control device 114 can output the sound at the timing when the display data is actually created. Therefore, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the display contents are displayed. It is possible to perform an effect that is more synchronized with the sound output from the speaker 450.

In addition, for example, when the effect display is not properly executed due to an abnormality in the control process of the display control device 114, the sound command is not output to the sound output device 226, so that the effect display is not executed. Regardless of this, it is possible to suppress that only the sound is output or that the effect display and the sound execution timing are different from each other.

First, with reference to FIG. 600 (a), the main process executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 600A is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (Z8501). The details of this command determination process (Z8501) will be described later with reference to FIG. 601. However, when various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are received, the commands are received. The process for outputting the voice corresponding to the voice command is executed. After the processing of Z8501, other processing is executed (Z8502). In the processing of the Z8502, processing for reproducing the audio data and updating the value of the pointer for music is executed.

When the processing of Z8502 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM m 303 (Z8503). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (Z8505), and the power-off process is executed (Z8506). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z8507), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the Z8503 process (Z8503: No), it is determined whether or not the RAMm 303 is destroyed (Z8504) based on the keyword stored in the RAM m 303, and the RAM m 303 is destroyed. If not (Z8504: No), the process returns to Z8501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMm 303 is destroyed (Z8504: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 600 (b). FIG. 600B is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 600 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMm 303 (Z8601), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, the command determination process (Z8501), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 600 (a)) executed by the MPUm 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. 601. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z8501). In this command determination process (Z8501), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z8501), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z8701), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z8701: No), a command is used. The judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z8701: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z8702), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z8703).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice command output from the display control device 114, that is, a voice command for outputting a pseudo voice (Z8704), and the pseudo voice is determined. When it is determined that there is a voice command for outputting (Z8704: Yes), a voice file (pseudo voice data) indicating the pseudo voice notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area of the ROM m302. Next, set the value of the pointer for music to the value corresponding to the timing at which the pseudo-voice is played, set the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the pseudo-voice data, and set the playback of the pseudo-voice data. (Z8706), the process proceeds to Z8707.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no voice command output from the display control device 114 in the processing of Z8704 (Z8704: No), or when the above-mentioned processing of Z8706 is executed, then another voice command is used. It is determined whether or not there is a command, that is, a voice command received from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707).

In the processing of Z8707, for example, a music BGM corresponding to a special symbol variation effect or a jackpot game effect during a jackpot game, a stop sound sound corresponding to a stop display timing of a special symbol (third symbol), and a frame button 22a. It is determined whether or not a voice command for indicating a pressing sound corresponding to the pressing timing of the button, an error voice corresponding to an error notification, or the like is output from the voice lamp control device 113. Here, if it is determined that there are various voice commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 (Z8707: Yes), the voice file (music data) corresponding to the voice (music) indicated by the received various voice commands. The group) is read from the voice file storage area, and the read voice file (data group for music) is stored in a predetermined storage area. Then, the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the voice data indicated by the received various voice commands is set in a predetermined time measuring means (timer), the playback of various voice data is set (Z8708), and the process of Z8701 is performed. Transition.

If it is determined that there is no other voice data in the processing of Z8707 (Z8707: No), other command processing is executed (Z8709), the process shifts to Z8701, and the above-mentioned control is repeatedly executed.

<Regarding the control process of the accessory control device 229 in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 602 and 603, the control processing contents of the accessory control device 229 in the twelfth control example will be described. In the twelfth control example, the accessory command set by the display control device 114 is output to the accessory control device 229 by the command output process of the display control device 114, and the accessory control device 229 receives the accessory. It is configured to output operation data (electrical signals corresponding to the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) corresponding to the command to the corresponding movable accessory.

In this way, the display control device 114 receives the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main control device 110, and the display control thereof. By setting various command for the accessory that the device 114 outputs to the accessory control device 229, a plurality of effect display modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol (displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). It is possible to operate the movable accessory in synchronization with the effect display mode (visual display mode) to be performed. Therefore, as an effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, various devices (third symbol). When a composite effect of a display device 81, a movable accessory, and a speaker 450) is executed, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the execution timing of each effect mode set by each of the various devices, and the effect can be achieved. The effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, the above-mentioned visual display mode and auditory voice mode are used as a plurality of effect modes for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is not limited to this. Anything may be used as long as it performs an effect for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. For example, a tactile pressing mode for applying a predetermined pressure to a part of the player's body (for example, a hand operating the operation handle) or an olfactory effect mode for stimulating the player's sense of smell is used. It may be configured to suggest and notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol. As described above, by appropriately combining a plurality of types of effect modes to execute one effect, it is possible to set various effect modes to be executed to show the lottery result of the special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 602 (a), the main process executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described. FIG. 602 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the accessory control device 229 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the display control device 114 is executed (Z9001). The details of this command determination process (Z9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 603, but when various command for the accessory output from the display control device 114 is received, it corresponds to the received command for the accessory. The process for outputting the made operation data is executed. After the processing of Z9001, other processing for executing the reproduction of the operation data and the update of the value of the operation timer for updating the operation scenario is executed (Z9002).

When the processing of the Z9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAMy 303 (Z9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (Z9005), and the power-off process is executed (Z9006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (Z9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the Z9003 process (Z9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAMy 303 is destroyed (Z9004) based on the keyword stored in the RAMy 303, and the RAMy 303 is destroyed. If not (Z9004: No), the process returns to Z9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAMy 303 is destroyed (Z9004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229 will be described with reference to FIG. 602 (b). FIG. 602 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 602 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the display control device 114.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAMy 303 (Z9101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing is performed according to the read commands.

Next, with reference to FIG. 603, the command determination process (Z9001), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 602 (a)) executed by the MPUy 301 of the accessory control device 229, will be described. FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (Z9001). In this command determination process (Z9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the display control device 114 is executed.

In the command determination process (Z9001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z9201), and if it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command (Z9201: No), a command is used. The judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an unprocessed new command (Z9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed is set to ON (Z9202), and then the unprocessed stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the commands of, the type of the command is analyzed (Z9203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an accessory command among the unprocessed commands (S9204), and if it is determined that there is an accessory command (Z9204: Yes), then this time. It is determined whether or not the movable accessory to be operated by the received accessory command is in operation (Z9205). Here, in the processing of Z9205, first, it is determined which movable accessory command is the command indicating the operation scenario for which the accessory command received this time, and for example, the operation scenario for moving the tilting device 310. When the command indicates, the displacement of the amount of current applied to the drive motor that moves the tilting device 310 is determined. When this amount of current is sufficient to drive the drive motor, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is in operation because the drive motor is being driven.

In this way, by configuring so as to directly grasp the drive status of the drive motor, even when the configuration in which operation data is output from a plurality of control devices is used, the movable status of the movable accessory can be reliably grasped. Can be grasped.

If it is determined in the processing of Z9205 that the target movable accessory is in operation (Z9205: Yes), the operation based on the command for the accessory received this time cannot be executed, so the operation is performed. Without outputting the data, the command for the accessory received this time is discarded (Z9206), and the process proceeds to Z9201. On the other hand, when it is determined that the target movable accessory is not in operation (Z9205: No), the operation data (ending scenario table 222ib2) for causing the movable accessory (tilting device 310) to execute the preparatory operation. (Operation data corresponding to the operation pointers “1” and “2” (see FIG. 586 (b))) are output (Z9207), and the process proceeds to Z9201.

Further, in the processing of Z9204, if it is determined that there is no command for the accessory (Z9204: No), other command processing is executed (Z9207), and the process proceeds to the processing of Z9201.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member is provided, and the movable member (for example, tilting) is provided from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. It is configured to output a command for moving the device 310). Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It is configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command).

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 simply outputs a display command corresponding to a predetermined effect period to the display control device 114 at the start of the effect period, and prepares the movable member at an appropriate timing. The operation can be performed. Further, even if a plurality of compound effect execution timings can be set and the timing for executing the preparatory operation is different according to the set compound effect execution timing, the display command to be output to the display control device 114 is displayed. Since it is only necessary to variably set the timing for outputting the command for the accessory included in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a measuring means (timer) for measuring a plurality of periods in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, the accessory control device 229 is configured to be able to determine the operating status of the tilting device 310. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the driving means (motor) for driving the tilting device 310 is driven by detecting the current applied to the motor. Then, upon receiving an operation instruction from the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the tilting device 310 is operating, and when it is determined that the tilting device 310 is not movable, operation data is output to the tilting device 310. can do.

In this control example, the operation data for moving the movable accessory from both the voice lamp control device 113 and the accessory control device 229 (in the rotation direction and the number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario). The corresponding electrical signal) is configured to be output to the movable accessory, but the operation is not limited to this, and only the operation scenario for the movable accessory is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the set operation is performed. The scenario is configured to be output to the accessory control device 229, and only the accessory control device 229 has operation data (rotation direction and number of steps for driving various motors specified in the operation scenario) for the movable accessory. It may be configured to output the corresponding electrical signal). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the operation data for the movable accessory from being output from a plurality of control devices, so that the operation control for the movable accessory can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

In addition, as in this control example, whether or not the preparatory drive is executed for the player by outputting a voice generated during the preparatory drive in a pseudo manner according to the timing at which the preparatory drive of the movable accessory can be executed. Can be made difficult to distinguish. As a result, in the case of executing the character effect that requires the preparatory drive, it is possible to suppress the determination of the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed for the player at the stage where the preparatory drive is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the operation effect is reduced.

In this control example, by outputting the sound generated when the preparatory drive is executed, it seems that the preparatory drive is executed even when the preparatory drive is not actually executed. By making it possible, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, but it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the player cannot easily determine whether or not the preparation drive is executed, for example, actually. The sound generated when the preparation drive is performed may be configured to output a sound (for example, a decorative sound effect) that is difficult for the player to identify. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the preparatory drive is being executed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect.

Further, in this control example, as described above, since it is difficult to visually confirm that the preparatory drive is executed, it is difficult to understand whether or not the preparatory drive is executed. Therefore, a pseudo voice is used. However, in addition to this, for example, when using a configuration in which it is possible to visually indicate that the preparatory drive is being executed, the preparatory drive is executed in addition to the pseudo audio output. It is necessary to take measures so that it cannot be visually determined. In this case, for example, when the preparation period during which the preparation drive can be executed is set, the covering movable member that covers the member that is movable by the preparation drive so as to be difficult for the player to see is provided regardless of whether or not the preparation drive is executed. It is good to provide it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually and audibly discriminating that the preparation drive is executed.

As described above, in this control example, the preparatory drive for the character effect (effect drive) of the movable accessory (tilting device 310) executed as the composite effect executed during the ending period is executed during the final round of the jackpot game. It is configured as follows. As a result, at the start of the ending period, the tilting device 310 is in a state where the preparatory drive is completed, that is, a state in which the operation of the operation pointer "2" of the ending scenario table 222ib2 is completed (see FIG. 586 (b)). Therefore, the operation effect period can be set longer during the ending period in which the predetermined period is set, as compared with the case where the preparation drive is executed from the start of the ending period.

Further, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes timing information for preparing and driving the movable accessory, and the display control device 114 transfers the accessory to the accessory control device 229. Since the command is configured to be output, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which the movable accessory is made to execute the preparatory drive, and when the execution timing is reached, the movable accessory is preliminarily driven. There is no need to output a command for the accessory to execute. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, the display control device 114 is configured to output a voice command to the voice output device 226 at the same time as outputting the character command to the character control device 229, corresponding to the execution period of the preparation drive of the movable character. Since the speaker 450 is configured to output the pseudo voice, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the voice generated during the preparation drive of the movable accessory.

In this control example, a composite effect executed during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but the timing at which the composite effect is executed is not limited to the jackpot game, and for example, to show the lottery result of a special symbol. The special map may be changing. In this case, when the technical idea of setting the character effect and the preparatory operation differently is used as the variation effect executed during the special figure variation, for example, the winning information stored on hold is preliminarily determined. Based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means, for example, when it is determined that the compound effect is to be executed in the special figure variation executed after two fluctuations, or the composite effect is not executed in the special figure variation executed in the two fluctuation degrees. In a part of the case where it is determined that the preparatory movement is executed, it is preferable to set the preparatory movement so that the preparatory movement is executed before the special figure fluctuation after the two fluctuations is executed.

Further, when a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory operation is provided for the operation means (frame button 22) when a specific operation is executed, and it is determined by the determination means to execute the preparatory operation. It may be configured to perform a preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable to configure the operation effect so that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is located at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, the probability that the composite effect is executed can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means, so that the player can operate the operating means more positively. Further, the operation timing to the operation means in which the above-mentioned determination means is used is, for example, an operation means as a suggestion effect suggesting a lottery result of the previous special figure change executed before the special figure change in which the operation effect is executed. As a result of operating the operation means, when the effect suggesting that the lottery result of the previous special figure fluctuation is out of order is executed, the determination means decides to execute the preparatory operation. Good to configure.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player operate the operating means for performing the preparatory operation without discomfort. Further, since it is possible to execute the preparatory operation of the movable accessory while the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the change in the previous special figure is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the movable accessory It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

<13th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 604 to 615. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 9th control example (and the 8th control example) described above, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change, the pachinko machine is reproduced according to the special figure change when the power supply is cut off. The configuration is such that the playback position of the BGM is backed up, and then, when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the playback of the BGM is started from the backed up playback position. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the special figure fluctuation that was being executed before the power was turned off was restarted as it was after the power was turned on again. Was there.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off during the execution of the special figure change and then the power is turned on again to restart the special figure change, the initial display control device 114 After the setting is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81), the variation display effect corresponding to the special figure variation interrupted by the power failure is started in a pseudo manner. It was configured to be. This pseudo variation display effect is also executed when the special figure variation restarted based on the power being turned on again ends before the completion of the initial setting. That is, during a predetermined period from the end of the initial setting, the first is not synchronized with the fluctuation start timing or stop timing of the actual special symbol fluctuation (variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37). 3 The configuration is such that the variable display effect that is pseudo-executed in the symbol display device 81 is executed. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the thirteenth control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned ninth control example, when the background change operation (pressing operation for the frame button 22a) is executed during the execution of the special figure change, the “silhouette display” is displayed at a predetermined ratio. It was configured to be selectable. This silhouette display is basically configured so that it is easier to set when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation than when it is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, so the degree of expectation of a jackpot depends on the presence or absence of the silhouette display. It has realized a novel game property that the player who wants to predict can be made to positively change the background mode while the special figure change is being executed. In other words, since it is configured so that the player can positively change the background mode, the effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the background mode) executed during the special figure change is also frequently changed. It was possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example is common to the 9th control example up to the point that the silhouette display can be set by executing the background change operation, but the suggestion content by this silhouette display Is different from the ninth control example. More specifically, in the thirteenth control example, silhouettes of a plurality of shapes (display modes) are provided, and the silhouettes are displayed according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouettes displayed during the execution of the variable display effect. It is configured to be able to suggest (notify) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display. With this configuration, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively execute the background change operation. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. In this thirteenth control example, the effect using the silhouette display is referred to as "silhouette notice effect".

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 9 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 604, in the thirteenth control example, the transition of the display mode in the BGM and the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation. explain. FIG. 604 (a) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation restarted after the power is turned on elapses after the initial setting period of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604 (a), in the thirteenth control example, among the special figure variation BGM composed of the A melody, the B melody, and the C melody, the end timing of the C melody and the initial stage of the display control device 114. The reproduction start position of the special figure variation BGM is set so as to match the end timing of the setting. FIG. 604 illustrates a case where the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end timing of the C melody of the special figure variation BGM are matched by starting the special figure variation BGM from the middle of the B melody. ing. By setting the playback start position of the BGM so that the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody of the BGM match, after that, the special figure fluctuation BGM is simply loop-played until the end of the fluctuation as in the normal time. Then, at the return timing of the display control device 114, the BGM can be started from the beginning of the special figure variation BGM. That is, the timing at which the initial setting is completed and the variation display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81 can be matched with the timing at which the BGM is reproduced from the beginning of the special symbol variation BGM. Therefore, the BGM in the special figure variation effect executed in the remaining variation time at the end of the initial setting can be reproduced in a natural voice mode. Therefore, a more suitable voice mode can be realized. Further, since it is not necessary to set the reproduction from the head position of the BGM at the end of the initial setting, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the initial setting of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

The end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 mainly changes according to the progress of the special figure change. The display control device 114 executes control to transfer images used for various effects to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 while performing the initial setting. Here, if the special figure change is not executed, only the transfer of the resident image needs to be executed, and the initial setting time is relatively short. However, if the special figure change is executed, the initial setting is completed. Sometimes, it is necessary to prepare image data used for variable display effect. Therefore, the more image data used for the special map fluctuation, the longer the period required for the initial setting. In this thirteenth control example, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, or after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or the supermarket using the most image data. The time required for initial setting varies depending on whether the reach has been developed. Specifically, before the reach development, the initial setting is completed in 1 second, but after the development to the normal reach, it takes 2 seconds for the initial setting, and after the super reach development, the initial setting is completed. It takes 4 seconds to complete. Therefore, in this thirteenth control example, the development status of the fluctuation display at the time of turning on the power is discriminated from the remaining fluctuation time and the fluctuation type, the period required for the initial setting is predicted, and the predicted initial setting period is met. The configuration is such that the start timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM is set. As a result, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the special figure variation BGM can be surely matched.

FIG. 604 (b) is a diagram showing the transition of the BGM and the display mode when the special figure fluctuation interrupted when the power is turned off and restarted after the power is turned on is completed before the initial setting is completed. FIG. 604 (b) illustrates a case where the special figure change is executed in a situation where at least one holding ball is present when the power is cut off. As shown in FIG. 604 (b), when the power is turned on again and the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the end timing of the initial setting is predicted, and the BGM ends according to the predicted end timing. Playback start position is set. That is, similarly to FIG. 604 (a), since the reproduction is started from the middle of the B melody, the end timing of the initial setting and the end timing of the C melody coincide with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 604 (b), when the special figure change ends during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114, the special figure based on the reserved ball (held ball 1) held at the time of power failure. Figure variation (variation display of the first symbol in the first display device 37) is started. FIG. 604 (b) illustrates a case where the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation display based on the reserved ball 1 (maintenance 1) is later than the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. 604 (b), the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the hold ball 1 at the time of power failure continues across the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. do. On the other hand, as a display mode of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 604 (b), the screen during the initial setting (image at power-on) continues to be displayed until the initial setting is completed. Based on the completion of the initial setting (it is possible to display a normal image), first, a pseudo deviation display for 1 second is executed. This is a variation for simulating the result of the variation display interrupted when the power is cut off (the result was shown in the first symbol display device 37 during the initial setting) in the third symbol display device 81. It is a display effect. By executing this pseudo-variation effect, the result (comparison) of the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the simple variation display by the power-on variation image in the third symbol display device 81, which ended during the execution of the initial setting. It is possible to notify the player who overlooked the result of the variation display in a mode that is difficult to confirm) in a mode that is easier to visually recognize. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player understand the result of the special figure change during execution when the power is turned off. If the lottery result of the special figure change that was being executed when the power was turned off was a big hit, the fluctuation period of the special figure change that was restarted after the power was turned on has elapsed (that is, during the execution of the initial setting). ) Since the jackpot is started (there is no room to execute the pseudo fluctuation), even if the pseudo fluctuation is not executed, the player may be suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure. not.

As shown in FIG. 604 (b), after the pseudo fluctuation display for 1 second is completed, the fluctuation display of the third symbol is executed in the remaining fluctuation time. With this configuration, both the result of the variation display that ended during the execution of the initial setting in the display control device 114 and the result of the variation display that started during the execution of the initial setting are displayed to the player. It can be easily understood.

If the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 1 second (the fluctuation time elapses during the execution of the pseudo fluctuation), the fluctuation that was being executed when the power was turned off. After the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the display is executed, the pseudo-variation for 1 second corresponding to the hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. If the residual variation time of the variation display started during the execution of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the pseudo variation corresponding to the variation display that was being executed at the time of power failure was executed over the residual variation time. Later, a one-second pseudo-variation corresponding to hold 1 when the power is turned off is executed. With such a configuration, the pseudo-variation can be more preferably executed.

<Electrical configuration in the 13th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 605 (a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 605 (a), in the configuration of ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example, the background notice selection table 222ga is deleted with respect to the configuration of ROM 222 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558 (a)). The difference is that a silhouette notice selection table 222ja is provided instead. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 9th control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The silhouette notice selection table 222ja is a data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect in the thirteenth control example. Here, as described above, the silhouette notice effect in the thirteenth control example is the latter half of the variation display according to the shape (display mode) of the silhouette displayed by the background change operation during the execution of the variation display effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in (predetermined period). More specifically, as the silhouette mode (shape) that can be displayed in the silhouette notice effect in the 13th control example, a bubble-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a bubble and a fish-shaped silhouette that imitates the shape of a fish (FIG. 560 (a). ), A wooden silhouette imitating the shape of a tree (see FIG. 560 (b)), and a volcanic silhouette imitating the shape of a volcano. Each of these silhouettes suggests the type of advance notice effect (notice type) executed in the latter half of the variable display. That is, the bubble-shaped silhouette suggests that a bubble warning effect in which a large number of bubbles are generated in the display screen is executed when developing into super reach, and the fish-shaped silhouette develops into super reach. It suggests that a school of fish will be announced when the school of fish crosses the display screen, and the wooden silhouette shows the display mode in which the tree sways due to strong wind when it develops into super reach. The volcanic silhouette suggests that the notice effect will be executed, and the volcanic silhouette suggests that the eruption notice effect will be executed, which shows the display mode in which the mountain erupts when developing into super reach. be.

The bubble notice effect and the fish school notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the sea mode, and the wind advance notice effect and the eruption advance notice effect are for exclusive use when the background mode is set to the mountain mode. It is a notice production of. The fish school notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the bubble notice effect (the rate of selection is low in the case of deviation fluctuation), and the eruption notice effect is a notice effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the wind notice effect. Is. The bubble notice effect and the wind notice are configured to have the same jackpot expectation when executed, and the fish school notice effect and the eruption notice effect are also configured to have the same jackpot expectation. ing. For this reason, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect in which the bubble warning effect is set, the variable display effect is switched to the wind notice effect, and the wind notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background by performing the background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the variable display effect, the display is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the bubble notice effect. In addition, if the background is changed to the mountain background by performing a background change operation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the fluctuation display effect in which the fish school notice effect is set, the change is switched to the variation display effect accompanied by the eruption notice effect, and the change in which the eruption notice effect is set. If the background is changed to the sea background during the high-speed fluctuation period in the display effect, the display effect is switched to the variable display effect accompanied by the fish school notice effect. The details of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja for selecting the effect mode of the silhouette notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 606.

FIG. 606 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 606, in the silhouette notice selection table 222ja in the thirteenth control example, the type of the silhouette notice effect to be selected is defined in association with each range of the value of the effect counter 223h. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 606, for the variable display effect in which the advance notice type that does not accompany the development to super reach is set, regardless of the background mode after being changed by the background change operation, A silhouette notice "none" is specified in association with the entire range that the effect counter 223h can take. Therefore, if the player performs the background change operation while the variable display effect of the effect mode that does not accompany the development to super reach is executed, the silhouette notice effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the bubble notice super reach, the effect counter. The value of 223h is specified in the range of "0 to 149" in association with the silhouette notice "none", and in the range of "150 to 198", the silhouette notice effect of the "bubble type silhouette" is specified in association with it. There is. Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the bubble warning super reach, the bubble-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a bubble notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to positively change the background mode for the player who wants to confirm the silhouette notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the sea mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the fish school notice super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 179", and a silhouette notice effect of a "fish-shaped silhouette" is associated with a value of "180 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the sea mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the fish school notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the fish-shaped silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 9.5% (19/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a fish school notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, the silhouette notice effect is achieved by configuring the super reach effect with the fish school notice effect, which has a relatively high expectation of being a big hit, at a lower execution rate than the super reach effect with the bubble notice effect. If this does not occur, it can be expected that the fish school notice effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the silhouette effect is executed and the type of the silhouette, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the wind warning super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 99", and a silhouette notice effect of a "wooden silhouette" is associated with a value of "100 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the variable display is accompanied by the wind warning super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the wooden silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 50.2% (100/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by a wind notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the wind notice super reach is higher than the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the bubble notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As shown in FIG. 606, for the situation where the background mode after the change by the background change operation is the mountain mode and the fluctuation display during execution is the fluctuation display accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the effect counter 223h is used. A silhouette notice "none" is associated with a value in the range of "0 to 149", and a silhouette notice effect of a "volcanic silhouette" is associated with a value of "150 to 198". Therefore, if the mode is changed to the mountain mode by the background change operation and the fluctuation display is accompanied by the eruption notice super reach, the silhouette notice effect that the volcano type silhouette is displayed at a rate of about 24.6% (49/199). Is executed. By executing the silhouette notice effect, it is possible to make the player understand that it will develop into a super reach accompanied by an eruption notice, so that the player's expectation for a big hit can be improved. In addition, since the ratio of the silhouette notice effect to the eruption notice super reach is higher than the rate of occurrence of the silhouette notice effect for the fish school notice super reach in the sea mode, see more silhouette notice effects. It is possible to have the player who wants to perform the background change operation to the mountain mode positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the player performs the background change operation during the execution of the variable display effect in which the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, it is predetermined for each type of the advance notice effect. At a certain rate, the silhouette notice effect that suggests the execution of the notice effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to know whether or not the advance notice effect has been executed and the type of the advance notice effect before the advance notice effect is started. The background can be changed. Further, in the thirteenth control example, when the silhouette notice effect occurs, it is confirmed that the super reach, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit, is developed. Expectations can be improved. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed after that in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, the silhouette notice effect can also indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 605 (b), the details of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 605 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 605 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the thirteenth control example has a pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja and a pseudo fluctuation time with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example (see FIG. 558 (b)). The only difference is that the counter 223jb and the silhouette lottery flag 223jc have been added.

The pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is the number of fluctuation displays in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol (excluding the fluctuation image when the power is turned on) is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 among the fluctuation displays executed after the power is turned on again. It is a counter for counting (the number of executions of pseudo-variation). The pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is incremented by 1 each time a stop command is received (at the fluctuation stop timing) during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 (see Z2277 in FIG. 607), and the pseudo fluctuation effect is produced. Each time it is executed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see Z2316 in FIG. 610 and Z2560 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223j is 1 or more, a new pseudo-variation is executed every time the variation or the pseudo-variation ends.

The pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation effect. At the start of the pseudo fluctuation, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set in the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2315, Z2321 in FIG. 610, Z2257, Z2259 in FIG. 612). When the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223jb becomes 0, and when the value of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 1 or more, the execution of the pseudo-variation is set. On the other hand, if the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb becomes 0 during the execution of the fluctuation display, the normal fluctuation display is executed for the remaining fluctuation time, and the pseudo fluctuation time counter is in the fluctuation stop state (pending out state). When the value of 223jb becomes 0, the fluctuation is stopped as it is.

The silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is a flag for indicating whether or not the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222ja has been executed in the variable display of 1. If this silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is on, it means that the lottery using the silhouette notice selection table 222ja has already been executed in the variable display during execution, and if it is off, it means that it has not been executed. means. The initial value of the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to off, and is set to on at the timing when the background change operation is first performed during the execution of the variation display (see Z2896 in FIG. 613). It is also set to off when the fluctuation is stopped (see Z2280 in FIG. 607).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 607 to 615, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. First, the fluctuation stop processing 13 (Z2246) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 607. The fluctuation stop process 13 (Z2246) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example, and is the same as the fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 564). This is a process for setting the stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 81.

Of the fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 is the same as each processing of Z2265 to Z2269 of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 564) in the ninth control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the fluctuation stop process 13 (see FIG. 607) in the thirteenth control example, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265), and the process shifts to Z2266. When the processing of Z2269 is completed, the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and the processing is shifted to Z2273.

In the processing of Z2273, the value of the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg is cleared to 0 (Z2273), and then it is determined whether or not the return fluctuation flag 223ff is on (Z2275). If it is determined in the processing of Z2275 that the return-changing flag 223ff is off (Z2275: No), the processing is shifted to Z2280. On the other hand, in the process of Z2275, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223ff is on (Z2275: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot stop symbol is set (Z2276). When it is determined that the jackpot stop symbol is set in the processing of Z2276 (Z2276: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is cleared to 0 (Z2278), and the return fluctuation flag 223ff is set to off (Z2278). Z2279), the process shifts to Z2280.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2276, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the jackpot is not set (Z2276: No), it is determined that the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2277), and the process shifts to Z2280. In the processing of Z2280, the silhouette lottery flag 223jc is set to off (Z2280), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 607), the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja can be added by 1 each time the first symbol that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed during the initial setting of the display control device 114. Therefore, it is possible to accurately execute the pseudo-variation effect for the number of deviation fluctuations executed during the initial setting after the initial setting is completed. Therefore, after the initial setting is completed, the variation display that was being executed when the power is turned off and the variation display of the third symbol that is the same number of times as the variation display based on the reserved ball when the power is turned off are displayed to the player. Can be done at. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being suspicious that the lottery result has been discarded due to the power failure, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, the fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 608. The fluctuation return processing 13 (Z2262) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the fluctuation recovery process (see FIG. 541), and the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). ) Is the process for executing the control according to the return variation command received from the main control device 110, as in the variation return process (see FIG. 541).

Of the fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2281 to Z2284, the fluctuation recovery processing (see FIG. 541) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) Z2281 to Z2181 to The same process as each process of Z2284 is executed. Further, in the fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608) in the thirteenth control example, when the processing of Z2284 is completed, the difference between the remaining fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation recovery command and the fluctuation type (variation time) is next. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the residual variation time corresponds to the normal reach effect (Z2331), and if it is determined to be the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2231: Yes), the special figure variation. BGM is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 2 seconds before the end of the music (Z2332), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2331 that it is not the residual variation time corresponding to the execution of the normal reach effect (Z2331: No), then whether or not it is the residual variation time corresponding to the super reach effect is determined. If it is determined (Z2333) and it is determined that the super reach effect is in progress (Z2333: Yes), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is set to be played from the playback position corresponding to 4 seconds before the end of the music (Z2333: Yes). Z2334), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2333 that the super reach effect is not being executed (Z2333: No), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation is reproduced from the reproduction position corresponding to 1 second before the end of the music. Set to (Z2335) to end this process.

By executing this fluctuation return processing 13 (see FIG. 608), the BGM of the special figure fluctuation can be terminated at the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114. That is, the display mode of the special figure variation is before the reach development where the image data used is relatively small, after the normal reach development where the image data used is relatively large, or after the super reach development where the image data used is the most. By making the start timing of the special figure variation BGM different depending on the case, it is possible to surely match the end timing of the initial setting with the end timing of the special figure variation BGM.

Next, the display rising process 13 (Z2247) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 609. The display rising process 13 (Z2247) is a process executed in place of the display rising process (see FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the display rising process 13 (and the eighth control example). ), This is a process for setting the variation display of the third symbol according to the value of the remaining variation time counter when the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed, as in the display rise process (see FIG. 542). ..

Of the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299, the display rise processing (FIG. 542) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2291 to Z2294 and Z2296 to Z2299 of (see) is executed. Further, in the display rise processing 13 (see FIG. 609) in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined that the return changing flag 223ff is ON in the processing of S2291 (Z2291: Yes), then the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is used. When it is determined whether or not the value is larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Z2301) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is determined to be larger than 0 (Z2301: Yes), the display control device 114 Since it means that the special figure change has been completed at least once during the initial setting, the pseudo change start process for starting the pseudo change effect indicating the result of the special figure change completed during the initial setting is performed. Execute (Z2302) to end this process. The details of this pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described later with reference to FIG. 610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 in the processing of Z2301 (Z2301: No), the processing is shifted to Z2292.

Next, with reference to FIG. 610, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation start process (Z2302) is a process for starting a pseudo-variation effect indicating the result of the special figure variation completed during the initial setting. As shown in FIG. 610, when the pseudo-variation start processing (Z2302) is executed, first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2311), and the balance specified from the read-out residual fluctuation time counter 223fg value. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 0 (Z2312).

If it is determined in the processing of Z2312 that the residual variation time is not 0 (Z2312: No), then it is determined whether or not the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2313). When it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2313 (Z2313: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2312 (Z2312: Yes), 1 The start of the pseudo-variation effect for one second is set (Z2314), and the counter value corresponding to one second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2315). Next, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2316), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2313, when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2313: No), then it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317), and the residual fluctuation is performed. If it is determined that the time is 1 second or less (Z2317: No), it means that the remaining fluctuation time is not sufficient to perform the pseudo fluctuation, so the display of the power recovery screen (image when the power is turned on) is continued. Is set (Z2318), 1 is added to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja to update (Z2319), and the process shifts to Z2231. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2317, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 1 second (Z2317: Yes), if the pseudo fluctuation of 1 second is set, the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the pseudo fluctuation is set. Is less than 1 second, and there is not enough time left to perform the special figure fluctuation. Therefore, the start of the pseudo fluctuation over the remaining fluctuation time is set (Z2320), and the process is shifted to Z2321. In the processing of Z2231 executed after the processing of Z2319 or Z2320, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2321), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-variation start processing (see FIG. 610), the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting is notified in an easy-to-understand manner in the form of a pseudo-variation effect by the third symbol after the completion of the initial setting. can do. Therefore, it is possible to realize a production that is easier for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 611, the details of the variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) in the thirteenth control example will be described. The variation display setting process 13 (Z2185) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). 8 This is a process for executing control according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, as in the variation display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) in the control example).

Of the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534, the variation in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z2501 to Z2503, Z2505 to Z2509, and Z2531 to Z2534 of the display setting process 8 (see FIG. 543) are executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 611) in the thirteenth control example, after the processing of the Z2503 is completed, a detailed variation display mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display is performed. The variation pattern command setting process for setting the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the embodiment is executed (Z2521), and the process is transferred to Z2535. The details of this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 612.

FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command setting process (Z2521). In this fluctuation pattern command setting process (Z2521), first, the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation type extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is set in the remaining fluctuation time counter 223fg (Z2551), and then the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is set. If it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552) and the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2552: Yes), the variation according to the extracted variation pattern is determined. A display mode is selected (Z2553), a display variation pattern command indicating the selected variation display mode is set (Z2554), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2552, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja is a value larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2552: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time indicated by the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg It is determined whether or not is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555), and if it is determined that it is 2 seconds or less (Z2555: No), if a pseudo-variation effect of 1 second is set, after the pseudo-variation ends. Since the remaining fluctuation time becomes insufficiently long for performing the fluctuation display effect, a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the pseudo variation effect of the variation time over the remaining variation time is set (Z2556). Next, a counter value corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is set for the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb (Z2557), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2555, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is longer than 2 seconds (Z2555: Yes), even if the pseudo fluctuation effect for 1 second is executed, it is sufficient (at least 1) after the pseudo fluctuation is completed. Since a time (longer than a second) can be secured as the fluctuation time, a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of a pseudo fluctuation for 1 second is set (Z2558). Next, a counter value corresponding to one second is set in the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2559), and the value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2560), and this process is terminated.

By executing this variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 612), the variation display mode can be preferably set in consideration of the remaining number of pseudo variations at the start of the variation.

Next, the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 613. This background change process 13 (Z2541) is a process executed in place of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, and is the same as the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example. In addition, when a background change operation is performed, it is a process for setting a background change according to the timing of the operation.

Of the background change processes 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, the processes Z2963 to Z2967 are the same as the processes Z2963 to Z2967 of the background change process 9 (see FIG. 563) in the ninth control example, respectively. Processing is executed. Further, in the background change process 13 (see FIG. 613) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2967 or the process of Z2968 is completed, it is nextly determined whether or not the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is on (Z2981). , If it is determined that the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is off (Z2981: No), it means that the lottery for the silhouette notice effect has not been executed in the variable display being executed this time, so the lottery for the silhouette notice effect. And the process for making the setting (each process of Z2982 to Z2986) is executed. More specifically, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2982), and the silhouette advance notice mode corresponding to the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is selected from the silhouette advance notice selection table 222ja (Z2983).

When the processing of Z2983 is completed, the silhouette lottery completed flag 223jc is then set to ON (Z2984), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the silhouette notice effect by the processing of Z2983 is the result indicating the execution of the silhouette notice effect. (Z2985). In the process of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating the execution of the silhouette notice (Z2896: Yes), a display silhouette notice command indicating the execution of the selected silhouette notice effect is set (Z2896), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2985, if it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating "none" of the silhouette notice effect (Z2985: No), the processing of Z2896 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this background change process 13 (see FIG. 613), a lottery for the silhouette notice effect can be executed based on the initial background change operation during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, since the player who has confirmed the silhouette notice effect can have a feeling of expectation for the big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the counter update process 13 (Z2177) in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 614. The counter update process 13 (Z2177) is a process executed in place of the counter update process (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example), and is a process executed in place of the ninth control example (and the eighth control example). ) Is the same as the counter update process (see FIG. 552), which is a process for updating various counters.

Of the counter update processes 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, in each of the processes Z2861 to Z2866, the counter update processes (see FIG. 552) in the ninth control example (and the eighth control example) are Z2861 to Z261 to each. The same process as each process of Z2866 is executed. Further, in the counter update process 13 (see FIG. 614) in the thirteenth control example, when the process of Z2864 or Z2865 is completed, the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is next to a value larger than 0 (1 or more). If the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is 0 (Z2871: No), the process shifts to Z2866.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2871, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is larger than 0 (1 or more) (Z2871: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation time counter 223jb is subtracted by 1 (Z2872). ), It is determined whether the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223jb after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2873). In the processing of Z2873, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction is 0 (Z2873: Yes), whether to execute the pseudo fluctuation or the normal fluctuation display according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja. Pseudo-variation setting processing for determining is executed (Z2874), and the processing is transferred to Z2875. The details of this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2873) will be described later with reference to FIG. 615. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2873 that the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb after subtraction is not 0 (Z2873: No), the processing of Z2874 is skipped and the processing is shifted to Z2875.

Next, with reference to FIG. 615, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) will be described. As described above, this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874) is a process for determining whether to execute the pseudo-variation or to execute the normal variation display according to the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja. In this pseudo-variation setting process (Z2874), first, the value of the residual fluctuation time counter 223fg is read out (Z2881), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 (Z2882).

If it is determined that the value of the read pseudo-variation counter 223ja is 0 in the processing of Z2882 (Z2882: Yes), then whether or not the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the counter value read in the processing of Z2881 is 0. Is determined (Z2883). In the processing of Z2883, if it is determined that the remaining variation time is not 0 (Z2883: No), the execution of the variation display over the residual variation time is set (Z2884), and the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2884). Z2885), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 in the processing of Z2883, it means that the gaming state of the actual pachinko machine 10 is the fluctuation stop state, so that the execution of the fluctuation display is not set. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2882, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja is not 0 (1 or more) (Z2882: No), then whether or not the remaining variation time is longer than 2 seconds. (Z2886), and if it is determined that the residual variation time is 2 seconds or less (Z2886: No), it is determined whether or not the residual variation time is 0 (Z2887). If it is determined in the processing of Z2887 that the residual variation time is not 0 (Z2888: No), the start of the pseudo variation over the residual variation time is set (Z2888), and the residual variation time is set with respect to the pseudo variation time counter 223jb. The counter value corresponding to (Z2889) is set, and the process shifts to Z2893.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual variation time is longer than 2 seconds in the processing of Z2886 (Z2886: Yes), and when it is determined that the residual variation time is 0 in the processing of Z2887 (Z2887: Yes). The start of the pseudo-variation effect for 1 second is set (Z2890), and the counter value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the pseudo-variation time counter 223jb (Z2891). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the pseudo-variation counter 223ja (Z2892), and the process shifts to Z2893. In the processing of Z2893, the start of the special figure variation BGM is set (Z2893), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pseudo fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 615), when the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation has elapsed, the pseudo fluctuation is set again according to the value of the pseudo fluctuation counter 223ja, or the normal fluctuation display is displayed. You can accurately determine whether to execute it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, the power supply is cut off during the execution of the special symbol variation, and then the power is turned on again to perform the special symbol variation (the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37). When the variable display) is restarted, it is restarted when the power is turned on after the initial setting of the display control device 114 is completed (that is, after the normal display effect can be executed on the third symbol display device 81). The configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation display effect showing the result of the special figure variation. In other words, the configuration is such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a pseudo-variation effect asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the fluctuation display of the first symbol that is restarted based on the power-on. With this configuration, by confirming the pseudo variation display executed in the third symbol display device 81 after the initial setting is completed, the result of the variation display executed when the power is cut off can be played. It can be easily understood by a person. Further, in accordance with this, in the thirteenth control example, the playback start position of the BGM at the time of turning on the power is set so that the last part of the melody of the special figure fluctuation BGM ends when the initial setting is completed. bottom. With this configuration, it is possible to perform reproduction from the first part of the special figure fluctuation BGM at the timing of starting the pseudo fluctuation. Therefore, since the pseudo fluctuation can be made to appear as if it is a normal fluctuation display, the result of the fluctuation display that was executed before the power failure occurred is notified to the player without causing a sense of discomfort. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the special figure fluctuation interrupted due to the power off is executed without being discarded after the power is turned on again, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the execution of the variation display, if a specific condition is satisfied, a silhouette notice effect that can suggest the establishment of the specific condition is predetermined. It was configured to be feasible at the rate of. More specifically, the background is changed to determine whether or not the silhouette notice effect can be executed, which suggests (notifies) the type of advance notice effect (type of reach effect) to be executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable display according to the display mode of the silhouette display. The lottery is based on the fact that the operation has been executed. With this configuration, when the silhouette advance notice effect is executed, the type of the advance notice effect can be known in advance before the advance notice effect is started, so that the player can positively know the type of the advance notice effect. The background change operation can be executed. Also, when the silhouette display is set, it is confirmed that it will develop into a reach production, so for players who want to know at an early stage whether or not a reach production (a production with high expectations for big hits) will be executed. On the other hand, the background change operation can be executed more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different depending only on the type of the notice effect. That is, the silhouette advance notice effect is selected regardless of whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a miss. With such a configuration, even if the silhouette notice effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for the jackpot from being impaired. Further, in the thirteenth control example, the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect is higher when the background mode is changed to the mountain mode than when the background mode is changed to the sea mode. There is. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect of the player's preference and performing the game. In addition, since the silhouette advance notice effect is configured to notify the type of the advance notice effect of the super reach to be executed in advance, the silhouette can be maintained by maintaining the background mode after knowing the type of the advance notice effect by the silhouette advance notice effect. By executing the notice effect notified by the notice effect as it is, or by performing the background change operation again (during the high-speed fluctuation period), the background after the change corresponding to the notice effect notified by the silhouette notice effect is supported. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect is different between the sea mode and the mountain mode, but the execution rate of the silhouette notice effect may be the same. With such a configuration, the specified contents of the silhouette notice selection table 222ja can be simplified, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the thirteenth control example, the possibility of executing the silhouette advance notice effect and the type of the silhouette are selected only according to whether or not the advance notice effect of a specific type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the execution ratio of the silhouette notice effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a big hit. With this configuration, the silhouette notice effect can also indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the player can be made to perform the background change operation more positively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, when the power is cut off and the power is turned on again during the execution of the special figure change, the end timing of the initial setting of the display control device 114 and the end of the special figure change BGM are reproduced. In order to match the timing, the end timing of the initial setting is determined when the power is turned on, and the playback start position of the special figure variation BGM is adjusted (variable) according to the determination result, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the reproduction start position may be adjusted so that the special figure change BGM ends in accordance with the end timing of the special figure change restarted when the power is turned on.

In the thirteenth control example, the number of special figure fluctuations completed during the execution of the initial setting of the display control device 114 is counted, and after the initial setting is completed, a pseudo variation display effect for the number of counts is performed. The configuration is such that the three symbol display devices 81 are sequentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the completion of the initial setting, the result of the special figure variation for the number of counts may be collectively notified by the pseudo variation display effect of 1. More specifically, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided by at least the number of counts, and in each of the divided display areas, the result of the special figure change completed during the execution of the initial setting is obtained. It may be configured to execute the pseudo-variation display shown. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the effect time of the pseudo-variation effect for notifying the result of the special figure variation that ended during the execution of the initial setting, so that the normal third symbol variation can be performed earlier. The display can be returned to an executable state.

In this thirteenth control example, the silhouette notice effect is developed into a specific type of reach effect (bubble notice super reach, fish school notice super reach, wind notice super reach, eruption notice super reach) in the variable display during execution. Although it was configured to be executed as an effect for notifying in advance, the target to be notified by the silhouette notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the silhouette advance notice effect may be executed not only when there is a holding ball that develops into a reach effect to be targeted in the pending variation display as well as the variable display being executed. With this configuration, not only the variable display that is being executed when the silhouette notice effect is executed, but also the reserved ball at the time when the silhouette notice effect is executed can be expected, so that the game can be played. It is possible to maintain a person's expectation for a big hit for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the thirteenth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is restarted based on the power-on, the period required for the initial setting of the display control device 114 is predicted, and the special figure change BGM ends in the predicted period. , The configuration was such that the start position of the special figure fluctuation BGM when the power was turned on was set, but in addition to this, when the end timing of the actual initial setting deviates from the prediction result, the initial screen (display of the image when the power is turned on). By extending the period), it may be configured to match the end timing of the special figure fluctuation BGM. With this configuration, the end timing of the special figure variation BGM and the end timing of the initial screen can be more reliably matched.

<14th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 to 625. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example described above, the movable member (for example, the tilting device 310) is moved from the display control device 114 with respect to the accessory control device 229 for executing the motion control for the movable member. It was configured to output a command. Then, the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 at the start timing of the effect period is a command for causing the accessory control device 229 to execute the preparatory operation (the accessory). It was configured to include information indicating the timing to output the command), and the display control device 114 was configured to determine whether or not it was the execution timing of the preparatory operation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example, the timing for outputting the command for executing the preparatory operation is set in advance in the display data table, and when reading the drawing contents from the display data table, the drawing contents are read. , The configuration is such that the command for the accessory is output by reading the information indicating the output of the command. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a timer means or the like for timing the timing of outputting the command for the accessory, so that the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified.

Further, in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs and the line of the reach line or the like before the reach effect occurs. When the reach effect occurs, the expectation of the big hit increases, and as the reach line increases, the expectation of the big hit increases, so pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and let the game play. Can be done.

First, the contents of the reach line suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 616 and 617. This reach line suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. As shown in FIG. 616 (a), when the reach line suggestion effect is executed, first, a character imitating a dinosaur is placed behind the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. 810 is displayed, and a balloon image 810a imitating a balloon is displayed on the right side of the character 810. In this balloon image 810a, the characters "The more the same numbers are lined up, the higher the expectation!" Are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the advance notice effect in which the numbers are lined up is executed and that the degree of expectation changes depending on how the numbers are lined up. In this reach line suggestion effect, an effect is executed in which the nine numbers are divided into three times and displayed inside the balloon image 810a. Of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, two numbers are aligned vertically, so that the expectation is higher than the double line reach effect (the effect is higher than the single line reach effect). It is confirmed that it will develop into the production of or become a big hit. In addition, out of the nine numbers displayed inside the balloon image 810a, three numbers are aligned vertically, which leads to a triple-line reach effect (a production with higher expectations than a double-line reach effect). It is decided that it will be done or that it will be a big hit. Furthermore, it is confirmed that a big hit will be achieved by aligning three numbers horizontally. In this way, since the reach line suggestion effect can suggest the reach line of the reach effect that develops after that, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the reach line suggestion effect and play the game. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the following figures, in order to make the content of the effect easy to understand, the description of the image (dashed line arrow pointing to the left) showing the third symbol during high-speed fluctuation is omitted.

FIG. 616 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the first three numbers out of the nine numbers are displayed in the reach line suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 616 (b), the first three numbers are displayed side by side on the upper side of the balloon image 810a. FIG. 616 (b) illustrates a state in which an image imitating the number "7", an image imitating the number "6", and an image imitating the number "5" are displayed.

FIG. 617 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which all nine numbers are displayed and three identical numbers are vertically aligned. As shown in FIG. 617 (a), when the same numbers are aligned, the effect image 810b surrounding the same numbers is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the numbers are aligned and the number of aligned numbers. If two or more numbers are aligned in the reach line suggestion effect, the mode shifts to the dedicated background mode according to the number of aligned numbers. Specifically, the "super sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line by aligning two identical numbers vertically. (In the case of), or shift to the "super mountain mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is the mountain mode). In addition, by aligning the same three numbers vertically or horizontally, the "premium sea mode" (the background mode at the time of execution of the reach line suggestion effect is the sea mode) corresponding to the effect of expectation higher than the reach effect of the triple line. (Case), or shift to "Premium Mountain Mode" (when the background mode at the time of executing the reach line suggestion effect is Mountain Mode). In addition, in "Super Sea Mode" and "Super Mountain Mode", there is a low probability that it will develop into a single line reach production with lower expectations than a double line reach production, but this background mode and the reach that occurs Patterns that are inconsistent with the type of are selected only in the case of a jackpot. Similarly, if you move to "Premium Sea Mode" or "Premium Mountain Mode" but do not develop into Triple Reach (developed to Single Reach or Double Reach), the jackpot will be confirmed. In this way, the single reach effect and double reach effect, in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively low in normal times, are confirmed when the big hit occurs under specific conditions. Therefore, the reach after the background mode is promoted in the reach line suggestion effect. You can play the game by paying attention to the number of lines. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 617 (b) shows a display mode in the case of shifting to the premium sea mode by aligning three numbers vertically in the reach line suggestion effect executed in the sea mode. In this premium sea mode, as shown in FIG. 617 (b), the characters "premium sea mode" are displayed for the mode display area Dm1a. Further, as shown in FIG. 617 (b), when the "premium sea mode" is entered, the three effective lines of the vertical effective line L1 in the center of the screen, the upward-sloping effective line L2, and the downward-sloping effective line L3 It develops into a triple reach production that takes reach. As mentioned above, the triple reach production has a higher expectation of being a big hit than the single reach production and the double reach production (the ratio of being selected in the case of a loss is low), so that the player has a feeling of expectation for the big hit. Can be improved. As described above, the reach line suggestion effect is not only an effect suggesting the number of reach lines, but also an effect suggesting promotion of the rear mode (mode promotion effect).

<Electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 618, the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 618 is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 618, the configuration of ROM 222 in the 14th control example differs from the configuration of ROM 222 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 584) only in that the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is added. do. This mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is a data table referred to for selecting an effect mode (the number of the same numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) of the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect). The details of this mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620.

FIG. 619 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 619 (a), the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka has a hit table 222ka1 for selecting whether or not the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed and the effect mode in the variable display of the jackpot. And, in the variation display of the deviation, at least the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed, and the disengagement table 222ka2 for selecting the effect mode is composed of at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 619 (b), the defined contents of the winning table 222ka1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 619 (b), the hit table 222ka1 has a range of values of the effect counter 223h and an effect mode (numbers aligned in the balloon image 810a) for each number of reach lines when the reach effect is developed. The correspondence with the aspect) is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit fluctuation in which the single line reach occurs, the mode promotion effect “none” is used as the effect mode for the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “0 to 149”. Is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 149", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 150, so in the jackpot fluctuation where the single line reach effect is set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 75.4% (150/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h corresponds to the range of "150 to 192" as the effect mode. It is specified with. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "150 to 192", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is also displayed vertically. A mode (separate) that is not lined up side by side is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 43, so a jackpot with a single-line reach effect set. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the looseness is executed is about 21.6% (43/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "193,194", and the effect mode is "two vertical alignments". It is specified in association with each other. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "193,194", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "two vertical alignments" is two, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 1% (2/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "195" of the effect counter 223h is defined by associating "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. ing. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "195", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and three same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "3 vertical sets" is 1, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, the value "196 to 198" of the effect counter 223h is associated with "3 horizontal alignment" as the effect mode. It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the single line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "196 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "horizontal 3 sets" is 4, so a single-line reach effect was set. In the jackpot fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 2% (4/199).

As described above, in the reach effect in which the reach of the single line occurs, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 3/4 (it is difficult to execute the mode promotion effect). Therefore, when the mode promotion effect is executed, the player can expect the reach effect of the double line or the triple line, which has a high expectation of a big hit, to occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit fluctuation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "0 to 99". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 100, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the double line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 50.2% (100/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "100 to 119" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 119", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "120 to 189" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "120 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 70, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is executed is about 35.2% (70/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined as "190" in association with "three vertical alignments" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "190", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same numbers are aligned vertically. The aspect is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 1, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 0.5% (1/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the double line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "191 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "191 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 8, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4% (8/199).

As described above, in the hit variation in which the double line reach effect occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher (about 25% → about 50%) than in the hit variation in which the single line reach effect occurs. Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, two vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 10% of the staggered modes are also selected. Therefore, even when the disparity is displayed, the player can be expected to produce an expectation higher than the reach effect of the double line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 619 (b), in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the mode promotion effect "None" is associated with the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 49". It is stipulated. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "0 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is not executed. Of the 199 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the effect mode "none" is 50, so in the jackpot fluctuation with the triple line reach effect set. , The rate at which the mode promotion effect is not executed is about 25.1% (50/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69" as the effect mode. That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "50 to 69", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the gap is displayed. To. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "bare eyes" is 20, so a jackpot with a double-line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of the loose eyes is executed is about 10% (20/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "70 to 99" as the effect mode of "two vertical alignments". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "70 to 99", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed and the same number is vertically 2. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 2" is 30, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the ratio of executing the mode promotion effect of two vertical lines is about 15.1% (30/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "100 to 189" as the effect mode of "alignment of three vertical pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "100 to 189", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 vertically. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "vertical 3" is 90, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three vertical lines is executed is about 45.2% (90/199).

Further, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the value of the effect counter 223h is defined in association with the range of "190 to 198" as the effect mode of "alignment of three horizontal pieces". That is, in the jackpot fluctuation where the double line reach effect occurs, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223h is "190 to 198", the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) is executed, and the same number is 3 horizontally. The mode of assortment is displayed. Of the 199 possible values of the production lottery counter 223h, the number of counter values (random values) associated with the production mode "horizontal 3" is 9, so a jackpot with a triple line reach effect. In the fluctuation, the rate at which the mode promotion effect of three horizontal lines is executed is about 4.5% (9/199).

In this way, in the hit variation in which the reach effect of the triple line occurs, the execution rate of the mode promotion effect is higher than the hit variation in which the reach effect of the single line or the double line occurs (about 75%). Further, when the mode promotion effect is executed, three vertical effect modes are selected at a high rate, but about 25% of the staggered and two vertical mode are also selected. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to have a triple-line reach effect even when the mode promotion effect is displayed, which is a set of two vertical lines.

Next, with reference to FIG. 620, the details of the disengagement table 222ka2 constituting the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka will be described. As described above, the deviation table 222ka is a data table referred to for drawing whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect mode when the mode promotion effect is executed in the deviation variation. Similar to the hit table 222ka, the disengagement table 222ka defines the correspondence between the value range of the effect counter 223h and the effect mode for each number of reach lines.

As shown in FIG. 620, for the non-reach variable display effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the entire range (0 to 198) of the effect counter 223h. There is. Therefore, in the variable effect in which reach does not occur, the mode promotion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the single line, the mode promotion effect "None" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of "0 to 155". With respect to the range of "156 to 198", the effect mode of "separation" is defined in association with each other. That is, in the single-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 78.4% (156/199), and the mode of "separation" is performed at a rate of about 21.6% (43/199). The promotion effect is executed. In other words, the rate at which the "separate stitch" is selected is the same (21.6%) regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. In addition, only the percentage (about 3.5%) that the winning pattern (the production pattern that develops into a single reach with 2 or 3 verticals or the production pattern with 3 horizontals) is selected is out of order. The single-line reach effect has a lower execution rate of the mode promotion effect. In other words, if the production mode of "bare eyes" is set and develops into a single-line reach production, it will be difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion production mode, so the result of the reach production will be You can pay attention to the end. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the double line, the mode promotion effect "none" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223h of "0 to 108". The range of "109 to 128" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "129 to 198" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Has been done. That is, in the double-line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 54.8% (109/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the effect mode of "two vertical pieces" is executed at a rate of about 35.2% (70/199). In other words, in the double-line reach effect, the selection rate of "separate stitches" and "two vertical lines" is the same regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the jackpot expectation from the mode promotion effect itself when the mode promotion effect of "separate eyes" or "two vertical lines" is executed and develops into a double line reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 620, for the reach effect of the triple line, the mode promotion effect “none” is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223h in the range of “0 to 58”. The range of "59 to 78" is defined in association with the effect mode of "separate stitches", and the range of "79 to 108" is defined in association with the effect mode of "two vertical lines". Therefore, the effect mode of "three vertical alignments" is defined in association with the range of "109 to 198". That is, in the triple line reach effect, the mode promotion effect is not executed at a rate of about 29.6% (59/199), and the mode promotion effect of "bare eyes" is performed at a rate of about 10% (20/199). Is executed, and the production mode of "2 vertical alignment" is executed at a rate of about 15.1% (30/199), and "3 vertical alignment" is executed at a ratio of about 45.2% (90/199). The production mode is executed. That is, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, the ratio of selecting each of "separate stitch", "vertical two-piece alignment", and "vertical three-piece alignment" is the same. Therefore, if the mode promotion effects of "separate eyes", "vertical 2 pieces", and "vertical 3 pieces" are executed and develop into a triple line reach effect, a big hit from the mode promotion effect itself. Since it becomes difficult to estimate the degree of expectation, it is possible to pay attention to the content of the suggestion in the reach production and perform the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect can suggest the effect mode (reach line of the reach effect) executed in the latter half (predetermined period) of the variable effect. Here, in the reach production, the higher the number of reach lines, the higher the expectation that the jackpot will be, so the result of the mode promotion production is expected to be a production mode that suggests more reach lines. You can check it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 621, the specified contents of the display data table in the 14th control example will be described. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of a round number display data table set in a round accompanied by a preparation drive of an accessory in the 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 621, the display data table in the 14th control example defines a command to be output to another control device (for example, accessory control device 229) in addition to the drawing contents. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 621, a preparatory drive command is defined as a command for the accessory for the end of the drawing content stored in the address "00FAH". Therefore, when the value of the pointer 233f updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 413 (b)) is executed (every 20 milliseconds) becomes the pointer value corresponding to the address “00FAH”, the address “ In addition to the drawing contents specified in "00FAH", the preparation drive command is read out. When the preparation drive command is read, the preparation drive command is output from the display control device 114 to the accessory control device 229. With this configuration, the control process for acquiring the drawing contents and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the 14th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 622 and 623, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 14th control example will be described. First, the variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 622. The variation display setting process 14 (Z2187) in the 14th control example is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), and is the twelfth control. Similar to the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the example (and the first control example), this is a process for determining the mode of the variation display effect according to the variation type (variation time) notified by the variation pattern.

Of the variation display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the 14th control example, in each process of Z2501 to Z2513, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of Z2501 to Z2509 is executed. Further, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 622) in the 14th control example, when the process of Z2503 is completed, the mode promotion effect (reach line suggestion effect) can be executed or not, and the effect mode is drawn by lottery. The mode promotion effect lottery process is executed (Z2571), and the process shifts to Z2504. The details of this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 623.

FIG. 623 is a flowchart showing the mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571). In this mode promotion effect lottery process (Z2571), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771), and if it is determined to be a jackpot fluctuation pattern (Z2771: Yes). Then, the winning table 222ka1 (see FIG. 619 (b)) of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka is read out (Z2772), and the process is shifted to Z2774. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2771 when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (that is, it is a fluctuation pattern of deviation) (Z2771: No), the deviation table 222ka2 of the mode promotion effect selection table 222ka (see FIG. 620). ) Is read (Z2773), and the process is transferred to Z2774. In the processing of Z2774, the effect mode (number of reach lines) set for the current variation pattern and the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223h are determined from the table read by the process of Z2772 or Z2773. Then (Z2774), this process is terminated.

By executing this mode promotion effect lottery process (see FIG. 623), whether or not the mode promotion effect can be executed and the effect are performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of reach lines of the reach effect executed in the variable display effect. Aspects can be suitably drawn.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 14th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625. First, the details of the display setting process 14 (Z3303) in the 14th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 624. This display setting process 14 (Z3303) is a process executed in place of the display setting process (see FIG. 420) in the twelfth control example (and the first control example), and is a process executed in place of the twelfth control example (and the first control example). ), Based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, as in the display setting process (see FIG. 420). Is a process for specifically specifying.

Of the display setting processes 14 (see FIG. 624) in the 14th control example, in each of the processes Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321, the display setting process (and FIG. 420) in the 12th control example (and the first control example), respectively. The same processes as those of Z4301 to Z4305 and Z4307 to Z4321 of (see) are executed. Further, in the display setting process 14 (see FIG. 624) in the 14th control example, when the Z4305 process is completed, the drawing content acquisition process for acquiring the drawing content for one frame from the content of the display data table is next. Is executed (Z4331), and the process shifts to Z4307. The details of this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331) will be described with reference to FIG. 625.

FIG. 625 is a flowchart showing a drawing content acquisition process (Z4331). In this drawing content acquisition process (Z4331), first, among the display data tables set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (Z4351). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired drawing content includes the specified content indicating the accessory command (Z4352), and when it is determined that the content indicating the accessory command has been acquired (Z4352: Yes). , The command for the accessory of the acquired contents is set to be output to the accessory control device 229 (Z4353), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z4352, if it is determined that the content indicating the command for the accessory is not acquired from the display data table (Z4352: No), the process of Z4353 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this drawing content acquisition process (see FIG. 625), the control process for acquiring the drawing content and the process for outputting the command can be performed collectively, so that the control process can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example, the mode promotion effect can be executed as a kind of hobby effect. In this mode promotion effect, before the reach effect occurs, the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the reach occurs, the number of reach lines, etc. is executed, so that the actual reach effect is performed. Can increase expectations for a big hit before it is executed.

Further, in the 14th control example, a command output instruction to the accessory control device 229 is also included in the specified contents of the display data table in which the drawing contents in various effects are specified for each frame. Then, when the drawing content is acquired from the display data table, if the command seed and force instruction are acquired, the display control device 114 executes the command output together with the acquisition of the drawing content. .. With such a configuration, the control process of the display control device 114 can be simplified. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, since the command can be output by using the value of the pointer 233f provided for acquiring the drawing contents, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated timer stage or the like for determining the output timing of the command. Therefore, since the configuration of the display control device 114 can be simplified, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be different, the probability of winning a small hit may be different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, or the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this, depending on the game state. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to be a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not on the main control device 110 but on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode is the same. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content to the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used, but the notification effect is used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the setting value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be different, the probability of winning a small hit may be different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, or the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed for each set value according to the set set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the game state. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, the probability change state is set to be a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal gaming state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the game, the player may be configured to shift from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations. When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the small hit is won by the special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the operation means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. May be. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, a driving means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacement means to the predetermined direction side, and the displacement means. It is provided with a resistance means configured to be able to generate resistance to the displacement in a predetermined direction.
The gaming machine a1 is characterized in that the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to displace a displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the place where the load from the displacement member is received is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid receives an excessive load, so that the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail at an early stage. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the durability of the gaming machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine a1, the resistance means is on the predetermined direction side (driving means side) of the displacement means.
Since resistance to the displacement to the displacement means is generated and the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the drive means from receiving an excessive load. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the gaming machine.

The mode for reducing the load applied to the drive means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be distributed by increasing the number of places where the load is received to suppress the load, or the load may be transmitted by providing a gap between the displacement means and the drive means by the resistance means. It is also possible to cut off the load, or to increase the surface on which the resistance means acts on the displacement means to reduce the load per unit area.

The gaming machine a1 is provided with a supporting means for supporting the displacement means, and the driving means is arranged on the supporting means side as compared with the resistance means.

According to the gaming machine a2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a1, the load applied to the resistance means is applied by suppressing the arm length (arm length of the force moment) between the supporting means and the driving means to be short. It is possible to avoid becoming excessive.

In the gaming machine a2, the supporting means rotatably supports the displacement means on a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. ..

According to the gaming machine a3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from reversing in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left-right direction).
Since the side where the rubbing of the portion covering the rotation axis occurs can be limited to one side (avoiding slight displacement to the left and right), the portion that needs to be formed thick can be limited.

In the gaming machine a3, the first resistance means that causes a load for the displacement toward the predetermined direction is
The first resistance means and the second resistance means are provided with a second resistance means that generates a load for displacement in the opposite direction on the predetermined direction side, and the first resistance means and the second resistance means are displaced from each other at different positions in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine a4 comprising a portion, wherein the first resistance means is arranged away from the predetermined axis as compared with the second resistance means.

According to the gaming machine a4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a3, the load given to the displacement means from the first resistance means can be reduced. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by lengthening the arm length of the moment of the force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

Further, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated by separating the place where the load is generated between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the place where the load is generated between the second resistance means and the displacement means. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine a3 or a4, the displacement means includes a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means and an accessory portion extending in the outer diameter direction of the transmission portion, and the first resistance. The gaming machine a5 is characterized in that the means is disposed so as to be in contact with the accessory portion.

According to the gaming machine a5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine a3 or a4, it is possible to transmit the driving force to the displacement means even if the accessory portion is damaged, so that the driving control can be performed during the period until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

The mode of the transmission unit is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be configured at a position close to the driving means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction on the side where the driving means is arranged with reference to the shaft member arranged along the predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, the mode on the opposite side in the axial direction on the side where the drive means is arranged is not limited in any way with the shaft member as a reference, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the drive means and the transmission unit may be configured at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the shaft may be configured. In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmitting portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5 is provided with a load applying means for applying a load to the displacement means in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

The gaming machine a6 is characterized in that the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine a7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a6, it is possible to avoid an imbalance in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A game machine a8, wherein in any of the game machines a1 to a7, the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine a8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. This makes it possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

The gaming machine a8 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to receive an external force, and the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Gaming machine a9.

According to the gaming machine a9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine a8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
The basic means, the intermediate means displaceably supported by the basic means, the distal end side means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and the intermediate means supported by the intermediate means with respect to the basic means. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement-constituting means configured to displace the tip-side means with respect to the intermediate means, the basic means can be displaced in a non-corresponding manner to the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A gaming machine b1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which a pinion is arranged so as to sandwich the pinion between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, since the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, the displacement speed of the other rack with respect to one rack can be increased, and a high-speed displacement effect body can be constructed. It is possible.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effect body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b1, since the basic means is configured to be displaceable, the basic means can be displaced by the tip side means or the intermediate means by displacing the basic means according to the displacement of the tip side means or the intermediate means. Can be hidden. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the tip-side means can be improved.

In the gaming machine b1, the basic means is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both members (basic means and tip side means) sandwiching the pinion are racks that are displaced in parallel, when the pinions and the rack are arranged on the same plane, the racks are arranged in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed at a position that overlaps the rack in the displacement direction view, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that it was.

In addition, since it is necessary to arrange the support portions at a plurality of points in order to maintain the posture of the rack and optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk that the member structure will be complicated and the assembly man-hours will increase. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the overhanging portion on the foundation means side and the recessed portion on the tip side means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine b2, since the basic means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the basic means and the displacement constituent means can be arranged at positions where they overlap in the slide displacement direction view of the intermediate means, which saves space. In addition to being able to improve the structure, it is sufficient to have a configuration for supporting the basic means, so that the structure can be simplified.

Further, since the overhanging portion on the foundation means side can be arranged on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine b2, a part of the basic means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the basic means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating with the other part as a fulcrum. The gaming machine b3 is characterized in that the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the gaming machine b3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine b2, since a part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are both supported by the intermediate means, the part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are separated from each other. Load transmission can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in the direction intersecting the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of a part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the entire foundation means can be measured.
It can be suppressed (up, down, left, right).

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the tip side means is on one side (overhanging side) of the displacement range.
The gaming machine b4, characterized in that, in a state of being arranged at the terminal position, the basic means receives a load for maintaining a posture from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement.

According to the gaming machine b4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b3, the load required for the slide displacement is reduced as compared with the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. Can be done. Further, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the posture of the basic means is maintained while the tip side means is arranged at the one-side terminal position.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the tip side means is on the other side (evacuation side) of the displacement range.
A gaming machine b5, wherein the basic means takes a posture in which a load given from the intermediate means faces the displaceable direction of the basic means in a state of being arranged at a terminal position.

According to the gaming machine b5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b4, the basic means,
The start of intermediate and displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b5, the tip side means is on the other side (evacuation side) of the displacement range.
The gaming machine b6, wherein the basic means is provided with an overhanging portion that projects toward the retracted position side of the intermediate means in a state of being arranged at the terminal position.

According to the gaming machine b6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines b1 to b5, an intermediate means is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the overhanging portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the other side (evacuation side) terminal position which is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to configure the basic means to be blindfolded by an intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while keeping the vertical dimension of the above to less than the dimension of the basic means.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b6, the basic means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means is an electric wiring guided to the basic means. The gaming machine b7, characterized in that the

According to the gaming machine b7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines b1 to b6, the displacement of a part of the basic means is suppressed to easily secure the passage path of the electric wiring and the electric wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the machine.

In the gaming machine b7, the tip-side means is configured to be slidable and the electric wiring is arranged outside the tip-side means.

According to the gaming machine b8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine b7, the load applied to the electric wiring is compared with the case where the electric wiring is connected to the tip side means which is displaced by the slide displacement which easily puts a load on the electric wiring. It can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the tip-side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. for example,
The drive means for driving the intermediate means based on the basic means and the drive means for driving the tip side means based on the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small.

In any of the gaming machines b1 to b8, the displacement constituting means is characterized in that the tip side means is configured to be displaceable with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Gaming machine b9.

According to the gaming machine b9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines b1 to b8, the tip-side means can be stably displaced at a high speed (higher-speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are asymmetrically configured>
A plurality of displacement means configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position arranged apart from the first relative position are provided, and the plurality of displacement means are the first relative position. Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visible in a series of predetermined shapes.
The gaming machine c1 is characterized in that the plurality of displacement means include a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of moving parts having substantially the same shape are arranged close to each other to form a series of shapes (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095).
.. According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily configure a large effect body by combining small moving parts, the structure of the moving parts themselves is almost the same, so the difficulty of assembly work can be reduced. can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the shapes of the moving parts are configured to be substantially the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each moving part is common to each moving part, which is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in design so that the space could be used.

For example, when the moving unit is displaced on the right side of the display device exemplified for the liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the side closer to the display device is more noticeable from the player. Nevertheless, the space required for displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the displaceable amount on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem that it would be limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine c1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means visually recognized in a series of shapes are composed of different sizes, the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means. Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so that the limited space can be used satisfactorily and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the gaming machine c1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are characterized in that the outer shape is set according to the displaceable region in the second relative position.

According to the gaming machine c2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are visually recognized at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the displaceable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

Further, it is possible to improve the decorativeness when the decoration of the region at the second relative position is substituted by the first displacement means and the second displacement means, as in the case where the game board is formed of the light transmissive resin.

The gaming machine c1 or c2 is provided with a guiding means arranged on the back side of the plurality of displacement means and guiding the displacement of the plurality of displacement means, and the position between the guiding means and the displacement means is viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine c3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the gaming machine c3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c1 or c2, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from being visually recognized from the gaps of the plurality of displacement means. Thereby, instead, it is possible to make effective use of the gap, such as making the decorative portion other than the guiding means visible from the gap.

In the gaming machine c3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the plurality of displacement means is viewed in the predetermined direction from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction. A gaming machine c4 characterized in that it is arranged at a displaced position.

According to the gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c3, the part (reference) that the player predicts that the guiding means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged in consideration of the load balance and the like. By concealing (corresponding to a line) with a plurality of displacement means and making it difficult for the player to see, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the design.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c4, the driving means for generating the driving force is provided, the first displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means is said. The gaming machine c5, characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path from a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c4, the member is configured to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, so that the member becomes smaller locally in the driving force transmission path. It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

In the gaming machine c5, the driving means and the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left portion of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged in the upper left portion. 1 The gaming machine c6 characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be larger than the second displacement means disposed at a position different from the upper left portion.

According to the gaming machine c6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c5, from the configuration arrangement of the payout device,
The drive means and the transmission means arranged in the upper left portion, which is easy to secure a large area as the internal area of the rear case as compared with the upper right portion, can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged in the upper left portion. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the driving means and the transmitting means. This makes it unnecessary to configure another cover for hiding the driving means and the transmitting means.

In the gaming machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means is set to a posture in which gravity acts in the tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to be close to the second displacement means by the tilt displacement. Characteristic gaming machine c7.

According to the gaming machine c7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine c5 or c6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows contact, but the clearance for enabling the displacement ( When a gap is created without contact due to misalignment that fits in the play of the gear teeth that mesh with each other, the gap between the guide rail and the guided portion, etc., it is easy to fill the gap by the tilt displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being maintained in a state where a gap is formed, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and a series of series. It is possible to improve the design when forming the shape.

A gaming machine c8, wherein in any of the gaming machines c5 to c7, electrical wiring passes through the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to the gaming machine c8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c5 to c7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are excessive by passing the electric wiring to the second displacement means side where the overdisplacement is unlikely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load generated on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c8, the predetermined shape is composed of a symmetrical shape, and the split surface component portion constituting the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is the center of the gaming area. A gaming machine c9 characterized in that it is arranged on the side far from the position.

According to the gaming machine c9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c8, the asymmetrically shaped split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult for the player to see), whereby the first displacement means. And it is possible to prevent the appearance of the second displacement means from being deteriorated.

By making the shape of the center position side (the side close to the field of view, the side that is easy for the player to see) on the opposite side to the center position, the appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged so that the side where the size of the displaceable region is limited at the second relative position faces each other at the first relative position. Machine c10.

According to the gaming machine c10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means composed of asymmetrical shapes in a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of the game machines c1 to c10, the plurality of displacement means have a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is composed of a downward displacement, and the first displacement thereof. The gaming machine c11 is composed of different second displacements, and is configured so that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the gaming machine c11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines c1 to c10, by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, when the upper inner surface of the rear case is displaced up and down on the left and right due to the shape of the dispensing device, multiple displacement means are not affected by the vertical displacement of the rear case (corresponding to a predetermined section). By starting the second displacement after only descending, the area where the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is allowed can be formed equally without being affected by the vertical positional deviation of the upper inner surface of the rear case. Even when the displacement mode of the displacement means is the same, it is possible to easily prevent a plurality of displacement means from colliding with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement depending on the arrangement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means are provided, and the first displacement means supports one of the second displacement means. The first support portion and the second support portion that supports the other second displacement means are provided, and the first support portion is supported by the first support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2 Displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means generated in the displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion due to the occurrence of a predetermined displacement in the first displacement means. The gaming machine d1 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the displacement mode with respect to the above.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced when the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) are displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of production.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine d1, the second displacement means is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced.
Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be different depending on whether the displacement means is supported by the first support portion or the second support portion, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be used. The displacement mode of the above can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine d1, the gap between the first second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first one. Displacement means
The gaming machine d2 is characterized in that the displacement amount on the first support portion side is larger than that on the second support portion side.

According to the gaming machine d2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d1, the displacement of the first displacement means can be configured so that the gap of the first support portion is eliminated, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

In the gaming machine d1 or d2, a load applying means configured to give a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the first displacement means is supported on one side portion in a predetermined direction, and the one side portion can be displaced. The amount and the displaceable amount of the other side portion are configured to be different, and the load applying means is the first.
The second displacement means is configured to give a load to the other side portion of the displacement means, and the second displacement means is the one side second displacement means arranged on the one side and the other side second displacement means arranged on the other side. A gaming machine d3 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine d3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d1 or d2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where the load applying means applies the load to the first displacement means. It can be different depending on whether it is placed on the other side or on the other side.

In any of the gaming machines d1 to d3, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the load applying means is arranged at a plurality of positions and each of the first displacement means is independently displaced. A gaming machine d4 characterized in that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the gaming machine d4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d3, it is possible to eliminate the need for an auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means.

In any of the gaming machines d1 to d4, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface is provided, and the load applying means is at least attached to the light emitting substrate. A gaming machine d5 characterized in that a part thereof is shielded in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine d5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines d1 to d4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting substrate. That is, using a light emitting board that is necessary for the convenience of light emission production,
It is possible to prevent the load applying means from being visually recognized by the player. In this case, by irradiating the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate with strong light, the visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting board can be reduced. However, it can be made difficult for the player to see.

When the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a drive device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) for driving the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since the electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to separately create a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine d5, the light emitting board is arranged on the back surface side of the gaming board, and the gaming board is provided with a recessed portion in which the facing side is recessed at a position facing the light emitting board. Machine d6.

According to the gaming machine d6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d5, an area for arranging the light emitting substrate can be secured between the gaming machine and the gaming board, and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the gaming board. It can be prevented from being done.

In the gaming machine d6, the recessed portion is arranged outward with respect to the outer shape in the front view of the gaming region.

According to the gaming machine d7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d6, even if the film member formed on the front surface of the recessed portion is displaced, it is necessary to prevent the displacement from affecting the gaming area. Can be done.

A game characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines d1 to d7, a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the guiding means is arranged on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine d8.

According to the gaming machine d8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines d1 to d7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guiding means, and the guiding means is arranged closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced, the friction between the first displacement means and the guide means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine d8, a support plate that supports the guiding means, a thin film member whose predetermined region is fixed to the support plate, and a light emitting substrate that is arranged on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and has a light emitting portion. The gaming machine d9 is characterized in that the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without a gap.

According to the gaming machine d9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d8, by partitioning the guiding means and the light emitting substrate with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent the rubbing powder of the guiding means from entering the light emitting substrate side. can.

In the gaming machine d9, the thin film member is configured to have dimensions that can avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the gaming machine d10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine d9, it is not necessary to secure the rigidity of the thin film member. Therefore, by forming the thin film member as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member. Can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. The point for communication ＞
A displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means for generating a driving force for displace the displacement means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement means are provided, and the transmission means is driven. The gaming machine e1 characterized in that the state can be changed so as to change the transmission mode of force.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of the displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to displace the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove (. For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed so as to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb a slight excess displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the deformed groove is configured to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means, the wall thickness and the dimensional length corresponding to the deformed groove are required extra. The limitation of the shape of the displacement means becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine e1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means by changing the state of the transmission means. can. Therefore, since it is not necessary to add an extra configuration to the displacement means, the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

The change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rigidity of the transmission means may be changed, the direction of the load applied to the transmission means may be adjusted to change the transmission efficiency of the driving force, or the change may occur by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. ..

In the gaming machine e1, the gaming machine e2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmitting means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine e2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e1, a load for changing the state of the transmitting means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source to change the state of the transmission means.

The mode of change in the state of the transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Further, examples of the deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, bending and twisting, and deformation in which a boundary such as bending and misalignment occurs. Further, as an embodiment of the change in rigidity (strength), an embodiment in which the wall thickness of the transmission means is changed, a mode in which the core inserted in the transmission means is removed, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine e2, the transmission means is configured to have a shape in which the flexibility differs depending on the direction.
The gaming machine e3 is characterized in that the angle formed by the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means and the direction in which the displacement means is easily flexed changes before and after the displacement means passes through a predetermined reference position due to the displacement. ..

According to the gaming machine e3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e2, the change in the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means during the displacement of the displacement means can be used to change the shape of the transmission means.
With a predetermined reference position as a boundary, it is possible to divide a range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and a range in which the transmission means is mainly flexed and deformed by the driving force.

In the gaming machine e3, the displacement means is driven to stop in a predetermined intermediate posture, and the transmission means is a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is in the intermediate posture. The gaming machine e4 is characterized in that the direction of the machine is configured to be along a direction in which the machine is easily bent.

According to the gaming machine e4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture by the bending of the transmission means, so that the amount of the driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly determined. Even if it is set, it is possible to make it easier to keep the displacement means in the middle posture.

In the gaming machine e4, the driving force exerts a driving force so that the pushing portion for pushing the displacement means of the transmission means passes through the contact position in the intermediate posture of the displacement means in the state before bending. A gaming machine e5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate.

According to the gaming machine e5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e4, the driving energy can be inherently stored even after the displacement means is in the middle posture, and the displacement means can be vibrated by using this.

That is, since the transmitting means is in a posture in which it is easy to bend, it is possible to generate vibration using the bending in the transmitting means without generating the driving force of the driving means in a mode for generating vibration. As a result, vibration can be generated by a simple mechanism.

The gaming machine e6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines e1 to e5 is provided with a range setting means configured so that a range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set.

According to the gaming machine e6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines e1 to e5, the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes can be set by the range setting means, so that the degree of the state change of the transmitting means can be determined. It can be adjusted depending on the situation.

In the gaming machine e6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmitting means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with respect to a predetermined position. ..

According to the gaming machine e7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine e6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range opposite to the driving means, so that the driving force is transmitted on the upstream side of the transmission path. It is possible to suppress the decrease in efficiency.

Further, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of the state change occurring in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced.
Therefore, even if the driving means cannot be controlled precisely, the displacement of the displacement means (for example, the displacement of the stop position) can be kept small.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatable and an electric supply means configured to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means arranged along a line connecting a rotation shaft and an outside diameter. The gaming machine f1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes an arranged portion arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an electric wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member rotatably supported and the electric wiring is connected to a displacement member connected to the arm-shaped member (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electric wiring is only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and the electric wiring may expand or contract due to the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, which is given to the electric wiring. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine f1, the placed portion of the electric supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotation displacement means, so that the rotation displacement means occurs when the rotation displacement of the rotation displacement means occurs. It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the placed portion that occurs with respect to the electric wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

In the gaming machine f1, the gaming machine f1 includes an arrangement displacement means displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means and a suppressing means for suppressing the displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction close to the arrangement displacement means. The gaming machine f2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine f2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f1, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

The gaming machine f3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine f2, the arrangement displacement means is configured so as to easily separate from the electricity supply means when an unplanned displacement occurs.

According to the gaming machine f3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f2, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine f3, the dispositioned displacement means has a first dispositioned displacement means that is closely displaced and stopped to the electricity supply means, and a position of the first dispositioned and displaced means that is displaced and stopped close to the electricity supply means. It is provided with a second arrangement displacement means set at a position farther from the electricity supply means than the stop position, and the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means to the electricity supply means. The gaming machine f4 is configured to be in contact with each other by being displaced close to each other and to apply a load in a direction away from each other from the electricity supply means.

According to the gaming machine f4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f3, it is possible to avoid giving a load to the electricity supply means even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced too much. can do.

The gaming machine f5 is characterized in that the first-arranged displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second-arranged displacement means.

According to the gaming machine f5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine f4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first disposing means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

It should be noted that the mode constituting the magnitude of the inertia is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first arrangement displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second arrangement displacement means, or the mode of the support portion may be different. The magnitude of the inertia may be configured by causing the magnitude of the displacement resistance.

In any of the gaming machines f1 to f5, the supporting means for supporting the rotational displacement means is provided, and the supporting means includes an opening portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means. The gaming machine f6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the open portion.

According to the gaming machine f6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines f1 to f5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed as compared with the case where the electric supply means is passed through the inside of the predetermined rotating shaft. be able to.

In the gaming machines f1 to f6, the displaced displacement means displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electric supply means and the driving means for generating the driving force for driving the displaced displacement means are provided, and the driving means is provided. The gaming machine f7 characterized in that it is arranged on the side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.
..

According to the gaming machine f7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines f2 to f6, it is possible to improve the arrangement efficiency.

A gaming machine f8, wherein in any of the gaming machines f1 to f7, the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to the gaming machine f8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines f1 to f7, the means for guiding the electrical wiring can be provided with a driving force transmission function, so that the members can also be used. The number can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a machine and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. It is provided with a rotating member rotated by a sliding member and a sliding member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and a projecting portion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion thereof is projected. A gaming machine g1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which a provision portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions are formed so as to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing interval of the facing portion is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is the same as the above), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine g1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. The protrusion is projected from one of the wing members, and the sliding groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not tilt with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be equal to the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. ..
As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted projecting portion is slidable along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the gaming machine g1, the gaming machine g2 is characterized in that the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine g2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the wing member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine g1 or g2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A gaming machine g3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the gaming machine g3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g1 or g2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extended linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. also,
Since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extended length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove and improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is displaced upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine g4, characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to start driving the wing member in the stopped state and smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine g4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines g1 to g3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation at the time of starting the driving of the wing member in the stopped state and opening or closing can be smoothly performed.

The gaming machine g4 is characterized in that when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the gaming machine g5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g4, when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which the wing member is released, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine g4 or g5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. A gaming machine g6 characterized in that an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to a direction is formed.

According to the game machine g6, in either the game machine g4 or g5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to the direction of gravity,
Even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface and upward in the gravity direction of the slide member. The slide displacement toward can be started smoothly.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine g7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine g7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the gaming machine g7, the gaming machine g8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by the slide member being slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine g8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g7, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the sliding member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding part being accepted by the receiving part.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the slide displacement are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine g9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutting portion is abutted, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine g9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing members facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, whereby the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, in the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. The slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is rotated. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines g1 to g8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member.
A protrusion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is formed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The rotating member is recessed and includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion.
The slide member includes a one-sided contact portion to which one side of the contact portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member, and one side cover thereof. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the contact portion and the other side of the contact portion are brought into contact with each other. Equipped with a contact portion on the other side
In the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, and from the state where the wing member is closed, the one-sided contact with one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine g10 is characterized in that when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position where the portions are in contact with each other, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine g10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contact portion on the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing members facing each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the rotation accompanies the rotation.
When the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, the wing member is closed while the rotating member is rotated to the other side. Along with the rotation, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side, so that the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in an allowable shape so that it can rotate to the other side.
Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that easily holds the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g10, the passage member is provided to form a passage for the gaming ball inserted into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. The gaming machine g11, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine g11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g10, a passage member for forming a passage of the gaming ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the slingshot ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member for forming a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entry port is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine g12 comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the gaming machine g12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member has a rubbing part that rubs against the edge of the
It is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the game ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing portion crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing portion is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, a passage member for forming a passage for the gaming ball entered into the entrance is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine g13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the gaming machine g13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines g1 to g11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, it crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of each other are crossed. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the game ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members are inserted. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine g12 or g13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member causes the drive shaft of the drive means to be the first.
A gaming machine g14 characterized in that it is performed by displacing it in a direction.

According to the gaming machine g14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g12 or g13, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines g1 to g14, the rotating member comprises an abutting portion, and the sliding member is the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion with which the other side of the contact portion is abutted is provided, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine g15.

According to the gaming machine g15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines g1 to g14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged opposite to the one-sided contact portion to which one side of the contact portion is abutted against and the one-side contact portion. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding and displacement the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. Changes in the posture of the slide member with the member are unacceptable, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidly displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and is connected to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if the load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in a state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

The gaming machine g16 is characterized in that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion in the gaming machine g15.

According to the gaming machine g16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine g15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. The width dimension on one side and the other side of the contact portion is preferably set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is easier to achieve the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. Second to open or close the mouth
In a gaming machine provided with an opening / closing member and a second driving means for driving the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back surface side of the second opening / closing member. The gaming machine h1 characterized by.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first. (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball entrance and a second driving means for driving the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the slingshot, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine h1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first opening / closing member).
It can be secured on the back of the entrance), and the space can be used effectively accordingly.

The gaming machine h1 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the gaming machine h1 or h2, the gaming machine h3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means.
..

According to the gaming machine h2 or h3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h1 or h2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. And since it is made larger than the total front projection area of the second driving means, the second entrance (second)
The dead space on the back surface of the opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine h3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port.
A gaming machine h4 characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the gaming machine h4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, a drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A gaming machine h5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the gaming machine h5, in any of the gaming machines h1 to h4, the first driving means and the second driving means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. The drive unit is provided with a drive unit that drives and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the gaming machine h5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine h6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the gaming machine h6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h5, the main body portion of the first driving means and the main body portion of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body portion is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first position is such that the outer surfaces of one of the main bodies are substantially flush with each other.
Since the drive means and the second drive means are arranged and the outer surfaces do not form a step, the shield plate can be formed into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for limiting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines h1 to h6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the ball entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are provided. The gaming machine h7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a sliding member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the gaming machine h7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines h1 to h6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a slide member that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members as the rotating member rotates, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. In addition, the first passage member is seconded in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product.
Since it is not necessary to bend it toward the passage side, the first ball entry port can be brought closer to the second ball entry port by that amount.

In the gaming machine h7, the rotating member is a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine h8 comprising a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by bending in a substantially shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine h8, in addition to the effect of the game machine h7, the rotating member is a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and being driven first. It is provided with a second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotation axis in the present invention to the slide member. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be the same, the slide amount of the slide member can be the same as that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the driving means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide amount of the slide member can be secured and the slide can be made with the first drive means. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine h8, the gaming machine h9 is characterized in that the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion opposite to the slide member.

According to the gaming machine h9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the gaming machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. The gaming machine h10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the gaming machine h10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines h1 to h9, a detection sensor for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is disposed between the member and the first driving means, for example, the second opening / closing member is opened to open the second opening / closing member.
When fraudulently applies to the first driving means from the entry port, the first driving means can be hidden by a part of the detection sensor, so that such fraudulent activity can be made difficult.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention, the first driving means is arranged on the back surface side of the second opening / closing member.
Even if the opening / closing member is opened and the first driving means is fraudulently applied from the second ball entry port, by closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the fraud is committed. Since the added portion becomes invisible, it is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above.

The gaming machine h10 includes a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member, and the detection sensors are arranged in pairs and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.
11.

According to the gaming machine h11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first drive means from the second ball entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used for fastening and fixing the two members, or may be used for fastening and fixing another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the gaming machine h11, the gaming machine h12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine h12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. When fraudulently applied to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a route from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Or,
It is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activities without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activities.

In the gaming machine h12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine h13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. So, for example,
When the second opening / closing member is opened to perform fraud on the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the gaming machine h12 or h13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Game machine h14 to play.

According to the gaming machine h14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine h12 or h13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter expands so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second ball entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the gaming machines h12 to h14, the gaming machine h15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the gaming machine h15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines h12 to h14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of.
That is, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to perform fraud on the first driving means from the second entry port, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member, and the above-mentioned In a gaming machine provided with a second member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, a first member that engages with the first member.
A gaming machine i1 comprising a third member having an engaging portion and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. A gaming machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the gaming board is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 20).
12-5783). The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board and flows into the first passage of the first member, after passing through the first passage, flows into the second passage of the second member, and on the back side of the game board,
Pass through the second passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-back direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if a misalignment (step) occurs in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, a positioning hole for positioning each of these members is provided on the game board. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate process of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine i1, a third member having a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member is provided. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine i1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine i2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the gaming machine i2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i1, the gaming board is formed with an opening, and the first one is formed.
Since the connecting portion between the first passage of the member and the second passage of the second member is provided with an opening arranged in the internal space, and the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, the third member It is not necessary to separately provide an opening for disposing the above. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arrangement space for the third member, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine i1 or i2, the first engaging portion of the third member is the first member of the first member.
The gaming machine i3, wherein the second engaging portion is engaged with the second passage of the second member.

According to the gaming machine i3, in the gaming machine i1 or i2, the first engaging portion is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, it is effective to generate a misalignment (step) as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the gaming machine i3, the gaming machine i4 is characterized in that a part of an inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the gaming machine i4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i3, since a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A gaming machine i5, wherein the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member in any one of the gaming machines i1 to i4.

According to the gaming machine i5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i1 to i4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the gaming board. When attaching each member, it is not necessary to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the gaming machine i6 is characterized in that the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the gaming machine i6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the gaming board, it is not necessary to separately engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine i7 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine i7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the gaming board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the gaming board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the attachment operation. 2 The engaging part is the second
Can be engaged with a member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member to be fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member.
The gaming machine i8, characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the gaming machine i8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i5 to i7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Prepare,
Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed to the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from being forgotten to be attached when the first member and the second member are attached to the game board.

In any of the gaming machines i1 to i8, the first member is formed so that the gaming ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port that communicates with the first passage and the entry opening. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported and open or close the ball entry port, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the member, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine i9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines i1 to i8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member displaced by the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (side) of the first passage, as compared with the conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only with the rotating member.
Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine i9, the slide member includes a protrusion portion in which the pair of feather members are projected toward the slide member, and the slide member is provided with a sliding groove through which the protrusion portion is slidably inserted.
The gaming machine i10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the gaming machine i10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine i9, a pair of wing members is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the sliding member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the slide. Since the slide member is provided with a moving groove and the third member is provided with an lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member, the sliding member is slid by the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the entry opening is rolled, and its rolling. A gaming machine j1 comprising a passage member into which a gaming ball that has rolled on a surface flows, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the entry opening, and
A gaming machine equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for a gaming ball that has been entered into a ball entrance is known (
For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entrance is formed to a size that allows multiple game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is poured into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member becomes longer. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the entrance before the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, so that an over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine j1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the gaming ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the aisle member can be shortened by that amount, and the aisle can be quickly flowed into the aisle member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The game machine j1 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine j2.

According to the gaming machine j2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j1, a detection sensor for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted until the entrance is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The gaming machine j1 or j2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided at one side end portion of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine j3, characterized in that it is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j1 or j2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the gaming ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The first guiding means is provided, the entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the entry opening, and the first guiding means is one in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arranged between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member so as not to be stuck at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface.
Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the entrance can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result,
It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member.

The gaming machine j4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines j1 to j3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member. ..

According to the gaming machine j4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j1 to j3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to receive the gaming ball that rolls on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is suppressed that another game ball is entered before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member. Then, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine j4, the gaming machine j5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the longitudinal length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j4 or j5, the gaming machine j5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine j5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j4 or j5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the gaming ball, so that when a plurality of gaming balls are accepted in the guiding groove, It is possible to guide the game balls to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In any of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guiding means is arranged, with the passage member interposed therebetween in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine j7 is characterized in that the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the gaming machine j7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j3 to j6, the rolling surface is
Since the second region on the opposite side of the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region in which the first guide means is arranged is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region. , The game ball that has entered the second region or the game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by using the downward inclination of the second region. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

The gaming machine j8 is characterized in that the gaming machine j7 is provided with a second guiding means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine j8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j7, since the second guiding means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, while increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member, the speed is reduced in front of (immediately before) the passage member, and the game ball passes through the passage member from the second region to the first.
It is possible to suppress rolling to the area. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In a gaming machine j7 or j8, a game is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is rolled toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine j9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to be able to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the gaming machine j9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j7 or j8, the second region of the rolling surface is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is directed toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is provided with a second guiding means formed so that the gaming ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the gaming ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j9, the gaming machine j10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the gaming machine j9 in a state where the entrance is open.

According to the gaming machine j10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j9, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the gaming ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball when the entrance is open. The gaming ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the entry opening is closed by the opening / closing member, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guiding means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guiding means is separated from the first guiding means. The gaming machine j11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side portion opposite to the first guiding means.

According to the gaming machine j11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine j9 or j10, the second guiding means is
The side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is inclined in a direction away from the entrance as the distance from the first guide means is increased, and the upper surface thereof is directed toward the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means. Since it is tilted downward, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member with the second region, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding the ball to the entrance side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed and decelerated reliably by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the jumping out from the ball entry port. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening and closing member closes the entry opening, and it is possible to suppress the over-winning.

In the game machine j11, in the second guide means, the side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means is extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and the second guiding means extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. It is characterized in that the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine j1
2.

According to the game machine j12, in addition to the effect of the game machine j11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the size is larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be reliably decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the gaming machine j11 or j12, the gaming machine j13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guiding means.

According to the gaming machine j13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j11 or j12, a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guiding means, so that the upper surface of the second guiding means is included. The gaming ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guiding means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the gaming machine j14 is characterized in that the second guiding means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in an inclined direction.

According to the gaming machine j14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j8 to j13, the second guiding means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guiding means in the inclined direction, so that the first guiding means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball is brought into contact with (collision) with the second guiding means. , It is possible to decelerate, and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The gaming machine j14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The gaming machine j1 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.
5.

According to the gaming machine j15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine j14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guiding means is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball, the rolling speed of the gaming ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guiding means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the gaming ball can easily abut (collide) with the second guiding means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member.
It can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the gaming machines j1 to j15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entry port toward the passage member is provided, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine j16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the gaming machine j16, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines j1 to j15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the gaming ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. It is possible to easily change the rolling direction of the game ball toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with an entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the entry port, and a game board on which the entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board are provided. Amusement machine K featuring
1.

Here, a game including a ball entry unit formed with a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the entry unit with another entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the gaming board. can. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the gaming board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine k1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since it is provided with one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage as well as being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board, it is provided on the front surface of the game board. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be diverted (also used) and the specifications of the game board can be changed. You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the gaming machine k1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A gaming machine k2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the gaming machine k2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. Since it is arranged at a position overlapping with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board may be formed from plywood or a sticker may be attached to the game board. wear,
Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the gaming machine k2, the gaming machine k3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine k3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k2, at least the second of the second unit.
Since the front side of the passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, the game ball flowing down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed.
A gaming machine k4 characterized in that the unit is formed of a colored light transmissive material.

According to the gaming machine k4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine k4, the gaming machine k5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine k5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines k1 to k5, the second passage has a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of second upstream passages. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The gaming machine k6 is characterized in that a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is provided in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k6, in any of the gaming machines k1 to k5, the second unit is the first.
A second upstream unit arranged on the back side of the unit and forming a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages, and a plurality of second connecting passages arranged in the second upstream unit. A second downstream unit is provided, and a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in a plurality of second branch passages. Therefore, for example, the number of the second upstream unit can be increased by the number of the second branch passages. When manufacturing a gaming machine with different specifications by changing to a small number of different units, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection sensors arranged.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine k6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. The first unit,
A detection sensor for detecting a gaming ball is provided in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit while being formed over each of the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit. A gaming machine k7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine k7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the gaming ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entrance. The third through which the game ball passes
A passage is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and a detection sensor for detecting a game ball is arranged in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Therefore, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passage can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine k7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine k8, characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by the combination.

According to the gaming machine k8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine k7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is the same as the first passage. By directly or indirectly engaging the third passages with each other for positioning, positioning can be performed with respect to the first unit even if it is a separate unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. , Since the target part (the connecting part between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting part between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (as compared with the case of positioning other parts) ( The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down.

In any of the gaming machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor disposed in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit and is projected thereof. The gaming machine k9, characterized in that a receiving portion that receives a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine k9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines k6 to k8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While allowing you to do this, you can prevent some of the detection sensors from sticking out.
The size of the second unit as a whole can be reduced.

In the gaming machines k1 to k6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a gaming ball can enter, and a third passage through which the gaming ball entered into the second entry opening passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine k10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the gaming machine k10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines k1 to k9, the third passage through which the gaming ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines k1 to k10, a bent portion that is bent from the front surface to the back surface of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is formed in the bent portion. The gaming machine k11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the pachinko machine, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back surface side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the gaming machine k11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines k1 to k10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed.
An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the bent portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the second passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is placed along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide and smoothly flow down the bent part, the standing part is located in front of the game ball in the front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing part and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. ,
The gaming machine l1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member through which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in this way, the first
In the structure connecting the passage member and the second passage member, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that a step is formed at the connecting portion between the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member. , There is a problem that the smooth flow of the game ball may be hindered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine l1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ,
The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. can.

In the gaming machine l1, the gaming machine l2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the gaming machine l2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1, a position separated by the radius of the gaming ball from the upstream end of the bottom surface is included in the upstream end of the side surface, so that the gaming ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed in the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time on the game ball, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence.
By that amount, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

In the game machine l1 or l2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side of the downstream ends of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passage direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine l3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine l3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1 or l2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.
The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the passage member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the upstream end of the bottom surface, the game ball reaches the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down (passed).

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the gaming machine l3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passage direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes).
Can be made to.

Further, according to the gaming machine l3, the protruding piece of the gaming machine is used as the first passage member, and the recess is used as the second passage member.
Since each of them is formed, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Compared with (a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position), it is easy to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, like the gaming machine l3, the ability to regulate the upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the first passage member means that the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the gaming machine l3, the gaming machine l4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l3, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the gaming machine is formed orthogonally to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the gaming ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

The gaming machine l5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine l5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l1 or l2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore,
Compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the gaming machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. , Can be hard to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the gaming machine l5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having a protruding piece or a recess, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed and molding can be performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

The gaming machine l6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine l4 or l5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine l6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine l4 or l5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collided with the upstream end can be pressed to the bottom side. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being bounced up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to facilitate smooth passage (flow) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a pachinko machine and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members is opened from the outside in the opening direction. A gaming machine m1 characterized in that, when displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry opening, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close. The driving means to make it
When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the entrance, and the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means. And a gaming machine provided with a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into a ball entrance port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members is opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the gaming ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can enter the ball. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. It is possible to regulate the entry of a ball.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, so that the displacement is not regulated.
For example, since the pair of feather members can be forcibly released from the outside and the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position, the effect of restricting the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is effective. There was a problem that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine m1, when the pair of feather members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A protrusion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state where the receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the slingshot when the slide member is slid and displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine m2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the gaming machine m2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. In the state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the gaming machine m2, the gaming machine m3 is characterized in that the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine m3, in addition to the effect of the game machine m2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing member is displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the gaming machine m2 or m3, the gaming machine m4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine m4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m2 or m3, the sliding member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the sliding member is heavy. By using (self-weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the abutted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contact portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine m5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the gaming machine m5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the one-side contact portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing member so as to face each other, the rotating member is on one side. When rotated to, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing member is released.

In this case, in the state where the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. The slide displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is in contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation member is rotated. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the gaming machine m1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove into which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member comprises a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to be rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion to which one side of the abutted portion is abutted and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. , The gaming machine m6, wherein the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the gaming machine m6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine m1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the one-side contact portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to displace the wing member so as to face each other, the rotating member is on one side. When rotated to, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. ,
The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side.
The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shape of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in an allowable shape so that it can rotate to the other side.
Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that easily holds the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the gaming machines m2 to m6, the passage member is provided to form a passage for the gaming ball inserted into the entrance, and the protruding portion is not inserted into the sliding groove. The gaming machine m7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the gaming machine m7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines m2 to m6, a passage member for forming a passage of the gaming ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the slingshot ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
An entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening to open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members thereof. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entrance. A gaming machine n1 comprising a passage member forming the passage of the above, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism comprises a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is allowed to enter from the entrance, and the ball is passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the game ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a gaming ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine n1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that cause the detection sensor to detect multiple times.

In the gaming machine n1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member rubs against the edge portion of the passage member. A gaming machine n2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine n2, in addition to the effect of the game machine n1, the transmission mechanism is such that when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member,
The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the thread and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion to which the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the gaming machine n1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. The gaming machine n3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine n3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine n1, a pair of pachinko machines that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position. Since the transmission mechanism includes a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, the wing member is displaced. The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members are preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of the metal material. Further, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine n2 or n3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. The gaming machine n4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine n4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine n2 or n3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the driving means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Characteristic A group> (Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front)
In an operating device having an operating means for a player to push in, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position where the operating means overhangs the player from the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and it is provided with an urging means that urges the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is oriented toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

Also, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, and can be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operating means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as the fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

As a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side surface of the left little finger is placed near the shaft rod, and the palm is placed near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and the thumb side is directed toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is placed facing the operating means. Will be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for automatically operating the operating means and generating a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction facing the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled from the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button and receiving a high load on the driving means.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means operated by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is said to be via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the movement. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By making it a means, it is possible to change the movement width in which the operating device moves by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. A6 gaming machine configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement is limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means that is disposed inside the operating device and irradiates light toward the player is provided, and the second state is compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means unless the aim is aimed at. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is composed of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Characteristic B group> (Points where the repulsive force during normal times is small while being able to respond to repeated hits)
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing the player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
It is provided with a first driving means that can form a state and generates a driving force to move from the second state to the first state, and is provided with an urging means to generate an urging force to move from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1 2
By pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the return can be speeded up, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The gaming machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive it.

According to the gaming machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting discrimination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing the hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the gaming machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determining means is provided with a position difference detecting means for detecting and a moving direction determining means for determining the moving direction of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detecting means and the detection value of the position difference detecting means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the moving direction determining means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a manner synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second drive device from operating in the direction facing the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is characterized by being composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operating means is provided, and the second driving means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a support means is provided, and the closer the operating means is to the terminal position, the greater the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A gaming machine B6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the supporting means that supports the driving motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (direction close to the operating means), so that the driving force that pushes back the operating means can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means thereof. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the player emphasizes the ability to operate lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. It is possible to reduce the speed and the possibility that the operating means will be damaged, but there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold measured by the threshold determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extension position is executed and the operating means is arranged in a position where the voice coil motor can be in contact with the voice coil motor.
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means are arranged at a position where they can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the gaming machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operating means while suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player during operation.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means, which is the end portion on the opposite side to the operating means, is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed, so that the operating means can be operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Characteristic D group> (Damage of the driving means is prevented by blocking the transmission of the driving force with the clutch)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means is provided with the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the purpose of production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in an operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The crossing direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Each of the convex portions is provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state where they are engaged with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to have a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means exerts a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance does not disappear completely at a distance, but the resistance is periodically restored. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, "as an effect", when the button is driven, if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. And if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period when the button is stopped becomes long, and "
The feeling that "it started to move because the load on the player was released" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane and the transmitting means of the releasing means are transmitted. It is possible to prevent the movement of the means from being stopped in the direction of proximity and separation. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operating modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operating modes. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operating means is the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means. Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the driving means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, since the driving means is usually hidden from the player and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can be watched over by the operation of the operating means.

<Characteristic E group> (The position of the protrusion of the cam is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and a transmission means. The operating means is configured to operate between the first position and a second position different from the first position, and is a first means for suppressing the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a variable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means. A release load means for giving a load for disengaging the engagement of one means to the operation means to the first means is provided, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. The gaming machine E, characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the movement. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the position of the releasing load means is performed based on the operation of the transmitting means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the releasing load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmitting means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. , When the cam is placed in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are out of sync, and in other phases, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is subjected to a load given by the first means.
The gaming machine E3 is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the releasing load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmitting means by the load from the first means, and the releasing load means is operated by the operation of the releasing load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation cycles.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. It is possible to prepare a plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operation means is moved toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, it is possible to realize an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position with the same configuration.

<Characteristic F group> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means configured to be movable between and having a vibrating vibrating portion and a receiving means arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut on the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can abut on the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibration means that transmits vibration to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,).
See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some cases, the vibration may not start in time before the player releases the vibration, and there is a problem that the vibration may not be noticed by the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration for the first time by operating the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contact state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed.
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means during vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in a direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is lowered as compared with the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means. can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the supporting means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a portion of the gaming machine F3 with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving means is loaded. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the drive means.

Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<Characteristic G group> (One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part)
In an operation device having an operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means can be used. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means or
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotating shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the rotation shaft. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role as a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a part for generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
To prepare for. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is convexly provided in parallel with the axis of rotation, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected to each other, and elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotating shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of the rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 comprising a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to an axis in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected due to the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration so that the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristic H group> (Structure to prevent ball lumps with thread)
In a gaming machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the gaming balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launcher and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02).
See Publication No. 4179). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the gaming ball is weak, the gaming ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool with a game ball connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired at a low firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of being able to gain fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball is performed by using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.
..

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-shaped member) by the loading means.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the loading means and the gaming ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the loading means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the loading means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharging side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball discharged from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball ejection portion, which is a portion for discharging the game ball to be dispensed from the payout device, is on the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other gaming ball was performed using the thread guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make it easier to damage the thread.

<Characteristic I group> (Structure of board retainer)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from one side.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotation direction parallel to the front surface of the game board, and the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured so that the fixing means can be changed only after the gaming board is pushed into the position in the used state. Therefore, when the gaming board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with a proximity means that is close to the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into use, so that the gaming board is pushed in. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that
It has the effect of pushing the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is characterized in that the gaming means is displaced to the one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the gaming means unusable. ..

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, so that the gaming means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the gaming means as the gaming means becomes unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removal work of the gaming means can be improved and it is a game. Since it is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the state changing means is a gaming machine I4 including a contacting means that receives a load from the gaming means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the gaming means, the state changing means changes to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the gaming means against the state changing means, the state changing means can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is configured to be accepted by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is used.
A load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means cannot be used by the state changing means so that the gaming means cannot be used. The gaming machine I6 is provided with a closing restricting unit that makes it impossible to close the opening on one side of the gaming means when maintaining the state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the gaming means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<Characteristic J group> (Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotation axis side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-).
See Publication No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, an arrangement means is arranged in a path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the arranging means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a first place and a second means for suppressing the entry of a member from the outside at a second place.
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by different methods.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply placed. Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the invading member.

In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting the electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the gaming means. Characterized gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry restricting portion is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. It is possible to easily generate the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the arranging means refers to a member that has entered from the outside.
The gaming machine J5 is provided with a eliminating means for guiding to a eliminating area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the gaming means by the arranging means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member that has entered from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Characteristic K group> (Structure of a decorative plate with a five-sheet structure. Including fraud prevention)
The first and second means are arranged so as to face each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and the first means and the second means are arranged along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, a connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting with the first direction. The gaming machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine provided with a third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from the machine. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means in the gaming machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected to each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by the fitting generated by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the gaming machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even when a fraudulent act of destroying the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of fastening and fixing thereof is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiation means that irradiates light toward the first means or the second means and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above-mentioned member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guide means.

The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the gaming machine K6 is provided with a contacting means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contacting means. Can be done.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Characteristic L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guide means. Not reached as a point)
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means arranged facing the light guide means and projecting the light passing through the light guide means are provided. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion facing the convex portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other. With the club
The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means with the light-guiding means and is projected with light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projecting means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion facing the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion facing the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission property.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter-projection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transparency is formed from substantially the same material, by incident the same light on the light guide means, the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode to be visually recognized through the counterprojection means. Can be different.

<Characteristic M group> (Bass reflex speaker layout structure)
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means arranged so that at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above-mentioned. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
See Publication No. 6088). Then, in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine and transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the gaming machine, where it is easy to produce a low-pitched sound.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to cancel the regulation of the left-right width and allow the vibration wave to travel at any distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the pachinko machine M2, wherein the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. By abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the gaming machine M3, the gaming machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the effect means for supporting the support fastening means from below.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the directing means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the directing. Things can be adopted.

<Characteristic N group> (Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop in the middle)
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction. A second switchable state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means, a third displacement means that is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state. The gaming machine N1 characterized by being provided with.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end portion. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the displacement directions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the follow-up state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed with respect to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The gaming machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Gaming machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is characterized in that the state of the second displacement means can be changed by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the gaming machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a function as a production device.

The gaming machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means pivotally supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. The gaming machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly, so that the displacement resistance should be prevented from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Characteristic O group> (Utilization of shell buttons and punching holes. The point is not reached)
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). Kai 2012-048970 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted in the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the gaming machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Pachinko machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the supporting portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having a low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are composed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second machines are used.
Since the opening is formed of a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, it is possible to easily remove the solid object through the second opening.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain can be reduced. ..

<Characteristic P group> (G2 notice control)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, an effect executing means for executing the effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a plurality of times. It is determined that the determination means for deciding to execute the specific effect by the effect executing means for the continuous dynamic display of the identification information and the determination means for determining the specific effect to be executed by the determination means. If so, the gaming machine P1 is characterized by having an interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, by executing a special effect for multiple continuous variable effects, a series of effects using multiple variable effects can be provided to the player, which is a hobby of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741) has been proposed. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if an irregular notification effect, etc. that should be executed during that period occurs, the execution is delayed, and the player is given a game. There was a risk that the content would be difficult to understand. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of making the contents of the game easy to understand for the player.

According to the gaming machine P1, even when it is determined by the determining means that a specific effect is executed for each of a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect is based on the establishment of the specific condition. Since the execution of is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied, even if the execution of a specific effect is decided, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control etc. can be performed, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game. In addition, since the execution of the specific effect is resumed when the return condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the player that the specific effect has not ended in the middle, and the player is provided with an easy-to-understand effect. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Based on the operating means that can be operated by the player in the gaming machine P1, the switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the above-mentioned setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine P2 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the user, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is.

In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is satisfied by switching the setting by the switching means when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means. Gaming machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine comprises a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned machine, and the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the gaming ball whose information is acquired by the gaming ball being inserted into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. It has the effect of improving the interest in pachinko.

In the gaming machine P4, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first ball entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the determination result, and when the determination means determines the second information. Dynamically displays the second identification information for showing the determination result, and the determination means preferentially determines the second information over the first information stored in the storage means. The specific condition is that the execution of the specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession. The gaming machine P6, which is established when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second ball is entered. Even if the ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed. It has the effect of making the player easily understand that it has started.

In the gaming machine P7, when the first ball entry means is in the first gaming state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter than the second entry means, and the second entry means is The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that when it is in a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, it is configured to be easier to enter than the first entering means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P7, in the first gaming state, the gaming ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means, so that the first identification information moves continuously. It has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to perform a specific effect many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In the case of a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect of executing a specific effect on a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information is specified. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by having an effect executing means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed, which does not result in a specific determination result, the identification information can be displayed a plurality of times as a dynamic display of 1, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the interrupting means for suspending the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having the above.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player knows that the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being easy to show. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is restored, so that the problem that the specific effect ends in the middle and the content of the effect is halfway and confuses the player can be suppressed. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by the player, a switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the above.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. , It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is an effect.

The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q3, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching means when the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine Q5, characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned machine.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the gaming ball whose information is acquired by the gaming ball being inserted into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. It has the effect of improving the interest in pachinko.

The gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that it has a pre-determination means for executing a determination before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q5, the pre-determination is executed by the pre-determination means, so that the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for showing the determination result, and the determination means determines the second information. In the case, the second identification information for showing the determination result is dynamically displayed, and in the specific condition, the second identification information is moved after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that it is established when it is displayed as a target.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second is determined. Even if the ball enters the ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information has priority. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

In the gaming machine Q7, a launching means capable of varying the firing force based on the operation of the player to launch a gaming ball and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first launching force can flow down. The first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are configured to be difficult to flow down, and the game ball launched with a second firing force different from the first firing force is configured to be able to flow down. The first ball entry means is provided with a second flow path, and the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entry means is the above. The gaming machine Q8 is characterized in that the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path are arranged at positions where they can enter.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally make it easier to satisfy a specific condition by adjusting the firing force of the gaming ball.

<Characteristic R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of the time reduction, it does not shift to charge production until 5 fluctuations)
A first ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entry means that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means that can acquire the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition, the staging means for performing an effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. A production determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the above-mentioned effect, a prohibition means for prohibiting the specific effect from being executed by the effect determining means when a prohibition condition is satisfied, and a prohibition means. The gaming machine R1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set that makes it easier to enter the starting port than usual, an effect is executed to notify in advance or during the special period that the special period will be executed. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls have been generated immediately after the state in which the ball can easily enter the starting port is finished, the notification is performed, so that the notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. There was a risk that there would be a problem that the interest of the game would be reduced. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine R1, the establishment of the prohibition condition prevents the execution of the specific effect indicating that the gaming ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the game is played. It is possible to execute a production that meets the needs of the person, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine R1 has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more variable than a normal state from the second state to the first state. The prohibited condition is set with at least one condition being the first condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine R2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the end of the special state in which the gaming ball is easily entered into the second entering means is set as the establishment condition as a prohibition condition. Therefore, a large amount of the second information is stored, and even if the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means, the specific effect is executed during the period when the profit to the player is low, and the problem of deteriorating the interest of the game is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine R2, the prohibition condition is that when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored when the special state ends, so that the second information is abundant. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the stored state, and even though the number of stored second information is small, there is an effect that the problem that the specific effect is not executed and the profit of the player is impaired can be suppressed. ..

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the discriminating means is longer than the first discriminating result and the specific first discriminating result that causes the second ball entry means to be changed to the first state during the first period. During the second period, it is configured so that it can be discriminated from the specific second discriminant result that is variable to the first state, and the effect determining means is said to be based on the fact that the specific second discriminating result is discriminated. The gaming machine R4, which is characterized by determining the production.

According to the gaming machine R4, in any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify the player that the period is more advantageous by executing the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be.

<Characteristic S group> (Volume control)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to set the sound output means capable of outputting the sound and the volume output by the sound output means based on the operation from the outside of the gaming machine. The sound is at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting means, the first state in which the sound is output from the voice output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the volume set by the volume setting means. An output control means for switching between a second state in which sound is output from the output means, and a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started from a power cut state in which the power supply for operating the game machine is cut off. The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having an initial setting means for setting the second state when the second state is set.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, a game machine that can change the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as an effect by the operation of a player or the setting of a game store has been proposed (Patent Document: Special). Open 2011-200511). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control. The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitable volume control.

According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state in which the power is output at a predetermined volume is set regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means, so that the power is turned on. It has the effect that it can be recognized by and suitable volume control can be executed.

In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be lower than the setting of the lowest volume set by the volume setting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means, so that when the power is turned on all at once. It has the effect of reducing the noise of pachinko parlors. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine S1 or S2, the output control means continuously sets the second state until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed, so that the power supply is supplied during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that the effect is executed after the power is turned on by the volume of the effect 1 executed later.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the gaming machine to the initial state, provided that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the voice output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the initial state has been set by the notification sound, and when the gaming machine is illegally initialized. It also has the effect of being able to detect fraud at an early stage.

<Characteristic T group> (Variable control of reserved symbol display area)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means. For each piece of information, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means is changed according to the number of the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine T1 having a symbol display area variable means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, in the display area where the reserved ball information is displayed, the display area becomes difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed, and the gaming machine that displays the reserved ball information in an easy-to-understand manner is executed. I was asked. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the number of information stored in the storage means, so that the display mode is stored according to the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of making it easier to recognize the number of information and providing an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In the gaming machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating that the symbol is a display area even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area variable means. Is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1, the area information is variably displayed according to the number of stored information, so that the area information according to the number of displayed symbols is displayed. It has the effect of being easy to understand.

The gaming machine T3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information that can identify an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information and it is possible to prevent the game from being performed so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. ..

The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T3, the identification information is set to be hidden when the symbol, which is the upper limit number, is displayed.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3, the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is suppressed. , There is an effect that the design can be easily identified.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a period determination means for determining a predetermined number of periods for which the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed according to the period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine T5 is characterized by having a rule changing means for changing a variable display rule.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is satisfied by changing the display mode, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area variable means displays the first display mode until the first number of the symbols is displayed, and when the number exceeds the first number, the first display mode is displayed. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a second display mode different from that of the above.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to establish the game and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic U group> (Releasing the display of the number of pending items)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. A symbol display means that displays a corresponding symbol for each information, and a display mode variable means that changes the display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period in which a predetermined number of the information is acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of information is acquired, so that the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of information is acquired. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine U1 is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the symbol is displayed based on the period.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is changed based on the period, so that the period is also checked while confirming that the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode suggesting that the symbol is displayed in the display area of the symbol display means is displayed even during the period when the symbol is not displayed. A gaming machine U3 characterized in that the display is set.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode is displayed even during the period when the symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to confirm that the information has been acquired at an early stage. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine U3, the gaming machine U4 is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the suggested mode according to the period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3, the suggestion mode is changed according to the period required for storing a predetermined number of information, so that the frequency of information being stored according to the suggestion mode. It has the effect of being able to confirm.

In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is displayed in a regularly variable manner based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode variable means is displayed based on the period. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U4, the acquisition frequency of information can be confirmed by a special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode can be changed regularly or irregularly. There is an effect that you can play the game while enjoying the case.

<Characteristic V group> (Hold navigation)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means is predetermined with the information before being determined by the determination means. The gaming machine V1 is characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on a number or more stored.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine V1, a specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, so that not only the determination result but also the number of stored information can be interested. It becomes possible and has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information stored by the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the effect executing means are pre-determined by the pre-determination means. The gaming machine V2 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result, so that the identification information is stored before the identification information is dynamically displayed by the specific effect. It is possible to suggest the judgment result of the existing information, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. ..

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the frequency with which information is stored can also be identified by the production.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, there is a history information storage means for storing game history information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. The gaming machine V4, characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so that the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes a specific number or less. ..

According to the gaming machine V5, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number becomes less than the specific number. It has the effect of being able to motivate people.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, for each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the symbol display means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine V6 is characterized by having a symbol display area variable means for varying the display mode of the region in which the symbol is displayed in the symbol display means according to the number of the information.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of stored information, so that the information is stored. It has the effect of being able to identify the numbers in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic W group> (Lucky number)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. The game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed is stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. For each piece of information, the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the storage means stored in the storage means at the time when the stored information is stored. A specific effect is executed based on the number information storage means in which the number information corresponding to the number in which the information before being determined by the determination means is stored and the number information stored in the number information storage means. The gaming machine W1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of capable.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information by the game ball entering the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the game machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the stored number of the information at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information is stored. Since the production is executed, there is an effect that the interest can be further improved when the information is stored.

The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W1, as a specific effect, it is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined to be a specific determination result, so that it is determined as a specific determination result. It is possible to make people interested in the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in an embodiment showing an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored in the information determined to be the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, the number information stored for the information previously determined to be the specific determination result by the specific effect can be confirmed when the symbol is displayed. , There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the symbol will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

A gaming machine W4, wherein any of the gaming machines W1 to W3 has a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information attached to the symbol.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the symbol is given a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information, so that when the number of information before the determination is increased or decreased. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the time of being stored can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

In any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, and the number information of the specific effect when the privileged game is executed. It is characterized by having a notification means for notifying suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game, which is executed based on the storage of the information in the storage number corresponding to. The gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines W1 to W4, the suggestion information suggesting the type of the privileged game executed by storing the information up to the storage number corresponding to the specific effect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the game memorize information even during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the type of the privileged game is difficult to identify from the identification information for showing the specific determination result in the gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W5, the identification information has an effect that the type of the privileged game is difficult to identify, so that the value of being notified of the suggestion information can be increased. be.

<Group X> (Derived from charge production)
A first ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entry means that is variable to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means that can acquire the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and can acquire the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for showing the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the second state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of a specific condition, the staging means for performing an effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. The gaming machine X1 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the game machine X1.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a blade shape that regulates the entry of the ball into the starting port and releases the restriction when the opening condition is satisfied to facilitate the entry of the game ball. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). In the above-mentioned pachinko machine or the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member is movable, there is a possibility that the player may get tired of the game. The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and the game is performed with the expectation that not only the specific determination result but also the specific effect will be executed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the gaming machine X1 has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the determination of a specific effect by the effect determining means when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, it is prohibited that the specific effect is determined by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed unnecessarily. effective.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more variable than a normal state from the second state to the first state. The avoidance condition is characterized in that the condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means is set as at least one condition. The gaming machine X3.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine X1 or X2, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state. By making it easy to establish the above, there is an effect that the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that it is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the second information is excessively stored.

In any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball by varying the firing force based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first launching force. The first flow path is configured to allow flow down, and the game ball launched with a second launch force different from the first launch force, which is configured to make it difficult for the game ball to flow down the first flow path. The first ball entry means is provided with a second flow path configured to allow flow down, and the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that it notifies the player of the suggestion information suggesting that the player is allowed to do so.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect played on any of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information for causing the gaming ball to flow down to the first flow path is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a person causes a game ball to enter a second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (button pop-out control)
It has an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player, a moving means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the moving means. The moving means is configured to be able to execute a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operating means in the first moving mode and a second operation of moving the operating surface of the operating means in a second moving mode different from the first moving mode. The motion control means executes the first operation when the first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine Y1 characterized in that it controls the operation of.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operating means can be moved in different movement modes depending on the motion controlling means, the player can be watched by the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of directing using the operating means can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means is characterized in that the operating surface of the operating means is moved from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the gaming machine Y2, the movement mode until the operating surface of the operating means is moved to a specific operating position can be changed by the motion controlling means, so that the game can be played even for the process of moving the operating surface of the operating means. Can be interested in people.

The gaming machine Y2 is characterized in that the moving means moves the operation surface of the operating means so that the moving period in the second operation is longer than the moving period in the first operation. Amusement machine Y3.

According to the gaming machine Y3, since the movement period can be changed according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls for the drive means, and makes the operation contents of the moving means different according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. The featured gaming machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, it is possible to make the operation contents of the moving means different by changing the contents of the drive control to the driving means. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotating motion, and the motion controlling means is a first driving control for rotating the driving means in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. And the second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving means is the first when the first drive control is executed by the control means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that one operation is executed and the second operation is executed when the second drive control is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the moving mode for moving the operation surface of the operating means.

The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that the gaming machine Y5 has a speed variable means capable of changing the rotation speed of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed variable means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and it is possible to produce an effect of the effect using the operation means. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed variable means. Characterized gaming machine Y7.

In the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, a discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The moving means has a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. The gaming machine Y8 is characterized in that the motion control means determines the content of motion control according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine Y8, the discrimination result of the discriminating means can be suggested by the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means to be executed, so that the player pays close attention to the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the operating means.

<Characteristic Z group> (Prevention of button pop-out destination)
The predetermined movement is performed by an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means. A moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when the conditions are satisfied, a movement control means for controlling the moving means, and predetermined to the operating means. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation of the above, the moving means is a first operation for moving the operation surface of the operating means to the protruding position. The second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position can be executed, and the movement control means is operated by the operation means to perform the predetermined operation by the effect executing means. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the first operation is executed when the effect becomes feasible.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine Z1, in order to cause the moving means to perform the first operation regardless of whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved, the moving means operates to move the operating surface of the operating means. By grasping whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, there is an effect that the player can expect that the second operation is executed by performing the first operation.

In the gaming machine Z1, the moving means is a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by a rotational operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The movement control means comprises, as the plurality of movement controls, a first drive control for rotating the drive means in the first direction, and rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. The second drive control can be executed, and the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and the second drive control is executed. The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the second operation is executed when the above-mentioned second operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z1, the operation surface of the operating means can be configured not to move even if the driving means is driven, and the position of the driving means can be set according to the state of the operating surface. Has the effect of being able to change without moving.

The gaming machine Z2 has a regulating means that can be changed between a regulated state that regulates the movement of the operation surface of the operating means by the moving means and a release state that cancels the regulation, and the control content of the movement control means. The first operation performed by the moving means accordingly is an operation for changing the regulating means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the protruding position. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being an operation.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to change the state of the regulating means according to the control content executed by the motion controlling means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means is a rotating member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotating operation of the driving means, and an acting member that is connected to the operating means and on which the rotating operation of the rotating member acts. The rotating member has a protrusion capable of contacting the working member, and the regulating means rotates the driving means in the first direction to make the protruding portion the working member. The gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by being brought into contact with the machine.

In the gaming machine Z4, the regulating means is characterized in that it does not change to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction and the protruding portion is brought into contact with the working member. The gaming machine Z5.

In the gaming machine Z5, the position where the protrusion is stopped is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6 to play.

In the gaming machines Z1 to Z6, a discrimination means that executes discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means that grants a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. , A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discriminant result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminant result, and the predetermined movement condition according to the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine Z7, which is characterized in that the above is established.

<Characteristic α group> (Over prize at the time of big hit)
The discrimination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination result for showing the discrimination result by the counter-parting means, and the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result to the display means are provided. When displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the first privilege game in which the first privilege advantageous to the player is given as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the above-mentioned In a gaming machine having a second privilege game in which a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given, and a deciding means that can determine either of them, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Is executed, it is characterized by having a type determining means for determining the notification type for notifying the player of the notification information for notifying the type information of the privileged game being executed from a plurality of types. The gaming machine α1.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of the privilege game is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification types are executed in various ways and the game is enjoyed. Has the effect of improving.

In the game machine α1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and as the privilege game, from the closed state. It has a variable control means for playing an open game that changes the variable ball entry means until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. The gaming machine α2 is characterized in that it includes at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value of having more than a predetermined number of gaming balls entered into the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine α2, the privileged game executes the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, the open game is executed a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine α3 characterized by having a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α2, even if the first notification type is determined, the game can be switched to another notification type in the middle of the privilege game, so that the number of gaming balls exceeds a predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

The gaming machine α3 is characterized in that the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that specific notification information is not notified, so that there is an effect that the problem of overlapping notifications can be suppressed. ..

<Characteristic β group> (Produced with normal hit as probable hit)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. If the pre-determination execution means for executing the determination and the information determined to be the specific determination result by the pre-determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are stored. , A gaming machine β1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of gaming has been required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved play interest.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the privilege game is executed, if it is further determined that the privilege game is executed after that, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. It has the effect of making the player expect and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine β1, the privileged game has a first privileged game in which a normal gaming state is set after execution, and a probability that the player is determined to have the specific determination result is higher than in the normal gaming state after execution. The second privilege game in which the special game state is set is at least set, and the specific effect is characterized in that it is configured in an aspect suggesting that the special game state is set. Gaming machine β2.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, if the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored, the stop display switching means capable of displaying the stop display in the specific stop display mode is provided. A gaming machine β3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, the stop display is performed in the specific stop display mode, so that it is as if the second privilege game is executed. It has the effect of being able to remind you.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information on which the first privilege game is executed is dynamically displayed. However, it is characterized in that it switches to the specific stop display mode based on the storage of the information determined to be the specific determination result during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, so that the chance of being displayed in the specific stop mode can be increased. be.

<Characteristic AA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means is notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. Characterized game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a win. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, if the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -No. 005505). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the power was turned on by displaying the return screen. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a gaming situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the sound output during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for the predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output the sound with the content corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the above-mentioned gaming machine AA1 is used, it is between a determination means for determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the determination result is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is turned off during the fluctuation of the special figure, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure fluctuation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is turned off during the special map fluctuation, or if the special map fluctuation is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation will straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed until the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. Good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

If the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the effect corresponding to the remaining variation time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic AB group> (Background change timing is different according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A gaming machine AB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a hit. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means, so that the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation effect). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set a wider variety of production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the gaming machine AB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operating means, various effects can be provided. In the above-mentioned gaming machine AB, as the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, the display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. This makes it possible to change the timing at which the background mode is variably set according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the dynamic display speed of the current identification information. Thereby, when the operation means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. This makes it possible for the gaming company to easily grasp whether or not the gaming machine accepts the operation when the operation for changing the effect mode is executed.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided from the operation of the operating means to the change of the effect mode, for example, the predetermined period is set up to the timing when the next special figure change is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic AC group> (Switches development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to be performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. Characterized gaming machine AC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a win. Was playing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operating means. With a gaming machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operating means, so it was possible to enhance the production effect, but more diverse production. There has been a demand for a gaming machine whose mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine AC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, more various effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

In addition, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the easiness of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations to the operation means is different. Good to configure. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing to the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode set for the first operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, it may be configured to change the effect mode executed after the continuous operation effect according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure change, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure change. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. It may be configured to set the number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.).

<Characteristic AD group> (Provides a state in which the hold number display displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of hold balls and a state in which the hold number is not synchronized).
The acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. To indicate a storage means that can store information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The mode display means includes a mode display means for displaying the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for the purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine AD1 is characterized in that a second aspect for indicating the number of times is displayed on the display means as the display mode.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a gaming machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is one that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a gaming machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of holdings, the game content can be determined based on the number of holdings, and efficient gaming can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function to determine the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds is a specific number. In that case, there was a case where a series of effects (continuous effects) were executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds was executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on the result of one lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous production, and there is a problem that the production effect is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be produced in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AD1, the display mode indicating the storage number displayed on the display means displays the storage number stored in the storage means according to the conditions to be satisfied, and the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the stored number stored in the storage means separately from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of stored memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of storages stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less conspicuous than the display means. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays information indicating the number of times of effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). Further, a display indicating the number of times that the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.

<Characteristic AE group> (Notice effect performed only when the background is changed)
An effect mode in which an effect mode is changed based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy specific conditions. , A gaming machine AE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. The privilege game that became was executed. Further, there is a device that performs a suggestion effect for the player to play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is one that variably configures the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one that changes the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a gaming machine, by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the dedicated production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AE1, since it is configured to be able to execute a dedicated effect when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is played during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute effects that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic AF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided, and the current mode can be grasped by button operation even during the non-notifying period).
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the effect mode. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination unit that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The effect mode notification means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine AF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the gaming machine AF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period without the notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It may be configured to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Thereby, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player to the operating means.

<Characteristic AG group> (Step up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. It is possible to change the vibration amount by the vibration amount changing means that can change the vibration amount that vibrates the operation means to a different vibration amount, and the vibration amount changing means based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine AG1. According to the gaming machine AG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic AH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of pattern fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operation means. The mode-variable means is the mode in which the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. AH1 is a gaming machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the gaming machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic AI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. If this is the case, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and if the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine AI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the gaming machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. It has an effect operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and an effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least a first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the effect operation. It has a preparatory movable control means that can be executed, and the preparatory movable control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. A game machine AJ1 characterized by this. According to the gaming machine AJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Furthermore, since the preparatory movement control is configured to be performed separately from the effect operation based on the effect scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the effect operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the effect operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic AK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a gaming machine to which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said for the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when the specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above-mentioned method, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine AK1 to play. According to the gaming machine AK1, the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, so that the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the effect mode changing means. It is preferable to configure the effect mode that is not used, for example, the effect mode that uses only the display means as the replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the gaming machine with enhanced effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic AL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period differs depending on the game state)
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby for setting a standby state when a predetermined wait condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed by the dynamic display execution means. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can effectively determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the gaming state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine AL1 characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the gaming machine AL1, the setting timing of the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the operating means can be changed according to the set gaming state, so that the operation is carelessly executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to suppress the frequent notification by the notification means. In addition, while the second gaming state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminating means can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second gaming state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

<Characteristic AM group>
It is executed by a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means, and the notification means thereof. The effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification, and the reproduction reproducible of the predetermined voice data based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the power supply means. In a gaming machine having a means and an audio output means capable of outputting an electric power corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, the notification is set as a reproduction start position of the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. The gaming machine AM1 is provided with a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). In such a gaming machine, it has been required to make the gaming situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

According to the game machine AM1, a power supply means capable of supplying electric power to the game machine and a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the electric power by the power supply means. , The effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the predetermined power supply means based on the start of the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AM1, the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Game machine AM2.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AM1, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.

The gaming machine AM1 or AM2 is characterized in that the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AM1 or AM2, the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed, so that the audio is output more preferably. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided. The gaming machine AM4 is characterized in that the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the presence or absence is present, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AN group>
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. In a gaming machine having an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating between, at least a first speed and a second speed slower than the first speed are used as the dynamic display speed of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. A speed setting means capable of setting a speed, and a period shortening means for shortening a first period for dynamically displaying the identification information at the first speed when the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. And, the gaming machine AN1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AN1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the executing means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and predetermined operating means. The operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, the effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and the effect mode variable by the effect mode variable means. The effect mode is changed based on the effect execution means capable of executing the corresponding effect and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. It has a variable timing setting means for setting the timing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AN1 has an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, and the effect executing means is provided by the speed setting means. The gaming machine AN2 is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information to be set.

According to the gaming machine AN2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AN2, a second operation means different from the operation means, a second operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined second operation has been performed on the second operation means, and the first period. The gaming machine AN3 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the second operation is performed in a state where is set.

According to the gaming machine AN3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN2, the player can be made to select whether to operate the operating means or the second operating means during the first period, and the player's game. You can increase your motivation to participate in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AO group>
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the predetermined operation by the operation determination means within a predetermined first period. Based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined to have been performed and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, the effect mode during the second period set after the first period is set. It has an effect mode setting means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine AO1 characterized in that a suggestion effect suggesting an effect mode during the second period is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AO1, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation within a predetermined first period. A second set after the first period based on the operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating the operation timing determined by the discriminating means and the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means. The effect executing means includes an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode during a period and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The suggestion effect suggesting the effect mode during the second period set by the effect mode setting means is executed during the first period. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AO1 has a measuring means for measuring the number of times it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed within the first period, and the effect mode setting means has the number of times the determination measured by the measuring means. The gaming machine AO2 is characterized in that the effect mode during the second period is set based on the operation timing in which is a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine AO2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO1, different effects are executed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information, so that the player can positively operate the operating means. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the gaming machine AO2, when the number of times of discrimination measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number of times less than the specified number of times, the effect executing means is set by the effect mode setting means during the second period. The gaming machine AO3, which is characterized by performing a unified production that does not suggest a production mode.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AO2, it is possible to prevent the player from early grasping the effect mode set in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AP group>
The discrimination means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specified. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the above, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the acquisition means. A storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the above method up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and a display means thereof, at least until the determination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display mode to be displayed on the screen, a specific display mode is displayed based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. Of the display control means capable of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means, a third predetermined number equal to or less than the second predetermined number. The game AP1 is characterized by comprising an aspect ending means for terminating the display of the specific display aspect based on at least the use of the information in the determination by the discriminating means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AP1, the acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means thereof. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a specific effect for executing a specific effect for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It is possible to display the execution means, the storage means that can store the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a first predetermined number up to a predetermined number, and a predetermined display mode until at least the discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. As a display means and a display mode to be displayed on the display means, it is specified based on the fact that the number of information of the information stored in the storage means becomes a second predetermined number equal to or less than the first predetermined number. The second predetermined number of the display control means capable of displaying the display mode of the above and the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. It is provided with a mode ending means for terminating the display of the specific display mode based on at least the use of the following third predetermined number of the information for the discrimination by the discriminating means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AP1 is provided with a second display control means for causing the display means to display a number-of-times suggestion mode that suggests the number of discriminating counts of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode. A gaming machine AP2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP1, the number of times suggestion mode for suggesting the number of times of discrimination of the remaining discriminating means executed by the end of the specific display mode is provided to the display means. Since the second display control means for displaying is provided, there is an effect that a display mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the gaming machine AP2, when the specific display mode is not displayed, the information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means is difficult to distinguish from the number suggestion mode. The gaming machine AP3, which comprises a third display control means for displaying.

According to the gaming machine AP3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2, an information number suggestion mode suggesting the number of information of the information stored in the storage means when the specific display mode is not displayed. Since the third display control means for displaying in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the number-of-times suggestion mode is provided, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the meaning of the number-of-times suggestion mode.

In the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means sets a predetermined specific condition when new information is stored in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. If is satisfied, the gaming machine AP4 is characterized in that the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP2 or AP3, the second display control means stores new information in the storage means while the specific display mode is displayed. In this case, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the number of times suggested by the number-of-times suggestion mode is increased, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AQ group>
A discriminant game that executes a discriminant game based on the establishment of a discriminant condition and a discriminant result that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means being a predetermined specific discriminant result. The specific effect of the specific effect is based on the fact that the execution means, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the discriminating means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine AQ1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting a type.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AQ1, it is advantageous for the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the predetermined specific condition are satisfied during the execution of the specific effect. Based on this, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect capable of suggesting the type of the specific effect is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AQ1, as the types of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first specific effect in which the first effect mode is executed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. One type is determined from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the effect. A gaming machine comprising a type determining means, wherein the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. AQ2.

According to the gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AQ1, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a first effect mode is provided after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. A plurality of including at least a first specific effect to be executed and a second specific effect in which a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed after at least the specific period has elapsed from the start of the specific effect. The suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied before the specific period elapses. It is something to do. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is satisfied based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AQ1 or AQ2, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means. , It is possible to positively operate the operation means for the player who wants to execute the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize an effect mode according to the player's preference.

<Characteristic AR group>
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means setting the effect mode. Based on the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode and the predetermined first condition being satisfied, the suppression period during which the effect mode notification means is suppressed from the effect mode notification means is set. It is provided with a suppression period setting means and a notification control means for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied during the suppression period. A game machine AR1 characterized by being there.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AR1, a mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means. The notification of the effect mode by the effect mode notification means is suppressed based on the fact that the effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode set by the mode setting means and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. A notification control for notifying the effect mode notification means of the effect mode based on the suppression period setting means for setting the suppression period and a predetermined second condition being satisfied during the suppression period. It is provided with means. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the first operation for the operation means are detected during the specific period included in the effect period as the type of the effect executed by the effect execution means. The effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the above means, and the suppression period setting means is provided for at least the specific period. The suppression period is set, and the effect mode notification means notifies the effect mode based on the detection of the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The gaming machine AR2, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AR2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AR1, the operation means that can be operated by the player and the type of the effect executed by the effect executing means are the above-mentioned during a specific period included in the effect period. The suppression includes an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is executed based on the detection of the first operation on the operating means. The period setting means sets the suppression period at least for the specific period, and the effect mode notification means detects the first operation on the operation means during a period different from the suppression period. The effect mode is notified based on the above. This has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

The gaming machine AQ3 is characterized in that the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means.

According to the gaming machine AQ3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AQ2, the second condition is satisfied when a second operation different from the first operation is executed for the operating means. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<Characteristic AS group>
Between the operation means that can be operated by the player and the specific effect execution means that executes the specific effect in which the valid period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and the effective period. The specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation on the operating means, and the first control and the second control as the types of the specific control executed by the specific control executing means. When a control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least, and a specific number of operations for the operating means are performed in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. A plurality of types including at least a first type in which the first control is easily executed, and a second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. The gaming machine AS1 is characterized by comprising a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from among the types.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some in which advantageous privilege games are executed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). With such a gaming machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine AS1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect in which an effective period for treating the operation for the operation means as effective is set during the effect period of 1, and a specific effect execution means. The first is a specific control executing means that executes a specific control based on the operation performed on the operating means during the valid period, and a specific control type executed by the specific control executing means. A control type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a control and a second control, and a specific number of operations for the operating means in the valid period of 1 as the type of the specific effect. The first type in which the first control is easily executed when the first control is performed, and the second type in which the second control is more likely to be executed when the operation is performed a specific number of times than the first type. A specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AS1, in the specific effect, the correspondence relationship between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is determined in advance for each type of the specific effect. A gaming machine AS2 characterized by being defined.

According to the gaming machine AS2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AS1, the specific effect corresponds to the number of operations for the operating means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determining means. Since the relationship is predetermined for each type of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control makes the operating means different from the first vibration intensity. The gaming machine AS3, which is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity.

According to the game machine AS3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AS1 or AS2, the first control is a control for vibrating the operating means with the first vibration intensity, and the second control is the operation. Since the means is controlled to vibrate with a second vibration intensity different from the first vibration intensity, it is possible to easily understand the type of the specific effect by checking the vibration intensity of the operating means. effective.

In any of the gaming machines AS1 to AS3, in the specific effect, the correspondence between the number of operations for the operation means during the valid period and the type of control that is easily determined by the control type determination means is the specific effect. The gaming machine AS4, which is characterized in that it is predetermined for each type of.

According to the gaming machine AS4, in addition to the effect of any one of AS1 to AS3, the display means capable of displaying the display mode and the specific control execution for the display means during the execution period of one specific effect. The display control means for displaying the history of the control executed by the means is provided. As a result, the type of the executed specific effect can be easily understood by the player, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic AT group>
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation effect based on an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a determination result of the operation determination means. In a gaming machine having various operation effect execution means, as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, an operation effect setting means for setting one of the operation effects from a plurality of the operation effects, and the operation means. The mode-variable means has a mode-variable means capable of varying the mode of the above-mentioned, and the mode-variable means changes the mode of the operation means to a mode suggesting the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine AT1 characterized by being.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AT1, based on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation effect, and as the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means, one operation effect is set from a plurality of the operation effects. It has a setting means and a mode variable means capable of changing the mode of the operation means, and the mode variable means sets the mode of the operation means to the one operation effect set by the operation effect setting means. It is variable to the suggested mode. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine AT1 is characterized in that it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. AT2.

According to the gaming machine AT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a light emitting means for emitting light in a region visible to the player in the operating means, and the mode changing means changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. This has the effect of notifying the player who intends to operate the operating means of the current situation in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machines AT1 or AT2, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a dynamic display thereof. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification state dynamically displayed by the execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification information is dynamically displayed in the operation effect setting means. The gaming machine AT3 is characterized in that different operation effects can be set during the displayed period.

According to the gaming machine AT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AT1 or AT2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means that dynamically displays the identification information. The operation effect setting means has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the displayed identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the operation effect setting means is during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to set different operation effects.

As a result, different operation effects are set during one dynamic display period, so that the player can enjoy the timing of operating the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AU group>
A privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and a discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. The dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the game execution means, the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means are the dynamic. The first dynamic display type in which the first aspect is displayed after at least a specific period has elapsed from the start of the display, and the second aspect different from the first aspect after the specific period has elapsed are displayed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type, and between the start of the dynamic display of the identification information and the elapse of the specific period. A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a first specific effect capable of suggesting that the first aspect is displayed as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The gaming machine AU1 comprising, a second specific effect capable of suggesting that the second aspect is displayed, and a specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality including at least. ..

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AU1, it is advantageous for the player based on the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. The privilege game executing means for executing the privileged game, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display by the dynamic display means. The first dynamic display type in which the first mode is displayed at least after a specific period has elapsed since the start of the dynamic display, and the first mode after the specific period has elapsed. A mode selection means for selecting one mode from a plurality of types including at least a second dynamic display type in which a different second mode is displayed, and the identification after the dynamic display of the identification information is started. It is suggested that the first aspect is displayed as a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect until the period elapses and a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A specific effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of possible first specific effects and a second specific effect that can suggest that the second aspect is displayed is provided. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AU1, the specific effect executing means can display a deviation effect mode showing a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect of 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is the first combination. The gaming machine AU2 is characterized in that the combination of the deviation effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is a second combination different from the first combination.

According to the gaming machine AU2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1. That is, the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to display the deviation effect mode showing the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result a plurality of times during the execution period of the specific effect 1. In the first specific effect, the combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect of 1 is the first combination, and the second specific effect is 1 The combination of the off-effect modes displayed during the execution period of the specific effect is a second combination different from the first combination. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AV group>
In a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means includes an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect and an effect mode setting means thereof. It has an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the above-mentioned, and based on the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined first effect unit is provided with respect to the first effect means. Based on the first effect control means for executing the effect operation and the effect information output by the output means, a predetermined second effect operation is executed by a second effect means different from the first effect means. The first effect control means has a second effect control means, and the first effect control means can output specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. The gaming machine AV1 characterized by having the above.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AV1, in a gaming machine having an effect control means capable of executing an effect control for executing a predetermined effect, the effect control means is an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect. And an output means capable of outputting the effect information indicating the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, and based on the effect information output by the output means, the first effect means. A predetermined effect control means for executing a predetermined first effect operation, and a second effect means different from the first effect means based on the effect information output by the output means. It has a second effect control means for executing a second effect operation, and the first effect control means transfers specific information included in the effect information output by the output means to the second effect control means. It has a specific information output means that can be output. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AV1, the effect mode setting means can set a duplicate effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means indicates the overlap effect mode. The effect information is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the overlapping effect modes. A gaming machine AV2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine AV2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV1. That is, the effect mode setting means can set an overlapping effect mode using at least the first effect operation and the second effect operation, and the output means can set the effect information indicating the overlap effect mode. Is output to the first effect control means, and the specific information output means outputs information indicating the second effect operation as the specific information to the second effect control means among the duplicate effect modes. .. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AV2, the effect mode setting means is characterized in that the overlap effect mode is set so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. Amusement machine AV3.

According to the gaming machine AV3, the effect mode setting means sets the overlapping effect mode so that the start timing of the first effect operation is earlier than the start timing of the second effect operation. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AW group>
When the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is being set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means, at least from the first position. While the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable to the second position different from the first position and the first effect period are set, the first effect is set. In a gaming machine having a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the effect condition is satisfied, the first effect. In the specific effect period within the effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member, the display means, the movable state determining means for determining the movable state of the effect member, and the above-mentioned It is characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. Pachinko machine AW1.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AW1, when the first effect condition is satisfied while the first effect period is set by the effect period setting means capable of setting a predetermined effect period and the effect period setting means. The first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect using the effect member movable from at least the first position to the second position different from the first position, and the first effect period are set. In the middle of the process, it has a second effect executing means that can execute a second effect different from the first effect using the display means when a second effect condition different from the first effect condition is satisfied. In the gaming machine, in the specific effect period within the first effect period, the specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect using the effect member and the display means, and the movable state of the effect member are determined. It has a movable state determining means and a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect during the specific effect period when the determination result of the movable state determining means is a specific determination result. It is a thing. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AW1, the gaming machine AW2 is characterized in that the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminating result when the effecting member is not located at the first position.

According to the gaming machine AW2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW1. That is, the movable state discriminating means discriminates from the specific discriminant result when the effecting member is not located at the first position. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW1 or AW2, the gaming machine AW3 is characterized in that the special effect executing means is for executing the special effect using the display means.

According to the gaming machine AW3, the special effect executing means executes the special effect using the display means. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3, the first one has an operating means that can be operated by the player and an operation determining means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. The effect condition is satisfied when it is determined by the operation determining means that the predetermined operation has been performed.

According to the gaming machine AW4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AW1 to AW3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine AW5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the first effect condition is the operation determination means. It is established when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AW4, the valid period setting means capable of setting the operation valid period for which it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means by the operation determining means, and the valid period setting means thereof. It has a period display means for causing the display means to display that the operation valid period is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic AX group>
The discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first gaming state in which a first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second gaming state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, can be set. , A game state setting means that can set, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined operation means. The operation discriminating means has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that the operation of the above operation has been performed, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. When the standby state is set by the standby state setting means, it is effectively determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, and the game state is set based on the game state setting means. The gaming machine AX1 is characterized by having a standby condition variable setting means capable of variably setting the standby condition.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided on a gaming board surface, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a hit, There are some that perform privileged games that are advantageous to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine AX1, a discrimination means for executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information for showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and an operation thereof. A first gaming state in which the first period can be set as a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the target display execution means, and a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, are set. A game state setting means that can set a possible second game state, a standby state setting means that sets a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation means that can be operated by the player. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means. The operation determining means effectively determines that the predetermined operation has been performed when the waiting state is set by the waiting state setting means, and is set by the gaming state setting means. It has a standby condition variable setting means capable of variablely setting the standby condition based on the gaming state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine AX1, the standby condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is a predetermined period, and the standby condition variable setting is established. The means is to variably set the waiting condition so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine AX2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine AX2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX1. That is, the waiting condition is satisfied when the length of the period during which the identification information is not dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined period, and the waiting condition variable setting means is satisfied. The waiting condition is variably set so that the waiting condition is less likely to be satisfied when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AX1 or AX2, the gaming machine AX3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is easier to be discriminated by the discriminating means than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AX3, the second gaming state is easier to discriminate by the discriminating means than the first gaming state. This has the effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display an initial screen for notifying the player that the power has been turned on when the power is turned on (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-005505). ).
However, it has been required to make the game situation at the time of turning on the power easier to understand.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is determined based on the power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine and the start of the supply of the power by the power supply means. The notification means capable of executing the notification of the above, the effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and the power supply means to start the supply of the electric power. It has a reproduction means capable of reproducing predetermined audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position of the voice data reproduced by the means, a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the reproduction start position setting means reproduces the reproduction position at the end of the voice data in accordance with the end timing of the notification. It sets the playback start position.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the reproduction means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means, and the execution condition of the predetermined effect. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not is satisfied, and the reproduction means reproduces the audio data based on the determination by the execution determination means that the execution condition is satisfied. Is.
<Effect>
According to the game machine according to the technical idea 1, a predetermined notification is executed based on the power supply means capable of supplying power to the game machine and the start of supply of the power by the power supply means. Based on the possible notification means and the end of the notification executed by the notification means, the effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect and the power supply by the power supply means are started. Based on this, it has a reproduction means capable of reproducing predetermined audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means, and is reproduced by the reproduction means. As the reproduction start position of the voice data, the reproduction start position setting means for setting the reproduction start position according to the mode of the notification by the notification means is provided.
This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the reproduction start position setting means is the reproduction position at the end of the audio data in accordance with the end timing of the notification. The reproduction start position is set so that is reproduced.
This has the effect that the voice can be output more preferably.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the reproduction means repeats the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed. Since it is reproduced, there is an effect that the sound can be output more preferably.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the power supply by the power supply means is started. The reproduction means is provided with an execution determination means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied, and the reproduction means is based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. The audio data is reproduced.
This has the effect of providing a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
114 Display control device (dynamic display means)
203a Special symbol 1 Hold ball storage area (memory means)
203b Special symbol 2 Hold ball storage area (memory means)
Z255, Z275 determination means
Z307, Z315 acquisition means
Z1004 privilege game execution means
Z2106 symbol display means
Z2229 Symbol display area variable means

Claims (4)

A power supply means that can supply power to a gaming machine,
A notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification based on the start of supply of the power by the power supply means, and a notification means.
An effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the end of the notification executed by the notification means, and an effect executing means.
A reproduction means capable of reproducing predetermined audio data based on the start of supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means, and a reproduction means.
In a gaming machine having an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the reproduction means.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reproduction start position setting means for setting a reproduction start position according to the mode of notification by the notification means as a reproduction start position of the voice data reproduced by the reproduction means. The first aspect of the present invention, wherein the reproduction start position setting means sets the reproduction start position so that the reproduction position at the end of the voice data is reproduced in accordance with the end timing of the notification. Gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the reproducing means repeatedly reproduces the audio data at least until the predetermined effect is completed. An execution determining means for determining whether or not the execution condition of the predetermined effect is satisfied based on the start of the supply of the electric power by the electric power supply means is provided.
The reproduction means according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the reproduction means reproduces the voice data based on the determination that the execution condition is satisfied by the execution determination means. The described gaming machine.

Images